[{"content":"2025-01-09 - 13.0.1777.25008 Release Docusnap 14 Docusnap 14 has been released and is now available in the Docusnap download area.\nHighlights Improved stability and fixes for SNMP and Windows inventory processes. Introduction of support for SNMPv3 security protocols. New Features SNMPv3 Inventory Enhanced functionality with updated security protocols to ensure safer and more reliable device collection. Improvements SNMP Inventory Fixed stability issues with scheduled jobs and specific scan targets that previously caused erroneous results. Significantly improved processing speed for large SNMP inventory results. Windows SMB Protocols Standardized display of SMB v2 and v3 as SMB v2/v3 for better technical accuracy. Documentation Concept templates: Optimized supplied concept templates, especially those with table of contents objects. Topology plans: Improved representation of Layer-3 elements and VLAN connections, particularly in systems with multiple network interfaces. Plans (wildcards): Enhanced wildcard functionality for all plans in documentation. Plans (symbols): Standardized device type symbols in topology plans for consistency. Reports: Golden System Report - Hotfix comparisons now based on inventoried KB numbers, improving report accuracy. Reports: Improved display of permissions and system information across various report types. Application Configuration file: Configuration.xml is now generated in the standard XML format. Trashbin cleanup: Enhanced performance for automatic database cleanup within the application. Improved performance when editing concepts and IT manuals. Physical infrastructure: Updated Knowledge Base links for better user guidance. Fixed Issues Inventory\nWindows: Resolved missing SMB protocol detection and inaccurate representations in Windows inventory. Windows AD: Virtualized Windows systems are now reliably recognized. SNMP: Improved support for specific devices and protocols, including NetApp storage and Cisco switches. ADDS: Fixed issues with collecting site object information. Exchange (on-prem): Transport rule descriptions now display fully. Exchange: Resolved file import errors for DSI files and mailbox permission mappings. Linux: Fixed certificate inventory issues on SUSE Linux Enterprise systems. MS-SQL: Persistency issues (tSQLBackupHistory) resolved. SNMP: Addressed conversion errors for inventory of manufacturers such as Barracuda, Canon, and Fujitsu. SNMP: Fixed issues with NetApp systems, TP-Link switches, and Peplink load balancers. SNMP: Resolved SSH timeout issues when using auxiliary tools. SNMP: Addressed VLAN and connection detection errors in physical networks. Reports\nResolved inaccuracies in Golden System Reports affecting update status. Fixed counting errors in license management leading to discrepancies between displayed and actual systems. Improved filtering functionality in IT security reports. Reports with custom fonts can now be generated in PDF format. Corrected issues in various reports, including \u0026ldquo;Docusnap Configuration Report,\u0026rdquo; \u0026ldquo;Share Permissions\u0026rdquo; in IT security, and \u0026ldquo;Unwanted Products\u0026rdquo; in license management. Plans\nFixed object grouping display issues in diagrams. Resolved errors in the representation of Layer-3 elements and VLAN mappings. Corrected display of switch connections and IPsec tunnels between devices. Disabled users in ADDS structure plans are now displayed correctly. Fixed display issues for firewalls (Barracuda, FortiGate, Sophos) and switches (Extreme Switches, MikroTik) in topology plans. Enhanced filtering functionality in topology and network plans. Fixed VLAN plan display issues for stacked Cisco and Netgear switches. Concepts\nImproved performance and resolved errors in the concept editor, particularly for validation and editing of extensive concepts. Fixed missing chapters in table of contents. Placeholder deletion now updates tasks. Resolved chapter display issues in table of contents. Concepts can now be extended after inserting dynamic objects. Fixed issues with inserting blank lines before elements. Hyperlinks are preserved after text deletion. Addressed all reported performance issues in concept creation. Resolved issues with headers, footers, and filtering of data elements. IT Security\nFixed display and filtering issues for permissions of specific users and groups. Resolved erroneous display of domain administrators despite enabled filtering. Application\nResolved display issues when editing system details, especially for manually maintained entries. Tenant-specific permissions now function correctly in user management. Improved criteria for automatic location assignment. Excluded systems are now correctly ignored in license calculations. Fixed Active Directory authentication issues in inventory dialogs. Web Client\nFixed issues with displaying DNS, DHCP, and Microsoft 365 data. Resolved internal server errors when loading specific SNMP OIDs. Miscellaneous\nFixed issues with Exchange on-premises plans and Sophos firewall routing information. Optimized database processing for large data volumes to reduce memory issues. 2024-09-18 - 13.0.1719.24347 Improved Database Creation: When selecting the \u0026ldquo;Use Local Database\u0026rdquo; option, the database is now created with SQL Server 2022 (Version 16.0.4131.2) Exchange 2010: Exchange 2010 installations can now optionally be inventoried with the standalone Discovery-Exchange-Legacy.exe module Authentication: Foreign Security Principals from other domains can now be used for user management, as server users, and for integrated authentication Linux: The option \u0026ldquo;Create RSA-Key\u0026rdquo; has been renamed to \u0026ldquo;Create Key,\u0026rdquo; and the key generation method has been changed to ED25519 CIFS: For systems that do not support the SMB standard share IPC$, the C$ share is now also queried for inventory purposes Discovery.exe: The archiving of inventory results in the file system has been standardized for autonomous inventory modules Security: Security has been enhanced through updates to the used software products Fixed Documentation Connect: Issues with the resolution and translation of Active Directory group members and enum references have been fixed IT Concept: Issues with creating table of contents in documents have been resolved IT Concept: All known errors related to inserting topology diagrams into concepts have been fixed IT Concept: Inserting images no longer causes text displacement Datasheets: The archiving issue caused by inconsistent path names has been resolved through a revision of the path replacement mechanism Inventory ADDS: User password age is now displayed as intended AWS: Issues with inventorying S3 resources have been fixed IGEL: All monitors connected to thin clients are now properly inventoried Oracle: Captured data is now fully displayed in the interface SNMP: Inventory issues causing incomplete representations in plans for HP, Sophos, Brocade, and Unify have been resolved SNMP: Handling of \u0026lsquo;HostDowngradeException\u0026rsquo; now results in a warning instead of an error SNMP: Display errors for unconfigured VLANs with IDs from 3000 on Cisco Catalyst have been fixed SNMP: Add-ons – Issues with sequence checking related to \u0026lsquo;ResponseWait\u0026rsquo; have been resolved SNMP: Problems with displaying switch data for Microsens, Juniper, MikroTik, and D-Link have been fixed SNMP: Issues with MIB import for Konica Minolta printers have been fixed, and the import now completes successfully SNMP: All existing IPv4 addresses from SNMP systems are now fully displayed in the \u0026ldquo;All Systems\u0026rdquo; view Windows: Issues with setting the software version based on the .XML file during software search have been corrected Application Activation: Issues with license activation via software distribution have been fixed DDS: Issues with executing add-ons during Windows inventory via the Docusnap Discovery Service have been resolved Enterprise Search: Problems with displaying additional information included in the search index have been solved IT Security NTFS: Permissions analysis - Issues with incomplete directory reports have been resolved 2024-07-15 - 13.0.1167.24196 Realized Ideas from the Ideas Portal Documentation Concept: Fields for capturing the version creator and backup creator have been integrated in addition to the author. Improved Inventory Windows: More accurate detection of physical and virtual Windows systems in the inventory process. Windows: The search function for software and files has been optimized and now reliably supports a large number of search definitions. Docusnap Web Data captured by add-ons is now displayed in Docusnap Web. Fixed Inventory Backup Exec: Previous inventory issues have been resolved. DFS: Import issues with DFS have been fixed. DFS: Repeated DFS inventories no longer alter existing NTFS data. SNMP: Errors in inventorying devices such as HP, Konica, Cisco, Zebra, Lancom, and Alcatel have been corrected. SNMP: Network information is now fully displayed in the inventory results. Exchange: Issues with inventorying Microsoft Exchange have been resolved. Linux: All communication data is now fully captured. Linux: Inventory issues caused by timeouts have been fixed. Linux: Discovery-Linux and the gensudo.sh configuration file for script inventory have been updated. Mac: Sporadic \u0026ldquo;Bad Interpreter\u0026rdquo; errors have been eliminated. Microsoft 365: Persistence errors have been corrected. Microsoft 365: The error \u0026ldquo;Bulk insert failed into table tM365ExchangeMailboxFolder\u0026rdquo; no longer occurs. Microsoft 365: Conditional policies captured with Entra ID now show correct object resolution. Veeam: All known import errors have been resolved. Application User Management: Issues with name conflicts between local and ADDS users have been fixed. Docusnap Discovery Service: The \u0026ldquo;Last Connection Establishment\u0026rdquo; information is now always displayed correctly. Enterprise Search: All known issues with user search, assets, and Azure elements have been resolved. IT Security CSV Import: The CSV import now considers all share variants. Documentation Report: \u0026ldquo;Backup Analysis - Unsecured Systems\u0026rdquo; now lists each Veeam B\u0026amp;R server only once. Report: \u0026ldquo;Backup Analysis - Backup Status of All Systems\u0026rdquo; now shows the correct inventory date for BackupExec servers. Diagrams: The issue of objects with the status \u0026ldquo;deleted\u0026rdquo; being displayed has been resolved. Concept: Images in RTF fields are now included in the PDF export. Concept: PDF export issues causing memory problems have been fixed. Concept: Default plans now support placeholders. Concept: Hyperlinks in compilations now function correctly. Concept: The concept compilation now reliably considers the required page sizes and orientations. 2024-03-20 - 13.0.737.24080 Fixed Inventory Microsoft 365: The \u0026lsquo;Problems with persisting inventory data\u0026rsquo; error has been fixed. Microsoft Exchange: All known issues causing missing snapshots or persistence errors have now been resolved. Docusnap Update: The occasional issue where the database update did not complete has been eliminated. 2024-03-14 - 13.0.703.24073 New Inventory Standardization of autonomous Discovery Modules - Filename, parameters, and integrated help have been standardized. Microsoft 365: Entra-ID inventory now captures the last login event of users (requires P1 license or better). Documentation New report section \u0026ldquo;Backup Analysis\u0026rdquo; with reports \u0026ldquo;Backup status of all systems\u0026rdquo; and \u0026ldquo;Unsecured systems\u0026rdquo;. New report \u0026ldquo;Services with local users and AD accounts\u0026rdquo; in the \u0026ldquo;Windows Security\u0026rdquo; report section. Improved Inventory Linux: TimeOut settings can now be configured in the advanced options. SNMP: The CSV import function now checks for the correctness of IPv4 addresses. Windows: Improved detection of whether it\u0026rsquo;s a virtual system. The processing speed of the XML Windows import has been significantly increased. Windows systems - the \u0026ldquo;additional scans\u0026rdquo; node now also shows \u0026ldquo;Veeam B\u0026amp;R\u0026rdquo; and \u0026ldquo;DFS\u0026rdquo; installations. Documentation Physics: Optimized display performance. Physics: Improved the display of images in the site plan. Concepts: Improved handling of inserted Connect-Views. Reports on \u0026ldquo;Network devices\u0026rdquo; and \u0026ldquo;Windows .NET Framework\u0026rdquo; have been improved. The network plan now optionally filters out IP hosts and workstations for plans with more than 500 devices. Application The Docusnap server status dialog has been improved and now shows much more information. IT Security NTFS analysis: Improved detection of the correct folder size. Resolution of local groups and filtering out of printer shares have been improved. The \u0026ldquo;Report jobs (csv)\u0026rdquo; feature now also supports DFS folder targets. Fixed Inventory Linux: The installation date of Linux Suse systems is now correctly captured. Microsoft 365: Issues with app creation have been resolved. Microsoft 365: Known inventory problems are now solved. SNMP: Known inventory issues (HP, Profibus, D-Link, Silex) have been resolved. SNMP: VLAN detection for Aruba Switches now works correctly. Windows: Issues with drive designations have been resolved. Windows: Windows IP inventory no longer generates offline systems. Active Directory: The error \u0026ldquo;Object reference not set to an instance of an object\u0026rdquo; has been eliminated. Active Directory: Reported issues with inventory using Discovery-ADDS.exe are resolved. Microsoft Exchange: Issues causing missing snapshots or persistence errors have been fixed. Microsoft 365: MFA authentication settings are now correctly inventoried. Linux: Certificate inventory now works. SNMP: \u0026ldquo;Additional programs Telnet/SSH\u0026rdquo; sequence check is no longer limited to switches. Windows: The dynamic date filter for Windows (AD) now works correctly. DHCP: Import problems with files created by Discovery-DHCP.exe have been eliminated. Veeam B\u0026amp;R: Execution errors (\u0026ldquo;Import failed\u0026rdquo;, \u0026ldquo;unknown error\u0026rdquo;) no longer occur. Veeam B\u0026amp;R: Further reported issues (license check, incorrect execution times) have been resolved. Docusnap Web Docusnap Web: Known performance and display problems have been resolved. Documentation VLAN report: This report now displays all information correctly. Connect: VLAN overviews with switches now output all switches. Diagrams: Insertion of successor objects is now correct. Concepts: Dynamic objects no longer change unintentionally. Topology plan: Display issues (DLINK, Cisco, manually created) have been resolved. Veeam B\u0026amp;R: The output of the \u0026ldquo;VM Backups\u0026rdquo; report now includes files. VMware: The data storage details in the report and data tree are now correct. Connect: Reported issues (AD users, DFS member servers, Azure, VMware) have been resolved. IT Security NTFS analysis: The inventory of DFS folder targets now works correctly. NTFS analysis: The capture of CIFS systems is now complete. 2023-12-14 - 13.0.383.23348 Realized Ideas from the Ideas Portal SNMP discovery: additional programs - Telnet/SSH support for all SNMP types Improved Inventory Microsoft 365 Teams: Channel information now includes members and role assignments DFS: Checked if there were permission issues when capturing SMB permissions of folder targets DFS: Improved consolidation of individual DFS results into a domain-wide view SNMP: Improved validity check for IPv4 addresses in the assistant Documentation Physics: Improved representation of racks in site plans IT Concept: New handling of very large data elements improves stability Fixed Inventory All Modules: Snapshot entries with the same date are no longer created Autonomous Inventory Modules: Standardized parameters such as the help call DFS: Improved automatic detection of DFS servers and fixed known inventory issues Microsoft Exchange: Fixed inventory issues Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication: Fixed inventory problems in the assistant NTFS Analysis: Partially incorrect display of folder sizes corrected Documentation IT Concept: Fixed issue where data elements were sporadically not displayed IT Concept: Solved problems that occurred occasionally during loading and saving Physics: Fixed recognized performance issues and errors in the cabling plan 2023-11-22 - 13.0.307.23331 Realized Ideas from the Ideas Portal Autonomous Inventory Module for Distributed File System (DFS) Docusnap Connect: Automated email dispatch of reports in CSV, Excel, and XML formats. Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication: Report on executed restore jobs. Linux Inventory: Expanded capture of certificates and their properties. New Autonomous Inventory Modules: Standardization with names like \u0026ldquo;Discovery-(Module).exe\u0026rdquo; and consistent parameters for archiving, execution, and logging, such as \u0026ldquo;Discovery-Windows.exe\u0026rdquo;. Distributed File System (DFS) Inventory: Complete capture of all DFS namespace variants, including DFS replication groups and detailed information on configuration, topology, and connections. Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication Inventory: Cross-platform capture of configurations, backup and tape library infrastructures, virtualization platforms with their virtual machines, backup jobs, and their execution status. Usability Improvements: Option to hide non-essential objects in the Docusnap tree view. Improved Active Directory Domain Service: New \u0026ldquo;All Memberships\u0026rdquo; overview for comprehensive representation of direct and indirect memberships of user, group, and computer accounts. DFS Permissions Analysis: Optimization of NTFS analysis for DFS deployments, including detailed reporting. ","excerpt":"\u003ch3 id=\"2025-01-09---130177725008\"\u003e2025-01-09 - 13.0.1777.25008\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003ch4 id=\"release-docusnap-14\"\u003eRelease Docusnap 14\u003c/h4\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap 14 has been released and is now available in the \u003ca href=\"https://www.docusnap.com/support/softwaredownload\"\u003eDocusnap download area\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch4 id=\"highlights\"\u003eHighlights\u003c/h4\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eImproved stability and fixes for SNMP and Windows inventory processes.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntroduction of support for SNMPv3 security protocols.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch4 id=\"new-features\"\u003eNew Features\u003c/h4\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSNMPv3 Inventory\u003c/strong\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEnhanced functionality with updated security protocols to ensure safer and more reliable device collection.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch4 id=\"improvements\"\u003eImprovements\u003c/h4\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSNMP Inventory\u003c/strong\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFixed stability issues with scheduled jobs and specific scan targets that previously caused erroneous results.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSignificantly improved processing speed for large SNMP inventory results.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWindows SMB Protocols\u003c/strong\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStandardized display of SMB v2 and v3 as SMB v2/v3 for better technical accuracy.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDocumentation\u003c/strong\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConcept templates: Optimized supplied concept templates, especially those with table of contents objects.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTopology plans: Improved representation of Layer-3 elements and VLAN connections, particularly in systems with multiple network interfaces.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlans (wildcards): Enhanced wildcard functionality for all plans in documentation.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlans (symbols): Standardized device type symbols in topology plans for consistency.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReports: Golden System Report - Hotfix comparisons now based on inventoried KB numbers, improving report accuracy.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReports: Improved display of permissions and system information across various report types.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eApplication\u003c/strong\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConfiguration file: Configuration.xml is now generated in the standard XML format.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTrashbin cleanup: Enhanced performance for automatic database cleanup within the application.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eImproved performance when editing concepts and IT manuals.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhysical infrastructure: Updated Knowledge Base links for better user guidance.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch4 id=\"fixed-issues\"\u003eFixed Issues\u003c/h4\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInventory\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/release-notes/changelog/","title":"Changelog"},{"content":"The following steps are always part of the inventory wizard.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe following steps are always part of the inventory wizard.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/","title":"Basic Steps"},{"content":"A new Azure App can be created either in the Management under Inventory or in the course of the inventory wizard by clicking on the button Register New App.\nWith the Azure CLI, Azure Apps can be created, edited, reviewed or deleted without having to open the Azure Administration for the changes. A device code is generated during the respective dialog. Then, authentication to Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) is done using a browser where the device code can be entered or pasted directly from the clipboard. A user with the Global Administrator role must be used to log in. After logging in, only the Microsoft Azure CLI needs to be confirmed to execute the desired command. To ensure the execution of the Azure App, it must be ensured that the endpoint https://docusnap365.com is reachable.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eA new Azure App can be created either in the Management under \u003cem\u003eInventory\u003c/em\u003e or in the course of the inventory wizard by clicking on the button \u003cem\u003eRegister New App\u003c/em\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith the Azure CLI, Azure Apps can be created, edited, reviewed or deleted without having to open the Azure Administration for the changes. A device code is generated during the respective dialog. Then, authentication to Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) is done using a browser where the device code can be entered or pasted directly from the clipboard. A user with the Global Administrator role must be used to log in. After logging in, only the Microsoft Azure CLI needs to be confirmed to execute the desired command. To ensure the execution of the Azure App, it must be ensured that the endpoint \u003ca href=\"https://docusnap365.com\"\u003ehttps://docusnap365.com\u003c/a\u003e is reachable.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/azure-apps-manage/","title":"Manage Azure Apps"},{"content":"Docusnap 13 captivates through its ideal mixture of many documentation and analysis components. Its focus lies on features that meet the everyday needs of information technology and relieves employees from routine jobs.\nDocusnap Features Automated, agent-free network inventory and IT documentation\nClient / Server Operating Systems Comprehensive IT documentation and inventory of all hardware and software\nWith Docusnap, you can inventory your workstations and server systems and create an all-encompassing documentation. Besides information on the device hardware, the operating system in use, the network settings, local users and groups, printers and file shares, Docusnap also collects information on installed software products.\nMicrosoft Windows Linux Mac OS X Hardware and Software Hardware and Software Hardware and Software Configuration Server Configuration Configuration Security Settings Apache, Samba, NFS, … Settings Application Servers Efficient documentation of business-critical applications\nWith Docusnap, you can quickly and easily inventory the Microsoft Exchange e-mail and groupware system, the Microsoft SharePoint portal solution, and the business-critical Microsoft SQL Server and Oracle database applications and document them in a comprehensive manner. For all application servers, extensive reports and overview plans can be produced.\nMicrosoft Exchange Server Microsoft SharePoint Databases Mailboxes and Public Folders Farm Information Databases, Users Exchange Permissions Web Applications Tables, Views, Fields Server Configuration Permissions Stored Procedures Infrastructure Inventory and documentation of entire IT networks\nEvery IT documentation is based on the inventory of network services such as DNS, DHCP, DFS, and ADS (Active Directory Services). Using SNMP, it is possible to scan further network devices, for instance switches, routers, or printers, and even firewalls. By performing inventory scans of virtualization solutions based on Microsoft Hyper-V, VMware ESX, or vSphere and Citrix XenCenter, you can include these business-critical applications into your documentation. The collection of data on the network infrastructure is rounded off by inventorying and documenting Veritas Backup Exec installations and Veeam.\nActive Directory Services DNS, DHCP and DFS SNMP Locations, Domain Structures Scopes, Active Leases SNMP V1/V2/V3 Logical ADS Structure DHCP Maps Layer 2 Topology Group Policies Forward Zones, DNS Records Third-party MIBs Internet Information Services Virtualization Backup Server Settings VMware Data Backups Web Pages Hyper-V Veeam Applications XenCenter Backup Exec IT Analysis Efficient analysis of permissions and licenses\nDocusnap allows you to map your entire software license management. You can not only retrieve data on the installed software products, but also store and map purchased software licenses and maintenance agreement information. Docusnap analyzes this information and thus provides a comprehensive survey of the current licensing situation.\nDocusnap allows you to inventory and document permissions in Windows file systems, Microsoft Exchange, and SharePoint. Using the Docusnap Permission Analysis module, these permissions can be analyzed and evaluated. For this purpose, the software features tabular and graphical evaluations as well as a variety of reports.\nLicense Management Permission Analysis Automatic License Scan SharePoint Permissions Contract Assignment Exchange Permissions Comparison of Actual / Expected Data File System Permissions Customization and Ease of Use Tailor and extend Docusnap to suit your requirements\nIntegrate your corporate design into Docusnap. For specific IT documentation requirements, Docusnap allows you to extend the CMDB (Configuration Management Database) by adding custom classes or objects. Adapt existing reports and create new ones in the Report Designer. The multi-tenant capability and an integrated permissions system round off the Docusnap software.\nIntuitive User Interface Customizing Design Multi-tenant Capability Additional Data Structures Integrated Designer Multi-language Capability Object Classes User-defined Inventory Definition Multi-user Capability Data Entry Forms Customizing ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap 13 captivates through its ideal mixture of many documentation and analysis components. Its focus lies on features that meet the everyday needs of information technology and relieves employees from routine jobs.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"docusnap-features\"\u003eDocusnap Features\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAutomated, agent-free network inventory and IT documentation\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"client--server-operating-systems\"\u003eClient / Server Operating Systems\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eComprehensive IT documentation and inventory of all hardware and software\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith Docusnap, you can inventory your workstations and server systems and create an all-encompassing documentation. Besides information on the device hardware, the operating system in use, the network settings, local users and groups, printers and file shares, Docusnap also collects information on installed software products.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/about-docusnap/","title":"About Docusnap"},{"content":"Sites in Docusnap Docusnap allows to model the site hierarchy of a company and to assign already inventoried systems to one of these sites. In addition to this manual site assignment of systems, several functions are available to perform automatic site assignment during inventory. These functions are, at least partially, already available in older Docusnap versions and have been updated with the release of Docusnap 12.\nUsecase - example of a possible requirement\nAn current list of all systems per site is required. The difficulty is that some of these systems have been passed on to other sites and these site changes are not always up to date or have not been documented in a way that can be evaluated. With Docusnap, during the regular inventory of the systems, their current site is also determined and this site assignment is depicted in the user interface in a way that can be easily evaluated.\nDocusnap Migration - Systems with Site Assignment The assignment of a system is displayed in the data entry screen of the respective system in the Site section. The current site assignment is displayed and for systems with assigned site the new option Ignore Automatic Site Assignment is also active. This option ensures that the existing site assignment is retained and is automatically set for each migrated system with site assignment.\nApplication wide option Enable Automatic Site Assignment This option, introduced in Docusnap 12, is located in the Options dialog \u0026gt; Inventory \u0026gt; General and controls application wide whether existing assignment rules are applied for automatic site assignment. Initially, this setting is disabled. If the option is enabled, automatic site assignment is active for all companies.\nManagement \u0026gt; Inventory \u0026gt; System Assignment Criteria Wizard This wizard creates company-specific assignment criteria which check for one or more assignment criteria. Several assignment criteria are linked with AND or with AND/OR operators. An explicit OR is not available. These assignments are also applied when the inventory is imported by script. Note: If more than one assignment criterion applies to a system, there is no automatic site assignment. A corresponding error message is created in the logging.\nOverview of Available Assignment Criteria:\nDomain ADDS Container Network System Type System Name System Name Length Example of a definition with two assignment criteria:\nSystems whose hostname starts with \u0026ldquo;DOSPLO\u0026rdquo;. AND/OR with a computer account in the OU: \u0026ldquo;OU=Productive,OU=Computers,OU=London,OU=DOCUSNAPSPORTS,DC=DOCUSNAPSPORTS,DC=COM\u0026rdquo; Explanation: This rule applies to all systems, regardless of their system name, whose computer account is in this OU and to all systems within this domain whose name begins with \u0026ldquo;DOSPLO\u0026rdquo;. Because the assignment criteria were linked with AND/OR, one or both criteria may apply in this example.\nExample of an assignment with the network assignment criteria:\nSystems located in the network 192.168.102.0/24 AND/OR systems located in the network 192.168.200.0/24 ![Docusnap Create Site Assignment Criterias for Networks](docusnap-sites-create-assignment -criteria-network.png \u0026ldquo;Docusnap Create Site Assignment Criterias for Networks\u0026rdquo;)\nExplanation: If each site has unique IPv4 subnets, this assignment criteria can be used to easily and unambiguously perform automatic site assignment.\nInventar \u0026gt; Docusnap Discovery Service Konfiguration For inventory, Docusnap uses the Docusnap Discovery Service (DDS). In IT organizations with multiple sites and/or certain security constraints (e.g., DMZ), additional DDS installations enable all existing systems to be covered in a performant and complete manner. If additional discovery services are created using the \u0026quot; Docusnap Discovery Service Configuration\u0026quot; wizard, this service can be associated with a site of this company. If systems are then inventoried with this DDS, they are automatically assigned to the linked site.\nThis function is an alternative to system assignment with assignment criteria. If a DDS with a linked site is used for the inventory and a system assignment criterion applies to one of the inventoried systems, the site of the system assignment criteria is assigned. For systems that do not match the system assignment criteria, the site of the DDS is assigned.\nInventory \u0026gt; Other Wizards \u0026gt; System Assignment Wizard This wizard is used to assign existing assignment criteria to a site of a company. Only one assignment can be made for each site. In addition, this wizard provides a good overview of the assignments made so far. In the upper area, all existing sites are displayed with assignment criteria and DDS assignment. The assignment dialog is used to assign assignment criteria to a site and, if required, to open the System Assignment Criteria wizard to create new assignment criteria. All systems that have already been assigned to the selected site are displayed in the lower area. Systems that have not yet been assigned are displayed at each site. The check box can be used to assign these systems to the selected site. Existing assignments can also be deleted in this dialog.\nPhysical Infrastructure - System Assignments The module Physical Infrastructure allows all components of a site, such as racks, cables, systems, switches, etc., as well as their connections (e.g. cabling) to be mapped in Docusnap. In this example, a rack was created for the London site and three servers were installed. Using the System Assignment function, all existing systems are listed and can be linked to the selected system image and thus to this site via a checkbox. Here the system DOSPSP01 was linked with a system image in the rack and assigned to the site London. If a system assignment is made in this module, the option \u0026ldquo;Ignore Automatic Site Assignment\u0026rdquo; is automatically activated for the corresponding system. This means that the automatic site assignment is no longer applied to this system. Thus, this system has been permanently assigned to this site via the system assignment in the physical infrastructure.\nManual Site Assignment - Mass Editing With Docusnap it is possible to manually change the site assignment of more than one system at a time. In this example, the Windows server list was filtered to systems and selected by checkbox. Using the dialog Edit Site Assignment these systems get their new site with Assign site to selected systems. If the option Insert site assignment for all selected systems is also set, this assignment cannot be overwritten by automatic assignments.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch3 id=\"sites-in-docusnap\"\u003eSites in Docusnap\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap allows to model the site hierarchy of a company and to assign already inventoried systems to one of these sites. In addition to this manual site assignment of systems, several functions are available to perform automatic site assignment during inventory. These functions are, at least partially, already available in older Docusnap versions and have been updated with the release of Docusnap 12.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsecase - example of a possible requirement\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/manage-sites/assignment/","title":"Assign Systems to a Site"},{"content":"This chapter describes what needs to be prepared in the AWS Identity and Access Management to be able to perform an inventory with Docusnap.\nWithin the Inventory Wizard, the following information is required:\nDisplay Name Access Key ID Secret Access Key Region Please make sure to use a sufficiently authorized user. This user must be allowed to make the following changes:\nCreate policies Creating a user and assigning the created guidelines The Amazon Web Services are regionally bound. If you use these services in different regions, you must ensure that a separate user and policies are created for each region. Create policy This paragraph uses EC2 as an example to describe how to create a dedicated policy for inventorying AWS in Docusnap. This procedure must then be carried out for the other AWS core areas (RDS, S3, IAM, Batch, Lambda and SQS).\nOpen the services and select IAM.\nAfterwards, a new policy can be created under Policies by clicking the Create Policy button.\nThe Service, Actions and Resources areas are then defined one after the other using the visual editor.\nService With Choose a Service, you then search for the service for which you want to create the policy, in this case EC2. Actions The actions permitted in EC2 are set at Access Level List and Read. Resources Here it is recommended to authorize the actions via All resources of the services. Request conditions This item is optional and is not required for a successful inventory. Check policy\nAssign a unique name for the created policy (e.g. Docusnap_EC2_Inventory) and an optional description. The configuration is completed via Create policy.\nThe previously described steps for creating the policy using the EC2 service as an example must now be repeated for the other services that are to be inventoried with Docusnap.\nConfigure User The previously created policies are now assigned to a user. The next step is to select the User item in Services - IAM.\nImportant: The arrangement of the displayed data in the Docusnap tree structure is based on the inventorying user, this has the region binding described at the beginning as background. Please select the relevant usernames for different regions here in order to assign them unambiguously.\nCreate User Use Add user to create a new user. A user name and AWS access type are required.\nAs AWS access type select Programmatic access, open the next step via the button Next: Permissions.\nDefine authorizations Here you have two different possibilities to authorize your user for inventory.\nAdd user to group This option can be selected if you want to assign the created policies to a group. However, it is advisable to always carry out the inventory with the same user.\nAttach existing policies directly This option is described in this chapter to bind the pre-created policies directly to a user.\nSelect Add existing policies directly and navigate to the Filter Policies option and set the filter to Customer Managed. Now select the created policies and add them to this user.\nThe information entered can then be checked again. Click the Create User button to create the user.\nReceive User Keys for Inventory Important: The final data created (user, access key ID and secret access key) are required for the inventory in Docusnap and can be downloaded as CSV. These can only be viewed once after configuration!\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThis chapter describes what needs to be prepared in the \u003cem\u003eAWS Identity and Access Management\u003c/em\u003e to be able to perform an inventory with Docusnap.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWithin the Inventory Wizard, the following information is required:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDisplay Name\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAccess Key ID\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSecret Access Key\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRegion\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlease make sure to use a sufficiently authorized user. This user must be allowed to make the following changes:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCreate policies\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCreating a user and assigning the created guidelines\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-warning\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    The Amazon Web Services are regionally bound. If you use these services in different regions, you must ensure that a separate user and policies are created for each region.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"create-policy\"\u003eCreate policy\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis paragraph uses EC2 as an example to describe how to create a dedicated policy for inventorying AWS in Docusnap. This procedure must then be carried out for the other AWS core areas (RDS, S3, IAM, Batch, Lambda and SQS).\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/amazon-web-services/aws-environment/","title":"AWS Environment"},{"content":"Until now, a separate Azure app had to be created for each of these cloud technologies for discovery with Docusnap because each cloud technology has has specific requirements. As a result, creation, use, and troubleshooting could be complex. The available new Azure app development has claims to massively improve usability, security, adaptation and transparency.\nOperation One app for all, one app is now sufficient for the discovery of all Microsoft cloud technologies supported by Docusnap. Creation of the app in the respective discovery module and in Azure app management has been greatly simplified Existing apps can be easily updated via Azure App Management and are then usable for all cloud technologies Scheduled cloud inventories still work, it is not mandatory to update jobs manually Security With the use of Microsoft Device Authentication and Azure CLI, security during app creation has been increased The minimum number of API read permissions required for full discovery has been reduced by 75% Without knowing security-critical data of the Azure app used, the Docusnap user can now inventory easily The name of the Azure app is defined by the user when it is created, which facilitates later identification in Azure Adaptation Task sharing within an organization, app creation can optionally be done outside of Docusnap and then added to the application Unwanted Azure app permissions can be removed in Azure (with restrictions in the discovery result) Transparency The new connection test already checks for valid keys, anonymization settings and missing API read permissions before execution The app check in the management interface provides detailed information about functionality, validities and the set API permissions ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eUntil now, a separate Azure app had to be created for each of these cloud technologies for discovery with Docusnap because each cloud technology has has specific requirements. As a result, creation, use, and troubleshooting could be complex. The available new Azure app development has claims to massively improve usability, security, adaptation and transparency.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"operation\"\u003eOperation\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne app for all, one app is now sufficient for the discovery of all Microsoft cloud technologies supported by Docusnap.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCreation of the app in the respective discovery module and in Azure app management has been greatly simplified\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExisting apps can be easily updated via Azure App Management and are then usable for all cloud technologies\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eScheduled cloud inventories still work, it is not mandatory to update jobs manually\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"security\"\u003eSecurity\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWith the use of Microsoft Device Authentication and Azure CLI, security during app creation has been increased\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe minimum number of API read permissions required for full discovery has been reduced by 75%\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWithout knowing security-critical data of the Azure app used, the Docusnap user can now inventory easily\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe name of the Azure app is defined by the user when it is created, which facilitates later identification in Azure\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"adaptation\"\u003eAdaptation\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTask sharing within an organization, app creation can optionally be done outside of Docusnap and then added to the application\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUnwanted Azure app permissions can be removed in Azure (with restrictions in the discovery result)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"transparency\"\u003eTransparency\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe new connection test already checks for valid keys, anonymization settings and missing API read permissions before execution\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe app check in the management interface provides detailed information about functionality, validities and the set API permissions\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/","title":"Azure Apps"},{"content":"A wizard-based user interface helps you with creating the documentation. The wizard consists of a series of individual steps which vary depending on the type of document you selected. The following figure illustrates the basic steps used by each of the documentation wizards.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eA wizard-based user interface helps you with creating the documentation. The wizard consists of a series of individual steps which vary depending on the type of document you selected. The following figure illustrates the basic steps used by each of the documentation wizards.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/basic-steps/docusnap-documentation-graph.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Documentation-Graph\" title=\"Docusnap-Documentation-Graph\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/basic-steps/","title":"Basic Steps"},{"content":"You can adjust the tree structure in the Metaobjects tab in the Docusnap Management in the Customizing area. This tab provides all settings required to create user-defined structures.\nIn Docusnap, five different hierarchical structures are available that can be used to organize the data that has been recorded.\nHierarchy Inventory All data retrieved by a scan or entered manually. Data Import This hierarchy determines the structure for importing data from other databases. License Management Represents the hierarchy for the License Management module. IT Security Hierarchy for the IT Security module. Documentation Structure for the Documentation view. Database import and export only include data that is also contained in the data import tree. User-defined tables whose data are to be imported or exported must therefore also be added in the import tree. For this purpose, a meta-object for the table below the respective object is created. For example, the respective metaobjects for tables with a foreign key on the tAccounts table are defined under the Account node in the import tree. For each meta object, a unique primary key is stored at runtime that allows its identification. Each object without a primary key (such as captions) will inherit the primary key of its parent Data-type meta object.\nIn simple words, each child level is filtered on a value from its parent level. Thus, the domain level is filtered on the value of the AccountID column, which represents a unique value at the company level.\nYou can extend all hierarchies. Certain properties and settings apply to all meta object types. They will be explained below. The specific properties of the various object types (Captions, Data, Reports, Links, Output, Diagram) will covered in separate subsections.\nGeneral Settings for Metaobjects Property Description Object Name This field contains the name of the object. The object name is composed of a prefix + its origin, i.e. defined by the software manufacturer (\u0026quot;D\u0026quot;) or by the customer (\u0026quot;U\u0026quot;) + the object name. The prefix indicates in which tree hierarchy this meta object is located. The following prefixes are available:\n- Inventory (EXP)\n- Data Import (IMP)\n- Licenses (LIC)\n- IT Security (RIG)\n- Documentation (DOC) Example: A new object for a caption (such as Service Level Agreement) in the inventory explorer would have the following name: EXP_U_SLA Category This field indicates the object category or type (Caption, Data, Report, Linked Object, Output or Diagram). German Text / English Text The display name of the object in English or German, respectively (only visible for captions in the tree) Priority If you create multiple meta objects at the same level, their order is not alphabetic, but determined by the number in this field. Thus, the Server meta object under a domain, for example, has a higher number than the Workstations meta object. Alignment This field indicates how the results from the list in the right Docusnap pane will be aligned. Object Type ID Unique ID of each meta object. Docusnap assigns these IDs automatically. By default, all IDs below 1,000,000 are reserved for system definitions. Default Icon Defines the icon that is displayed next to the object in the tree. Preview Icon Defines the icon to be used for the creation of diagrams that illustrate relations. If objects are created via customizing, it is recommended to also use icons with the size 100x100 px, so that all icons have a uniform size. Document Path Using this property, you can link external documents, such as Word or HTML files, with this meta object. When you select an object, Docusnap automatically checks whether documents exist in this path. If documents are found, they will be displayed on the separate Documents tab of the Docusnap Data pane.\nThe path entered for this property is always relative to the documentation directory. In order to make paths flexible, you can use variables when specifying the path. The following variables are available:\n%Account%: Company name\n%Domain%: Domain name\n%Object%: Object name\n%ParentObject%: Object name of the parent node\nDocusnap will automatically append \u0026ldquo;_EN.html\u0026rdquo; or \u0026ldquo;_DE.html\u0026rdquo; to the file names.\nExample:\nAssuming your documentation directory is \u0026ldquo;c:\\Documentation\u0026rdquo; and you enter %Account%%Domain%\\Datasheets\\Workstations%Object%%Object% in this field, the resulting file name will be: c:\\Documentation\\Docusnap AG\\test.local\\Datasheets\\Workstations\\Notebook1\\Notebook1_en.html Namespace When creating new nodes, a namespace can be entered in the combo box or an existing namespace can be selected. The namespace can be used to define which nodes should be included in the export of user-defined nodes. If a namespace has been set for a node, only this namespace can be selected for the subordinate nodes. This restriction is necessary to ensure that the tree in the exported customizing is complete. If the namespace has been changed for a node, all subordinate nodes will also be assigned to this namespace. Show Without Subnodes Objects of this meta object type will even be displayed if they do not have any child nodes. By default, Docusnap hides objects without child nodes, i.e. this checkbox is disabled. Enabling this checkbox also has a performance increasing effect, because Docusnap will not have to check whether there are subnodes or not. Do Not Compare The Docusnap data comparison will ignore objects for which this checkbox is enabled. Objects at levels below this one will neither be compared. Report Title When you generate/execute a report, the first object that is higher in the hierarchy and for which this checkbox is enabled, will be used as the report subtitle. Static Object This option enables the extensions (comments, passwords, etc.) for this meta object.\nIf entries are created in the tree for a user-defined object, they can only be deleted if the Static Object option has been activated. If the alignment is set to Vertical, make sure that no more than one record is returned for each level. Otherwise, the data output will fail.\nFor a vertical alignment, Docusnap will ignore the default icon that has been specified. In this case, specify the icon to be used for each individual field.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eYou can adjust the tree structure in the Metaobjects tab in the Docusnap Management in the Customizing area. This tab provides all settings required to create user-defined structures.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/basics/docusnap-tools-manage-metaobjects.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Tools-Manage-Metaobjects\" title=\"Docusnap-Tools-Manage-Metaobjects\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn Docusnap, five different hierarchical structures are available that can be used to organize the data that has been recorded.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003eHierarchy\u003c/th\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003e\u003c/th\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInventory\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eAll data retrieved by a scan or entered manually.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eData Import\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eThis hierarchy determines the structure for importing data from other databases.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLicense Management\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eRepresents the hierarchy for the License Management module.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIT Security\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eHierarchy for the IT Security module.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDocumentation\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eStructure for the Documentation view.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/tbody\u003e\n\u003c/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-success\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    Database import and export only include data that is also contained in the data import tree. User-defined tables whose data are to be imported or exported must therefore also be added in the import tree. For this purpose, a meta-object for the table below the respective object is created. For example, the respective metaobjects for tables with a foreign key on the tAccounts table are defined under the Account node in the import tree.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor each meta object, a unique primary key is stored at runtime that allows its identification. Each object without a primary key (such as captions) will inherit the primary key of its parent Data-type meta object.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/basics/","title":"Basics"},{"content":"All information stored in the database can be output in reports, filtered and sorted as required.\nFor each report, additional information can be provided on a cover page, in a header and/or a footer. For each company, you can design a custom cover page and an individual header and footer. The styles used for the report can also be created centrally for all companies. However, you can also customize them at the company level.\nThe predefined reports are stored in the program directory when Docusnap is installed. User-adapted or newly created reports are stored in the report repository. For each report can be defined, if always the latest report, the customer report or the system report should be used. Subsequently, the report is generated according to the settings either from the program directory or the local settings folder or from the team setting folder (Report Repository).\nTo generate/execute a report, click it in the tree view. The data is displayed on the Reports tab of the main window. Depending on the settings, the report consists of the header and footer, the cover page and the actual report content. The report format is controlled by styles. The content of the report will be retrieved from the database. You can determine the position of the report in the tree structure. In addition, you can specify the language for the report and its properties, such as author or description.\nAfter the report has been executed, it can be printed or exported to any file format desired (docx, pdf, html, odt, etc.).\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eAll information stored in the database can be output in reports, filtered and sorted as required.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor each report, additional information can be provided on a cover page, in a header and/or a footer. For each company, you can design a custom cover page and an individual header and footer. The styles used for the report can also be created centrally for all companies. However, you can also customize them at the company level.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/basics/","title":"Basics"},{"content":"The framework for the business structures is located in the hierarchy Documentation. An additional editor is provided to create the documentation framework.\nBusiness structures consist of the following components:\nFramework A framework is a self-contained unit for a documentation. The name of the framework is on the top level. Within the framework, all necessary views, levels, elements, structural elements, groups and properties are linked to one another.\nA framework can have multiple views. In addition, the entire framework can be exported and reused in another database.\nViews Using views it is possible to create different views on the same data within a framework. By creating multiple views it is possible to look at the same data from different angles and bring them into context with each other. Depending on whether data is to be displayed according to functional or technical aspects, for example.\nLevels Levels provide a visually coherent representation of elements. Within a framework a once created level with all associated elements can be used in different views. Structural elements, elements and groups can be assigned to a level.\nStructural Elements Structural elements can be used to create additional sub-levels in each level. These serve above all the better structuring of elements.\nElements Elements are always assigned to a certain level or structural element. In principle, the used elements are always objects from the inventory tree of Docusnap.\nGruppen By using groups several elements can be combined into optical or logical units. This also serves for better visualization and in certain scenarios also the technical correctness of the representation.\nProperties Different properties can be stored for elements to describe them further or to document features. Properties can be defined at will, eg \u0026ldquo;downtime\u0026rdquo; for a server. They are always assigned to the layers or structural elements and are thus assigned to all the elements assigned to them.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe framework for the business structures is located in the hierarchy \u003cem\u003eDocumentation.\u003c/em\u003e An additional editor is provided to create the documentation framework.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBusiness structures consist of the following components:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"framework\"\u003eFramework\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA framework is a self-contained unit for a documentation. The name of the framework is on the top level. Within the framework, all necessary views, levels, elements, structural elements, groups and properties are linked to one another.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA framework can have multiple views. In addition, the entire framework can be exported and reused in another database.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/business-structures/basics/","title":"Basics"},{"content":"Comments can be used to store additional information about individual objects. You can, for example, store the current configuration file for a firewall (SNMP device). Comments can also be shown on datasheets and in reports.\nClick the New button to add a comment for the selected object. The Title and Comment Type fields are mandatory and must be filled in. The Show in Reports list box allows you to specify for each comment whether it will be shown in reports, and if so, whether it will be displayed at the beginning or at the end of the report. Click the Save button to add the comment to the list.\nTo edit a saved comment, select it. Its comment will be displayed. There, you can edit the comment. Click the button to apply the changes. To delete a comment, click the button.\nYou can also add attachments to an Additional Information. The Title field is mandatory. The file name and the size of the selected file will appear in the File and Size fields. These fields are read-only. The Description field is optional.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eComments can be used to store additional information about individual objects. You can, for example, store the current configuration file for a firewall (SNMP device). Comments can also be shown on datasheets and in reports.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button to add a comment for the selected object. The Title and \u003cem\u003eComment Type\u003c/em\u003e fields are mandatory and must be filled in. The \u003cem\u003eShow in Reports\u003c/em\u003e list box allows you to specify for each comment whether it will be shown in reports, and if so, whether it will be displayed at the beginning or at the end of the report. Click the \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e button to add the comment to the list.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/comments/","title":"Comments"},{"content":"If the License Management wizard is started by clicking on the New button a company must be selected for which the licensing should be created. When the wizard was opened with the Software Relevant for Licensing dialog, no company needs to be chosen because the company was already defined in the dialog.\nSince all evaluations in the License Management module are performed at the company level, the selection determines which data will be available in the wizard.\nIn addition to the company, sites can be selected for which the evaluation of the software product can be generated. On site level, only systems that have been assigned to this site are considered for the evaluation. In the next wizard steps, systems are only displayed in the selection lists, if they have been assigned to one of the selected sites.\nIf no site is selected, all systems of the selected company are listed and no site-related evaluation is made available for this software product.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIf the \u003cem\u003eLicense Management\u003c/em\u003e wizard is started by clicking on the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button a company must be selected for which the licensing should be created. When the wizard was opened with the \u003cem\u003eSoftware Relevant for Licensing\u003c/em\u003e dialog, no company needs to be chosen because the company was already defined in the dialog.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSince all evaluations in the License Management module are performed at the company level, the selection determines which data will be available in the wizard.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/company/","title":"Company"},{"content":"A documentation will always be created for the data of a specific company. Therefore, you need to select the company here. The drop-down list lets you select one of the existing companies.\nThe documentation path has been specified in the Options - Documentation. The documents will be stored in this path. The Alternative Documentation Path option allows you to select a different path for the current documentation. This path will be used exclusively for the documents created by running this wizard. This setting does not change the documentation path you have set in the Configuration dialog. If you want the documents to be created at a later time by using the Docusnap Server and the documentation path has been changed, make sure that the path exists on the executing system and that the Docusnap Server has the necessary permissions.\nThe documentation can be created in English or in German. You can even create a German documentation if the Docusnap user interface has been set to English.\nIf desired, you can set the names of the company and of the author to appear on the document. If the Include Author Information in Documentation checkbox is checked, the same or a different company can be selected as the authoring company. After you have selected a company, the table displays the names of all people who were created as contacts in this company. Enabling the checkbox for a contact sets the name of this contact as author in the document.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eA documentation will always be created for the data of a specific company. Therefore, you need to select the company here. The drop-down list lets you select one of the existing companies.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe documentation path has been specified in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/options/\" title=\"Options - Documentation\"\u003eOptions - Documentation\u003c/a\u003e. The documents will be stored in this path. The \u003cem\u003eAlternative Documentation Path\u003c/em\u003e option allows you to select a different path for the current documentation. This path will be used exclusively for the documents created by running this wizard. This setting does not change the documentation path you have set in the Configuration dialog. If you want the documents to be created at a later time by using the Docusnap Server and the documentation path has been changed, make sure that the path exists on the executing system and that the Docusnap Server has the necessary permissions.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/basic-steps/company-selection/","title":"Company Selection"},{"content":"When you start the Docusnap inventory wizard, the first step is to select a company to which the results of the inventory scan will be assigned. If you purchased a Docusnap multi-license (capable of supporting multiple companies), you can create a new company or select an existing company in this step.\nClick on the button to activate the data entry screen for creating a new company. After you have entered the name in the text field, you can accept your entry by clicking the Save button or discard your changes by clicking the Cancel button.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWhen you start the Docusnap inventory wizard, the first step is to select a company to which the results of the inventory scan will be assigned. If you purchased a Docusnap multi-license (capable of supporting multiple companies), you can create a new company or select an existing company in this step.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/company-selection/docusnap-inventory-company-selection.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Company Selection\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Company Selection\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick on the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/company-selection/docusnap-inventory-company-selection-new-icon.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Company Selection New Icon\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Company Selection New Icon\"\u003e button to activate the data entry screen for creating a new company. After you have entered the name in the text field, you can accept your entry by clicking the \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e button or discard your changes by clicking the \u003cem\u003eCancel\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/company-selection/","title":"Company Selectetion"},{"content":"Using the Compare Data feature, you can compare system configurations at various points in time.\nMultiple snapshots can be compared with each other. The differences found by the comparison will be shown in a report. You can only open the Compare Data dialog after selecting a node in the tree view.\nTo open the dialog, click the Compare button in the action bar.\nThe Start Point indicates the node where the comparison will begin.\nA tree can have many levels. In order to compare only a certain number of levels, you can specify a limit value in the Levels field. To compare all levels, tick the Compare all Levels checkbox. If you want to restrict the comparison to the differences, enable the Show only Differences checkbox. The captions will, however, always be shown in order to clarify the structure.\nThe changes will be highlighted in color according to the following pattern:\nChanged red New green Deleted blue Unchanged black If the Show only Differences option has not been checked, the final report will include all data (even the unchanged ones).\nBy checking the checkbox Remove structural elements without content captions of areas, where no differences were identified, are removed from the report. As a result, the number of pages of the report can be reduced.\nThe available snapshots for the selected nodes are displayed in two lists. Docusnap always displays the snapshots that are located at the same level as the selected node or below it. If you select a node for which no corresponding snapshots exist, Docusnap will provide the snapshots that are located above that node for comparison.\nIn order to obtain relevant results, you should only compare snapshots resulting from scans of the same systems. When you click the Compare button, the snapshots will be compared and the results will be shown in a report. To cancel a running comparison, click the Cancel button. To close the dialog, click the Close button.\nThe report can be exported vie the button. For the export, several file formats are available. You can select the desired format by clicking the Export button. When you click a format, a dialog appears where you can specify the range of report pages to be exported. Click the plus sign to expand the settings dialog. Then, you can select format-specific settings. If you want the file to open automatically after it has been saved, enable the Open After Export checkbox.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eUsing the \u003cem\u003eCompare Data\u003c/em\u003e feature, you can compare system configurations at various points in time.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMultiple snapshots can be compared with each other. The differences found by the comparison will be shown in a report. You can only open the \u003cem\u003eCompare Data\u003c/em\u003e dialog after selecting a node in the tree view.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo open the dialog, click the \u003cem\u003eCompare\u003c/em\u003e button in the action bar.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/comparison/docusnap-data-explorer-compare.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Data Explorer Compare\" title=\"Docusnap Data Explorer Compare\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/comparison/","title":"Comparison"},{"content":"For each of the components, you can specify a name in the* (Name)* field of the Properties window. This name is required to access the value of this component later.\nLabel The label is used to describe another control. For example, you can specify which values have to be entered into a text box.\nText Box Users can enter any desired text in a text box. To later reference the text entered into the text box, use (Name).Text.\nGroup You can use group controls to organize other components in a clearly arranged form layout. From a functional point of view, there is no difference between grouped components and components that are arranged directly on the main screen. Use the Text property to specify the text to be displayed as the group title.\nButton For each form, you must add at least one button whose Dialog Result property has a value other than None or Cancel. The OK or Yes dialog results are best suited to apply the values from the form to the report.\nCheckbox To enable the input of Boolean values, add checkboxes. If the checkmark is set, the value of the component is True, if the checkbox is empty, the value of the component is False. The Checked property defines whether the checkmark will be set by default or not. To later reference the status of the checkbox, use (Name).checked.\nRadio Button Use radio buttons if you want to provide a set of options excluding each other (i.e. only one option may be selected at a time). If you want to add multiple radio button sets, either arrange them in group boxes or panels. For each set of radio buttons, one radio button should be defined with the Checked property set to True. In the report, you can use the (Name).checked expression to find out whether the button was selected.\nCombo Box and LookUp Box For entries whose allowed values can be selected from a list, so called combo boxes or lookup boxes are available. These components are suitable for all cases where a limited number of valid values is available which may change dynamically. As the source for the values of the combo box, you can either define a data column or enter static values.\nIn the lookup box, a key is stored in addition to the value. This enables you to filter not only on the selected name, but, e.g. also on the primary key of the selected value.\nIn the Properties window, select the data column, e.g., tHosts.Hostname under* (Data Bindings) - Items.* When adding a lookup box, additionally select the data column to be used as the key, e.g. tHosts.HostID. You can enter a static list of values into the Items and Keys properties which are not grouped under (Data Bindings).\nThen, you can specify the (Name).selectedItem and (Name).selectedKey expressions to use the selected values or keys in the report.\nChecked List Box A checked list box lists values which the user can select by enabling the checkbox to the left of the corresponding value. In the Properties window, under (Data Bindings) - Items, select the data column whose values will be made available for selection. Using the Check on Click option in the Behavior category of the Properties window, you can define if a value is enabled by simply clicking on it or if the associated checkbox needs to be checked to enable the value. In the report, you can reference the selected values by specifying (Name).selectedItems.\nDate Time Picker Date-time pickers are used to select a date. Above all, this component is required if the user wants to restrict the report output to a certain period of time. In the report, specify (Name).value to reference the selected date. When you select the date, the current time is added automatically. If you only want to use the date, specify (Name).value.date.\nNumbers (Numeric Up Down) Use the Numeric Up Down component to make sure that only numbers will be entered. In addition, you can define a minimum and a maximum value. You can enter a default value using the Value property. To reference the number entered by the user, specify (Name).value.\nPanel The Panel, similarly to the Group component, can be used for structuring the components and for grouping radio buttons. The difference between a panel and a group is that the panel does not stand out against the rest of the form as long as it has the same color as the background.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eFor each of the components, you can specify a name in the* (Name)* field of the Properties window. This name is required to access the value of this component later.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"label\"\u003eLabel\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe label is used to describe another control. For example, you can specify which values have to be entered into a text box.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"text-box\"\u003eText Box\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsers can enter any desired text in a text box. To later reference the text entered into the text box, use \u003cem\u003e(Name).Text.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/dialog/components/","title":"Components"},{"content":"Click the button in the title bar to open the configuration dialog for the Docusnap Server.\nServer Start Settings Select the startup type Manual or Automatic for the service in the Server Start Settings step.\nIn addition, you can turn on the debug mode for the Docusnap Server here.\nBy default the service runs under the system local account. To ensure the connection to the database, it is recommended to provide a SQL Server Authentication in the wizard step Server Database.\nIt is also possible to specify a user, who is used for the execution of the service.\nIn order to execute a correct inventory, the local security policies Replace a process level token and Log on as service must be set for the specified user, if a specified user is defined.\nCheck the checkbox Execute Inventory in Own Process to confirm that the security policy has been set.\nIf a user is entered, but the local security policy has not been set or the checkbox has not been checked, than several inventory processes might not be executed correctly.\nServer Database The Docusnap database is the key element for performing the jobs. It holds the jobs to be processed by the Docusnap Server.\nOnly one Docusnap server is defined for each database. If an active Docusnap server of another system is already registered in the database, the Docusnap server will not be started at the end of the wizard. In this case only the defined settings are saved.\nBy default, the Docusnap Server service will be installed using the local system account. At this point, make sure that the specified account has sufficient access rights to the SQL Server, since otherwise, the Docusnap Server service cannot be started. By default, the timeout for database queries is 30 seconds. For large databases, however, it may happen that database queries take longer. To execute these queries nonetheless, the query timeout can be increased.\nThe change of the Timeout will be stored in a configuration file located on the computer where Docusnap is running and will be used for every connection to a database. Server Mail Settings Docusnap provides notifications for particular occasions, e.g. when a contract has expired. These notifications are sent out by e-mail.\nIn the SMTP Settings group, you can enter the SMTP server data and select additional options for authentication and SSL encryption. If the SMTP server requires authentication, the User and Password text fields will be enabled so that you can enter the required information.\nIf the Simple Authentication check box is activated, no separate domain information is used in the credentials. This setting is necessary for external email providers because the domain information is not required for user authentication with external providers. For specific Exchange configurations, domain information may also not be required. If checking the settings for Exchange fails, it may be that sending emails work by activating the Simple Authentication.\nAfter you have entered a value in the SMTP Server or User field, click the Check Settings button to send an e-mail to a test recipient to verify the e-mail settings specified here. Only if this test was successful, the Next button will be enabled so that you can go to the next step.\nIf you do not want to use the e-mail settings, leave the corresponding text fields blank or disable this step by removing the checkmark from the Configure Email Settings checkbox.\nServer API Use Discovery Service and Docusnap Web\nScheme: The authentication scheme only applies to the authentication using an web browser. If https (self-signed certificate) is selected, its own certificate will be created. If https (select from certificate store) is activated, a certificate that exists on the system can be selected using the Select Certificate button. For the secure connection with https, the Docusnap Server uses the cipher suite of the operating system on which the Docusnap Server is running. The certificate must contain both public and private keys. External Hostname (optional) and port: These are required for accessing the Docusnap Server API within the organization. The host name is used for connecting both to the Docusnap Discovery Services and to the Web Client. Proxy: Inventory of Azure requires an Internet connection. If the inventory is carried out with the Docusnap Server and a proxy server should be used, the desired settings can be entered via the Proxy button. Activate X-Frame Security Header: To optimize security, the HTTP security headers (HSTS, X-XSS-Protection, CSP, X-Content-Type-Options), except for X-Frames-Options, have been permanently enabled for Docusnap Server. The HTTP security header X-Frames-Options can be additionally enabled in the Docusnap server settings. With this option enabled, maps and reports are no longer displayed in Docusnap Web. Authentication Scheme (only relevant if user management is enabled)\nPlease note that the selected authentication is only active if the user management in Docusnap has also been activated. Until this is implemented, the Anonymous Authentication is in effect! Basic Authentication: With this method, you can to grant users outside your own domain access to Docusnap Web. In productive use, however, it is strongly recommended, to use HTTPS for the access to Docusnap Web to make sure that the password is encrypted before transmission. Integrated Windows Authentication: This method is recommended to grant users within your own domain access to Docusnap Web. ADS security groups and users as well as local users (not recommended) can be granted access directly in Docusnap. In contrast to the Basic Authentication method, Integrated Windows Authentication uses the ADS for user account management. Anonymous Authentication: If you select Anonymous Authentication, all other authentication methods are disabled automatically. There will be no permission checks, i.e. every user has unlimited access to Docusnap Web. Anonymous Authentication can only be used if user management is not active. Docusnap User Permissions\nSpecifying a dedicated domain controller is useful when the domain controllers are spread across multiple sites. By specifying the local domain controller the response time to query the Active Directory can be reduced significantly.\nDebugging Docusnap Web\nIn addition, the logging can be activated for Docusnap Web, which logs web requests. A path must be specified in which the logging file will be saved.\nServer Settings Use the Documentation Path field to specify the location where the documents (overviews and datasheets) will be stored by the Docusnap Server. Click the button to select the folder for storing the documents.\nWhen creating the documentation, Docusnap uses the system account permissions for executing the service. For this reason, make sure that the system account has a write permission to the selected documentation path. Alternatively, you can specify a user or service account with sufficient permissions for the Docusnap Server Windows service.\nThe files and templates used by Docusnap may either be stored on the local hard disk, on a server or on another computer in the network. To obtain consistent results, the same team settings path is used for the Docusnap client and Docusnap Server. If the path is changed in the options dialog, it will be changed for the Docusnap Server and vice versa, when both are connected to the same database. If no path was selected for the Team Settings or if that path no longer exists, the path specified for the Local Settings will be used.\nThe Docusnap Server only supports UNC addresses for the path specifications to be used. When creating the documentation, Docusnap relies on templates. During the configuration, Docusnap loads these templates into the local or team settings directory. If neither path is available at the time when the job is processed, Docusnap will use the templates from the program directory.\nClick the Finish button to apply the settings and start the Docusnap Server.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/docusnap-server/configuration/docusnap-title-bar-discovery.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Discovery\" title=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Discovery\"\u003e button in the title bar to open the configuration dialog for the Docusnap Server.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"server-start-settings\"\u003eServer Start Settings\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSelect the startup type \u003cem\u003eManual\u003c/em\u003e or \u003cem\u003eAutomatic\u003c/em\u003e for the service in the \u003cem\u003eServer Start Settings\u003c/em\u003e step.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition, you can turn on the debug mode for the Docusnap Server here.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBy default the service runs under the system local account. To ensure the connection to the database, it is recommended to provide a SQL Server Authentication in the wizard step \u003cem\u003eServer Database.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/docusnap-server/configuration/","title":"Configuration"},{"content":"","excerpt":"","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/","title":"Docusnap 13 - Configuration Manual"},{"content":"In order to improve the readability of this document, the following conventions apply:\nNormal text uses the Open Sans font. Names of buttons, checkboxes, etc. are written in italics.\nExamples from the code are formatted as follows:\nvar add2 = function(number) {return number + 2;} In some chapters, tips for using Docusnap are given. These tips are indicated by a dark blue bar. Text passages that contain a warning are highlighted with an orange bar. Warnings are notes that must be followed when working with Docusnap. Text passages that contain additional information are indicated by a light blue bar. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn order to improve the readability of this document, the following conventions apply:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNormal text uses the Open Sans font. Names of buttons, checkboxes, etc. are written in \u003cem\u003eitalics\u003c/em\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExamples from the code are formatted as follows:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight\"\u003e\u003cpre tabindex=\"0\" style=\"background-color:#f8f8f8;-moz-tab-size:4;-o-tab-size:4;tab-size:4;\"\u003e\u003ccode class=\"language-js\" data-lang=\"js\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"display:flex;\"\u003e\u003cspan\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color:#204a87;font-weight:bold\"\u003evar\u003c/span\u003e \u003cspan style=\"color:#000\"\u003eadd2\u003c/span\u003e \u003cspan style=\"color:#ce5c00;font-weight:bold\"\u003e=\u003c/span\u003e \u003cspan style=\"color:#204a87;font-weight:bold\"\u003efunction\u003c/span\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color:#000;font-weight:bold\"\u003e(\u003c/span\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color:#000\"\u003enumber\u003c/span\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color:#000;font-weight:bold\"\u003e)\u003c/span\u003e \u003cspan style=\"color:#000;font-weight:bold\"\u003e{\u003c/span\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color:#204a87;font-weight:bold\"\u003ereturn\u003c/span\u003e \u003cspan style=\"color:#000\"\u003enumber\u003c/span\u003e \u003cspan style=\"color:#ce5c00;font-weight:bold\"\u003e+\u003c/span\u003e \u003cspan style=\"color:#0000cf;font-weight:bold\"\u003e2\u003c/span\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color:#000;font-weight:bold\"\u003e;}\u003c/span\u003e\n\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/code\u003e\u003c/pre\u003e\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-primary\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    In some chapters, tips for using Docusnap are given. These tips are indicated by a dark blue bar.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-warning\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    Text passages that contain a warning are highlighted with an orange bar. Warnings are notes that must be followed when working with Docusnap.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-success\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    Text passages that contain additional information are indicated by a light blue bar.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/introductions/conventions/","title":"Conventions"},{"content":"Additional information allow you to add some extra information to individual objects in Docusnap. For example, the Passwords provide a comfortable way to manage credentials, and the Contracts lets you store and manage contractual agreements.\nIt is possible to link an additional information with more than one object.\nThe following additional information are available in in Docusnap:\nComments Financial Records Passwords Contracts Tasks\nThe additional information can be created, displayed and managed on an additional tab in the main window. For each of these additional information, you can store attachments, such as purchase contracts, SLAs and more. Attachments Create Additional Information As soon as an object has been selected in the Data Explorer, for which additional information can be created, the Additional Information tab is displayed.\nIn the tab, all additional information of this object is displayed and can be edited. New entries can be created by clicking on the New button in the action bar. This opens the dialog for creating the respective additional information. In this dialog, all relevant data for the additional information is specified and in the tree on the right side you select the object to which the additional information should be linked.\nThere are several possibilities for editing additional information. A data entry screen is displayed in the Additional Information tab for the selected additional information. Changes can be saved using the button in the action bar. The selected additional information can also be opened in a dialog by clicking the button. In addition to the content of the additional information, the dialog can also be used to change the object to which the additional information is linked.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eAdditional information allow you to add some extra information to individual objects in Docusnap. For example, the \u003cem\u003ePasswords\u003c/em\u003e provide a comfortable way to manage credentials, and the \u003cem\u003eContracts\u003c/em\u003e lets you store and manage contractual agreements.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is possible to link an additional information with more than one object.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe following additional information are available in in Docusnap:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/comments/\" title=\"Comments\"\u003eComments\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/financial-records/\" title=\"Financial Records\"\u003eFinancial Records\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/passwords/\" title=\"Passwords\"\u003ePasswords\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/contracts/\" title=\"Contracts\"\u003eContracts\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/tasks/\" title=\"Tasks\"\u003eTasks\u003c/a\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cem\u003eThe additional information can be created, displayed and managed on an additional tab in the main window. For each of these additional information, you can store attachments, such as purchase contracts, SLAs and more.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/attachments/\" title=\"Attachments\"\u003eAttachments\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"create-additional-information\"\u003eCreate Additional Information\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs soon as an object has been selected in the Data Explorer, for which additional information can be created, the \u003cem\u003eAdditional Information\u003c/em\u003e tab is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/","title":"Create Additional Information"},{"content":"Clicking the Create New App button opens a dialog. As Azure App Name Docusnap is suggested. This name can be customized as desired, but it must be ensured that the name is unique in the Azure environment. In the next text box, either the Azure directory name or the directory ID can be specified. If the dialog was opened as part of the inventory wizard, then the company that was selected in the wizard will be selected by default. If the dialog is opened in the administration, the company can be selected. Optionally a description can be added, for example which subscriptions belong to this app.\nA device code is then generated by clicking on Create code.\nClick on Register to open the website where the device code must be entered. After opening, the device code is already in the clipboard and can be pasted with Ctrl+V. Then please log in with a user with the role \u0026ldquo;Global Administrator\u0026rdquo;.\nOnce the Microsoft Azure CLI is confirmed, the Azure App is created. The browser can be closed. The dialog for creating the app is closed as soon as the app is available.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eClicking the \u003cem\u003eCreate New App\u003c/em\u003e button opens a dialog. As \u003cem\u003eAzure App Name\u003c/em\u003e \u003cem\u003eDocusnap\u003c/em\u003e is suggested. This name can be customized as desired, but it must be ensured that the name is unique in the Azure environment. In the next text box, either the Azure directory name or the directory ID can be specified. If the dialog was opened as part of the inventory wizard, then the company that was selected in the wizard will be selected by default. If the dialog is opened in the administration, the company can be selected. Optionally a description can be added, for example which subscriptions belong to this app.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/azure-apps-create/","title":"Create Azure Apps"},{"content":"To create a new diagram, navigate to the Documentation tree. First, select the Diagram heading in the tree view, then create a new folder by clicking the New button and then you can create a new diagram. Specify a name for the folder and the diagram. Now you can create a diagram on the Diagrams tab.\nThe right pane shows the Inventory tree. It contains the data from the most recent network inventories.\nSelect a component and drag it to the Diagrams tab while holding down the left mouse button.\nThe preview icon (100x100 px) of the respective object is used as the icon. If objects are created via customizing, it is recommended to also use icons with the size 100x100 px, so that all icons have a uniform size. Action Bar In the action bar additional settings for the creation of the diagrams can be made.\nUse the New, and buttons above the tree view to create or delete new diagram or save changes made to existing diagrams.\nYou can export the current diagram to a Visio file by clicking the button. Clicking the button will load the last saved version of the diagram again.\nUsing the Layout and Arrange automatically buttons, you can specify that the objects are automatically arranged according to the selected algorithm. With the Connect automatically button enabled, each new component will be connected to the most recently selected component.\nThe Pointer Tool allows you to select individual components by a mouse click. If the Connector button has been selected, you can create a Connector using the mouse. Click a component and drag the mouse (while holding down the mouse button) to the second component. This will connect the two components. Clicking the Fit to Page button resizes the diagram so that it fits the page.\nThe desired type and design for a connector can be selected.\nUse the Add Ancestor and Add Descendant to add the hierarchical ancestor and descendants of the selected object.\nBy clicking the Correlation button you can add the IT Correlations of the selected object.\nBy clicking the Group button you can add groups of IT Correlations of the selected object.\nBy clicking the Next Level button or the 2 - 4 Levels button you can choose how many levels of the IT Correlations should be added.\nA grid can be displayed in the background of the drawing sheet to simplify the alignment of the components.\nContext Menu A context menu is available when you right-click the components and connectors.\nThis menu contains options to delete the current object or to connect it with other objects. When selecting multiple objects, you can align them horizontally or vertically or set them to the same height or width. Additionally IT Correlations, ancestors and descendants can be added.\nThe connectors can be deleted from the context menu. What is more, you can swap the starting and ending points or select a different starting or ending point.\nUsing the context menu options, it is also possible to rearrange groups or resize them.\nProperties Once a connector has been selected, the Properties entry screen appears. Here, you can specify additional information about the selected connector. The properties will be displayed along with the connectors. You can select the properties to be displayed from the Fields dialog. Optionally, you can add to the properties by editing the tRelLink table. Adding columns to the databases and entry screens is described in the Configuration Manual.\nIT Correlations When creating the diagram objects of IT Correlations can also be added. Unlike Diagrams which represent the relationship between two given objects, the IT Correlations are defined between two types of objects. The context menu of the added objects lists under Resolve Correlation entry all IT Correlations and by clicking on it the desired one can be resolved. IT Correlations can also be added by clicking the Correlation button in the action bar. Groups can also be added via the context menu and the action bar.\nAdditionally the hierarchical ancestors and descendants can be added via the context menu. Click on the entry Resolve to select how many levels of IT Correlations should be resolved.\nFields Each connection has properties, such as a name, a description, a priority, etc. that you can select for display in the diagram. Click the Fields button to open the dialog. For each diagram, you can select the fields to be displayed from the Display Fields for Diagram dialog.\nDeleted entries If objects are deleted that have already been inserted into a diagram, they are not deleted from the diagram, but marked with (deleted).\nSome objects can be moved in the data explorer. For example, systems that are moved to another domain, systems that are changed from offline host to Windows systems, or IT assets that are placed in a different folder.\nBy moving the object, it can no longer be linked with the diagram. Therefore, it will be marked as (deleted). In this case, the object would have to be deleted from the diagram and then added to the diagram again from the new position in the tree.\nOpening relations from other tree views The Analysis tab is displayed for each object you select in the Data Explorer. If the selected object is used in a diagram, that diagram will be displayed on this tab. In the Analysis tab the diagram can be exported. To edit the diagram click the Edit button to open it in the Diagrams tab.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo create a new diagram, navigate to the \u003cem\u003eDocumentation\u003c/em\u003e tree. First, select the \u003cem\u003eDiagram\u003c/em\u003e heading in the tree view, then create a new folder by clicking the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button and then you can create a new diagram. Specify a name for the folder and the diagram. Now you can create a diagram on the \u003cem\u003eDiagrams\u003c/em\u003e tab.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe right pane shows the \u003cem\u003eInventory\u003c/em\u003e tree. It contains the data from the most recent network inventories.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/diagrams/create-diagrams/","title":"Create Diagrams"},{"content":"IT assets are created from the Inventory tree view. In the first step, create a directory under the IT Assets heading. Then, you can create the IT assets under this directory by clicking the New button and selecting the desired category. It is possible to clone existing IT assets. When you clone an IT asset, all values except the value defined for the display field will be copied.\nThe values for the IT asset are entered into the data entry mask. Decimal numbers are saved with 2 decimal places, the other decimal places are not saved.\nIn addition to creating IT assets manually, you can import the content of CSV files as IT assets using the Data Import feature.\nUnder the IT Assets heading in the tree structure, you can open the Reports node where two reports are displayed which list the values of the IT assets.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIT assets are created from the \u003cem\u003eInventory\u003c/em\u003e tree view. In the first step, create a directory under the \u003cem\u003eIT Assets\u003c/em\u003e heading. Then, you can create the IT assets under this directory by clicking the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button and selecting the desired category. It is possible to clone existing IT assets. When you clone an IT asset, all values except the value defined for the display field will be copied.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe values for the IT asset are entered into the data entry mask. Decimal numbers are saved with 2 decimal places, the other decimal places are not saved.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-assets/create-it-assets/","title":"Create IT Assets"},{"content":"In order to simplify working with and understanding the database, certain standards have been used in configuring the database. When extending the database, we recommend to continue using these standards.\nAll names of the database elements are in English. For all tables, an auto-incrementing primary key has been defined. The name of the primary key column is always the same as the table name (without the prefix) and has an \u0026ldquo;ID\u0026rdquo; suffix. Thus, the primary key column in the tHosts table is called HostID.\nIf a foreign key is specified, its name is identical with the name of the primary key column of the linked table. For the tHosts table, e.g., a foreign key was defined that links it to the domains in the tDomains table. Thus, DomainID was specified in the Foreign Key field.\nAll table names in the Docusnap database begin with a lowercase \u0026ldquo;t\u0026rdquo; as an abbreviation for \u0026ldquo;table\u0026rdquo;. All tables whose name begins with tSys do not contain user-definable content. They hold system definitions for Docusnap.\nIf you create new fields or tables using the Customizing module, they will be identified by an \u0026ldquo;x\u0026rdquo; prefix. Thus, you would name a table for mobile phones as \u0026ldquo;xtMobilePhones\u0026rdquo;, for example. The columns in this table would be identified by a leading \u0026ldquo;x\u0026rdquo; (such as xMobilephone). This convention avoids conflicts with system-defined names.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn order to simplify working with and understanding the database, certain standards have been used in configuring the database. When extending the database, we recommend to continue using these standards.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll names of the database elements are in English. For all tables, an auto-incrementing primary key has been defined. The name of the primary key column is always the same as the table name (without the prefix) and has an \u0026ldquo;ID\u0026rdquo; suffix. Thus, the primary key column in the \u003cem\u003etHosts\u003c/em\u003e table is called \u003cem\u003eHostID.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/definitions/","title":"Definitions"},{"content":"In Docusnap the following elements are summarized under the physical infrastructure:\nSites (cities, buildings, floors, rooms) Racks, Patch Panels and Network Sockets Cabling Infrastructure – Editor The Infrastructure Editor provides the interface to create and manage the elements belonging to the physical infrastructure.\nSites Sites are used in Docusnap to represent the structure of a company. At least one site is required to map the physical infrastructure.\nRacks Racks can be used to document the physical structure of a rack in Docusnap.\nSite Elements Site elements in Docusnap are all elements that can be assigned to a site, e.g. network sockets, air conditioners, etc.\nRack Elements A rack element is built into a rack. Examples of a rack element are servers, switches or patch panels.\nShapes A shape is the image of a physical element (e.g. server, switch, network socket) and serves to graphically represent the element in the rack. The detected plugs are also used to document the cabling.\nShape Editor Integrated editor in Docusnap, with whose help the existing shape collection can be extended by own shapes.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn Docusnap the following elements are summarized under the physical infrastructure:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSites (cities, buildings, floors, rooms)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRacks, Patch Panels and Network Sockets\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCabling\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"infrastructure--editor\"\u003eInfrastructure – Editor\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Infrastructure Editor provides the interface to create and manage the elements belonging to the physical infrastructure.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"sites\"\u003eSites\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSites are used in Docusnap to represent the structure of a company. At least one site is required to map the physical infrastructure.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"racks\"\u003eRacks\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRacks can be used to document the physical structure of a rack in Docusnap.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/definitions/","title":"Definitions"},{"content":"In Docusnap, an integrated Designer is available that you can use to customize or create data entry screens.\nThe data entry screens are created ​​directly with the respective meta objects in the Docusnap Management. Click the Manage Objects button on the Customizing area to open the Meta Objects. After the object has been selected, for which the data entry screen should be edited or created, click the Data Entry Screen button to open the tab for editing. Only when the Editable checkbox is checked can a data entry screen be created.\nEach data entry screen belongs to exactly one meta object, the name of the meta object is used for the file name. Therefore each data entry screen of the company nodes must also be adapted individually for the explorer in which it is needed. Changes to the data entry screen of the company in the inventory, for example, are not transferred to the data entry screen of the company in the license management.\nThe data entry screens of the extensions can be opened and modified using the Inventory tree view by clicking on the Data Entry Screen button of the respective meta object for comments, finance, contracts, reminders or passwords on the Metaobjects tab. The metaobjects can be found below the Organization caption. Basic Structure of the Designer Basically, the Designer for editing data entry screens consists of four panes: the Workspace, the Toolbox, the Properties and the Outline tab. The Workspace is the largest of these areas. Above the workspace, the so-called \u0026ldquo;tabs\u0026rdquo; are located. They extend the available space and help to organize the data entry screens in a meaningful way. They will be explained in more detail in the Using Tabs section. The Toolbox is displayed in the left pane. In the right pane, either the Settings or the Outline tab is displayed. To save the edits made to a data entry screen, click the Save button. Similarly, you can reset a data entry screen to its original settings by clicking the Reset button.\nAdding and Configuring Controls To add a new control, simply drag it from the Toolbox and drop it on the Workspace. In the Toolbox, various controls are available that can be used in different situations. For details regarding the functionality and properties of the each control, see the Controls section.\nIt is recommended to add a Layout Control in the first step. The other controls such as textboxes, comboboxes, etc. are then added to this Layout Control which will control the size and alignment of the elements automatically.\nThere are two ways to remove an existing control from a data entry screen. After the control has been selected (is highlighted by a red border), you can delete it by either clicking the Delete Control button in the Toolbox or by pressing the \u0026lt;Del\u0026gt; key on the keyboard.\nTo move a previously added control, simply select it and drag it to the desired position with the mouse. Properties for the controls can be changed in the Properties tab. Please note that the properties of system-defined controls may differ from those of controls added by a user. Similarly, predefined controls cannot be deleted. To modify the properties of a control by means of the Properties tab, the desired value can, in most cases, be entered directly into the right column of the displayed table. In some special cases, it is possible to make changes to the settings from a separate dialog. If so, the button is displayed in the right column of the Properties tab when you select such a setting. When you click this button, the dialog opens where you can specify the corresponding settings.\nAll controls that are placed on a data entry screen will automatically be linked with the current record for the associated meta object and can be used to edit this data.\nToolbox You can use the icons to copy, cut and paste controls. It is also possible to copy a control from one tab to another or to a different data entry screen. By pressing the Ctrl key, multiple controls can be selected and copied at the same time. In addition to the icons, the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl + C, Ctrl + X and Ctrl + V can be used for copying, cutting and pasting. Only custom controls can be copied.\nOutline In the Outline pane, all elements of the data entry screen are listed. If a Display Name has been defined for an item, this name is specified otherwise the type of control. In this structure, the element can be selected and then the settings can be changed in the Properties pane.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn Docusnap, an integrated Designer is available that you can use to customize or create data entry screens.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe data entry screens are created ​​directly with the respective meta objects in the Docusnap Management. Click the \u003cem\u003eManage Objects\u003c/em\u003e button on the \u003cem\u003eCustomizing\u003c/em\u003e area to open the \u003cem\u003eMeta Objects.\u003c/em\u003e After the object has been selected, for which the data entry screen should be edited or created, click the \u003cem\u003eData Entry Screen\u003c/em\u003e button to open the tab for editing. Only when the \u003cem\u003eEditable\u003c/em\u003e checkbox is checked can a data entry screen be created.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/designer/","title":"Designer"},{"content":"You can add to the predefined designs by creating your own designs.\nEdit Design Colors Select General in the Company Selection tab to show the designs of the system, on which Docusnap is currently running. When a company is selected, the customized designs are stored in the database and are available to any user connected to that database.\nClick the New button to create a new design for which you need to specify a name in English and German. You can then define colors for the various levels of your design. Click the Save button to save the design.\nClick the Add General Design Colors button to copy the custom designs from the general settings to the selected company.\nThen, to use your own design, select it in the Layout (CI) dialog in Docusnap.\nReport Templates On the Report Templates tab, you can modify the formatting of each style or create new styles.\nYou can define text settings, border settings, and colors for your styles. The settings are saved for the style that is currently selected in the dropdown list. If desired, you can apply the selected font to all styles. For the border, you can set the type and the border style to be applied.\nThe color can be set to the various shades available for the selected design. A shade set as the color for the text, the background, or the border will still be used when you select another design. The color defined through the drop-down list will still be used when you select another design.\nTo save modifications to existing styles, click the Apply button. Clicking the Load Default button deletes all custom styles and restores the original design settings.\nClick the New button to create a new style. After assigning a name for the design in English and in German, you can save the style and then define its formatting.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eYou can add to the predefined designs by creating your own designs.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"edit-design-colors\"\u003eEdit Design Colors\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSelect \u003cem\u003eGeneral\u003c/em\u003e in the \u003cem\u003eCompany Selection\u003c/em\u003e tab to show the designs of the system, on which Docusnap is currently running. When a company is selected, the customized designs are stored in the database and are available to any user connected to that database.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button to create a new design for which you need to specify a name in English and German. You can then define colors for the various levels of your design. Click the \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e button to save the design.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/designs/","title":"Designs"},{"content":"Within the Discovery area all inventory wizards provided by Docusnap are displayed. These include systems, network services, databases, virtualization, cloud services, applications, script import and NTFS analysis.\nNot all wizards are displayed. The overview for all other wizards can be opened by clicking on the button All Wizards. With the button the desired inventory wizards can be defined as favorites and added to the list in the ribbon.\nIn the Discovery section all scheduled jobs of the type Inventory are listed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWithin the Discovery area all inventory wizards provided by Docusnap are displayed. These include systems, network services, databases, virtualization, cloud services, applications, script import and NTFS analysis.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot all wizards are displayed. The overview for all other wizards can be opened by clicking on the button \u003cem\u003eAll Wizards.\u003c/em\u003e With the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/navigation/discovery/docusnap-ribbon-favorites-define.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Ribbon-Favorites-define\" title=\"Docusnap-Ribbon-Favorites-define\"\u003e button the desired inventory wizards can be defined as favorites and added to the list in the ribbon.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Discovery section all scheduled jobs of the type Inventory are listed.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/navigation/discovery/","title":"Discovery"},{"content":"In Microsoft environments, the effective permissions are a combination of the share permissions and the NTFS permissions. Docusnap determines the respective shares for a system, including the permissions and the local users and groups, during the Windows inventory process. The domain users and group hierarchies are retrieved by means of the Active Directory inventory scan.\nTo determine the organization of NTFS systems, you need to execute an additional wizard.\nFor a permission analysis, the following steps are required:\nDetermining the target devices using a Windows, CIFS or DFS inventory scan Scanning the Active Directory Determining the NTFS directory data using the NTFS wizard Analyzing and evaluating the results Note: Steps 1 and 2 are described in the Inventory section.\nIn order to perform a permission analysis, you must always scan the complete Active Directory system to make sure that all groups and users will be available for analysis. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn Microsoft environments, the effective permissions are a combination of the share permissions and the NTFS permissions. Docusnap determines the respective shares for a system, including the permissions and the local users and groups, during the Windows inventory process. The domain users and group hierarchies are retrieved by means of the Active Directory inventory scan.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo determine the organization of NTFS systems, you need to execute an additional wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a permission analysis, the following steps are required:\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/file-system/","title":"File System"},{"content":"A lookup box can be used to enable the selection of a value.\nTo create this dialog, first define a new data source. This data source can then be used to supply the selection list values. Make sure to indicate in the data source how to sort the list because the components will output the values as they appear in the table without considering the alphabetical sort order.\nFirst, create a new form in the Report Designer by right-clicking the horizontal area to the right of the Preview tab and selecting New Form from the context menu.\nUse the toolbox to add a label as the first element and enter System: for the Text property.\nThen, add a lookup box and select the FormHosts.HostName data column for the (Data Bindings) - Items property and the FormHosts.HostID data column for the (Data Bindings) - Keys property. For the lookup box, set the (Name) property to cbxSystems. Then, add two buttons. For one of the buttons, select Cancel as the Dialog Result property, and for the other one, select OK as the Dialog Result property. Change the Text properties to OK and Cancel, respectively. This completes the dialog creation.\nNext, change to the ReportPage tab to add the data output components. Define a data band and select the tHosts table as its data source. For the table, set the Connect On Start property to True. Then, add a text box to the data band and enter HostName as the Text property.\nNext, double-click the data band to open the Data Setup dialog. Go to the Filters page to add a filter and enter the tHosts.HostID = cbxSystems.SelectedKey expression for it. This filter determines that only the system whose HostID matches the one of the selected system will be displayed.\ntHosts.HostID indicates the primary key of the tHosts table. The second part of the expression is composed of cbxSystems (the name of the lookup box in the dialog) and SelectedKey which references the key of the selected value.\nOnly the selected value will be included in the report.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eA \u003cem\u003elookup box\u003c/em\u003e can be used to enable the selection of a value.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/dialog/example/filtering-a-single-system/docusnap-report-dialog-executed.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Report-Dialog-executed\" title=\"Docusnap-Report-Dialog-executed\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo create this dialog, first define a \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/special-reporting-techniques/grouped-reports/\" title=\"new data source\"\u003enew data source\u003c/a\u003e. This data source can then be used to supply the selection list values. Make sure to indicate in the data source how to sort the list because the components will output the values as they appear in the table without considering the alphabetical sort order.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/dialog/example/filtering-a-single-system/","title":"Filtering a Single System"},{"content":"When creating the concept, the files are stored in the database. This allows all users connected to this database to work with the same concepts. All concepts of the database are displayed in the Explorer documentation.\nWhen you select a concept in the Explorer, the Concepts ribbon is displayed. Clicking the Edit button opens the concept in the Concept Editor where it can be edited.\nThe various elements can be inserted either through the buttons located on the Insert ribbon or per drag \u0026amp; drop them from the object tree. For some elements such as maps, overviews, or data, further settings can be selected. To access the settings, either click the Settings button, select Edit from the context menu of the respective element, or double-click the element. The Settings button is located in an additional ribbon which is displayed as soon as you select the element in the document.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWhen creating the concept, the files are stored in the database. This allows all users connected to this database to work with the same concepts. All concepts of the database are displayed in the Explorer documentation.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you select a concept in the Explorer, the \u003cem\u003eConcepts\u003c/em\u003e ribbon is displayed. Clicking the \u003cem\u003eEdit\u003c/em\u003e button opens the concept in the \u003cem\u003eConcept Editor\u003c/em\u003e where it can be edited.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe various elements can be inserted either through the buttons located on the \u003cem\u003eInsert\u003c/em\u003e ribbon or per drag \u0026amp; drop them from the object tree. For some elements such as maps, overviews, or data, further settings can be selected. To access the settings, either click the \u003cem\u003eSettings\u003c/em\u003e button, select \u003cem\u003eEdit\u003c/em\u003e from the context menu of the respective element, or double-click the element. The \u003cem\u003eSettings\u003c/em\u003e button is located in an additional ribbon which is displayed as soon as you select the element in the document.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/create-concept/general/","title":"General"},{"content":"The files created in the Documentation module will be stored on the hard disk. For this, you need to select a custom directory as the location for storing the documents.\nThe Docusnap Server can be used to set a particular date and time for the automatic creation of the documentation.\nThe documentation can be created in English or in German. Even if English is selected as your interface language, it is possible to create documentation in German.\nAd hoc maps can be opened in the tree. These are regenerated when opened and always refer to the most current data. Ad hoc maps can be created for network, routing, topology and VLAN.\nFolder Structure The folder where the documents will be saved must be selected when getting started with Docusnap. This path is specified on the General page of the Options - Documentation dialog and can be changed later.\nA folder hierarchy for storing the files will be created in the selected directory during the creation of the documents. At the top level, you will find a folder with the name of the company. Under this folder, a folder with the name of the domain will be created. The Maps folder contains maps with values from multiple domains.\nBelow the domain folder, Docusnap creates the Datasheets, Overview and Maps folders, respectively, when the associated documents are generated. Each Datasheet contains information about a single system and will be stored in a subfolder under the Datasheets folder that is named after the corresponding system.\nTo open the folder which reflects the folder hierarchy for the documents, click the Open Path button in the area Documentation \u0026ndash;\u0026gt; All Wizards. The Documents tree view displays each generated map, overview or datasheet at its intended position.\nFormat Settings The design of the documents and maps you create is influenced by two factors.\nTo format maps, go to the General page of the Options - Documentation dialog. Here, you can specify the font to be used in maps.\nDatasheets and overviews are based on reports. For this reason, the format settings for the datasheets and overviews follow the format settings for the reports. To select the design for your reports, use the Layout (CI) dialog.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe files created in the Documentation module will be stored on the hard disk. For this, you need to select a custom directory as the location for storing the documents.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Docusnap Server can be used to set a particular date and time for the automatic creation of the documentation.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe documentation can be created in English or in German. Even if English is selected as your interface language, it is possible to create documentation in German.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/general/","title":"General"},{"content":"The License Management ribbon displays after the License Management option has been selected in the Navigation pane.\nRibbon Clicking the New button will start the License Management wizard. The desired license can be created using this wizard.\nClick the Assignment button to open the Software Relevant for Licensing dialog. In this dialog all inventoried software products are listed and can be assigned to product licensing.\nAll static entries for the specified software products can be exported to an external file or imported from a corresponding, previously exported file. This means that a software product must only be defined once and can then be re-used with other Docusnap databases. The two buttons Export and Import are available in the ribbon for these operations.\nIf you want to exclude software pertaining to certain systems, e.g. software used in a test environment, the corresponding systems may be excluded from license management. To exclude such systems, either click the Exclude Systems button or use the editor in the Data Explorer hierarchy of the specific system.\nAction Bar Additional functions are available in the action bar.\nThe data can be edited using the wizard. Clicking the Edit button will open the License Management wizard with the data for the selected software product, which may then be edited.\nClicking on the Edit License button opens the wizard at the step Licenses to skip all previous steps if only the license should be modified.\nEdit In general, you can create and edit software products by using the License Management wizard. It is possible to edit existing software products with the Editor tab. Make sure to restrict manual edits to minor changes.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eLicense Management\u003c/em\u003e ribbon displays after the License Management option has been selected in the Navigation pane.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"ribbon\"\u003eRibbon\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClicking the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button will start the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/\" title=\"License Management wizard\"\u003eLicense Management wizard\u003c/a\u003e. The desired license can be created using this wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eAssignment\u003c/em\u003e button to open the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/software-product-licensing/\" title=\"Software Relevant for Licensing\"\u003eSoftware Relevant for Licensing\u003c/a\u003e dialog. In this dialog all inventoried software products are listed and can be assigned to product licensing.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll static entries for the specified software products can be exported to an external file or imported from a corresponding, previously exported file. This means that a software product must only be defined once and can then be re-used with other Docusnap databases. The two buttons \u003cem\u003eExport\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eImport\u003c/em\u003e are available in the ribbon for these operations.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/general/","title":"General"},{"content":"General Settings If the Show Network Maps option is enabled, created network maps will be displayed on the Documents tab. Loading large network maps may take a long time. For this reason, it is possible to disable the output and automated loading of network maps.\nThe Password Logging feature allows you to track which user copied which password and / or displayed it in plain text. By checking the Password Logging checkbox, you can enable or disable the password logging functionality.\nThe language for the program will be determined in the Options dialog. Docusnap provides the choice of either English or German. The language for Docusnap will be set by selecting it from the combo box. For a language change to take effect, the program must be re-started.\nThe selection at Date Format defines in which format date values should be displayed in Docusnap. This selection applies to the display in the tree, when exporting Connect packages and data from the grid in the main window, and the display in reports.\nDebugging The debug mode helps you to obtain supporting information in case of problems. This information will be used by the Docusnap Support Team for efficient troubleshooting. Once this mode is enabled, any errors as well as additional information will be saved in the database. For more information on this topic, refer to the Troubleshooting section.\nEnabling debug mode leads to a multitude of debug information being recorded in the database. This mode should only be enabled if errors occur, since the performance of Docusnap will be significantly reduced by the analysis carried out at runtime. Docusnap User Permissions If the Docusnap user permissions are enabled, the current user is checked in the Active Directory when Docusnap is started. If multiple domain controllers exist in the domain, a dedicated domain controller can be defined in the Options dialog. Only the name of the domain controller must be entered into the text field. For example, if the domain controllers are distributed to multiple sites, the response time for the Active Directory query can be significantly shortened by specifying the local domain controller. This can accelerate the start of Docusnap. If the specified domain controller can not be found, any domain domain controller is used.\nOther Settings For additional information, the creation date and the date of the last change are saved. If you want this data to be included in the overview of the additional information, the display can be activated in the Options dialog.\nFor example, if many wizards are added to the Favorites, the Ribbon will become larger to show all buttons. With the option to hide the text, only the icons of the wizards are displayed and the buttons take up less space.\nDocusnap User Management If the user management is used in Docusnap, you can define for data individually which user is allowed to read, change and delete this data. For example, as the access for workstations is restricted, only authorized users can see this data. Unauthorized users are denied access to this data in all companies, if several companies (tenants) have been created in Docusnap. By enabling tenant separation, access will only be restricted to the company in which the permission was set. Data from the companies where no permissions have been set is available to all users through tenant separation.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"general-settings\"\u003eGeneral Settings\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the \u003cem\u003eShow Network Maps\u003c/em\u003e option is enabled, created network maps will be displayed on the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/documents/\" title=\"Documents\"\u003eDocuments\u003c/a\u003e tab. Loading large network maps may take a long time. For this reason, it is possible to disable the output and automated loading of network maps.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003ePassword Logging\u003c/em\u003e feature allows you to track which user copied which password and / or displayed it in plain text. By checking the \u003cem\u003ePassword Logging\u003c/em\u003e checkbox, you can enable or disable the password logging functionality.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/settings/options/general/","title":"General"},{"content":"The Information tab displays a dashboard with short graphical overviews when you switch to one of the different areas.\nThe job overview contained in the dashboard provides more detailed information about the scheduled inventory jobs.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Information tab displays a dashboard with short graphical overviews when you switch to one of the different areas.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe job overview contained in the dashboard provides more detailed information about the scheduled inventory jobs.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/information/docusnap-data-explorer-information.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Data-Explorer-Information\" title=\"Docusnap-Data-Explorer-Information\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/information/","title":"Information"},{"content":"The initial steps for creating a report will be explained using the example of a report that lists all computers.\nCreating the Report To create a new report, go to Docusnap Management and Manage Reports tab. A new report can be created by clicking the New button. Then, specify the required properties. These properties will be displayed on the cover page.\nLinking the Report with a Meta Object In the next step, you need to select the location in the tree view where the report will be executed. In this case, select the Reports meta object below the domain level. This passes the primary key of the domain to the report, and the report will be displayed below the domain level.\nAfter it has been saved, the report will be displayed in the tree view. To generate/execute this report, click it. This opens the action area. The report can be opened in the Report Designer by clicking the Report Designer button.\nCreating a Data Band A data band is required for the output of data from the database. Data bands can be added from the Docusnap Bands icon in the Report Designer toolbox. To add a data band, click the Data Band component. For the data source, select the tHosts table.\nAdding a Text Box Text boxes are required to enter values that will be shown in the report. You can combine expressions and table columns in a text box. Text boxes can be added from the toolbox (Text components).\nDraw the text box in the data band. In the Text Editor, select the HostName column from the tHosts table.\nConnecting the Table Before the table data can be displayed in the report, you need to connect the table to it. For this purpose, set the Connect On Start property of the table to True.\nCreating a Header Band The header contains the headings for the data. The header band will only be displayed if the data band contains data. First, add a Header Band component from the toolbox. Use drag and drop to place the header band before the data band. Then, add a text box and enter the heading.\nPrimary Key The primary key is stored in the PrimaryKey variable. The primary key of the associated meta object is used as the primary key. By means of this value, the data for the report can be filtered on the associated object. This means that only data is included in the report that is associated with that computer, domain, license group, etc. The variable will be set when you execute the report.\nFiltering on the primary key can be done in two ways, either via the data band or directly using an SQL statement.\nSpecifying the Primary Key in the Data Band You can define a filter for a data band. Open the dialog by double-clicking the data band. To define a filter, open the Filters page and click Add Filter. Then, change the option for Field Is from \u0026ldquo;Value\u0026rdquo; to \u0026ldquo;Expression\u0026rdquo;. A click on the button will open the text editor. Enter the filter condition in this dialog. It is also possible to enter the filter condition directly in the expression field of the Data Setup dialog. The advantage of the text editor is that you can add the column names by double-clicking them.\nTo the right of the text editor, the contents of the dictionary are displayed. You can add the desired column by double-clicking it or by using drag \u0026amp; drop. Then, enter an equal sign (\u0026quot;=\u0026quot;). Next, you need the PrimaryKey variable. You can find it under the Variables node. Add it by double-clicking or using drag \u0026amp; drop again. Confirm your filter settings by clicking OK.\nSpecifying the Primary Key Using an SQL Statement Filtering on the primary key can also be done by specifying an SQL statement for the table. Only data that corresponds to the primary key will be included in the report.\nTo edit the data source, go to the Dictionary tab, select the table, right-click and select Edit. Then, you can create an SQL statement with a filter on the primary key using a Where clause. The result is that only data that matches this primary key will be shown in the report.\nPrimary Key: Filter vs. SQL Statement The advantage of the SQL statement over a filter will become apparent in the speed of execution of the report when large data sets need to be accessed. When you use a filter, all data in the table will be retrieved from the database. Then, Docusnap determines the data output by means of the filter. If you filter the database using an SQL statement, only the data that matches this SQL statement will be retrieved. This reduces the execution time of the report as less data must be loaded.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe initial steps for creating a report will be explained using the example of a report that lists all computers.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"creating-the-report\"\u003eCreating the Report\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo create a new report, go to Docusnap Management and \u003cem\u003eManage Reports\u003c/em\u003e tab. A new report can be created by clicking the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button. Then, specify the required properties. These properties will be displayed on the cover page.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-creation/initial-steps/docusnap-tools-manage-reports-creating-the-report.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Tools-Manage-Reports-Creating-the-report\" title=\"Docusnap-Tools-Manage-Reports-Creating-the-report\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"linking-the-report-with-a-meta-object\"\u003eLinking the Report with a Meta Object\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the next step, you need to select the location in the tree view where the report will be executed. In this case, select the Reports meta object below the domain level. This passes the primary key of the domain to the report, and the report will be displayed below the domain level.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-creation/initial-steps/","title":"Initial Steps"},{"content":"We have pre-configured Docusnap for the majority of tasks required by our users. If you need features that add to the default configuration, Docusnap provides a number of options for this purpose:\nChanging and creating reports Adding additional columns and tables to the Docusnap database Defining additional views for data evaluation Defining additional structures in the Inventory, Documentation, IT Security and License Management tree views Creating new or extending existing data entry screens Adding additional types for SNMP, licenses and additional information Extend classes and properties of IT Assets A license for the Customizing module is necessary to extend the database structure, add new meta objects and create data entry screens. Modified settings can easily be transferred to other Docusnap installations.\nImportant note With the exception of reports, the customizations in Docusnap are limited to adding new elements to existing structures or defining new elements. Elements that already exist in Docusnap cannot be deleted, since this would lead to uncontrollable application behavior. This manual is subdivided into the following sections:\nFile Structure of a Docusnap Installation Docusnap uses certain directory structures and database information to represent custom settings. This section introduces these structures and mechanisms and serves as the basis for the following sections.\nManagement The Docusnap Management can be used to create additional types and customize Docusnap.\nReporting This section explains how to create new reports, use the Docusnap Report Designer and assign reports to an object in the tree view.\nDatabase Structures This section illustrates the structure of the Docusnap database and shows you how to extend the existing data structures.\nMeta Objects Meta objects represent individual elements in the different tree hierarchies. For information on how to define or extend existing meta objects, see this part of the manual.\nData Entry Screens Data entry screens are user interface elements that allow the users to enter data. You can extend existing data entry screens or define new ones.\nDistributing Customizations In Docusnap, you can export your customizations and import them to other environments. This way, it is possible to make customizations of the database structure, the meta objects and data entry screens available to other databases or even other Docusnap installations without much effort.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWe have pre-configured Docusnap for the majority of tasks required by our users. If you need features that add to the default configuration, Docusnap provides a number of options for this purpose:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eChanging and creating reports\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAdding additional columns and tables to the Docusnap database\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDefining additional views for data evaluation\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDefining additional structures in the Inventory, Documentation, IT Security and License Management tree views\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCreating new or extending existing data entry screens\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAdding additional types for SNMP, licenses and additional information\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExtend classes and properties of IT Assets\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA license for the Customizing module is necessary to extend the database structure, add new meta objects and create data entry screens. Modified settings can easily be transferred to other Docusnap installations.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/introductions/","title":"Introduction"},{"content":"A permission analysis requires that the NTFS permissions to the directories have been stored in the database. For this purpose, you can use a wizard or the Docusnap server.\nThe NTFS Permissions Analysis wizard can be started from the IT Security ribbon.\nCompany Selection Unlike a network scan, a NTFS permissions scan does not allow you to create a new company. You need to select an existing company. A Windows, CIFS or DFS inventory scan must already have been performed for this company. Otherwise, it will not be possible to retrieve the permissions.\nAuthentication Please note that only existing domains in a company may be selected for authentication. After you have selected the domain, Docusnap will display the user name and password that were used for creating the network inventory. If desired, you can also enter the credentials of another user. Aside from this, you can also use the name and password of the currently logged-on user to perform the inventory scan. In this case, only select the domain and leave the User Name and Password fields blank. Afterwards, click the Check Credentials button to check if the user is a member of the domain and if the proper password has been entered. After successful authentication, the Next button will be enabled.\nSystems All Windows systems that have been scanned will be displayed on the Systems wizard step. In addition, it lists all drives on the corresponding systems. Alternatively, the individual shares of a system can be listed by checking the checkbox Use Shares for Windows Systems.\nUse the checkbox next to each system to indicate whether the permissions for that system are to be scanned or not. If a system has multiple drives, a separate system entry will be listed for each drive. If the checkbox Use Shares for Windows Systems is checked, then all the shares of a system are available for selection. Thus, the scope of the permission scan can be selected individually for every system. Using a Filter, you can filter the systems list for individual values, for example, names or types of systems.\nFor systems based on the SMB or CIFS protocol, such as NetApp Filer or Samba Server, the available shares rather than the local drives will be displayed for selection on the those systems.\nLikewise for DFS systems, all existing shares will be available for selection.\nScan Folder Size: If the checkbox Scan Folder Size is selected, the folder size is inventoried for each folder. Otherwise, each folder will be displayed with the size 0. To determine the folder size for large folders can prolong the duration of the inventory.\nLimit Folder Levels: The Limit Folder Levels option allows you to specify up to how many levels the folders should be scanned. This can be helpful, for example, if the permissions are only inherited after a certain level.\nScheduled NTFS analyses: To consider drives or shares that have not yet existed during scheduling of the inventory (Docusnap Server or Docusnap Discovery Service), the checkbox For scheduled NTFS analyses: Automatically inventory permissions of new drives/shares from already selected systems can be activated. With this option, for systems where drives or shares have already been selected, additional drives or shares are searched for during the inventory and these are inventoried as well. If drives or shares are excluded from the list, they will still not be inventoried. If a filter is entered in the Drive column, newly found drives or shares are only inventoried if they match the filter.\nIf you wish to exclude a directory from the inventory scan, you can specify this exclusion in the NTFS Filter dialog. When you add a directory to this list, all its subdirectories will be excluded from the analysis as well. For example, this is helpful for user profiles or temporary Internet directories.\nNTFS inventory ignores junction points.\nSummary Page All systems and drives to be inventoried will be listed on the Summary page.\nScheduling By using the scheduling feature, you can specify a later time for the automatic start of the permission scan. In the scheduling window, you can indicate whether the scan should be performed only once or repeatedly.\nIn order to use this feature, the Docusnap Server component must be configured on a system in the network.\nStatus After the process has started, this page will display the progress of the inventory scan. If you wish to abort the inventory process, click the Cancel button. The NTFS permissions of all scanned systems with the Completed status will be written to the database. Permissions for systems where the scan process has not yet been completed will not be saved.\nSummary Page The Report page displays how many systems have been successfully inventoried. To exit the wizard, click the Close button.\nDuring the inventory scan, there may be no connection to the target system if a different user than the one logged on to the desktop was specified. Microsoft only allows one single connection to a target system during a session and would otherwise generate an error. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eA permission analysis requires that the NTFS permissions to the directories have been stored in the database. For this purpose, you can use a wizard or the Docusnap server.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eNTFS Permissions Analysis\u003c/em\u003e wizard can be started from the \u003cem\u003eIT Security\u003c/em\u003e ribbon.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/file-system/inventory-permissions/docusnap-permission-analysis-general.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Permission-Analysis-General\" title=\"Docusnap-Permission-Analysis-General\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"company-selection\"\u003eCompany Selection\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUnlike a network scan, a NTFS permissions scan does not allow you to create a new company. You need to select an existing company. A Windows, CIFS or DFS inventory scan must already have been performed for this company. Otherwise, it will not be possible to retrieve the permissions.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/file-system/inventory-permissions/","title":"Inventory Permissions"},{"content":"For the tasks involved in an inventory scan, Docusnap provides a wizard-based user interface that will be referred to as Wizard in this documentation. The Docusnap inventory wizard consists of several steps, which are combined differently depending on which system type (Windows systems, VMware infrastructure, etc.) is to be scanned. The following figure illustrates the basic steps each wizard includes.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eFor the tasks involved in an inventory scan, Docusnap provides a wizard-based user interface that will be referred to as \u003cem\u003eWizard\u003c/em\u003e in this documentation. The Docusnap inventory wizard consists of several steps, which are combined differently depending on which system type (Windows systems, VMware infrastructure, etc.) is to be scanned. The following figure illustrates the basic steps each wizard includes.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/docusnap-network-inventory-overview-graph.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Network Inventory Overview Graph\" title=\"Docusnap Network Inventory Overview Graph\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/","title":"Inventory Wizards"},{"content":"Click the Manage IT Assets button to open the IT Asset structure. Use this tab to create the structure of your IT assets. User-defined Structures are prefixed with a lowercase x.\nCategories Click the New button and select Category to create a new category. You can enter a name and labels in English and German for the category. You can also enter a description in both languages. Below any category, you can create IT assets or subcategories.\nClass Click New button and then Class to create an IT asset under the selected category node. You can enter a name and labels in English and German for the IT asset. Docusnap suggests a particular icon for each class. You can change this icon using the button. The icon selected in Icon is used to display the IT assets in the tree. The icon selected in preview icon is used when IT assets are displayed in maps or diagrams. If necessary the size of the icons is adjusted. To be displayed correctly, the original size of the icons should be about 16x16 pixels and the size of the preview icons should be about 100x100 pixels.\nBy unchecking the Active checkbox, you can deactivate the class so that it is no longer selectable when you create new IT assets. In the display field, select the property whose value should be displayed in the tree view. After you have saved the class, Docusnap creates the General tab and the General section. Subclasses may be created under each class.\nIt is recommended that only properties of type Text are used as display fields. Other types can be displayed in the tree, but if an IT asset is to be included for example in the maps, no other type than text is supported and otherwise an empty entry is displayed. Tab In addition to the General tab, which is created for each class and which cannot be deleted, you may create other tabs. These will be displayed as additional tabs when you create IT assets. Besides the name, you can enter labels in English and German for each tab. The Active checkbox allows you to enable/disable the tab.\nSection For each class, Docusnap creates a General section. You can rename or delete this section. Sections are used to group the properties of the IT assets in the editor area. You can enter a name and labels in English and German for each section. The Active checkbox allows you to enable/disable the section. The Column Formats allow you to define how to arrange the properties in the editor area.\nProperties Properties are used to specify values for the IT assets. Create the properties under the desired section. Click the New button and select Property to define new properties. You can enter a name and labels in English and German for each property. The Active checkbox allows you to enable/disable the property. Various property types are available:\nColor Picker: With the color picker type a color can be selected. Data Grid: With the Data Grid multiple entries can be assigned to one IT asset. For example, to one IT asset can be assigned to multiple processes. The mapping is stored in an additional table. These tables can be created in the Manage Tables tab.\nReference Table: Name of the table to be displayed in the data grid. This table contains the list of the available items.\nMapping Table: Name of the table in which the connection between the assigned values and the IT assets is stored.\nReference Field: Name of the field in the related table where the selected data from the reference table will be stored.\nForeign Key Field: Name of the column in which the ObjectID of IT assets will be stored. Sort Entries: This option sorts the entries alphabetically according to the first column. If this option is not active, views will use the sorting specified in the statement, and tables will display the data in the order in which it was inserted into the table. Date: If you select the Date type, a date selection for specifying the date will be provided in the editor area. Decimal: If you select the Decimal type, only decimal numbers can be inserted into the text box. In addition, you can set a factor for the conversion of numeric values. Example: A factor of 1024 would convert a value from bytes into kilobytes. Here, you can define the formatting of numeric values according to standard conventions. Valid placeholders are the # character for any numeric value and the digit 0 for numeric values which are padded with leading zeros if they are too small. The comma is used as the thousands separator, and the period as the decimal separator. The specified unit is added to the property name in brackets in the header. Examples: #,##0.00 MB, 00 h List: If you select the List type values will be selectable in the editor area. Only one value can be selected. For the selection list, different view formats are available, which are defined in the List Type combobox. Sort Entries: This option sorts the entries alphabetically according to the first column. If this option is not active, views will use the sorting specified in the statement, and tables will display the data in the order in which it was inserted into the table. Combobox: As data sources you can use a database table or initial values. A reference to a table is specified [TableName] and a reference to an initial value is input with {InitialValue}. Selection Grid: If a list has a lot of entries or if for selection data from several columns are relevant, a Selection Grid can be used. In the Selection Grid you can specify as many columns as you want and it is possible to filter the list. The data source is specified in the list reference. If a view is used as a database table, the statement can also be used to specify a sort order of the data with \u0026ldquo;order by\u0026rdquo; and to filter it, for example, according to the company by using the variable {AccountID} as a filter. Selection TreeView: The Selection TreeView is used when the data should be displayed in hierarchical form. The specified parameters are the same as for the Selection Grid, only that in addition a recursion field can be specified for the TreeView. For example, domains may have a subdomain, or sites may be created beneath other sites. To display this structure, the selection tree view is used. The Selection TreeView shows the Display Field of the selected table or view. List Values: If List Values is selected the additional tab List Values is displayed. Here entries can be defined, which are then available in a combo box for selection in the editor area. The manual entries are always sorted alphabetically. Multi-Line Text: If you select the Multi-Line Text type, you can enter text without any length limitation. For this type, you can specify the height of the text box in the Line Height field. Network Information: If you select the Network Information type, you can specify the IP Address, the Subnet Mask, and the MAC Address for this IT asset. This information can then also be added to the network maps. Number: If you select the Number type, the text box will only accept integers.\nIn addition, you can set a factor for the conversion of numeric values.\nHere, you can define the formatting of numeric values according to standard conventions and include a unit. Valid placeholders include the hash symbol \u0026ldquo;#\u0026rdquo; for any numeric value and \u0026ldquo;0\u0026rdquo; for numeric values that should be padded with leading zeroes if they are too small for the field. The thousands separator is a comma, and the period is used as the decimal separator. The specified unit is added to the property name in brackets in the header. Examples: #,##0.00 MB or 00 h Number Server: The number server can be defined in the Advanced ribbon and can be used to assign a continuous number to every new generated IT asset. In the Settings an existing Number Server can be chosen, when you select the type Number Server. You find further information on the definition of Number Servers in the configuration manual. Text: If you select the Text type, Docusnap will display a text box in the editor area. Tree View: With the Tree View multiple entries can be assigned to one IT asset. The selection can also be represented as a hierarchical tree. The mapping is stored in an additional table. These tables can be created in the Manage Tables tab.\nReference Table: Name of the table to be displayed in the data grid. This table contains the list of the available items.\nMapping Table: Name of the table in which the connection between the assigned values and the IT assets is stored.\nReference Field: Name of the field in the related table where the selected data from the reference table will be stored.\nRecursion Field: Name of an existing recursive field if the reference table is recursive.\nForeign Key Field: Name of the column in which the ObjectID of IT assets will be stored. User/Group Selection: With the type User/Group Selection users or groups from the ADS inventory can be assigned to an IT asset. When creating the IT asset the name of wanted user or group can be entered. Once the first letter is typed, the matching entries are suggested. Users and groups can be added via enter key or selection via the mouse from the suggestion list. Click the button to open the dialog for the advanced search. In this dialog the selection of users and groups can be filtered by several conditions. Afterwards the selected user or group can be assigned to the IT asset. You find further information on the filter in the chapter Permission Analysis of the user manual. Yes/No: For a property of the *Yes/No type, a checkbox will be displayed in the editor area. Icons For the Data Grid, the Selection TreeView, the Selection Grid and the Tree View, an icon can be selected, which is then displayed with this property. If desired, you can define your own icons for different types. For example, for each system type (workstation, server, etc.) the appropriate icon.\nYou can move classes and categories or change the order in which the properties are listed in the editor area by drag\u0026amp;drop.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eManage IT Assets\u003c/em\u003e button to open the IT Asset structure. Use this tab to create the structure of your IT assets. User-defined Structures are prefixed with a lowercase x.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"categories\"\u003eCategories\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button and select \u003cem\u003eCategory\u003c/em\u003e to create a new category. You can enter a name and labels in English and German for the category. You can also enter a description in both languages. Below any category, you can create IT assets or subcategories.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/it-assets/it-assets-structure/","title":"IT Assets Structure"},{"content":"The Layout Control is used to make the display of the data entry screens more flexible. The controls are assigned to the Layout Control and the alignment and size of the elements are automatically adjusted.\nIn the first step select the Layout Control in the toolbox and add it via Drag \u0026amp; Drop to the workspace. The property Dock is used to define if the control is bound to one or several borders of the workspace. The setting Fill is best suited for the shaping of the data entry screen.\nAfterwards, the desired controls are dragged into the workspace.\nFor each control on the layout control the label and the actual element are displayed. For each element specific settings can be made. By clicking on the label the layout settings are displayed in the Properties window.\nSpecific Properties of Layout Control Size In most cases, the default value of 0,0 is maintained, thereby the size is set automatically by the Layout Control. Height / Height Type The height of each control can be set in pixels (Absolute) or a percentage (Percent). The HeightType defines whether the value in the Height property represents pixels or a percentage.\nIf the height of all the controls are given in percent, then the height will be divided according to the specified percentage. If the sum of the specified values exceeds​​ 100, a scrollbar is displayed.\nIf the heights of the controls on one tab are defined in absolute values and percent, then the available height will be used for the controls with the absolute values. The remaining height will be divided according to the specified percentage among the controls with the percentage values. For example define the height for the textboxes with an absolute value of 30 px and then define 100 percent for a rich text field to occupy the remaining space.\nUse percentages so the data entry masks are displayed properly on screens with different resolutions. Padding This property defines the distance to the borders. By default the padding is 10 px to the top, left and right. TextDE / TextEN For every control a caption is displayed. Using these two properties, the names of the controls in both German and English are entered, with TextDE represents the German name and TextEN represents the name in English. Text Visible When adding a control a label is created. If this label should not be displayed, the TextVisible property must be set to false. Width / Width Type The width of each control can be set in pixels (Absolute) or a percentage (Percent). The WidthType defines whether the value in the Width property represents pixels or a percentage.\nBy default, each control is created with width 100 and width type Percent. Thus a control element stretches over the entire width. If the controls should be displayed side by side, the width must be changed to 50 percent. The percentages can be assigned as desired, but controls can be only be placed next to each other, if the sum of specified percentages does not exceed 100.\nIf the widths of the controls on one line are defined in absolute values and percent, then the available width will be used for the controls with the absolute values. The remaining width will be divided according to the specified percentage among the controls with the percentage values. The default values ​​that are set when adding a control to a layout control, can be changed in the layout control. After changing the default values all the controls, which are added to this layout control, are created with the default values. Controls that have already been added are not changed.\nTo configure the settings of the control, highlight the control itself.\nWhen a control is added to the Layout Control, some properties such as size, docking and location are controlled by the Layout Control. Therefore, these properties are disabled for the individual controls. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Layout Control is used to make the display of the data entry screens more flexible. The controls are assigned to the Layout Control and the alignment and size of the elements are automatically adjusted.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the first step select the Layout Control in the toolbox and add it via Drag \u0026amp; Drop to the workspace. The property Dock is used to define if the control is bound to one or several borders of the workspace. The setting \u003cem\u003eFill\u003c/em\u003e is best suited for the shaping of the data entry screen.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/layout-control/","title":"Layout Control"},{"content":"Using the Management Tools feature, you can embed external programs into Docusnap or start them from there. It is possible to specify additional parameters to be used when starting the program.\nDuring the Docusnap installation process, the Remote Desktop Connection has already been created. When you create the management tools you can define for which host types they should be available.\nThe management tools are available from the context menu of items located in the tree at levels below the Workstations or Servers nodes.\nThe management tools can be started either from the context menu or using the button.\nTo define the Management Tools open the Docusnap Management.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eUsing the Management Tools feature, you can embed external programs into Docusnap or start them from there. It is possible to specify additional parameters to be used when starting the program.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDuring the Docusnap installation process, the Remote Desktop Connection has already been created. When you create the management tools you can define for which host types they should be available.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe management tools are available from the context menu of items located in the tree at levels below the Workstations or Servers nodes.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/advanced-topics/management-tools/","title":"Management Tools"},{"content":"The Concepts ribbon displays when you have selected Concepts in the Documentation tree. Using this ribbon, you can edit and change concepts.\nTemplates: Clicking the Templates button opens the Concept Templates dialog.\nStore Concepts / Load Concepts: Concepts, versions, backups and templates can be saved as a file. These can then be imported into other companies or other databases.\nAdd Composition/Edit Composition: A composition is a document created from multiple concepts. If the concepts of the composition are changed, the composition document also changes. The export of compositions can be planned in a time-controlled manner like the export of the concepts.\nIf the node Concepts or a concept folder in the tree has been selected, the button Add Composition can be used to open the Manage IT Concept Composition dialog. If a composition has been selected, the dialog to edit a composition can be opened via the Edit Composition button.\nSchedule as Job: Clicking this button opens a wizard which allows you to schedule creation of a concept for a certain date and time.\nAction bar Edit: A click on the Edit button launches the Concept Editor where you can edit the selected concept.\nRefresh: Use the button to update the concept. This reloads the data for data elements, reports, etc. and recreates the table of contents.\nPrint: By clicking the button, you can print the selected concept.\nExport Concept: Using the button, you can export your concept to Word, PDF, or other formats.\nClone Concept: Click on the button Clone Concept to copy the selected concept. The name can then be changed in the Concept Properties dialog.\nProperties: Click on the Properties button to open the Concept Properties Dialog. In this dialog the name of the concept and the author can be changed. In addition, the date of change and creation as well as the size are displayed. A description of the concept can also be added.\nAssign: Clicking this button opens the Assign Concept dialog which allows you to insert the desired concept into other tree views. It is also possible to add a concept folder to a node in one of the other trees.\nRestore: Clicking the Restore button restores the selected version or the selected backup as a concept and can be edited. The previous concept remains as the last backup.\nKeep: Since only a certain number of versions and backups of a document can be stored, you can click this button to select and keep a certain version or backup. This prevents the current document version from deletion.\nConcept Editor General Save: After clicking the Save button, you can decide whether to simply save the concept, to save it as a new version, or to save it as a template.\nRefresh: Use the Refresh button to update the concept. You can specify whether you would like to refresh the entire concept or just the document outline. A refresh of the entire document reloads the data for data elements, reports, etc. and recreates the table of contents. When you just refresh the document outline, the system recreates the table of contents and reloads the entries in the navigation pane.\nExport: Using the Export button, you can export your concept to Word, PDF, or other formats.\nPrint: By clicking the Print button, you can print the open concept.\nDraft View: By enabling the draft view elements such as reports, plans, relationships, etc. are not completely displayed, only a placeholder is shown at the location at which they were inserted. Thereby the concept has not as many pages and is easier to process.\nEdit Paste: Using the Paste button, you can insert elements from the clipboard into the text area.\nCut: This button allows you to cut selected text elements.\nCopy: This button allows you to copy selected text elements to the clipboard.\nHierarchical structure: By clicking the arrows, you can change the hierarchical level and order of the headings in your concept.\nFind: The button allows you to find particular parts in the entire text quickly and easily.\nReplace: The button allows you to find and replace certain text parts.\nFormatting This group contains buttons that can be used to change the font, color, and typeface of your text.\nParagraph The buttons in the Paragraph group allow you to adjust the alignment and formatting of the paragraphs in your text area.\nStyles For text formatting, Styles are available which allow you to edit the text in your entire document in a centralized way. These styles are also needed when creating the table of contents.\nDocument Design: Clicking the Design button opens the Designs and Styles dialog. This dialog allows you to individually define the design of your concept.\nSpell Check: Click the Spell Check button to start the integrated spell checker.\nValidate: By clicking the Validate button, you can check the concept for validity. Any errors found will be displayed in the error list. An error is present if, e.g., an inserted diagram was deleted or if a report does not exist any longer.\nProperties: Click the Properties button to open a window which lists the properties of your concept. Here, the title and author of the concepts may be changed. You can also enter an additional description. The properties also include additional information such as the date when the concept was last modified.\nInsert Use the Insert ribbon to insert different elements into your concept.\nHeader and Footer: Use the Header or Footer button to open an additional tab where you can specify your header and footer settings. Page Layout Orientation: The options below this button can be used to specify portrait or landscape format.\nBreaks: Click the Breaks button to insert a page break. Two different types of page breaks, i.e. Continuous and Next Page can be selected.\nPage Setup: Click the Page Setup button to adjust the margins, paper size, header and footer, columns, and borders of your document.\nParagraph: This button opens a dialog that allows you to change the formatting, indents, frame, and page breaks of your document.\nTabs: This button opens the Tabs dialog where you can set and change various indents.\nPage Color: A color can be selected for the page.\nData Elements If you highlight a certain element such as a map, a diagram, or a data element, an additional ribbon displays.\nSettings: When you click the Settings button, you can specify further settings for the selected element.\nRefresh: For elements such as data elements, maps, or diagrams, you can click the Refresh button to load their current version.\nDelete: Click the Delete button to delete the selected element.\nDraft View: By enabling the draft view the selected element is not completely displayed, only a placeholder is shown at the location at which it was inserted.\nTable Tools The Table Tools ribbon display when you insert a new table or select an existing table.\nTable Settings: Here, you can change table properties such as the distance from text or the cell height.\nSelect Table: Click the Select Table button to select the entire table.\nSelect Row; Select Cell: These two buttons can be used to select the row or cell where the cursor is currently placed.\nRows and Columns Delete Table; Delete Columns; Delete Rows: These options can be used to delete the entire table, selected columns, or selected rows. These options display when you click the Delete button.\nInsert Above; Insert Below; Insert to the Left; Insert to the Right: These four buttons can be used to insert more columns and lines into an existing table.\nMerge Merge Cells: Click this button to merge the selected cells into one.\nSplit Cells: Clicking this button allows you to split the highlighted merged cell again.\nSplit Table: Click this button to split the existing table into two.\nTable Styles Various styles are available for tables. Click the little arrows next to the buttons and select the desired basic shading for your table.\nBorders and Color In the Borders and Color group, you can select the shading, border color, border, and line width for the selected part of the table.\nHeader and Footer This ribbon allows you to create headers and footers. Close: Click this button to end the editing of your headers and footers. You are taken back to the General ribbon.\nHeader; Footer: Use these buttons to enable, disable and modify your headers and footers.\nDifferent First Page: Tick this checkbox to create a special header and footer for the first page of your document.\nLink to Previous: If you enable the Link to Previous feature, a document with multiple sections will always use the header and / or footer of the previous section.\nPosition In the Position group, you can change the position of your headers and / or footers.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eConcepts\u003c/em\u003e ribbon displays when you have selected Concepts in the \u003cem\u003eDocumentation\u003c/em\u003e tree. Using this ribbon, you can edit and change concepts.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/concept/menu-ribbon/docusnap-it-concepts-ribbon.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-IT-Concepts-Ribbon\" title=\"Docusnap-IT-Concepts-Ribbon\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTemplates: Clicking the Templates button opens the \u003cem\u003eConcept Templates\u003c/em\u003e dialog.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStore Concepts / Load Concepts: Concepts, versions, backups and templates can be saved as a file. These can then be imported into other companies or other databases.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdd Composition/Edit Composition: A composition is a document created from multiple concepts. If the concepts of the composition are changed, the composition document also changes. The export of compositions can be planned in a time-controlled manner like the export of the concepts.\u003cbr\u003e\nIf the node \u003cem\u003eConcepts\u003c/em\u003e or a concept folder in the tree has been selected, the button \u003cem\u003eAdd Composition\u003c/em\u003e can be used to open the \u003cem\u003eManage IT Concept Composition\u003c/em\u003e dialog. If a composition has been selected, the dialog to edit a composition can be opened via the \u003cem\u003eEdit Composition\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/menu-ribbon/","title":"Menu Ribbon"},{"content":"Docusnap wizards, dialogs and functions are mostly accessed via the Ribbon.\nThe All Wizards button opens a dialog with all Wizards in this area. The wizards and dialog can be opened from this overview. By clicking on the icon, buttons can be defined as favorites. These are then displayed in the Ribbon. Some wizards are already defined as favorites in the standard system.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap wizards, dialogs and functions are mostly accessed via the Ribbon.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/menu-ribbon/docusnap-menu-inventory.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Menu-Inventory\" title=\"Docusnap-Menu-Inventory\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe All Wizards button opens a dialog with all Wizards in this area. The wizards and dialog can be opened from this overview. By clicking on the\n\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/menu-ribbon/docusnap-ribbon-favorites-define.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Ribbon-Favorites-define\" title=\"Docusnap-Ribbon-Favorites-define\"\u003e icon, buttons can be defined as favorites. These are then displayed in the Ribbon. Some wizards are already defined as favorites in the standard system.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/menu-ribbon/docusnap-menu-all-wizards.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Menu-All-Wizards\" title=\"Docusnap-Menu-All-Wizards\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/menu-ribbon/","title":"Menu Ribbon"},{"content":"When you create a software product from the License Management module, you have to assign it to a metric. Docusnap provides predefined metrics. In the Metrics tab, you can edit the existing metrics or create new ones.\nThe metrics can be named both in English and German. The name itself may be chosen freely.\nThe assignment of a metric determines the basic settings, such as the type of licensing, for the product. The metric you select here determines whether it will be possible to use keywords and create system assignments or user assignments in later wizard steps. The selected assignment determines whether the licenses in this metric will be assigned to devices, processors, processor cores, users, or not at all.\nIf you prefer not to use a keyword-based assignment, tick the No Detection of Use checkbox.\nThe word Manual in the names of the predefined matrics indicates that no keyword-based search will be used. Rather, the licenses in use need to be entered manually.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWhen you create a software product from the License Management module, you have to assign it to a metric. Docusnap provides predefined metrics. In the \u003cem\u003eMetrics\u003c/em\u003e tab, you can edit the existing metrics or create new ones.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe metrics can be named both in English and German. The name itself may be chosen freely.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe assignment of a metric determines the basic settings, such as the type of licensing, for the product. The metric you select here determines whether it will be possible to use keywords and create system assignments or user assignments in later wizard steps. The selected \u003cem\u003eassignment\u003c/em\u003e determines whether the licenses in this metric will be assigned to devices, processors, processor cores, users, or not at all.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/license-management/metrics/","title":"Metrics"},{"content":"\nWhen you navigate to the Inventory tab on the ribbon, the buttons used to create an inventory of the IT environment become accessible.\nInventorying the Network Depending on which systems you want to inventory, the respective wizard can be started.\nClick the Network Scan button to open the inventory wizard. From this wizard, you can access a number of separate wizards.\nIn addition to the Network Scan wizard, which already contains several modules by default, custom wizards can be configured to combine several modules in one wizard. The customized wizards can be configured in Docusnap Management.\nInitial Scan The Initial Scan inventories basic information about the Active Directory, the Windows systems, DHCP, DNS, and Exchange server and SNMP devices.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/docusnap-inventory-networkinventory-graph.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Network Inventory Graph\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Network Inventory Graph\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you navigate to the \u003cem\u003eInventory\u003c/em\u003e tab on the ribbon, the buttons used to create an inventory of the IT environment become accessible.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/docusnap-menu-inventory.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Menu Inventory\" title=\"Docusnap Menu Inventory\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"inventorying-the-network\"\u003eInventorying the Network\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDepending on which systems you want to inventory, the respective wizard can be started.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNetwork Scan\u003c/em\u003e button to open the inventory wizard. From this wizard, you can access a number of separate wizards.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/","title":"Network Inventory"},{"content":"The network or routing map can be created using the Create Docu wizard, the Network wizard or by clicking on the Network Map or Routing Map node in the tree.\nDocumentation Wizard In the Create Map for combobox, you can select whether the maps are to be created for the Company \u0026amp; Domain, for the Domain only, or for the Company only. Only domains selected in the Domain Selection step are considered.\nIn the maps for the company, all selected domains are combined in one map.\nThe maps for the company will be stored in the Maps folder directly under the folder with the company name. (\\Documentation Path\\Company\\maps\\network)\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\maps\\routing)\nIf you create the maps for the domain, the Visio file and the HTML file are saved to the Maps folder of that domain. (\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\maps\\network)\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\maps\\routing)\nWhen selecting the domain(s), you can also specify whether to include IT assets in the network map or not. If you enable the IT Assets entry, all IT assets where a value of the Network Information type has been defined will be displayed for selection.\nOn this page, you can specify whether to create the network map and/or the routing map.\nAll systems existing in the selected domains are displayed in the Systems table. To include a system in the network or routing map, tick the corresponding checkbox. Using the filter in the selection list you can search for specific devices. For more information about filtering, see the Filters chapter. To include only servers, workstations, Linux systems, etc. into your network map or routing map, click the corresponding icon(s). Clicking each icon a second time will exclude the respective system type again.\nYou can create datasheets for the individual systems. These datasheets can be linked to the objects in the network map and the routing map. The options under Advanced, which are also available as preferences in the Options dialog, allow you to specify the formats used for datasheet linking, if desired. The links will be created even if that particular datasheet does not exist yet. This way, datasheets created subsequently will also be linked to the systems in the network map and the routing map.\nDocusnap also provides Management tools. For example, you can establish a remote desktop connection to a previously found system. The management tools can also be used with the two map types and the HTML file. For this purpose, a Scripts folder that contains the scripts required for the management tools will be created in the Datasheets folder.\nIf IT assets with a value of the Network Information type have been defined, they will be shown in the list. To include an IT asset in the network map, tick the corresponding checkbox.\nThe preview window reflects the layout of the network map or routing map.\nAd hoc map in the tree The maps can be created by clicking on the Network Map or Routing Map node in the tree.These maps are always created using the current data and are generated each time they are opened. In contrast to the wizard, it is not possible to exclude individual systems. The other optional settings can also be made for the ad hoc plans.\nOptions You can change the layout, if required. For most network and routing maps, it is recommended to use the default settings. You can adjust both map types individually:\nNetwork map If you enable the Group Workstations or Group SNMP Systems checkbox, the workstations or SNMP equipment will be drawn on the network map as one single object. If there are more than 500 objects in the network map, objects of the workstation type are automatically grouped for performance reasons, regardless of the selected map options. Two other options allow you to include IP systems and ignore VMware adapters. Details about the individual computers that are present in the network will be displayed on an additional datasheet.\nBy enabling the Group IT Assets checkbox, you can group all IT assets and output them as a single object.\nIn the HTML view of the map, the various datasheets will be displayed as links in the left pane of the browser. The Visio file and the HTML file will be stored in the Maps folder.\nRouting map The routing map preview provides a checkbox that enables you to ignore the VMware adapters.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe network or routing map can be created using the \u003cem\u003eCreate Docu\u003c/em\u003e wizard, the \u003cem\u003eNetwork\u003c/em\u003e wizard or by clicking on the \u003cem\u003eNetwork Map\u003c/em\u003e or \u003cem\u003eRouting Map\u003c/em\u003e node in the tree.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"documentation-wizard\"\u003eDocumentation Wizard\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eCreate Map for\u003c/em\u003e combobox, you can select whether the maps are to be created for the \u003cem\u003eCompany \u0026amp; Domain,\u003c/em\u003e for the \u003cem\u003eDomain\u003c/em\u003e only, or for the \u003cem\u003eCompany\u003c/em\u003e only. Only domains selected in the \u003cem\u003eDomain Selection\u003c/em\u003e step are considered.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/network-map/","title":"Network Map"},{"content":"Click the Notification button in the All Jobs area to open the Notification wizard.\nThis wizard allows you to set the interval for criteria checks and to specify the intended e-mail recipients.\nThe first step is to select the company. By selecting the company, you determine which company will be used for the SQL Statement.\nHere, you define the notification to be sent. The Template drop-down list offers some predefined notification types for selection. In the SQL Query field, you can see which SQL statement will be used for the selected notification type. If the {Domain} variable is part of the statement, you must select a filter. A domain must be selected for the {Domain} variable. Only domains for the in the first step selected company will be displayed as filters.\nSpecify the e-mail address of the intended recipient in the Recipient field and the subject of the notification in the Subject field.\nThen, enter the body text of the notification in the Message field.\nThe results from the SQL statement will be attached to the e-mail as an Excel file. If the execution of the statement does not return a result set, no e-mail will be sent. This could be the case, for example, if the program checks for invalid licenses and none of the license expiration dates is earlier than or matches the current date.\nIn the next step, you can define scheduling details. Scheduling allows you to define the date(s) and time(s) for execution of the SQL statement.\nScheduling is only available if the Docusnap Server service has been set up properly and the connection between the server service and an SMTP server has been tested successfully. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eClick the Notification button in the \u003cem\u003eAll Jobs\u003c/em\u003e area to open the \u003cem\u003eNotification\u003c/em\u003e wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis wizard allows you to set the interval for criteria checks and to specify the intended e-mail recipients.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe first step is to select the company. By selecting the company, you determine which company will be used for the SQL Statement.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/advanced-topics/notifications/define-notifications/docusnap-messages-company-selection.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Messages-Company-Selection\" title=\"Docusnap-Messages-Company-Selection\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHere, you define the notification to be sent. The \u003cem\u003eTemplate\u003c/em\u003e drop-down list offers some predefined notification types for selection. In the \u003cem\u003eSQL Query\u003c/em\u003e field, you can see which SQL statement will be used for the selected notification type. If the {Domain} variable is part of the statement, you must select a filter. A domain must be selected for the {Domain} variable. Only domains for the in the first step selected company will be displayed as filters.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/advanced-topics/notifications/define-notifications/","title":"Notifications"},{"content":"It is possible to extend the Docusnap Wizard if needed. The optional step is activated in the Options - Inventory dialog in the General tab.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIt is possible to extend the Docusnap Wizard if needed. The optional step is activated in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/options-inventory/\" title=\"Options - Inventory\"\u003eOptions - Inventory\u003c/a\u003e dialog in the \u003cem\u003eGeneral\u003c/em\u003e tab.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/optional-steps/","title":"Optional Steps"},{"content":"Click the button in the title bar to open the Options dialog.\nThe Options dialog consists of the following pages:\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/settings/options/docusnap-title-bar-options.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Options\" title=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Options\"\u003e button in the title bar to open the Options dialog.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Options dialog consists of the following pages:\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/settings/options/","title":"Optionen"},{"content":"Create Package Use the Connect area to create and manage Docusnap Connect Packages. This area can be accessed via the navigation bar.\nCreate New Package Click on the New button to create a new Docusnap Connect package. The title, text German and text English are then filled in and the data saved.\nIn the Table Name list all already defined tables are displayed. When you first open a package an empty table is already created. Enter the name to be assigned to the table after the export in the Table Name field.\nDocusnap Object The objects containing the data to be exported must be selected. By clicking on Add Docusnap Objects the already known tree structure is displayed and allows navigation and selection of the information.\nIf data of an inventory is selected, only the current data of the last inventory is exported. Element: In the Element combobox, select the object whose data you want to export. Column: By double-clicking a field in the Column list, you can display the columns of the selected object. Select the desired column there. If you no longer need a column, you can remove it by selecting the line and either click the Delete button or press the Del key on your keyboard. Alias: In the Alias column, you can specify the name of the column in the exported table. Each name in the Alias column must be unique. Display: If you enable the Display checkbox, the column will be displayed in the exported table. By disabling it, you can hide fields that are only used for data filtering. Use Reference: For columns with a reference specified, the reference can be added to the export. If you enable the Use Reference checkbox, the number in the column will be replaced with the corresponding reference text. When exporting, you can select the language in which you want the reference to appear. Grouping: Here, you can select whether the respective column will be used for grouping or whether to calculate the count, maximum, minimum, sum, or average of the column. Sort Order: Using the Sort Order column, you can define the column order. Filter: Here, you can enter any valid SQL condition (e.g. = 1). To hide the column used for filtering, you can disable the Display checkbox for this column. The clause can further be extended by additional fields or conditions. The filter can only address another column by using the alias. This must be specified with {Alias:Aliasname of column}. Only output records that correspond to the filter condition: This option is set directly at the table. This option determines whether data is only displayed if there is corresponding data in all specified nodes. If this option is not activated and, for example, for workstations the inventoried printers should be listed, then workstations for which no printer was found will also be included. If the option is activated, only workstations for which a printer was inventoried are listed in this example. This option is especially needed if a grouping is used and a filter is applied to it. In order for the specified filter to be applied to all data, the option must be enabled. Otherwise, only the data from the node will be filtered and the data from the other nodes will all be listed. For example, the latest installation date can be searched in the grouping and then filtered to list only systems whose last update was more than 90 days ago. Static Fields Static values can be exported, in addition to the values from the table. Click on the button Add Static Fields to open the dialog for the static fields. The specified name is used as the column header and the value is specified in the table. As soon as a static value is created, it is included in the export. Values that are no longer required can be removed by clicking on the Delete button.\nMultiple Tables To export multiple tables, click the New button to add more tables for which the data can be configured. Click on the table name and it will be highlighted and can be edited. If you want to be able to link the data from the different tables after exporting to a database, the primary and foreign keys should also be selected.\nPreview (Test) Once you have selected the tables and columns, you can click the Preview (Test) button to check the table output. By default, the first ten data rows of the table are shown in the preview. You can change this value in the Limit Data Rows to: field.\nFor the export, an additional column named ONC will be added to the data. This column identifies each object unambiguously so that, during an update of the SQL database, the objects can be mapped without problems. This column is also used for DocusnapLink when switching from another application to this Docusnap node.\nThe export time for larger amounts of data can be significantly increased due to the recursive query for the creation of the ONC. If the ONC is not needed, the output of the ONC can be deactivated with the option Show ONC for the tables to improve the performance.\nIf an error occurs during the export test, it will be displayed as an error message in the lower area.\nUnion At the bottom, clicking on the button creates a union. The Union works like a union in SQL. The data from various objects is combined in one table. If the same Alias name is given for columns in the different definitions, the data is output in one column. If there is no matching Alias name in the other definition for one column, that column will be left empty for the entries in the other table.\nFor example, the union can be used to show the systems from the Workstations node and the Servers node in one table.\nIf a UNION column is formed from several columns, these must not use different references. The references can be initial values, references to tables, lists for IT assets, etc. It is not possible to resolve the data correctly if columns with different references are combined with the UNION into one column.\nFor example, if two tables that make up the UNION each have a Type column, but they are translated with two different initial values, then they cannot be displayed in the same column. To be able to include these data, they must be defined in the UNION with different alias names so that they can be displayed as two columns.\nDefinition for server\nDefinition for servers\nIn this example, a union was added for the node server. The same names have been assigned for the columns. This will then output the data of the two definitions like in the preview.\nBy double-clicking on or , a different name can be specified. Especially when multiple unions are used, naming the definitions makes it easier to select the right one.\nCustomized Objects Customized objects and tables can be exported with Docusnap Connect. If a user table has been created for which a primary key and a foreign key have been defined, this object can be exported. If this is a user-defined view from which the data is to be exported, a number of points must be observed.\nThe SQL statement of the view is changed during the export in order to be used for the Connect. For this reason, the column used for filtering with {FilterID} must be included in the Select part of the view. This value is then matched against the primary key of the parent object. The column must have the same name as the primary key of the parent table or view for the match to take place. For example, if a view was created with customized tables in which the column is called xAccountID and not AccountID, but this view is located below the Docusnap table tAccounts in which the primary key is called AccountID, the view in the Select part the xAccountID would have to be renamed as AccountID.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"create-package\"\u003eCreate Package\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the \u003cem\u003eConnect\u003c/em\u003e area to create and manage Docusnap Connect Packages. This area can be accessed via the navigation bar.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"create-new-package\"\u003eCreate New Package\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick on the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button to create a new Docusnap Connect package. The title, text German and text English are then filled in and the data saved.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/docusnap-connect/package-editor/docusnap-connect-package-editor-create-new.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Connect Package Editor Create New\" title=\"Docusnap Connect Package Editor Create New\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eTable Name\u003c/em\u003e list all already defined tables are displayed. When you first open a package an empty table is already created. Enter the name to be assigned to the table after the export in the \u003cem\u003eTable Name\u003c/em\u003e field.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/docusnap-connect/package-editor/","title":"Package Editor"},{"content":"Click the Packages (Legacy) button to open the tab for creating the Docusnap Connect packages.\nTo create a new package, click the New button. For each package, an English and a German name must be assigned. In addition, you can enter a description.\nAll new Connect packages are created in this interface as Connect V1 packages.\nClick the Save button to save the Docusnap Connect package.\nIf at least SQL Server 2012 or higher is available, however, it is recommended to create the Connect packages as Connect V2 packages in the main Docusnap interface via the Connect area.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003ePackages (Legacy)\u003c/em\u003e button to open the tab for creating the Docusnap Connect packages.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo create a new package, click the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button. For each package, an English and a German name must be assigned. In addition, you can enter a description.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll new Connect packages are created in this interface as \u003cem\u003eConnect V1\u003c/em\u003e packages.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e button to save the Docusnap Connect package.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf at least SQL Server 2012 or higher is available, however, it is recommended to create the Connect packages as \u003cem\u003eConnect V2\u003c/em\u003e packages in the main Docusnap interface via the \u003cem\u003eConnect\u003c/em\u003e area.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/docusnap-connect/packages/","title":"Packages"},{"content":"Hierarchies: Parameters If you use parameters instead of relations to represent the dependencies between tables, reports can be executed more quickly. You can add the required parameter to the SQL statement. The result is that only the filtered data is transferred from the database to the client.\nClick the button to add a parameter. Every parameter of a table has to have a unique name. Select the referenced column of the parent table in the Expression field. If the value of a parameter is needed multiple times, the parameter must still be created only once.\nThe parameter is represented in the statement by @ and the name of the parameter (e.g. @DomainID).\nFor the table, the Reconnect on Each Row property must be set to True on the Properties tab.\nWhen defining the data band, the parent data band must be defined as the master component. In the parent data band, select the parent table from which the parameter was selected, as the data source.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"hierarchies-parameters\"\u003eHierarchies: Parameters\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf you use parameters instead of relations to represent the dependencies between tables, reports can be executed more quickly. You can add the required parameter to the SQL statement. The result is that only the filtered data is transferred from the database to the client.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the button \u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/special-reporting-techniques/parameters/docusnap-report-designer-edit-data-source-create-parameters.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Report-Designer-Edit-Data-Source-Create-Parameters\" title=\"Docusnap-Report-Designer-Edit-Data-Source-Create-Parameters\"\u003e to add a parameter. Every parameter of a table has to have a unique name. Select the referenced column of the parent table in the Expression field. If the value of a parameter is needed multiple times, the parameter must still be created only once.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/special-reporting-techniques/parameters/","title":"Parameters"},{"content":"When, in the IT Security tree view, you select a node below the File System, SharePoint, or Exchange nodes for which permissions have been scanned, the main window displays an additional tab named IT Security.\nThe IT Security tab shows the Explicit Permissions, the Inherited Permissions and the Share Permissions.\nEffective Permissions In order to retrieve the effective permissions for a user or a group, select the desired entry from the User Selection.\nThere are different possibilities to add users and groups.\nEnter the name of the wanted user or the wanted group. Users are identified by the icon and groups by the icon. Once the first letter is entered, the matching entries are suggested. Users and groups can be added via enter key, selection via the mouse from the suggestion list or via click on the Add button. Users are added to the list immediately. After selecting a group the options are to add all the direct users of this group, to add the direct users and the users of subordinate groups or to add the group. In the options dialog you can alternatively define that when the group is dissolved, members who are a group are also added.\nClick the button in the Search text box to open the Advanced Search dialog.\nThe names of the users and groups, who should be added, can be entered into the Search text box in the User Selection. All users and groups, who were selected in the Advanced Search dialog, are displayed in the Selected User/Groups field. Click the button if you want to remove the according entry.\nClick the Advanced button to refine the search for active directory users and groups further. Enter the name of the wanted entries in the Filter text boxes at the top of the grid. It is possible to just enter a part of the name in this text box (a.*) and all users and groups who contain this string are listed and can be selected. Select the wanted entries with the according checkbox and click the Apply button to add the users and groups.\nClick the Show Filter button to open the filter. The filter provides the ability to select users and groups through the definition of one or more conditions.\nClick the button to add another row. Click the button to delete the current row.\nField The column Field lists all ADS properties for users and groups. Depending on the selected property different operators and suggestions are offered. For User Account Control the different options like Account activated are provided. If the property is a string the first twenty entries are displayed. Subsequently the suggestion list can be filtered by tipping the first letters of the wanted entry. For properties which are a period of time a date has to be given in MM/DD/YYYY or MM.DD.YYYY format. To find users and groups who for example don\u0026rsquo;t have an expiry date, enter as value the word \u0026ldquo;never\u0026rdquo; instead of a date.\nOperator The column Operator provides several operators.\nContains: The specified value must be contained in the properties of the user or the group. Not Contains: The specified value must not be contained in the properties of the user or the group. Starts with: The value of the user or group must begin with the specified value. Ends with: The value of the user or group must end with the specified value. =: The value of the user or group has to match the specified value exactly. \u0026lt;\u0026gt;: The value of the user or group must not match to the specified value. \u0026lt;=,\u0026gt;=,\u0026lt;,\u0026gt;: The value ​​of the user or group has to be less than or equal (\u0026lt;=), greater than or equal (\u0026gt; =), less than (\u0026lt;) or greater than (\u0026gt;) the specified value. And/Or Once several conditions are specified, select in the And/Or column whether the conditions should be linked with And or Or. If the terms are linked with And, then all conditions have to apply to the user or the group. If the conditions are linked with Or, only one of the terms has to match the user or the group.\nGrouping Use grouping to nest the conditions as needed. For example two terms can be linked with Or and then be extended with And to include another condition. Click the checkbox to select the conditions, afterward click the button to group the selected entries to one condition. Only conditions listed one below the other can be grouped. The button marks the start of the group. Click the button to revoke the grouping. It is possible to organize the grouping in several levels. Select more than one group and click on the button to group them into one condition.\nClick the Search button to list the users and groups who match the specified filter.\nIf a term is entered in the Identities text box, then the users and groups are filtered by this search term and the specified conditions.\nClick the Save Filter to save the specified conditions in an XML file. When the Advanced Search is opened the next time, click the Load Filter button to recover the conditions from the XML file so they don\u0026rsquo;t have to be defined again.\nSelect the wanted entries with the according checkbox and click the Apply button to add the users and groups.\nAfterwards all added users and groups are listed in the Selected User/Groups field. Click the Apply button to add the users and groups below the Effective Permissions heading and display their associated permissions to the selected directory.\nWhen a different node is selected, the users and groups will not be deleted. The effective permissions will be recalculated for the selected node and the selected users or groups. The users and groups are only deleted if you select a node from a different company since the selected users and groups are not part of this company. Click the Permission Origin button to display the analysis of the permissions for the selected user or group. To display the group memberships of the selected user or group click the User/Group Structure button.\nTo delete an entry check the checkbox of a user or a group and click the Remove button.\nFilters The Data Explorer displays all directories of a scanned system. To display the filter below the permissions list, click the Enable button in the action bar. Once you have defined the desired filter criteria (Write, Read, etc.), only those directories will be displayed in the Data Explorer that match the filter set for the selected user or group.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWhen, in the IT Security tree view, you select a node below the File System, SharePoint, or Exchange nodes for which permissions have been scanned, the main window displays an additional tab named \u003cem\u003eIT Security.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eIT Security\u003c/em\u003e tab shows the \u003cem\u003eExplicit Permissions,\u003c/em\u003e the \u003cem\u003eInherited Permissions\u003c/em\u003e and the \u003cem\u003eShare Permissions.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"effective-permissions\"\u003eEffective Permissions\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn order to retrieve the \u003cem\u003eeffective permissions\u003c/em\u003e for a user or a group, select the desired entry from the \u003cem\u003eUser Selection.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/analysis/permission-analysis/","title":"Permission Analysis"},{"content":"Enabling Debug Mode If errors occur while using Docusnap, you can trace them. Check the Enable Debug Mode option in the Options dialog to log errors in the database. You have the option to either log all program events or exceptions only.\nThe data can be saved to a file and sent to Docusnap support using the Support Information function in the Help area.\nTo delete all existing debug information from the database, click the Reset Log button on the General page of the Options dialog.\nEnabling the Debug Mode for Docusnap Server The Docusnap Server is required to schedule network scans, documentation creation processes, notifications, etc. to be performed automatically at a later time. To be able to analyze errors, the debug mode for the Docusnap Server component must be enabled.\nYou can do so in the Configuration wizard for the Docusnap Server. To set the desired level of debugging, you can select either Log everything or Exceptions only from the Debug Level dropdown list. The storage location is set to Database. Clicking the Reset Log button will delete all existing error information from the database.\nCommunicating Support Information to the Support Team The Support Information dialog, allows you to generate log files and send them to the Docusnap Support team. The dialog is opened via the button in the title bar.\nGenerate Log File: Generates a log file according to the selected options.\nSave support file: Saves additional information helpful for the support team in addition to the log file.\nOpen Log File: Displays the generated log file content.\nSave Log File: Saves the generated log file.\nSend with Outlook: Opens the standard e-mail client and creates a new e-mail. MAPI support is required. The recipient defaults to the Docusnap Support Team and the log file is attached automatically. Alternatively you can also save the log file first, manually create an e-mail addressed to the Docusnap Support team and attach the log file.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"enabling-debug-mode\"\u003eEnabling Debug Mode\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf errors occur while using Docusnap, you can trace them. Check the \u003cem\u003eEnable Debug Mode\u003c/em\u003e option in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/settings/options/\" title=\"Options dialog\"\u003eOptions dialog\u003c/a\u003e to log errors in the database. You have the option to either log all program events or exceptions only.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe data can be saved to a file and sent to Docusnap support using the \u003cem\u003eSupport Information\u003c/em\u003e function in the Help area.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo delete all existing debug information from the database, click the Reset Log button on the General page of the Options dialog.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/support-and-help/problem-resolution/","title":"Problem Resulution"},{"content":"The CSV data to be imported must be stored in the configured directory. It must be ensured that the current Docusnap user has read and write access to this directory.\nIn order for the CSV import to succeed, it must be ensured that the mandatory fields required for the import are present in the CSV file.\nWhen importing data into tables, in most cases, the foreign key to the parent tables must be considered, otherwise the import will fail. For example, if the contact information is inserted into the tContacts table, the Account ID (tContacts.AccountID) must be specified so that the contacts in the tree can be displayed at the correct company. The columns named AccountID and DomainID are always the company or the domain to which the entry should belong after the import. In the Docusnap Management in the Manage Tables tab, the name of the foreign key column can be found. If the name of the columns is not sufficient to determine the parent table, you can use the Manage Objects tab to locate the object to which you want to import and then find the parent table. Subsequently, in the SQL Management Studio, a select statement can be executed on the parent table to obtain the foreign keys. For example, the AccountID can be found by using the statement\nselect tAccounts.AccountID, tAccounts.AccountName from tAccounts The AccountID of the desired company must be specified in the CSV file so it can be assigned during the import. After importing the data, they are then displayed at the correct company. As an alternative to the SQL Management Studio, you could also create a Connect Package containing the data of the table to obtain the correct foreign keys.\nFor the scheduled import of CSV files, it is necessary that the column order of the file to be imported matches exactly with the column order of the file that was used for planning the import. Deviations in the order lead to import errors, as the originally established structure is expected. To ensure an accurate data import, it must therefore be ensured that the order of the columns in the CSV file is correct before the scheduled import is executed. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe CSV data to be imported must be stored in the configured directory. It must be ensured that the current Docusnap user has read and write access to this directory.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn order for the CSV import to succeed, it must be ensured that the mandatory fields required for the import are present in the CSV file.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen importing data into tables, in most cases, the foreign key to the parent tables must be considered, otherwise the import will fail. For example, if the contact information is inserted into the tContacts table, the Account ID (tContacts.AccountID) must be specified so that the contacts in the tree can be displayed at the correct company. The columns named \u003cem\u003eAccountID\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eDomainID\u003c/em\u003e are always the company or the domain to which the entry should belong after the import. In the \u003cem\u003eDocusnap Management\u003c/em\u003e in the \u003cem\u003eManage Tables\u003c/em\u003e tab, the name of the foreign key column can be found. If the name of the columns is not sufficient to determine the parent table, you can use the \u003cem\u003eManage Objects\u003c/em\u003e tab to locate the object to which you want to import and then find the parent table. Subsequently, in the SQL Management Studio, a select statement can be executed on the parent table to obtain the foreign keys. For example, the AccountID can be found by using the statement\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/data-import/prerequisites/","title":"Requirements"},{"content":"The use of Docusnap Discovery Services requires on the central site a configured and started Docusnap server for each Docusnap database. At the site, which should be inventoried, the Docusnap Discovery Service is installed on a computer.\nSystem Requirements Component System Requirements OS Architecture 64 Bit Operating Systems Windows 10 Windows 11 (Version \u0026gt;=22H2) Windows Server 2016 Windows Server 2019 Windows Server 2022 RAM min. 2 GB, recommended \u0026gt;= 4 GB CPU \u0026gt;=2 Cores Hard Disk Storage min. 5 GB Resolution min. 1024 x 768 pixel, recommended \u0026gt;= 1920 x 1080 pixel .Net Framework Version \u0026gt;= 4.8 PowerShell Version Version \u0026gt;= 5.0 Windows Installer Version \u0026gt;= 4.5 Check Prerequisites To make sure that you will be able to successfully configure the Docusnap Discovery Service, you should verify the Docusnap Server configuration.\nThe Docusnap Server configuration must have been completed successfully. This includes enabling the Docusnap Server API. To do so, run the configuration wizard. To verify the correct configuration, check the settings. The procedures are described in a separate HowTo document called Docusnap Installation and Configuration that is available for download in the Knowledge Base-area of our website. It must be ensured that communication between the Docusnap Server API and the Docusnap Discovery Service is possible in both directions. The connection is initiated by the Docusnap Discovery Service. If necessary, firewall exceptions or port forwarding must be configured. It must be ensured that communication between the Docusnap Server API and the Docusnap Discovery Service is possible in both directions. The connection is started by the Docusnap Discovery Service. If necessary, firewall exceptions or port forwarding must be configured. You can check from the Docusnap Discovery Service system whether the Docusnap Server API is accessible by specifying the URL of the Docusnap Servers API in the browser and appending \u0026ldquo;/info\u0026rdquo;.\nExample: https://docusnapserver:9001/info When available, the Docusnap Server version number is displayed in the browser (exception: Microsoft Internet Explorer - this offers an info.json for download). The Server API is used for the connection and communication between DDS and Docusnap Server as well as for Docusnap Web. If the Server API is accessible from outside, Docusnap Web is also accessible. For this reason it must be ensured that as authentication scheme the basic and/or integrated Windows authentication and also the user management is activated. If this is not the case, anonymous authentication applies and everyone can access Docusnap Web.\nThe Docusnap Server service must have been started and must be accessible from the network.\nFor inventories using the Docusnap Discovery Service, make sure that the central Firewall forwards requests to the respective Docusnap Server.\nExternal hostname and port: the Docusnap Server API is addressed within the organization by external hostname and port. This name is used both to establish a connection with the Discovery Services as well as with the web client.\nThe authentication scheme affects only the authentication options with an Internet browser.\nDocusnap Discovery Service CLI The Docusnap Discovery Service provides a command line interface (CLI) that you can use to perform various actions and obtain information. For example, you can start, stop, and restart the service. Information regarding the status can be requested. The configuration can also be done via the CLI.\nThe following example shows how you can register the Discovery Service using the CLI:\nDDSCLI.exe Register „https://csp-vpc-prod01:9001/Discovery/Register/607bb8dc-0e2b-4548-a663-c37efed3a84d“ „F9E61CE3“\nThis allows you to install and register Discovery Services through your software distribution or scripts.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe use of Docusnap Discovery Services requires on the central site a configured and started Docusnap server for each Docusnap database. At the site, which should be inventoried, the Docusnap Discovery Service is installed on a computer.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"system-requirements\"\u003eSystem Requirements\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003eComponent\u003c/th\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003eSystem Requirements\u003c/th\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eOS Architecture\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e64 Bit\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eOperating Systems\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eWindows 10\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eWindows 11 (Version \u0026gt;=22H2)\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eWindows Server 2016\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eWindows Server 2019\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eWindows Server 2022\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eRAM\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003emin. 2 GB, recommended \u0026gt;= 4 GB\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eCPU\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u0026gt;=2 Cores\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eHard Disk Storage\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003emin. 5 GB\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eResolution\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003emin. 1024 x 768 pixel, recommended \u0026gt;= 1920 x 1080 pixel\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e.Net Framework\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eVersion \u0026gt;= 4.8\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003ePowerShell Version\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eVersion \u0026gt;= 5.0\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eWindows Installer\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eVersion \u0026gt;= 4.5\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/tbody\u003e\n\u003c/table\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"check-prerequisites\"\u003eCheck Prerequisites\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo make sure that you will be able to successfully configure the Docusnap Discovery Service, you should verify the Docusnap Server configuration.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/discovery-service/requirements/","title":"Requirements"},{"content":"Docusnap Enterprise Search is index-based. This means that data must first be added to the index before search requests return results. With Enterprise Search, only indexed objects can be found based on the indexed values. If there is no matching index, the object will not be found.\nChecking the SQL Full-Text search To obtain the maximum performance for the search requests, it is recommended that the feature Full-Text and Semantic Extraction for Search is added for the SQL instance. Full-text search is an optional Microsoft SQL feature and is available for current SQL Server versions as well as for \u0026ldquo;SQL Express with Advanced Services\u0026rdquo;. You can check if the feature is installed with the help of an SQL statement within the SQL Management Studio.\nSELECT SERVERPROPERTY(\u0026#39;IsFullTextInstalled\u0026#39;); With return value 1, the full text search is active.\nThe feature is not necessary for the use of the Enterprise Search. But it will affect the performance. If the instance feature is not installed, it can be added later. This is described in this chapter.\nActivating Docusnap Enterprise Search The first time Docusnap is started, the Docusnap Enterprise search is disabled. It must first be activated in the search options. If the Enterprise search is not activated, the default search is automatically used.\nClick the button from the title bar to open the settings in the search tab and enable the Enterprise Search.\nOptionally – Installing the SQL Full-Text Search To install the SQL full-text search afterwards, start the SQL Server Installation Centre. From the Start menu or via Control Panel - Programs and Features - Microsoft SQL Server 20%% - Modify.\nThe installation file may now be required. If this is no longer available on the system locally, you can download it and reference it. Make sure that the version of the installation file matches the installed version - for example SQL Server 2019 = SQL Server 2019 and not Installation file = SQL Server 2019 and SQL Server 2014 is installed.\nStart the SQL Server Installation Centre and select Installation – New SQL Server stand-alone installation or add features to an existing installation.\nConfirm the following steps and select the SQL server instance on which the Docusnap database is available in the Installation type step.\nIn the next step Function selection now activate the full text search and then execute the installation.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap Enterprise Search is index-based. This means that data must first be added to the index before search requests return results. With Enterprise Search, only indexed objects can be found based on the indexed values. If there is no matching index, the object will not be found.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"checking-the-sql-full-text-search\"\u003eChecking the SQL Full-Text search\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo obtain the maximum performance for the search requests, it is recommended that the feature Full-Text and Semantic Extraction for Search is added for the SQL instance. Full-text search is an optional Microsoft SQL feature and is available for current SQL Server versions as well as for \u0026ldquo;SQL Express with Advanced Services\u0026rdquo;. You can check if the feature is installed with the help of an SQL statement within the SQL Management Studio.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/enterprise-search/requirements/","title":"Requirements"},{"content":"The Scheduling step is available in all wizards. To schedule the execution the tasks of the wizard at a later point of time, check the checkbox Schedule Inventory, Documentation etc.\nScheduling is an essential component of Docusnap and allows you to fully automate the inventory and documentation procedures. Before the Docusnap Server can process jobs, the desired settings must be configured and saved for the job.\nAssign a unique name to the job in the Name field so that it can be identified by its name in the scheduling dialogs. The field to the right can be used to summarize the selected configuration.\nIf the Docusnap Server and Discovery Service are in different time zones, the Time Zone Display can be enabled. During scheduling, you can define whether the specified time is from the time zone of the server or the discovery service, or whether it is the UTC time. The display can also be adapted for the data explorer.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eScheduling\u003c/em\u003e step is available in all wizards. To schedule the execution the tasks of the wizard at a later point of time, check the checkbox \u003cem\u003eSchedule Inventory, Documentation etc.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/basics-wizards/scheduling/docusnap-network-inventory-schedule-overview.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Network-Inventory-Schedule-Overview\" title=\"Docusnap-Network-Inventory-Schedule-Overview\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eScheduling\u003c/em\u003e is an essential component of Docusnap and allows you to fully automate the inventory and documentation procedures. Before the \u003cem\u003eDocusnap Server\u003c/em\u003e can process jobs, the desired settings must be configured and saved for the job.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/basics-wizards/scheduling/docusnap-inventory-scheduling.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Inventory-Scheduling\" title=\"Docusnap-Inventory-Scheduling\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssign a unique name to the job in the Name field so that it can be identified by its name in the scheduling dialogs. The field to the right can be used to summarize the selected configuration.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/basics-wizards/scheduling/","title":"Scheduling"},{"content":"In Docusnap, you can include your own or third-party MIBs in the SNMP Inventory.\nBy adding, importing and enabling different MIBs, you can restrict SNMP systems scans to certain device types for which manufacturer information should be considered during the scan.\nThe Manage MIBs tab allows you to manage the MIBs. There, you can add MIBs to the list by clicking the Import button. In addition, you can export the entire schema and import it into a new database. Thus, it is possible to reuse the schema elsewhere.\nFirst select a MIB, then use the checkboxes next to the entries to determine the manufacturer information to be retrieved for the individual systems.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn Docusnap, you can include your own or third-party MIBs in the SNMP Inventory.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBy adding, importing and enabling different MIBs, you can restrict SNMP systems scans to certain device types for which manufacturer information should be considered during the scan.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eManage MIBs\u003c/em\u003e tab allows you to manage the MIBs. There, you can add MIBs to the list by clicking the \u003cem\u003eImport\u003c/em\u003e button. In addition, you can export the entire schema and import it into a new database. Thus, it is possible to reuse the schema elsewhere.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/snmp/snmp-mibs/","title":"SNMP MIBs"},{"content":"The Permission Analysis module has been subdivided into several panes so that a maximum of information can be displayed.\nIn the left pane, below the File System node, your systems, directories and shares are listed. Under the SharePoint node, you will find the web pages, web pages collections, and lists. Below the Exchange node, the Exchange mailboxes, mailbox folders, and public folders are displayed.\nIn the user selection in the right pane the users and groups for whom the effective permissions should be displayed can be added.\nBelow the user selection the effective permissions, the explicit permissions, the inherited permissions and the share permissions are located. Special permissions are only displayed if you have enabled the Special Permissions button.\nYou can access the required functions and reports from a dedicated IT Security ribbon.\nBy clicking the Permission Origin button, you open the permission structure for the currently selected user or the currently selected group. The permission origin reveals how the user or group obtained their permissions.\nClick the User/Group Structure button to display a diagram showing the nesting of users or groups for the selected user/group.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Permission Analysis module has been subdivided into several panes so that a maximum of information can be displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/it-security/structure/docusnap-permission-analysis-permissions-labeled.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Permission-Analysis-Permissions-Labeled\" title=\"Docusnap-Permission-Analysis-Permissions-Labeled\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the left pane, below the \u003cem\u003eFile System\u003c/em\u003e node, your systems, directories and shares are listed. Under the \u003cem\u003eSharePoint\u003c/em\u003e node, you will find the web pages, web pages collections, and lists. Below the Exchange node, the Exchange mailboxes, mailbox folders, and public folders are displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the user selection in the right pane the users and groups for whom the effective permissions should be displayed can be added.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/structure/","title":"Structure"},{"content":"Basic Structure Use the Report Designer to create or edit reports.\nThe Designer consists of five main areas: ribbon, toolbox, workspace, information pane (properties, dictionary, report tree) and status bar.\nRibbon From the ribbon, you can define settings related to the layout and font design for the report.\nHome: On the Home tab, you can choose formatting options for the selected report component. These format settings can also be selected from the information pane. In addition, the Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete buttons are available from the Clipboard group. Conditions and styles can be defined from the Style group. By setting conditions, you can define a different format setting for values that reflect a certain condition. The Style Designer shows the styles available in the current design.\nInsert: Various components can be selected and inserted in the Insert ribbon.\nPage: On the Page ribbon, you can define the page size and other parameters. The appearance of a report may also be changed after has been executed in Docusnap. In addition, you can add a watermark, either as a text or as an image, from this ribbon. You can also select whether the components should align with the grid and which grid you want to display. Each data band has a header part used for identification. This header can be hidden. By clicking Show Order, you can display indicators that show the z-order of the components. The tabs of the information pane can be shown or hidden. This is also true for the toolbox.\nLayout: On the Layout tab, you can specify how the components of your report will be aligned and how they will be stacked. This z-order can also be set by right-clicking the component and selecting one of the Order options. Using the Size button, you can resize multiple components to the same size. They will always take the size of the first component selected.\nPreview: Clicking the Preview button executes the report and displays a preview of the generated report. Since most predefined reports depend on the object they are linked with, you must specify the primary key before executing the report. If a primary key has not been provided yet, you can select it when changing to the Preview.\nIf the selected primary key is invalid or if no primary key has been provided, it is not possible to generate a data preview. Docusnap can only show the filtered data if you provide a valid value. Each time you change to the Preview tab, you will be prompted for the primary key until you have selected a valid key. If you would like to use a different primary key, you can change it immediately using the PrimaryKey variable on the Dictionary tab of the information pane. For this purpose, a corresponding icon is also available on the Report Designer status bar. Toolbox The main purpose of this toolbox is to make the components and various types of bands available when you create reports. To add a new component, you can simply click its icon in the toolbox and then click its intended position in the workspace.\nWorkspace In the workspace, the tab displays the page for creating and editing reports. On this tab, you will create the data bands and define the connection to the database.\nInformation Pane The information pane consists of three tabs.\nProperties: When you open the Report Designer for the first time, you need to specify one of the settings for the Properties tab. The available options are Basic, Standard and Professional. To be able to make detailed changes to the text boxes, charts, etc., select the Professional setting because it allows highest degree of modification. You can change this setting at any time using the context menu of the Properties tab. The Properties tab displays the properties of the component selected in the workspace. Just like in the Designer for data entry screens, this tab enables you to specify the formatting, size, position and behavior of the selected component. A brief description of the selected property is displayed at the bottom of the information pane. Dictionary: On the Dictionary tab, the data source, variables, system variables and functions are displayed. The current Docusnap database will be used as the data source. All specified table definitions will be loaded. However, they are not yet connected to the database. Since only the tables needed for the current report will be connected to the database, the report will execute faster. To display the table that has been loaded into a data band, the Connect on Start property of that table must be set to True. With the options under Actions in Dictionary tab toolbar, you can save, open, add or create a dictionary. You can use the options under the button to establish a new database connection, create a data source or define a relation. In addition, new variables or categories can be added. Click the button to open the selected object for editing. By clicking the button, you can delete the selected object. Clicking the Up or Down arrows will change the position of the selected item in the list. To sort the items alphabetically, click the button. Report Tree: This tab displays the components in a hierarchical structure. You can verify the organization of the individual components from the tree view. Status Bar Company: The first button displays all companies created in the current database. You can define custom format settings for each company. When you select a company, Docusnap will apply the format settings for that company to the report. If -No Selection-displays, the format settings from the Designs and Styles dialog will be used.\nUpdate Styles: For each component, you can select the desired format settings on the Properties tab. If a different style template has been selected, the new format settings can be applied by clicking the button.\nPrimary Key: Click the button to open a dialog where you can specify the primary key. After a primary key has been specified, data will be displayed on the Preview tab even if a filter has been applied to the primary key.\nUse Report Style: If you specify that the report style will be used for a report, this report will always use the style currently defined for it. If you change the style in the Designs and Styles or Define Company Settings dialog, the report will still use the original style.\nCheck for Issues: Checks the report for errors and displays them.\nPage width: Using the options to the right of the status bar, you can set the report page width and other parameters.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"basic-structure\"\u003eBasic Structure\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the Report Designer to create or edit reports.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Designer consists of five main areas: ribbon, toolbox, workspace, information pane (properties, dictionary, report tree) and status bar.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-designer/user-interface/docusnap-report-designer.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Report-Designer\" title=\"Docusnap-Report-Designer\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"ribbon\"\u003eRibbon\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFrom the ribbon, you can define settings related to the layout and font design for the report.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHome: On the \u003cem\u003eHome\u003c/em\u003e tab, you can choose formatting options for the selected report component. These format settings can also be selected from the information pane. In addition, the \u003cem\u003eCut, Copy, Paste\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eDelete\u003c/em\u003e buttons are available from the \u003cem\u003eClipboard\u003c/em\u003e group. Conditions and styles can be defined from the Style group. By setting conditions, you can define a different format setting for values that reflect a certain condition.\nThe Style Designer shows the styles available in the current design.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-designer/user-interface/","title":"User Interface"},{"content":"","excerpt":"","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/","title":"Docusnap 13 - User Manual"},{"content":"In the Docusnap Users tab, you can assign different roles that have been previously created, to individual domain users or domain groups.\nIf no users or groups have been defined, any user who connects to this database may use all of the controls and the entire Docusnap functionality. Once the first user or group has been created, the User Management feature will be enabled.\nThe left pane lists the users or groups to whom roles can be assigned. Make sure to specify the user names in the following format: domain\\username. To define a group, enter its name as follows domain\\groupname. The right pane lists the individual roles that can be assigned to the users or groups. To assign a role to a user or a group, select the desired entry in the left pane and tick the desired checkbox in the right pane. Please note that role assignments are additive. This means that the controls enabled for the individual roles add to each other.\nWhen creating users or groups, make sure to assign at least one user or group a role that has permission to open the user management, otherwise the User Management will no longer be accessible.\nDocusnap Web If Basic Authentication or Integrated Windows Authentication is defined for Docusnap Web as the authentication scheme, the Allow access to Docusnap Web check box must be enabled for each user, who wants to connect to Docusnap Web. For the Basic Authentication a password must be stored additionally.\nOnce a user or group is created in the user management, Basic Authentication or Integrated Windows Authentication must be selected for Docusnap Web. Anonymous Authentication can only be used if user management is not active.\nIf an AD group is used for user management, the members of this group are saved in the Docusnap database and then these users can log in to the Docusnap Web. If the members of the group change, the list must be updated by clicking the Update Group Members from Active Directory for Docusnap Web button. The update can take up to 10 minutes.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eDocusnap Users\u003c/em\u003e tab, you can assign different roles that have been previously created, to individual domain users or domain groups.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf no users or groups have been defined, any user who connects to this database may use all of the controls and the entire Docusnap functionality. Once the first user or group has been created, the User Management feature will be enabled.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe left pane lists the users or groups to whom roles can be assigned. Make sure to specify the user names in the following format: \u003cstrong\u003edomain\\username\u003c/strong\u003e. To define a group, enter its name as follows \u003cstrong\u003edomain\\groupname\u003c/strong\u003e. The right pane lists the individual roles that can be assigned to the users or groups. To assign a role to a user or a group, select the desired entry in the left pane and tick the desired checkbox in the right pane. Please note that role assignments are additive. This means that the controls enabled for the individual roles add to each other.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/user-management/users/","title":"Users"},{"content":"Every IT Correlation has a start object. For this object all the correlating objects are displayed. If for the selected object an IT Correlation is defined, the corresponding objects are displayed in the Analysis tab. Additional to the directly dependent objects further IT Correlations can be shown.\nUse the context menu of the object or the action bar to resolve IT Correlations or groups of the object. Additionally, hierarchical ancestors and descendants of the objects can be added. Via the Level buttons you can determine how many levels of IT Correlations should be displayed. This drill-down functionality simplifies the analysis, since you can work through layer by layer.\nDepending on the selected algorithm the arrangement of the objects changes accordingly.\nClick the button to export the IT Correlations and the added relations into a file.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eEvery \u003cem\u003eIT Correlation\u003c/em\u003e has a start object. For this object all the correlating objects are displayed. If for the selected object an \u003cem\u003eIT Correlation\u003c/em\u003e is defined, the corresponding objects are displayed in the \u003cem\u003eAnalysis\u003c/em\u003e tab. Additional to the directly dependent objects further \u003cem\u003eIT Correlations\u003c/em\u003e can be shown.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the context menu of the object or the action bar to resolve IT Correlations or groups of the object. Additionally, hierarchical ancestors and descendants of the objects can be added. Via the \u003cem\u003eLevel\u003c/em\u003e buttons you can determine how many levels of IT Correlations should be displayed. This drill-down functionality simplifies the analysis, since you can work through layer by layer.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-correlation/using-it-correlation/","title":"Using IT Correlation"},{"content":"Thank you very much for purchasing Docusnap 13.\nIn practice, the terms IT documentation and IT analysis are generally restricted to the inventory process and maybe the visualization of existing hardware and software.\nDocusnap 13 greatly broadens the terms IT documentation and IT analysis by adding significant features:\nBuilding on the process of inventorying the entire IT environment (not just the hardware and software) and the visualization of overview maps using Microsoft Visio, Docusnap 13 supports the reporting of the results using several standardized formats (Microsoft Word \u0026amp; Excel, PDF and HTML files, among others).\nDocusnap 13 generates meaningful and real-world reports and analyzes of the most diverse corporate departments.\nIn no time, Docusnap 13 analyzes effective permissions, compares the expected and actual states of installed licenses and provides additional organizational features, such as password and contract management.\nDocusnap 13 combines optimum usability with maximum flexibility. Wizards guide the user through the intuitive user interface which is similar to Microsoft Office 2013.\nMultiple users can work with Docusnap 13 concurrently. Customization to individual requirements is also possible.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThank you very much for purchasing Docusnap 13.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn practice, the terms IT documentation and IT analysis are generally restricted to the inventory process and maybe the visualization of existing hardware and software.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap 13 greatly broadens the terms IT documentation and IT analysis by adding significant features:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBuilding on the process of inventorying the entire IT environment (not just the hardware and software) and the visualization of overview maps using Microsoft Visio, Docusnap 13 supports the reporting of the results using several standardized formats (Microsoft Word \u0026amp; Excel, PDF and HTML files, among others).\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/welcome/","title":"Welcome"},{"content":"Docusnap offers three modules for inventorying Windows systems. The focus of this documentation is on the Windows-Discovery.exe. This module is always up-to-date and should be used preferably.\nDiscovery-Windows.exe (for current Windows systems) DocusnapScript.exe (same as Discovery-Windows.exe, no further development, remains for existing implementations) Discovery-Windows-Legacy.exe (for Windows 7 and older) To ensure that the Windows inventory contains all recordable data, it is necessary to execute the Discovery-Windows.exe module with local administration rights. Parameters:\nC: Sets the name of the workstation.\nD: Sets the name of the domain where the system to be scanned is located.\nH: Opens the help screen.\nL: Sets the debug level to be used during the inventory scan. The following debug levels are available:\n1: Errors and function calls will be logged.\n2: The entire program flow will be logged.\nO: Sets the path where to generate the XML file. If the process creates a log file, it will be stored in this path.\nExamples:\nIf you run the Discovery-Windows.exe module on the system you want to inventory, no additional parameters are required. You can specify the location of the XML file using the -O parameter.\nC:\\Discovery-Windows.exe -O C:\\DocusnapWindowsModul If you intend to use the Discovery-Windows.exe module for an inventory scan of a remote system, you can specify the system to be scanned using the -C and -D parameters.\nC:\\Discovery-Windows.exe -C WKNE0006 -D intern.local -L 2 -O C:\\DocusnapWindowsModul This command will scan the WKNE006 workstation in the intern.local domain using debug level 2. The XML file will be stored in the C:\\DocusnapScripts directory.\nSoftware and File Search With the help of the Software and File Search search, Docusnap offers an additional feature to inventory specific files on the file system of Linux, Mac and Windows systems, which cannot be captured via the Windows inventory. The files found are made available for evaluation in Docusnap in different ways depending on the categorization (file search Linux, Mac and Windows or software search Windows). The software and file search can also be used when executing the Discovery-Windows.exe module. To use the software and file search, an XML list must be manually created.\nThe XML file must have the following structure:\n\u0026lt;?xml version=\u0026#34;1.0\u0026#34; encoding=\u0026#34;UTF-8\u0026#34; ?\u0026gt; \u0026lt;Search\u0026gt; \u0026lt;SearchItem\u0026gt;\u0026lt;!--File Search--\u0026gt;\t\u0026lt;Name\u0026gt;log4j\u0026lt;/Name\u0026gt; \u0026lt;FileName\u0026gt;*log4j*\u0026lt;/FileName\u0026gt; \u0026lt;FileSize\u0026gt;0\u0026lt;/FileSize\u0026gt; \u0026lt;Category\u0026gt;1\u0026lt;/Category\u0026gt; \u0026lt;IncludeExcludeList\u0026gt; \u0026lt;SearchPath\u0026gt; \u0026lt;IncludePath\u0026gt;c:\\windows\u0026lt;/IncludePath\u0026gt; \u0026lt;ExcludePath\u0026gt;\u0026lt;/ExcludePath\u0026gt; \u0026lt;/SearchPath\u0026gt; \u0026lt;SearchPath\u0026gt; \u0026lt;IncludePath\u0026gt;c:\\temp\u0026lt;/IncludePath\u0026gt; \u0026lt;ExcludePath\u0026gt;\u0026lt;/ExcludePath\u0026gt; \u0026lt;/SearchPath\u0026gt; \u0026lt;/IncludeExcludeList\u0026gt; \u0026lt;OnlyFirstMatch\u0026gt;true\u0026lt;/OnlyFirstMatch\u0026gt; \u0026lt;UseSystemDrive\u0026gt;false\u0026lt;/UseSystemDrive\u0026gt; \u0026lt;/SearchItem\u0026gt; \u0026lt;SearchItem\u0026gt;\u0026lt;!--Software Search--\u0026gt;\t\u0026lt;Name\u0026gt;Notepad\u0026lt;/Name\u0026gt; \u0026lt;Version\u0026gt;\u0026lt;/Version\u0026gt; \u0026lt;Publisher\u0026gt;\u0026lt;/Publisher\u0026gt; \u0026lt;FileName\u0026gt;notepad.exe\u0026lt;/FileName\u0026gt; \u0026lt;FileSize\u0026gt;0\u0026lt;/FileSize\u0026gt; \u0026lt;ModifyDate\u0026gt;\u0026lt;/ModifyDate\u0026gt; \u0026lt;SearchPath\u0026gt;c:\\temp\u0026lt;/SearchPath\u0026gt; \u0026lt;Category\u0026gt;0\u0026lt;/Category\u0026gt; \u0026lt;/SearchItem\u0026gt; \u0026lt;/Search\u0026gt; Make sure to specify the filename correctly or use a wildcard character (?,*).\nOnly either excluding or including paths are possible for the search\nThe tags for Category define with 1 the file search, with 0 the software search\nThe tags OnlyFirstMatch define whether only the first found result should be displayed (true), with false all found results are recorded\nThe tags UseSystemDrive determine whether only the system partition should be searched (true) or all partitions on the system (false)\nIf a wrong file size is specified, the requested file will not be found!\nIf one of the optional areas is not specified, the notation () can be specified.\nThe search is downward compatible so existing versions are not affected. The previously used XML files for the software search can still be used.\n\u0026lt;SoftwareItem\u0026gt; \u0026lt;SoftwareName\u0026gt;My New Software 1\u0026lt;/SoftwareName\u0026gt; \u0026lt;SoftwarePublisher\u0026gt;Microsoft\u0026lt;/SoftwarePublisher\u0026gt; \u0026lt;!-- optional--\u0026gt; \u0026lt;SoftwareVersion\u0026gt;1.0 Beta\u0026lt;/SoftwareVersion\u0026gt; \u0026lt;!-- optional--\u0026gt; \u0026lt;FileName\u0026gt;notepad.exe\u0026lt;/FileName\u0026gt; \u0026lt;SearchPath\u0026gt;C:\\Windows\u0026lt;/SearchPath\u0026gt; \u0026lt;FileSize\u0026gt;193536\u0026lt;/FileSize\u0026gt; \u0026lt;!-- optional byte--\u0026gt; \u0026lt;ModifyDate\u0026gt;01.01.2016\u0026lt;/ModifyDate\u0026gt; \u0026lt;!-- optional--\u0026gt; \u0026lt;/SoftwareItem\u0026gt; Make sure to specify the filename correctly or use a wildcard character (?,*). \u0026lt;SoftwareItem\u0026gt; \u0026lt;SoftwareName\u0026gt;My New Software 1\u0026lt;/SoftwareName\u0026gt; \u0026lt;SoftwarePublisher /\u0026gt; \u0026lt;!-- optional--\u0026gt; \u0026lt;SoftwareVersion /\u0026gt; \u0026lt;!-- optional--\u0026gt; \u0026lt;FileName\u0026gt;notepad.exe\u0026lt;/FileName\u0026gt; \u0026lt;SearchPath\u0026gt;C:\\Windows\u0026lt;/SearchPath\u0026gt; \u0026lt;FileSize /\u0026gt; \u0026lt;!-- optional byte--\u0026gt; \u0026lt;ModifyDate /\u0026gt; \u0026lt;!-- optional--\u0026gt; \u0026lt;/SoftwareItem\u0026gt; If one of the optional parameters is not specified, use the notation shown in the example to the left (\u0026lt;SoftwarePublisher /\u0026gt;).\nIf you specify a wrong file size, the desired software will not be scanned!\nTo use the software list in the Discovery-Windows.exe modul, use the following command:\nDocusnapScript.exe -S \u0026lt;path\u0026gt;\u0026lt;filename.xml\u0026gt;\nC:\\Discovery-Windows.exe -S C:\\Docusnap\\Softwarelist.xml If a defined software product is found during the execution of the Discovery-Windows.exe modul, its data will be stored in the results DSI file. When you import the file into Docusnap, this data will be imported as well.\nAdditional Tools Through the use of additional tools, further information about a Windows system can be captured during the inventory. The execution of the additional tool can also be started as part of the Discovery-Windows.exe modul. To execute the additional tool, an XML file with the required information must be created.\nThe XML file must have the following structure:\n\u0026lt;ToolInfo\u0026gt; \u0026lt;Url\u0026gt;systeminfo.exe\u0026lt;/Url\u0026gt; \u0026lt;Parameters\u0026gt; \u0026lt;/Parameters\u0026gt; \u0026lt;ResultFile\u0026gt;systeminfo.txt\u0026lt;/ResultFile\u0026gt; \u0026lt;OpenWith\u0026gt;notepad.exe\u0026lt;/OpenWith\u0026gt; \u0026lt;Description\u0026gt;Systeminfo\u0026lt;/Description\u0026gt; \u0026lt;ToolType\u0026gt;0\u0026lt;/ToolType\u0026gt; \u0026lt;Timeout\u0026gt;10000\u0026lt;/Timeout\u0026gt; \u0026lt;ExecuteRemote\u0026gt;false\u0026lt;/ExecuteRemote\u0026gt; \u0026lt;/ToolInfo\u0026gt; If PowerShell is defined as an additional tool, the special characters | and \u0026quot; must be escaped so that they can be used in the parameters. Quotation marks \u0026quot; must be escaped with \\\u0026quot; and pipes | must be escaped with ^|. If the syntax -Command \u0026ldquo;\u0026amp;{}\u0026rdquo; is used, the special character | (pipe) does not have to be escaped.\n- ipconfig ^| Select-String -Pattern \\\u0026#34;IPv4 address\\\u0026#34; (escape required) - -Command \u0026#34;\u0026amp;{ipconfig | Select-String -Pattern \\\u0026#34;IPv4 address\\\u0026#34;}\u0026#34; (No escape of the pipe required) To execute the additional tools in DocusnapScript, use the following command: Discovery-Windows.exe -Y \u0026lt;path\u0026gt;\u0026lt;filename.xml\u0026gt;\nC:\\Discovery-Windows.exe -Y C:\\Docusnap\\ToolInfo.xml Data collected during the execution of additional tools as part of the Discovery-Windows.exe modul, is stored in the result DSI file. By importing the file into Docusnap, this data will be imported as well.\nSelect Windows Components for Scan -Z Since version 11 Docusnap provides the possibility to select the components to be inventoried in the Windows scan (software, updates, services etc.). This selection of components can also be done when using DocusnapScript.exe.\nThe call is made via the parameter -Z \u0026lt;number\u0026gt;\\\nC:\\Discovery-Windows.exe -Z 65407 The necessary number can be determined in two ways:\n1.Windows scan wizard\nSwitch to one of the Windows Scan Wizards (AD or IP). In step 3 you will find the Select Components button. Select the components to be inventoried and note the DS Script parameter.\n2.Manual enumeration\nStart the Discovery-Windows.exe help specific to the scan components with: Discovery-Windows.exe -H scan.\nNow you can specify the appropriate components by adding up the numbers behind them.\nAnonymize filenames -ANO The .XML files created by the Discovery-Windows.exe modul are named as follows.\nComputer name User or system that performed the execution of Discovery-Windows.exe. Date and time of execution Example: VPC-SDA_VPC-SDA_admin_20210323090358.xml\nRunning DocusnapScript.exe with the -ANO parameter will anonymize the filename.\nExample:\n383ee2d1-46ae-4cbc-b2f9-b4dc437bf911.xml\nC:\\Discovery-Windows.exe -ANO By using the -ano parameter, Docusnap can no longer detect from the file name whether files from the same system already exist in the destination folder and move them to the archive folder. This means that there can be several files from one system in the folder, which will be imported afterwards. The order of the import is random. Thus, it is not guaranteed that the state of the most recent file is imported into Docusnap. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap offers three modules for inventorying Windows systems. The focus of this documentation is on the Windows-Discovery.exe. This module is always up-to-date and should be used preferably.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-Windows.exe (for current Windows systems)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDocusnapScript.exe (same as Discovery-Windows.exe, no further development, remains for existing implementations)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-Windows-Legacy.exe (for Windows 7 and older)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-primary\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    To ensure that the Windows inventory contains all recordable data, it is necessary to execute the Discovery-Windows.exe module with local administration rights.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eParameters:\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/windows/","title":"Windows"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying your Windows systems, click the Network Scan or Windows (AD) button. The Windows Systems (AD) step will be displayed after you have selected a company and entered your credentials (see: Basic Steps).\nDocusnap will select the systems to be scanned based on the active computer accounts available in the Active Directory. Using the Start Search at filter criterion, you can restrict the search to a specific organizational unit. Click the Select OU button to open a dialog where you can select the desired organizational unit. If you do not specify a filter criterion, Docusnap will search the entire Active Directory for active computer accounts.\nStart the search by clicking the Start Search button. During the search, all user interface controls except the Cancel button will be disabled. After the search has completed, the identified Windows systems will be displayed in the list.\nThere are several ways to select the systems to be inventoried. To select or deselect a certain system, you can use the checkbox next to its name. By default, all devices are selected. By using the checkbox in the header row all hosts can be selected or deselected simultaneously. By right-clicking on the table the buttons Select All and Deselect all can be used in the context menu.\nIn the first line filter criteria can be defined and in the Type column you can use the icons (domain controllers), (memberservers) and (workstations) to select the respective systems.\nBesides the operating system information and the system type, the Systems Found list also includes a column showing the password age. The password age indicates how many days ago the current computer account last received a new access token from the domain controller. By default, this token is renewed every 30 days. Update selected systems: To consider systems that have not yet existed during scheduling of the inventory (Docusnap Server or Docusnap Discovery Service), the checkbox Update selected systems can be activated. Thereby, the Active Directory is searched for other systems and they are also inventoried. If systems are excluded from the list, they will still not be inventoried. Select Components: If certain components of the Windows Inventory are not needed, such as the network connection data, it is possible to exclude them from the inventory, thereby speeding up the inventory process. Use of filters with scheduled inventory If the OU filter was used to limit the scan to systems of specific organizational units, only those systems of these OUs are considered for the automated inventory. If computer accounts have been added to one of the selected OUs between the scheduling and execution of this job, they are also inventoried during the inventory process.\nYou can also specify filter criteria. These are entered in the first line, above the list of systems. For example, you can filter on system types or on the names of the systems. When the inventory is scheduled, the filter is applied again and all systems from the AD to which the filter matches are inventoried.\nOffline System Alternatively to all Windows systems, you can choose to only inventory Windows systems that could not be inventoried during previous inventory scans. Click the Inventory Offline Systems checkbox to show only offline systems and the inventory can be started.\nWhen the inventory of offline systems is scheduled, re-execution will only consider those systems that could not be successfully inventoried yet, either by this job or any other inventory process.\nConsider all not yet inventoried systems from the AD in addition to the offline systems if inventory is scheduled: If this checkbox is activated, then the list of systems from the Active Directory will be updated during the inventory of the offline systems. Docusnap then inventories all systems of this list that have been marked offline in the database or which are not yet in the database. If certain systems have been excluded from the list, they will still not be inventoried. Determine BitLocker Status During inventory of the volumes, it is checked whether the Microsoft BitLocker encryption is enabled, and the locally stored BitLocker recovery key is collected. This data is displayed in the inventory result in the Partitions and Volumes section.\nThe prerequisite is that the executing user has local administrator permissions on the target system. If the BitLocker information should not be a part of the inventory, the BitLocker component can be excluded.\nThe following BitLocker statuses can occur:\nOff: The volume or partition has been scanned, BitLocker is not activated On: The volume or partition has been scanned, BitLocker is active Unknown: The volume or partition could not be scanned. BitLocker encrypted partitions must be mounted by the operating system for access. If partitions are not integrated at the time of the inventory, the status unknown is displayed. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying your Windows systems, click the \u003cem\u003eNetwork Scan\u003c/em\u003e or \u003cem\u003eWindows (AD)\u003c/em\u003e button. The \u003cem\u003eWindows Systems (AD)\u003c/em\u003e step will be displayed after you have selected a company and entered your credentials (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/windows/windows-ad/docusnap-inventory-windows-systems.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Windows Systeme\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Windows Systeme\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap will select the systems to be scanned based on the active computer accounts available in the Active Directory. Using the \u003cem\u003eStart Search at\u003c/em\u003e filter criterion, you can restrict the search to a specific organizational unit. Click the \u003cem\u003eSelect OU\u003c/em\u003e button to open a dialog where you can select the desired organizational unit. If you do not specify a filter criterion, Docusnap will search the entire Active Directory for active computer accounts.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/windows/windows-ad/","title":"Windows (AD)"},{"content":"\nIn Docusnap, inventories in the Inventory section are assigned to either the Infrastructure or Cloud Infrastructure section depending on the technology. This division makes it easy to distinguish between on-premise and cloud resources in an organization.\nAzure-Apps For the inventory of Microsoft Cloud technologies, an app must exist in Microsoft Azure that grants the necessary permissions to the Docusnap application.\nProxy If a proxy is used in the network, it may be necessary to specify the proxy settings in the Options dialog for the cloud inventory. For the respective DDS (Docusnap Discovery Service) it may also be necessary to adjust the proxy setting.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/docusnap-inventory-cloud-inventory-graph.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Cloud Inventory\" title=\"Cloud Inventory\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn Docusnap, inventories in the \u003cem\u003eInventory\u003c/em\u003e section are assigned to either the \u003cem\u003eInfrastructure\u003c/em\u003e or \u003cem\u003eCloud Infrastructure\u003c/em\u003e section depending on the technology.\nThis division makes it easy to distinguish between on-premise and cloud resources in an organization.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"azure-apps\"\u003eAzure-Apps\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the inventory of Microsoft Cloud technologies, an app must exist in Microsoft Azure that grants the necessary permissions to the Docusnap application.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"proxy\"\u003eProxy\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf a proxy is used in the network, it may be necessary to specify the proxy settings in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/settings/options/connections/\" title=\"Options dialog\"\u003eOptions dialog\u003c/a\u003e for the cloud inventory. For the respective \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/discovery-service/configure-connection/\" title=\"DDS\"\u003eDDS\u003c/a\u003e (Docusnap Discovery Service) it may also be necessary to adjust the proxy setting.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/","title":"Cloud Inventory"},{"content":"There is also the ability to assign IT assets to sites. For each IT asset, the additional Organization tab is displayed. If user-defined IT asset classes are created, the additional tab is created automatically. In this tab the created IT assets can be assigned to a site.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThere is also the ability to assign IT assets to sites. For each IT asset, the additional Organization tab is displayed. If user-defined IT asset classes are created, the additional tab is created automatically. In this tab the created IT assets can be assigned to a site.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/manage-sites/it-asset-assignment/docusnap-sites-assignment-itassets.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Sites-Assignment-ITAssets\" title=\"Docusnap-Sites-Assignment-ITAssets\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/manage-sites/it-asset-assignment/","title":"Assign IT Assets to a Site"},{"content":"Azure Inventory The following instructions describe the optional configuration step that must be performed in Azure Administration to grant the app read access to the desired subscriptions. This step is only required if the created app should be used for the Azure inventory.\nIn the resource overview or the search, select the Subscriptions option.\nSelect the relevant subscription. In the subscription selection, click Access control (IAM). Select Add and then Role Assignment. In the role selection, select the \u0026ldquo;Reader\u0026rdquo; role. In the Select field, enter the name of the app. Select the desired app, which will then be displayed under Selected Members. Confirm the assignment by clicking Save. The steps must be repeated for each subscription to be inventoried with Docusnap.\nIn order to inventory Azure, the application must be granted read access to the required subscriptions in Azure. ","excerpt":"\u003ch3 id=\"azure-inventory\"\u003eAzure Inventory\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe following instructions describe the optional configuration step that must be performed in Azure Administration to grant the app read access to the desired subscriptions. This step is only required if the created app should be used for the Azure inventory.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the resource overview or the search, select the \u003cem\u003eSubscriptions\u003c/em\u003e option.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSelect the relevant subscription.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIn the subscription selection, click \u003cem\u003eAccess control (IAM)\u003c/em\u003e.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSelect \u003cem\u003eAdd\u003c/em\u003e and then \u003cem\u003eRole Assignment\u003c/em\u003e.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIn the role selection, select the \u0026ldquo;Reader\u0026rdquo; role.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eSelect\u003c/em\u003e field, enter the name of the app.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSelect the desired app, which will then be displayed under \u003cem\u003eSelected Members\u003c/em\u003e.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConfirm the assignment by clicking \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe steps must be repeated for each subscription to be inventoried with Docusnap.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/azure-apps-authorize-subscriptions/","title":"Authorize Apps for Subscriptions"},{"content":"The IT Security tab displays the effective permissions for the selected user or group. Effective permissions consist of various permissions, such as NTFS and share permissions, explicit permissions and inherited permissions. In the diagram, you can see how a user or group obtained a certain permission.\nClick the Permission Origin button to open an additional tab where the origin of the permission of the selected user or group is displayed.\nThe Analysis tab shows which groups the selected user belongs to or which users are members of the selected group. Click the User/Group Structure button to open the Analysis tab for the selected group or user.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eIT Security\u003c/em\u003e tab displays the effective permissions for the selected user or group. Effective permissions consist of various permissions, such as NTFS and share permissions, explicit permissions and inherited permissions. In the diagram, you can see how a user or group obtained a certain permission.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003ePermission Origin\u003c/em\u003e button to open an additional tab where the origin of the permission of the selected user or group is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/analysis/analysis-diagram/","title":"Analysis Diagram"},{"content":"Discovery Service The inventory in Docusnap is performed by the Discovery Service. Every Docusnap installation has a client discovery, which can be used to start the inventory. Once the Docusnap Server is configured for the connected database, a Server Discovery is also provided. This one is chosen when an inventory should be scheduled and executed at a later date automated. When the inventory should by performed with a Discovery Service, which was installed at another site, the respective Discovery Service must be chosen from the list. Inventory via the Remote Discovery Service can either be performed immediately or scheduled.\nAuthentication Depending on the systems for which the inventory process will be performed, the second step in the wizard is to either specify your credentials or a domain.\nThe term \u0026ldquo;domain\u0026rdquo; will be used in Docusnap both in connection with logging on to an Active Directory and for the logical organization in the Inventory tree view. This means that, if no Active Directory Domain Service is available, a domain name must nonetheless be entered for purposes of logical organization in the Docusnap tree view.\nFor an Active Directory domain authentication, enter the domain name in the Domain field. Whether it is necessary to enter your username and password depends on the following:\nIf you are logged on to the Docusnap computer as a domain administrator, you can use the integrated Windows authentication for the inventory process. This means that there is no need to enter a username and password. If you are logged on to the Docusnap computer as a user other than a domain administrator, you need to specify the corresponding credentials. If you need to enter your credentials for authentication, the NetBIOS name, followed by a backslash (), must precede the user name. For example, the NetBIOS name of the domain named dsra.local is dsra. Therefore, you would have to enter the following user name: dsra\\\u0026lt;UserName\u0026gt;. Alternatively the form \u0026lt;user name\u0026gt;@dsra can be used. Click the Check Credentials button to log on to the Active Directory. If the login was successful, you can proceed with the next step.\nIn the dialog Options - Inventory it can be defined, that a dedicated domain controller is used. If this option is enabled, you can select the domain controller, which should be used to retrieve the systems from the Active Directory.\nSelecting a Domain For some modules, a logical domain has to be selected or created so the data can be displayed in the tree hierarchy.\nWhen you click the button, a data entry screen opens where you can create the desired new logical domain for Docusnap. After you have entered the name in the text field, you can apply your entry by clicking the Save button or discard your changes by clicking the Cancel button.\nTenant Domain The inventory data of cloud modules such as Azure and Microsoft 365 or Amazon Web Services are displayed in the Inventory data explorer below the Cloud Infrastructure node. For this reason, these modules require their own tenant domains. For the Microsoft Cloud modules Azure and Microsoft 365, a common tenant domain can be used. For AWS, a separate tenant domain is created.\nTo create a new tenant domain, click on the button to open the data entry screen for creating a new tenant domain. After the name has been entered in the text field, it is possible to accept this entry via the Save button or to terminate the entry process via the Cancel button.\nWithin a company, domains and tenant domains cannot have the same name. ","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"discovery-service\"\u003eDiscovery Service\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe inventory in Docusnap is performed by the Discovery Service. Every Docusnap installation has a client discovery, which can be used to start the inventory. Once the Docusnap Server is configured for the connected database, a Server Discovery is also provided.  This one is chosen when an inventory should be scheduled and executed at a later date automated. When the inventory should by performed with a Discovery Service, which was installed at another site, the respective Discovery Service must be chosen from the list. Inventory via the Remote Discovery Service can either be performed immediately or scheduled.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/authentication/","title":"Authentication"},{"content":"Introduction Due to specific security requirements, such as tier models, the provision of additional inventory options is necessary. Currently, all our scanning modules are available for interactive use. A main issue with interactive inventory is the need to work with highly privileged user accounts. This includes entering and storing such accounts in various wizards and jobs, as well as their integration into the Docusnap Discovery Service (DDS) or the Docusnap Server. The use of independent scanning modules can circumvent this problem, as they can be operated either manually or with locally authorized users.\nThe autonomous execution of the Discovery-[Module].exe generates a file with the suffix *.dsi. This file can be imported into Docusnap either interactively or automatically via file import. The output file of the DSI is named according to a specific scheme, which consists of the module name, the hostname, and a unique identifier, the so-called GUID (Globally Unique Identifier).\nThe discovery modules \u0026lsquo;Discovery-Windows.exe\u0026rsquo; and \u0026lsquo;Discovery-Windows-Legacy.exe\u0026rsquo; are still exempt from this standardization Autonomous Discovery Modules The discovery modules listed below are available in the \u0026lsquo;Tool\u0026rsquo; folder of the Docusnap program directory and on the system where the Docusnap Discovery Service is installed.\nMicrosoft Windows Discovery-Windows.exe DocusnapScript.exe (same as Discovery-Windows.exe, no further development, remains for existing implementations) Discovery-Windows-Legacy.exe (for Windows 7 and older) Microsoft Distributed File System Discovery-DFS.exe Microsoft DNS Discovery-DNS.exe Discovery-DNS-Legacy.exe (no further development, remains for existing implementations) Microsoft DHCP Discovery-DHCP.exe Discovery-DHCP-Legacy.exe (no further development, remains for existing implementations) Microsoft Active Directory Discovery-ADDS.exe Discovery-ADDS-Legacy.exe (no further development, remains for existing implementations) Microsoft Exchange Discovery-Exchange.exe (for versions from 2013) Microsoft SharePoint Discovery-SharePoint.exe (for SharePoint versions from 2013) Discovery-SharePoint-2010.exe Discovery-SharePoint-2007.exe Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication Discovery-VeeamBR.exe (from version 11) Linux Discovery-Linux Discovery-Linux-Legacy (no further development, remains for existing implementations) Mac Discovery-Mac Standard Parameters This refers to parameters that are present for every autonomous discovery module. To ensure backward compatibility, alias notations for each of these parameters are supported. It is noted in our documentation that existing module-specific notations of a standard parameter are supported; however, in the help function and documentation, only the official parameter designation is now described.\nUsage: Discovery-Example.exe [OPTIONS] Note: \u0026#34;OPTIONS\u0026#34; is to be replaced with the desired command-line arguments. Options: -h\tDescription: Displays this help message and exits the program Example: C:\\Discovery-Example.exe -h -o \u0026lt;path\u0026gt; Description: Sets the output directory where files will be saved Example: C:\\Discovery-Example.exe -o C:\\Temp -n \u0026lt;filename\u0026gt; Description: Defines the name of the output file. Example: C:\\Discovery-Example.exe -n new-filename.dsi -a \u0026lt;count\u0026gt; Description: Determines the number of archived results to keep (default is 4) Example: C:\\Discovery-Example.exe -a 10 -l \u0026lt;loglevel\u0026gt; Description: Sets the logging level for the application. Default: Error Possible Values: Debug, Information, Warning, Error, Critical, None Example: C:\\Discovery-Example.exe -l debug Module-Specific Parameters This refers to parameters that are only used for a specific module. These parameters are described in the help function of the respective discovery module (Discovery-Example.exe -h) and in the documentation.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"introduction\"\u003eIntroduction\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDue to specific security requirements, such as tier models, the provision of additional inventory options is necessary. Currently, all our scanning modules are available for interactive use. A main issue with interactive inventory is the need to work with highly privileged user accounts. This includes entering and storing such accounts in various wizards and jobs, as well as their integration into the Docusnap Discovery Service (DDS) or the Docusnap Server. The use of independent scanning modules can circumvent this problem, as they can be operated either manually or with locally authorized users.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/","title":"Autonomous Discovery Modules"},{"content":"The Amazon Web Services inventory can be started via two different wizards, AWS and AWS - Legacy. The inventory result of the AWS inventory is stored in the Cloud Infrastructure area below a tenant domain. To remain compatible with older Docusnap versions, the AWS - Legacy inventory can still display the newly inventoried data in the Infrastructure area.\nThe Amazon Web Services Inventory Wizard opens from the AWS or AWS - Legacy button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps) the Amazon Web Services step is displayed.\nThe user created in advance is now used in combination with the created keys to perform the inventory in Docusnap.\nAny name can be assigned as the Display Name. The values for Access Key ID and Secret Access Key are the keys previously defined for the user. The region is the region in which the desired data and the user are located.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Amazon Web Services inventory can be started via two different wizards, \u003cem\u003eAWS\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eAWS - Legacy\u003c/em\u003e.\nThe inventory result of the \u003cem\u003eAWS\u003c/em\u003e inventory is stored in the \u003cem\u003eCloud Infrastructure\u003c/em\u003e area below a tenant domain. To remain compatible with older Docusnap versions, the \u003cem\u003eAWS - Legacy\u003c/em\u003e inventory can still display the newly inventoried data in the \u003cem\u003eInfrastructure\u003c/em\u003e area.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Amazon Web Services Inventory Wizard opens from the \u003cem\u003eAWS\u003c/em\u003e or \u003cem\u003eAWS - Legacy\u003c/em\u003e button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e) the \u003cem\u003eAmazon Web Services\u003c/em\u003e step is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/amazon-web-services/aws-inventory/","title":"AWS Inventory"},{"content":"The purpose of the Report Designer is to create and edit reports. The datasheets and overviews that can be created in the Documentation module are based on reports and are also editable from the Report Designer.\nComponents A report consists of various components. Primarily, data bands, text boxes and lines are used as components.\nBand: Each band is a placeholder for the data that will be shown at that position in the generated report. To show data from the database, you need to define data bands. Data filtering and sorting are set via the data band. The data band will be repeated as long as corresponding data is available in the database. In addition, data bands determine how the report will be organized. The header band is another useful data band. Using this type of band, column headings for the data can be shown. The header band will only be displayed in connection with a data band.\nText boxes: Text boxes contain values from the database or static values.\nData Sources When you create a new report, all tables and relations are automatically created from the Docusnap database. The report is always connected to the database currently selected in Docusnap. Tables from the database as well as custom tables, which were created by means of SQL statements, may be used as data sources. In order to show the values from the data sources, you need to create data bands.\nTo reduce the time required for data loading, the tables are initially not connected to the database. To display the data from the table in the report, first select the table to be connected from the Dictionary tab. Then, go to the Properties tab and set the Connect on Start property of the table to true.\nIt is also possible to enter SQL statements and thereby build a table that contains data from several other tables. To create a new data source, click the button or right-click the Dictionary tab and select New Data Source. The connection is always an OLE DB connection. Tables that are no longer needed can be deleted by clicking the button or by right-clicking and selecting Delete from the context menu. In addition to the tables, the relations between the tables are loaded into the Designer. You can also create new relations, if required. The columns that are used to define the relation must have the same data type.\nVariables When you create a report, three variables are created. These variables cause additional values from Docusnap to be added to the report.\nPrimaryKey: Each report is linked with an object in the tree structure. Each object has a primary key which identifies the records of the underlying table. To make sure that a report will only include the data associated with that object, you can define a filter so that only records with a matching primary key will be used. This way, the report always shows the correct data for the domain, the computer, etc. When you generate/execute the report, the corresponding value will be assigned to the PrimaryKey variable. Since most predefined reports depend on the object that they are linked with, you need to specify the primary key. If no primary key has been specified yet, you can do so when changing to the Preview tab.\nLanguageID: The LanguageID for German is 0, and 1 for English. This refers to the language that was selected in the Reports tab. Using this variable, you can select the proper language for tables that exist in two languages.\nInitialLanguage: This variable can hold one of the following values: TextEN for English or TextDE for German.\nPreview In the Report Designer, two types of previews are available. When you click the Preview tab, the report will be executed. Clicking the Full Preview icon in the status bar will execute the report using the currently selected cover page, header and footer. For most reports, the data will be filtered using a primary key. For this reason, you must specify an existing primary key to see data on the Preview tab.\nFormat Settings You can apply the desired style to each Docusnap component.\nTo apply a style, open the Properties tab and click the Component Style property.\nStyles are provided for titles, headers, data, etc. The styles without the Level1 to Level4 addition are styles with the current design.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe purpose of the Report Designer is to create and edit reports. The datasheets and overviews that can be created in the Documentation module are based on reports and are also editable from the Report Designer.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"components\"\u003eComponents\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA report consists of various components. Primarily, data bands, text boxes and lines are used as components.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBand: Each band is a placeholder for the data that will be shown at that position in the generated report. To show data from the database, you need to define data bands. Data filtering and sorting are set via the data band. The data band will be repeated as long as corresponding data is available in the database. In addition, data bands determine how the report will be organized.\nThe header band is another useful data band. Using this type of band, column headings for the data can be shown. The header band will only be displayed in connection with a data band.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-designer/basics/","title":"Basics"},{"content":"Captions are not linked with any table. They are used to organize the objects and therefore help to present the tree structure more clearly.\nFor a meta object of the Caption type, all general settings are available.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eCaptions are not linked with any table. They are used to organize the objects and therefore help to present the tree structure more clearly.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/captions/docusnap-tools-manage-metaobjects-caption.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Tools Manage Metaobjects Caption\" title=\"Docusnap Tools Manage Metaobjects Caption\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a meta object of the \u003cem\u003eCaption\u003c/em\u003e type, all general settings are available.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/captions/","title":"Captions"},{"content":"Before continuing with the creation of the report, you will now be introduced to working with data bands and text boxes. In addition, a brief explanation of the functions that are available for reports will be provided.\nBands Bands are key components of a report. Via data bands, you establish the connection to the database. In addition, they can be used to sort and filter the data. Data bands can be added from the toolbox. They fulfill a variety of tasks. Each band has a different color to make them more distinctive.\nData band: The data band connects your report to the database. When you create a data band, the dialog for selecting the data source, relation, master component, sorting, and filtering conditions opens. From this dialog, you can select the data source. The data band is repeated as often as corresponding data is available in the table. You can restrict the amount of data to be included in the report by specifying relations and filters. For a relation, you need to select a master component. This ensures that only data that matches this master component will be shown. A relation must exist between the tables selected for the data band and for the master component. When you create a new data band or double-click an existing data band, a dialog opens. From this dialog, you can select the relation and the master component. The report shows the first record from the master component and then immediately below it, the associated records from the sub-component. Then, the next record from the master component is shown and again the associated records from the sub-component. This pattern is repeated until there are no more master component records. Example: The domains that have been inventoried can be assigned to the company accounts. Filters are used to filter the data on one or more values. When you create a new data band or double-click an existing data band, a dialog opens. From this dialog, you can define the filter. If required, you can specify multiple filters that can be combined using either And or Or operator. Header Band: The header band, the page header band and the report title band can be used to show headings and titles/headings at the desired position in the report. The header band provides the headings for a specific data band. The header band is shown before the data of the associated data band. If the data band is empty, the header band will not be displayed either. The page header band is shown on every page, and the report title band is shown only once, i.e. at the beginning of the report.\nFooter Band: The footer band, the page footer band and the report summary band are the closing items of the associated data display. The footer band is shown after the data of the data band. The page footer band appears at the bottom of each page, and the report summary band at the end of the report.\nGroup Header Band: Using a group header band, you can group data of a table. For instance, the data can be grouped by operating systems. When you add a group header band, the dialog for entering the group condition opens. Here, you can select the column that controls the grouping and you can specify the desired sort order for the data. Then, a separate data band must be defined for the remaining data. In the heading, the value selected in the condition will be shown and the data will be grouped accordingly. Make sure to add a data band after the group header band. Otherwise, the group header band will not be displayed either.\nGroup Footer Band: This band can, e.g., be used to draw a line below the group. However, it is also possible to calculate the number of records.\nColumn Header Band: The data in the data bands can be shown in columns. The column header band is automatically divided into as many columns as the associated data band has.\nColumn Footer Band: This band is the closing item of a data band consisting of multiple columns.\nHierarchical Data Band: This band enables you to display a recursive table. A recursive table has a column that depends on another column in the same table, for example, a list of employees where one employee may be the manager of another. The properties for the hierarchical data band include a group of Hierarchical properties. In the Key Data Column field, you can specify the column that contains the key for the data. In the Master Key Data Column field, you can specify the column to which the hierarchy refers. The Parent Value field allows you to enter a value that indicates the top of the hierarchy.\nChild Band: This band is an extension of its parent band. Even though it is possible to place multiple data fields from the tables in a single data band, the size of the data band does not adjust as desired when you change the font size. For this reason, child bands are used. The color of the child band is slightly lighter than the color of its parent data band.\nText Boxes Text boxes can be used to show the headings and data of your report. When you add a text box, the Text Editor opens. In the Text Editor, you can either add fields from the database or enter text.\nHeading: The heading for the data is text that has been entered manually. You can enter this text in the Text Editor. To apply the text to the text box, click the OK button. Alternatively, open the Properties tab where you can enter the text in the Text field. To open the Text Editor, either click the icon or double-click the text box. Data: If you want to output data in a text box, place the text box on a data band, a group header band, a hierarchical data band or a child band belonging to another data band. In addition, the data source for the band must match the table associated with the column. Otherwise, there is no connection to the database and the data from the database cannot be shown. In the Text Editor, you can select the data fields either on the Expression or the Data Column page. To add a field from the Expression page, double-click it. On the Data Column page, click the desired field. Then, click the OK button to apply the selected data field to the text box. Expression: In text boxes, data fields and text may be combined. In this case, you can only use the Expression page. When using the Expression page, you can enter a name that will precede the data column. Make sure to place such a text box on a data band, a group header band, a hierarchical data band or a child band belonging to a data band. Furthermore, the data source for the band must match the table associated with the column. Otherwise, the data from the database cannot be shown, because there is no connection to the database. Functions: In addition to data fields and text, you can specify functions to be included in a text box. The functions available in Docusnap will be explained in the Functions section. Rich Text For data entry screens, it is possible to create rich text boxes. In order to show the format settings of these fields in the report as well, you need to define a corresponding rich text box in the report. Rich text boxes can be moved and handled just like text boxes. The difference between a rich text box and a normal text box is that the data column to be included in the report will not be entered in the field, but rather specified from the Properties tab. You can select the data column by setting the Data Column property on the Properties tab. The text will only be displayed with the selected format settings if you specify the data column through this property.\nFunctions Docusnap provides several functions for reports.\nGeneral Functions DsLookup: Many tables contain only numbers. To express these numbers as words, the tSysInitials table from the Docusnap database can be used. In this table, the states of services and computers, the computer types, the countries, and other information are stored as literals. The InitialFilter column contains the values stored in the respective tables. The DsLookup function can be used to show the values from these tables as words. Enter this function into a text box located in a data band. The function must be surrounded by braces \u0026ldquo;{}\u0026rdquo;, otherwise the Designer will not recognize it as a function. Thus, the form of the function is: {DsLookup(ColumnName,\u0026quot;InitialFilter\u0026quot;)}. The column name represents the value in the table that should be replaced with the literal. \u0026ldquo;InitialFilter\u0026rdquo; is the word that exists in the InitialFilter column of the tSysInitials table. Thus, if you want to display the online status for the tHosts table, enter the following function: {DsLookup(tHosts.Online,\u0026quot;OnlineStatus\u0026quot;)}. DsSortIPAddress: If you wish to sort a data band by IP addresses, the number blocks with less than three digits need to be left-padded with zeros. This means that if you want to sort the data in a data band by IP addresses, precede the name of the IP address column with the {DsSortIPAddress(ColumnName)} function. This function is used by the IP Addresses report.\nDsGetDateFromTimeStamp: The date from certain Active Directory properties, such as the creation date, is stored as a timestamp. To convert the timestamp into a readable format, the {DsGetDateFromTimeStamp(ColumnName)} function is used. This function is used by the ADS Docu User report.\nDsPlainTextRTF: If you enter your text in a rich text box, the formatting is stored along with the actual text in the database. The DsPlainTextRTF function allows you to output the plain text in a text box, without considering the formatting. {DsPlainTextRTF(ColumnName)}\nDsGetSIDName: If the User/Group Selection component is used in input screens, the SID of the selected AD user or AD group is stored. There are also cases where the SID of an AD user or AD group is inventoried during the inventory. To display the corresponding AD user or group instead of the SID, the function DsGetSIDName is available. The AD inventory is used to resolve the SID. The function requires the SID and AccountID of the company where the AD inventory is located. {DsGetSIDName(Column Name,AccountID)}\nPermissions DsAccessMask and DsACEFlag: These are special functions to determine the access mask or the ACE flags when scanning the permissions. These fields are located in the tACL table of the database.\n{DsAccessMask(ColumnName)}\n{DsACEFlag(ColumnName)}\nGetBit: Using the GetBit function, you can individually evaluate the users\u0026rsquo; permissions to the directories. To show the permissions in a report, you can use the {GetBit(ColumnName,Bit)} function. For this purpose, the Permission column is used as the column name. For the Bit argument, enter the number that corresponds to the required permission. If the user has this permission, an \u0026ldquo;x\u0026rdquo; will be returned; otherwise, a space. This function is used in the User (Resource), Directory (Resource) and Permission Analysis - Current View reports.\nPermissions and their Numeric Equivalents 0 = Read 1 = Write 2 = Create directories 3 = Read extended attributes 4 = Change extended attributes 5 = Execute 6 = Delete subdirectories 7 = Read attributes 8 = Change attributes 16 = Delete 17 = Read permissions 18 = Change permissions 19 = Owner Share Permissions: For the output of share permissions, three functions are used. These are {IsFullAccess(ColumnName)} for full access, {IsChangeAccess(ColumnName)} for change access and {IsReadAccess(ColumnName)} for read-only access. Use the Permission column from the tSharePermission table as the column name. If the user has the respective share permission, an \u0026ldquo;x\u0026rdquo; will be returned; otherwise, a space.\nExtensions DsGetObjectDisplayValue: Outputs an object linked with an extension. The values are stored in the tExtensions table and in the table for the respective extension, i.e. tExComment, tExContract, tExFinance, tExPassword and tExReminder. The syntax of this function is: {DsGetObjectDisplayValue(ObjectId, ObjectType)} Exchange Server To display permissions of public folders, mailbox folders, and mailboxes of the Exchange Server, the functions AreBitsSetX, AreBitsSet, and AreBitsNotSet are used. Column names are these columns.\ntExchangePublicFolderPermission.ExchangePublicFolderPermission\ntExchangeMailboxPermission.ExchangeMailboxPermission\ntExchangeMailboxFolderPermissions.MailboxPermissions\nAreBitsSetX: To output the permissions, the function {AreBitsSetX(columnname,bits)} is used. The bit is a number or multiple numbers, each corresponding to a permission. If the user has this permission, an \u0026lsquo;x\u0026rsquo; is returned, otherwise a space.\nAreBitsSet and AreBitsNotSet: Some permissions, the permission is composed of set and not set bits. To evaluate this permission, there are the functions AreBitsSet and AReBitsNotSet that return true or false. The following function is used in the report: {IIF(AreBitsSet(columnname,bits) = true and AreBitsNotSet(columnname,bits) = true, \u0026quot;x\u0026quot;, \u0026quot;\u0026quot;)} This function returns an \u0026lsquo;x\u0026rsquo; if the respective bits were set and not set.\nMailbox Permissions and their Positions\n22,23,24,25 = Full access 22 = Delete objects 23 = Read permissions 24 = Change permissions 25 = Change owner 16 = Send as 17 = Receive as 18 = View Information Store Status 26 = Send on Behalf 21 = External account Public Folder Permissions and their Position\n5 = Folder visible 3 = Owner 1 = Read elements 0 = Create elements 7 = Edit own elements 9 = Delete own elements 6 = Edit all elements 8 = Delete all elements 2 = Create subfolders 4 = Folder contact person Mailbox folders set and not set Positions and Permissions set Bits bit set Bits Permissions 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 Owner 0,1,2,5,6,7,8,9 3,4 Publishing Editor 0,1,6,7,8,9 2,3,4,5 Editor 0,1,2,5,7,9 3,4,6,8 Publishing Author 0,1,5,7,9 2,3,4,6,8 Author 0,1,5,9 2,3,4,6,7,8 Non Editing Author 1,5 0,2,3,4,6,7,8,9 Reviewer 0,5 1,2,3,4,6,7,8,9 Contributor Licenses Docusnap uses functions for license calculations. The value used is the SoftwareID from the tSoftwareProducts table.\nCalculating the correction value\n{DsLicCorrectionValue(SoftwareID)}\nCounting the licenses purchased\n{DsLicAvailableLicenses(SoftwareID)}\nCounting the licenses in use\n{DsLicFoundCount(SoftwareID)}\nCalculating the upgrade and downgrade paths\n{DsLicPathCorrectionValue(SoftwareID)}\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eBefore continuing with the creation of the report, you will now be introduced to working with data bands and text boxes. In addition, a brief explanation of the functions that are available for reports will be provided.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"bands\"\u003eBands\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBands are key components of a report. Via data bands, you establish the connection to the database. In addition, they can be used to sort and filter the data. Data bands can be added from the toolbox. They fulfill a variety of tasks. Each band has a different color to make them more distinctive.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-creation/components-and-functions/","title":"Components and Functions"},{"content":"For creating and editing concepts, the Concept Editor is available. The Concept Editor opens automatically when you create a new concept or when you open an existing concept for editing.\nRibbons The Ribbons allow you to define the settings for formatting, content, and view, etc. of your concept.\nDocument Use the document area to create your concept. In this area, you can enter the text and drag all elements such as reports, data elements, etc. there.\nObjects The Objects window displays all Explorers from the various modules. From this area, you can drag documents, reports, data elements, etc. and drop them into your concept.\nDocument Outline The Document Outline window lists the headings to which one of the Headline styles is assigned. By clicking on a heading here, you can jump to the corresponding section in your document. This way, it is easier to navigate in your document, especially if it is large.\nVariables The Variables window provides variables you can insert into your concept. The variables can also be inserted by clicking the Variable button from the Insert ribbon.\nTasks If Placeholders were defined for a document, a description of each placeholder will be displayed in the Tasks window. Click the respective button in the Tasks window to open the selection window for data which is available for this placeholder. Once you have selected the data, it replaces the placeholder.\nError List By clicking the Validate button, you can check the concept for validity. Any errors found will be displayed in the error list. An error is present if, e.g., an inserted diagram was deleted or if a report does not exist any longer.\nLayout The windows can be arranged as desired by dragging and dropping. The position of each window is saved locally and will be remembered each time you open the Concept Editor.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eFor creating and editing concepts, the \u003cem\u003eConcept Editor\u003c/em\u003e is available. The Concept Editor opens automatically when you create a new concept or when you open an existing concept for editing.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/concept/create-concept/concept-editor/docusnap-it-concept-editor.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-IT-Concept-Editor\" title=\"Docusnap-IT-Concept-Editor\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"ribbons\"\u003eRibbons\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/concept/menu-ribbon/\" title=\"Ribbons\"\u003eRibbons\u003c/a\u003e allow you to define the settings for formatting, content, and view, etc. of your concept.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"document\"\u003eDocument\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the document area to create your concept. In this area, you can enter the text and drag all elements such as reports, data elements, etc. there.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/create-concept/concept-editor/","title":"Concept Editor"},{"content":"A Docusnap Discovery Service is in Docusnap linked to a client (paired). This is necessary so that the inventoried data can be mapped to the appropriate clients. As part of the pairing process an own encryption for the data exchange is defined as well.\nThe configuration of the Docusnap Discovery Service is started via the Docusnap Client in the title bar General -\u0026gt; Docusnap Discovery Service Configuration.\nIn this dialog the most important system information as well as configuration data of all existing DDS installations are displayed. The activated filter function can be used to filter content. The integrated export function allows further processing in Excel.\nA new service is created by clicking the New button. The name for the Docusnap Discovery Service is specified and the desired company, in which the data should be is to be displayed later, is selected.\nIn order to accelerate tasks such as inventorying Windows systems, Docusnap performs multiple tasks in parallel. By default, 30 concurrent processes can be performed. These can be adjusted in the Max. Threads texfield. IP segments can be optionally specified to inventory processes to subnets.\nSaving the new Docusnap Discovery Services opens a dialog with which a complete installation package can be generated as a zip file. This zip file installation is then carried out on a computer on site, which should be inventoried.\nCreate Installation Package Registration URI\nImportant: Should the Docusnap Discovery Service be installed at a remote site, the URL must be adapted accordingly. This can be subsequently edited while configuring the Docusnap Discovery Services.\nCreate Package\nClicking on the button Create Package the Docusnap Discovery Service Setup including pairing data is stored in a zip file.\nImport With the New button Discovery Services can be created individually. However, if many DDS are needed, the creation can be time consuming. The Discovery Service Import can therefore be used to create several DDS at the same time. Click on the Import button to open the dialog. The button is only active when the Docusnap Server is started.\nA CSV file can be selected by clicking on the button. In the CSV file, the values must be separated by \u0026ldquo;;\u0026rdquo; in the following order: Discovery Service Name (any name for the DDS), Company (Name or AccountID of the company to which the inventoried data should be stored), Site (Name or SiteID of the site, can remain empty), Max Thread (maximum number of threads for the scan). Docusnap assumes that the first line of the CSV file contains headings and therefore the first line is not included in the import. Click the Import button to import the entries as DDS.\nAs an alternative to CSV import, Discovery Services can also be created using the Add button. By clicking on the empty field in the Discovery Service Name column, the name for the DDS can be specified. An existing company can be selected in the Company column. In the column Location a location of the selected company can be selected. The maximum number of threads can also be adjusted.\nClick the Delete button to delete the selected entry from the list.\nClick the Save button to save a CSV file. This file contains the URL and the pin for the registration of the DDS. After the dialog has closed, the DDS are added to the list.\nServer Connection The Server API connection is necessary for scheduling and processing jobs for Docusnap Server and Discovery Service. The URL must match the Docusnap Server setting in the Server API step. If there is no server connection, Discovery Services cannot be created.\nDeactivated Discovery Services When a Discovery Service is selected, it can be disabled and enabled using the Activate Discovery Service checkbox. Clicking the Show Deactivated Discovery Services checkbox displays all disabled DDSs so the can be reactivated.\nClient Discovery Services Each Docusnap installation contains a local Discovery Server. It can be used to perform inventories without having to configure the Docusnap Server. By clicking on the Show all Client Discovery Services checkbox, all other client DDSs connected to the same database are displayed in addition to the local DDS of the current system.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eA Docusnap Discovery Service is in Docusnap linked to a client (paired). This is necessary so that the inventoried data can be mapped to the appropriate clients. As part of the pairing process an own encryption for the data exchange is defined as well.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe configuration of the Docusnap Discovery Service is started via the Docusnap Client in the title bar \u003cem\u003eGeneral -\u0026gt; Docusnap Discovery Service Configuration.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn this dialog the most important system information as well as configuration data of all existing DDS installations are displayed. The activated filter function can be used to filter content. The integrated export function allows further processing in Excel.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/discovery-service/configuration-in-docusnap/","title":"Configuration in Docusnap"},{"content":"In order to improve the readability of this document, the following conventions apply:\nNormal text uses the Open Sans font. Names of buttons, checkboxes, etc. are written in italics.\nExamples from the code are formatted as follows:\nvar add2 = function(number) {return number + 2;} In some chapters, tips for using Docusnap are given. These tips are indicated by a dark blue bar. Text passages that contain a warning are highlighted with an orange bar. Warnings are notes that must be followed when working with Docusnap. Text passages that contain additional information are indicated by a light blue bar. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn order to improve the readability of this document, the following conventions apply:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNormal text uses the Open Sans font. Names of buttons, checkboxes, etc. are written in \u003cem\u003eitalics.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExamples from the code are formatted as follows:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cdiv class=\"highlight\"\u003e\u003cpre tabindex=\"0\" style=\"background-color:#f8f8f8;-moz-tab-size:4;-o-tab-size:4;tab-size:4;\"\u003e\u003ccode class=\"language-js\" data-lang=\"js\"\u003e\u003cspan style=\"display:flex;\"\u003e\u003cspan\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color:#204a87;font-weight:bold\"\u003evar\u003c/span\u003e \u003cspan style=\"color:#000\"\u003eadd2\u003c/span\u003e \u003cspan style=\"color:#ce5c00;font-weight:bold\"\u003e=\u003c/span\u003e \u003cspan style=\"color:#204a87;font-weight:bold\"\u003efunction\u003c/span\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color:#000;font-weight:bold\"\u003e(\u003c/span\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color:#000\"\u003enumber\u003c/span\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color:#000;font-weight:bold\"\u003e)\u003c/span\u003e \u003cspan style=\"color:#000;font-weight:bold\"\u003e{\u003c/span\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color:#204a87;font-weight:bold\"\u003ereturn\u003c/span\u003e \u003cspan style=\"color:#000\"\u003enumber\u003c/span\u003e \u003cspan style=\"color:#ce5c00;font-weight:bold\"\u003e+\u003c/span\u003e \u003cspan style=\"color:#0000cf;font-weight:bold\"\u003e2\u003c/span\u003e\u003cspan style=\"color:#000;font-weight:bold\"\u003e;}\u003c/span\u003e\n\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/span\u003e\u003c/code\u003e\u003c/pre\u003e\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-primary\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    In some chapters, tips for using Docusnap are given. These tips are indicated by a dark blue bar.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-warning\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    Text passages that contain a warning are highlighted with an orange bar. Warnings are notes that must be followed when working with Docusnap.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-success\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    Text passages that contain additional information are indicated by a light blue bar.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/conventions/","title":"Conventions"},{"content":"To create a new concept, change to the Documents tree and select the Concept heading. You can either create a directory where the concepts will be stored or integrate your concepts directly below the Concept heading.\nTo create a new directory, select the Concept heading in the tree view, click the New button and select Concept Directory. After naming the directory, you can save it so that it will be displayed in the Concept explorer. You can also enter an additional description.\nTo create a new concept, you must either select the Concept heading or a directory where the document will reside after its creation. Then, click the New button and select Create Concept.\nThis opens the Create Concept dialog where you can either create an empty document or use a template to create your new document. Enter a name for the concept and click the Create button. The concept then opens automatically in the Concept Editor.\nConcepts are created and managed in Docusnap. For editing concepts, the Concept Editor is available.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo create a new concept, change to the \u003cem\u003eDocuments\u003c/em\u003e tree and select the \u003cem\u003eConcept\u003c/em\u003e heading. You can either create a directory where the concepts will be stored or integrate your concepts directly below the \u003cem\u003eConcept\u003c/em\u003e heading.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo create a new directory, select the \u003cem\u003eConcept\u003c/em\u003e heading in the tree view, click the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button and select \u003cem\u003eConcept Directory.\u003c/em\u003e After naming the directory, you can save it so that it will be displayed in the \u003cem\u003eConcept\u003c/em\u003e explorer. You can also enter an additional description.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/create-concept/","title":"Create Concept"},{"content":"Editor For creating and editing of the IT documentation frameworks a separate editor is provided. Once the IT Documentation heading or an underlying node is selected, the editor can be opened in a separate window by clicking the button Open Editor in the action bar.\nThe left pane displays a data structure that displays all existing IT documentation frameworks. The appropriate buttons are made available in the ribbon, depending on which node was selected in the data structure. For example, when a view is selected, the Add New Level button is displayed. In the main area the data entry screen is displayed for the selected node. In addition, there is the Visualization window. In this windows a preview of the business structures is created immediately after saving of every change of the structure.\nCreating a new framework The first step in creating the documentation is to create a new framework. This is the top level of this documentation. This can be applied in two ways. Either directly in the tree or via the editor.\nIf the IT documentation heading is selected in the Documentation tree, a framework can be created for the respective company. Click the New button to open the data entry screen. Once a name has been assigned to the framework, it can be created by clicking the Save button.\nAlternatively, all objects can be created via the editor from the beginning.\nAfter the IT Documentation heading is selected, the IT Documentation ribbon is displayed. By clicking on the button Editor, a separate window is opened and a new framework can be created using the Add Framework button.\nCreate views Again, a new view can be created directly from the Documentation tree or from the editor.\nIn the editor, the Views node must be selected for the respective framework, and then click the Add View button in the ribbon. A name for the new view must be entered in the data entry screen and then click on the Save button.\nCreate levels or add existing levels Levels can only be created in the editor. However, once created, they can be edited in the documentation tree.\nIn the editor, a created view is selected in the data explorer and a new level is created by clicking the Add New Level button. In addition to the name, a color can also be selected for the level, which will be used in the visualization. Use the Sorting field to specify the order in which they are to be listed, starting with the value 1. It is recommended to use 10-step steps instead of 1-step steps for sorting. In case of re-sorting this makes it easier, if there are multiple levels. When a property is selected, this value can be set for all elements associated with this level.\nIf levels have already been created in another view, these levels can also be assigned to the currently selected view using the Add Existing Level button.\nCreate structural elements Levels can be divided into structural elements. The structural elements can also contain additional structural elements. Once a level or a structural element has been selected, a new structural element can be created by clicking the Add Structural Element button. As with levels the output in the map is defined by the color and the sorting. If a property is selected, it can be specified for all elements of this structural element.\nAdd, link, and move elements The Add Elements button opens a window where you can select inventoried or already manually created items from the Inventory tree. These are added to the level or the structural element that has just been selected. If you want to assign elements to a different level later, they can be moved.\nIn order to display dependencies, the elements must still be linked to one another. To do this, the corresponding element must be selected and the predecessors or successors selected in the right pane. Depending on whether an element indicates that it has a predecessor or successor, the arrow direction of the link arrow changes.\nIf it is determined that an element should be listed at a different level, it can be reassigned by the Move Element function. To do this, first select the appropriate element in the tree and click the Move Element button in the ribbon. In the window Move Element you can select the level, the structural element or the group into which the element should be moved.\nWhen elements are added and then the original object is deleted, the elements in the level still exists. If these elements are also to be deleted, they must be deleted from the IT documentation.\nSome objects can be moved in the data explorer. For example, systems that are moved to another domain, systems that are changed from offline host to Windows systems, or IT assets that are placed in a different folder.\nAfter an object has been added as an element, it is deactivated in the Add Elements dialog so that it can\u0026rsquo;t be added again. By moving the object, it is no longer linked with the IT documentation and the object remains active in the Add Elements dialog therefore the same object can be added a second time.\nService, process and organization Not all elements that are required for the modeling of the business structures can also be obtained with the inventory. Therefore, service, process, and organizational elements can be created manually. These elements can be created in the editor if a level or a structural element has been selected in the tree. The created element is immediately assigned to the selected level or to the selected structural element.\nThe service, process and organizational elements are also listed in the inventory tree below the heading Organization for the respective heading. The elements can also be created and edited at these nodes. They can then be used in the IT Documentation Framework.\nCreate and link groups Groups can be created within levels and structural elements to better organize elements. Clicking the Add Group button opens the window for creating a group.\nAfter the group has been created, elements can be added. If already created elements are to be added to a group, they can be moved to the desired group using the Move Elements button after the element has been selected.\nIt is possible to define the links between the individual elements, between an element and a group or a group and a group. Clicking on the Predecessors/Successors for Groups Edit button opens a window to select the objects to which this group should be linked. You can select elements or groups. By clicking the Edit Group button, the group can be opened for editing. In this window the links of the group can also be adjusted.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"editor\"\u003eEditor\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor creating and editing  of the IT documentation frameworks a separate editor is provided. Once the \u003cem\u003eIT Documentation\u003c/em\u003e heading or an underlying node is selected, the editor can be opened in a separate window by clicking the button \u003cem\u003eOpen Editor\u003c/em\u003e in the action bar.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe left pane displays a data structure that displays all existing IT documentation frameworks. The appropriate buttons are made available in the ribbon, depending on which node was selected in the data structure. For example, when a view is selected, the \u003cem\u003eAdd New Level\u003c/em\u003e button is displayed. In the main area the data entry screen is displayed for the selected node. In addition, there is the \u003cem\u003eVisualization\u003c/em\u003e window. In this windows a preview of the business structures is created immediately after saving of every change of the structure.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/business-structures/create-it-documentation/","title":"Create IT Documentation"},{"content":"By selecting the Documentation area, the buttons required to document the IT environment are displayed.\nGeneral Description of basic wizard steps for creating documentation.\nMaps You can create Visio maps of your network, Active Directory, Exchange servers, etc.\nDocuments The buttons in this group can be used to create datasheets and overviews.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eBy selecting the \u003cem\u003eDocumentation\u003c/em\u003e area, the buttons  required to document the IT environment are displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/docusnap-menu-documentation.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Menu-Documentation\" title=\"Docusnap-Menu-Documentation\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"general\"\u003eGeneral\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDescription of basic wizard steps for creating documentation.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"maps\"\u003eMaps\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can create Visio maps of your network, Active Directory, Exchange servers, etc.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"documents\"\u003eDocuments\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe buttons in this group can be used to create datasheets and overviews.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/","title":"Creation of Documentation"},{"content":"In general, the Data tab displays the data for the object selected in the Explorer.\nBy double-clicking on the icon of an entry in the Data tab, the entry is selected in the Data Explorer.\nThe displayed data can be copied directly from the table of values by clicking in the cell and selecting the desired text. Then the desired text can be copied by pressing Ctrl + C or via the context menu.\nIf an object you select in the Explorer contains data, the corresponding object data will be displayed on the Data tab.\nIf the object selected in the Explorer has children, the content of the next level below will be shown on the Data tab.\nIf the nodes at the level below the object selected in the Explorer contain data and titles, only the data will be displayed on the Data tab.\nIf the nodes at the level below the object selected in the Explorer only contain titles, these will be displayed on the Data tab.\nIf the data of the child object can only occur once per parent object, they will be displayed in an alternative way. For example, there is only one record for General, i.e. general information about a Windows system. In the alternative representation, this data will not be presented as a table, but rather with their designation in the first column and the associated value in the second column.\nBy right-clicking anywhere in the main window, you open a context menu that enables you to hide or unhide columns as desired. Furthermore, you can change the order of columns simply by dragging them to the desired location with the mouse. When you click a column heading, the table will be sorted by this column. In addition, you can modify the column widths as desired. These changes will not be stored globally for all users, but rather separately for each individual user.\nIf you wish to undo these changes, open the context menu and restore the default settings by clicking Reset.\nThe filter can be enabled in the context menu of the data window. Using the Export button, you can export the contents of the Data tab to an unstructured Excel list. In addition, you can select the desired data items by applying an appropriate filter. For an explanation of the filter functionality, see the Filters section.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn general, the \u003cem\u003eData\u003c/em\u003e tab displays the data for the object selected in the Explorer.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBy double-clicking on the icon of an entry in the \u003cem\u003eData\u003c/em\u003e tab, the entry is selected in the \u003cem\u003eData Explorer.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe displayed data can be copied directly from the table of values by clicking in the cell and selecting the desired text. Then the desired text can be copied by pressing Ctrl + C or via the context menu.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/data/","title":"Data"},{"content":"One or more tenant domains are present below the cloud infrastructure. Within tenant domains, the respective resources are listed grouped by technologies.\nFor downward compatibility with older Docusnap versions, the data of the following cloud modules is still in the Infrastructure section:\nAzure Service - Legacy Exchange Online Office 365 - Legacy AWS - Legacy Data Organization - Cloud Technologies The inventoried cloud platforms can be very extensive and complex. Therefore, to ensure a good overview, the collected data below the Tenant domain is divided into the following categories:\nManagement services - all services required for the creation, management and monitoring of resources in the cloud. Services - all services that perform a specific task, such as storage or communication services Identity providers - all services that are responsible for user management, authentication and authorization of the respective cloud provider Data Organization - Specifics of the Microsoft Cloud Infrastructure During the inventory, a snapshot is created, which is then displayed as a standalone entry for each inventoried management service, service or identity provider.\nFor best completeness, multiple technologies are used during the collection process. API calls to statistics that provide insight into the usage of the captured services are not available on a daily basis. Therefore, these data views are marked with a statistic symbol and the respective column last update of statistic provides information on which period this data refers to. In addition, this statistical data is used for the reports in the respective node Microsoft Product Reports.\nAnother special feature are the links within this data structure. For example, in the Identity Provider area for a user, in addition to his user properties, group memberships and the available authentication methods, there are also all Teams memberships, OneDrive usage, the Exchange Online mailbox and the Microsoft 365 licenses assigned to him.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eOne or more tenant domains are present below the cloud infrastructure.\nWithin tenant domains, the respective resources are listed grouped by technologies.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor downward compatibility with older Docusnap versions, the data of the following cloud modules is still in the \u003cem\u003eInfrastructure\u003c/em\u003e section:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAzure Service - Legacy\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExchange Online\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOffice 365 - Legacy\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAWS - Legacy\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"data-organization---cloud-technologies\"\u003eData Organization - Cloud Technologies\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe inventoried cloud platforms can be very extensive and complex. Therefore, to ensure a good overview, the collected data below the Tenant domain is divided into the following categories:\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/data-organization/","title":"Data Organization"},{"content":"In the next step, you will select the domain to be documented. Multiple or all domains can be selected as required.\nIn addition it is defined, whether IT assets should be included in maps.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn the next step, you will select the domain to be documented. Multiple or all domains can be selected as required.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition it is defined, whether IT assets should be included in maps.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/basic-steps/domain-selection/docusnap-documentation-domain-selection.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Documentation-Domain-Selection\" title=\"Docusnap-Documentation-Domain-Selection\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/basic-steps/domain-selection/","title":"Domain Selection"},{"content":"Click the Create Package (Legacy) button in the Connect (Legacy) area to open the tab for configuring the Docusnap Connect packages. Only Connect Packages that were created as Connect V1 Package are listed here.\nThe combo box Package all the defined packages are listed. After you select a package the content of this package can be configured.\nIn the Table Name list all already defined tables are displayed. When you first open a package an empty table named TableName is already created. Enter the name to be assigned to the table after the export in the Table Name (Target) field.\nThe tree structure displays all entries from the Inventory explorer. Tick the checkbox to the left of each table that you want to select for export. The selected tables are listed in an overview table.\nTo export multiple tables, click the New button to add more tables for which the data can be configured.\nColumn: By double-clicking a field in the Column list, you can display the columns of the selected table. Select the desired column there. If you no longer need a column, you can remove it by either selecting Delete from the context menu or select the line and press the Del key on your keyboard. Constant values can be exported, in addition to the values from the table. In this case input the desired text in \u0026rsquo; \u0026rsquo; and numbers just as a number in the Column field. The name of the column after the export is defined in the Alias column. Alias: In the Alias column, you can specify the name of the column in the exported table. Each name in the Alias column must be unique. Display: If you enable the Display checkbox, the column will be displayed in the exported table. By disabling it, you can hide fields that are only used for data filtering. Reference: For columns with a reference specified, the reference can be added to the export. If you enable the Reference checkbox, the number in the column will be replaced with the corresponding reference text. When exporting, you can select the language in which you want the reference to appear. Sort Order: Using the Sort Order column, you can define the column order. Grouping: Here, you can select whether the respective column will be used for grouping or whether to calculate the count, maximum, minimum, sum, or average of the column. Filter: Here, you can enter any valid SQL condition (e.g. = 1). The clause can further be extended by additional fields or conditions. To hide the column used for filtering, you can disable the Display checkbox for this column. Once you have selected the tables and columns, you can click the Preview button to check the table output. By default, the first ten data rows of the table are shown in the preview. You can change this value in the Limit Data Rows to: field.\nFor the export, an additional column named ONC will be added to the data. This column identifies each object unambiguously so that, during an update of the SQL database, the objects can be mapped without problems. This column is also used for DocusnapLink when switching from another application to this Docusnap node.\nSpecial Features ADS When exporting ADS users, the system will add another table to the table selected for export. This table, with the _Values suffix, contains the additional properties of the users, such as account options, first name and last name, etc. The ADSObjectID column can be used to establish the corresponding relation.\nIT Assets When exporting IT assets, the system will also export two tables. The first one contains the values of the IT assets class. The ParentID column is used to map an existing hierarchy. The second table, with the _Values suffix, contains the values of the properties of each IT asset. The ITAssetID column is used to establish the relation between the two tables.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eCreate Package (Legacy)\u003c/em\u003e button in the \u003cem\u003eConnect (Legacy)\u003c/em\u003e area to open the tab for configuring the Docusnap Connect packages. Only Connect Packages that were created as Connect V1 Package are listed here.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe combo box \u003cem\u003ePackage\u003c/em\u003e all the defined packages are listed. After you select a package the content of this package can be configured.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eTable Name\u003c/em\u003e list all already defined tables are displayed. When you first open a package an empty table named \u003cem\u003eTableName\u003c/em\u003e is already created. Enter the name to be assigned to the table after the export in the \u003cem\u003eTable Name (Target)\u003c/em\u003e field.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/docusnap-connect/edit-package-v1/","title":"Edit Package V1"},{"content":"Some examples for the use of dialogs:\nFiltering a single system If the user should only select one particular system, it is best to define a lookup box (similar to a drop-down list).\nFiltering multiple systems To enable the selection of multiple values at the same time, use a checked list box.\nFiltering systems using an SQL statement The desired data can be filtered by applying an SQL statement to the data source. The selected values are stored in variables and can then be used in SQL statements.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eSome examples for the use of dialogs:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"filtering-a-single-system\"\u003eFiltering a single system\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the user should only select one particular system, it is best to define a \u003cem\u003elookup box\u003c/em\u003e (similar to a drop-down list).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"filtering-multiple-systems\"\u003eFiltering multiple systems\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo enable the selection of multiple values at the same time, use a \u003cem\u003echecked list box.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"filtering-systems-using-an-sql-statement\"\u003eFiltering systems using an SQL statement\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe desired data can be filtered by applying an SQL statement to the data source. The selected values are stored in variables and can then be used in SQL statements.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/dialog/example/","title":"Example"},{"content":"If the user is supposed to select multiple values, it is best to define a checked list box for this purpose.\nTo create this dialog, first define a new data source. This data source can then be used to supply the selection list values. Make sure to indicate in the data source how to sort the list because the components will output the values as they appear in the table without considering the alphabetical sort order.\nFirst, create a new form in the Report Designer by right-clicking the horizontal area to the right of the Preview tab and selecting New Form from the context menu.\nUse the toolbox to add a label as the first element and enter System: for the Text property.\nNow, add a checked list box to enable the selection of multiple systems. For the list box, specify FormHosts.HostName as the data source under the (Data Bindings - Items) property. In the (Name) property of the list box, assign the name cbxSystems. Then, add two buttons. For one of the buttons, select Cancel as the Dialog Result property, and for the other one, select OK as the Dialog Result property. Change the Text properties to OK and Cancel, respectively. This completes the dialog creation.\nNext, change to the ReportPage tab to add the data output components. Define a data band and select the tHosts table as its data source. For the table, set the Connect On Start property to True. Then, add a text box to the data band and enter tHosts.HostName as the Text property.\nNext, double-click the data band to open the Data Setup dialog. There, go to the Filters page to add a filter and enter the following expression: cbxSystems.Control.checkedItems.contains(tHosts.HostName). This way, only systems will be output whose name matches the name of one of the selected systems. This statement compares each of the selected systems with tHosts.HostName and if it contains the name of the system, the system will be displayed.\nThe expression is composed of cbxSystems (the name of the list box), Control to access the control, CheckedItems (the list of the selected systems), Contains (a comparison function), and (tHosts.HostName) which references the names of the systems in the tHosts table.\nOnly the selected values will be included in the report.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIf the user is supposed to select multiple values, it is best to define a \u003cem\u003echecked list box\u003c/em\u003e for this purpose.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/dialog/example/filtering-multiple-systems/docusnap-report-dialog-checkedlistbox-exectued.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Report-Dialog-CheckedListBox-Exectued\" title=\"Docusnap-Report-Dialog-CheckedListBox-Exectued\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo create this dialog, first define a \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/special-reporting-techniques/grouped-reports/\" title=\"new data source\"\u003enew data source\u003c/a\u003e. This data source can then be used to supply the selection list values. Make sure to indicate in the data source how to sort the list because the components will output the values as they appear in the table without considering the alphabetical sort order.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/dialog/example/filtering-multiple-systems/","title":"Filtering Multiple Systems"},{"content":"The Financial Records are used for storing financial data. You can, for example, record and evaluate the costs for the entire life cycle of a server.\nClick the New button to create a new finance record. The Title and Amount fields are mandatory and thus must be filled in. All list fields, such as Cost Type, Payment, Depreciation Method and Date of Purchase show a default value that you can change, if necessary. The Useful Life (Months) value defaults to 36 months. If no depreciation is applied or a different useful life is targeted, you can delete or change this value. The Low-Value Asset checkbox indicates whether the purchased product represents a low value asset. The other fields are optional.\nTo add the financial data entry to the list, click the Save button. To edit a saved financial record entry, select it. Its content will be displayed in the data entry screen.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eFinancial Records\u003c/em\u003e are used for storing financial data. You can, for example, record and evaluate the costs for the entire life cycle of a server.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button to create a new finance record. The Title and Amount fields are mandatory and thus must be filled in. All list fields, such as \u003cem\u003eCost Type, Payment, Depreciation Method\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eDate of Purchase\u003c/em\u003e show a default value that you can change, if necessary. The \u003cem\u003eUseful Life (Months)\u003c/em\u003e value defaults to 36 months. If no depreciation is applied or a different useful life is targeted, you can delete or change this value. The \u003cem\u003eLow-Value Asset\u003c/em\u003e checkbox indicates whether the purchased product represents a \u003cem\u003elow value asset.\u003c/em\u003e The other fields are optional.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/financial-records/","title":"Financial Records"},{"content":"Each software product must be assigned to a specific group. The software groups ultimately help with the ability to present and evaluate the whole catalog of inventory clearly and enable detached consideration of products in separate groups. Either an existing group may be selected, or a new group created, during this step. The fact that a new group will only be saved after the successful completion of the License Wizard should be kept in mind. In the event that the License Wizard is terminated, a newly created group will be lost. Aside from this, several groups can be created at the same time during this wizard step, however a software product may only be assigned to one specific software group. Each group name must be unique for each company, in order to avoid confusion.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eEach \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/licensing/\" title=\"software product\"\u003esoftware product\u003c/a\u003e must be assigned to a specific group. The software groups ultimately help with the ability to present and evaluate the whole catalog of inventory clearly and enable detached consideration of products in separate groups. Either an existing group may be selected, or a new group created, during this step. The fact that a new group will only be saved after the successful completion of the License Wizard should be kept in mind. In the event that the License Wizard is terminated, a newly created group will be lost. Aside from this, several groups can be created at the same time during this wizard step, however a software product may only be assigned to one specific software group. Each group name must be unique for each company, in order to avoid confusion.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/group/","title":"Group"},{"content":"Computers grouped by Operating System This sample report will include all computers grouped by their operating system.\nThe computers are found in the tHosts table and the operating systems in the tDocuWindows table. Due to the relationship between the tHosts and tDocuWindows tables, a given computer may have multiple entries in the tDocuWindows table, because it may have been scanned several times. In a report designed on the basis of relations, it is possible that multiple detail components exist for each master component. In this report, the tDocuWindows table would be the master component and the tHosts table would be the detail component, as the computers will be assigned to the operating systems. Since there may be several entries in the tDocuWindows table (master component) for each computer (detail component), this report cannot be resolved using native database relations. In this case, you need to create a virtual table using an SQL statement. It will invert the physical structure and generate a corresponding list.\nSQL Statement When you create a new report, all existing database tables are loaded into the report. For this report, however, a table is required that does not exist in the meta tables. For this reason, you must create this table in the Report Designer using an SQL statement.\nFirst, add a new data source. To do so, go to the Dictionary tab and click the button or right-click to open the context menu and select New Data Source. As the connection, select DocuSnap.\nFrom this dialog, you can create the new data source. The correct database has already been entered as the name of the data source. The table name can be chosen freely. We recommend to prefix the name of the table with a lowercase \u0026ldquo;v\u0026rdquo; for \u0026ldquo;virtual\u0026rdquo;, to distinguish this table from those already created. For this report, name the table vOS. The Alias field is automatically populated with the same name. By clicking the button, you can validate the SQL statement you entered. To open a text editor where you can enter the SQL statement, click the button. The data retrieved by the SQL statement can be displayed by clicking the button. Enter the SQL statement in the Query Text field. You can enter any SQL statement desired in the Query Text field as long as it relates to tables and columns that exist in the database. When you are done entering the statement, add the columns by clicking the Retrieve Columns tab. The table columns are displayed in the Columns field. When you select one of the columns, its properties are displayed to the right of the selected column. When you add a column, the primary key is defined as an int data type. For existing database tables, the primary keys are of the long data type. When you create a relation, make sure that the related columns are of the same data type. For this reason, change the primary key for new tables to the long data type.\nFor this report, a table that combines data from the tHosts and the tDocuWindows tables is required. There is no direct relation between the tHosts and tDocuWindows tables. The connection will be made through the tDocu table. The tDocu table is linked with the tHosts and tDocuWindows tables. The tHosts table is linked with the tDocu table by means of the HostID column. The relation between the tDocu and tDocuWindows tables is created through the DocuID column.\nFor the new table, not all columns from these tables will be needed. Therefore, select only some of them. For the output, the computer name (Hostname column) and the operating system (OS column) are required. It is a good idea to specify the primary keys of the tables for the output fields of the SQL statement, although they do not actually appear in the report. In addition, the tDocu table has a special feature. Assume that you want to limit the report to the most recent data. However, each computer may have been scanned multiple times. To obtain only the current information, you can use the Archiv column in the tDocu table. For the most recent scan in the Archiv column, the value 0 (zero) will be set. By using the Archiv = 0 Where condition, only the current data will be added to the new table. The resulting SQL statement connects all necessary tables:\nSelect tHosts.HostID, tDocu.DocuID, tHosts.Hostname, tDocuWindows.OS from tHosts, tDocu, tDocuWindows where tHosts.HostID = tDocu.HostID and tDocu.DocuID = tDocuWindows.DocuID and tDocu.Archiv = 0 When you click the Retrieve Columns button, the columns you indicated in the SQL statement will be retrieved from the database. Both HostID and DocuID are primary keys. For this reason, the data type needs to be changed to long. Click the OK button to close the dialog. Next, select the newly created table, vOS, under the Queries node in the Select Data dialog. Click OK to add the table to the Dictionary. The vOS table now appears on the Dictionary tab.\nCreating a Group To group the data of a table, add a group header band to your report. Group header bands can be added from the Toolbox. Open the the Group Condition dialog to do so. Here, you can specify the column on which to group your data. For this sample report, select the operating system (OS column) from the vOS table. You can also specify whether the group should be sorted in ascending or descending order or not at all.\nIf you want to use more than one column for grouping, open the Expression page. On this page, you can add multiple columns. Thereby, only those records that match the selected expression will be output as a group. To apply the condition to the group header band, click OK.\nGroup Output By selecting the condition, you can determine which criterion will be used for grouping. The group header band is of course still empty. The group header band will be used for the title of this report. For this reason, the format setting for the title will be used.\nThis ensures that the grouping criterion will be shown at the top.\nChild Band The child band is an extension of the band preceding it. In this report, a child band is used as an extension of the group header band. Following the title, a header band is often added to provide the heading for the data band. Please note that a header band for the headings cannot be inserted after a group header band, because the bands would not be shown in the correct sequence: The headers would not be placed after the title and before the data. For this reason, a child band is used for the headings of the data band. The child band is always shown after its parent band. In this report, the band with the headings will be shown after each group header band.\nCreate a text box, enter the \u0026ldquo;Computer\u0026rdquo; heading into it and assign the Header style.\nData Band In order to output the data for the group header band, a data band must exist for which the same data source has been specified as in the condition for the group header band. In order to be grouped by the group header band, this data band does not need a defined relation or a master component. As the data source, select the same data source that was used for the group header band. Select the vOS table and the HostName column for this report.\nIn the next step, create the text box that will show the database content. When you add this field, the Text Editor opens. In the Text Editor, you can select the data fields either on the Expression or the Data Column page. To add a field from the Expression page, double-click it. On the Data Column page, click the desired field. For this report, select the HostName column from the vOS table. The style to be used is Data.\nGroup Footer Band Finally, a group footer band will be added. The group footer band is the closing item of the group.\nFinished Report The header band contains the text box that indicates the operating system. The name and the condition appear in the left corner of the group header band. The System Name heading will be shown on the child band. The data band includes the text box with the HostName column. The data band name and the data source appear in the upper left corner of the data band.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"computers-grouped-by-operating-system\"\u003eComputers grouped by Operating System\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis sample report will include all computers grouped by their operating system.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe computers are found in the \u003cem\u003etHosts\u003c/em\u003e table and the operating systems in the \u003cem\u003etDocuWindows\u003c/em\u003e table. Due to the relationship between the \u003cem\u003etHosts\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003etDocuWindows\u003c/em\u003e tables, a given computer may have multiple entries in the \u003cem\u003etDocuWindows\u003c/em\u003e table, because it may have been scanned several times. In a report designed on the basis of relations, it is possible that multiple detail components exist for each master component. In this report, the \u003cem\u003etDocuWindows\u003c/em\u003e table would be the master component and the \u003cem\u003etHosts\u003c/em\u003e table would be the detail component, as the computers will be assigned to the operating systems. Since there may be several entries in the \u003cem\u003etDocuWindows\u003c/em\u003e table (master component) for each computer (detail component), this report cannot be resolved using native database relations. In this case, you need to create a virtual table using an SQL statement. It will invert the physical structure and generate a corresponding list.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/special-reporting-techniques/grouped-reports/","title":"Grouped Reports"},{"content":"The previously created Connect Package can now be displayed in the hierarchical structure (data tree) and thus quickly and easily provide searched information.\nBoth the filter and the Excel export can be used for this view. Columns can also be hidden using the context menu. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe previously created Connect Package can now be displayed in the hierarchical structure (data tree) and thus quickly and easily provide searched information.\u003c/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-primary\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    Both the filter and the Excel export can be used for this view. Columns can also be hidden using the context menu.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/docusnap-connect/hierarchical-structure/docusnap-connect-tree.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Connect Tree\" title=\"Docusnap Connect Tree\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/docusnap-connect/hierarchical-structure/","title":"Hierarchical Structure"},{"content":"Click the Import/Export Schema button to open the tab to import and export IT Asset structures.\nImport Definitions Click the button in the Import Definitions tab to select the file for importing IT asset structures.\nEach newly created category and class will be assigned a unique ID. Tick the Overwrite Existing Data checkbox to overwrite the existing data if, upon the import of a category or class, Docusnap detects that the respective item already exists. In case a category or class with an identical name exists, you can define a postfix. The specified postfix will be appended to the name of the category or class using an underscore (_).\nYou can select the IT assets to be imported. Start the import by clicking the Import button.\nExport Definitions You can export the configuration of the IT assets to an external file and then import the configuration data into another Docusnap database.\nIn the Export Definitions tab you can export the structure of the IT assets to an external file. Clicking the button will open a file/path selection dialog. The list below shows the IT asset structures of this database. Click the Export button to export all selected categories and classes to the specified file.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eImport/Export Schema\u003c/em\u003e button to open the tab to import and export IT Asset structures.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"import-definitions\"\u003eImport Definitions\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/management/it-assets/import-and-export/docusnap-open-path.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Open Path\" title=\"Docusnap Open Path\"\u003e button in the \u003cem\u003eImport Definitions\u003c/em\u003e tab to select the file for importing IT asset structures.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach newly created category and class will be assigned a unique ID. Tick the \u003cem\u003eOverwrite Existing Data\u003c/em\u003e checkbox to overwrite the existing data if, upon the import of a category or class, Docusnap detects that the respective item already exists. In case a category or class with an identical name exists, you can define a postfix. The specified postfix will be appended to the name of the category or class using an underscore (_).\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/it-assets/import-and-export/","title":"Import and Export"},{"content":"The Enterprise Search is based on a search index. A preselected search index is already stored. Please note that this is a basic index and does not necessarily cover your search queries. Which objects and columns are indexed can be evaluated with help of the reports Search Index and Search Index Excel. You will find the reports in the tree structure as follows.\nOverview – Reports – Docusnap\nThe basic index can be extended as required. You can customize the Enterprise Search to your individual requirements.\nAdding Data to the Index Docusnap Enterprise Search differentiates between objects and columns when indexing.\nObjects Objects are the objects in the tree structure. For example, if you want to find workstations and servers in the Enterprise Search, both objects must be indexed. Other objects will then not be found by the Enterprise Search unless they have been selected. (e.g., Linux systems and SNMP devices)\nColumns Columns are the values that can be added to the index. These are used to find the indexed objects. (e.g., name, IP address, operating system).\nThe more objects and columns are indexed, the more results the Enterprise Search will deliver. However, excessive indexing can have a negative effect on performance.\nIndex Objects Objects and columns are added to the search index in Settings - Search index - Add object. It is possible to index objects from the inventory and IT security.\nIndex columns As soon as a object has been indexed, the desired columns for the objects can be selected. All columns that can be indexed are listed in the field overview.\nColumns are indexed across the board. This means that if the columns IP Online, Name and Site are indexed for workstations, this also applies to other systems. If you now switch to the Server object, you will see that these columns are already active. The same applies if other metaobjects are added later, for example Linux devices.\nIn the tab All Columns you will find an overview of all database columns added to the index.\nIndexing via context menu It is also possible to index objects and columns directly via the Docusnap tree structure. To do this, open the context menu by right-clicking on the object to be indexed. With the option Add to Search Index, the Select Fields window opens, and you can add new fields to the indexing of the search.\nIf the meta object is not yet indexed, the option Index Objects for Search must be activated.\nIndex Update The index must be updated before the Docusnap Enterprise search can find the indexed data. Updating the index can be done manually or automatically. Newly added values will only be found after a completed re-indexing.\nClicking Start will start the indexing manually. Via the button Save \u0026amp; Start Indexing the index is updated after closing the dialog.\nIndex Update One-time at: updates the index daily at the choosen time\nIndex Update Every: updates the index several times a day at the specified interval. It should be noted that the interval should be chosen according to the index size and update duration.\nIf the Docusnap Enterprise search is deactivated, the complete index record is deleted. Indexed objects and fields are not affected. Only the index has to be updated when reactivating the search.\nWith larger databases, depending on the number of indexes, the index size can grow considerably. When the index is updated, the existing index is only deleted after the new index has been built. This guarantees that the search also works when the index is updated. As a result, the index size can more than double for a short time.\nSometimes the update process may not start immediately. This depends on whether an inventory is currently running, for example.\nResults To search for an object, enter the search word in the text field. Press Enter or click on the to start the search. By double-clicking on the icon of the search result, Docusnap automatically navigates to it in the tree structure.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Enterprise Search is based on a search index. A preselected search index is already stored. Please note that this is a basic index and does not necessarily cover your search queries. Which objects and columns are indexed can be evaluated with help of the reports Search Index and Search Index Excel. You will find the reports in the tree structure as follows.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eOverview – Reports – Docusnap\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe basic index can be extended as required. You can customize the Enterprise Search to your individual requirements.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/enterprise-search/indexing/","title":"Indexing"},{"content":"The Infrastructure - Editor is the user interface for mapping the physical infrastructure in Docusnap. All tasks dealing with this topic can be done in the editor.\nThe editor can be used to map site structures, create racks and fill them with elements.\nFurthermore, the cabling of the physical components can be carried out and new shapes can be added.\nEditor Basic Functions The editor is opened by clicking the Physical Infrastructure button in the navigation.\nAlternatively, the editor can also be opened by selecting a site or an element of the physical infrastructure in the data tree and clicking the Open Editor button. According to the selected element in the Docusnap tree structure, the respective company is selected in the Editor.\nIn the first step, editing takes place within the editor via a tabular structure (grid).\nThe functions Create, Save and Delete are available for managing the locations.\nAll actions, such as adding, changing or deleting objects, are only applied after saving (shortcuts can also be used here - e.g. Ctrl + S).\nIt is possible to map the complete hierarchy and then save it as a whole.\nThe color-coding of the elements indicates that the actions still have to be saved.\nGreen: new element is added Pink: Element is deleted Blue: Change made to element A previously made change, if it has not yet been saved, can be undone via the context menu.\nThe context menu offers at least the following options for each element. Depending on the element, further options are available, which will be dealt with in the later chapters.\nEdit The selected object is edited. Alternatively, the object can be edited by double-clicking on the icon.\nAdd to Dashboard The Dashboard is the entry point to the Infrastructure Editor. When opened, all added elements are available. The dashboard opens with a click on Physical Infrastructure.\nThe dashboard is user-specific and is therefore not transferred to other users.\nAdd to Favorites Similar to the dashboard, elements can be added to favorites. Favorites are user-specific and are therefore not transferred to other users.\nAdd Additional Information Additional information can be assigned to elements.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Infrastructure - Editor is the user interface for mapping the physical infrastructure in Docusnap. All tasks dealing with this topic can be done in the editor.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe editor can be used to map site structures, create racks and fill them with elements.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFurthermore, the cabling of the physical components can be carried out and new shapes can be added.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/infrastructure-editor/docusnap-physical-infrastructure-editor.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Editor\" title=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Editor\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"editor-basic-functions\"\u003eEditor Basic Functions\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe editor is opened by clicking the \u003cem\u003ePhysical Infrastructure\u003c/em\u003e button in the navigation.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/infrastructure-editor/","title":"Infrastructure Editor"},{"content":"With the first start of Docusnap the Initial Scan opens to inventory basic data. If the initial scan should not be executed, it can be closed by clicking on the Cancel button.\nIn the ribbon Inventory the Initial Scan can be opened again.\nIn the step Authentication the company has to be selected in which the data should be stored. For an Active Directory domain authentication, enter the domain name in the Domain field. Whether it is necessary to enter your username and password depends on the following:\nIf you are logged on to the Docusnap computer as a domain administrator, you can use the integrated Windows authentication for the inventory process. This means that there is no need to enter a username and password. If you are logged on to the Docusnap computer as a user other than a domain administrator, you need to specify the corresponding credentials. If you need to enter your credentials for authentication, the NetBIOS name, followed by a backslash (), must precede the user name. For example, the NetBIOS name of the domain named docusnap.intern is DOCUSNAP. Therefore, you would have to enter the following user name: DOCUSNAP\u0026lt;UserName\u0026gt; Alternatively the form @Docusnap can be used. To perform the Initial Scan, a Discovery Service must be selected.\nClick the Next button to log on to the Active Directory. If the login was successful, you can proceed with the next step.\nIn step Summary all modules are listed, which can be inventoried with the initial scan. With the associated checkbox can be determined which data are to be inventoried. By clicking on Start the inventory process is started.\nThe large number of network requests from the SNMP scans may lead to warnings when using safety and monitor solutions.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWith the first start of Docusnap the \u003cem\u003eInitial Scan\u003c/em\u003e opens to inventory basic data. If the initial scan should not be executed, it can be closed by clicking on the \u003cem\u003eCancel\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the ribbon \u003cem\u003eInventory\u003c/em\u003e the Initial Scan can be opened again.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the step \u003cem\u003eAuthentication\u003c/em\u003e the company has to be selected in which the data should be stored. For an \u003cem\u003eActive Directory\u003c/em\u003e domain authentication, enter the domain name in the \u003cem\u003eDomain\u003c/em\u003e field. Whether it is necessary to enter your username and password depends on the following:\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/initial-scan/","title":"Initial Scan"},{"content":"The Introduction section describes the initial installation of Docusnap and the system requirements. Then, the basic configuration required after the initial installation process will be discussed.\nIn addition, the essential features and modules of Docusnap will be explained briefly.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Introduction section describes the initial installation of Docusnap and the system requirements. Then, the basic configuration required after the initial installation process will be discussed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition, the essential features and modules of Docusnap will be explained briefly.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/docusnap-data-explorer-information.png\" alt=\"docusnap date explorer information\" title=\"docusnap date explorer information\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/","title":"Introduction"},{"content":"The Inventory ribbon can be used to call the wizards to start the inventory process. The functionality of the inventory wizards is explained in the chapter Inventory.\nClick the Network Scan button to open the wizard.\nThe Initial Scan collects basic network information such as Active Directory, Windows systems, DHCP, DNS, Exchange and SNMP with a wizard.\nDepending on which systems are to be inventoried, the respective wizard can be called.\nThe ADS Comparison compares the inventoried systems with the systems in the Active Directory. Then the systems that are no longer in the Active Directory but still exist in Docusnap are displayed. In this dialog you can specify whether these systems should also be deleted from the Docusnap database. The Active Directory is not changed by Docusnap.\nFurthermore, script files can be imported using the Script Import button.\nThe Docusnap Tools button opens the folder containing the executable file for creating script files. More about Docusnap Script in the Scripts chapter.\nSystems can be assigned to sites in the System Assignment.\nIn the System Groups dialog, inventoried systems can be assigned to system groups to form logical groupings. Separate maps can be generated for each group.\nThe Maintain data inventory button opens the database maintenance dialogue.\nThe Data Explorer Inventory displays the data from the network inventory and the manually entered information.\nIn the top level is the company. A new company can be created using the New button located in the action bar. To create a new company, either an existing company must be selected in the tree or no object must be selected. By clicking on the New button, the data entry mask for creating companies is opened. After entering all data, they can be saved by clicking on the Save button.\nBelow the node Infrastructure the domains with the respective inventoried systems are displayed. These domains in general correspond to a Microsoft Active Directory domain in an onPrem environment. Reports and maps can also be generated.\nAt the same level as the Infrastructure node, the Cloud Infrastructure node is displayed. Below the cloud infrastructure are the tenant domains. Separate tenant domains are created for the cloud modules Azure and Microsoft 365 or Amazon Web Services during the inventory.\nIT assets, manual devices and other infrastructure components are created under the Assets heading.\nSystems and IT assets can be assigned to sites. The sites are listed under the Sites heading.\nThe processes, services and organizational elements required for IT documentation can be created under the Organization heading. Additional information is also listed centrally under this heading.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Inventory ribbon can be used to call the wizards to start the inventory process. The functionality of the inventory wizards is explained in the chapter \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/\" title=\"Inventory\"\u003eInventory\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNetwork Scan\u003c/em\u003e button to open the wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eInitial Scan\u003c/em\u003e collects basic network information such as Active Directory, Windows systems, DHCP, DNS, Exchange and SNMP with a wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDepending on which systems are to be inventoried, the respective wizard can be called.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/navigation/inventory/","title":"Inventory"},{"content":"Docusnap provides advanced management options for your jobs in the All Jobs area.\nThis lists all jobs with the most important information. If a user does not have permissions to a company, the jobs of that company are not displayed.\nThe Delete and Start Job as Soon as Possible buttons allow you to manage the configured tasks. You can abort an active job by clicking the button. To delete a job from the database, select it and click the button. If several jobs are selected, they can be deleted simultaneously by clicking the Delete button. By clicking the button, the selected job will be executed as soon as the Docusnap Server or the DDS can process the job.\nClick on the Summary button to open a dialog showing the results of the job. For the failed and incomplete subtasks, the error messages or justifications are displayed in the Information column. The button is only active if the job has been executed at least once.\nThe status of the job can be determined by the used icon. Jobs with the icon have been scheduled and will start at the next scheduled execution date. The jobs with the icon are currently executed. The jobs with this icon will no longer be executed. This is the case either if a job is excluded from the scheduling or because the job is not to be executed recurringly and the date of the one-time execution is already in the past.\nThe following options can be set by clicking on the Docusnap-Advanced-Job-Management-Options butto for the respective job.\nEdit Job: When you click the Edit Job button, the scheduled job will be opened in its associated wizard where you can edit it. Exclude from Schedule and Schedule Job Again: A click on the Exclude from Schedule button specifies that the job will no longer be executed. If the job should be included in schedule again, it can be reactivated by clicking the Schedule Job Again button. Job Details: By clicking on the Job Details button, the basic job and configuration data are displayed in a dialog. Job Status: During the execution of the job, the current progress can be checked by clicking on the Job Status button. Jobs can only be scheduled for the server discovery or a discovery service. Therefore the client discovery is not listed in the wizard, when the job is opened with the Edit button. The server discovery or another discovery service can be selected Report Scheduled Jobs In addition to the overview in the All Jobs area, a list of all jobs are generated in the Scheduled Jobs report below the Overview - Reports in the Inventory tree. This report lists the most important data for the Jobs.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap provides advanced management options for your jobs in the \u003cem\u003eAll Jobs\u003c/em\u003e area.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis lists all jobs with the most important information. If a user does not have permissions to a company, the jobs of that company are not displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eDelete\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eStart Job as Soon as Possible\u003c/em\u003e buttons allow you to manage the configured tasks. You can abort an active job by clicking the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/docusnap-server/job-management/docusnap-server-job-status-cancel.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Server-Job-Status-Cancel\" title=\"Docusnap-Server-Job-Status-Cancel\"\u003e button. To delete a job from the database, select it and click the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/docusnap-server/job-management/docusnap-server-job-status-delete.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Server-Job-Status-Delete\" title=\"Docusnap-Server-Job-Status-Delete\"\u003e button. If several jobs are selected, they can be deleted simultaneously by clicking the \u003cem\u003eDelete\u003c/em\u003e button. By clicking the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/docusnap-server/job-management/docusnap-server-job-status-start-now.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Server-Job-Status-Start-Now\" title=\"Docusnap-Server-Job-Status-Start-Now\"\u003e button, the selected job will be executed as soon as the Docusnap Server or the DDS can process the job.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/docusnap-server/job-management/","title":"Job Management"},{"content":"Groups can be used to structure the controls. In the first step, a layout control is added. Then the layout group can be dragged and dropped onto the layout control.\nIn this group all the other controls can be added. It is also possible to add a group to another group.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eGroups can be used to structure the controls. In the first step, a \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/layout-control/\" title=\"layout control\"\u003elayout control\u003c/a\u003e is added. Then the layout group can be dragged and dropped onto the layout control.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn this group all the other controls can be added. It is also possible to add a group to another group.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/layout-group/","title":"Layout Group"},{"content":"Docusnap offers two modules for inventorying Linux systems:\nDiscovery-Linux (for current distributions) Discovery-Linux-Legacy (for older Linux distributions, no further development, remains for the time being for existing implementations) The focus of this documentation is on Linux-Discovery, as this module is always kept up-to-date and should be preferred for capturing current systems.\nLinux devices can be inventoried through the Discovery-Linux module directly, in addition to the inventory wizard. When executing, the -f parameter must be specified to create the file.\nSubsequently, this file can be imported into Docusnap through the File Import wizard.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap offers two modules for inventorying Linux systems:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-Linux (for current distributions)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-Linux-Legacy (for older Linux distributions, no further development, remains for the time being for existing implementations)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe focus of this documentation is on Linux-Discovery, as this module is always kept up-to-date and should be preferred for capturing current systems.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLinux devices can be inventoried through the Discovery-Linux module directly, in addition to the inventory wizard. When executing, the -f parameter must be specified to create the file.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/linux/","title":"Linux"},{"content":"Not only the licenses, but also the associated maintenance contracts can be managed in the License Management module. When creating a new license in the wizard, you can also add software maintenance agreements. Docusnap includes the predefined types. You can add new types, if required. To create new software maintenance types, click the New button. You can enter any desired name and designations in English and German. Enter the desired information and add the new entry to the list by clicking the Save button.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eNot only the licenses, but also the associated maintenance contracts can be managed in the License Management module. When creating a new license in the wizard, you can also add software maintenance agreements. Docusnap includes the predefined types. You can add new types, if required. To create new software maintenance types, click the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button. You can enter any desired name and designations in English and German. Enter the desired information and add the new entry to the list by clicking the \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/license-management/maintenance-types/","title":"Maintenance Types"},{"content":"Use the Docusnap Management to create additional types and customize Docusnap.\nClick the Management button in the Navigation to open the Docusnap Management.\nThe following settings and types can be extended and modified:\nGeneral Designs: In Design you can add new design colors and adjust the styles for the reports.\nUsing the User Management features in Docusnap can be enabled or disabled. Docusnap Roles: All buttons available in the user interface are listed in the roles management. These buttons can then be enabled or disabled for the individual roles. Docusnap Users: By clicking the Users button, you can assign domain users to the defined roles. Permission Categories: You can use the Categories to control access to additional information entries.\nManagement Tools: Click the Management Tools button to set up external programs that can then be started from within Docusnap using the Execute button.\nNumber Server: By means of the number server, you can define a sequential number that will be used when you create data entry screens.\nSite Types: There are predefined types for the sites. If you want to create sites of a different type, the required types can be created via the site types.\nDefine Notification: These statements determine the data that is sent as an e-mail and the criteria for when an e-mail is sent.\nDocumentation Framework: Settings for the documentation framework. Color Scheme: The created color schemes are used in the documentation framework. Element Properties: The properties for the elements in the documentation framework can be created in the Docusnap Management. The properties can also be created during the creation of the documentation framework in the editor.\nAdditional Information: Additional Information provide the ability to store comments, financial records, passwords, contracts and tasks for selected objects in the tree view. Each additional Information has a type that describe the associated additional Information. To open the tabs where you can add types, click the button for the desired type.\nInventory SNMP Mibs: In the SNMP MIBs tab, you can manage your own or third-party MIBs.\nSNMP Types: Click the SNMP Types button to open the SNMP Types tab. There, you can define additional types for SNMP devices.\nEdit Switch: Use the Edit Switch tab to add MAC addresses, which were not recognized in the SNMP Inventory as a learned MAC addresses, to inventoried switches.\nMAC Filter: In the MAC Filter tab learned MAC addresses can be defined as a phone, as a device, or as virtual, or MAC addresses can be excluded from the topology map. Software Search: In the Software Search tab, you can define software that cannot be scanned automatically due to a missing registry entry. Server Roles: During the server scanning process, all services that define the roles of the servers will be inventoried. Use the Server Roles to define which service corresponds to which role. Additional Tools: Docusnap allows you to execute previously defined additional tools when performing a Windows system inventory scan. Active Directory: Click the Active Directory button to open the ADS Classes, ADS Properties and ADS Assignments tabs. These tabs allow you to modify the scope of the ADS inventory process. Assignment Criteria: Using these criteria, the assignment of systems to sites can be carried out during the inventory process. AWS Regions: For the AWS inventory the region must be selected. If the required region is missing, it can be added here. Private Key Management: For the Linux inventory Docusnap offers the possibility to import private keys or create RSA keys. Wizard Configuration: Use the Wizard Configuration, to combine the inventory of various systems in one wizard as desired. Customizing Layout (CI): For different modules like report generation, documentation or concept a definition of the design is needed. In the Layout (CI) dialog, a design can be selected for all the modules at once. The company settings are specially designed for use with several tenants (companies). For example, it may be necessary to define a separate header and footer for a tenant in the reports. Manage Reports: You can open the tab for creating and deleting reports by clicking the Manage Reports button. The designer for editing the reports can be started by clicking the Designer button. Import Reports: Existing reports can be imported into Docusnap. Report Differences: Listing of user-customized reports in the report repository. -Extending Docusnap: In the Extending Docusnap group, the database structure can be extended and new meta objects are created. IT Assets IT Assets Structure: The IT Assets tab can be used to create and edit IT assets. Import/Export Schema: Click the Import / Export Schema button to open the tabs for the import and export of IT asset structures. Diagrams Protocols: With each connector, an entry screen allows you to select the protocol to be used for that connection. Clicking the Protocols button opens a tab where you can manage and add protocols. Connector Types: Every connection between two components is assigned to a relation type. New connector types can be added in the Connector Types tab. IT Correlations Correlations: Use the Correlations tab to define IT Correlations. Groups: In the Groups tab the existing IT Correlations can be grouped. Import and Export of Definitions: Click the Import / Export Schema button to import or export IT Correlations. License Management Metrics: Metrics are used to group the software products for license management. Docusnap provides predefined metrics. Maintenance Types: In addition to the license contracts, the associated software maintenance agreements can also be defined. There are various types of software maintenance agreements. License Types: Docusnap provides pre-defined license types. If additional types of licenses are needed, you can add and administer them from the Manage License Types tab. Examples of licenses types include: OEM, volume licenses and package licenses. Connect Legacy Docusnap Connect: Use the Packages and the Edit Package buttons to specify which data should be exported. The buttons Export Package and Import Package provide the possibility to import existing packages into other Docusnap databases. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eUse the \u003cem\u003eDocusnap Management\u003c/em\u003e to create additional types and customize Docusnap.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/management/docusnap-management-open.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Management Open\" title=\"Docusnap Management Open\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eManagement\u003c/em\u003e button in the \u003cem\u003eNavigation\u003c/em\u003e to open the \u003cem\u003eDocusnap Management\u003c/em\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/management/docusnap-management-general.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Management General\" title=\"Docusnap Management General\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe following settings and types can be extended and modified:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"general\"\u003eGeneral\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigns: In Design you can add new design colors and adjust the styles for the reports.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing the User Management features in Docusnap can be enabled or disabled.\nDocusnap Roles: All buttons available in the user interface are listed in the roles management. These buttons can then be enabled or disabled for the individual roles.\nDocusnap Users: By clicking the \u003cem\u003eUsers\u003c/em\u003e button, you can assign domain users to the defined roles.\nPermission Categories: You can use the Categories to control access to additional information entries.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/","title":"Management"},{"content":"The documentation you can create in Docusnap includes maps of the network, the Active Directory, the Exchange servers, etc.\nMaps can be created in native Visio format (.vsd) and in Visio XML format (.vdx). By default, the Visio XML (.vdx) format is created. In the Options dialog you can select whether the format (.vdx) should be suppressed and the native Visio format (.vsd) should be created instead. Only the format .vdx can be created automatically with the Docusnap Server. No maps with the format .vsd can be created via the Docusnap Server.\nMicrosoft Visio must be installed to enable Docusnap to create maps in .vsd format. For the .vdx format no Microsoft Visio installation is required.\nIf the creation of maps is schedule, the maps are newly generated each time to display the current data situation. For this reason, layout changes in the preview such as moving or deleting elements cannot be retained for scheduled maps. If Settings are defined via the checkboxes, they are applied to the scheduled execution as well. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe documentation you can create in Docusnap includes maps of the network, the Active Directory, the Exchange servers, etc.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMaps can be created in native Visio format (.vsd) and in Visio XML format (.vdx). By default, the Visio XML (.vdx) format is created. In the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/settings/options/general/\" title=\"Options\"\u003eOptions\u003c/a\u003e dialog you can select whether the format (.vdx) should be suppressed and the native Visio format (.vsd) should be created instead. Only the format .vdx can be created automatically with the Docusnap Server. No maps with the format .vsd can be created via the Docusnap Server.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/","title":"Map Files"},{"content":"The IT Security ribbon is displayed when switching to IT Security in the navigation area.\nNTFS Analysis: Click the NTFS Analysis button to open the wizard to select the Windows systems whose permissions are to be inventoried.\nOnline Analysis: The permissions will be determined at runtime by the Online Analysis process and thus not stored in the database. The Online Analysis process will be active once you click the Online Analysis button.\nFilter Path: The Filter Path dialog only opens for the analysis of SharePoint permissions. Since the SharePoint permission structure is different from the structure of NTFS permissions, this dialog is used to select the desired starting point for the analysis. According to the filter you set, only the directories below the starting node that correspond to the selected users/groups will be displayed.\nReport Jobs (csv): By importing a CSV file multiple jobs to generate Directory Reports for NTFS can be created simultaneously.\nClicking the NTFS Filter option opens the Manage NTFS Filter dialog. In this dialog, you can specify directories to be excluded from the NTFS analysis. For an explanation of this dialog, refer to the NTFS Filter section.\nYou can use the User/Group Filter to exclude selected users and groups from the directory reports.\nBlocked Inheritance: Inheritance can be blocked for directories. This means that the permissions will not be inherited. If the Blocked Inheritance checkbox is enabled, the directories for which inheritance is blocked will be displayed with a red icon in the Permission Analysis explorer.\nSpecial Permissions: If this checkbox is enabled, special permissions will be displayed in addition to the basic permissions.\nExplicit Permissions: Permissions can be assigned directly to directories. If the Explicit Permissions checkbox is enabled, all directories to which permissions have been assigned explicitly will be displayed with a blue icon.\nAdditional functions are available in the action bar.\nEnable/Remove: The Data Explorer displays all directories of a scanned system. To display the filter below the permissions list, click the Enable button in the Filter group of the ribbon. Once you have defined the desired filter criteria (Write, Read, etc.), only those directories will be displayed in the Data Explorer that match the selected user or group filter.\nWhen you click the Current View button, the permissions displayed on the Permission Analysis tab will be output in a report.\nBy clicking the Principal Report button, you can create a report which shows the effective permissions to the selected directory and its subdirectories or for Exchange permissions to the mailboxes, mailbox folders, and public folders.\nClicking the Directory Report button creates a report which displays all users who have a permission to the selected directory and its subdirectories.\nPermission Origin: Click the Permission Origin button to open the permission structure for the currently selected user.\nUser/Group Structure: Click the User/Group Structure button to display the group or user nestings diagram.\nClicking the Overview Report button creates a report which displays all users who have permissions to the mailboxes, mailbox folders, and public folders.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eIT Security\u003c/em\u003e ribbon is displayed when switching to \u003cem\u003eIT Security\u003c/em\u003e in the navigation area.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/file-system/inventory-permissions/\" title=\"NTFS Analysis\"\u003eNTFS Analysis\u003c/a\u003e: Click the \u003cem\u003eNTFS Analysis\u003c/em\u003e button to open the wizard to select the Windows systems whose permissions are to be inventoried.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/file-system/online-analysis/\" title=\"Online Analysis\"\u003eOnline Analysis\u003c/a\u003e: The permissions will be determined at runtime by the Online Analysis process and thus not stored in the database. The Online Analysis process will be active once you click the \u003cem\u003eOnline Analysis\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/menu-ribbon/","title":"Menu Ribbon"},{"content":"With this feature, you can have Docusnap automatically send an E-Mail when a license becomes invalid or an agreement expires on that day. To use the Notifications feature, the Docusnap Server component must be configured.\nTo define and transmit notifications, the Define Notifications dialog and the Notification wizard are required.\nDefine Notifications Use the Define Notifications dialog to define the query statements for your notification. These statements determine which information will be sent in each e-mail and which criteria will trigger the transmission of a notification e-mail. The Notifications are created in the Management area.\nNotifications Use the Notifications wizard to configure the intervals for checking the criteria.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWith this feature, you can have Docusnap automatically send an E-Mail when a license becomes invalid or an agreement expires on that day. To use the Notifications feature, the Docusnap Server component must be configured.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo define and transmit notifications, the \u003cem\u003eDefine Notifications\u003c/em\u003e dialog and the \u003cem\u003eNotification\u003c/em\u003e wizard are required.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"define-notifications\"\u003eDefine Notifications\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the \u003cem\u003eDefine Notifications\u003c/em\u003e dialog to define the query statements for your notification. These statements determine which information will be sent in each e-mail and which criteria will trigger the transmission of a notification e-mail. The Notifications are created in the \u003cem\u003eManagement\u003c/em\u003e area.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/advanced-topics/notifications/","title":"Notifications"},{"content":"You can start the Online Analysis process from the IT Security ribbon. Just like the normal analysis, the Online Analysis process uses the share permission, user and group data from the database. Only the NTFS permissions and the directory structures will be loaded directly from the network for each item clicked in the hierarchy.\nThe Online Analysis process allows you to create the tree view without having to execute the NTFS Permissions wizard first. In principle, the Online Analysis process works exactly like a permission scan, with the difference that the data will not be stored in the database and only the permissions for the directory that is currently open in the tree view will be scanned. The Online Analysis process will use the credentials of the currently logged-on user. For this reason, the user who has logged on must have the right to access the NTFS permissions for the system.\nTo enable this feature, click the Online Analysis button. When it is enabled, the permissions will be re-scanned from the network as soon as you open directories and subdirectories.\nSince the Online Analysis process does not write data to the database, it is not possible to create reports in this mode. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eYou can start the Online Analysis process from the \u003cem\u003eIT Security\u003c/em\u003e ribbon. Just like the normal analysis, the Online Analysis process uses the share permission, user and group data from the database. Only the NTFS permissions and the directory structures will be loaded directly from the network for each item clicked in the hierarchy.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/file-system/online-analysis/docusnap-permission-analysis-general-online.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Permission-Analysis-General-Online\" title=\"Docusnap-Permission-Analysis-General-Online\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Online Analysis process allows you to create the tree view without having to execute the \u003cem\u003eNTFS Permissions\u003c/em\u003e wizard first. In principle, the Online Analysis process works exactly like a permission scan, with the difference that the data will not be stored in the database and only the permissions for the directory that is currently open in the tree view will be scanned. The Online Analysis process will use the credentials of the currently logged-on user. For this reason, the user who has logged on must have the right to access the NTFS permissions for the system.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/file-system/online-analysis/","title":"Online Analysis"},{"content":"The Import step is only displayed in the Complete Network wizard if the Import Saved Settings checkbox has been enabled on the General page of the Options - Inventory dialog.\nYou can use the Import step to load a saved configuration. This option is particularly helpful if you need to perform inventory scans repeatedly and with the same settings. Before you can import the .xml file that contains the configuration, it must have been saved in the Export step. When you select the desired configuration file, all settings saved in this file will be applied. Only the authentication step must be repeated.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eImport\u003c/em\u003e step is only displayed in the \u003cem\u003eComplete Network\u003c/em\u003e wizard if the Import Saved Settings checkbox has been enabled on the \u003cem\u003eGeneral\u003c/em\u003e page of the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/options-inventory/\" title=\"Options - Inventory\"\u003eOptions - Inventory\u003c/a\u003e dialog.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/basics-wizards/optional-import/docusnap-inventory-network-import-overview.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Inventory-Network-Import-Overview\" title=\"Docusnap-Inventory-Network-Import-Overview\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can use the \u003cem\u003eImport\u003c/em\u003e step to load a saved configuration. This option is particularly helpful if you need to perform inventory scans repeatedly and with the same settings. Before you can import the .xml file that contains the configuration, it must have been saved in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/basics-wizards/optional-export/\" title=\"Export\"\u003eExport\u003c/a\u003e step. When you select the desired configuration file, all settings saved in this file will be applied. Only the authentication step must be repeated.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/basics-wizards/optional-import/","title":"Optional: Import"},{"content":"Basically, the Docusnap database is structured in a hierarchical manner, starting from the tAccounts company table. On the next level, you can find the domains table (tDomains) and below it, the child tables for the respective modules.\nThanks to foreign keys, it is easily possible to visualize the database structure in the SQL Enterprise Manager.\nTo find out which tables are used at which level in the tree structures, open Docusnap Management. For more information about this topic, refer to the Meta Objects section.\nTables that contain the word \u0026ldquo;docu\u0026rdquo; in their name (e.g. tDocu, tADSDocu), are used to build the individual versions for each type of inventory scan. What is important in this is that each of these tables is linked with the tSnapshot table, since each scan is assigned to a unique snapshot. Furthermore, each of these tables contains a field named \u0026ldquo;Archiv\u0026rdquo; which indicates whether the entry is the most recent one (Archiv=0) or belongs to an older version (Archiv=1). Thus, using the Archiv=0 filter criterion is a quick and efficient way to access the most current data without having to spend much time verifying the last inventory scan date.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eBasically, the Docusnap database is structured in a hierarchical manner, starting from the \u003cem\u003etAccounts\u003c/em\u003e company table. On the next level, you can find the domains table \u003cem\u003e(tDomains)\u003c/em\u003e and below it, the child tables for the respective modules.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThanks to foreign keys, it is easily possible to visualize the database structure in the SQL Enterprise Manager.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo find out which tables are used at which level in the tree structures, open Docusnap Management. For more information about this topic, refer to the \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/\" title=\"Meta Objects\"\u003eMeta Objects\u003c/a\u003e section.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/organization/","title":"Organization"},{"content":"Docusnap is a multi-user software that requires a certain network directory structure in order to function properly. As part of the default Docusnap installation process, the directories will be created in the program directory.\nPlease note the following: All these directories have been defined by the software manufacturer and the corresponding files are provided automatically during the Docusnap installation or update process. Under no circumstances change these directories, since otherwise, the proper execution of Docusnap cannot be guaranteed.\nAs part of the initial Docusnap configuration, each user must specify a local settings folder. Once you have specified this folder, Docusnap creates the necessary directories.\nIf you also specify a team settings folder, the same directories will be created in that folder as well.\nIn the event that custom modifications have been made, the definition files will always be saved in the team settings folder, or, if it is not available, in the local settings folder. Docusnap will never create custom definition files within the program directory.\nWhen Docusnap starts, it first checks if a team settings folder is available. If so, the definition files from that folder will be used. If a team settings folder has not been specified or the network path cannot be reached, the local settings folder will be used. If that folder is not available either, the predefined settings from the program directory will be used.\nIf you save user-defined settings to a file, the letter \u0026ldquo;u\u0026rdquo; will always be appended to the last letter of the file extension. For example, definition files for custom data entry screens always have a .deu file extension.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap is a multi-user software that requires a certain network directory structure in order to function properly. As part of the default Docusnap installation process, the directories will be created in the program directory.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlease note the following: All these directories have been defined by the software manufacturer and the corresponding files are provided automatically during the Docusnap installation or update process. Under no circumstances change these directories, since otherwise, the proper execution of Docusnap cannot be guaranteed.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/introductions/organization-of-a-docusnap-installation/","title":"Organization of a Docusnap Installation"},{"content":"With its Password Logging feature, Docusnap allows you to track which user copied which password and /or displayed it in plain text.\nPassword logging can be enabled and disabled from the General page of the Options dialog.\nThe Password field on the data entry form on the Passwords tab includes two buttons. Each time you click one of these two buttons to copy or display a saved password in plain text, Docusnap logs the respective user including a timestamp of the action.\nThis allows you to find out who knows a particular password.\nThe list of users who displayed passwords is shown in the Inventory tree view. The password log for an individual password will be shown below the respective password, the password log for all passwords will be shown at the company level.\nYou can filter the general password log overview by user to see all passwords viewed by a certain user.\nYou can set permissions to limit the right to view the password log to particular users.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWith its \u003cem\u003ePassword Logging\u003c/em\u003e feature, Docusnap allows you to track which user copied which password and /or displayed it in plain text.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePassword logging can be enabled and disabled from the \u003cem\u003eGeneral\u003c/em\u003e page of the \u003cem\u003eOptions\u003c/em\u003e dialog.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003ePassword\u003c/em\u003e field on the data entry form on the \u003cem\u003ePasswords\u003c/em\u003e tab includes two buttons. Each time you click one of these two buttons to copy or display a saved password in plain text, Docusnap logs the respective user including a timestamp of the action.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/additional-information/password-logging/","title":"Password Logging"},{"content":"Docusnap features an integrated user management. The User Management feature enables you to grant users access to the Docusnap controls and features and allows them to use extensions. User management will be enabled once you have created and saved the first user in the Docusnap Management. If no users have been defined, any user who connects to this database may use all of the controls and the entire Docusnap functionality. This permission setting also affects access to Docusnap Web. Without an activated user management Docusnap Web is available for all users.\nAdditionally you can control who has access to which data individually. The permissions are assigned on the object in the tree views. Permissions can be set at the record or object level. This means that a user may only process data of a certain workstation or of all workstations. In the options dialog you can specify whether the specified permissions should apply to all companies or only to the company for which they were defined.\nIf permissions to an object have not been set, all users can process all entries. As soon as an object has been assigned a permission, this permission becomes active and only users to whom the corresponding role has been assigned will be able to see these entries.\nTo open the Object Permissions dialog, select the desired object in the tree view, right-click and select Permissions from the context menu.\nThe dialog displays all roles that are currently defined in the Docusnap database. Both the object selected in the tree view as well as the type of the object are displayed below the role node. Permissions set for the selected object will only apply to this single object. However, if you set permissions for the object type, they will apply to all objects assigned to that type, e.g. to all workstations. In case you have defined permissions for a related type object type, these permissions on the type level will apply to the related type as well.\nThe permissions are granted additively. This means that, if a user is granted a permission for a certain role, and the same permission has not been set for another role he is assigned to, the permission will be granted all the same. The highest permission level is the one that matters.\nThe following permissions can be granted in this dialog: Read, Write, Delete and Insert. If the Read permission is granted, the entries in the tree view will be displayed. If the Write, Delete and Insert permissions are granted, the Save, Delete and New buttons on the ribbon will be enabled. To enable the Save, Delete and New buttons, the user must also be assigned a role which has the right to use these buttons.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap features an integrated user management. The User Management feature enables you to grant users access to the Docusnap controls and features and allows them to use extensions. User management will be enabled once you have created and saved the first user in the Docusnap Management. If no users have been defined, any user who connects to this database may use all of the controls and the entire Docusnap functionality. This permission setting also affects access to Docusnap Web. Without an activated user management Docusnap Web is available for all users.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/settings/permissions/","title":"Permissions"},{"content":"Additional information, such as the report name, the author or the creation date, is displayed on the cover page, as well as in the header and footer. This information can be changed from the Manage Reports tab.\nTo select the desired cover pages, header and footer, go to the Layout (CI) dialog. In order to enable Docusnap to generate reports either in English or in German, the report which defines the cover page, header and footer is stored twice, once for English and once for German.\nThe header shows the report name and two logos. Both logos can be selected from the* Layout (CI)* dialog.\nThe footer displays the current company, the underlying object of the report, the name of the report and the number of pages.\nIf the cover page is activated, the first page of the report will show the name of the report and the object of the tree to which this report refers. The current date, the name of the author and the number of pages are also shown. The author and the name of the report can be changed in the Manage Reports tab. If a description is added to the report, it will also be displayed on the cover page.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eAdditional information, such as the report name, the author or the creation date, is displayed on the cover page, as well as in the header and footer. This information can be changed from the \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-management/\" title=\"Manage Reports\"\u003eManage Reports\u003c/a\u003e tab.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo select the desired cover pages, header and footer, go to the \u003cem\u003eLayout (CI)\u003c/em\u003e dialog. In order to enable Docusnap to generate reports either in English or in German, the report which defines the cover page, header and footer is stored twice, once for English and once for German.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-structure/","title":"Report Structure"},{"content":"In the Docusnap Roles tab, you can create and edit roles that can later be assigned to a user or a group. Roles define which user interface controls will be enabled or disabled.\nThe left pane lists the existing roles and the right pane contains a list of the controls that have been enabled or disabled for the selected role. To enable a control for a role, tick the checkbox in the Enabled column. You can add new roles or edit or delete existing roles as desired.\nThe Clone button can be used to copy an existing role, which can be adjusted as desired afterwards. It is also possible to copy roles that Docusnap provides by default.\nPredefined Roles:\nRole Description Administration Includes all controls, users or groups with this role have access to entire Docusnap functionality. Connect Includes the controls needed to create and export Connect Packages. Customizing Includes only the controls needed for customization tasks. Inventory Includes the controls required to perform inventory scans. IT Documentation Includes only the controls required to create documentation. IT Relations Includes controls needed for the diagrams and IT correlations. IT Security Includes controls required for IT security and permissions analysis. License Management Includes the controls required for license management. Organization Includes the controls required for administrative tasks. Physical Infrastructure Includes controls needed to create and edit the physical infrastructure User Management Includes the controls required for user management. View Includes only the controls that turn Docusnap into a viewer. This means that users with this as their one and only role can do nothing but view existing data. For additional Information it is possible to determine which users and groups are allowed access to this entry.\nIn the Categories list, the existing categories are listed. For each role you can determine which categories of additional Information should be visible. If the logged in user is assigned to a role for which the additional Information is to be visible, the additional Information are displayed, otherwise the additional Information is hidden.\nIf you select \u0026lt;No Selection\u0026gt; instead of a category for an additional Information, this additional Information remains visible to all users.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eDocusnap Roles\u003c/em\u003e tab, you can create and edit roles that can later be assigned to a user or a group. Roles define which user interface controls will be enabled or disabled.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe left pane lists the existing roles and the right pane contains a list of the controls that have been enabled or disabled for the selected role. To enable a control for a role, tick the checkbox in the \u003cem\u003eEnabled\u003c/em\u003e column. You can add new roles or edit or delete existing roles as desired.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/user-management/roles/","title":"Roles"},{"content":"The SharePoint permissions to web page collections, web pages and lists have already been scanned during the SharePoint inventory process. For this reason, an additional wizard is not necessary.\nTo start the wizard for inventorying SharePoint servers, click the SharePoint button on the Inventory ribbon. The SharePoint step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain and entered your credentials (see: Basic Steps).\nThere are two ways to scan SharePoint servers: You can either use global credentials for login. In this case, only the name of the SharePoint server is required for the scanning process. Or you log in using specific credentials. For this purpose, you need to enable the Server Authentication checkbox. Then, you can enter the required user name and password. After the desired systems have been added to the SharePoint Server table, you can specify whether the inventory process should be performed for the corresponding system or not by enabling / disabling the checkbox next to each system. The Next button will only be enabled once you have specified a SharePoint server. Then, you can continue with the inventory process.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe SharePoint permissions to web page collections, web pages and lists have already been scanned during the SharePoint inventory process. For this reason, an additional wizard is not necessary.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying SharePoint servers, click the \u003cem\u003eSharePoint\u003c/em\u003e button on the Inventory ribbon. The \u003cem\u003eSharePoint\u003c/em\u003e step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain and entered your credentials (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/sharepoint/docusnap-inventory-sharepoint.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Inventory-SharePoint\" title=\"Docusnap-Inventory-SharePoint\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThere are two ways to scan SharePoint servers: You can either use \u003cem\u003eglobal credentials\u003c/em\u003e for login. In this case, only the name of the SharePoint server is required for the scanning process. Or you log in using \u003cem\u003especific credentials.\u003c/em\u003e For this purpose, you need to enable the \u003cem\u003eServer Authentication\u003c/em\u003e checkbox. Then, you can enter the required user name and password. After the desired systems have been added to the SharePoint Server table, you can specify whether the inventory process should be performed for the corresponding system or not by enabling / disabling the checkbox next to each system. The \u003cem\u003eNext\u003c/em\u003e button will only be enabled once you have specified a SharePoint server. Then, you can continue with the inventory process.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/sharepoint/","title":"SharePoint"},{"content":"Clicking the Snapshots button in the Discovery or All Jobs area opens the snapshot management dialog.\nEach time you perform an inventory scan, Docusnap creates a snapshot. Its name is Inventory from or Inventarisierung vom in case of German language setting, with the current timestamp appended to it. This dialog lists all snapshots that have been saved to the database. If required, you can rename a snapshot. Enter the new name in the Name field.\nYou can add a description to each snapshot. If you want to compare two snapshots, the descriptions can be very helpful in selecting the correct ones.\nIn Docusnap, only a certain number of snapshots is saved for each system. You can set this number in the Options dialog. If this number is exceeded, the oldest snapshots will be deleted. If you want to retain a snapshot, exclude it from the automatic deletion process by clearing the Scan is Deletable checkbox. Undeletable snapshots will not be counted among the number of archived snapshots.\nTo delete a snapshot, select it and then remove it from the database by clicking the Delete button.\nWhen you delete a snapshot, all associated data will be deleted along with it! ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eClicking the \u003cem\u003eSnapshots\u003c/em\u003e button in the \u003cem\u003eDiscovery\u003c/em\u003e or \u003cem\u003eAll Jobs\u003c/em\u003e area opens the snapshot management dialog.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach time you perform an inventory scan, Docusnap creates a snapshot. Its name is \u003cem\u003eInventory from\u003c/em\u003e or \u003cem\u003eInventarisierung vom\u003c/em\u003e in case of German language setting, with the current timestamp appended to it. This dialog lists all snapshots that have been saved to the database. If required, you can rename a snapshot. Enter the new name in the \u003cem\u003eName\u003c/em\u003e field.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/snapshot-management/","title":"Snapshot Management"},{"content":"When performing an SNMP inventory scan, Docusnap looks for the available SNMP devices. However, no information is returned on the type of the identified device, for example, whether it is a switch, a router or a printer. In the SNMP Types tab, you can define keywords that will be compared with the identified SNMP equipment. Then, Docusnap is able to indicate the correct type in the tree view and reports. The value that will be used for comparison with the keyword is specified in the Description column of scanned devices.\nThe SNMP Types tab lists predefined keywords that are often used for SNMP devices. Click the New button to add a new keyword for SNMP types. Enclose the keyword in percentage symbols (%). These symbols are placeholders; they replace the remaining words in the description. The keyword you enter must exist in the description of the SNMP device. Otherwise, the correct type will not be found.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWhen performing an SNMP inventory scan, Docusnap looks for the available SNMP devices. However, no information is returned on the type of the identified device, for example, whether it is a switch, a router or a printer. In the \u003cem\u003eSNMP Types\u003c/em\u003e tab, you can define keywords that will be compared with the identified SNMP equipment. Then, Docusnap is able to indicate the correct type in the tree view and reports. The value that will be used for comparison with the keyword is specified in the \u003cem\u003eDescription\u003c/em\u003e column of scanned devices.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/snmp/snmp-types/","title":"SNMP Types"},{"content":"Click the Assignment button to open the Software Relevant for Licensing dialog. This dialog lists all software products with the respective versions, which were found at least once on an inventoried system and are not yet assigned to a license.\nCompany: Use the Company combobox to select the company from which the software products should be listed.\nEdit Software Product: Click the button to open the currently selected software product for editing. To edit multiple software products simultaneously select the respective software products, by using the Ctrl or Shift key and clicking on the software products. Then click on the button to open the dialog for editing all of the selected software products.\nDelete Software Product: Software products can be deleted, but only products which were not found with the latest inventory. If the product is, however, still installed, it will be found again at the next inventory and re-entered in the list. Click the button to delete the selected software product.\nLook up Software Product: By clicking on the button the selected software product is looked up on the Web.\nCreate License: By clicking on the Create License button the license management wizard opens. The name of the currently selected software product is used as a descriptive name.\nAdd to Existing License: By clicking the Add to Existing License button, a dialogue with all already created licenses opens. All selected software products will be assigned to the licensing selected in the dialog.\nSearch: In the textbox for the search, a search term is entered, which is then compared with the manufacturer, the software and the version. Then all software products which contain this term are displayed.\nIf you click the button all systems on which this software product is installed are displayed.\nTo also list software products for which a license has been created, the checkbox Show only relevant for licensing must be deactivated.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eAssignment\u003c/em\u003e button to open the \u003cem\u003eSoftware Relevant for Licensing\u003c/em\u003e dialog. This dialog lists all software products with the respective versions, which were found at least once on an inventoried system and are not yet assigned to a license.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/software-product-licensing/docusnap-license-management-software-product-licensing.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-License-Management-Software-Product-Licensing\" title=\"Docusnap-License-Management-Software-Product-Licensing\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCompany:\u003c/strong\u003e Use the \u003cem\u003eCompany\u003c/em\u003e combobox to select the company from which the software products should be listed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEdit Software Product:\u003c/strong\u003e Click the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/software-product-licensing/docusnap-license-management-software-product-licensing-editing.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-License-Management-Software-Product-Licensing-Editing\" title=\"Docusnap-License-Management-Software-Product-Licensing-Editing\"\u003e button to open the currently selected software product for editing. To edit multiple software products simultaneously select the respective software products, by using the Ctrl or Shift key and clicking on the software products. Then click on the button \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/software-product-licensing/docusnap-license-management-software-product-licensing-editing.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-License-Management-Software-Product-Licensing-Editing\" title=\"Docusnap-License-Management-Software-Product-Licensing-Editing\"\u003e to open the dialog for editing all of the selected software products.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/software-product-licensing/","title":"Software Product Licensing"},{"content":"In order to use Docusnap in a multi-user environment, settings can be stored centrally so that they are accessible to each user. These so-called team settings will then be loaded from the path defined in the Team Settings field. To obtain consistent results, the same team settings path is used for the Docusnap client and Docusnap Server. If the path is changed in the options dialog, it will be changed for the Docusnap Server and vice versa, when both are connected to the same database. If no path was selected for the Team Settings or if that path no longer exists, the path specified for the Local Settings will be used.\nWhen you create Docusnap extensions (e.g. contracts, passwords, etc.), you can add attachments. Attachments are stored in the Docusnap database. If you need to edit an attachment, if first needs to be loaded from the database and then stored temporarily in a local directory. In the Check-out Path field, you can specify the path to be used for this purpose.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn order to use Docusnap in a multi-user environment, settings can be stored centrally so that they are accessible to each user. These so-called \u003cem\u003eteam settings\u003c/em\u003e will then be loaded from the path defined in the \u003cem\u003eTeam Settings\u003c/em\u003e field. To obtain consistent results, the same team settings path is used for the Docusnap client and Docusnap Server. If the path is changed in the options dialog, it will be changed for the Docusnap Server and vice versa, when both are connected to the same database. If no path was selected for the \u003cem\u003eTeam Settings\u003c/em\u003e or if that path no longer exists, the path specified for the \u003cem\u003eLocal Settings\u003c/em\u003e will be used.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/settings/options/system-paths/","title":"System Paths"},{"content":"The title bar now contains these configurations and options and is divided into the following areas:\nSupport Information By selecting the support information , you will be directed to the Docusnap support center.\nSupport Information: In this area the log file can be generated, and the support file can be saved. This is only possible if the debug mode (client and/or server) have been activated before - see Debug Options. Debug Options: In the Debug Options the debug mode for the Docusnap Client and the Docusnap Server can be activated / deactivated. It is advantageous to be able to activate the debug mode for the Docusnap server without going through its configuration steps as in previous versions. Quick Support: Here you can start the TeamViewer Quick Support. Options The options are divided into the following areas.\nGeneral: In this dialog you can make settings for the program. The database selection and settings for update and Docusnap license are located in this dialog. In the options dialog you can also set the language of the program. Docusnap offers the choice between German and English. In the combo box the desired language is selected. To change the language, the program must be restarted. Inventory: Settings for executing the inventory wizards can be made in this tab. Documentation: In the configuration of the documentation it is defined in which path the documents are saved and which settings are used as default for creating the documents. IT Security: In this area you can specify the folder level limit up to which the folders should be retrieved. This can be helpful, for example, if the permissions are only inherited after a certain level. In addition, the standard settings for the export of reports for IT security are defined. License Management: If software products of a certain operating system should be excluded from the license management, this can be defined via the selections Include Linux Software Products, Include Mac Software Products and Include Unknown Software Products. General The point Discovery Services contains the following areas.\nDocusnap Discovery Service: The Docusnap Discovery Service button opens the dialog for configuration of the Discovery Services. Docusnap Server: The Docusnap Server button starts the Docusnap Server Configuration Wizard. Server Status: In the dialog Server Status the current database of the Docusnap Server and the status of the server is specified. The server can also be started or stopped. Connected Users: The Connected Users dialog shows all users that are connected to the current database. Local Time Zone: If multiple Discovery Services are used to inventory systems that are located in different time zones, scheduling and display can become confusing. By activating the time zone display, the output of the scan date in the data explorer can also be adjusted. You can select which time zone is used for the display by clicking on Local Time Zone. Help The Help section provides access to the following items:\nUser manual: On the one hand, the user manual can be opened as PDF in this area and on the other hand an online manual is available. Configuration Manual: Firstly, the configuration manual can be opened as a PDF file in this area and secondly, an online manual is available. Docusnap Forum: This button opens the Docusnap Forum. Version changes: Clicking on the Version Changes button displays a dialog showing the changes and improvements of the last versions. Update: Clicking on the Update button starts the program update. For more details see chapter Update. License information: Clicking the License Information button opens a dialog with basic license information. About Docusnap: Clicking the About Docusnap button provides information about the program. For example, the current version number is displayed. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe title bar now contains these configurations and options and is divided into the following areas:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"support-information\"\u003eSupport Information\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBy selecting the support information \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/title-bar/docusnap-title-bar-support.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Support\" title=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Support\"\u003e, you will be directed to the Docusnap support center.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSupport Information: In this area the log file can be generated, and the support file can be saved. This is only possible if the debug mode (client and/or server) have been activated before - see Debug Options.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDebug Options: In the Debug Options the debug mode for the Docusnap Client and the Docusnap Server can be activated / deactivated. It is advantageous to be able to activate the debug mode for the Docusnap server without going through its configuration steps as in previous versions.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eQuick Support: Here you can start the TeamViewer Quick Support.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"options\"\u003eOptions\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe options \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/title-bar/docusnap-title-bar-options.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Options\" title=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Options\"\u003e are divided into the following areas.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/title-bar/","title":"Title Bar"},{"content":"You can create a network topology map either using the Create Docu wizard, the Topology wizard or in the tree by clicking on the Topology map or VLAN Map node.\nA network topology map shows the interrelations of switches, virtual switches and systems in a network environment. Switches are scanned using an SNMP systems inventory scan. For virtual switches, you need to perform a VMware Infrastructure inventory scan.\nDocumentation Wizard In the Create Map for combobox, you can select whether the maps are to be created for the Company \u0026amp; Domain, for the Domain only, or for the Company only. Only domains selected in the Domain Selection step are considered.\nIn the maps for the company, all selected domains are combined in one map.\nUse the Ignore Virtual Structures checkboxes to determine, if the Topology Maps and the VLAN Maps should include virtual structures.\nDocusnap will generate additional maps for switches and virtual switches that have been selected in the Switch Maps table. These maps will show the systems connected to the selected switch.\nClick on the Preview button to open a preview of the maps, in which further settings can be defined.\nThe maps for the company will be stored in the Maps folder below the company.\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Maps\\topology)\nIf you create the maps for the domain, the Visio and html files will be stored in the Maps folder of that domain.\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Maps\\topology)\nAd hoc map in the tree The maps can be created by clicking on the Topology Map or VLAN Map node in the tree.These maps are always created using the current data and are generated each time they are opened. The optional settings can also be made for the ad hoc plans.\nTopology Map Options Edit Systems: Opens a dialog for switch selection and restricts the detailed topology plans to these devices.\nSpecial Potential Access Points: Non-inventoried endpoints, usually access points, are displayed in the map by applying network topology discovery protocols (CDP, LLDP). Layer3 Elementes: End devices such as firewalls or servers that have redundant connections to several switches can be hidden in the map with this option. Tunnel Connection: Tunnel connections detected via LLDP or CDP are displayed in the map. VLAN VLAN Tables: The VLAN configurations of the switches are displayed in a table; identical configurations are given the same background color. Port with VLAN Information: The detailed plans of the switches hereby show the VLAN information for each switch port. Ports without VLAN settings are marked as untagged ports, while ports with VLAN settings are shown with a table of configured VLANs per port. Show only Used VLANs: Only display VLANs for which endpoints have been detected, and require that the option Port with VLAN Information is enabled. Details Switch Details: Displays detailed information for each switch port, for example, such as the manufacturer of the connected devices by analyzing the MAC address. Cable Bandwidth: Connections between the switches are displayed with the corresponding bandwidth information. Port Names: In the overview plan, the connections between the switches are labeled with port numbers that indicate the ports via which the switches are connected to each other. Virtual Virtual Structures and Switches: Add virtual switches to the topology visualization, display them in the overview map, and create detailed maps for each virtual switch. Visualization Visualize Cable Bandwidth: With this option, connections are displayed in different colors and thicknesses depending on their bandwidth. Lines representing speeds over 10GB appear blue and six pixels wide. Connections with 1GB are green and three pixels wide. For connections under 1GB, the lines are red and one pixel wide. Highlight Missing Data: Switches are marked if LLDP, CDP, STP, learned MAC addresses, or interface stack data are missing. By right-clicking on the marked object and selecting Show Data, the error message is displayed in a separate dialog. VLAN Map Options Special\nPotential Access Points: Non-inventoried endpoints, usually access points, are displayed in the map by applying network topology discovery protocols (CDP, LLDP). Layer3 Elementes: End devices such as firewalls or servers that have redundant connections to several switches can be hidden in the map with this option. VLAN Show only Used VLANs: Only display VLANs for which end devices have been detected. Filter on relevant switches (from the Viewpoint of the VLAN):* The detailed plan of a VLAN is restricted to the switches relevant for this VLAN. Only the switches that are actually connected to the selected VLAN appear in the detailed plan. Virtual Virtual Structures and Switches: Add virtual switches to the topology visualization, display them in the overview map. Details Switch Details: Displays detailed information for each switch port, for example, such as the manufacturer of the connected devices by analyzing the MAC address. Cable Bandwidth: Connections between the switches are displayed with the corresponding bandwidth information. Port Names: In the overview plan, the connections between the switches are labeled with port numbers that indicate the ports via which the switches are connected to each other. Analysis and Verification of VLAN Settings Detailed maps for each VLAN are created to verify the switch configurations. Switches that are not configured for the respective VLAN are marked in red on the map.\nConnections that fail due to missing VLAN information or communication issues are also displayed in red. This can indicate missing configurations or insufficient information.\nThe detailed map of a VLAN displays all switches, with devices not configured for the respective VLAN marked in red. The option Filter to Relevant Switches shows only the switches that successfully communicate with the VLAN.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eYou can create a network topology map either using the \u003cem\u003eCreate Docu\u003c/em\u003e wizard, the \u003cem\u003eTopology\u003c/em\u003e wizard or in the tree by clicking on the Topology map or VLAN Map node.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA network topology map shows the interrelations of switches, virtual switches and systems in a network environment. Switches are scanned using an \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/snmp-systems/\" title=\"SNMP systems\"\u003eSNMP systems\u003c/a\u003e inventory scan. For virtual switches, you need to perform a \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/vmware-infrastructure/\" title=\"VMware Infrastructure\"\u003eVMware Infrastructure\u003c/a\u003e inventory scan.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"documentation-wizard\"\u003eDocumentation Wizard\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eCreate Map for\u003c/em\u003e combobox, you can select whether the maps are to be created for the \u003cem\u003eCompany \u0026amp; Domain,\u003c/em\u003e for the \u003cem\u003eDomain\u003c/em\u003e only, or for the \u003cem\u003eCompany\u003c/em\u003e only. Only domains selected in the \u003cem\u003eDomain Selection\u003c/em\u003e step are considered.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/topology/","title":"Topology"},{"content":"The app update renews the expiration date for the key and certificate and sets the required permissions for the current Docusnap version. The Azure App key and certificate expire after one year, so they need to be updated regularly. If an Azure App was created with an older version, it can be updated to the current required version. In the process, the required permissions are adjusted.\nFor the update, as for the creation, a device code is created, which is then entered in the browser. After logging in and confirming the CLI, the update is performed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe app update renews the expiration date for the key and certificate and sets the required permissions for the current Docusnap version.\nThe Azure App key and certificate expire after one year, so they need to be updated regularly.\nIf an Azure App was created with an older version, it can be updated to the current required version. In the process, the required permissions are adjusted.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the update, as for the creation, a device code is created, which is then entered in the browser. After logging in and confirming the CLI, the update is performed.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/azure-apps-update/","title":"Update Azure Apps"},{"content":"The Docusnap Update allows you to obtain updated versions and keep your Docusnap installation up to date. If a new Docusnap version is available, you will be prompted for an update upon startup, but you can also click the Update button in the title bar under the button to open the update dialog.\nTo see a list of the new features and/or bugfixes, click the Version Changes button.\nWhen you confirm to start the update process, Docusnap downloads the update set. The installation automatically starts once the download has completed successfully. Upon completion of the installation, you can start the new Docusnap version.\nIf Docusnap has been installed on multiple workstations, the update must be performed for all of the installations. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eDocusnap Update\u003c/em\u003e allows you to obtain updated versions and keep your Docusnap installation up to date. If a new Docusnap version is available, you will be prompted for an update upon startup, but you can also click the Update button in the title bar under the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/support-and-help/updates/docusnap-title-bar-help.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Help\" title=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Help\"\u003e button to open the update dialog.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo see a list of the new features and/or bugfixes, click the \u003cem\u003eVersion Changes\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you confirm to start the update process, Docusnap downloads the update set. The installation automatically starts once the download has completed successfully. Upon completion of the installation, you can start the new Docusnap version.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/support-and-help/updates/","title":"Updates"},{"content":"Usually, a data entry screen consists of several so-called tabs. Various controls can be placed on each of these tabs, all of them being related to the same record in the current Docusnap database. Each of the predefined data entry screens has a tab named General. In almost every case, it contains the predefined controls for Docusnap.\nSince the available space is thereby already quite limited in many cases, it is possible to add any number of additional tabs to the data entry screen. This way, the available space can be extended as desired. At runtime, you can switch back and forth between the individual tabs as desired.\nTo create the tabs in the Designer the Tab control is available in the toolbox. Use Drag\u0026amp;Drop to add a new tab to the existing ones. To delete an existing tab, it must be selected and removed by clicking the Delete button in the Toolbox. To specify the name of a tab, select the tab in the Designer, open the Properties tab and enter the desired text for the TextDE and TextEN properties.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eUsually, a data entry screen consists of several so-called tabs. Various \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/\" title=\"controls\"\u003econtrols\u003c/a\u003e can be placed on each of these tabs, all of them being related to the same record in the current Docusnap database. Each of the predefined data entry screens has a tab named \u003cem\u003eGeneral\u003c/em\u003e. In almost every case, it contains the predefined controls for Docusnap.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSince the available space is thereby already quite limited in many cases, it is possible to add any number of additional tabs to the data entry screen. This way, the available space can be extended as desired. At runtime, you can switch back and forth between the individual tabs as desired.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/usage-of-tabs/","title":"Usage of Tabs"},{"content":"Docusnap features an integrated user management. The User Management feature enables you to grant users access to the Docusnap controls and features and allows them to use extensions. User management will be enabled once you have created and saved the first user. If no users have been defined, any user who connects to this database may use all of the controls and the entire Docusnap functionality. This permission setting also affects access to Docusnap Web. Without an activated user management Docusnap Web is available for all users.\nUsers In the Users tab, you can create users and assign roles to them. Once you have created and saved the first user, User Management will be enabled. When you create users, make sure that at least one of them has a role that allows this user to open the User Management. Otherwise, it will no longer be possible to access this feature.\nRoles In the Docusnap Roles tab, you can create and edit roles that can later be assigned to a user. Roles define which user interface controls will be enabled or disabled. Docusnap provides predefined roles. You may, however, create your own roles.\nPermission Categories Permission Categories control which additional Information are visible to which users. First, create the desired categories in the Permission Categories dialog. Then, these categories are available for assignment to the additional Information.#\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap features an integrated user management. The User Management feature enables you to grant users access to the Docusnap controls and features and allows them to use extensions. User management will be enabled once you have created and saved the first user. If no users have been defined, any user who connects to this database may use all of the controls and the entire Docusnap functionality. This permission setting also affects access to Docusnap Web. Without an activated user management Docusnap Web is available for all users.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/user-management/","title":"User Management"},{"content":"Systems, IT assets, racks, and elements assigned to a site are displayed below the site in the tree.\nNetwork, routing, topology and site maps can be created under the heading Documentation. These maps contain only the systems and racks that have been assigned to this site. In addition, the Overview Site report can be created that lists all the associated system and IT assets.\nIn the license management, the evaluation of the licenses can also be calculated at the site level.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eSystems, IT assets, racks, and elements assigned to a site are displayed below the site in the tree.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNetwork, routing, topology and site maps can be created under the heading \u003cem\u003eDocumentation.\u003c/em\u003e These maps contain only the systems and racks that have been assigned to this site. In addition, the \u003cem\u003eOverview Site\u003c/em\u003e report can be created that lists all the associated system and IT assets.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the license management, the evaluation of the licenses can also be calculated at the site level.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/manage-sites/visualization/","title":"Visualization"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying certain IP segments of your Windows systems, click the Windows (IP) button on the Inventory ribbon. The Windows Systems (IP) step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain.\nIf the firewall is alerted due to too many pings during the search of the IP segments, the number of parallel pings can be limited during the search. If a new search is started in a different IP range, the Discard already found systems after new search option can be used to define whether already existing systems should be deleted. When IP Segments inventory is scheduled and executed at a later time, the Update selected systems option can be used to determine whether only the selected systems are inventoried or the IP area is scanned again, and all found systems are taken into account for the inventory. Select Components: If certain components of the Windows Inventory are not needed, such as the network connection data, it is possible to exclude them from the inventory, thereby speeding up the inventory process. There are two ways to identify individual systems:\nEntering an IP Segment Manually First, you need to enter the required information (IP from, IP to, User, Password) in the Add IP Range group and save this information. Then, click the Start Search button to identify the Windows systems in the specified segment(s). During this process, the individual IP addresses in the specified segments will be pinged. Each Windows system that replies successfully will be added to the Found Systems list.\nIf multiple IP ranges should be included in the inventory, they can also be imported from a CSV file by clicking the Load List button, instead of creating them individually using the buttons New and Save. In the CSV file, the values ​​for IP from, IP to, user and password must be listed in this exact order separated by \u0026ldquo;;\u0026rdquo;. If a line doesn\u0026rsquo;t match this format, this one will be omitted.\nEntering Individual Computers Manually In addition to scanning entire IP ranges for systems, you can also specify a single system. In the Found Systems group, click the New button and then enter either a system name or an IP address as well as the User and the Password for the system to be scanned subsequently.\nIf you wish to use the IP Segments inventory process to scan systems that are members of a domain, precede the user name with the NetBIOS name and a backslash (). For example, the NetBIOS name of the domain named intern.local is INTERN. This means that you need to enter the following in the User field: INTERN\u0026lt;UserName\u0026gt;.\nIf you would like to use the inventory process to scan individual systems or workgroup systems, \u0026ldquo;only\u0026rdquo; the user name (permissions of a local administrator) needs to be specified.\nThe actual inventory process is based on the systems listed in the Found Systems group. All systems selected there will be scanned.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying certain IP segments of your Windows systems, click the \u003cem\u003eWindows (IP)\u003c/em\u003e button on the \u003cem\u003eInventory\u003c/em\u003e ribbon. The \u003cem\u003eWindows Systems (IP)\u003c/em\u003e step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/windows/windows-ip/docusnap-inventory-windows-systems-ip-segments.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Windows Systems IP Segments\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Windows Systems IP Segments\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIf the firewall is alerted due to too many pings during the search of the IP segments, the number of parallel pings can be limited during the search.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIf a new search is started in a different IP range, the \u003cem\u003eDiscard already found systems after new search\u003c/em\u003e option can be used to define whether already existing systems should be deleted.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWhen IP Segments inventory is scheduled and executed at a later time, the \u003cem\u003eUpdate selected systems\u003c/em\u003e option can be used to determine whether only the selected systems are inventoried or the IP area is scanned again, and all  found systems are taken into account for the inventory.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cem\u003eSelect Components\u003c/em\u003e: If certain components of the Windows Inventory are not needed, such as the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/communication-path/\" title=\"network connection data\"\u003e\u003cem\u003enetwork connection data\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/a\u003e, it is possible to exclude them from the inventory, thereby speeding up the inventory process.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThere are two ways to identify individual systems:\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/windows/windows-ip/","title":"Windows (IP)"},{"content":"Click the Data Import (csv) button in the All Jobs area to open the data import wizard.\nImport In the first step, you can specify where to import the data. The following options are available: IT Assets, Extensions, and Table. Under IT Assets, all existing classes can be selected as the target. For the import to tables, you can select any available real tables. Under Extensions, you can select the Comments, Finances, Reminders, Contracts, or Passwords category. The import of passwords is only possible if an encryption file has been selected.\nSource Once you have selected the import type, specify the import file in the next step. The preview shows the first ten entries of the selected file. In the Delimiter group, you can specify the character used as separator for the data. The character specified in the Text Qualifier field defines all text between two occurrences of this character as a unit. Tick the First Row as Header checkbox to specify that the first row contains headers that should not be treated as data.\nTarget The window for the Target step is only shown when you import IT assets or extensions.\nIT Assets: In the case of IT assets, select the folder for the IT assets to be imported. Extensions: Extensions are assigned to existing static objects. When importing extensions, specify the object to which the data should be associated. All static objects are available for selection. Data Assignment In the Data Assignment step, you can specify the columns to be used for storing the data to be imported. Mandatory fields, i.e. fields that must be filled in the database, are flagged by a yellow exclamation mark.\nThe CSV Values field lists the column headers from the CSV file. The Assign field shows all columns available in the selected table or all properties of the selected IT asset. To assign a field from the CSV Values field to a field listed in the Target Settings field, select the respective fields and click the Assign button to link them. To delete all assignments, click the Reset Assignment button.\nWhen you click the Save Assignment button, an XML file which contains all specified assignments will be saved to the folder where the selected CSV file resides. If you later select the same CSV file, whose contents may have changed, again for import, load the assignments from this XML file by clicking the Load Assignment button. This way, you need not define the assignment again.\nColumns filled with an auto-increment value will be hidden by default. To display them, enable the Ignore Auto-Increment checkbox.\nIf you want to update previously imported data or compare new data with the previously imported data, enable the Import as Update checkbox. Then, you can specify settings related to the update in the Update step which displays next.\nUpdate Under Update Settings, you can choose to update existing records or only add new records. If you select Update existing records, new records will be added and records which have changed will be updated.\nTo enable the data comparison, you must select one or more values which are unique and therefore comparable, e.g. customer number, first name and/or last name. If a value occurs multiple times, none of the entries will be updated. These entries will be listed as skipped in the final report.\nScheduling Scheduling can be used to specify that the import of the CSV file is started automatically at a certain time. Scheduling can be used to import the contents of a file that is updated on a regular basis. If no new CSV file was available at the time of the scheduled import, this will be documented in the job summary.\nStatus The Status page displays information about the status and progress of the current import process.\nFinal Report The final report lists the number of records imported successfully and specifies whether the import of any records failed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eData Import (csv)\u003c/em\u003e button in the \u003cem\u003eAll Jobs\u003c/em\u003e area to open the data import wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"import\"\u003eImport\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the first step, you can specify where to import the data. The following options are available: IT Assets, Extensions, and Table. Under IT Assets, all existing classes can be selected as the target. For the import to tables, you can select any available real tables. Under Extensions, you can select the Comments, Finances, Reminders, Contracts, or Passwords category. The import of passwords is only possible if an encryption file has been selected.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/data-import/wizard/","title":"Wizard"},{"content":"When modules are inventoried in Docusnap, the date of the inventory is recorded in each case. After a certain number of inventories have been completed, depending on the setting, the older entries are deleted. To get a more accurate picture of how long a system has been in Docusnap, the date of the first record of this object in the database is also stored. The value cannot be provided retroactively, so this value remains empty for systems that were inventoried with Docusnap versions prior to Docusnap 12.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWhen modules are inventoried in Docusnap, the date of the inventory is recorded in each case. After a certain number of inventories have been completed, depending on the setting, the older entries are deleted. To get a more accurate picture of how long a system has been in Docusnap, the date of the first record of this object in the database is also stored. The value cannot be provided retroactively, so this value remains empty for systems that were inventoried with Docusnap versions prior to Docusnap 12.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/first-record/","title":"First Record"},{"content":"Docusnap offers one module for inventorying Mac systems:\nDiscovery-Mac (from Mac OS X version onwards) After the Discovery-Mac module has been copied to the target system, execute permissions must be granted with chmod 755. The inventory is initiated by the command ./Discovery-Mac, and the result file can be imported into Docusnap via the File Import wizard.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap offers one module for inventorying Mac systems:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-Mac (from Mac OS X version onwards)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfter the Discovery-Mac module has been copied to the target system, execute permissions must be granted with \u003cem\u003echmod 755\u003c/em\u003e. The inventory is initiated by the command \u003cem\u003e./Discovery-Mac\u003c/em\u003e, and the result file can be imported into Docusnap via the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/import-scripts/\" title=\"File Import\"\u003eFile Import\u003c/a\u003e wizard.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/mac/","title":"Mac"},{"content":"Docusnap offers two modules for inventorying Active Directory systems:\nDiscovery-ADDS.exe (This module is always up to date and should be preferred.) Discovery-ADDS-Legacy.exe (corresponds to the status of Docusnap 12 and will not be further developed, remains for existing implementations) To ensure that the Active Directory inventory contains all relevant data, it is necessary to run the Discovery-ADDS.exe module with local administrator rights and, depending on the data to be captured, with additional permissions for Active Directory. The Discovery-ADDS.exe module can be executed either by double-clicking or via the command line of the domain controller.\nFor a convenient configuration of the inventory with the Discovery-ADDS.exe module, without the need to manually handle numerous parameters, the Export AD Settings wizard should be used. If no configuration is specified, default values are used.\nThis wizard, based on the already familiar wizard, is used to select the scan scope, scan options, OU filters, etc. and exports them to a zip file.\nThis zip file contains the configuration file (ADSettings.xml), the schema (ADSSchema.xml) and the .exe file for execution on the target system (Discovery-ADDS.exe).\nC:\\Discovery-ADDS.exe -config ADSettings.xml ADDS specific Options: Important: Create the ADSettings.xml for inventory configuration with the \u0026#39;Export AD Settings\u0026#39; wizard. -config \u0026lt;file\u0026gt; Description: Specifies an XML file which contains the configuration for the execution. If this parameter is not provided, the program searches for a file named ADSettings.xml in the same directory and uses its settings. If neither this parameter is provided nor ADSettings.xml is found in the directory, the inventory is conducted using default settings. Examples ADDS-Inventory with specific settings: C:\\Discovery-ADDS.exe -config ADSettings.xml ADDS-Inventory with standard settings: C:\\Discovery-ADDS.exe Subsequently, this file can be imported into Docusnap through the File Import wizard.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap offers two modules for inventorying Active Directory systems:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-ADDS.exe (This module is always up to date and should be preferred.)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-ADDS-Legacy.exe (corresponds to the status of Docusnap 12 and will not be further developed, remains for existing implementations)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-primary\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    To ensure that the Active Directory inventory contains all relevant data, it is necessary to run the Discovery-ADDS.exe module with local administrator rights and, depending on the data to be captured, with additional permissions for Active Directory.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Discovery-ADDS.exe module can be executed either by double-clicking or via the command line of the domain controller.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/active-directory/","title":"Active Directory"},{"content":"The Active Directory wizard step presents a choice of three different maps. Use the checkboxes on the left to select the domains and the maps to be created.\nThe preview allows you to check the look and feel of the maps. You can change the map layout, if desired. For most cases, we recommend to use the default settings.\nActive Directory Map (\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Maps\\adstree)\nBefore creating an Active Directory map, you can click the Filter button to open the Select Organizational Unit dialog where you can limit the map scope by setting specific filter criteria.\nThe resulting preview allows you to adjust the Active Directory structure. This means that you can create either an OU map, an overall map or a group policy map. If desired, you can add Active Directory classes to the map or removed them by using the checkboxes next to each Active Directory class.\nActive Directory Site Map (\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Maps\\adssites)\nAn Active Directory site map graphically represents the locations of an entire AD structure. It not only displays the site names, but also the domain controllers and subnets associated with each site. Optionally, you can choose to output the site links as routing information.\nWhen creating the Active Directory site map, you can use the preview to specify directly whether you want replications or the site transport to be included in the map.\nActive Directory Domain Map (\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Maps\\adsdomains)\nAn Active Directory Domain map graphically represents the domains that exist in a structure. This includes the trust relationships within the overall structure and within other structures. This map also shows the distribution of the operations master roles for the overall structure and the domains.\nActive Directory structure of individual groups and users The Active Directory map displays all groups and users. It is also possible to show only the relationship between a certain ADS user and an ADS group, or all ADS users belonging to an ADS group. The Structure tab in the main window displays all associated groups for the selected user or all group members for the selected group. You can export this structure.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eActive Directory\u003c/em\u003e wizard step presents a choice of three different maps. Use the checkboxes on the left to select the domains and the maps to be created.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/active-directory/docusnap-documentation-active-directory-tree.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Documentation-Active-Directory-Tree\" title=\"Docusnap-Documentation-Active-Directory-Tree\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe preview allows you to check the look and feel of the maps. You can change the map layout, if desired. For most cases, we recommend to use the default settings.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"active-directory-map\"\u003eActive Directory Map\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003e(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Maps\\adstree)\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBefore creating an Active Directory map, you can click the \u003cem\u003eFilter\u003c/em\u003e button to open the \u003cem\u003eSelect Organizational\u003c/em\u003e Unit dialog where you can limit the map scope by setting specific filter criteria.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/active-directory/","title":"Active Directory"},{"content":"To restrict access to the additional information, you can use categories and permissions. The user roles are assigned to categories in the Docusnap Management.\nWhen you select a category, the additional information will only be displayed if the current user has been assigned a role to which this category is visible.\nAccess restrictions for additional information also apply to entries below the Overview and Organization headline in the Inventory tree. For this reason, additional information are only displayed to authorized users. If a user has been assigned the Administrator role, all additional information is shown. Additional information that should not be displayed due to categorization are flagged as (hidden).\nPermissions In addition to assigning a category, you can define the access to additional information by clicking the Permission button. In the Object Permissions dialog, you can specify whether a person to whom this role was assigned may Read, Write, Delete and / or Insert the additional information.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo restrict access to the additional information, you can use categories and permissions. The user roles are assigned to categories in the Docusnap Management.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you select a category, the additional information will only be displayed if the current user has been assigned a role to which this category is visible.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/additional-information/categories-and-permissions/docusnap-categories-assign.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Categories-assign\" title=\"Docusnap-Categories-assign\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAccess restrictions for additional information also apply to entries below the \u003cem\u003eOverview\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eOrganization\u003c/em\u003e headline in the \u003cem\u003eInventory\u003c/em\u003e tree. For this reason, additional information are only displayed to authorized users. If a user has been assigned the \u003cem\u003eAdministrator\u003c/em\u003e role, all additional information is shown. Additional information that should not be displayed due to categorization are flagged as \u003cem\u003e(hidden).\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/additional-information/categories-and-permissions/","title":"Categories and Permissions"},{"content":"Every system in a network provides or accesses various applications and services. With a large number of applications, services and processes as well as a large number of systems, evaluating their dependencies and relationships is very complicated.\nFor Windows and Linux systems, Docusnap captures the open TCP/UDP ports and existing connections to or from other systems during the inventory process. With each inventory, Docusnap expands and supplements this information and thus helps to build up a comprehensive connection diagram for networks over time.\nThe inventoried data is displayed for each system under the heading Connections in the Inventory tree.\nA second view is below the heading Communication on the company level. In this view the associated systems are listed for all applications, services and processes.\nVisualization For the communication paths, reports or maps can be created under the heading Documentation to visualize the communication paths.\nClick on the Communication node to open the Analysis tab and display the connections between systems and services. The type of connection is specified using different colors. In this overview, applications, services and processes are summarized as services.\nThere are basically two different types of connection, unidirectional and bidirectional connections:\nUnidirectional communication path: source system to service to target system Source system to service = blue Service to target system = green Bidirectional communication path: source system to service to service to target system Source system to service = Purple Service to service = green Service to target system = Purple Special case: Source system to service to service to target system and source system to service to target system Source system to service = purple Service to service = green Service to target system = purple -and Source system to service = blue Service to target system = green Inventory also stores the date on which the connection was inventoried. In the Show Processes from field, you can select a date from which connections should be displayed in the map.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eEvery system in a network provides or accesses various applications and services. With a large number of applications, services and processes as well as a large number of systems, evaluating their dependencies and relationships is very complicated.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor Windows and Linux systems, Docusnap captures the open TCP/UDP ports and existing connections to or from other systems during the inventory process. With each inventory, Docusnap expands and supplements this information and thus helps to build up a comprehensive connection diagram for networks over time.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/communication-path/","title":"Communication Paths"},{"content":"A Composition is a document created from multiple concepts. Through compositions, concepts can be used multiple times, or larger concepts can be split up for easier editing. If the concepts of the composition are changed, the composition document also changes.\nIf the node Concepts or a concept folder in the tree has been selected, the button Add Composition can be used to open dialog to create the composition.\nThe composition requires a name. As the author, the current user is entered. If desired, author can be changed afterwards.\nThe left panel lists all the concepts of the current company. These can be added to a composition. In the right box all added concepts are listed. Use the arrows above to change the order of the concepts.\nThe Section Break combobox determines whether the selected concept should start on a new page or be added on the next line after the end of the previous concept.\nFor the Header \u0026amp; Footer you can define whether no header / footer, the header / footer of the previous concept or the header / footer of the selected concept should be used.\nUsing the button, you can export your concept to Word, PDF, or other formats.\nThe export of compositions can also be scheduled like the export of the concepts.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eA Composition is a document created from multiple concepts. Through compositions, concepts can be used multiple times, or larger concepts can be split up for easier editing. If the concepts of the composition are changed, the composition document also changes.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the node \u003cem\u003eConcepts\u003c/em\u003e or a concept folder in the tree has been selected, the button \u003cem\u003eAdd Composition\u003c/em\u003e can be used to open dialog to create the composition.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe composition requires a name. As the author, the current user is entered. If desired, author can be changed afterwards.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/composition/","title":"Composition"},{"content":"Available Controls The following controls are available to customize and extend the Docusnap data entry screens. Their properties will be described in the following sections:\nLayout Control Layout Group Layout Spacer Group Textbox ADS Assignment Label Date/Time Picker Combo Box Checkbox Button Rich Text Box Selection Grid Attachments Data Grid Tree View General Properties In addition to the specific properties of the individual controls, several general properties are available, which serve a similar purpose for most of the available controls. Some properties are no longer required, as they are automatically taken care of by the layout control.\nProperties of All Controls Dock The docking option Full is particularly helpful for the Layout Control, to spread the controls over the whole area.\nThis property defines whether the current control will be aligned with the parent control and, if yes, at which edges. When you select a docking edge for the control, it will always be attached to this edge of the parent control, regardless of its own size and other properties. If you select the Fill docking option, the control will fill the entire surface area of its parent control. This makes sense, for example, if you want use the entire available area for the Layout Control. DisplayName In the Navigation pane all elements of the opened data entry screen are listed and can be selected. The display name is used to identify the controls in this collection clearly. If for a control no display name is defined, the type of the element is specified in the Navigation pane. For example, Textbox for a textbox. Properties for Controls without Layout Control Anchor Determines the edges where the current control is anchored to a parent control. For data entry screens, the parent control can be either a group, in which the respective control is located, or the data entry screen itself. The default setting for the anchor is Top, Left. This means that the upper left corner will be anchored, which, at runtime, results in a constant offset between the control and the upper left corner of its parent control. If, for example, you want the size of a control to grow or shrink horizontally with an increasing or decreasing resolution, then a Left, Right anchor would be necessary. If you further want the vertical position to remain constant, it would be recommended to use an additional Top anchor. If vertical size adjustment is desired as well, you can also set the Bottom anchor. You can easily select or deselect an anchoring option by clicking the down arrow of the Anchor property on the Properties tab and then selecting the corresponding area. Location This property specifies the position of the control relative to the upper left corner of the parent control. The values are based on a Cartesian coordinate system with the origin in the upper left corner. Size Defines the size of the control. For the values, the \u0026ldquo;width x height\u0026rdquo; pattern applies. Please note that size limitations exist for certain controls. For example, the height of a single-line text box cannot be increased. In addition, other properties, such as Dock or Anchor, may change the size of the control. TabIndex This property defines the sequence in which the controls on a data entry screen will be selected when a user presses the \u0026lt;Tab\u0026gt; key. Enter an integer for this property. The controls will be accessed in the order defined by the numbers entered for each control in this property, starting with the smallest. TabStop This property must be set to allow a user to select the corresponding control by pressing the \u0026lt;Tab\u0026gt; key. Otherwise, the control will be skipped, when a user presses the \u0026lt;Tab\u0026gt; key and the next control where this property is set to \u0026lsquo;True\u0026rsquo; will be accessed. Properties for Some Controls DefaultValue This is the default value of the control. The control will be set to this value when the control is first initialized. It can be overwritten by the user, if required. IsMandatory Indicates if a value must be specified for the control. If this property is set to \u0026lsquo;True\u0026rsquo; and the user did not enter or select a value, the data cannot be saved and an error message displays. It is a good idea to set this property for all fields where the NOT NULL flag is set in the database schema. But this property can also be applied to fields that may be set to NULL. IsUnique / AdditionalUniqueColumns If this property is set to \u0026lsquo;True\u0026rsquo;, Docusnap validates the data the user entered or specified for this control when saving. If duplicates are found, the data cannot be saved and an error message displays. This validation is done at the table level. This way, Docusnap makes sure that no identical record exists in the database table.\nIn some cases you might want to make sure, that the new entry is unique only for e.g. the current domain. In this case, the IsUnique property is set to true and the additional columns are entered in the AdditionalUniqueColumns property. The columns, that must be unique, are listed separated by commas, for example DomainID. TextDE/TextEN Using these two properties, you can specify an English and a German caption for this control. TextDE represents the German caption and TextEN the English caption. For most controls where this property is available, this is the text that will be displayed on the user interface. ","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"available-controls\"\u003eAvailable Controls\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe following controls are available to customize and extend the Docusnap data entry screens. Their properties will be described in the following sections:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLayout Control\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLayout Group\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLayout Spacer\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGroup\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTextbox\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eADS Assignment\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLabel\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDate/Time Picker\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCombo Box\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCheckbox\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eButton\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRich Text Box\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSelection Grid\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAttachments\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eData Grid\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTree View\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"general-properties\"\u003eGeneral Properties\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition to the specific properties of the individual controls, several general properties are available, which serve a similar purpose for most of the available controls. Some properties are no longer required, as they are automatically taken care of by the layout control.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/","title":"Controls"},{"content":"A meta object of the Data type is used for the output of database tables in the hierarchy. For this reason, such a meta object must be linked with a database table, view or virtual table. For this object type, additional settings and options, especially for the display of content data, are available.\nVirtual tables are used for the output of data from various tables in a single table where they can be sorted by a specific value. A virtual table node will not be shown in the tree view, but rather is used to combine the data from the dependent tables. The column names in the virtual table must match the field names in the tables being combined. For this reason, the tables to be used here should share some columns. The primary key of the parent node is used as the foreign key for the subnode. In order to show different icons in the table for display in the main window, define such icons using the Icon Filter Field.\nAvailable Options for Data-Type Meta Objects Property Description Table Here, you can select the linked data table from the list of meta tables. Meta tables can be modified or extended from the Metatables tab. By clicking the button next to the selected table, a dialog for editing the tables will be opened. Filter Field This is the table field used for defining a filter. Filterwert Filter criterion for the Filter Field. In this field, you can enter any valid SQL conditions (such as = 1). The clause can further be extended using additional fields or conditions.\nExamples:\n= 1 AND Hostname Like 'S%' \u0026lt;\u0026gt; 5 AND HostType in (1,2,3) Sort Field Database field on which the displayed elements will be sorted. Sort Order Order in which the data of the sort field will be sorted. Alt. FK An alternate foreign key is used if you want to build the hierarchy using a foreign key that is different from the one specified in the Metatables dialog. This option can only be used with real tables.\nIf a data entry screen is used for this node, the alternate foreign key column of new entries will automatically be filled with the primary key of the parent node. The actual foreign key for the table must be entered using the data entry screen. Editable If this checkbox is enabled for a meta object, a data entry screen can be created or is available.\nIf entries are created in the tree for an object, they can only be deleted if the Static Object option has been activated.\nThe primary key of the assigned table must be of type Int or BigInt in order to create and edit entries. Unique This flag ensures that only one object can be created for each level. This option can only be selected for meta objects where the Editable checkbox is enabled. Do Not Create If you tick this checkbox, the object can only be deleted or saved. The New button is disabled in this case. This means that users can only edit objects, but cannot create new ones Recursion Field By means of this property, you can define a recursive field, and thus build a hierarchy on the basis of a table. At the first level, only records will be shown where the recursive field contains the value NULL or -1. Make sure to always define a recursive field as a Int data type. At the second level, Docusnap shows records where the recursive field contains the value of the primary key from the first level. If a small blue arrow appears in the tree hierarchy at a recursive object, there is a repetition in the recursion. Drag \u0026amp; Drop Allowed The Drag \u0026amp; Drop Allowed check box defines whether it is possible to move an element from one level to another within a recursive structure using drag \u0026amp; drop. For this reason, this check box can only be activated if a recursion field has been set. Show as IT Asset It is possible to display IT assets anywhere in the tree, for example, below a contact, which they were assigned to. In the first step, a property is created for the required IT assets. These must be named the same for all IT assets. For example, create a property xContacts of type List and the use the table tContacts as the reference. Then a view with an SQL statement needs to be created that lists all necessary ObjectIDs (see Modification of the Structure).\nInsert a new meta object at the point where the IT assets should be displayed and select the created view as the table. Then the check box Show as IT Asset is activated, thereby the respective IT assets for all ObjectIDs appear with all properties. This meta-object does not require an icon, as the icons of the IT assets are used. Icon Filter Using an icon filter, you can assign one of various icons to a meta object based on the value of a certain column. Thus, it is e.g. possible to define only a single meta object to be used for workstations, servers and domain controllers, but assign different icons by means of the icon filter.\nFor the icon filter, icon groups are created and the icons with the respective values are defined.\nTo enable the icon filter, select the data field that contains the filter value from the Icon Filter Field field. Then select the group containing the desired values and icons in the Icon Group combo box. If the table includes a value for which no custom icon has been defined, the default icon for that object will be used\nIf the needed group does not exist yet or the required values and icons are still missing in the group, the button can be used to open the dialog for extending the icons. If a group has already been selected, the view is filtered by this group. If no group has been selected yet, all groups will be displayed.\nBy clicking the New button, a new value and icon can be added for the selected group.\nIf a new group is needed, the button can be used to open the dialog for creating new icon groups.\nRelated Objects It is possible to use the same objects in multiple hierarchies. For example, the same system can be displayed in the Inventory tree view under the Workstations node and in the IT Security explorer. You can specify permissions and extensions for each system. To make sure that this information will also be displayed for the same system when listed in the IT Secuirty hierarchy and do not have to be re-created, these two objects were defined as related objects.\nTo do so, switch to Related Objects tab and select the related objects. In the left pane, all tree views will be displayed, and the right pane shows the objects that have already been defined as related types. When you select an object in the left pane, the Add button is enabled.\nIf you define related objects for the current object, it is recommended to repeat this assignment in the other direction, i.e. to assign this object to the related objects as well.\nIndex search If the Enterprise Search is enabled and an object of the Data type is selected, then the Index Search button is displayed and can be used to add more fields of this object to the search index.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eA meta object of the \u003cem\u003eData\u003c/em\u003e type is used for the output of database tables in the hierarchy. For this reason, such a meta object must be linked with a database table, view or virtual table. For this object type, additional settings and options, especially for the display of content data, are available.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/data/docusnap-tools-manage-metaobjects-data.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Tools Manage Metaobjects Data\" title=\"Docusnap Tools Manage Metaobjects Data\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVirtual tables are used for the output of data from various tables in a single table where they can be sorted by a specific value. A virtual table node will not be shown in the tree view, but rather is used to combine the data from the dependent tables. The column names in the virtual table must match the field names in the tables being combined. For this reason, the tables to be used here should share some columns. The primary key of the parent node is used as the foreign key for the subnode. In order to show different icons in the table for display in the main window, define such icons using the \u003cem\u003eIcon Filter Field.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/data/","title":"Data"},{"content":"Datasheets can be created using either the Create Docu wizard or the Datasheets wizard.\nAfter you have selected the domains, all servers, workstations, SNMP, Linux and Mac systems that exist in the selected domains will be displayed. If the checkbox next to a system is enabled, a datasheet will be created for it.\nEach datasheet contains all current information that is located at the levels below the node of the selected system.\nThe datasheets may also include Additional Information that have been stored with the systems. Additional Information saved at the system level will be shown, but no Additional Information created for lower levels. In addition, the attachments can be included. If you enable the Export Attachments checkbox, the attachments will be listed with the Additional Information in the report and the attachments themselves will be stored in the Attachments folder and the type of additional information.\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Datasheets\\Name of the System\\Attachments\\Type of Additional Information)\nFor each additional information, the field Show in Reports can be used to specify whether it should not to be displayed in the reports or whether it should be shown at the beginning or at the end of the report. If the checkbox for the respective additional information is activated in the wizard, only additional information will be included for which Show at the Beginning or Show at the End was selected. When performing an inventory scan, additional tools can also be included. You can add these tools from the Additional Tools page in the Docusnap Management. The results of an additional tool used for inventorying can be output along with the datasheet. If you enable the Show Results from Additional Tools checkbox, the results this tool found for the respective system will be exported to a folder under the Datasheet folder.\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Datasheets\\Name of the System\\ToolResults)\nTo filter the display, you can select one of the filter buttons on the right.\nWhen creating datasheets, you can additionally enable the Print Preparation option. It can be used to generate an additional file with the .mdc file extension. This file is required if you want to use the Print Docu wizard to print the documentation.\nThe documentation will be stored in the Datasheets subfolder of the documentation directory.\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Datasheets)\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDatasheets can be created using either the \u003cem\u003eCreate Docu\u003c/em\u003e wizard or the \u003cem\u003eDatasheets\u003c/em\u003e wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfter you have selected the domains, all servers, workstations, SNMP, Linux and Mac systems that exist in the selected domains will be displayed. If the checkbox next to a system is enabled, a datasheet will be created for it.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach datasheet contains all current information that is located at the levels below the node of the selected system.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/data-sheets/","title":"Data Sheets"},{"content":"For IT security, various reports can be generated on the action area. One report shows the effective permissions for specific users to one or more directories. All users who have a permission to a specific directory will be shown in the second report. The third report, Current View, includes the permissions that are currently displayed on the IT security tab.\nIt is possible to create a report for Exchange which lists the permissions of selected users or groups to the mailboxes, mailbox folders, or public folders. The Exchange Overview report lists all users who have permissions to the mailboxes, mailbox folders, and public folders.\nClick the button Principal Report, Directory Report or Overview Report to open the wizard to generate the reports.\nTo create the principal reports at least one user or group has to be selected in the User Selection before opening the wizard.\nThe selected node will be used as the starting point.\nLevels A hierarchical tree structure displays the entries for the file system, the SharePoint environment, and the Exchange servers. You can specify the number of sub-levels to be included in the report by setting the Levels field to the desired value. To include all levels, tick the Show All Levels checkbox.\nSettings If you enable the Show Only Changes checkbox, only those entries will be displayed where the effective permissions of the selected users or groups have changed. If this checkbox is not enabled, all directories, SharePoint entries, Exchange mailboxes, etc. and the corresponding user and group permissions to these items will be shown.\nWhen calculating the effective permissions the share and NTFS permissions are used, taking into account the inheritance of permissions. By selecting the checkbox Ignore Share Permissions, only the NTFS permissions are analyzed.\nBy enabling the Show Only Changes option, you can significantly reduce the resulting number of report pages and thereby improve the readability of the report. For directory reports additional settings can be determined. If you check the Include Default Groups (e.g. Everyone) option, the users of default groups will also be included. Since domain administrators have full access to all directories in most cases, you can exclude them from the reports by enabling the Exclude Domain Administrators checkbox. If the Show Only Groups checkbox has been enabled, only the permissions for groups, and not those for individual users, will be included.\nThe Consider Creator Owner Permissions checkbox can be used to specify whether users who have been granted permissions to the folder based on the Creator Owner group should be included in the report.\nIf the Show Only Activated Users checkbox is selected, only active users are displayed in the report. Even if disabled users have directory privileges, they are not listed in the report.\nDisplay Options Usually, the report will show three blocks of permissions (effective, share and NTFS). Using the respective checkboxes you can hide or unhide information.\nIf the Special Permissions checkbox is enabled, the Special Permissions will be shown. Otherwise, the report will only show the Basic Permissions.\nOther For the user, directory and overview reports three different output formats are provided.\nHorizontal Output:\nThe horizontal output lists directories, users/groups and permissions one underneath the other.\nVertical Output:\nThe vertical output displays the directories, users/groups and permissions in a matrix.\nExcel Output or CSV Output:\nWhen in the wizard the output format Excel Output or CSV Output is selected, the data is exported directly into an excel or CSV file. The file is saved in the documentation path below the respective domain.\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Starting Point\\Reports\\PermissionsDirectory) or (\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Starting Point\\Reports\\EffectivePermission)\nThe report displays the Netbios name of the users and groups by default. In the AD User as combobox, you can define whether the Display Name, Netbios Name, the Name, or User Principal Name is used in the report.\nYou can use the Add AD Property option to specify AD properties, that are then displayed for the users and groups in the report.\nUser/Group Filter With the User/Group Filter users or groups can be excluded from the directory report. This can be useful, for example, so users and groups, that are not of interest, or who have access to all directories, are not listed in the reports. In the List combo box defined lists of users and groups can be added. These are compiled in User/Group Filter dialog.\nClick the Add button to add the users and groups of the selected list. Via the Search text box, users and groups can be added individually. Once the first letter is entered, the matching entries are suggested. Users and groups can be added via click on the Add button. Click the button in the Search text box to open the Advanced Search dialog. The selection of users and groups in the advanced search works the same way as when you add the user for the analysis of the effective permissions. Click the Remove button to delete a currently selected entry.\nIf a user is added to the filter, this user is not displayed in the directory report.\nWhen adding a group, the application of the filter differs depending on whether the option Resolve Recursively is activated or not.\nResolve Recursively is deactivated: By adding a group to the filter without activating the Resolve Recursively option, only this specific group is included in the filter. If the filter is applied to the directory report, the group itself and all users or subgroups that obtain their permissions solely through membership in this group are not listed.\nResolve Recursively activated: When the Resolve Recursively option for a group is activated, the filter includes not only the selected group but also all direct users, subgroups, and their users. If this filter is subsequently used for the directory report, these users and groups are excluded from the directory report, regardless whether they may also have direct permissions or have inherited permissions through other groups.\nThe report may be exported to various file formats. Click the button and select the desired format. Clicking the desired format opens a dialog where you can select the pages to be exported. Click the + sign to expand the Settings group. Then, you can select format-specific settings. If the file should automatically be opened after the save, enable the Open After Export checkbox.\nScheduling With Docusnap, you can schedule the creation of reports and have them generated automatically with the Docusnap Server at a later point in time.\nClick the Schedule button to open the next step. In case you do not want to create the report using the predefined directory (documentation path), specify an alternative path. By default, the documentation path defined for the Docusnap Server will be used. If you specify an alternative documentation path, that path will be used. In addition the language can be chosen.\nIn the next step, you can select the desired report format. The following formats are available: docx, xlsx, html, odt and pdf.\nAdditionally, you can specify here whether to include a cover page, a header and a footer in your report. If you do not make any changes, the settings from the Layout (CI) dialog will be used.\nIf you tick the E-Mail Distribution checkbox, the report will be sent to the e-mail address(es) specified below. Even if E-Mail Distribution is enabled, the reports will always be saved to the specified documentation path.\nIn the last step, you can define scheduling details. This step determines when and how often the report will be created. Click the Finish button to save the task.\nScheduling will only work if the Docusnap Server service has been set up. Report Jobs Additionally it is possible to schedule the Directory Report for several shares or DFS folder targets simultaneously and send them to a defined e-mail address. To schedule the directory reports, it is necessary to provide a CSV file that lists the desired shares or DFS folder targets. Click the Report Jobs (csv) button to open the wizard. Select the company in which the shares or DFS folder targets are located. In addition, an alternative documentation path and the language can be selected.\nA CSV file is imported in which the desired shares and DFS folder targets are listed.\nIn the next step, the CSV file is imported. In the CSV file the values for Domain, Host, Share\\Path and E-Mail must be listed in that order separated by \u0026ldquo;;\u0026rdquo;. If the directory report for folder targets in a DFS structure should be scheduled, (DFS) must also be written after the host so that the respective folder target can be found.\nCSV example for NTFS:\ndocusnapsports.com;DOSPBK01;B$;Docusnap@docusnap.com docusnapsports.com;DOSPBK01;C$;Docusnap@docusnap.com docusnapsports.com;DOSPDB01;C$;Docusnap@docusnap.com docusnapsports.com;DOSPFS01;D$\\Shares\\Departments\\Accounting;Docusnap@docusnap.com CSV example for DFS:\ndocusnapsports.com;DOSPFS01(DFS);\\\\DOSPFS01.DOCUSNAPSPORTS.COM\\DFS\\Archive\\2010;a.cole@docusnapsports.com docusnapsports.com;DOSPFS01(DFS);\\\\DOCUSNAPSPORTS.COM\\Public\\Org;a.cole@docusnapsports.com For each entry is checked whether the share or DFS folder targets was inventoried for the specified host in the specified domain. The report can only be scheduled, if the directories and permissions for the specified share or DFS folder targets are available. When executing the job the report will be sent to the specified email address. If no email address is specified, the report will only be saved in the specified documentation path. Check the respective checkbox to select the shares or DFS folder targets for which a job should be created. The CSV file can be created and edited using Excel or a text editor.\nClick the Next button to switch to the Directory Permissions step. In this step, the options for generating the report are selected which have already been described in this chapter. After the format of the report and the subject for the email are defined in the Reporting step, you can define in the step Scheduling when the jobs should be executed. Click the Finish button to create a job for every selected share or DFS folder target, which will be executed at the scheduled time.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eFor IT security, various reports can be generated on the action area. One report shows the effective permissions for specific users to one or more directories. All users who have a permission to a specific directory will be shown in the second report. The third report, \u003cem\u003eCurrent View,\u003c/em\u003e includes the permissions that are currently displayed on the \u003cem\u003eIT security\u003c/em\u003e tab.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is possible to create a report for Exchange which lists the permissions of selected users or groups to the mailboxes, mailbox folders, or public folders. The Exchange Overview report lists all users who have permissions to the mailboxes, mailbox folders, and public folders.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/analysis/determining-the-effective-permissions/","title":"Determining the Effective Permissions"},{"content":"The Docusnap Discovery Service is a part of Docusnap which enables inventory processes to be performed automated in a remote location and then transmit the results to a central Docusnap server.\nAfter successfully establishing a connection from a Docusnap Discovery service to a central Docusnap server the inventory jobs can be managed and triggered from the head office.\nConnection The connection from the Docusnap Discovery Services to the central Docusnap server is via http or https protocol. By using these standard protocols, it is not necessary to make special firewall configurations at the remote site (Outbound). Data and information can be transmitted in encrypted form.\nData Transport The transport of data and information is also carried via the http or https protocol. The results of each job are cached in files on the computer on which the Docusnap Discovery Services are executed and then transmitted to the central Docusnap server.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Docusnap Discovery Service is a part of Docusnap which enables inventory processes to be performed automated in a remote location and then transmit the results to a central Docusnap server.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfter successfully establishing a connection from a Docusnap Discovery service to a central Docusnap server the inventory jobs can be managed and triggered from the head office.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"connection\"\u003eConnection\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe connection from the Docusnap Discovery Services to the central Docusnap server is via http or https protocol. By using these standard protocols, it is not necessary to make special firewall configurations at the remote site (Outbound). Data and information can be transmitted in encrypted form.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/discovery-service/","title":"Discovery Service"},{"content":"This ribbon is used to create the documentation. The documents that are created can be Visio maps, Excel overviews or Word data sheets. The wizard for creating documents is explained in the chapter Documentation.\nGeneral The overviews of the Active Directory, of Windows computers and the software overview in Excel can be generated by clicking on the Overviews button.\nDatasheets on inventoried systems can be generated by clicking on the Datasheets button.\nDifferent systems of a domain can be grouped into system groups. For each of these system groups datasheets and maps can be created.\nBy clicking on the button Create Overview, a document is created from which a link to the created documents is provided.\nClick the Print Document button to open the Print Documentation wizard.\nFor different modules Visio maps can be created by clicking on the respective button.\nBy clicking on the button Open Path, the path is opened in which the created documents are saved. This path is defined in the dialog Options - Documentation.\nBy clicking on the Create Documentation button, the wizard is opened, in which the possible documents are listed. In this wizard, several documents can be created simultaneously.\nSettings for the documentation path, fonts and other standard settings for creating documents can be specified in the Options - Documentation dialog.\nIT Documentation Business structures can be mapped in the IT documentation.\nWhen an IT documentation item is selected, additional functions are available in the action area and under the button.\nEditor: Clicking on the Editor button opens an additional window to create and edit the IT documentation. Import Structure: By clicking the Import Structure button, created frameworks that have been previously exported to a file can be imported into a new database. Export Structure: By clicking the Export Structure button, you can export the frameworks to a file, which can then be imported into another database. Documents When you navigate to Documents Data Explorer, the Explorer shows any documents created in this module. Maps and datasheets are displayed in a hierarchical structure. If no map or datasheet has been created yet for the selected node, the main window shows the wizard that will help you to do so.\nConcepts Below the Concepts heading the available concepts are displayed. To create a new document or directory, click the New button above the tree view.\nDiagrams Diagrams are created below the Diagrams heading in the Documentation tree. Click the New button to create a directory for the diagram and then the diagram itself. You can then navigate to the Diagrams tab to create the desired diagram.\nStandard Maps Below the Standard Map heading the network map, the routing map, the topology map and the VLAN map can be created. These maps are always created anew and therefore they contain the latest data.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThis ribbon is used to create the documentation. The documents that are created can be Visio maps, Excel overviews or Word data sheets. The wizard for creating documents is explained in the chapter \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/\" title=\"Documentation\"\u003eDocumentation\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"general\"\u003eGeneral\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe overviews of the Active Directory, of Windows computers and the software overview in Excel can be generated by clicking on the \u003cem\u003eOverviews\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDatasheets on inventoried systems can be generated by clicking on the \u003cem\u003eDatasheets\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/navigation/documentation/","title":"Documentation"},{"content":"The Documents tree view was designed to help you manage and create your documentation and enhance the transparency of the entire process.\nIf no maps, datasheets or overviews have been created for the selected Explorer node yet, the Documents tab in the right pane displays a dashboard-type indicator that helps you to create the respective document. What is more, it allows you to access the specific online help for the desired map.\nYou can use the Dashboard as a shortcut to launch the required wizard without accessing the ribbon.\nIf the document exists already, the desired map is displayed instead of the Dashboard. The PDF Document, Word Document, Excel Document, Visio Document and ODT Document buttons allow you to display the map in the desired format. The desired format is only available if the document was created in that format.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Documents tree view was designed to help you manage and create your documentation and enhance the transparency of the entire process.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf no maps, datasheets or overviews have been created for the selected Explorer node yet, the \u003cem\u003eDocuments\u003c/em\u003e tab in the right pane displays a dashboard-type indicator that helps you to create the respective document. What is more, it allows you to access the specific online help for the desired map.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/documentation-tree-view/","title":"Documentation Tree View"},{"content":"Docusnap provides default reports with predefined headers, footers and cover pages. In the Layout (CI) dialog, you can edit the settings of these reports. To ensure that the header, footer and cover page will be used, either tick the appropriate checkbox(es) in dialog or configure individual company settings.\nOpen the master report in the Designer where you can edit the header, footer and/or cover page by clicking the Design button. A different report can be selected by clicking the button. The selected report will be saved in the report repository as EN_MasterReport.mrt. (For German templates, the \u0026ldquo;DE_\u0026rdquo; prefix will be used instead of \u0026ldquo;EN_\u0026rdquo;.) Docusnap archives the file that previously had this file name and assigns it a timestamp so that you can restore it at any time through the operating system\u0026rsquo;s file system.\nSelect a company in the list box to customize the header, footer and cover page for this company. You can choose not to use the header, footer or cover page, to apply the master settings as defined in General or select an individual company-specific setting. Company-specific individual settings are always saved in the database. If you use the Individual Settings option, you can select an existing report and click the Design button to open it in the Report Designer and edit it. If no report has been selected and you click the Design button, an empty new report will be created which you can edit and save afterwards.\nThe EN_MasterReport.mrt file contains the header, footer and cover page definitions. The name of the page determines whether the page is a cover, a header or a footer. When Docusnap creates the report, the width of the main report is compared with the width of the cover page, header and footer. If a cover page, header and/or footer of a suitable width exist for the report, these will be used. By default, the EN_MasterReport.mrt and DE_MasterReport.mrt files include a cover page, a header and a footer for reports in portrait and landscape formats, respectively.\nThe cover page will be output as the first page before the actual report.\nThe header is output at the top of each page in the actual report. The header includes the report name and two logos.\nThe general logo and the company logo are selected in the Layout (CI) dialog. To change one of the logos, you do not have to open the header in the Designer. To change the general logo select General in the combo box of the Layout (CI) dialog and choose a different logo. To change the company logo select the desired company in the combo box and choose the new logo.\nTo show the corresponding logo, an image component is added in the Designer. On the Properties tab, you can set the Image-Data property to either {DefaultLogo} or {AccountLogo}. This causes the display of the correct logo.\nDefaultLogo: If you set the Image-Data property of an image to {DefaultLogo}, the general logo will display. AccountLogo: If you set the Image-Data property of an image to {AccountLogo}, the logo selected for the current company will be displayed. When creating a new text box, image, line, or data band component, make sure that its name is different from the names of the components in the header, footer or cover page. This is also true for the rest of the report: The name of each component in the report must be unique. If two components have the same name, only one of them will be shown in the generated report. For this reason, when creating an additional component for the cover page, header or footer, prefix its name with Cover, Header or Footer. The component name can be changed from the Properties tab. Variables for the Current Meta Object MetaObjectCover: This variable shows the name of the object this report is linked with. It is associated with the cover page.\nMetaObjectCover: This variable shows the name of the object this report is linked with. It is associated with the footer.\nDomainName: This variable shows the name of the domain under which the report will be generated. If the report is generated above the domain level, this variable is blank.\nAccount: To show information on the company for which the report will be generated, several variables are available. For example, you can use the AccountName variable to include the company name in the report.\nCoverAccountID, HeaderAccountID and FooterAccountID: These variables include the primary key of the company for which the report will be executed. This way, you can filter the database on the company name. The respective variables are used for the cover page (CoverAccountID), the header (HeaderAccountID) and the footer (FooterAccountID). When the report is generated, these variables will be replaced with the actual data. Since separate company-related variables are available in Docusnap, the variables mentioned above are no longer required in the default MasterReport.\nSystem Variables ReportName: Docusnap uses the report name specified in the Manage Reports dialog.\nReportDescription: This is the description stored via the Manage Reports dialog. If no description was entered, no description will be displayed.\nToday: The Today variable shows the current date.\nReportAuthor: This is the author as specified in the Reports tab. For the predefined Docusnap reports, the author is \u0026ldquo;Docusnap\u0026rdquo;. To display the name of a different author, you first need to change the value in the Author field of the Reports tab.\nTotalPageCountThrough: This variable shows the page count for this report.\nPageNofM: This variable shows the current page number and the total page count.\nAdditional Page Formats By default, each report includes a cover page, a header and a footer for the A4 portrait and landscape formats with page margins left of 2 cm and right, top and bottom margins of 1 cm, respectively. If required, you can define a cover page, header and footer for a different page format. To do so, right-click the area next to the pages tabs to open the context menu and select New Page.\nOn this page, you have to define with the beginning of the name whether this page is a cover, a header or a footer. Then, assign the desired page format to the new page. You can now create the content to be used later for the cover page, header or footer. If you later create a report with the same page width as the new pages, the newly created cover page, header and footer will be used.\nMake sure that the page names are unique, otherwise the report cannot be displayed. If the MasterReport includes multiple pages with the same page width, the leftmost page will be used first.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap provides default reports with predefined headers, footers and cover pages. In the \u003cem\u003eLayout (CI)\u003c/em\u003e dialog, you can edit the settings of these reports. To ensure that the header, footer and cover page will be used, either tick the appropriate checkbox(es) in dialog or configure individual company settings.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOpen the master report in the Designer where you can edit the header, footer and/or cover page by clicking the \u003cem\u003eDesign\u003c/em\u003e button. A different report can be selected by clicking the \u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-designer/editing-headers-footers-and-cover-pages/docusnap-open-path.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-open-path\" title=\"Docusnap-open-path\"\u003e button. The selected report will be saved in the report repository as \u003cem\u003eEN_MasterReport.mrt.\u003c/em\u003e (For German templates, the \u0026ldquo;DE_\u0026rdquo; prefix will be used instead of \u0026ldquo;EN_\u0026rdquo;.) Docusnap archives the file that previously had this file name and assigns it a timestamp so that you can restore it at any time through the operating system\u0026rsquo;s file system.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-designer/editing-headers-footers-and-cover-pages/","title":"Editing Headers, Footers and Cover Pages"},{"content":"In the Editor tab you can enter additional information into data entry screens to add them to the database. This may include information about the company, additional systems, equipment, etc. The Editor tab will only be displayed if the object selected in the Explorer is editable. For example, if you want to create an entry manually, a blank data entry screen will open in the editor where you can enter the required information. Additional tabs, such as Data, Documents or the various tabs for the additional information will only be displayed after you have saved the data entered in the editor.\nFor all editable objects displayed in the tree view, data entry screens have been predefined which allow quick and easy editing of all available data directly from the Docusnap tree view. The data entry screens are part of the user interface with the database. All data you enter here, will be basically validated and error messages will be generated, if appropriate.\nWhen you select an object in the Explorer, the corresponding data entry screen is displayed on the Editor tab, provided the object is editable. The data for an editable object will be shown on the data entry screen and can be edited. When you need to create a new entry manually, a blank data entry screen is displayed on the Editor tab where you can enter the required data.\nIn order to create a new entry, you must select the object at that same level or the object one level above. Clicking the New button, opens a list with the objects that can be created at that level. Once you have selected the object type to be created, the associated data entry screen will be displayed. After you have entered all required information, click the Save button to save your data.\nTo delete entries that are no longer needed, click the Delete button.\nIf you select an editable object that has already been saved, the associated data entry screen opens on the Editor tab, populated with the previously saved data.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eEditor\u003c/em\u003e tab you can enter additional information into data entry screens to add them to the database. This may include information about the company, additional systems, equipment, etc. The \u003cem\u003eEditor\u003c/em\u003e tab will only be displayed if the object selected in the Explorer is \u003cem\u003eeditable.\u003c/em\u003e For example, if you want to create an entry manually, a blank data entry screen will open in the editor where you can enter the required information. Additional tabs, such as Data, Documents or the various tabs for the additional information will only be displayed after you have saved the data entered in the editor.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/editor/","title":"Editor"},{"content":"The permissions of users and groups to Exchange mailboxes, mailbox folders, and public folders are retrieved during an Exchange inventory scan.\nClick the Exchange button in the Inventory ribbon to launch the corresponding wizard. First, you need to select a company and enter your credentials (see: Basic Steps). Then, the Exchange step will be displayed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe permissions of users and groups to Exchange mailboxes, mailbox folders, and public folders are retrieved during an Exchange inventory scan.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eExchange\u003c/em\u003e button in the \u003cem\u003eInventory\u003c/em\u003e ribbon to launch the corresponding wizard. First, you need to select a company and enter your credentials (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e). Then, the \u003cem\u003eExchange\u003c/em\u003e step will be displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/exchange/docusnap-inventory-exchange-server.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Inventory-Exchange-Server\" title=\"Docusnap-Inventory-Exchange-Server\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/exchange/","title":"Exchange"},{"content":"As an alternative to filtering the data using the data band, the desired data can be filtered by applying an SQL statement to the data source. The advantage is that less data needs to be loaded from the database and therefore less memory is used.\nThis example is based on the report from the Filtering a single system example. To save the selected value from the dialog, right-click in the Dictionary panel and select New Variable. The New Variable dialog opens. Assign the name DfvSelectedSystem to this variable.\nThe Dfv prefix is short for Docusnap Form Variable and identifies variables which are used for evaluating dialogs. Variables may be named as desired, but if the created reports are to be scheduled using the Docusnap Server, it is recommended to use the Dfv prefix to make sure that the values assigned to the variables will be saved. Now, save a value to the newly created DfvSelectedSystem variable. To do so, first double-click the OK button in the form. This opens the editor for the click event. Enter the following text in this editor:\nDfvSelectedSystem = cbxSystems.SelectedKey\nThis assigns the selected value from the cbxSystems lookup box to the newly created DfvSelectedKey variable.\nInstead of adding a filter to the data band as described in the Filtering a single system example, you can now use an SQL statement to filter the tHosts table on the selected value.\nTo adapt the SQL statement, right-click the tHosts table in the Dictionary panel, and then select Edit from the context menu. In the SQL statement, the Where clause can be used to filter the HostID on the value of the DfvSelectedSystem variable:\nSelect * from tHosts where tHosts.HostID = {DfvSelectedSystem} To reference a variable in the SQL statement, enclose its name by braces { }.\nThe report will then only output the data for the selected system.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eAs an alternative to filtering the data using the data band, the desired data can be filtered by applying an SQL statement to the data source. The advantage is that less data needs to be loaded from the database and therefore less memory is used.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis example is based on the report from the \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/dialog/example/filtering-a-single-system/\" title=\"Filtering a single system\"\u003eFiltering a single system\u003c/a\u003e example. To save the selected value from the dialog, right-click in the \u003cem\u003eDictionary\u003c/em\u003e panel and select \u003cem\u003eNew Variable.\u003c/em\u003e The New Variable dialog opens. Assign the name \u003cem\u003eDfvSelectedSystem\u003c/em\u003e to this variable.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/dialog/example/filtering-systems-using-an-sql-statement/","title":"Filtering Systems Using an SQL Statement"},{"content":"Formatting Reports in the Designer When you open the Report Designer, Docusnap loads the current styles that have been selected in the Layout (CI) dialog. If you select a company, for which a different design was defined, from the status bar, that design will be loaded.\nTo assign a style to a component, select the component first. Then, select the associated style from the dropdown via the Component Style property on the Properties tab.\nStyles By default, styles have been defined.\nTitle: The Title style is available for the title text. Description: For the description output, the Description style (left side) and a value using the Value style (right side) are used. To align a value to the right margin, select the ValueNumber style. Headings: To format headings, you can used the Header style. Data: Data can be formatted using the Data and DataNumber styles. The other available styles can be used to format Permission Analysis reports and cover pages as well as headers and footers.\nThe styles with the addition of _Level1 to _Level4 are in the report design before Docusnap 12 and continue to exist for compatibility reasons.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"formatting-reports-in-the-designer\"\u003eFormatting Reports in the Designer\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you open the Report Designer, Docusnap loads the current styles that have been selected in the \u003cem\u003eLayout (CI)\u003c/em\u003e dialog. If you select a company, for which a different design was defined, from the status bar, that design will be loaded.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo assign a style to a component, select the component first. Then, select the associated style from the dropdown via the \u003cem\u003eComponent Style\u003c/em\u003e property on the \u003cem\u003eProperties\u003c/em\u003e tab.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-creation/format-settings/","title":"Format Settings"},{"content":"Listing the Directory Structure The directories of all computers in the domain are stored in the tDirectories table. A folder that does not have a parent directory will be identified by the value -1. For each other folder, the DirectoryID of its parent folder is listed in the Parent column. This enables you to build a hierarchy. This hierarchy will be created in the Report Designer using a hierarchical data band.\nHierarchical Data Band When you add a hierarchical data band, the Data Setup dialog opens. For this report, select the tDirectories table. Then, specify the criteria to build the hierarchy. On the Properties tab, set the Key Data Column property to DirectoryID and the Master Key Data Column property to Parent. The parent value identifies the \u0026ldquo;parent\u0026rdquo; of the top folder. If you do not enter a value for this property, this column, identifying the parent record, must be empty for the top level directory in the hierarchy.\nFor the Indent property, specify the number of millimeters for indenting the next level. If only the first text box should be indented, the Locked property must be set to True for the remaining fields. Using the Headers and Footers properties, you can select the header band and the footer band to be shown before each hierarchy level.\nParent Value In addition to a number, the primary key or a column from another table may be specified as the parent value. However, this value cannot be entered in the Parent Value property on the Properties tab, but rather must be defined as an event. Select the page by clicking the white margin or an area of the page that does not have a band.\nSwitch to the Events properties by clicking the button on the Properties tab. The parent value can be defined using the Begin Render property. When assigning, first specify the name of the hierarchical band and then use .ParentValue to get the parent value. Finally, assign the desired value using the equals sign (=). In this report, it is called DcReportHierarchicalBand1.\nFinally, you can add text boxes for user input.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"listing-the-directory-structure\"\u003eListing the Directory Structure\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe directories of all computers in the domain are stored in the \u003cem\u003etDirectories\u003c/em\u003e table. A folder that does not have a parent directory will be identified by the value -1. For each other folder, the \u003cem\u003eDirectoryID\u003c/em\u003e of its parent folder is listed in the \u003cem\u003eParent\u003c/em\u003e column. This enables you to build a hierarchy. This hierarchy will be created in the Report Designer using a hierarchical data band.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/special-reporting-techniques/hierarchical-reports/","title":"Hierarchical Reports"},{"content":"The packages you configured can be exported and then be imported to another Docusnap database. By importing the configuration, you can export data from the current database without having to create the configuration again. Only Connect V1 packages can be exported or imported via Legacy Export or Legacy Import.\nExport Click the Export Package (Legacy) button on the Connect Legacy area to open the Export Package (Legacy) tab. It lists all configured packages. Tick the checkboxes for all packages to be exported. Then, click the Export button and specify the name and path for the exported file. The Docusnap Connect packages included in this file can subsequently be imported into a different database.\nImport Click the Import Package (Legacy) button to import a file in which Docusnap Connect packages have been previously exported.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe packages you configured can be exported and then be imported to another Docusnap database. By importing the configuration, you can export data from the current database without having to create the configuration again. Only Connect V1 packages can be exported or imported via Legacy Export or Legacy Import.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"export\"\u003eExport\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eExport Package (Legacy)\u003c/em\u003e button on the \u003cem\u003eConnect Legacy\u003c/em\u003e area to open the \u003cem\u003eExport Package (Legacy)\u003c/em\u003e tab. It lists all configured packages. Tick the checkboxes for all packages to be exported. Then, click the \u003cem\u003eExport\u003c/em\u003e button and specify the name and path for the exported file. The Docusnap Connect packages included in this file can subsequently be imported into a different database.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/docusnap-connect/import-export/","title":"Import Export"},{"content":"To use the Docusnap Discovery service at a remote location, this service must be installed on a system locally. The service transmits the inventoried data to a central Docusnap installation.\nThe generated installation package contains two files:\nDocusnapDiscoverySetup.exe RegistrationData.txt By executing the file DocusnapDiscoverySetup.exe, the installation process of Discovery Services is started.\nAfter reading the End User License Agreement, it must be accepted.\nIn the step IP Scanner / recommended drivers the NPCAP driver can be installed. This is a prerequisite for the extended IP scan. The NPCAP driver can also be installed manually, the setup can be found under %ProgramFiles%\\Docusnap Discovery Service\\MSI\\npcap-oem.exe\nIn the next step, under Installation Path, you can decide where Docusnap Discovery Services should be installed.\nBy clicking on the Install button installation starts.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo use the Docusnap Discovery service at a remote location, this service must be installed on a system locally. The service transmits the inventoried data to a central Docusnap installation.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe generated installation package contains two files:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDocusnapDiscoverySetup.exe\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRegistrationData.txt\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBy executing the file \u003cem\u003eDocusnapDiscoverySetup.exe,\u003c/em\u003e the installation process of Discovery Services is started.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfter reading the End User License Agreement, it must be accepted.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the step IP Scanner / recommended drivers the NPCAP driver can be installed. This is a prerequisite for the extended IP scan. The NPCAP driver can also be installed manually, the setup can be found under %ProgramFiles%\\Docusnap Discovery Service\\MSI\\npcap-oem.exe\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/discovery-service/installation/","title":"Installation"},{"content":"Docusnap uses different permission inventory processes for the file system, for SharePoint and for Exchange.\nFile System Before you can start analyzing file system permissions, the systems must have been scanned using the Network Inventory function. Also, users and groups must have been inventoried with of a complete Active Directory scan. If this is the case, you can start the inventory process for NTFS permissions.\nSharePoint Servers To perform a permission analysis for a SharePoint environment, you need to scan the SharePoint servers first. Moreover, a complete Active Directory scan must have been performed in order to obtain the users and groups required for the analysis. Docusnap will determine the SharePoint permissions during the SharePoint inventory scan.\nExchange Docusnap will determine the Exchange permissions during the Exchange inventory scan. In order to perform a permission analysis, an Active Directory scan is required as well.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap uses different permission inventory processes for the file system, for SharePoint and for Exchange.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"file-system\"\u003eFile System\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBefore you can start analyzing \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/file-system/\" title=\"file system\"\u003efile system\u003c/a\u003e permissions, the systems must have been scanned using the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/\" title=\"Network Inventory\"\u003eNetwork Inventory\u003c/a\u003e function. Also, users and groups must have been inventoried with of a complete Active Directory scan. If this is the case, you can start the inventory process for NTFS permissions.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"sharepoint-servers\"\u003eSharePoint Servers\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo perform a permission analysis for a SharePoint environment, you need to scan the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/sharepoint/\" title=\"SharePoint servers\"\u003eSharePoint servers\u003c/a\u003e first. Moreover, a complete Active Directory scan must have been performed in order to obtain the users and groups required for the analysis. Docusnap will determine the SharePoint permissions during the SharePoint inventory scan.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/","title":"Inventory"},{"content":"The layout spacer is used to fill empty space in the layout control. For example, if several lines with 2 columns (each 50%) are used in the layout control. In the last line, however, is only one control, then a spacer can be added at the end to fill the space. So the last Control occupies only 50% of the width and not the whole line.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe layout spacer is used to fill empty space in the layout control. For example, if several lines with 2 columns (each 50%) are used in the layout control. In the last line, however, is only one control, then a spacer can be added at the end to fill the space. So the last Control occupies only 50% of the width and not the whole line.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/layout-spacer/","title":"Layout Spacer"},{"content":"Create new software products or edit existing entries in the License Management module by using the License Management wizard. The wizard for creating a new license can be opened in the Software Product Licensing dialog for software products or on the Licenses ribbon by clicking on the New button. If a software product or a node at a level below it is selected in the tree view, you can click the Edit button in the action bar to open that software product for editing in the License Management wizard. Clicking on the Edit License button opens the wizard at the Licenses step so that you can skip all previous steps if you make small changes to the license.\nDepending on the selected options, the License Management Wizard features a varying number of steps.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eCreate new software products or edit existing entries in the License Management module by using the \u003cem\u003eLicense Management\u003c/em\u003e wizard. The wizard for creating a new license can be opened in the \u003cem\u003eSoftware Product Licensing\u003c/em\u003e dialog for software products or on the \u003cem\u003eLicenses\u003c/em\u003e ribbon by clicking on the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button. If a software product or a node at a level below it is selected in the tree view, you can click the \u003cem\u003eEdit\u003c/em\u003e button in the action bar to open that software product for editing in the \u003cem\u003eLicense Management\u003c/em\u003e wizard. Clicking on the \u003cem\u003eEdit License\u003c/em\u003e button opens the wizard at the Licenses step so that you can skip all previous steps if you make small changes to the license.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/","title":"License Management Wizard"},{"content":"Purchased licenses can be of various types, depending on how they were bought, e.g. volume licenses, package licenses or OEM products. During execution of the License Management wizard, you can select the appropriate purchase type. The license types are only shown for your information. They do not affect the behavior of Docusnap when determining the corresponding license balance.\nDocusnap provides predefined license types. You can add more types, if required. Click the New button to create an additional license type. You can enter any desired name and designations in English and German. To add the new entry to the list, click the Save button.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003ePurchased licenses can be of various types, depending on how they were bought, e.g. volume licenses, package licenses or OEM products. During execution of the License Management wizard, you can select the appropriate purchase type. The license types are only shown for your information. They do not affect the behavior of Docusnap when determining the corresponding license balance.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap provides predefined license types. You can add more types, if required. Click the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button to create an additional license type. You can enter any desired name and designations in English and German. To add the new entry to the list, click the \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/license-management/license-types/","title":"License Types"},{"content":"In this step, you can define the software products, which are at the core of the Docusnap License Management, by specifying their most important attributes. For identification, the product name, the publisher and the version are used, similarly to the information Docusnap collects when automatically inventorying the software on the scanned computers. You must enter the product name here. Details about the publisher and the version are optional, but specifying them is highly recommended as they help to generate meaningful evaluations. However, the values entered here are only used for display in the program and in the evaluations. They do not affect the analysis procedures in any way.\nEvery software product is assigned to a specific metric. This assignment defines the basic settings, such as the type of licensing, for the product. The metric you select here determines whether it will be possible to use keywords and define system assignments or user assignments in later wizard steps. Use the Docusnap Management to add metrics or edit existing ones. The property Detection of Use of the metric indicates if the product recognition is used to find software, or if you have to enter the number of used licenses manually.\nWhether the licensing is an undesired software product is determined by selecting the metric Blocked software products. Undesired software products are displayed under a separate node in the License tree structure, allowing a quick overview. They may later be evaluated separately. This topic will be discussed further in a separate section.\nYou can also determine whether the software is hosted on a terminal server.\nOptionally, you can also select upgrade and downgrade versions of the current software product.\nYou can also specify additional information on the current software product, i.e. details for which not dedicated entry or selection fields are available. As with other descriptive fields, you can enter any desired text here. This can be, for example, special licensing conditions, instructions for use or notes about the licensing method used in the company. This is also the place where you can enter cross-references to other products or information from the software vendor.\nMetrics Docusnap provides different metrics by default. Each metric defines whether the Detection of Use is applied or not.\nFor each metric it is selected which calculation basis should be used. The following calculation bases are available:\nNo Assignment: If no assignment is selected, the number of systems on which the software was found is used for the calculation. No mapping means that no devices or users are assigned to the licenses.\nHosts: The calculation uses the number of systems on which the software was found. In addition, you can define in the wizard step System Assignment on which devices the software should be installed. This assignment is then taken into account in the tree when wanted and unwanted installations are evaluated.\nUsers: In the User Assignment wizard step you can assign the users and groups that use this software. When calculating the license balance, the number of assigned users and the number of users of the assigned groups are used.\nProcessors: The calculation uses the number of processors of the systems on which the software was found. In addition, you can define in the wizard step System Assignment on which devices the software should be installed.\nProcessor Cores: The calculation uses the number of processor cores of the systems on which the software was found. In addition, you can define in the wizard step System Assignment on which devices the software should be installed.\nDevices and Users: Assign Devices and Users License to create licenses for devices and users. Device licenses are used to calculate the license balance, the user licenses are listed additionally.\nThe following metrics are standard in Docusnap:\nStandard License: The standard license is used to count the systems on which the software was found for the license balance. No devices or users can be assigned.\nDevice License: In the case of the Device License, the systems on which the software was found are counted for the license balance. Devices can be assigned in the wizard. If the device license is selected without detection of use, the number of assigned devices is used in the license balance.\nUser License: The number of assigned users is used to calculate the license balance. The result of the license balance is the same, no matter if it is calculated with and without detection of use. When the detection of use is applied, the tree displays on which devices the software was installed.\nProcessor License: The calculation uses the number of processors of the systems on which the software was found. If the processor license is selected without detection of use, the number of processors on the assigned devices is used in the license balance.\nProcessor Core License: The calculation uses the number of processor cores of the systems on which the software was found. If the processor core license is selected without detection of use, the number of processor cores on the assigned devices is used in the license balance.\nBlocked Software Products: The blocked software products are products that should not to be installed. This metric is only available with detection of use to find the devices on which the unwanted software was installed.\nQualified Devices: If the license is a Qualified Devices license, this metric can be assigned. When calculating the license balance, the systems on which the software was found are counted. If the Qualified Devices license is selected without detection of use, the number of assigned devices is used in the license balance.\nQualified Users: If the license is a Qualified Users license, this metric can be assigned. The number of assigned users is used in the calculation of the license balance. If groups are assigned for this license you can only decide weather they should be resolved recursively during the calculation or only direct users of the group are to be considered. The license balance is calculated equal with and without use of detection. When the detection of use is applied, the tree displays on which devices the software was installed.\nNamed Users: If the license is a Named Users license, this metric can be assigned. The number of assigned users is used in the calculation of the license balance. Only users can be assigned to this license. If groups are assigned, you can choose whether the users are to be resolved recursively or only direct users of the group should be added. The license balance is calculated equal with and without detection of use. When the detection of use is applied, the tree displays on which devices the software was installed.\nConcurrent Users: If the license is a Concurrent Users license, this metric can be assigned. When calculating the license balance, the number of licenses specified is also used as the number of licenses used, regardless of how many users are assigned, because it is a concurrent user license. The license balance is calculated equal with and without use of detection. When the detection of use is applied, the tree displays on which devices the software was installed.\nServer: If the metric Server was assigned, the calculation of the license balance only considers device with the type server. If the Server license is selected detection of use, the number of assigned servers is taken into account in the license balance.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn this step, you can define the software products, which are at the core of the Docusnap License Management, by specifying their most important attributes. For identification, the product name, the publisher and the version are used, similarly to the information Docusnap collects when automatically inventorying the software on the scanned computers. You must enter the product name here. Details about the publisher and the version are optional, but specifying them is highly recommended as they help to generate meaningful evaluations. However, the values entered here are only used for display in the program and in the evaluations. They do not affect the analysis procedures in any way.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/licensing/","title":"Licensing"},{"content":"The Licensing page of the Options dialog shows information about the license currently in use. Insert in the Activation Key field the activation key received by e-mail. Click the Activate button, to check the license for validity.\nFor successful activation of Docusnap, it is necessary that the endpoint https://license.docusnap.com is reachable.\nBy using the offline activation it is possible to operate Docusnap in an isolated environment. In the first step it is necessary to enter the activation code. Then another dialog must be opened by clicking on the Offline activation button, by means of which the file (DocusnapActivationRequest.txt) can be created. This file which contains the fingerprint of the isolated system.\nIn a second step, the file DocusnapActivationRequest.txt is to be uploaded to the Website https://www.docusnap.com/en/offline-activation in order to receive the final license file (DocusnapOfflineLicense.txt) for a successful activation of Docusnap.\nAfter selecting the DocusnapOfflineLicense.txt within the configuration wizard, Docusnap can be activated by clicking the Activate button.\nShould modifications to the license setup be required, such as the extension of the number of licensed systems, the complete process of generating an activation request file, uploading it and importing the license file has to be repeated. Accordingly, the same steps are required if, for example, the virtual machine was reset.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eLicensing\u003c/em\u003e page of the Options dialog shows information about the license currently in use. Insert in the Activation Key field the activation key received by e-mail. Click the Activate button, to check the license for validity.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor successful activation of Docusnap, it is necessary that the endpoint \u003ca href=\"https://license.docusnap.com\"\u003ehttps://license.docusnap.com\u003c/a\u003e is reachable.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/settings/options/licensing/docusnap-tools-options-licensing.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Tools-Options-Licensing\" title=\"Docusnap-Tools-Options-Licensing\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBy using the offline activation it is possible to operate Docusnap in an isolated environment. In the first step it is necessary to enter the activation code. Then another dialog must be opened by clicking on the \u003cem\u003eOffline activation\u003c/em\u003e button, by means of which the file (DocusnapActivationRequest.txt) can be created. This file which contains the fingerprint of the isolated system.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/settings/options/licensing/","title":"Licensing"},{"content":"Docusnap offers the possibility to create sites to assign the systems, IT assets and racks to their physical location.\nThe sites can be created in Docusnap in the tree structure or in the infrastructure editor.\nIn the tree strcture the sites are created under the heading Sites for the respective company.\nThe name of the site can be chosen freely. In addition, a description can be given. For each site, a type is selected that determines the type of site, such as city, building, room, etc. If another type is needed, it can be added to the Docusnap Management.\nWhen creating a database or when creating a new company, a site of the type Standard Site is created for each company. This site can be renamed or deleted.\nThe sites can be created hierarchically in order to create rooms in buildings, for example. It is also possible to move the sites by drag \u0026amp; drop.\nWithin the editor, sites are created, edited or deleted in the Sites register. Existing sites can also be moved.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap offers the possibility to create sites to assign the systems, IT assets and racks to their physical location.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe sites can be created in Docusnap in the tree structure or in the infrastructure editor.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the tree strcture the sites are created under the heading Sites for the respective company.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe name of the site can be chosen freely. In addition, a description can be given. For each site, a type is selected that determines the type of site, such as city, building, room, etc. If another type is needed, it can be added to the Docusnap Management.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/manage-sites/","title":"Manage Sites"},{"content":"Using the Management Tools feature, you can embed external programs into Docusnap or start them from there. During the Docusnap installation process, the Remote Desktop Connection has already been established.\nClick the New button to add more management tools. For each tool, you must enter a name as well as an English and a German designation. This designation will be displayed in the currently active language in the context menu or in the Execute options available in the action bar.\nTo specify the program path for the tool, either enter it directly in the text field or click the button to browse for it.\nEnter optional call parameters for the external program in the Parameters field.\nThe following parameters are available:\nParameter Description %Hostname% System Name %IPAddress% IP Address(es) for the System %ShortHostname% Only the System Name %FQDN% System Name and Domain The -v parameter is used for Remote Desktop connections and specifies the computer to connect to.\nPlease note that only tools for which the Active flag has been set will be displayed.\nFor each management tool must be defined for which host types it should be available. In the Host Type list all possible types are listed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eUsing the Management Tools feature, you can embed external programs into Docusnap or start them from there. During the Docusnap installation process, the Remote Desktop Connection has already been established.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button to add more management tools. For each tool, you must enter a name as well as an English and a German designation. This designation will be displayed in the currently active language in the context menu or in the \u003cem\u003eExecute\u003c/em\u003e options available in the action bar.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/management-tools/","title":"Management Tools"},{"content":"Via the navigation the different modules and data explorers can be opened.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eVia the navigation the different modules and data explorers can be opened.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/navigation/","title":"Navigation"},{"content":"When performing a permission analysis, Docusnap scans the permissions users and groups on existing directories.\nUse the Manage NTFS Filter dialog to define which directories should be included or excluded from the analysis.\nIt is possible to specify directories that should be inventoried, to exclude directories that are not needed in the permission analysis, or to define a combination of included and excluded directories.\nThe specification to include directories is only used when permissions for certain directories are of interest, for example who has access to directories which contain client data or project information.\nDefinitions to exclude directories are used to exclude big folder structures like Windows or Program Files.\nThe conditions can be grouped and linked with either AND or OR.\nClick the button to add another row. Click the button to delete the current row.\nOperator In the column Operator you can choose between Contains or Not Contains. Wildcards can be used to specify the selection in greater detail.\nContains: The specified condition must match the directory. Not Contains: The specified condition must not match the directory. And/Or Once several directories are specified, select in the And/Or column whether the conditions should be linked with And or Or. If the terms are linked with And, then all conditions have to apply to the directory. If the conditions are linked with Or, only one of the terms has to match the directory.\nGrouping Use grouping to nest the conditions as needed. For example two terms can be linked with Or and then be extended with And to include another condition. Click the checkbox to select the conditions, then click the button to group the selected entries to one condition. Only conditions listed one below the other can be grouped. The button marks the start of the group. Click the button to revoke the grouping. It is possible to organize the grouping in several levels. Select more than one group and click on the button to group them into one condition.\nClick Save to apply the settings.\nIf the full name of the directory is specified, then the time needed for the inventory of the NTFS permissions can be shortened, since these directories can be skipped during the inventory. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWhen performing a \u003ca href=\"/en/\" title=\"permission analysis\"\u003epermission analysis\u003c/a\u003e, Docusnap scans the permissions users and groups on existing directories.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the \u003cem\u003eManage NTFS Filter\u003c/em\u003e dialog to define which directories should be included or excluded from the analysis.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is possible to specify directories that should be inventoried, to exclude directories that are not needed in the permission analysis, or to define a combination of included and excluded directories.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe specification to include directories is only used when permissions for certain directories are of interest, for example who has access to directories which contain client data or project information.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/file-system/ntfs-filter/","title":"NTFS Filter"},{"content":"As already described in the Basics - Wizards section, Docusnap wizards can be extended as needed. The Additional Tools step can be enabled from General page of the Options - Inventory dialog.\nThe Additional Tools step is available for the following wizards:\nNetwork Scan Windows (AD) Windows (IP) The Additional tools feature can be used during the inventory process in order to scan for additional information about a Windows system. For example, the SystemInfo.exe application provides access to the operating system configuration for a local or remote computer. During the scanning process, Docusnap will start the selected utility and will add the results into the Docusnap database.\nAll of the registered programs will be listed during the Additional Tools step. Checking or unchecking the checkbox will determine which products should be executed in the course of the automated scan process.\nAdditional tools are either executed on the system where the inventory process takes place or directly on the system. When specifying the additional tool, you can select whether the program should be run remotely.\nIf the additional tool is not run remotely, parameters can be specified to retrieve the data of the remote system.\nBefore an additional tool can be used, it must be defined. This can be done from the Additional Tools page in the Docusnap Management.\nOutput After the inventory, the result of the executed additional tool is displayed under the heading Additional Tools in the tree for the respective system.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eAs already described in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/basics-wizards/\" title=\"Basics - Wizards\"\u003eBasics - Wizards\u003c/a\u003e section, Docusnap wizards can be extended as needed. The Additional Tools step can be enabled from General page of the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/options-inventory/\" title=\"Options - Inventory\"\u003eOptions - Inventory\u003c/a\u003e dialog.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Additional Tools step is available for the following wizards:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNetwork Scan\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWindows (AD)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWindows (IP)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/windows/optional-additional-tools/docusnap-network-inventory-additional-tools-graph.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Network Inventory Additional Tools Graph\" title=\"Docusnap Network Inventory Additional Tools Graph\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Additional tools feature can be used during the inventory process in order to scan for additional information about a Windows system. For example, the SystemInfo.exe application provides access to the operating system configuration for a local or remote computer. During the scanning process, Docusnap will start the selected utility and will add the results into the Docusnap database.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/windows/optional-additional-tools/","title":"Optional: Additional Tools"},{"content":"The Export step is only displayed in the Complete Network wizard if the Export Settings checkbox has been enabled on the General page of the Options - Inventory dialog.\nYou can save the current configuration of the wizard by means of the Export step and reload it by selecting the Import step, as needed. This option is particularly helpful if you need to perform inventory scans repeatedly and with the same settings.\nIn order to enable the export of settings, check the Export Settings checkbox. Then, you can click the icon to select the directory where to save the .xml file. In the Import step, you can import this file and thus avoid specifying the same settings again.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eExport\u003c/em\u003e step is only displayed in the \u003cem\u003eComplete Network\u003c/em\u003e wizard if the \u003cem\u003eExport Settings\u003c/em\u003e checkbox has been enabled on the General page of the Options - Inventory dialog.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/basics-wizards/optional-export/docusnap-network-inventory-export-overview.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Network-Inventory-Export-Overview\" title=\"Docusnap-Network-Inventory-Export-Overview\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can save the current configuration of the wizard by means of the \u003cem\u003eExport\u003c/em\u003e step and reload it by selecting the \u003cem\u003eImport\u003c/em\u003e step, as needed. This option is particularly helpful if you need to perform inventory scans repeatedly and with the same settings.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/basics-wizards/optional-export/","title":"Optional: Export"},{"content":"Reports are usually shown under the Reports node in the tree view. Click the desired report to display in on the Reports tab of the main window. A thumbnail can be viewed to the right of the window. If bookmarks have been defined for the report, they will be displayed in the left pane of the window.\nAfter a report has been generated/executed, additional functions for changing the view as well as exporting, printing and editing reports are available in the action bar.\nWhen you click the Report Designer button, the current report will be opened in the Report Designer for editing.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eReports are usually shown under the Reports node in the tree view. Click the desired report to display in on the \u003cem\u003eReports\u003c/em\u003e tab of the main window. A thumbnail can be viewed to the right of the window. If bookmarks have been defined for the report, they will be displayed in the left pane of the window.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/output/docusnap-reporting-reports.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Reporting-Reports\" title=\"Docusnap-Reporting-Reports\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfter a report has been generated/executed, additional functions for changing the view as well as exporting, printing and editing reports are available in the action bar.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/output/","title":"Output"},{"content":"Passwords can be simply and quickly organized, saved and retrieved using the Passwords extension type. Passwords associated with an object in Docusnap will be encrypted and are thus safely stored in the database.\nThe Passwords tab will only be displayed if you created an encryption file for the selected database. The passwords will be stored in encrypted format in the database and can only be read by users who use the same encryption file. If you did not create an encryption file or fail to select it when switching to another database, the Password feature is not accessible. The encryption file can be created during the Startup Wizard procedure or from the Options dialog. You can add a new password for the selected object by clicking the New button. The Title, Password and Password Type fields are mandatory. The remaining fields are optional. To add the new password to the list, click the Save button. To edit a saved password, you select it from the list. Its content will be displayed in the data entry screen.\nClick the icon in the Password field to displays the password as plain text. Clicking the icon again will replace the passwords by asterisks again. Using the icon, you can copy the password to the clipboard. If Password Logging is enabled, Docusnap will keep a log of all users who copied or displayed the password.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003ePasswords can be simply and quickly organized, saved and retrieved using the \u003cem\u003ePasswords\u003c/em\u003e extension type. Passwords associated with an object in Docusnap will be encrypted and are thus safely stored in the database.\u003c/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-success\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    The \u003cem\u003ePasswords\u003c/em\u003e tab will only be displayed if you created an encryption file for the selected database. The passwords will be stored in encrypted format in the database and can only be read by users who use the same encryption file. If you did not create an encryption file or fail to select it when switching to another database, the Password feature is not accessible. The encryption file can be created during the Startup Wizard procedure or from the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/settings/options/database/\" title=\"Options\"\u003eOptions\u003c/a\u003e dialog.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYou can add a new password for the selected object by clicking the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button. The Title, Password and Password Type fields are mandatory. The remaining fields are optional. To add the new password to the list, click the \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e button. To edit a saved password, you select it from the list. Its content will be displayed in the data entry screen.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/passwords/","title":"Passwords"},{"content":"When creating additional information it is possible to assign categories defining which user or user group may access this additional Information.\nYou can create as many categories as desired in the Permission Categories tab. Some categories are predefined. In addition, you can add your own categories.\nTo create a new category, click the New button. For each category, enter a name and a designation (text) in English and German to be displayed with the extensions. For each additional Information type, the categories you created are displayed in the Category drop-down list. Whether or not a category is visible, depends on the role to which it was assigned.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWhen creating additional information it is possible to assign categories defining which user or user group may access this additional Information.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can create as many categories as desired in the \u003cem\u003ePermission Categories\u003c/em\u003e tab. Some categories are predefined. In addition, you can add your own categories.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo create a new category, click the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button. For each category, enter a name and a designation (text) in English and German to be displayed with the extensions. For each additional Information type, the categories you created are displayed in the \u003cem\u003eCategory\u003c/em\u003e drop-down list. Whether or not a category is visible, depends on the role to which it was assigned.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/user-management/permission-category/","title":"Permission Category"},{"content":"To improve performance and to simplify the database for reference lists that contain only a few values (such as Service, StartType, Countries), Docusnap does not use separate tables, but rather reference values.\nEach reference value consists of a filter value, an ID and the text in German and English, respectively.\nDocusnap controls can either refer to a table or to a reference value. This means that the selection list for a combo box can be populated from either a physical database table or a specific type of reference values.\nThe defined reference values are stored in the tSysInitials table and will be checked for possible changes each time you start Docusnap.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo improve performance and to simplify the database for reference lists that contain only a few values (such as Service, StartType, Countries), Docusnap does not use separate tables, but rather reference values.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEach reference value consists of a filter value, an ID and the text in German and English, respectively.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap controls can either refer to a table or to a reference value. This means that the selection list for a combo box can be populated from either a physical database table or a specific type of reference values.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/reference-values/","title":"Reference Values"},{"content":"Change Log The Change Log provides a chronologically organized overview of all modifications made to Docusnap 13.\nClick here for the Change Log Release Notes The Release Notes offer a concise and less technical summary of the updates to Docusnap 13.\n2024 2025-01-09 2024-09-18 2024-07-15 2024-03-20 2023 2023-11-22 ","excerpt":"\u003ch3 id=\"change-log\"\u003eChange Log\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Change Log provides a chronologically organized overview of all modifications made to Docusnap 13.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/changelog/\"\u003eClick here for the Change Log\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"release-notes\"\u003eRelease Notes\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Release Notes offer a concise and less technical summary of the updates to Docusnap 13.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2024\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2025-01-09/\"\u003e2025-01-09\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-09-18/\"\u003e2024-09-18\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-07-15/\"\u003e2024-07-15\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-03-20/\"\u003e2024-03-20\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e2023\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2023-11-22/\"\u003e2023-11-22\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/release-notes/","title":"Release Notes"},{"content":"With Docusnap, you can schedule the creation of reports and have them generated automatically at a later point in time.\nThe scheduled report will be created in the selected format and saved in the Docusnap Server documentation path. The following folder structure will be created in the target directory:\nCompany\\Reports Company\\Domain\\Reports Standard reports that are created via the server Docusnap are loaded from the program directory and do not have to be treated specially. To generate user-customized or newly created reports with the Docusnap Server, they must be provided in either the Team Settings path of the Local Settings path of the Docusnap Servers.\nTo start the report scheduling wizard, generate the corresponding report. Then, click the Schedule as Job button on the action bar to start the wizard.\nFor Permission Analysis reports (Users (Resources), Directory (Resources)) the wizard will be started by clicking the Schedule button in the corresponding dialog.\nThe settings you specify for your report will be saved and applied when the report is executed later.\nIn the first step, you can select the language of your report. All reports are available in English and German. These reports have the same file names and are distinguished only by their prefix, \u0026ldquo;EN_\u0026rdquo; or \u0026ldquo;DE_\u0026rdquo;. If you change the language while creating the job, the report will be created in the newly selected language. So when creating user-defined reports, make sure to provide them in both languages.\nIn case you do not create the report using the predefined directory (documentation path), specify an alternative documentation path. If you specify an alternative documentation path, that path will be used.\nIn the next step, you can select the desired report format.\nThe following formats are available: docx, xlsx, html, odt and pdf.\nAdditionally, you can specify here whether to include a cover page, a header and a footer in your report. If you do not make any changes, the settings from the Layout (CI) dialog will be used.\nIf you tick the E-Mail Distribution checkbox, the report will be sent to the e-mail address(es) specified below. Even if E-Mail Distribution is enabled, the reports will always be saved to the documentation path specified.\nIn the next step, you can define scheduling details. This step determines when and how often the report will be created.\nScheduling will only work if the Docusnap Server service has been set up. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWith Docusnap, you can schedule the creation of reports and have them generated automatically at a later point in time.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe scheduled report will be created in the selected format and saved in the Docusnap Server documentation path. The following folder structure will be created in the target directory:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompany\\Reports\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompany\\Domain\\Reports\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard reports that are created via the server Docusnap are loaded from the program directory and do not have to be treated specially. To generate user-customized or newly created reports with the Docusnap Server, they must be provided in either the Team Settings path of the Local Settings path of the Docusnap Servers.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/advanced-topics/report-scheduling/","title":"Report Scheduling"},{"content":"The Docusnap database stores information that has either been collected by the network inventory scan or manually entered by the user.\nDocusnap provides reports for evaluating and printing this information. For example, you can create a report that contains information about a single system or an overview of a domain. The reports can be exported to documents in various formats (e.g. docx, pdf, html, odt), printed or sent by e-mail.\nReports can be executed from various levels in the tree view. Docusnap provides predefined reports which process existing data from the database.\nYou can select a global report format. These format settings will be used for all companies. You can customize the company logos, colors and fonts for the reports so that they reflect the corporate identity. Report formatting can be customized even further at the company level.\nWhat is more, you can edit existing reports and create new ones.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Docusnap database stores information that has either been collected by the network inventory scan or manually entered by the user.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap provides reports for evaluating and printing this information. For example, you can create a report that contains information about a single system or an overview of a domain. The reports can be exported to documents in various formats (e.g. docx, pdf, html, odt), printed or sent by e-mail.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/","title":"Reporting System"},{"content":"Once you configured the packages, you can export the corresponding data.\nClick the Schedule Connect Package button in the Connect Area to launch the Docusnap Connect wizard. In the first step, select the package to be exported. To do so, click the New button. Then, save your selection and configure the target.\nYou can select as many packages for export as desired. In addition, it is possible to export them to different targets.\nTo open the target configuration dialog, click the Edit button\nConfiguring Docusnap Connect Targets You can export the data to an SQL or MySQL database or save it as an XML, CSV or Excel file from within Docusnap. First, select the target in the Target Selection field. In the Language field, select the language in which you want the references to be written.\nSQL Before you can export the data to an SQL database, the connection to the SQL server and the desired database must be checked. If the specified database does not exist on the SQL server, it may be created. When exporting data to an SQL database, you can specify whether previously exported data should be updated or if you want to delete all data and populate the tables with the new export data. To update the data, the ONC must be included in the package definition.\nXML When exporting data to an XLM file, you must specify its name and path. By enabling the Create Archive Folder checkbox, you can move older files to an archive folder. For the output, you can select a plain format or XML Dataset.\nCSV When exporting data to a CSV file, you must specify its name and path. In the Separate Fields with field, you can specify the field separator. The character you specify in the Text Qualifier field defines all text between two occurrences of this character as a unit. By ticking the Column Name in First Row checkbox, you can specify that the column names will be included in the output.\nWhen you configure your package so that data will be exported to multiple tables, a separate CSV file will be created for each table.\nExcel When exporting data to an Excel file, you must specify its name and path. By enabling the Create Archive Folder checkbox, you can move older files to an archive folder. If during configuration you decide to distribute the data output to multiple tables, a separate worksheet is created in the Excel file for each table. In the formatting you can set which date and number format should be used. It is also possible to select the format setting defined in the options dialog.\nMySQL Before you can export the data to a MySQL database, the connection to the MySQL server and the desired database must be checked. If the specified database does not exist on the MySQL server, you create it in this dialog. When exporting data to a MySQL database, you can specify if previously exported data should be updated or if you want to delete all data and populate the tables with the new export data. To update the data, the ONC must be included in the package definition.\nThe Driver drop-down list lists all installed MySQL ODBC drivers.\nThe MySQL ODBC driver is not supplied with Docusnap and must be installed manually. You can download the driver from the MySQL website. Follow the instructions and make sure you download and install the correct version.\nDocusnap requires the 64-bit version of the MySQL ODBC driver for a 64-bit operating system and the 32-bit version of the MySQL ODBC driver for a 32-bit operating system. There are some known problems with the 3.51 version of the 64-Bit ODBC Driver. Please install version 5.3 or higher.\nSummary The Summary page shows all packages to be exported.\nScheduling By using the Scheduling feature, you can specify that the automatic start of the data export starts at a later time.\nIn order to use this feature, the Docusnap Server component must be configured for this database on a system in the network.\nStatus After the export has started, the dialog will display its progress. To abort the export process, click the Cancel button. All packages flagged as Completed have already been exported. They will not be deleted.\nFinal Report The final report shows which packages could be exported successfully. To exit the wizard, click the Close button.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eOnce you configured the packages, you can export the corresponding data.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eSchedule Connect Package\u003c/em\u003e button in the \u003cem\u003eConnect Area\u003c/em\u003e to launch the \u003cem\u003eDocusnap Connect\u003c/em\u003e wizard. In the first step, select the package to be exported. To do so, click the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button. Then, save your selection and configure the target.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can select as many packages for export as desired. In addition, it is possible to export them to different targets.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/docusnap-connect/schedule-package/","title":"Schedule Package"},{"content":"Single Value A search for DOSPSA03 returns all objects whose index contains this value. Examples are the system name of an object or the description text of an indexed object.\nWildcards In the Docusnap Enterprise search, the symbol * can be used as a wildcard.\nDOSPWS*4 returns all objects that begin with DOSPWS and end with the digit four. Independent of the characters in between.\nDOSPWS14 DOSPWS004 DOSPWS04 If the full-text search is installed on the SQL Server, the search can find a subset even without specifying the wildcard.\nUnlike traditional search methods that require exact matches, full-text search allows you to search for keywords or phrases. It indexes words based on separators such as spaces and punctuation. When searching for system, the entry system 01 is found because system is recognized as a separate word. System01, on the other hand, is treated as a single word and is not found when searching for System.\nFor data where words and numbers often occur together, the use of wildcards can be useful to find all relevant entries. However, the use of wildcards can affect the performance of the full-text search.\nSequence of words and special characters If you are searching for objects that contain spaces or special characters such as *, the search word must be placed in quotes. This also makes it possible to search for whole sentences or partial sentences in descriptions.\nObject Filter With the object filter it is possible to search for several entries of a same object. A search with the object filter is marked with a colon. You can get an overview of the available object filter via the drop-down menu of the search.\nWorkstations: - Output of all workstations\nWorkstations: *NB* - Output of all workstations with the substring NB\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"single-value\"\u003eSingle Value\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA search for DOSPSA03 returns all objects whose index contains this value. Examples are the system name of an object or the description text of an indexed object.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/enterprise-search/search-parameters/docusnap-enterprise-search-single-value.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Enterprise-Search-Single-Value\" title=\"Docusnap-Enterprise-Search-Single-Value\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"wildcards\"\u003eWildcards\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Docusnap Enterprise search, the symbol * can be used as a wildcard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDOSPWS*4 returns all objects that begin with DOSPWS and end with the digit four. Independent of the characters in between.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDOSPWS14\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDOSPWS004\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDOSPWS04\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-success\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    \u003cp\u003eIf the full-text search is installed on the SQL Server, the search can find a subset even without specifying the wildcard.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/enterprise-search/search-parameters/","title":"Search Parameters"},{"content":"The current status of the Server service and the database to which it is currently connected will be displayed when you click the Server Status button in the title bar under the button.\nThe Server Status reflects the current status of the Docusnap Server. You can control the Docusnap Server service by means of the Stop and Restart buttons. If the advanced user management feature is enabled, you will not be able to start and stop services manually (no permission). For this reason, when you attempt to start or stop the Docusnap Server, the Windows User Account Control opens so that you can run the service as an administrator.\nEvery ten seconds, Docusnap checks the status of the Docusnap Server service. This may cause delays in outputting the current status. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe current status of the Server service and the database to which it is currently connected will be displayed when you click the Server Status button in the title bar under the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/docusnap-server/server-status/docusnap-title-bar-discovery.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Discovery\" title=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Discovery\"\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eServer Status\u003c/em\u003e reflects the current status of the Docusnap Server. You can control the Docusnap Server service by means of the Stop and Restart buttons.  If the advanced user management feature is enabled, you will not be able to start and stop services manually (no permission). For this reason, when you attempt to start or stop the Docusnap Server, the Windows User Account Control opens so that you can run the service as an administrator.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/docusnap-server/server-status/","title":"Server Status"},{"content":"The site map is part of the Site Edit function. The Edit Site function is opened in the data grid of the sites via the context menu or by double-clicking on the icon of the site.\nThe site map serves for the visual representation of the site. The site map can also be used to create elements via drag \u0026amp; drop (e.g. racks, air conditioning systems, etc.) and to assign inventoried systems. The created elements can be edited by double-clicking.\nIn the map the context menu can be opened with a right click on the displayed elements. This provides further options, e.g. display wiring map or edit and much more.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe site map is part of the \u003cem\u003eSite Edit\u003c/em\u003e function. The \u003cem\u003eEdit Site\u003c/em\u003e function is opened in the data grid of the sites via the context menu or by double-clicking on the icon of the site.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe site map serves for the visual representation of the site. The site map can also be used to create elements via drag \u0026amp; drop (e.g. racks, air conditioning systems, etc.) and to assign inventoried systems. The created elements can be edited by double-clicking.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/manage-sites/site-map/","title":"Site Map"},{"content":"There is also the possibility to create your own SNMP types - in case the predefined SNMP types are not sufficient.\nOwn SNMP types are created and managed in Inventory - SNMP - SNMP Base Types.\nWith the button New you can give the type a name as well as a German and English text. Furthermore, a value is needed. Here it is recommended to use an own number range, for example starting from 1000. However, this is not mandatory.\nAfterwards a keyword can be assigned to this SNMP type.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThere is also the possibility to create your own SNMP types - in case the predefined SNMP types are not sufficient.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOwn SNMP types are created and managed in \u003cem\u003eInventory - SNMP - SNMP Base Types\u003c/em\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith the button \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e you can give the type a name as well as a German and English text. Furthermore, a value is needed. Here it is recommended to use an own number range, for example starting from 1000. However, this is not mandatory.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/snmp/snmp-base-types/","title":"SNMP Base Types"},{"content":"The Summary page shows an overview of the settings you specified in the individual steps of the wizard.\nFor each step, you can specify to create the respective document or not. For example, if you do not need to create network maps, you can disable their creation in the Network Maps step. With each step, you have the option to skip creation of the current document type. If you have cleared the document creation checkbox of each step in the Create Docu wizard, the Next button will be disabled on the Summary page when you are done with the wizard. In this case, you must either click Back to enable at least one document or exit the wizard by clicking Cancel. This is also true if you open a wizard for a single document type and you clear the corresponding checkbox.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Summary page shows an overview of the settings you specified in the individual steps of the wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor each step, you can specify to create the respective document or not. For example, if you do not need to create network maps, you can disable their creation in the \u003cem\u003eNetwork Maps\u003c/em\u003e step. With each step, you have the option to skip creation of the current document type. If you have cleared the document creation checkbox of each step in the \u003cem\u003eCreate Docu\u003c/em\u003e wizard, the \u003cem\u003eNext\u003c/em\u003e button will be disabled on the Summary page when you are done with the wizard. In this case, you must either click \u003cem\u003eBack\u003c/em\u003e to enable at least one document or exit the wizard by clicking \u003cem\u003eCancel.\u003c/em\u003e This is also true if you open a wizard for a single document type and you clear the corresponding checkbox.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/basic-steps/summary-page/","title":"Summary Page"},{"content":"In the step Summary both the modules to be inventoried as well as detailed information about the individual modules will be listed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn the step \u003cem\u003eSummary\u003c/em\u003e both the modules to be inventoried as well as detailed information about the individual modules will be listed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/summary-page/docusnap-inventory-summary.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Summary\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Summary\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/summary-page/","title":"Summary Page"},{"content":"The purpose of system groups is to document individual portions of a network. When creating the documentation, you can define the groups to be included.\nClicking the System Groups button in the Inventory area opens the dialog for creating system groups and assigning systems to the system groups.\nUse the New System Group button to create new system groups.\nAll existing groups are listed in the top pane and may be selected for editing.\nAfter the group has been saved, or an already saved group has been selected, all systems existing in the selected domain will be displayed in the table on the left of the dialog. In order to find a certain system to be included in the system group, you can filter the list of systems.\nTo add systems to the current system group, select them in the left table and click to move them to the right table. All systems listed in the right table belong to this system group. To remove one or more systems from the group, select them and click the button to move them to the left table.\nSave the changes made to the systems in this group by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialog. To close this dialog, click the Close button.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe purpose of system groups is to document individual portions of a network. When creating the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/\" title=\"documentation\"\u003edocumentation\u003c/a\u003e, you can define the groups to be included.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClicking the \u003cem\u003eSystem Groups\u003c/em\u003e button in the \u003cem\u003eInventory\u003c/em\u003e area opens the dialog for creating system groups and assigning systems to the system groups.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the \u003cem\u003eNew System Group\u003c/em\u003e button to create new system groups.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll existing groups are listed in the top pane and may be selected for editing.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/system-groups/","title":"System Groups"},{"content":"Docusnap \u0026amp; Docusnap Server Host System\nSystem requirements for computers on which Docusnap or Docusnap Server is installed:\nComponent System Requirements OS Architecture 64 Bit Operating Systems Windows 10 Windows 11 (Version \u0026gt;=23H2) Windows Server 2016 Windows Server 2019 Windows Server 2022 RAM 4 GB, recommended 8 GB CPU 2 Cores, recommended 4 Cores Resolution recommended \u0026gt;= 1920 x 1080 pixel .Net Framework min. Version \u0026gt;= 4.8 PowerShell Version Version \u0026gt;= 5.0 Windows Installer Version \u0026gt;= 4.5 Database SQL Server 2014 Local-DB, Express, Standard, BI, Enterprise SQL Server 2016 Local-DB, Express, Standard, Enterprise SQL Server 2017 Local-DB, Express, Standard, Enterprise SQL Server 2019 Local-DB, Express, Standard, Enterprise SQL Server 2022 Local-DB, Express, Standard, Enterprise Microsoft Office Office \u0026gt;= 2016 No external programs are required for generating documents and maps. To use Connect V2, at least SQL Server 2012 or higher is required.\nTo view the documents and maps, programs that support the following file formats can be used:\n.docx .xlsx .html .pdf .odt .vsd Docusnap Discovery Service Host System System requirements for computers on which Docusnap Discovery Service is installed (without Server or Docusnap Client):\nComponent System Requirements OS Architecture 64 Bit Operating Systems Windows 10 Windows 11 (Version \u0026gt;=23H2) Windows Server 2016 Windows Server 2019 Windows Server 2022 RAM min. 2 GB, recommended \u0026gt;= 4 GB CPU \u0026gt;=2 Cores Hard Disk Storage min. 5 GB Resolution min. 1024 x 768 pixel, recommended \u0026gt;= 1920 x 1080 pixel .Net Framework Version \u0026gt;= 4.8 PowerShell Version Version \u0026gt;= 5.0 Windows Installer Version \u0026gt;= 4.5 Browser Requirements (Web \u0026amp; Overview Maps) System requirements for browsers to display Web Docusnap or documentation:\nComponent System Requirements Resolution min. 1024 x 768 pixel, recommended \u0026gt;= 1920 x 1080 pixel Browser The use of chromium-based browsers is recommended. The following browsers have been tested in the latest version: Microsoft Edge, Google Chrome, Opera For documented devices (target systems) Requirements for the to be documented devices:\nComponent System Requirements Operating Systems Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8, 8.1 Windows 10 Windows 11 Windows Server 2000 Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2012 Windows Server 2012 R2 Windows Server 2016 Windows Server 2019 Windows Server 2022 Linux – SuSe Linux – RedHat Linux – Debian Linux – Fedora Linux – Ubuntu Linux – CentOS HP-UX 11i v3 \u0026gt;= Mac OS X IGEL Thin Clients (Windows \u0026amp; Linux, only UMS SQL-Server DB) Network Protocols WMI LDAP (v.2) SNMP Version 1,2,3 SSH (recommended SSH-Ed25519 / AES256-CBC) Exchange Server Exchange Server 2010 (.NET\u0026gt;= 4.8) Exchange Server 2013 (.NET\u0026gt;= 4.8) Exchange Server 2016 (.NET\u0026gt;= 4.8) Exchange Server 2019 (.NET\u0026gt;= 4.8) Microsoft SharePoint SharePoint Server 2007, 2010, 2013, 2016, 2019 SharePoint Services 3.0 SharePoint Foundation SQL Server SQL Server 2000 SQL Server 2005 SQL Server 2008 / R2 SQL Server 2012 / R2 SQL Server 2014 SQL Server 2016 SQL Server 2017 SQL Server 2019 SQL Server 2022 Oracle DBMS Version 10g, 11g, 12c, 18c, 19c, 21c, 23c VMware vCenter 4.0, 4.1, 5.0, 5.1, 5.5, 6.0, 6.5, 6.7, 7.0, 8.0 ESX Server 4.0, 4.1 ESXi 5.0, 5.1, 5.5, 6.0, 6.5, 6.7, 7.0, 8.0 DHCP/DNS \u0026gt;= Windows Server 2012 Permission Analysis Windows and SMB emulationen, supported file systems NTFS, ReFS Exchange 2010, 2013, 2016, 2019 SharePoint Server 2007,2010,2013,2016,2019 Hyper-V only Windows-based systems VEEAM Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication 8, 9, 9.5, 10, 11, 12 Backup Exec Version 2010, 2012, 2014, 15, 16, 20, 21, 22 Citrix XenCenter XenServer 6, 7 Hypervisor 8.2 Microsoft IIS Version 6.0, 7.0, 7.5, 8.0, 8.5, 10 EMC² Isilon Version \u0026lt;= 8.0 ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap \u0026amp; Docusnap Server Host System\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSystem requirements for computers on which Docusnap or Docusnap Server is installed:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003eComponent\u003c/th\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003eSystem Requirements\u003c/th\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eOS Architecture\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e64 Bit\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eOperating Systems\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eWindows 10\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eWindows 11  (Version \u0026gt;=23H2)\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eWindows Server 2016\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eWindows Server 2019\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eWindows Server 2022\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eRAM\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e4 GB, recommended 8 GB\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eCPU\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e2 Cores, recommended 4 Cores\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eResolution\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003erecommended \u0026gt;= 1920 x 1080 pixel\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e.Net Framework\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003emin. Version \u0026gt;= 4.8\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003ePowerShell Version\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eVersion \u0026gt;= 5.0\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eWindows Installer\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eVersion \u0026gt;= 4.5\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eDatabase\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eSQL Server 2014 Local-DB, Express, Standard, BI, Enterprise\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eSQL Server 2016 Local-DB, Express, Standard, Enterprise\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eSQL Server 2017 Local-DB, Express, Standard, Enterprise\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eSQL Server 2019 Local-DB, Express, Standard, Enterprise\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eSQL Server 2022 Local-DB, Express, Standard, Enterprise\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eMicrosoft Office\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eOffice \u0026gt;= 2016\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/tbody\u003e\n\u003c/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo external programs are required for generating documents and maps.\nTo use Connect V2, at least SQL Server 2012 or higher is required.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/system-requirements/","title":"System Requirements"},{"content":"The text you enter can be edited the same way as in other word processors. The buttons on the Insert ribbon allow you to embed additional tables, variables, headers and footers, or hyperlinks.\nVariables It is possible to use variables in your text and place information such as the date and time, page numbers, but also information about the concept such as the author or the creation date in your concept. Clicking the Variable button on the Insert ribbon opens a dialog where you can select the desired variable.\nAlternatively, variables may also be dragged from the Variables window on the right-hand side of the Concept Editor and dropped onto the document.\nHeader and Footer You can also add headers and footers to your concept. Use the Header and Footer buttons to open the additional Header and Footer ribbon.\nClicking the Header button opens a header area in the document where you can enter the desired data. Proceed the same way for creating footers. To format your entries, use the existing ribbons.\nBy enabling the Different First Page option, a different header and/or footer can be created for the first page of the concept. If section breaks are inserted, the headers and footers on the first page of each section can be designed differently.\nIf a concept has multiple sections, you can enable the Link to Previous checkbox to use the header and/or footer from the previous section for the current header and/or footer.\nThe fields in the Position group can be used to change the header or footer position.\nWhen you have completed the header and/or footer, you can close the ribbon by clicking the Close button and continue working in the text area.\nInserting tables It is possible to insert tables into your concept. To do so, click the Table button. The Insert Table dialog opens.\nHere, you can specify the number of rows and columns for the table. Once you have created the table, the Table Tools ribbon becomes available to edit it.\nOther buttons to modify the table such as options to insert columns or rows or to delete columns, rows or the entire table can also be found in the Table Tools ribbon.\nInserting Hyperlinks Click the Hyperlink button to open the Edit Hyperlink dialog. In the uppermost field, enter the text to be linked. On the Website or Local File tab, you can either enter a URL or select a locally saved file. On the Target in this Document tab, you can select a heading from the current concept to be linked.\nAfter creating the hyperlink, you can use the Settings option from the context menu of the hyperlink to open the Edit Hyperlink dialog.\nPicture It is possible to add pictures to your concept. Click the Picture button to open a dialog where you can select a picture file to be inserted into the document. When you select the picture, the additional Picture Tools ribbon displays. To change the properties of a picture, either click the Settings button in the Picture Tools ribbon or select Settings from the context menu of the picture.\nText Box To add a text box, click the Text Box button. A text box is an object which allows you to place and enter text at any desired location in the document. When you select a text box, the additional Text Box ribbon displays. To change the properties of a text box, either click the Settings button in the Text Box ribbon or select Settings from the context menu of the text box.\nQuick Parts Quick parts are stored, reusable contents which can be accessed repeatedly. You can store AutoText in the AutoText gallery by selecting the text to be reused, clicking AutoText, and then clicking Save Selection to AutoText Gallery. This opens the Enter AutoText Title dialog. The name you enter here will be listed in in the AutoText submenu where it is available for selection. The text saved under this name can be re-inserted as desired.\nBy clicking AutoText and then selecting Configure AutoText, you can open the dialog for managing the existing AutoText items.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe text you enter can be edited the same way as in other word processors. The buttons on the \u003cem\u003eInsert\u003c/em\u003e ribbon allow you to embed additional tables, variables, headers and footers, or hyperlinks.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"variables\"\u003eVariables\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is possible to use variables in your text and place information such as the date and time, page numbers, but also information about the concept such as the author or the creation date in your concept. Clicking the Variable button on the \u003cem\u003eInsert\u003c/em\u003e ribbon opens a dialog where you can select the desired variable.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/create-concept/text/","title":"Text"},{"content":"By clicking on the Verify App button, the properties and the granted permissions can be checked. This can be especially helpful if errors occur in the course of the inventory.\nA device code is also created for the verification, which is then entered in the browser. After logging in and confirming the CLI, a dialog opens with information about the Azure App.\nThis dialog shows whether the selected Azure App exists and when the key and certificate will expire. In the lower part of the dialog, all granted permissions are listed. If a permission is missing that Docusnap needs for the inventory, it will be marked with a red X.\nClicking the Refresh button opens the dialog for updating the app.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eBy clicking on the \u003cem\u003eVerify App\u003c/em\u003e button, the properties and the granted permissions can be checked. This can be especially helpful if errors occur in the course of the inventory.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA device code is also created for the verification, which is then entered in the browser. After logging in and confirming the CLI, a dialog opens with information about the Azure App.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/azure-apps-verify/docusnap-inventory-azure-app-verify-dialog.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Azure App Verify Dialog\" title=\"Docusnap Azure App Verify Dialog\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/azure-apps-verify/","title":"Verify Azure Apps"},{"content":"During the creation of the IT framework, a preview of the business structures is created in real-time with the changes in the structure. In the additional window Visualization in the editor the current status is displayed.\nIn the main window below the Maps caption, the View Map is displayed. The following options are available in the action bar.\nExport: Use the button to export the map as vdx, png, html or svg file. Reset: The contents of the map can be changed by drag \u0026amp; drop, clicking the button resets the original state. Layout: For the IT-Framwork map there is only the specified layout. Filter Path: The Filter Path button is used to display a specific path between two elements. All other elements are hidden. The first element to be selected is the element which is the predecessor, then the second element must be selected by pressing Ctrl + click. Finally, by clicking on the button Filter Path only these elements and all elements that are on this path are displayed. Highlight Path: The Highlight Path button highlights the path between two selected elements in green. Straight Connections: By activating the check box Straight Connections the arrows between the elements are straightened. Remove Empty Layers: Selecting the Remove Empty Layers check box hides all layers to which no elements have been added. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDuring the creation of the IT framework, a preview of the business structures is created in real-time with the changes in the structure. In the additional window Visualization in the editor the current status is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the main window below the \u003cem\u003eMaps\u003c/em\u003e caption, the \u003cem\u003eView Map\u003c/em\u003e is displayed. The following options are available in the action bar.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExport: Use the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/business-structures/visualization/docusnap-export-icon.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Export-Icon\" title=\"Docusnap-Export-Icon\"\u003e button to export the map as vdx, png, html or svg file.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReset: The contents of the map can be changed by drag \u0026amp; drop, clicking the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/business-structures/visualization/docusnap-reset-icon.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Reset-Icon\" title=\"Docusnap-Reset-Icon\"\u003e button resets the original state.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLayout: For the IT-Framwork map there is only the specified layout.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFilter Path: The \u003cem\u003eFilter Path\u003c/em\u003e button is used to display a specific path between two elements.  All other elements are hidden. The first element to be selected is the element which is the predecessor, then the second element must be selected by pressing Ctrl + click. Finally, by clicking on the button Filter Path only these elements and all elements that are on this path are displayed.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHighlight Path: The \u003cem\u003eHighlight Path\u003c/em\u003e button highlights the path between two selected elements in green.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStraight Connections: By activating the check box \u003cem\u003eStraight Connections\u003c/em\u003e the arrows between the elements are straightened.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRemove Empty Layers: Selecting the \u003cem\u003eRemove Empty Layers\u003c/em\u003e check box hides all layers to which no elements have been added.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/business-structures/visualization/docusnap-business-structures-map.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Business-Structures-Map\" title=\"Docusnap-Business-Structures-Map\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/business-structures/visualization/","title":"Visualization"},{"content":"For the automated scanning of Windows systems, a variety of methods can be used in Docusnap. While the core directory service, i.e. the Active Directory Service must be accessible when scanning Windows systems (AD) and offline systems, you can use the IP Segment inventory process to scan an IP range or a single system.\nThese are the differences:\nWindows (AD) When you click either the Network Scan or the Windows (AD) button, Docusnap will search the Active Directory for active computer accounts. The actual inventory process for individual systems will be based on the results of this search.\nIf the Active Directory system has a larger number of active computer accounts than have been licensed in Docusnap, a corresponding error message will be displayed in the Authentication step. Windows (IP) Click the Windows (IP) button to scan Windows systems which are not part of the Active Directory, for example, workgroup computers. Based on the specified IP ranges, IP addresses or computer names, Docusnap attempts to identify Windows systems in the network and to inventory them in subsequent steps.\nOffline Systems Docusnap will assign the Offline status to systems that were previously unreachable with the Windows Inventory but are in the Active Directory. These systems can be inventoried explicitly in course of another Windows Inventory.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eFor the automated scanning of \u003cem\u003eWindows systems\u003c/em\u003e, a variety of methods can be used in Docusnap. While the core directory service, i.e. the \u003cem\u003eActive Directory Service\u003c/em\u003e must be accessible when scanning \u003cem\u003eWindows systems (AD)\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eoffline systems\u003c/em\u003e, you can use the IP Segment inventory process to scan an IP range or a single system.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/windows/docusnap-windows-inventory-graph.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Windows Inventory Graph\" title=\"Docusnap Windows Inventory Graph\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese are the differences:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"windows-ad\"\u003eWindows (AD)\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you click either the \u003cem\u003eNetwork Scan\u003c/em\u003e or the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/windows/windows-ad/\" title=\"Windows (AD)\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eWindows (AD)\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/a\u003e button, Docusnap will search the Active Directory for active computer accounts. The actual inventory process for individual systems will be based on the results of this search.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/windows/","title":"Windows"},{"content":"Docusnap offers one module for inventorying DFS systems:\nDiscovery-DFS.exe (supports standalone DFS as well as all domain-integrated versions) For a complete capture of all relevant data during the DFS inventory, it is necessary to execute the Discovery-DFS.exe module with local administrator rights and, depending on the data to be captured, with additional permissions for Active Directory and on the DFS folder targets. The Discovery-DFS.exe module can be executed either by double-clicking or via the command line of the DFS server. Once the inventory is completed, a DSI file containing all the information will be created in the folder where the Discovery-DFS.exe is located.\nC:\\Discovery-DFS.exe Subsequently, this file can be imported into Docusnap through the File Import wizard.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap offers one module for inventorying DFS systems:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-DFS.exe (supports standalone DFS as well as all domain-integrated versions)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-primary\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    For a complete capture of all relevant data during the DFS inventory, it is necessary to execute the Discovery-DFS.exe module with local administrator rights and, depending on the data to be captured, with additional permissions for Active Directory and on the DFS folder targets.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Discovery-DFS.exe module can be executed either by double-clicking or via the command line of the DFS server. Once the inventory is completed, a DSI file containing all the information will be created in the folder where the Discovery-DFS.exe is located.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/dfs/","title":"DFS"},{"content":"Docusnap offers two modules for inventorying DHCP systems:\nDiscovery-DHCP.exe (This module is always up to date and should be preferred.) Discovery-DHCP-Legacy.exe (corresponds to the status of Docusnap 12 and will not be further developed) For a complete capture of all relevant data during DHCP inventory, it is necessary to execute the Discovery-DHCP.exe module with local administrator rights and, depending on the data to be captured, with additional permissions for Active Directory. The Discovery-DHCP.exe module can be executed either by double-clicking or via the command line of the DHCP server. Once the inventory is completed, a DSI file, containing all the information, will be created in the folder where the Discovery-DHCP.exe is located.\nC:\\Discovery-DHCP.exe The created files can then be imported with the File Import.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap offers two modules for inventorying DHCP systems:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-DHCP.exe (This module is always up to date and should be preferred.)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-DHCP-Legacy.exe (corresponds to the status of Docusnap 12 and will not be further developed)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-primary\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    For a complete capture of all relevant data during DHCP inventory, it is necessary to execute the Discovery-DHCP.exe module with local administrator rights and, depending on the data to be captured, with additional permissions for Active Directory.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Discovery-DHCP.exe module can be executed either by double-clicking or via the command line of the DHCP server. Once the inventory is completed, a DSI file, containing all the information, will be created in the folder where the Discovery-DHCP.exe is located.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/dhcp/","title":"DHCP"},{"content":"Docusnap offers two modules for inventorying DNS systems:\nDiscovery-DNS.exe (This module is always up to date and should be preferred.) Discovery-DNS-Legacy.exe (corresponds to the status of Docusnap 12 and will not be further developed) For a complete capture of all relevant data during DNS inventory, it is necessary to execute the Discovery-DNS.exe module with local administrator rights and, depending on the data to be captured, with additional permissions for Active Directory. The Discovery-DNS.exe module can be executed either by double-clicking or via the command line of the DNS server. Once the inventory is completed, a DSI file, containing all the information, will be created in the folder where the Discovery-DNS.exe is located.\nC:\\Discovery-DNS.exe The created files can then be imported with the File Import.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap offers two modules for inventorying DNS systems:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-DNS.exe (This module is always up to date and should be preferred.)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-DNS-Legacy.exe (corresponds to the status of Docusnap 12 and will not be further developed)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-primary\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    For a complete capture of all relevant data during DNS inventory, it is necessary to execute the Discovery-DNS.exe module with local administrator rights and, depending on the data to be captured, with additional permissions for Active Directory.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Discovery-DNS.exe module can be executed either by double-clicking or via the command line of the DNS server. Once the inventory is completed, a DSI file, containing all the information, will be created in the folder where the Discovery-DNS.exe is located.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/dns/","title":"DNS"},{"content":"Two different scan modules are available for Azure Inventory: Azure Service and Azure Service Legacy. Both modules use the same Azure App and collect identical data. The main difference is that the results of the Azure Service inventory are presented in the Cloud Infrastructure section, while the results of the Azure Service Legacy inventory, to ensure compatibility with older Docusnap versions, are stored in the Infrastructure section.\nThe Azure Inventory Wizard is opened via the Azure Service or Azure Service - Legacy button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps) the Azure step is displayed.\nWith step Azure an Azure App must be selected for the inventory.\nIf no Azure App has been created yet or another one is needed, the Manage Azure App dialog can be opened via the Register New App button.\nVia the button Load Subscriptions all existing subscriptions are displayed. They can be deselected if required. It should be noted that the Azure App must be authorized for all selected subscriptions .\nOnce a valid Azure App has been selected, the Next button is activated and the inventory can be started.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTwo different scan modules are available for Azure Inventory: \u003cem\u003eAzure Service\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eAzure Service Legacy\u003c/em\u003e. Both modules use the same \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/azure-apps-manage/\" title=\"Azure App\"\u003eAzure App\u003c/a\u003e and collect identical data. The main difference is that the results of the \u003cem\u003eAzure Service\u003c/em\u003e inventory are presented in the \u003cem\u003eCloud Infrastructure\u003c/em\u003e section, while the results of the \u003cem\u003eAzure Service Legacy\u003c/em\u003e inventory, to ensure compatibility with older Docusnap versions, are stored in the \u003cem\u003eInfrastructure\u003c/em\u003e section.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Azure Inventory Wizard is opened via the \u003cem\u003eAzure Service\u003c/em\u003e or \u003cem\u003eAzure Service - Legacy\u003c/em\u003e button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e) the \u003cem\u003eAzure\u003c/em\u003e step is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure/","title":"Azure"},{"content":"Docusnap offers one module for inventorying Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication installations:\nDiscovery-VeeamBR.exe (from version 11) For a complete capture of all relevant data during the Veeam B\u0026amp;R inventory, it is necessary to execute the Discovery-VeeamBR.exe module with local administrator rights. Additionally, the executing user should be a member of the Veeam Backup Administrators role. The Discovery-VeeamBR.exe module can be executed either by double-clicking or via the command line of the Veeam B\u0026amp;R server. Once the inventory is completed, a DSI file containing all the information will be created in the folder where the Discovery-VeeamBR.exe is located.\nC:\\Discovery-VeeamBR.exe The scope of the backup history can be configured via the module-specific option.\nVeeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication specific Options: -MaxHistoryInDays \u0026lt;count\u0026gt; Description: Determines the number of days of backup history to retrieve. If not specified, 42 days of history are retrieved. The maximum value allowed is 999 days. Example: C:\\Discovery-VeeamBR.exe -MaxHistoryInDays 60 Subsequently, this file can be imported into Docusnap through the File Import wizard.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap offers one module for inventorying Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication installations:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-VeeamBR.exe (from version 11)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-primary\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    For a complete capture of all relevant data during the Veeam B\u0026amp;R inventory, it is necessary to execute the Discovery-VeeamBR.exe module with local administrator rights. Additionally, the executing user should be a member of the \u003cem\u003eVeeam Backup Administrators\u003c/em\u003e role.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Discovery-VeeamBR.exe module can be executed either by double-clicking or via the command line of the Veeam B\u0026amp;R server. Once the inventory is completed, a DSI file containing all the information will be created in the folder where the Discovery-VeeamBR.exe is located.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/veeam/","title":"Veeam B\u0026R"},{"content":"Docusnap offers one module for inventorying Microsoft Exchange:\nDiscovery-Exchange.exe (from version 2013 onwards) To ensure that the Exchange inventory contains all recordable data, it is necessary to execute the Discovery-Exchange.exe module with local administrator rights and, depending on the data to be collected, with additional authorizations for Active Directory and Exchange. The Discovery-Exchange.exe module can be executed either by double-clicking or through the command line of the Exchange server. After the inventorying is completed, a DSI file is created in the folder where the Discovery-Exchange.exe is located, which contains all the information.\nC:\\Discovery-Exchange.exe Optionally, the Exchange Inventory Option Scope determines which information should be inventoried. A detailed description, including examples, is available in the console help.\nExchange specific Options: -dc \u0026lt;domaincontroller\u0026gt; Description: Defines the domain controller to be used for Active Directory queries during the scan. Example: C:\\Discovery-Exchange.exe -dc dospdc03.docusnapsports.com -threads \u0026lt;count\u0026gt; Description: Specifies the number of concurrent PowerShell threads allowed during execution. Valid options are 1 to 4, with the default set to 4. Exchange Inventory Options Scope: To modify Exchange scan defaults, explicitly set each parameter to \u0026#39;true\u0026#39; or \u0026#39;false\u0026#39;. Failure to specify these may lead to default values being used, potentially resulting in unexpected inventory results. -dg: Retrieves distribution group data, on by default -ext: Off by default, retrieves permissions for all objects in \u0026#39;Recipient Configuration\u0026#39; -mct: Retrieves mail contact information, on by default -misc: Retrieves additional config data like certificates and OWA, on by default -mb: Retrieves information on all mailbox types, on by default -mbf: Retrieves mailbox folders and their access permissions, on by default -mbp: Retrieves mailbox permissions, on by default -mbsp: Retrieves mailbox delegation permissions, on by default -pf: Retrieves public folder information, on by default -pfp: Retrieves public folder structure and access permissions, on by default Example of executing with default settings: C:\\Discovery-Exchange.exe -dg true -ext false -mct true -misc true -mb true -mbf true -mbp true -mbsp true -pf true -pfp true Example of executing without inventorying Mailbox and Public Folder permissions: C:\\Discovery-Exchange.exe -dg true -ext false -mct true -misc true -mb true -mbf false -mbp false -mbsp false -pf true -pfp false Subsequently, this file can be imported into Docusnap through the File Import wizard.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap offers one module for inventorying Microsoft Exchange:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-Exchange.exe (from version 2013 onwards)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-primary\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    To ensure that the Exchange inventory contains all recordable data, it is necessary to execute the Discovery-Exchange.exe module with local administrator rights and, depending on the data to be collected, with additional authorizations for Active Directory and Exchange.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Discovery-Exchange.exe module can be executed either by double-clicking or through the command line of the Exchange server. After the inventorying is completed, a DSI file is created in the folder where the Discovery-Exchange.exe is located, which contains all the information.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/exchange/","title":"Exchange"},{"content":"Docusnap offers three modules for inventorying Microsoft SharePoint:\nDiscovery-SharePoint.exe (for SharePoint from version 2013) Discovery-SharePoint-2010.exe (for SharePoint version 2010) Discovery-SharePoint-2007.exe (for SharePoint version 2007) For a complete capture of all relevant data during SharePoint inventory, it is necessary to execute the Discovery-SharePoint.exe module with local administrator rights and, depending on the data to be captured, with additional permissions for Active Directory and SharePoint (FarmAdmin). The Discovery-SharePoint.exe module can be executed either by double-clicking or via the command line of the SharePoint server. Once the inventory is completed, a DSI file containing all the information will be created in the folder where the Discovery-SharePoint.exe is located.\nC:\\Discovery-SharePoint.exe Optionally, SharePoint-specific options determine which information should be included. A detailed description, including examples, is available in the console help.\nSharePoint specific Options: -jh \u0026lt;count\u0026gt; Description: Retrieves the specified number of most recent SharePoint Job History entries. If not defined, the last 10 entries are included. Example: C:\\Discovery-SharePoint.exe -jh 5 -UrlIncludeList \u0026lt;URL,URL\u0026gt; Description: Retrieves only the Site Collections specified in the list. If undefined, retrieves all Site Collections. Example: C:\\Discovery-SharePoint.exe-UrlIncludeList http://SP01/sites/SA,http://SP01/sites/SB -UrlExcludeList \u0026lt;URL,URL\u0026gt; Description: Excludes the specified Site Collections from the inventory. If undefined, no Site Collections are excluded. Example: c:\\Discovery-SharePoint.exe -UrlExcludeList http://SP1/sites/SA,http://SP01/sites/SB Subsequently, this file can be imported into Docusnap through the File Import wizard.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap offers three modules for inventorying Microsoft SharePoint:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-SharePoint.exe (for SharePoint from version 2013)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-SharePoint-2010.exe (for SharePoint version 2010)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDiscovery-SharePoint-2007.exe (for SharePoint version 2007)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-primary\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    For a complete capture of all relevant data during SharePoint inventory, it is necessary to execute the Discovery-SharePoint.exe module with local administrator rights and, depending on the data to be captured, with additional permissions for Active Directory and SharePoint (FarmAdmin).\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Discovery-SharePoint.exe module can be executed either by double-clicking or via the command line of the SharePoint server. Once the inventory is completed, a DSI file containing all the information will be created in the folder where the Discovery-SharePoint.exe is located.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/sharepoint/","title":"SharePoint"},{"content":"Additional information is automatically added to the index. Which values are included in the index is predefined, and user defined columns cannot be added.\nIf the search for additional information is successful, the linked objects are also found. If a search is made for a comment Installation instruction, the systems to which the comment is assigned are also displayed.\nPasswords To find additional information passwords also with the Enterprise Search, they must be explicitly activated in the Enterprise Search settings.\nThe password fields are encrypted in the database by the Docusnap encryption file. If the additional information Passwords is added to the index, its fields are stored in plain text in the index.\nThe password itself is not affected by this and cannot be found with the search.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eAdditional information is automatically added to the index. Which values are included in the index is predefined, and user defined columns cannot be added.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the search for additional information is successful, the linked objects are also found. If a search is made for a comment Installation instruction, the systems to which the comment is assigned are also displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"passwords\"\u003ePasswords\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo find additional information passwords also with the Enterprise Search, they must be explicitly activated in the Enterprise Search settings.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/enterprise-search/additional-information/","title":"Additional Information"},{"content":"The ADDS Synchronization feature compares the inventoried systems with the systems existing in the Active Directory. When this process has completed, Docusnap will display the computers that are no longer present in the Active Directory system, but still listed in the Docusnap database. From that dialog, you can determine whether these computers are to be deleted from the Docusnap database as well or not. Docusnap will not modify the Active Directory system.\nTo start the wizard, click the ADDS Synchronization button in the Inventory area.\nCompany Selection In the first step, select the company where the domain to be synchronized is located. As this process consists in comparing data from an existing company, you cannot create a new company from the ADDS Synchronization wizard.\nAuthentication In the second step, you need to select the domain to be synchronized. Select the desired domain in the Domain combo box. Then, enter valid credentials for this domain in the User Name and Password fields. Next, you need to check whether the user is a member of the domain and the password is correct by clicking the Check Credentials button. Only if this check is OK, the Next button will be available. If you do not specify a user name, the authentication will be performed based on the current user\u0026rsquo;s login data. If you enable the Save Username and Password checkbox, this information will be stored for the next synchronization process.\nWindows Systems When you click the Start Search button, Docusnap will compare the inventoried Windows systems with the Active Directory system. To abort this process, click the Cancel button.\nWhen the search is complete, all Windows systems that have been scanned by Docusnap before, but no longer exist in the Active Directory system, will be displayed in the table. If the checkbox next to a system is enabled, this system will be deleted from the Docusnap database in the next step. By default, all systems are selected.\nThe table can be filtered using the Filter functions. For more information on filtering, see the Filters section.\nUnder Select, you can either select or deselect all devices.\nAll systems of a domain that have been scanned during an IP Segment inventory process or that belong to a system group will also be deleted.\nFor this reason, it is recommended to create a separate domain for system groups if you do not want to delete them.\nSummary When you click the Next button, the next step displays where you can see all systems marked for deletion.\nScheduling Through Scheduling, you can specify that the ADDS Synchronization routine will start automatically at a later point in time. In the Scheduling step, you can define whether the ADDS Synchronization routine will be a one-time or a recurring event. Please note, however, that this feature can only be used if the Docusnap Server is installed on a system in the network.\nStatus Once you started deleting the devices, the dialog will display the progress of the deletion process. To abort this process, click the Cancel button. All systems with the Completed status have been deleted from the database. Systems for which the deletion process has not been completed yet remain in the database.\nFinal Report On the Report page, you can see which computers have been deleted successfully. To close the wizard, click the Close button.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe ADDS Synchronization feature compares the inventoried systems with the systems existing in the Active Directory. When this process has completed, Docusnap will display the computers that are no longer present in the Active Directory system, but still listed in the Docusnap database. From that dialog, you can determine whether these computers are to be deleted from the Docusnap database as well or not. Docusnap will not modify the Active Directory system.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/ads-comparison/","title":"ADDS Comparison"},{"content":"Hierarchies In Docusnap, you can represent parent-child relationships between the tables. The dependencies between the tables can be implemented using relations or parameters. The parameters are explained in the [Special Reporting Techniques]( \u0026ldquo;Special Reporting Techniques\u0026rdquo;) section.\nFor the example below, an additional data band must be added and the data source tDomains must be assigned.\nThen, create a text box for the domain name output. For the title, always use a single text box. In the Text Editor, enter \u0026ldquo;Domain\u0026rdquo; and add the DomainName column. The style to be used is Title.\nHierarchies: Relations When you create a report, you will define all required relations. For a child data band, you need to select the relation and the parent data band as the master component.\nIn this report, the computers will be assigned to the domains. In the generated report, the first domain is shown in the first place, followed by all associated computers. Then, the next domain is shown with its associated computers, and so forth. In order to obtain this structure, a relation must be defined between the two data bands. Relations that exist in the database are also loaded into the Report Designer. Relations that do not exist can be created now. Relations always consist of a master component and a detail component. The detail component is the band that contains the data that will be associated. In this example, the data band with the computers will be used as the detail component. The master component is the data band that contains the domains. Relations will always be associated to the detail component. For this reason, enter the relation for the tHosts table. The icon indicates a relation. The name of the relation is composed of the name of the table for the master component and the name of the table for the detail component. In this report, the relation is named tDomainstHosts.\nWhen you double-click the computers data band, the Data Setup dialog opens. There, you can select the desired relation. Click the Relation button to display all relations defined for this table. In this case, only one relation is listed: the relation with the tDomains table. Select the tDomainstHosts relation. Double-clicking a relation will select it and close the dialog. If you only click the relation once to select it, the dialog remains open. To make additional settings, select the relation using a single click.\nNext, select the master component. The master component indicates the band on which this relation depends. The relation only represents the connection between the tables. If a report includes multiple bands, make sure to select the appropriate name. The name of the data band is displayed on the left in its blue title bar. In this report, there is only one other data band. Select this data band. Click the OK button to apply the relation and the master component to the detail component.\nShowing Types in Multiple Languages Since Docusnap uses two languages, all types are stored in English and German. In the database structure, two additional tables are used for this purpose besides the table that contains the actual data: The Type table contains the name and the TypeText table contains the name in English and German.\nFor each report, Docusnap creates the LanguageID variable. This variable contains either 0 for German or 1 for English, depending on the language that has been selected for this report. By means of this variable, the types can be shown in the desired language.\nIn order to show the type text, the SQL statement for the data source needs to be modified. Example of the new SQL statement based on the Host type:\nSelect tHosts.*, TypeText as Type from tHosts, tHostTypes, tHostTypeText where tHosts.HostTypeID = tHostTypes.TypeID and tHostTypes.TypeID = tHostTypeText.TypeID and LanguageID = {LanguageID} To add the additional column, click the Retrieve Columns button. Then, copy the text boxes for the text and the heading. Finally, you can edit the heading and the selected column, if required. ","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"hierarchies\"\u003eHierarchies\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn Docusnap, you can represent parent-child relationships between the tables. The dependencies between the tables can be implemented using relations or parameters. The parameters are explained in the [Special Reporting Techniques]( \u0026ldquo;Special Reporting Techniques\u0026rdquo;) section.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the example below, an additional data band must be added and the data source tDomains must be assigned.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThen, create a text box for the domain name output. For the title, always use a single text box. In the Text Editor, enter \u0026ldquo;Domain\u0026rdquo; and add the \u003cem\u003eDomainName\u003c/em\u003e column. The style to be used is \u003cem\u003eTitle.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-creation/advanced-structures/","title":"Advanced Structures"},{"content":"For the analysis of permissions, three functions are available.\nPermission Analysis From the IT Security tab, you can see the current state of permissions to a folder, SharePoint server, or to Exchange mailboxes, mailbox folders, and public folders.\nAnalysis Diagrams These diagrams illustrate which criteria were used to assign an effective permission to the selected user or group.\nDetermining the Effective Permissions The goal of each permission analysis is to show the effective permissions to a certain directory or for a certain user.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eFor the analysis of permissions, three functions are available.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"permission-analysis\"\u003ePermission Analysis\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFrom the IT Security tab, you can see the current state of permissions to a folder, SharePoint server, or to Exchange mailboxes, mailbox folders, and public folders.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"analysis-diagrams\"\u003eAnalysis Diagrams\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese diagrams illustrate which criteria were used to assign an effective permission to the selected user or group.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"determining-the-effective-permissions\"\u003eDetermining the Effective Permissions\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe goal of each permission analysis is to show the effective permissions to a certain directory or for a certain user.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/analysis/","title":"Analysis"},{"content":"In Docusnap, you can schedule various jobs and tasks (inventory, documentation, etc.) and have the Docusnap Server execute them automatically at a later time.\nThe following tasks can be performed automatically by the Docusnap Server:\nInventory All inventory modules can be executed automatically.\nXML Import By executing DocusnapScript.exe you can save the information from a particular system in an XML file. The location for these files can be defined by means of various parameters in the DocusnapScript.exe file. For example, you can use the logon script to define the share to be used for saving these files when DocusnapScript.exe is executed. These files can be automatically retrieved and imported through the automation of this process. For details on this topic, refer to the Importing Scripts section.\nIT Security The inventory of NTFS permissions and the creation of the associated documentation can be scheduled.\nDocumentation Datasheets, overviews and maps can be created automatically in the documentation process.\nIT Concepts The server also allows the time-controlled creation of IT concepts.\nNotifications The Notification feature sends an e-mail, for example, when a license or contract expires.\nReports It is possible to schedule the creation of reports and have them created at any desired time. The reports will be exported in the selected format.\nDocusnap Connect It is also possible to schedule the export of data to SQL databases, XML files, or CSV files.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn Docusnap, you can schedule various jobs and tasks (inventory, documentation, etc.) and have the Docusnap Server execute them automatically at a later time.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe following tasks can be performed automatically by the Docusnap Server:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"inventory\"\u003eInventory\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll inventory modules can be executed automatically.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"xml-import\"\u003eXML Import\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBy executing \u003cem\u003eDocusnapScript.exe\u003c/em\u003e you can save the information from a particular system in an XML file. The location for these files can be defined by means of various parameters in the \u003cem\u003eDocusnapScript.exe\u003c/em\u003e file. For example, you can use the logon script to define the share to be used for saving these files when DocusnapScript.exe is executed. These files can be automatically retrieved and imported through the automation of this process. For details on this topic, refer to the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/import-scripts/\" title=\"Importing Scripts\"\u003eImporting Scripts\u003c/a\u003e section.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/docusnap-server/automation/","title":"Automation"},{"content":"After installation Docusnap Discovery Service Configuration dialog opens.\nIf a package for the installation is created when creating the Discovery Service in Docusnap and the installation of the Discovery Service uses this package, then the registration URL and the pin are already filled. In the RegistrationData.txt the required information (URL and pin) are stored.\nAfter entering the required information for URL and PIN the Docusnap Discovery Service can be registered on the central Docusnap Server. By clicking the button Register, the registration is performed.\nOnce registration has been successfully completed, this Discovery Service can be used by the central Docusnap installation.\nGeneral The URL and other information of the Discovery Service are displayed in the Server Connection group. Under Connection Test can be checked in advance whether a link between the Docusnap Discovery Service and the central Docusnap installation is possible.\nThe service can be started and stopped under Discovery Windows Service.\nSettings Under Proxy the settings for the proxy can be defined, that are needed for the inventory. It is also possible to specify a user at account login that will be used to run the service. Checking the Advanced Logging checkbox will enable logging for the discovery service.\nWhen updating the Docusnap application, it automatically attempts to update all active Docusnap Discovery Service installations as well. This mechanism is also used to distribute the latest version of selected files from the Docusnap application directory, such as DocusnapScript.exe, to accessible DDS systems.\nIf a path has been configured in the Directory text field, the distribution is also made to this directory. In order for this to work without problems, the appropriate access rights must be available and any existing files must not be blocked by the operating system at the time of the update so that the update is successful.\nLog By clicking on the Log button, the logging file can be opened and saved. This file can then be sent to support.\nRegister Clicking the Register button opens the Discovery Registration dialog. The URL and PIN that were created in Docusnap must be entered in this dialog to register the new discovery service.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eAfter installation Docusnap Discovery Service Configuration dialog opens.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf a package for the installation is created when creating the Discovery Service in Docusnap and the installation of the Discovery Service uses this package, then the registration URL and the pin are already filled. In the RegistrationData.txt the required information (URL and pin) are stored.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/discovery-service/configure-connection/docusnap-discovery-service-register.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Discovery-Service-Register\" title=\"Docusnap-Discovery-Service-Register\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfter entering the required information for URL and PIN the Docusnap Discovery Service can be registered on the central Docusnap Server. By clicking the button Register, the registration is performed.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/discovery-service/configure-connection/","title":"Configure Connection"},{"content":"Docusnap provides the Contracts extension type which allows you to store contracts and contractual data for individual objects. This can be, for example, the maintenance agreement for a server. If you entered an expiration date for this maintenance agreement, you can choose to be notified about its expiration.\nClick the New button to add a new contract. The Title, Start Date and Contract Type fields are mandatory and thus must be filled in. The End Date field is only needed if the contract has a limited duration.\nYou can set the Docusnap server to send notifications when the contract has expired. To edit a saved contract, select it from the list. Its content will be displayed and can be edited. Click the button to save the changes.\nThe contracts can be created recursively. In the contract hierarchy, the parent contract can be selected.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap provides the \u003cem\u003eContracts\u003c/em\u003e extension type which allows you to store contracts and contractual data for individual objects. This can be, for example, the maintenance agreement for a server. If you entered an expiration date for this maintenance agreement, you can choose to be notified about its expiration.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button to add a new contract. The \u003cem\u003eTitle, Start Date\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eContract Type\u003c/em\u003e fields are mandatory and thus must be filled in. The \u003cem\u003eEnd Date\u003c/em\u003e field is only needed if the contract has a limited duration.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/contracts/","title":"Contracts"},{"content":"On the Database page of the Options dialog, you can specify the database where the data will be stored. Docusnap supports Microsoft SQL Server and LocalDB.\nBy clicking on the Connect/Create button an attempt is made to connect to the specified database. If no database with this name can be found on the SQL Server, the dialog is displayed. In this dialog you can decide if the database should be created and if this database should be filled with demo data.\nSQL Server Database When using an SQL Server in your network, make sure that the server has been configured for remote access via TCP/IP and that the permissions for Windows or SQL authentication have been set properly.\nLocalDB The LocalDB is a lightweight version of SQL Server, which can be used without complex or time consuming configuration. When installing Docusnap it can be decided whether the LocalDB should to be installed too.\nBy clicking the checkbox Use LocalDB the existing LocalDB instance for Docusnap is selected.\nThe files for the LocalDB databases are stored in the user profile. It is recommended that LocalDB only be used for smaller databases. When creating a database, the following settings are used:\nRecovery Model: Simple\nData Files: Initial Size: 50 MB; Autogrowth: 50 MB\nLog: Initial Size: 40 MB; Autogrowth: 10 MB Settings By default, the timeout for database queries is 30 seconds. For large databases, however, it may happen that database queries take longer. To execute these queries nonetheless, the query timeout can be increased.\nThe change of the Timeout will be stored in a configuration file located on the computer where Docusnap is running and will be used for every connection to a database. The value specified in the Database Archive Versions field determines how many inventory scans of an object will be stored. If you set the Database Archive Versions field to 4, this means that the data of four inventory scans, e.g. for a Windows server, will be kept. When you perform the next inventory scan of that server, the scan with the oldest timestamp will be deleted so that the total number of inventory scans remains four. If particular inventory scans should not be deleted, you can exclude them from the automatic deletion using the Manage Snapshots dialog.\nWith the database optimization the indexes of the database are re-created, if necessary, in order to improve the database performance. The automatic optimization can be turned off via the checkbox Suppress Automatic Database Optimization. In addition the optimization can be started manually by clicking on the Start button.\nEncryption Module In order to enable the Passwords module in the main window, you need to create an encryption file. Encryption ensures that the passwords will be stored in the database in encrypted form. These passwords can only be read by users who use the same encryption file. If you do not create an encryption file, the Passwords module will remain hidden.\nMake sure to treat the encryption file with great care, since it is not possible to replace or re-create this file should it become lost.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eOn the \u003cem\u003eDatabase\u003c/em\u003e page of the Options dialog, you can specify the database where the data will be stored. Docusnap supports Microsoft SQL Server and LocalDB.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBy clicking on the \u003cem\u003eConnect/Create\u003c/em\u003e button an attempt is made to connect to the specified database. If no database with this name can be found on the SQL Server, the dialog is displayed. In this dialog you can decide if the database should be created and if this database should be filled with demo data.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/settings/options/database/","title":"Database"},{"content":"For storing data, Docusnap uses an open database based on Microsoft SQL Server or Microsoft LocalDB. After the installation of Docusnap and the initial connection to the database, Docusnap automatically creates table structures in the database. These structures are defined in the Metaschema.dss and DDLUpdate.xml files.\nIf required, additional structures in the database (tables, views and fields) can be created automatically.\nThis section consists of two subsections. They include general information on the database and instructions on how to extend the database structure.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eFor storing data, Docusnap uses an open database based on Microsoft SQL Server or Microsoft LocalDB. After the installation of Docusnap and the initial connection to the database, Docusnap automatically creates table structures in the database. These structures are defined in the Metaschema.dss and DDLUpdate.xml files.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf required, additional structures in the database (tables, views and fields) can be created automatically.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis section consists of two subsections. They include general information on the database and instructions on how to extend the database structure.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/","title":"Database Structures"},{"content":"When deleting Azure apps, the app can either be deleted in Docusnap only or also removed in Azure. By clicking on the Delete App button, a dialog is displayed where you can choose whether the app should also be deleted in Azure. If OK is clicked without selecting the option, the app will only be deleted from Docusnap. If the option Remove app in Azure also is selected, then another dialog opens for deleting the app in Azure.\nDeleting an app also requires creating a device code, which is then entered in the browser. After logging in and confirming the CLI, the Azure app is deleted in Azure and in Docusnap.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWhen deleting Azure apps, the app can either be deleted in Docusnap only or also removed in Azure.\nBy clicking on the \u003cem\u003eDelete App\u003c/em\u003e button, a dialog is displayed where you can choose whether the app should also be deleted in Azure. If \u003cem\u003eOK\u003c/em\u003e is clicked without selecting the option, the app will only be deleted from Docusnap. If the option \u003cem\u003eRemove app in Azure also\u003c/em\u003e is selected, then another dialog opens for deleting the app in Azure.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/azure-apps-delete/","title":"Delete Azure Apps"},{"content":"Use the Edit Switch tab to add MAC addresses, which were not recognized in the SNMP inventory as learned MAC addresses, to inventoried switches. By manually adding the MAC addresses, the devices are considered in the topology map.\nAfter the company is selected in the Company combobox and in the Domain combobox the respective switches are displayed. If a switch is selected, all ports and the number of MAC addresses, which have already been learned, are listed. Once a port has been selected, the learned MAC addresses are shown in the list below. Click on the Add button to insert an additional MAC address for the selected port and define for every entry if this MAC address belongs to a host or a switch. Only manually entered MAC addresses can also be deleted. Use the respective checkbox of the MAC address, even with addresses from the inventory, to define whether the device should be displayed in the topology map or not.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eUse the \u003cem\u003eEdit Switch\u003c/em\u003e tab to add MAC addresses, which were not recognized in the SNMP inventory as learned MAC addresses, to inventoried switches. By manually adding the MAC addresses, the devices are considered in the topology map.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfter the company is selected in the \u003cem\u003eCompany\u003c/em\u003e combobox and in the \u003cem\u003eDomain\u003c/em\u003e combobox the respective switches are displayed. If a switch is selected, all ports and the number of MAC addresses, which have already been learned, are listed. Once a port has been selected, the learned MAC addresses are shown in the list below. Click on the \u003cem\u003eAdd\u003c/em\u003e button to insert an additional MAC address for the selected port and define for every entry if this MAC address belongs to a host or a switch. Only manually entered MAC addresses can also be deleted. Use the respective checkbox of the MAC address, even with addresses from the inventory, to define whether the device should be displayed in the topology map or not.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/snmp/edit-switch/","title":"Edit Switch"},{"content":"Exchange Server maps can be created either from the Create Docu wizard or the Exchange wizard.\nThe Visio file and the HTML file will be stored in the Maps folder.\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Maps\\exchange)\nOnce you have selected the domains, all Exchange Servers in the domains will be displayed. Each server whose checkbox is enabled will be included in the Exchange Server map.\nThe preview reflects the layout of the Exchange Server map.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eExchange Server maps can be created either from the \u003cem\u003eCreate Docu\u003c/em\u003e wizard or the \u003cem\u003eExchange\u003c/em\u003e wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Visio file and the HTML file will be stored in the Maps folder.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cem\u003e(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Maps\\exchange)\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnce you have selected the domains, all Exchange Servers in the domains will be displayed. Each server whose checkbox is enabled will be included in the Exchange Server map.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe preview reflects the layout of the Exchange Server map.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/exchange-server/","title":"Exchange Server"},{"content":"In the Exclude Systems step, systems for the current software product can be excluded. As a result, the evaluation can be corrected if a system is not relevant for this software product. On the contrary, to Exclude Systems via the ribbon Licenses, the system is only ignored for this software product, but is still available for other software products.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn the Exclude Systems step, systems for the current software product can be excluded. As a result, the evaluation can be corrected if a system is not relevant for this software product. On the contrary, to \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/system-exclusions/\" title=\"Exclude Systems\"\u003eExclude Systems\u003c/a\u003e via the ribbon \u003cem\u003eLicenses,\u003c/em\u003e the system is only ignored for this software product, but is still available for other software products.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/exclude-systems/docusnap-license-management-wizard-exclude-systems.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-License-Management-Wizard-Exclude-Systems\" title=\"Docusnap-License-Management-Wizard-Exclude-Systems\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/exclude-systems/","title":"Exclude Systems"},{"content":"Using File Import wizard, you can import inventory data, captured by autonomous Discovery modules, either interactively or on a scheduled basis directly into Docusnap.\nThe File Import Wizard is opened with the File Import button. The Directory Selection step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps).\nTo import the files, two steps are necessary in the wizard:\nIn the Directory Selection step, define the location for storing the files. In the File Selection step, select the files to be imported.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eUsing \u003cem\u003eFile Import\u003c/em\u003e wizard, you can import inventory data, captured by autonomous Discovery modules, either interactively or on a scheduled basis directly into Docusnap.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/import-scripts/docusnap-script-import-overview-graph.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Overview Graph\" title=\"Docusnap Overview Graph\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eFile Import\u003c/em\u003e Wizard is opened with the \u003cem\u003eFile Import\u003c/em\u003e button. The \u003cem\u003eDirectory Selection\u003c/em\u003e step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo import the files, two steps are necessary in the wizard:\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/import-scripts/","title":"File Import"},{"content":"Group controls can be used to organize other controls, in order to design more clearly structured data entry screens. From a functional point of view, controls in groups do not make any difference to controls that have been placed directly on the data entry screen. Controls organized in groups also use the database record of the parent control (in this case, always the data entry screen itself). However, you can move child controls together with their group control, and properties like Anchor or Dock use the coordinates of the group control for their origin.\nWhen using the layout control, the Layout Group is used. Like all other controls, you can position a group control simply by dragging and dropping it on the data entry screen. Controls can be placed automatically by a Layout Control or be dragged directly onto the group. When using the Layout Controls first drag it from the toolbox to the group. Then add the desired controls. The alignment is controlled by the Layout Control. Controls can also be taken directly from the toolbox to the group, however, the positioning must be made manually.\nIt is neither possible to insert an existing control into a group control at a later time nor to move a group control into another group control or into the parent control. Besides, group controls cannot be nested within other group controls. This means that only one hierarchical level is allowed.\nIn addition to the global properties, a group control only has one additional property named Border. This property controls the visual appearance of the group control in the data entry screen. Two options are available: By selecting the AllSides option, you can display a border around the entire group control. In contrast, the OnlyTop option displays only a single line along the upper edge, while the other three sides are left open.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eGroup controls can be used to organize other controls, in order to design more clearly structured data entry screens. From a functional point of view, controls in groups do not make any difference to controls that have been placed directly on the data entry screen. Controls organized in groups also use the database record of the parent control (in this case, always the data entry screen itself). However, you can move child controls together with their group control, and properties like \u003cem\u003eAnchor\u003c/em\u003e or \u003cem\u003eDock\u003c/em\u003e use the coordinates of the group control for their origin.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/groups/","title":"Groups"},{"content":"Icon groups are created for the icon filter. Icon groups are already provided by default. These can be extended as required. By using the icon groups, the values and the icons do not have to be created again for each node that uses the same icon filter.\nIcon Groups Icons - Icon Groups opens the tab for creating icon groups. The name of the icon group is used when defining the icon filter for a node in the tree. Default icon groups cannot be customized. User-defined groups can be created using the New button. In the text field Reference a table can be specified with [] or an initial value with {}. They will be resolved to the respective text when the icons are created and the appropriate icon can be selected. It is not necessary to specify a reference.\nIcon Icons - Icons opens the tab for creating icons. The default icons cannot be customized, but the icon groups can be extended. For example, if additional SNMP types or site types are created, the respective icons for the new types can be defined in the Icons tab.\nBy clicking the New button, a new value can be created for the group defined in the combo box. The standard icon is used in the tree and the preview icon in diagrams. To be displayed correctly, the original size of the icons should be 16x16 pixels and the size of the preview icons should be 100x100 pixels. If a reference has been specified for the group, the Reference Value button can be used to open the list of all existing reference values and select the value for which the icon should be defined.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIcon groups are created for the icon filter. Icon groups are already provided by default. These can be extended as required.\nBy using the icon groups, the values and the icons do not have to be created again for each node that uses the same icon filter.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"icon-groups\"\u003eIcon Groups\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eIcons\u003c/em\u003e - \u003cem\u003eIcon Groups\u003c/em\u003e opens the tab for creating icon groups. The name of the icon group is used when defining the icon filter for a node in the tree. Default icon groups cannot be customized. User-defined groups can be created using the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button. In the text field Reference a table can be specified with [] or an initial value with {}. They will be resolved to the respective text when the icons are created and the appropriate icon can be selected. It is not necessary to specify a reference.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/icons/","title":"Icons"},{"content":"The packages you configured can be exported and then be imported to another Docusnap database. By importing the configuration, you can export data from the current database without having to create the configuration again.\nExport Click the Export Package button in the Connect area to open the Export Package dialog. It lists all configured packages. Tick the checkboxes for all packages to be exported. Then, click the Export button and specify the name and path for the exported file. The Docusnap Connect packages included in this file can subsequently be imported to a different database.\nImport Click the Import Package button in the Connect area to import a file in which Docusnap Connect packages have been previously exported.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe packages you configured can be exported and then be imported to another Docusnap database. By importing the configuration, you can export data from the current database without having to create the configuration again.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"export\"\u003eExport\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eExport Package\u003c/em\u003e button in the \u003cem\u003eConnect\u003c/em\u003e area to open the \u003cem\u003eExport Package\u003c/em\u003e dialog. It lists all configured packages. Tick the checkboxes for all packages to be exported. Then, click the \u003cem\u003eExport\u003c/em\u003e button and specify the name and path for the exported file. The Docusnap Connect packages included in this file can subsequently be imported to a different database.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/docusnap-connect/import-and-export/","title":"Import and Export"},{"content":"Executing the DocusnapSetup.exe file starts the installation process for Docusnap.\nThe Next button will only be enabled after license agreement has been accepted.\nThe next step lets you specify the Docusnap installation directory.\nAfter the desired folder has been selected, the installation process can be started.\nIf the local database does not exist on the system, it can be created during the installation of Docusnap. The local database (Microsoft Server Express LocalDB) is a simplified version of SQL Server that can be used without having to perform complex or time consuming configurations.\nIt is recommended that the local database is used for testing purposes only or smaller databases.\nInstalling the Npcap driver improves the quality in detecting the operating system during the IP scan.\nIf the LocalDB installation is also required, the wizard starts to install after finishing the Docusnap wizard. This requirement can be selected on the “Database Selection” slide of the Docusnap wizard.\nSilent installation For silent installation, the parameter /q can be used. DocusnapSetup.exe / q\nIf in addition the Npcap driver should also be installed during the silent installation, it can be included with the parameter INSTALL_NPCAP=1.\nDocusnapSetup.exe INSTALL_NPCAP=1 /q In order to display a progress dialog during the silent installation, the parameter /qb can be used.\nDocusnapSetup.exe / qb When you first start Docusnap the program needs to be activated manually for the respective system. To perform the activation as part of a Remote Installation, Docusnap can be activated after the installation via script using the command line with a parameter that contains the activation key.\n-Activate=ActivationKey ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eExecuting the DocusnapSetup.exe file starts the installation process for Docusnap.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/installation/docusnap-setup-welcome.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Setup-Welcome\" title=\"Docusnap-Setup-Welcome\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eNext\u003c/em\u003e button will only be enabled after license agreement has been accepted.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/installation/docusnap-setup-end-user-license.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Setup-End-User-License\" title=\"Docusnap-Setup-End-User-License\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe next step lets you specify the Docusnap installation directory.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/installation/docusnap-setup-path.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Setup-Path\" title=\"Docusnap-Setup-Path\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfter the desired folder has been selected, the installation process can be started.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/installation/docusnap-setup-select-db.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Setup-Select-DB\" title=\"Docusnap-Setup-Select-DB\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the local database does not exist on the system, it can be created during the installation of Docusnap. The local database (Microsoft Server Express LocalDB) is a simplified version of SQL Server that can be used without having to perform complex or time consuming configurations.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/installation/","title":"Installation"},{"content":"\nNetwork Inventory The procedures for the automated inventory process are covered in the Network Inventory Process section.\nCloud inventory The chapter Cloud Inventory explains the automated inventory of cloud technologies in Azure and Amazon Web Service.\nDocusnap Script Using the Docusnap Script, you can scan a Windows or Linux system and save the collected information to an XML file that can be imported subsequently into Docusnap.\nManually Create Systems If you wish to include systems that cannot be scanned by the automated inventory process or by the Docusnap Script, you can enter the required information manually.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/docusnap-inventory-overview-graph.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Overview Graph\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Overview Graph\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"network-inventory\"\u003eNetwork Inventory\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe procedures for the automated inventory process are covered in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/\" title=\"Network Inventory\"\u003eNetwork Inventory\u003c/a\u003e Process section.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"cloud-inventory\"\u003eCloud inventory\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe chapter \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/\" title=\"Cloud Inventory\"\u003eCloud Inventory\u003c/a\u003e explains the automated inventory of cloud technologies in Azure and Amazon Web Service.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"docusnap-script\"\u003eDocusnap Script\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/\" title=\"Docusnap Script\"\u003eDocusnap Script\u003c/a\u003e, you can scan a Windows or Linux system and save the collected information to an XML file that can be imported subsequently into Docusnap.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/","title":"Inventory"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying IP Hosts, click the IP Scan button. The IP Scan step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps).\nDuring the IP scan, hosts are registered as IP hosts where a service is available during the inventory or a connection with an open port could be established.\nAdvanced IP scan: By selecting the Advanced IP scan check box Docusnap will use heuristic functions to determine additional information such as the operating system.\nInstalling the Npcap driver improves the quality in detecting the operating system during the IP scan. The driver can be installed during the Docusnap installation. IP ranges for the inventory can be defined in the Add IP range area. New IP ranges can be entered interactively or loaded from a CSV file that contains the ranges in the order IP from; IP to; Description (optional). These ranges are imported using the Load List button.\nThe area on the right shows the added IP ranges, which can be selected or deselected for the inventory. Descriptions such as Production or Administration help to better organize and identify the ranges. This provides a better overview of the various IP ranges and their purpose.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying IP Hosts, click the \u003cem\u003eIP Scan\u003c/em\u003e button. The \u003cem\u003eIP Scan\u003c/em\u003e step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDuring the IP scan, hosts are registered as IP hosts where a service is available during the inventory or a connection with an open port could be established.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdvanced IP scan: By selecting the Advanced IP scan check box Docusnap will use heuristic functions to determine additional information such as the operating system.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/ip-scan/","title":"IP Scan"},{"content":"The IT Security ribbon is displayed when switching to IT Security in the navigation area.\nNTFS Analysis: Click the NTFS Analysis button to open the wizard to select the Windows systems whose permissions are to be inventoried.\nOnline Analysis: The permissions will be determined at runtime by the Online Analysis process and thus not stored in the database. The Online Analysis process will be active once you click the Online Analysis button.\nFilter Path: The Filter Path dialog only opens for the analysis of SharePoint permissions. Since the SharePoint permission structure is different from the structure of NTFS permissions, this dialog is used to select the desired starting point for the analysis. According to the filter you set, only the directories below the starting node that correspond to the selected users/groups will be displayed.\nReport Jobs (csv): By importing a CSV file multiple jobs to generate Directory Reports for NTFS can be created simultaneously.\nClicking the NTFS Filter option opens the Manage NTFS Filter dialog. In this dialog, you can specify directories to be excluded from the NTFS analysis. For an explanation of this dialog, refer to the NTFS Filter section.\nYou can use the User/Group Filter to exclude selected users and groups from the directory reports.\nBlocked Inheritance: Inheritance can be blocked for directories. This means that the permissions will not be inherited. If the Blocked Inheritance checkbox is enabled, the directories for which inheritance is blocked will be displayed with a red icon in the Permission Analysis explorer.\nSpecial Permissions: If this checkbox is enabled, special permissions will be displayed in addition to the basic permissions.\nExplicit Permissions: Permissions can be assigned directly to directories. If the Explicit Permissions checkbox is enabled, all directories to which permissions have been assigned explicitly will be displayed with a blue icon.\nAdditional functions are available in the action bar.\nEnable/Remove: The Data Explorer displays all directories of a scanned system. To display the filter below the permissions list, click the Enable button in the Filter group of the ribbon. Once you have defined the desired filter criteria (Write, Read, etc.), only those directories will be displayed in the Data Explorer that match the selected user or group filter.\nWhen you click the Current View button, the permissions displayed on the Permission Analysis tab will be output in a report.\nBy clicking the Principal Report button, you can create a report which shows the effective permissions to the selected directory and its subdirectories or for Exchange permissions to the mailboxes, mailbox folders, and public folders.\nClicking the Directory Report button creates a report which displays all users who have a permission to the selected directory and its subdirectories.\nPermission Origin: Click the Permission Origin button to open the permission structure for the currently selected user.\nUser/Group Structure: Click the User/Group Structure button to display the group or user nestings diagram.\nClicking the Overview Report button creates a report which displays all users who have permissions to the mailboxes, mailbox folders, and public folders.\nThe IT Security explorer displays the shares that were determined by inventorying the Windows system. After a permission analysis, the tree view reflects the directory structure of the share.\nBelow the SharePoint and Exchange headings, the IT Security data explorer displays the SharePoint and Exchange permissions and offers them for analysis.\nFor more information on this topic, refer to the IT Security chapter.\nThe company is shown at the top level of the tree. Below the company, you can see the associated domains which have been inventoried. Below each domain, you can find the File System, SharePoint, and Exchange nodes where the corresponding permissions are listed.\nWhen you select a directory in the Explorer, the main window displays the IT Security tab that includes information on share permissions, inherited permissions, explicit permissions, and the resulting effective permissions.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eIT Security\u003c/em\u003e ribbon is displayed when switching to \u003cem\u003eIT Security\u003c/em\u003e in the navigation area.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/file-system/inventory-permissions/\" title=\"NTFS Analysis\"\u003eNTFS Analysis\u003c/a\u003e: Click the \u003cem\u003eNTFS Analysis\u003c/em\u003e button to open the wizard to select the Windows systems whose permissions are to be inventoried.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/it-security/inventory/file-system/online-analysis/\" title=\"Online Analysis\"\u003eOnline Analysis\u003c/a\u003e: The permissions will be determined at runtime by the Online Analysis process and thus not stored in the database. The Online Analysis process will be active once you click the \u003cem\u003eOnline Analysis\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/navigation/it-security/","title":"IT Security"},{"content":"Depending on the object selected in the Explorer, a variety of tabs will be displayed in the Docusnap main window. All available tabs are listed below.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDepending on the object selected in the Explorer, a variety of tabs will be displayed in the Docusnap main window. All available tabs are listed below.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/","title":"Main Window"},{"content":"If you wish to include systems that cannot be scanned by the automated inventory process or by the Docusnap Script, you can enter the required information manually. When all necessary data has been entered, the manually created systems are also considered in maps. The manual systems can be integrated into system groups. If software has been created for the system, for which a license was created in the license management, these devices are also considered in the license balance. The data sheets of the documentation can also be created for the manual device.\nCreate Systems Below the heading Assets - Systems in the Inventory tree all domains are displayed. Below each domain, the heading for Windows Systems, Linux Systems, Mac Systems, SNMP Systems, CIFS, Thin Clients and HP-UX are displayed to create the respective systems. For example, to create a firewall, select the headline SNMP Systems and click the New button.\nOnce you have selected the object type to be created, the associated data entry screen will be displayed. After you have entered all required information, click the Save button to save your data. To delete entries that are no longer needed, click the Delete button.\nIn order for the manual systems to be included in the maps, the IP address, subnet mask and MAC addresses of the devices must be specified. For that add a creation date and then general data beneath the system. The network information of the device can then be entered under the heading Network. These are needed so the systems are inserted at the correct position in the maps.\nSNMP systems need no further information besides the entry directly below the heading. These are considered in the maps, if the MAC address was specified for the device. If the added MAC adress was not recognized as a learned MAC address, the address can be added to the switch in the Docusnap Management. (See chapter Edit Switch in the configuration manual)\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIf you wish to include systems that cannot be scanned by the automated inventory process or by the Docusnap Script, you can enter the required information manually. When all necessary data has been entered, the manually created systems are also considered in maps. The manual systems can be integrated into \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/system-groups/\" title=\"system groups\"\u003esystem groups\u003c/a\u003e. If software has been created for the system, for which a license was created in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/\" title=\"license management\"\u003elicense management\u003c/a\u003e, these devices are also considered in the license balance. The data sheets of the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/\" title=\"documentation\"\u003edocumentation\u003c/a\u003e can also be created for the manual device.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/manually-create-systems/","title":"Manually Create Systems"},{"content":"In Docusnap, you can extend the existing table structures as needed. For this purpose, open Docusnap Management and click the Manage Tables button.\nThis tab contains all descriptions of the Docusnap database structure. On the upper left pane the details of the below selected table are listed. The corresponding settings for the columns of the selected table can be made in the right pane.\nIn principle, there are three different types of tables in Docusnap:\nType Description Table Tables are the physical Docusnap database tables described in this manual. All table names begin with a lowercase \u0026ldquo;t\u0026rdquo; prefix. View Views are tables that were generated by an SQL SELECT statement. Views may contain data from multiple tables. It is possible to add placeholders (e.g. FilterID) to the SQL statements. Docusnap will populate them with the current values at runtime. All view names begin with a lowercase \u0026ldquo;v\u0026rdquo; prefix. Virtual Virtual tables are used to format the tables that are used, for example, in the Docusnap wizards. In addition, they are used in the tree view in order to display data from various database tables in a single table. All virtual table names begin with a lowercase \u0026ldquo;i\u0026rdquo; prefix. General Table Properties When defining a table, you need to set several properties. The number of properties depends on the table type. The following properties apply to all tables, i.e. they are mandatory:\nProperty Description Table Name Unique name of the table Depending on the selected table type, one of the \u0026ldquo;i\u0026rdquo;, \u0026ldquo;v\u0026rdquo; or \u0026ldquo;t\u0026rdquo; prefixes is used. Names of user-defined tables are additionally prefixed with an \u0026ldquo;x\u0026rdquo; (e.g. xtSLA). Namespace When creating a new table, a namespace can be entered in the combo box or an existing namespace can be selected. The namespace can be used to define which tables are to be exported when exporting user-defined tables. Primary Key A field (i.e. column) in the table that uniquely identifies each record. Within Docusnap, these fields are usually auto-increment fields of the LONG data type. Foreign Key The field that represents the relation to another table further up in the hierarchy. Display Field The field in the table that is used to display the desired text output in the tree views (e.g. Inventory, IT Security, etc.). Comparison Field For data comparison, a field is required that can be used to identify two records when comparing two snapshots. For this purpose, it might be a good idea to use, for example, a serial number or a computer name. English Name, German Name Name of the table in that language. Note: The Primary Key, Foreign Key, Display Field and Compare Field fields can only be selected after you have created fields for your table. This means that you must save the table without these properties first. Then, create the desired fields and finally set the 4 table definition fields Properties for Views Views are tables that are built on the basis of an SQL SELECT statement. Docusnap supports this with a number of variables that will be replaced with actual data during the execution of the SELECT statement.\nBasically, the SELECT statement has the following syntax:\nSELECT [DISTINCT] SelectionList FROM Source [WHERE WhereClause] [GROUP BY (GroupByAttribute)+ [HAVING HavingClause]] [ORDER BY (SortAttribute [ASC|DESC])+]; In principle, all valid variants are possible that comply with the SQL standard.\nDocusnap provides the following variables for use in statements. Make sure to always enclose the variable in braces, like this: {Variable}.\nVariable Description {FilterID} The FilterID variable is always replaced with the primary key of the parent object. Example:\nIn Docusnap, the following statement:\nselect * from thosts where domainid = {FilterID} order by hostname\nwill for example result in the following when the statement is executed:\nselect * from thosts where domainid = 1 order by hostname {LANGUAGEID} This variable is replaced with the integer value for the respective language:\nGerman = 0\nEnglisch = 1 {Feldname} Using this construct, you can access each data field in a parent data object.\nNote: This will only work for the Data object type, but not for the Caption object type. Enter the respective SQL statement directly into the SQL statement field where you can enter or edit the statement.\nSince an SQL SELECT statement may be used to link multiple tables, Docusnap does not know which table the primary key refers to when you delete this object in the tree view. In the Primary Table field, you can specify the table in which the record should be deleted. If you leave this field blank, it will not be possible to delete meta objects that depend on this table.\nSNMP Statements In addition to SQL statements for the output of tables, Docusnap provides special statements for the output of SNMP tables. When performing an SNMP inventory scan, Docusnap uses MIBs. To program the output, enter the following into the SQL Statement field: First, the text *SNMP:, *then, in parentheses, the MIB and, separated by a comma, its name. To separate the MIBs, enter a semi-colon.\nThis results in the following syntax:\nSNMP:(1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.1,IPAddress;1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.3,SubnetMask;1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.2,InterfaceID) To ensure the output of values that exist only once for each SNMP device, precede the statement with SNMP-Single.\nUse the following syntax:\nSNMP-Single: (1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.14.1.1,Manufacturer;1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.17.1,SerialNumber) If you need to divide the value of one column by that of another column, e.g. to determine the toner level, separate the MIBs of the two columns using a slash. When the statement is executed, the quotient will be output in this column.\nThe statement has the following syntax:\nSNMP-Single: (1.3.6.1.2.1.43.11.1.1.9.1.1/1.3.6.1.2.1.43.11.1.1.8.1.1,TonerBlack) Then, create the fields (columns) of this table. As the field name, use the name you entered in the statement for this MIB. IT Asset Statements It is possible to display IT assets anywhere in the tree, for example, below a contact, which they were assigned to. For that a view with an SQL statement needs to be created that lists all necessary ObjectIDs. The name is matched with the name of the property and the value with the primary key of the parent object. Since the column ObjectValue has the type text the {FilterID} must be specified as text with \u0026lsquo;\u0026rsquo;. Use the AccountID in the query to filtered the data, so that only IT assets for the respective company are displayed. Only the ObjectID must be included in SQL statement and the ObjectID must be created as a column. Subsequently, this view can be selected for a meta object to display the IT assets. The following SQL statement can be used as the basis for the IT Asset statement.\nselect tGOValue.ObjectID from tGODirectory, tGO, tGOValue, tGOProperty where tGODirectory.DirectoryID = tGO.DirectoryID and tGO.ObjectID = tGOValue.ObjectID and tGOValue.PropertyID = tGOProperty.PropertyID and tGOProperty.PropertyName = \u0026#39;Name of the Property\u0026#39; and tGOValue.ObjectValue = \u0026#39;{FilterID}\u0026#39; and tGODirectory.AccountID = {AccountID} Data Fields Data fields represent the various columns of a table. Each field is assigned a data type in Docusnap. The meta description of each field also includes its English or German name.\nProperty Description Field Name In this field, you can specify a unique field name. Key fields should always have the \u0026ldquo;ID\u0026rdquo; ending, so that they can be identified more easily. User-defined fields will automatically be assigned an \u0026ldquo;x\u0026rdquo; prefix to avoid naming collisions. Datatype This field indicates the data type of the field.\nBlob: Binary field that stores binary data, such as attachments\nBoolean: Yes or No value\nByte: Numeric field that holds integer values between 0 and 255.\nDate: Date field\nDecimal: Decimal field for floating point numbers\nGUID: GUID Value\nCombination: Field that combines multiple fields. Field names are identified by ampersand \u0026ldquo;@\u0026rdquo; symbols, literal text is surrounded by single quotes (\u0026lsquo;Text\u0026rsquo;). The values can be concatenated using the \u0026ldquo;+\u0026rdquo; operator.\nStrings in angle brackets \u0026ldquo;\u0026lt;\u0026gt;\u0026rdquo; are only displayed if they are followed by more text.\nExample: @Lastname + '\u0026lt;, \u0026gt;' + @Firstname\nOutput:\nSmith, John\nor, if no first name exists,\nSmith\nThe Combination type should only be used for display fields.\nInt: Integer\nBigInt: The BigInt data type is determined for cases where an integer value exceeds the range supported by the Int data type.\nMemo: Text box containing an unlimited string of characters\nString: Text\nSID: Convert a SID into the associated ADS name. The conversion is only possible if the table or view is included at a location where the node for the company is located somewhere in the parent structure.\nVersion: Versions are usually in a string field and would therefore be in alphabetical order. To display version 12 after Version 4, the data type Version is used.\nTime: The data type Time is used to output a time when the value is inventoried in ticks. Reference By means of the Reference field, an ID can be converted into a meaningful (plain text) name. For this purpose, enter a reference to a table [TableName] or a reference to a reference value {ValueName}.\nIf you have specified a value in the Reference field, Docusnap uses the numeric content of the entry and performs a query on the specified table or in the reference values, filtering on the respective primary key. The output will be the value that was defined as the display field in the target table.\nExample: Field: DomainID, Reference: [tdomains]\nInstead of the DomainID \u0026ldquo;1\u0026rdquo;, the output will be \u0026ldquo;test.local\u0026rdquo;. Name, Description (German, English) Field name in the respective language. This value will be shown later in lists as a column heading. Sort Order The field order in lists is not alphabetical, but rather determined by this value. Display Size Here, you can specify the column width (in pixels) for the display in lists. If you do not specify a value, Docusnap uses a default value of 80 pixels. Field Length This value can only be defined for the String data type. It is used to enter the maximum number of characters that may be entered in the respective field. Import Lookup This field defines reference fields that must be compared and matched for data import. Basically, these are references such as comment types, passwords types, etc. Factor In this field, you can set a divisor for converting numeric values. This field is only enabled for numeric data types.\nFor example, a factor of 1024 would convert a byte value into kilobytes. Number Format Using this field, you can define the formatting of numeric values according to standard conventions.\nValid placeholders include the hash symbol \u0026ldquo;#\u0026rdquo; for any numeric value and \u0026ldquo;0\u0026rdquo; for numeric values that should be padded with leading zeroes if they are too small for the field. The thousands separator is a comma, and the period is used as the decimal separator.\nExamples:\n#,##0.00 MB\n00 h Icon Using the Icon property, you can store a specific icon for each field. This is only necessary if the meta object that refers to the table has a vertical alignment. Namespace If columns are added to tables of the vendor, then the namespace can be selected for the created column or a new one can be entered. When exporting a customizing, the namespaces can be used to define which columns are to be taken into account. The namespace of the column cannot be changed after saving. Field Visible in List If you tick this checkbox, this field will be visible in lists. Field Visible in Webclient If this option is enabled, the field will be displayed in the lists in the web client. If a table has no columns selected for the web client, Docusnap sets this option for the first three columns according to the sort order. This selection can be edited afterwards. Do Not Compare By enabling this checkbox, you can prevent the field from being used in data comparisons. This is useful, e.g., for a field that reflects the available storage space on a hard disk, since this value is ever-changing. No Display if NULL If the meta object for which the table will be shown has a Vertical alignment, this flag determines whether the column will be displayed at all if the database value is NULL. Display ADS Properties The values of Active Directory properties are stored in the tables tADSObjectValue (only one value per AD object) and in the table tADSObjectMultiValue (multiple values per AD object possible). Some of these values need to be formatted differently for display. In both the tables there is the column ADSPropertyID, the value of this column is used by Docusnap to display the AD properties in ADSObjectValue column correctly. If a table or a view contains an ADSObject Value column, a ADSPropertyID column is always expected .\nWhen a view is created, which contains more than one column with special AD properties, the formatting can not be defined using the ADSPropertyID column. For this, a reference is created for every respective column. With AD_PROP_ is defined that it is a reference for AD properties. For example, for the property whenCreated (create date of the AD object) {AD_PROP_whenCreated} is entered in the Reference field. The column that contains the value must not be called ADSObjectValue, but will be renamed in the SQL statement with AS.\nExport and Import of the Database If the data from user-defined tables should be taken into account during database import or export, these tables must be included in the import tree.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn Docusnap, you can extend the existing table structures as needed. For this purpose, open Docusnap Management and click the \u003cem\u003eManage Tables\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/modification-of-the-structure/docusnap-tools-manage-tables.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Tools-Manage-Tables\" title=\"Docusnap-Tools-Manage-Tables\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis tab contains all descriptions of the Docusnap database structure. On the upper left pane the details of the below selected table are listed. The corresponding settings for the columns of the selected table can be made in the right pane.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/modification-of-the-structure/docusnap-tools-manage-fields.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Tools-Manage-Fields\" title=\"Docusnap-Tools-Manage-Fields\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn principle, there are three different types of tables in Docusnap:\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/modification-of-the-structure/","title":"Modification of the Structure"},{"content":"Functionality The number server actually represents a special type of text box that is used to generate numbers automatically. This can, for example, be helpful to create sequential numbers for documents automatically and with a minimum of administrative effort. In addition to sequential numbers, you can specify prefixes and suffixes, as well as formatting, the starting value and an increment for the numbers.\nManaging the Number Server The settings for the number server can be configured in the Docusnap Management using the Number Server option on the General area. From the Number Server tab, it is possible to create various definitions for number servers and test them. Similar to most other management dialogs, you can create new definitions or edit or delete existing definitions. The name may be chosen freely and only serves identification purposes in Docusnap. In the Format field, enter a formatting string which determines how the sequential numbers will be presented. The formatting options behave like their equivalents provided by Microsoft for the .ToString() method in .NET, where the respective formatting string needs to be entered in quotes (\u0026quot;\u0026quot;). The most important properties are explained briefly in the table below.\nCharacter(s) Meaning 0 Serves as a placeholder for a number or a digit of a number, where non-significant zeros will be replaced by the zero (0) character. # Serves as a placeholder for a number or a digit of a number, where non-significant zeros will not be replaced. . Inserts a decimal separator at the corresponding position. , Inserts a thousand separator at the corresponding position. The symbol actually used depends on the locale setting. Aside from this, the symbol divides the value by 1000. Thus, the \u0026ldquo;#,,\u0026rdquo; formatting string would cause the number 1234567890 to be displayed as 1234. % Formats the number as a percentage and additionally multiplies it by 100. The symbol that will be used depends on the locale settings. fp;fn;f0 Allows to specify different formats for positive and negative numbers, as well as for zero. To specify formatting strings, you can use any desired combination of the placeholders and formatting symbols shown in the table above.\nTo specify a prefix that will precede the number, enter any desired string in the Prefix field. The Suffix field behaves similarly, except that this string will be shown after the formatted number. Enter the first valid value for this number definition in the Start Value field and specify the increment by which each subsequent number will be increased in the Increment field. The two text boxes at the bottom of the dialog display a preview of the first and second valid values generated. This makes it easy to see if you specified all settings correctly. When you edit the settings in the Manage Number Server tab, the preview will immediately be adjusted without requiring any additional actions.\nUsing the Number Server After you have entered the corresponding definitions for the number server, they can be used in combination with the text boxes in the Designer for data entry screens. On the Properties tab of text boxes, you can set a so-called \u0026ldquo;TextConstraint\u0026rdquo; property to validate your entries. When you click the ellipsis for this property, the Settings for Content of Textbox dialog opens where you can select the Number Server content type. In the dropdown list to the right of it, you can select the previously created number server definition. After the selection has been saved, the text box will be read-only on the associated data entry screen. When a user creates a new record by means of this data entry screen, the text box will remain empty until the user clicks the Save button below the ribbon. If there is no value in the corresponding text box when the user saves the data, the number server determines the next value in the sequence and saves it with the record. This value will then be preset when the user accesses the record for the next time. It can no longer be modified.\nPlease note that settings related to the number server will only be applied when you reload the entire data entry screen. Since data entry screens are cached for performance reasons, it is necessary to load another data entry screen and then switch back to the modified data entry screen to do so. For this purpose, it is not sufficient to switch to one of the extensions or to display a list view. The entire data entry screen must be reloaded. Example: After having customized the company data entry screen, you could load the contacts data entry screen and then switch back to the company data entry screen. ","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"functionality\"\u003eFunctionality\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe number server actually represents a special type of \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/textfield/\" title=\"text box\"\u003etext box\u003c/a\u003e that is used to generate numbers automatically. This can, for example, be helpful to create sequential numbers for documents automatically and with a minimum of administrative effort. In addition to sequential numbers, you can specify prefixes and suffixes, as well as formatting, the starting value and an increment for the numbers.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"managing-the-number-server\"\u003eManaging the Number Server\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe settings for the number server can be configured in the Docusnap Management using the \u003cem\u003eNumber Server\u003c/em\u003e option on the \u003cem\u003eGeneral\u003c/em\u003e area. From the \u003cem\u003eNumber Server\u003c/em\u003e tab, it is possible to create various definitions for number servers and test them. Similar to most other management dialogs, you can create new definitions or edit or delete existing definitions. The name may be chosen freely and only serves identification purposes in Docusnap. In the \u003cem\u003eFormat\u003c/em\u003e field, enter a formatting string which determines how the sequential numbers will be presented. The formatting options behave like their equivalents provided by Microsoft for the \u003ccode\u003e.ToString()\u003c/code\u003e method in .NET, where the respective formatting string needs to be entered in quotes (\u0026quot;\u0026quot;). The most important properties are explained briefly in the table below.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/number-servers/","title":"Number Servers"},{"content":"Settings you define in the Options dialog will be stored in a configuration file located on the computer where Docusnap is running. If multiple employees want to use the same settings when working in Docusnap, it is possible to start the program using a shared configuration file.\nYou can either directly append the corresponding parameter to the Docusnap.exe file or define it when starting Docusnap from the command line. The parameters are case-sensitive, i.e. they must be entered exactly as shown here: -SelectConfig and -UseConfig.\nWhen Docusnap is update the Docusnap icon on the desktop is deleted and created again. Thereby the parameters -SelectConfig and -UseConfig are deleted.\nThe path can be set permanently in the file DocusnapSettings.xml, so the path does not have to be specified again after every Docusnap Update.\nConfiguration File When installing Docusnap the file DocusnapSettings.xml is created in the directory \u0026ldquo;C:\\ProgramData\\Docusnap\u0026rdquo;. In this file the tag specifies the path where the desired configuration file is saved. When updating Docusnap this file is not changed, as a result Docusnap always uses the defined configuration file. If no path is specified in this file the default configuration file is used.\n-SelectConfig When you use the -SelectConfig parameter, a dialog appears before the Docusnap startup which allows you to select the path to the configuration file. Then, Docusnap will be started using the settings from the selected configuration file.\nIf in addition a path to a folder is specified, this folder is opened by default when selecting the configuration file.\n-SelectConfig \u0026#34;C:\\ProgramData\\Docusnap\u0026#34; -UseConfig The -UseConfig parameter allows you to specify a particular configuration file to be used each time Docusnap is started. When using this parameter, you specify the path to the configuration file.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eSettings you define in the \u003cem\u003eOptions\u003c/em\u003e dialog will be stored in a configuration file located on the computer where Docusnap is running. If multiple employees want to use the same settings when working in Docusnap, it is possible to start the program using a shared configuration file.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can either directly append the corresponding parameter to the Docusnap.exe file or define it when starting Docusnap from the command line. The parameters are case-sensitive, i.e. they must be entered exactly as shown here: \u003cem\u003e-SelectConfig\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003e-UseConfig.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/advanced-topics/options-configuration-file/","title":"Options Configuration File"},{"content":"Overviews can be created using either the Create Docu wizard or the Overviews wizard.\nAfter you have selected the domains, you are presented with a choice of overview documents that can be created. Enable the checkbox of every overview type you wish to create.\nThe overviews will be stored in the Overview subfolder of the documentation directory under the corresponding company and domain. The Advanced button allows to choose in which format the overviews will be created. The files that are created are based on reports and include the company and the author\u0026rsquo;s name. The structured Excel document is also based on this report. The filterable Excel document is output as a flat Excel list to which the filters of Excel can be applied. If one of the two Excel options and the creation of the overview for Active Directory users or Active Directory groups is selected, an additional Excel document with a detailed output of the group membership is generated.\nCreating the filterable Excel takes less time and is therefore recommended if the result includes many pages.\nWhen creating overviews, you can also tick the Print Preparation (MDC) checkbox. It can be used to generate an additional file with the .mdc file extension. This file is required if you want to use the Print Docu wizard to print the documentation.\nIn the options dialog you can define which formats are preselected.\nThe files will be stored in the Overview folder.\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Overview)\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eOverviews can be created using either the \u003cem\u003eCreate Docu\u003c/em\u003e wizard or the \u003cem\u003eOverviews\u003c/em\u003e wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfter you have selected the domains, you are presented with a choice of overview documents that can be created. Enable the checkbox of every overview type you wish to create.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe overviews will be stored in the \u003cem\u003eOverview\u003c/em\u003e subfolder of the documentation directory under the corresponding company and domain. The Advanced button allows to choose in which format the overviews will be created. The files that are created are based on reports and include the company and the author\u0026rsquo;s name. The structured Excel document is also based on this report. The filterable Excel document is output as a flat Excel list to which the filters of Excel can be applied. If one of the two Excel options and the creation of the overview for Active Directory users or Active Directory groups is selected, an additional Excel document with a detailed output of the group membership is generated.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/overviews/","title":"Overviews"},{"content":"Docusnap allows you to print several datasheets and overviews simultaneously. When you create datasheets or overviews, the Print Preparation (.mdc) file format must be selected additionally.\nTo start the Print Documentation wizard, click the Print Docu button. In the Print Settings step, select the folder where the documents are stored. If files to be printed are located in subfolders of the selected folder, you can include them by ticking the Recursively Search Subdirectories checkbox. The Depth indicates how many subfolder levels will be included. Click the Add button to add the selected location to the list of directories to be searched. The documentation path that has been defined already.\nIf you clear the checkbox next to a folder, the documents from that folder will not be available for printing.\nThe selected printer will be displayed in the Print Settings area at the bottom of the dialog. A different printer, as well as additional print settings, may be selected by clicking the Settings button. Clicking the Next button takes you to the File Selection step in the wizard. The Next button will remain disabled until a folder has been selected.\nAll files that have been stored in the selected folder and have the .mdc file format will be displayed in the file selection step. When you click the Deselect All button, your document selection will be undone. Only selected documents will be printed. To start the print job, click the Next button. The button will remain disabled until at least one document has been selected.\nAfter the print job has been started, the dialog will display its progress. Printing can be cancelled. Once the print job has been successfully completed, it can no longer be cancelled.\nFinally, the Summary page appears to display additional information about the printing process.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap allows you to print several datasheets and overviews simultaneously. When you create datasheets or overviews, the \u003cem\u003ePrint Preparation (.mdc)\u003c/em\u003e file format must be selected additionally.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo start the \u003cem\u003ePrint Documentation\u003c/em\u003e wizard, click the \u003cem\u003ePrint Docu\u003c/em\u003e button. In the \u003cem\u003ePrint Settings\u003c/em\u003e step, select the folder where the documents are stored. If files to be printed are located in subfolders of the selected folder, you can include them by ticking the \u003cem\u003eRecursively Search Subdirectories\u003c/em\u003e checkbox. The \u003cem\u003eDepth\u003c/em\u003e indicates how many subfolder levels will be included. Click the \u003cem\u003eAdd\u003c/em\u003e button to add the selected location to the list of directories to be searched. The documentation path that has been defined already.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/print-documentation/","title":"Print Documentation"},{"content":"Properties can be defined for levels and structural elements. This makes it possible to define different kinds of information for these objects. The value can then be specified for each element of the respective level or structural element.\nDefine Properties The properties are not created for a specific company. Therefore, the property can be used in any IT documentation framework, regardless of which company it is in.\nThe properties can be defined in the Docusnap Management or in the Editor.\nIn the editor, a level or a structure element is selected in the data structure and the Define Properties button is clicked on the ribbon. A new window opens. There you enter a name for the property, the desired field type and a name in German and English. It is also possible to choose whether it is a mandatory field. For more information on the types of properties, see the Configuration Manual.\nAssign property a level or a structural element When you create or customize levels and structural elements, the properties can be assigned. You can also use the Add Properties button to assign properties to the selected node (level or structural element). This automatically adds this property to all elements that are assigned to the level or the structural element and can be assigned a value. If this is a mandatory field, a value must be given before the item can be stored.\nAfter the property is assigned to the level or to the structural element, this value is displayed for all the assigned elements.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eProperties can be defined for levels and structural elements. This makes it possible to define different kinds of information for these objects. The value can then be specified for each element of the respective level or structural element.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"define-properties\"\u003eDefine Properties\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe properties are not created for a specific company. Therefore, the property can be used in any IT documentation framework, regardless of which company it is in.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe properties can be defined in the Docusnap Management or in the Editor.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/business-structures/properties/","title":"Properties"},{"content":"Reports can be managed from the Reports tab in Docusnap Management. This tab allows you to create new reports and edit existing ones. Each report has properties, such as a name, author and language. These properties can also be edited from this tab.\nAll reports are listed in the tree view. The tree view consists of meta objects. For a detailed description of meta objects, see the meta objects section. Each report can be linked with one or more meta objects. This determines the position of the report in the tree structure. The link is defined for every report.\nData can only be shown in the tree view if the corresponding meta objects have been linked with tables. Each table in the database has a primary key. The primary key of a table is a value that uniquely identifies each record in the table. When you generate/execute a report, the primary key of the associated table will be passed to the report.\nReports can be linked with any meta objects. If you link the report with a meta object of the Data type, the primary key of that table will be passed to the report. For meta objects of a different type, Docusnap will always pass the primary key of the next parent object which is linked with a table.\nThereby, this value can be used for filtering and only data associated with that object will be included in the report. For example, if the primary key for the domain is passed and used for filtering, the report will only show data related to that domain.\nAll reports that have been created are listed both in German and English. In the drop-down list, you can select the language in which the report will be displayed. In the left tab, the available reports are listed. The properties of the selected report are displayed in the right tab.\nThe author of all reports created by Docusnap defaults to Docusnap. To change the author in some reports or delete a number of reports simultaneously, you can select multiple reports at the same time.\nReport Properties Name The name specified in the Name field is displayed in the report list and in the tree view. Status The current report will only be visible in the tree view if the Report is Enabled checkbox is ticked.\nIf this checkbox is empty, the current report will not be displayed in the tree view. Author This field shows the name of the person who created the report. This name will be shown under Author on the report cover page. Language Reports for which the English language has been selected will only be displayed if the Docusnap language setting is also English. German reports are only displayed if the language has been set to German. The language that you select in the Manage Reports dialog determines the file name prefix, i.e. either \u0026ldquo;DE_\u0026rdquo; or \u0026ldquo;EN_\u0026rdquo;. After creating and saving the report, you can still change the language. If you switch the language, e.g. from German to English, the prefix will be changed from \u0026ldquo;DE_\u0026rdquo; to \u0026ldquo;EN_\u0026rdquo; and the report will be displayed as soon as the display language for Docusnap is changed to English. The headings in the report, however, remain in the language in which they were created. Report Cache If you want to create extensive reports, you need to enable the Report Cache feature. This feature caches the pages of the report. This makes sense in case the RAM on your machine would not be sufficient to create the report. If you select the Auto setting here, the report will be split once it has reached 500 pages. The On setting causes Docusnap to cache the pages of the report from the first page on. Upon completion of the creation process, the pages will be combined into a single report. This step takes additional time, so make sure to only select this setting if your RAM is insufficient for creating the report. It is recommended to use the Auto setting. Report Choice The predefined reports are stored in the program directory when Docusnap is installed. User-adapted, newly created or imported reports are stored in the report repository. For each report can be defined, if always the latest report, the customer report or the system report should be used. Subsequently, the report is generated according to the settings either from the program directory or the local settings folder or from the team setting folder (Report Repository). File Name The file name for the reports is composed of the \u0026ldquo;DE_\u0026rdquo; or \u0026ldquo;EN_\u0026rdquo; prefix, the report name and the \u0026ldquo;.mrt\u0026rdquo; file extension. The prefix depends on the selected language. You can choose any name you like. This file name will be used to save the report on the disk. Description (Cover) The text entered here will appear on the cover page. This field is optional, i.e. you can save the report without a description. Description The report description explains what data the report shows. A report description is provided for each standard Docusnap report. The description does not need to be filled in to save the report. Existing Meta Objects In the area Report Position in the Data Explorer the meta objects of the trees are displayed. Enable the checkbox of the meta object you want to link the report with. The reports will be listed in the tree section below the node of the meta object they are linked with. If you link the report with a meta object of the Report type, the report will replace this meta object in the tree view. If desired, you can change the object the report is linked with and you can link the same report with multiple nodes in the tree. When you click the Designer button, the selected report will open in the Designer where it can be edited.\nBy clicking the New button, you create a new, empty report. Enter all required properties and then click Save to apply your entries.\nTo delete reports that are no longer needed both from this list and from the hard disk, click the Delete button.\nBy clicking the Remove Tables button, all not connected tables can be deleted from the report. Thus, the dictionary in the report will be clearer and the report uses less memory. This button is only active if it is a custom report or a system report which has been customized.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eReports can be managed from the \u003cem\u003eReports\u003c/em\u003e tab in Docusnap Management. This tab allows you to create new reports and edit existing ones. Each report has properties, such as a name, author and language. These properties can also be edited from this tab.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll reports are listed in the tree view. The tree view consists of meta objects. For a detailed description of \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/\" title=\"meta objects\"\u003emeta objects\u003c/a\u003e, see the \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/\" title=\"meta objects\"\u003emeta objects\u003c/a\u003e section. Each report can be linked with one or more meta objects. This determines the position of the report in the tree structure. The link is defined for every report.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-management/","title":"Report Management"},{"content":"Reports are created and displayed in the Report tab of the Main Window after selecting a Report type object in the Explorer.\nThe following functions are available in the action bar.\nExport: Reports may be exported to various file formats. The desired format can be selected by clicking the button. When you click the desired format, a dialog appears where you can select the pages to be exported. Click the plus sign to expand the settings dialog. Then, you can select format-specific settings. If the file should automatically be opened after the save, enable the Open After Export checkbox.\nSave: Click the button to save the executed report as an .mdc file.\nSend: Reports may be sent by email. As with Export, the desired file format can be selected by clicking the button. The page selection dialog will be opened after you have selected the desired file format. Once the report has been saved, the standard email program opens so that you can send the report. MAPI support is required.\nPrint: The displayed report can be printed by clicking the button.\nOpen: Saved reports can be opened by clicking the Open button. Only reports that have been saved as .mdc files may be opened in this manner.\nRefresh: By clicking on the Refresh button, the report is generated again. For reports with a preceding form the settings can be specified again.\nReport Designer: The current report can be opened in the Report Designer. To do so, click the Report Designer button.\nSearch: When you click the Search button, the search toolbar will appear on the status bar of the main window. This toolbar can be used to search the displayed report.\nEdit: To edit the displayed report, click the Edit button. Editable fields are indicated with red borders. You can specify in the report definition whether a field in the report is editable or not. In the predefined Docusnap reports, only the headings can be edited. The results of the reports are not editable. Once the report has been opened in the Designer, its properties may be edited to make certain report sections editable.\nBookmarks: You can define bookmarks for your report. If bookmarks have been defined for a report, you can display them by clicking the Bookmarks button. This button is disabled if no bookmarks exist.\nThumbnail view: Thumbnails of the report pages will be displayed to the right of the data window. You can display or hide the preview pages by clicking the Thumbnail View button.\nSchedule as Job: Click the Schedule as Job button to open the Report Automation wizard. The execution of a report can be scheduled for a later time using this wizard.\nThe navigation and search bar is displayed at the bottom of the main window. You will find the zoom functions in the bottom right corner. In addition, the desired page layout can be selected there. Click the button to display the executed report in the full width of the main window.\nWhen you click the Search button, a search bar opens at the bottom of the main window. Here, you can enter your search criteria.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eReports are created and displayed in the \u003cem\u003eReport\u003c/em\u003e tab of the Main Window after selecting a \u003cem\u003eReport\u003c/em\u003e type object in the Explorer.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe following functions are available in the action bar.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExport: Reports may be exported to various file formats. The desired format can be selected by clicking the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/reports/docusnap-export-icon.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Export-Icon\" title=\"Docusnap-Export-Icon\"\u003e button. When you click the desired format, a dialog appears where you can select the pages to be exported. Click the \u003cem\u003eplus\u003c/em\u003e sign to expand the settings dialog. Then, you can select format-specific settings. If the file should automatically be opened after the save, enable the \u003cem\u003eOpen After Export\u003c/em\u003e checkbox.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/reports/","title":"Reports"},{"content":"The Scheduling step is available in all wizards. To schedule the execution the tasks of the wizard at a later point of time, check the checkbox Schedule Documentation.\nAssign a unique name to the batch job in the Name field so that it can be identified by its name in the scheduling dialogs. The field to the right is used to summarize the selected configuration.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eScheduling\u003c/em\u003e step is available in all wizards. To schedule the execution the tasks of the wizard at a later point of time, check the checkbox \u003cem\u003eSchedule Documentation.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAssign a unique name to the batch job in the \u003cem\u003eName\u003c/em\u003e field so that it can be identified by its name in the scheduling dialogs. The field to the right is used to summarize the selected configuration.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/basic-steps/scheduling/docusnap-documentation-scheduling.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Documentation-Scheduling\" title=\"Docusnap-Documentation-Scheduling\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/basic-steps/scheduling/","title":"Scheduling"},{"content":"The Scheduling step is available in all wizards.\nIf the Schedule Inventory checkbox is not selected, the inventory can be initiated by clicking the Start button.\nIf the inventory is executed automatically, the Docusnap Server or one of Discovery Services is used. For this reason, the scheduling is disabled when the Client Discovery is selected. To schedule the execution the tasks of the wizard at a later point of time, check the checkbox Schedule Inventory.\nAssign a unique name to the job in the Name field so that it can be identified by its name in the scheduling dialogs. The field to the right is used to summarize the selected configuration.\nIf the server or discovery service is in a different time zone than the Docusnap installation, the option to use time zones can be enabled. During scheduling, you can define whether the specified time is from the time zone of the server or the discovery service, or whether it is the UTC time. The setting in the Time Zone of Execution field defines which time is used.\nClick the Finish button to save the configuration of the job and close the wizard. The Docusnap Server will execute the inventory at the scheduled time automatically.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eScheduling\u003c/em\u003e step is available in all wizards.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the \u003cem\u003eSchedule Inventory\u003c/em\u003e checkbox is not selected, the inventory can be initiated by clicking the \u003cem\u003eStart\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-warning\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    If the inventory is executed automatically, the Docusnap Server or one of Discovery Services is used. For this reason, the scheduling is disabled when the Client Discovery is selected.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTo schedule the execution the tasks of the wizard at a later point of time, check the checkbox \u003cem\u003eSchedule Inventory.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/scheduling/","title":"Scheduling"},{"content":"Site items are all items that can be added to a site. These are e.g. servers, network sockets, assets such as air conditioners or fire extinguishers.\nPlease note that the elements are only assigned to the site. They have to be positioned in the site map afterwards and assigned to an object. Create and Manage Site Elements Site elements can be created, edited and deleted within the Site Elements tab.\nWithin the Site Elements grid, elements can be assigned to sites. The assigned elements can then be positioned in the site map.\nSite Element Map The Site Element Map provides a graphical overview of the selected element. Furthermore, cable connections are defined here, properties are adapted and system assignments are implemented.\nThe Site Element Map can be opened via the context menu in the tab Site Elements.\nIf other elements are connected to the selected element, the direct connections are displayed in the Site Element Map.\nThe mouse over function for individual cabling displays more detailed information about this.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eSite items are all items that can be added to a site. These are e.g. servers, network sockets, assets such as air conditioners or fire extinguishers.\u003c/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-success\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    Please note that the elements are only assigned to the site. They have to be positioned in the site map afterwards and assigned to an object.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"create-and-manage-site-elements\"\u003eCreate and Manage Site Elements\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSite elements can be created, edited and deleted within the \u003cem\u003eSite Elements\u003c/em\u003e tab.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/site-elements/","title":"Site Elements"},{"content":"There are predefined types for the sites. If you want to create sites of a different type, the required types can be created via the site types.\nIn the Site Types tab, the New button can be used to add additional types. You can choose any name you like. The English text is displayed in the combo box of the form for creating the sites. When the German language is set, the text German is displayed. To edit a type highlight it. Then the text can be changed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThere are predefined types for the sites. If you want to create sites of a different type, the required types can be created via the site types.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eSite Types\u003c/em\u003e tab, the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button can be used to add additional types. You can choose any name you like. The English text is displayed in the combo box of the form for creating the sites. When the German language is set, the text German is displayed. To edit a type highlight it. Then the text can be changed.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/site-types/","title":"Site Types"},{"content":"To show the contents of a table and its child table in a single row, you can use a sub-report.\nIn this example, the dates of all inventory scans performed on this computer are shown. The data is found in the tHosts and tDocu tables.\nFirst, create a header band with the System Name and Scan Date headings. Then, add a data band using the tHosts table as the data source and add a text box containing the HostName.\nNext, create a sub-report. To create the sub-report, use the icon from the Toolbox.\nDocusnap automatically adds an additional page where you can define the sub-report.\nCreate a data band, in this example the data band with the tDocu data source, on the sub-report page. Add the text boxes for the data of this child data band here. In this example, add a text box for the Scan Date from the tDocu table.\nWhen generating a report, Docusnap creates all defined pages with a cover page, a footer and a header. However, since the sub-report only involves a \u0026ldquo;page\u0026rdquo; that will be output as part of another table, neither a cover page nor a header or footer should be shown for it. For this reason, enter the word SubReport in the Tag property of the Interaction group on the Properties tab of the sub-report. This ensures that these \u0026ldquo;pages\u0026rdquo; will neither be given a cover page nor a header or a footer. As the master component of the data band, you can use the data band where the sub-report will be inserted. Create the connection to the master component using a relation or a parameter. After the tHosts and tDocu tables have been connected to the database, the report can be executed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo show the contents of a table and its child table in a single row, you can use a sub-report.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn this example, the dates of all inventory scans performed on this computer are shown. The data is found in the \u003cem\u003etHosts\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003etDocu\u003c/em\u003e tables.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFirst, create a header band with the \u003cem\u003eSystem Name\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eScan Date\u003c/em\u003e headings. Then, add a data band using the \u003cem\u003etHosts\u003c/em\u003e table as the data source and add a text box containing the \u003cem\u003eHostName.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/special-reporting-techniques/sub-reports/","title":"Sub-reports"},{"content":"Systems, and the software installed on them, may be excluded from license management either by means of the Exclude Systems button or the Exclude from License Management checkbox in the editor window. Clicking the Exclude Systems button opens a dialog where you can edit the exclusion list.\nAfter you have selected the corresponding company, all systems associated with this company and running an operating system which is taken into account in License Management will appear in the list below it. By enabling the checkbox next to a particular system, you can exclude it from License Management. Accordingly, systems without a checkmark will be included in the License Management process. You can quickly and easily undo a previous system exclusion by clearing the corresponding checkbox again.\nExcluding certain systems from license management may be useful, for example, if a system is operated as a test environment for which no actual license is required. If a company has a great number of inventoried systems, it might be a good idea to use the filter options of to the list to filter the systems, for example, by domain and thus facilitate their selection.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eSystems, and the software installed on them, may be excluded from license management either by means of the \u003cem\u003eExclude Systems\u003c/em\u003e button or the \u003cem\u003eExclude from License Management\u003c/em\u003e checkbox in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/editor/\" title=\"editor\"\u003eeditor\u003c/a\u003e window. Clicking the \u003cem\u003eExclude Systems\u003c/em\u003e button opens a dialog where you can edit the exclusion list.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfter you have selected the corresponding company, all systems associated with this company and running an operating system which is taken into account in License Management will appear in the list below it. By enabling the checkbox next to a particular system, you can exclude it from License Management. Accordingly, systems without a checkmark will be included in the License Management process. You can quickly and easily undo a previous system exclusion by clearing the corresponding checkbox again.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/system-exclusions/","title":"System Exclusions"},{"content":"Click the Table of Contents button to add a table of contents to your concept. The captions of the individual elements are listed in the table of contents together with their page number. To create a table of contents, you must apply heading styles to the text you want to include, e.g. Headline 1, Headline 2, etc. The Concept Editor scans the concept for these headings and then generates the table of contents.\nWhen you click the Table of Contents button, various designs are displayed that can be selected for the table of contents.\nTo update the table of contents, click the Refresh button in the General ribbon.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eTable of Contents\u003c/em\u003e button to add a table of contents to your concept. The captions of the individual elements are listed in the table of contents together with their page number. To create a table of contents, you must apply heading styles to the text you want to include, e.g. Headline 1, Headline 2, etc. The Concept Editor scans the concept for these headings and then generates the table of contents.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/create-concept/table-of-contents/","title":"Table of Contents"},{"content":"The directory report lists all users or groups, which have a permission to a specific directory. In the User/Group Filter users and groups can be defined that are to be excluded from the report. After that, the defined lists are displayed in the wizard and can be selected.\nClick the User/Group Filter button in the IT Secuirty ribbon to open the User/Group Filter dialog. Via the New button a new list is created. For every list a title and a designation in English and in German is required. Select in the Company list field, the company for which the list of users and groups should be defined. Enter the name of the wanted user or the wanted group in the Search text box. Once the first letter is entered, the matching entries are suggested. Users and groups can be added via click on the Add button.\nClick the button in the Search text box to open the Advanced Search dialog. The selection of users and groups in the advanced search works the same way as when you add the user for the analysis of the effective permissions.\nFor groups you can select via the Resolve Recursively checkbox, if only direct users of this group should not be considered or if the users of the subordinate groups will also not be listed in the reports.\nClick the button to delete the respective entry.\nClick the save button to save the new list or the changes.\nThe users and groups that should be excluded, can also be defined in the Directory Permissions wizard. If the same users and groups are excluded regularly from the report, the user/group filter offers the advantage that the list must be only defined once.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe directory report lists all users or groups, which have a permission to a specific directory. In the \u003cem\u003eUser/Group Filter\u003c/em\u003e users and groups can be defined that are to be excluded from the report. After that, the defined lists are displayed in the wizard and can be selected.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eUser/Group Filter\u003c/em\u003e button in the \u003cem\u003eIT Secuirty\u003c/em\u003e ribbon to open the \u003cem\u003eUser/Group Filter\u003c/em\u003e dialog. Via the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button a new list is created. For every list a title and a designation in English and in German is required. Select in the Company list field, the company for which the list of users and groups should be defined. Enter the name of the wanted user or the wanted group in the \u003cem\u003eSearch\u003c/em\u003e text box. Once the first letter is entered, the matching entries are suggested. Users and groups can be added via click on the \u003cem\u003eAdd\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/analysis/user-group-filter/","title":"User/Group Filter"},{"content":"To save a concept, click the Save button. This opens a submenu where you can decide whether to simply save the concept, to save it as a new version, or to save it as a template. When you select As New Version, the current state of the concept will be saved as a separate version. Versions are displayed together with their save date below the concept node in the Docusnap tree view. You can also enter an additional description. This description is displayed behind the version.\nFor each concept, you may create up to ten different versions. When this number is reached and you save a new version, the oldest version will be deleted. The number of versions can be changed in the Options - Documents dialog. To exclude a version from deletion, you can click the Keep button and set this version as not to be deleted. A version flagged as to be kept will be excluded from the count of ten versions that can be stored.\nRestore By clicking the Restore button the selected version can be restored. Thus, the current concept is replaced and the selected version can be edited. The restored version will remain.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo save a concept, click the \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e button. This opens a submenu where you can decide whether to simply save the concept, to save it as a new version, or to save it as a template. When you select \u003cem\u003eAs New Version,\u003c/em\u003e the current state of the concept will be saved as a separate version. Versions are displayed together with their save date below the concept node in the Docusnap tree view. You can also enter an additional description. This description is displayed behind the version.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/versions/","title":"Versions"},{"content":"Normally, the app is created within the application. However, there are situations where the app is created directly with Azure, for example, when the Docusnap administrator does not have the required \u0026ldquo;Global Admin\u0026rdquo; role. In these cases, the external app is configured accordingly to be used for the inventory of cloud products.\nThe secret key can be specified in the app authentication area. In addition, a certificate can be assigned to the app, which is also specified here. Although Docusnap currently only requires the certificate for the Exchange Online module, it is possible that future modules will also require a valid certificate.\nA detailed description of the required permissions can be found in the chapter Azure Apps Permissions.\nClicking the Add Azure App Manually button opens the dialog for entering the Azure App data. The Azure App Name can be chosen arbitrarily and does not have to correspond to the name in Azure. The Directory Name, Directory ID, Application ID and Key must be specified for this Azure App to be used. The certificate and certificate password are only required if an Exchange Online inventory should be executed. Does not apply to the Exchange inventory in the course of the Microsoft 365 inventory.\nClicking the Add button creates the Azure app in Docusnap. It does not check if this app exists. To be sure, you can test in the Manage Azure App dialog via Verify App whether the app exists and what permissions it has.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eNormally, the app is created within the application. However, there are situations where the app is created directly with Azure, for example, when the Docusnap administrator does not have the required \u0026ldquo;Global Admin\u0026rdquo; role. In these cases, the external app is configured accordingly to be used for the inventory of cloud products.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe secret key can be specified in the app authentication area. In addition, a certificate can be assigned to the app, which is also specified here. Although Docusnap currently only requires the certificate for the \u003cem\u003eExchange Online\u003c/em\u003e module, it is possible that future modules will also require a valid certificate.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/azure-apps-manual/","title":"Add Azure Apps Manually"},{"content":"Additional Information can be used to store further information about individual objects. Using extensions, you can create comments, financial records, passwords, contracts and tasks.\nThe tabs for entering comments, financial records, passwords, contracts or tasks will appear when you select the respective object in the Data Explorer. Alternatively, the additional information can also be entered under the heading Organization in the inventory tree.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eAdditional Information\u003c/em\u003e can be used to store further information about individual objects. Using extensions, you can create \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/comments/\" title=\"comments\"\u003ecomments\u003c/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/financial-records/\" title=\"financial records\"\u003efinancial records\u003c/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/passwords/\" title=\"passwords\"\u003epasswords\u003c/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/contracts/\" title=\"contracts\"\u003econtracts\u003c/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/tasks/\" title=\"tasks\"\u003etasks\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe tabs for entering comments, financial records, passwords, contracts or tasks will appear when you select the respective object in the Data Explorer. Alternatively, the additional information can also be entered under the heading \u003cem\u003eOrganization\u003c/em\u003e in the inventory tree.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/additional-information/docusnap-data-explorer-extensions-passwords.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Data-Explorer-Extensions-Passwords\" title=\"Docusnap-Data-Explorer-Extensions-Passwords\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/additional-information/","title":"Additional Information"},{"content":"SNMP devices are scanned during the SNMP inventory. These do not provide any information as to whether the device found is a switch, router or printer, for example.\nIn the Docusnap Management, you can define keywords that will be compared with the identified SNMP equipment. Then, Docusnap is able to indicate the correct type in the tree view and reports. The value that will be used for comparison with the keyword is specified in the Description column of scanned devices. Keywords that are often used for SNMP devices are predefined. The value with which the keyword is compared can be found in the Description column of the inventoried devices. To ensure that the correct type is output, the entered keyword must be found in the description of the SNMP device.\nAssign SNMP Base Type Manually It is also possible to permanently assign a different SNMP base type to an SNMP device via the context menu or via the grid. Standard and user-defined base types are taken into account. If the type is set manually, it will not be overwritten during the next inventory. The column Fixed SNMP type is displayed for each SNMP device and provides information about whether this device was assigned to this SNMP base class via an automatism or via manual assignment.\nSelection via Context Menu\nIn the context menu of the SNMP device, the dialog for manual assignment can be opened via the Assign SNMP Type button. The desired base type can then be selected in this dialog.\nSelection in the Grid\nIn the grid, several devices can be assigned to an SNMP base class at the same time. For the assignment, the checkboxes for the respective devices must be activated and the dialog for the assignment must be opened via the Assign SNMP Type button. The desired base type can then be selected in this dialog and the type is changed for all selected devices.\nRemove Manual Assignments\nTo set a device back to automatic assignment, you can use the Remove Manual Assignment button in the context menu of the device or above the grid to remove the fixed assignment.\nAssignment by a matched keyword in the description text \u0026gt; The device is assigned immediately Assignment by SNMP scan (e.g. switch detection) \u0026gt; The device is not assigned until the next scan. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eSNMP devices are scanned during the SNMP inventory. These do not provide any information as to whether the device found is a switch, router or printer, for example.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eDocusnap Management\u003c/em\u003e, you can define keywords that will be compared with the identified SNMP equipment. Then, Docusnap is able to indicate the correct type in the tree view and reports. The value that will be used for comparison with the keyword is specified in the \u003cem\u003eDescription\u003c/em\u003e column of scanned devices. Keywords that are often used for SNMP devices are predefined. The value with which the keyword is compared can be found in the Description column of the inventoried devices. To ensure that the correct type is output, the entered keyword must be found in the description of the SNMP device.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/assign-snmp-base-type/","title":"Assign SNMP Base Type"},{"content":"Whenever a concept is saved, a backup is created. As a result, older versions can always be restored and changes can be tracked. By default, up to 10 backups per concept are stored. This number can be adjusted in the Options - Documents dialog. Older backups will be deleted. The Keep button allows the selected backup not to be deleted.\nRestore Click on the Restore button to restore the currently selected backup. This will replace the current concept and allow the selected backup to be edited. The restored backup will remain.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWhenever a concept is saved, a backup is created. As a result, older versions can always be restored and changes can be tracked. By default, up to 10 backups per concept are stored. This number can be adjusted in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/options/\" title=\"Options - Documents\"\u003eOptions - Documents\u003c/a\u003e dialog. Older backups will be deleted. The \u003cem\u003eKeep\u003c/em\u003e button allows the selected backup not to be deleted.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"restore\"\u003eRestore\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick on the \u003cem\u003eRestore\u003c/em\u003e button to restore the currently selected backup. This will replace the current concept and allow the selected backup to be edited. The restored backup will remain.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/backups/","title":"Backups"},{"content":"Update Options If the Check for Updates on Startup checkbox is enabled, Docusnap checks for new updates each time you start the program. To avoid the update check upon startup, clear the Check for Updates on Startup checkbox. The Update feature can also be started during program operation by clicking the und Update button in the title bar.\nIn the Timeout field, you can specify (in seconds) how long the update routine will try to connect to the update server before a timeout occurs.\nFor the update to be successful, the endpoint https://update13.docusnap.com must be reachable.\nProxy Server By default, the proxy server set in the Internet Options of your machine will be used. If a different proxy server should be used for the update process, specify the details for this server in the Proxy Server group.\nServer API Connection The Server API connection is necessary for scheduling and processing jobs for Docusnap Server and Discovery Service. The URL must match the Docusnap Server setting in the Server API step.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"update-options\"\u003eUpdate Options\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the Check for \u003cem\u003eUpdates on Startup\u003c/em\u003e checkbox is enabled, Docusnap checks for new updates each time you start the program. To avoid the update check upon startup, clear the \u003cem\u003eCheck for Updates on Startup\u003c/em\u003e checkbox. The Update feature can also be started during program operation by clicking the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/settings/options/connections/docusnap-title-bar-help.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Help\" title=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Help\"\u003e und \u003cem\u003eUpdate\u003c/em\u003e button in the title bar.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eTimeout\u003c/em\u003e field, you can specify (in seconds) how long the update routine will try to connect to the update server before a timeout occurs.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/settings/options/connections/","title":"Connections"},{"content":"Docusnap allows you to export data for import into another database. This way, it is possible to get the data from a temporary database on a notebook into a central database.\nThe dialog used to perform the data import can be opened from the All Jobs area by clicking the DB Import button.\nIn the first step, you need to select a source database from which the data will be imported. For this purpose, you can select an SQL or a local database. These two database systems are fully compatible with each other. This means that data exported from an SQL database can be imported into a local database, and vice versa.\nIn the next step, select the import settings. The companies and domains that exist in the database to be imported are displayed on the left. The companies existing in the target database are displayed on the right. You can import an entire company, or an individual domain into the target database. As you go, you can either import the domain data to an existing company, or you can re-create the original company from the source database.\nFor the target database, you can decide to re-create the company from the source database in the target database or to integrate the data into an existing company. If you select the Integrate Company from Source Database option, a new company will be created. If a company with the same name already exists, a second company with this name will be created.\nIf you select the Integrate in an existing Company option, the exported data will be integrated into the selected company.\nWhen assigning companies automatically, Docusnap does not compare by company name, but rather uses an internal GUID (Globally Unique IDentifier). This may result in two companies existing with the same name after the export. The best method is to select a company in the target database explicitly. During the import process, Docusnap will check whether a specific snapshot has already been imported. If this is the case, this snapshot will be excluded from the import process. Furthermore, Docusnap will check for each system whether the number of allowed archives will be exceeded. The oldest snapshots will be deleted, if necessary.\nIf you want to exclude certain source database modules from the import, clear the checkmark for those you do not want. If, for example, only the Windows checkbox is enabled, nothing but the workstation and server data will be imported. In addition, only snapshots containing data for the selected modules will be displayed in the Snapshot step.\nTo import additional information associated with source database objects, enable the Import Additional Information checkbox.\nIf you enable the Overwrite existing Data checkbox, the properties of static objects from the source database will overwrite those existing in the target database. Thus, for example, the street address of a company that has been selected in the source database would overwrite the street address in the target database. Please note that this feature will only affect static objects and not the snapshots.\nIf you wish to import the diagrams that exist in your database, enable the Import Diagrams checkbox.\nIn addition, you can import any passwords that have been created. For this purpose, an encryption file is required. To select it, click the icon and select the file. Its name will then be displayed in the Import Encryption File field.\nHere, a list of snapshots from the selected source database is displayed. To find snapshots more quickly, you can either name them when doing the inventory scan, or you can assign a name to them in the Manage Snapshots dialog. To the right of the snapshot list, a filter is available for easier selection of individual snapshots.\nIf the number of archives has been set to 4 in the Options dialog and the source database contains, for example, seven snapshots with WMI data, the 3 oldest snapshots will not be imported! Finally, a summary page provides an overview of the modules and snapshots to be imported. If you want to change any of the data import settings, click the Back button. Click the Next button to switch to the Scheduling step.\nThrough Scheduling, you can specify that the Data Import routine will start automatically at a later point in time. In the Scheduling step, you can define whether the import will be a one-time or a recurring event. Please note, however, that this feature can only be used if the Docusnap Server is installed on a system in the network. If the data import is scheduled, the schedule is saved by clicking on the Finish button and the wizard closes. If the checkbox Schedule Database Import was not activated, click the Start button to start the import process.\nDuring the database import, its status will be displayed. To abort the import process, click the Cancel button. The data that has been imported up to that moment will be retained in the target database. Finally, the Report page will be displayed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap allows you to export data for import into another database. This way, it is possible to get the data from a temporary database on a notebook into a central database.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dialog used to perform the data import can be opened from the \u003cem\u003eAll Jobs\u003c/em\u003e area by clicking the \u003cem\u003eDB Import\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/database-import/docusnap-advanced-database.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Advanced-Database\" title=\"Docusnap-Advanced-Database\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the first step, you need to select a source database from which the data will be imported. For this purpose, you can select an SQL or a local database. These two database systems are fully compatible with each other. This means that data exported from an SQL database can be imported into a local database, and vice versa.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/database-import/","title":"Database Import"},{"content":"The Define Notification tab is opened by clicking the Define Notification button.\nIn the Define Notification you can set the name and the statement for the notification. An e-mail will only be sent if the SQL statement returns a result set. If the query returns the same result as the previous query, nothing will be sent.\nSome predefined notification types provided with the Docusnap installation.\nYou can choose the notification title as desired. If you work with the English user interface, the text you enter in the English Text field will be displayed when you select the notification from the wizard. If Docusnap has been set to German, the content from the German Text field will be used. You can optionally specify a description for each notification you define.\nIf the selected SQL statement returns at least one result row, an e-mail will be sent. The results will be submitted in an Excel file attached to the e-mail. All columns used in the SQL statement will be reflected in the Excel file. The SQL statement may use all tables available from the selected database.\nYou can use the company {ACCOUNT}, the domain {DOMAIN} and the current date {NOW} as variables in the SQL statement.\nIf you disable the Active checkbox, this definition will not be available for selection from the notification wizard.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eDefine Notification\u003c/em\u003e tab is opened by clicking the \u003cem\u003eDefine Notification\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Define Notification you can set the name and the statement for the notification. An e-mail will only be sent if the SQL statement returns a result set. If the query returns the same result as the previous query, nothing will be sent.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSome predefined notification types provided with the Docusnap installation.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can choose the notification title as desired. If you work with the English user interface, the text you enter in the \u003cem\u003eEnglish Text\u003c/em\u003e field will be displayed when you select the notification from the wizard. If Docusnap has been set to German, the content from the \u003cem\u003eGerman Text\u003c/em\u003e field will be used. You can optionally specify a description for each notification you define.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/define-notification/","title":"Define Notification"},{"content":"Data that has been determined by the network scan can be exported to files using the Documentation feature.\nYou can create maps of your network as well as of the Active Directory, etc. These maps can be opened in Visio.\nGeneral Use the options in this group to set the folder structure and to format the documentation to be created.\nCreating Documentation To create the documentation, various wizards are available.\nDocumentation View Docusnap has a specific Documents tree view which allows you to manage the documents you create.\nPrinting Documentation Datasheets and overviews can be printed using the Print Documentation wizard.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eData that has been determined by the network scan can be exported to files using the Documentation feature.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can create maps of your network as well as of the Active Directory, etc. These maps can be opened in Visio.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"general\"\u003eGeneral\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the options in this group to set the folder structure and to format the documentation to be created.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"creating-documentation\"\u003eCreating Documentation\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo create the documentation, various wizards are available.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/","title":"Documentation"},{"content":"Opening the Designer As a simple example of a full user-defined data entry screen, this section will explain how to create a suitable user interface for the SLA object already explained in the preceding sections. For this purpose, first select the SLA_Data object in Docusnap Management in Manage Objects. Click the Data Entry Screen button to open the empty data entry screen. Once the Designer is open the data entry screen can be crated.\nDesigning the User Interface In order to be able to enter all data that is required to create a total of five controls are necessary which will be briefly introduced in the table below, including their properties. The Control column indicates the type; the Field Name column the value of the Fieldname property; and the Notes column shows other required settings.\nControl Field Name Characteristics Layout Control Dock: Fill Text Box xName TabIndex: 1; IsMandatory: True Text Box xResponsible TabIndex: 2 Text Box xHours TabIndex: 3; TextConstraint: Dezimalzahl Combo Box xPriority TabIndex: 4; SourceType: DcInitials; SourceValue: RePriority In the first step add a Layout Control. By setting the property Dock to Fill the control spreads to the whole surface. Subsequently, add three text boxes and a combo box. Then the user interface should appear as shown in the figure below and have all required features. All four data entry controls need to be connected to the corresponding columns in the Docusnap database by specifying the column name the Fieldname property. The combo box will be filled with a predefined list of different selectable priority settings, because you assigned the REPRIORITY reference value.\nIf you added and configured all controls properly on the Properties tab, you can save the new data entry screen by clicking the Save button in the toolbox. Depending upon the active configuration, the data entry screen will be stored in the folder for local or team settings. If you want that other users have access to the new data entry screen too, you need to distribute the corresponding file to these users. For more information on this topic, refer to the Distributing Customizations section below.\nTesting the Newly Created Data Entry Screen To test if the newly created data entry screen works properly, close Docusnap Management. Now, it is possible to create a new SLA object by selecting the SLA caption and clicking the New button above the Inventory tree view. The newly created data entry screen will appear in the main window of Docusnap and users can enter and edit data as required. By clicking the Save button above the Inventory tree view, the data is saved directly in the current or new record of the user-defined Docusnap table.\nPlease note that errors that occur during this test are not necessarily caused by errors in the data entry screen. Due to the fact that this SLA example consists of three components, errors may arise from any one of the components and might only now become visible. For example, if data input controls are shown in read-only mode, it is very likely that Docusnap was not able to establish the connection to the database column. In most cases, this error is due to incorrect or missing settings for the Fieldname property of the respective controls. ","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"opening-the-designer\"\u003eOpening the Designer\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs a simple example of a full user-defined data entry screen, this section will explain how to create a suitable user interface for the SLA object already explained in the preceding sections. For this purpose, first select the SLA_Data object in Docusnap Management in \u003cem\u003eManage Objects.\u003c/em\u003e Click the \u003cem\u003eData Entry Screen\u003c/em\u003e button to open the empty data entry screen. Once the \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/designer/\" title=\"Designer\"\u003eDesigner\u003c/a\u003e is open the data entry screen can be crated.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/example/","title":"Example"},{"content":"You can export all static data related to the registered software products to an external file, so that these settings need not be re-entered from scratch, for example, when switching between databases. Click the Export button in the Licenses ribbon to open a dialog where you can save the data on registered software products to an external file.\nYou can specify the file to which you want to export the corresponding data in a field at the top of the dialog. Clicking the button will open a file/path selection dialog. The table in the Export Definitions dialog shows a list of all products registered for all companies in this database. Please note that only software products whose checkbox is enabled will be exported.\nIf software products are exported to which software entries have been assigned via the software list, these software entries are also exported. If the entries already exist in the database into which the license definition is imported, the entries are updated.\nIn the software licensing dialog, software entries can also be marked as not relevant or undesired. If the Not Relevant Software Products and Undesired Software Products check boxes are activated, these software entries are also exported to the license definition. Thereby, the corresponding entries in the database, into which the license definition is imported, will be updated and also defined as not relevant or undesired. If an entry does not exist yet, a new entry is created so that if this software is included in a future inventory, it is already defined as undesired or not relevant. When importing, you can select whether the not relevant or undesired software entries are to be imported.\nThe Additional Information check box allows you to define whether additional information that has been created for the selected software products should also be exported to the license definition.\nClick the Export button to export all selected software products to the specified file.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eYou can export all static data related to the registered \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/licensing/\" title=\"software products\"\u003esoftware products\u003c/a\u003e to an external file, so that these settings need not be re-entered from scratch, for example, when switching between databases. Click the \u003cem\u003eExport\u003c/em\u003e button in the Licenses ribbon to open a dialog where you can save the data on registered software products to an external file.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can specify the file to which you want to export the corresponding data in a field at the top of the dialog. Clicking the\n\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/export-definitions/docusnap-open-path.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-open-path\" title=\"Docusnap-open-path\"\u003e button will open a file/path selection dialog. The table in the \u003cem\u003eExport Definitions\u003c/em\u003e dialog shows a list of all products registered for all companies in this database. Please note that only software products whose checkbox is enabled will be exported.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/export-definitions/","title":"Export Definitions"},{"content":"When you start Docusnap for the first time, the Docusnap Start Wizard opens to help you with the configuration of Docusnap for operation.\nThe first step consists in selecting the Docusnap license file. Docusnap can only be used with a valid license.\nInsert in the Activation Key field the activation key received by e-mail. Click the Activate button, to check the license for validity.\nBy using the offline activation it is possible to operate Docusnap in an isolated environment. In the first step it is necessary to enter the activation code provided in the configuration wizard. Then another dialog must be opened by clicking on Offline Activation, by means of which the file (DocusnapActivationRequest.txt) can be created. This file which contains the fingerprint of the isolated system.\nIn a second step, the file DocusnapActivationRequest.txt is to be uploaded to the Website https://www.docusnap.com/en/offline-activation in order to receive the final license file (DocusnapOfflineLicense.txt) for a successful activation of Docusnap.\nAfter selecting the DocusnapOfflineLicense.txt within the configuration wizard, Docusnap can be activated by clicking the Activate button.\nShould modifications to the license setup be required, such as the extension of the number of licensed systems, the complete process of generating an activation request file, uploading it and importing the license file has to be repeated. Accordingly, the same steps are required if, for example, the virtual machine was reset.\nFollowing the successful activation of Docusnap proceed with the configuration.\nConfiguration Wizard Following the successful activation of Docusnap proceed by selecting whether the configuration for the Docusnap Server is started in addition to the Docusnap Client configuration.\nWith the configuration of the Docusnap Server the Server API and Docusnap Web are also activated. Without an activated user management Docusnap Web is available for all users.\nHere you can choose between the Docusnap Quickstart and start the configuration wizard. In the Docusnap Quickstart, the default settings are used for paths etc. and Docusnap starts immediately. If the creation of the local database is performed during the installation of Docusnap, it is used automatically for the Quickstart. If not, a dialog for choosing between the local database and SQL Server opens.\nIn the next step, the database for storing the data will be set. Both Microsoft SQL Server databases and local databases are supported. For reasons of performance and compatibility, we recommend the use of Microsoft SQL Server.\nMicrosoft SQL Server\nCompatibility: SQL Server 2012 or later versions. In addition to the Microsoft Server retail products (Standard \u0026amp; Enterprise), the Express versions of SQL Server are also supported. When using SQL Server in the network, make sure that the server has been configured for remote access via TCP/IP and that the permissions for Windows or SQL authentication have been set properly.\nLocal Database (Microsoft Server Express LocalDB)\nIf the local database does not already exist on the system, it can be created as part of the Docusnap installation.\nThe paths for the documentation, the team settings, the local settings and the storage location of attachments can be defined on the Settings page.\nBase Path: A base path can be selected, in which the respective folders are created and in which then the data is stored. Through the Adjust settings individually checkbox, the paths can also be change individually.\nDocumentation: All of the documents (data sheets, map files, overviews) will be stored in this directory, according to the structure of Docusnap. When creating the documentation, you have the option to select a different path. Check-out path: When defining Extensions it is possible to add attachments. These attachments are normally stored in the database. For editing purposes, such attachments will be temporarily stored in the specified directory. Settings: The Settings page includes Local Settings and Team Settings. In order to make user-specific data available to multiple users, a shared path must be specified in the Team Settings field. If the path entered under Team Settings is not available, the path from the Local Settings field will be used instead. You need to create an encryption file to enable the Passwords module in the main window. Encryption ensures that the passwords will be stored in the database in encrypted form. These passwords can only be read by users who use the same encryption file. If you do not create an encryption file, the Passwords module will remain hidden.\nThe encryption file should be treated with great care, since it is not possible to replace or re-create this file should it be lost.\nThe Startup wizard also allows you to configure Docusnap Server.\nThe Startup Type in the step Server Start Settings determines whether the Docusnap server is started automatically or manually.\nIn addition, the debug mode for the Docusnap server can be turned on.\nBy default, the service is run with the local system account. To ensure the connection to the database, it is recommended to use a SQL authentication in the step Server Database.\nThe Docusnap database is the key element for the completion of jobs. It holds the jobs to be processed by the Docusnap Server.\nUse the Documentation Path field to define the location where the documents (overviews and datasheets) will be stored by the Docusnap Server. Click the button to select the folder for storing the documents to be output.\nWhen creating the documentation, Docusnap uses the system account permissions for executing the service. For this reason, make sure that the system account has a write permission to the selected documentation path. Alternatively, you can specify a user or service account with sufficient permissions for the Docusnap Server Windows service.\nThe files and templates used by Docusnap may either be stored on the local hard disk, on a server, or on a different computer in the network. Docusnap will use the path selected for the Team Settings, if any. If no path was selected for the Team Settings or if that path no longer exists, the path defined for the Local Settings will be used.\nThe IT concepts you create are saved under Documentation path.\nThe Docusnap Server only supports UNC addresses for the path specifications to be used. When creating the documentation, Docusnap relies on templates. During the configuration, Docusnap loads these templates into the local or team settings directory. If both paths are not available at the time when the job is processed, Docusnap will use the templates from the program directory.\nWhen all settings have been defined, the configuration of the Docusnap client and the Docusnap server is complete. Once you have completed the configuration, Docusnap 13 will start automatically.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWhen you start Docusnap for the first time, the \u003cem\u003eDocusnap Start Wizard\u003c/em\u003e opens to help you with the configuration of Docusnap for operation.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe first step consists in selecting the Docusnap license file. Docusnap can only be used with a valid license.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/first-start/docusnap-configuration.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Configuration\" title=\"Docusnap-Configuration\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInsert in the Activation Key field the activation key received by e-mail. Click the \u003cem\u003eActivate\u003c/em\u003e button, to check the license for validity.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBy using the offline activation it is possible to operate Docusnap in an isolated environment. In the first step it is necessary to enter the activation code provided in the configuration wizard. Then another dialog must be opened by clicking on \u003cem\u003eOffline Activation,\u003c/em\u003e by means of which the file (DocusnapActivationRequest.txt) can be created. This file which contains the fingerprint of the isolated system.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/first-start/","title":"Getting Started"},{"content":"Once created frameworks can be exported and imported into other Docusnap installations. Only the structure is exported, which contains the views, the levels and the structural elements. The added elements and groups are not exported. The buttons for import and export are displayed in the action bar as soon as the heading IT Documentation or one of the nodes below it is selected.\nImport Framework Clicking the Import Structure button opens the import dialog. For the import, the company must be selected into which the framework should be imported. In the Path field, select the file into which the framework was exported. Then select which frameworks you want to import. Click on the Import button to import the desired frameworks.\nExport Framework Clicking the Export Structure button opens the export dialog. When exporting, you must select from which company the frameworks are to be exported. Use the Path field to choose where the file should be stored. Once the desired frameworks have been selected, they can be exported by clicking the Export button.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eOnce created frameworks can be exported and imported into other Docusnap installations. Only the structure is exported, which contains the views, the levels and the structural elements. The added elements and groups are not exported. The buttons for import and export are displayed in the action bar as soon as the heading \u003cem\u003eIT Documentation\u003c/em\u003e or one of the nodes below it is selected.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/business-structures/import-and-export/docusnap-business-structures-import-export.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Business-Structures-Import-Export\" title=\"Docusnap-Business-Structures-Import-Export\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"import-framework\"\u003eImport Framework\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClicking the \u003cem\u003eImport Structure\u003c/em\u003e button opens the import dialog. For the import, the company must be selected into which the framework should be imported. In the \u003cem\u003ePath\u003c/em\u003e field, select the file into which the framework was exported. Then select which frameworks you want to import. Click on the \u003cem\u003eImport\u003c/em\u003e button to import the desired frameworks.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/business-structures/import-and-export/","title":"Import and Export"},{"content":"An import/export function for the index is available in the Docusnap Enterprise Search options. The file is available as an .xml file. This makes it possible to transfer the index to other databases.\nWhen importing the index file, it is checked whether these fields are available in the database. It is not possible to index customizing fields that are not available in the target database.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eAn import/export function for the index is available in the Docusnap Enterprise Search options. The file is available as an .xml file. This makes it possible to transfer the index to other databases.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen importing the index file, it is checked whether these fields are available in the database. It is not possible to index customizing fields that are not available in the target database.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/enterprise-search/import-and-export/docusnap-enterprise-search-import-export.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Enterprise-Search-Import-Export\" title=\"Docusnap-Enterprise-Search-Import-Export\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/enterprise-search/import-and-export/","title":"Import and Export"},{"content":"During the execution of the inventory the wizard is closed. Thus, Docusnap can continue to be used while the inventory is being performed in the background. By clicking on the button in the title bar, the inventory status can be opened. This dialog displays the progress of the inventory. By clicking on the Cancel button, the inventory can be aborted. Clicking on the Minimize button closes the dialog again.\nThe Status column displays the current status of the inventory. The Information column contains, for example, information about why an inventory failed.\nAll entries are grouped by status. If desired, additional columns can also be added to the grouping using drag \u0026amp; drop.\nClicking on the button lists all interactively executed inventories of the current system, the Docusnap Server and the Discovery Services, which are connected to the same database. If the user management is active, only inventories of companies to which the logged in user is authorized are listed. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDuring the execution of the inventory the wizard is closed. Thus, Docusnap can continue to be used while the inventory is being performed in the background. By clicking on the button \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/inventory-status/docusnap-inventory-status-open.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Status open\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Status open\"\u003e in the title bar, the inventory status can be opened. This dialog displays the progress of the inventory. By clicking on the \u003cem\u003eCancel\u003c/em\u003e button, the inventory can be aborted. Clicking on the \u003cem\u003eMinimize\u003c/em\u003e button closes the dialog again.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/inventory-status/","title":"Inventory Status"},{"content":"The Licenses ribbon is displayed when switching to License Management in the navigation pane.\nClicking the New button will start the License Management Wizard. The desired license can be created using this wizard.\nClick the Assignment button to open the Software Relevant for Licensing dialog. In this dialog all inventoried software products are listed and can be assigned to product licensing.\nThe settings for software groups, software products, search keywords and licenses can be exported and imported into other databases. This means that a software product must only be defined once and can then be re-used with other Docusnap databases.\nIf you want to exclude software pertaining to certain systems, e.g. software used in a test environment, the corresponding systems may be excluded from license management. To exclude such systems, either click the Exclude Systems button or use the editor in the Data Explorer hierarchy of the specific system.\nAdditional functions are available in the action bar.\nThe data of an already created license can be edited using the wizard. Clicking the Edit button will open the License Management wizard with the data for the selected software product, which may then be edited.\nClicking on the Edit License button opens the wizard at the Licenses step so that you can skip all previous steps if you want to make small changes to the license.\nThe defined licenses are displayed in the data explorer License Management.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eLicenses\u003c/em\u003e ribbon is displayed when switching to \u003cem\u003eLicense Management\u003c/em\u003e in the navigation pane.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClicking the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button will start the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/\" title=\"License Management\"\u003eLicense Management\u003c/a\u003e Wizard. The desired license can be created using this wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eAssignment\u003c/em\u003e button to open the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/software-product-licensing/\" title=\"Software Relevant for Licensing\"\u003eSoftware Relevant for Licensing\u003c/a\u003e dialog. In this dialog all inventoried software products are listed and can be assigned to product licensing.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe settings for software groups, software products, search keywords and licenses can be exported and imported into other databases. This means that a software product must only be defined once and can then be re-used with other Docusnap databases.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/navigation/license-management/","title":"License Management"},{"content":"The debug mode helps you to obtain supporting information in case of problems. This information will be used by the Docusnap Support Team for efficient troubleshooting. Once this mode is enabled, any errors as well as additional information will be saved in the database. For more information on this topic, refer to the Troubleshooting chapter.\nThe debug mode for the Docusnap Server can be enabled in the first step of the Configuration wizard.\nEnabling debug mode results in a multitude of debug information being recorded in the database. Make sure to enable this mode only in case of need, as it dramatically reduces the performance of Docusnap due to the analysis executed at runtime. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe debug mode helps you to obtain supporting information in case of problems. This information will be used by the Docusnap Support Team for efficient troubleshooting. Once this mode is enabled, any errors as well as additional information will be saved in the database. For more information on this topic, refer to the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/support-and-help/problem-resolution/\" title=\"Troubleshooting\"\u003eTroubleshooting\u003c/a\u003e chapter.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe debug mode for the Docusnap Server can be enabled in the first step of the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/docusnap-server/configuration/\" title=\"Configuration\"\u003eConfiguration\u003c/a\u003e wizard.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/docusnap-server/logging/","title":"Logging"},{"content":"In the MAC Filter tab learned MAC addresses can be defined as a phone, as a device, or as virtual, to be then displayed with the correct icon in the topology map. If for a MAC address the type Ignore is selected, all devices with this MAC address are excluded from the topology map.\nClick the New button to add a new filter. In the Type combobox is defined how this MAC address will be displayed. Each entry can be activated or deactivated.\nIt is possible to use wildcards in the MAC filter field to specify for example a MAC address segment as phone. All numbers 0-9 and letters A-F are allowed to define the MAC addresses.\nSupported wildcard characters are \u0026ldquo;*\u0026rdquo; to specify any sequence of characters and \u0026ldquo;?\u0026rdquo; to specify exactly one character.\nThe separator between the octets of the MAC address are optional, \u0026ldquo;-\u0026rdquo; and \u0026ldquo;:\u0026rdquo; are supported. When saving the \u0026ldquo;:\u0026rdquo; are automatically converted to \u0026ldquo;-\u0026rdquo;.\nExamples of valid filters:\n00-01-02-03-04-05: The filter is applied exactly to this MAC address\n00-01-02-03-04-??: The filter is applied to all MAC addresses that begin with 00-01-02-03-04-\n00-01-02*: The filter is applied to all MAC addresses that begin with 00-01-02.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eMAC Filter\u003c/em\u003e tab learned MAC addresses can be defined as a phone, as a device, or as virtual, to be then displayed with the correct icon in the topology map. If for a MAC address the type \u003cem\u003eIgnore\u003c/em\u003e is selected, all devices with this MAC address are excluded from the topology map.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button to add a new filter. In the \u003cem\u003eType\u003c/em\u003e combobox is defined how this MAC address will be displayed. Each entry can be activated or deactivated.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/snmp/mac-filter/","title":"MAC Filter"},{"content":"The Docusnap tree structures consist of meta objects that can be extended as desired. In total, five different tree structures are available in Docusnap (Inventory, IT-Security, License Management, Documentation and Data Import.\nMeta objects are the items underlying the individual tree nodes. A node can belong to one of the following categories: Caption, Data, Report, Linked Object, Output or Diagram. Meta objects define the contents and organization of the tree structure. Meta objects of the Data and Report types are placeholders for the corresponding data.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Docusnap tree structures consist of meta objects that can be extended as desired.  In total, five different tree structures are available in Docusnap (Inventory, IT-Security, License Management, Documentation and Data Import.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/docusnap-meta-objects-explorer.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Meta Objects Explorer\" title=\"Docusnap Meta Objects Explorer\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMeta objects are the items underlying the individual tree nodes. A node can belong to one of the following categories: Caption, Data, Report, Linked Object, Output or Diagram. Meta objects define the contents and organization of the tree structure. Meta objects of the Data and Report types are placeholders for the corresponding data.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/","title":"Meta Objects"},{"content":"The autonomous execution of the Discovery-[Module].exe generates a file that can be imported into Docusnap either interactively or automated via the File Import or Multi-Company Import.\nTo not have to create a separate job for each company and domain, the Multi Company Import can be used. This allows DSI files for several companies to be imported simultaneously with one job.\nStoring Structure on the File System The prerequisite for simultaneous import is the following structure within the file system:\n1st level: Root directory E.g. DocusnapImport (name is freely choosable) 2nd level: Company#Domain.FQDN E.g. Docusnap Sports#docusnapsports.com 3rd level: Storage of files Import Files can be imported into Docusnap via the Multi Company Import.\nThe wizard is located in the following ribbons\nDiscovery - All wizards - Multi Company Import Inventory - All Wizards - Multi Company Import All jobs - All wizards - Multi Company Import In the first step, select the appropriate discovery service. When selecting the discovery service, make sure that it has access to the path or paths defined in the next step.\nWhen selecting the directory, the root directory is determined - the appropriate subfolders must be located under it, according to the scheme described previously.\nOptionally, the scan results can be archived (otherwise they will be deleted after import). In case of timed execution, directories newly added to the folder structure are taken into consideration.\nWhen scheduling automatic import, it is important that the user running the Discovery Service has read and write access to the specified root directory and below.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe autonomous execution of the Discovery-[Module].exe generates a file that can be imported into Docusnap either interactively or automated via the \u003cem\u003eFile Import\u003c/em\u003e or \u003cem\u003eMulti-Company Import\u003c/em\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo not have to create a separate job for each company and domain, the \u003cem\u003eMulti Company Import\u003c/em\u003e can be used. This allows DSI files for several companies to be imported simultaneously with one job.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"storing-structure-on-the-file-system\"\u003eStoring Structure on the File System\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe prerequisite for simultaneous import is the following structure within the file system:\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/scripting/global-script-import/","title":"Multi Company Import"},{"content":"Namespaces in customizing mean that each extension of the metaschema (tables, views, data tree objects) can be provided with a namespace. This way, all objects belonging to a larger customizing can be linked to each other. This is especially useful when a specific customizing is to be exported and other customizings already exist in this database.\nIn the course of the export, the specific namespace can now be selected and the associated tables, views and data tree objects exported. The namespaces can be specified or selected when creating a new view, table and meta objects.\nThe namespace must not be longer than 10 characters Special characters and spaces are not allowed! Falls noch kein Namespace erstellt, wird die Firma vorgeschlagen, die bei den Lizenzinformationen eingetragen ist.\nWhen a new table or view is created, the namespace can be entered in the combo box before the table name. The namespace can either be selected from the namespaces already specified or a new namespace can be entered. After the table or view has been saved, the namespace can no longer be changed.\nTables and views of the vendor can be extended by additional columns. When creating the column, the namespace can be entered or selected in the Namespace combo box. This namespace becomes part of the field name to prevent overlaps with other field names during import.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eNamespaces in customizing mean that each extension of the metaschema (tables, views, data tree objects) can be provided with a namespace.\nThis way, all objects belonging to a larger customizing can be linked to each other. This is especially useful when a specific customizing is to be exported and other customizings already exist in this database.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the course of the export, the specific namespace can now be selected and the associated tables, views and data tree objects exported.\nThe namespaces can be specified or selected when creating a new view, table and meta objects.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/namespace/","title":"Namespace"},{"content":"In addition to the existing data sources, more can be created. The report always has a connection to the database currently selected in Docusnap. Data sources can be either the tables from the database or custom tables, which are created using SQL statements.\nA new data source can be created by clicking on the button or by right-clicking in the dictionary. The first step is to select the DocuSnap connection.\nThe next step is to enter SQL statements and thus, for example, form a table that contains the content from several tables. The SQL statement is entered in the Query field. The columns are then created by clicking on the Retrieve Columns button. The name of the data source can be selected freely. By clicking the OK button, the table is added to the dictionary with this SQL statement.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn addition to the existing data sources, more can be created. The report always has a connection to the database currently selected in Docusnap. Data sources can be either the tables from the database or custom tables, which are created using SQL statements.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA new data source can be created by clicking on the button \u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-creation/new-data-sources/docusnap-report-designer-new-item.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Report-Designer-New-Item\" title=\"Docusnap-Report-Designer-New-Item\"\u003e or by right-clicking in the dictionary. The first step is to select the DocuSnap connection.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-creation/new-data-sources/","title":"New Data Sources"},{"content":"Settings to create the documentation can specified in the Options - Documentation dialog. The dialog can be opened via the title bar by clicking the button.\nGeneral Settings In the Documentation Path field, you can specify the location where documents (overviews, data sheets, maps) will be stored when the program creates the documentation. Click the button to select the folder for storing the documents.\nChanges to the font only affect the information area in the various Visio maps.\nMaps can be generated in the native Visio format (.vsd) and in the Visio XML format (.vdx). You can choose which format should be created. When creating maps with the Docusnap Server, the .vdx format is always created automatically. If the .vdx format is suppressed, the .vsd format is created and the HTML export type must be selected. The .vdx format is recommended because it takes less time and RAM to create.\nBy specifying the Document Archive Versions Limit using the checkbox of the same name and the number field, you can set how many versions of the documents created using the Documentation module will be archived in the archive folder.\nWhen you create maps, reports are created along with them. These are saved in the Reports folder which is a subfolder in the documentation path. If you do not want these reports to be created, disable the Create Additional Reports checkbox.\nIf desired, the Docusnap logo and the borders can be hidden on maps.\nMaps Network Map Settings In network maps, it is possible to link documents to various devices and overviews. Using the Word, HTML, PDF, Excel, and ODT checkboxes, you can specify the document types to be linked.\nSave Document Pages as Separate Documents: When creating some of the maps, the information is distributed on several tabs. By activating the Save Document Pages as Separate Documents option each tab is saved as a separate document. This is especially helpful for a large network, if the document cannot be saved, because of the number of tabs.\nLink Management Tools: Management tools can be used in Docusnap. For example, a remote desktop connection can be created for a found system. The management tools can also be used in the maps and in the HTML file. For this purpose, a Scripts folder is created in the Datasheets folder, which contains the scripts needed for the management tools.\nDon\u0026rsquo;t consider VMware adapter: When creating the network map, you can choose that network adapters created by the VMware Player/VMware Server software will be ignored. This checkbox is also available when you open the network map preview. You can change the setting there, too.\nDon\u0026rsquo;t Consider AutoConfig IP: Through this option the AutoConfig IP is ignored in network maps and routing maps.\nDo not include IP systems and workstations in network maps with more than 500 devices for performance optimization: To optimize performance when creating network maps for infrastructures with more than 500 devices, this option is already activated by default. This measure significantly improves performance when creating maps. If all devices should still be displayed in the plan, this option can be deactivated, thus the maps take longer to be created.\nTopology Maps and VLAN Visualization Settings These settings are used as default for ad hoc maps and for creating maps via the wizard. The settings can also be adjusted during the generation of maps.\nPotential Access Points: Docusnap includes uninventoried end devices in the map on the basis of CDP and LLDP. These are usually access points.\nLayer3 Elementes: In the map, end devices (firewalls, server systems) are displayed if they are redundantly connected to several switches. If desired, they can be hidden.\nPort Names: The name of the port can be displayed for each connection.\nVirtual Structures and Switches: With this option, the virtual structures and switches are included in the overview map and, in the case of topology maps, individual maps for the virtual switches are also created.\nSwitch Details: This option defines which information is displayed for the switches.\nCable Bandwidth: This option displays the cable bandwidth for the connections.\nTunnel Connection: If a tunnel connection is known via LLDP or CDP, this option displays the connection.\nShow only Used VLANs: With this option, only VLANs with end devices are displayed.\nVLAN Tables: This option displays the respective VLANS as a table for switches. VLAN tables with the same content are colored the same way.\nVisualize Cable Bandwidth: With this option, lines of a connection are colored differently depending on the speed and at higher speeds a thicker line is used. If the speed exceeds 10GB the line becomes blue. If the speed falls below 1GB, the line is shown in red. In the other cases the line is drawn in green.\nPort with VLAN Information: This option displays the tagged and untagged information for the ports in the detailed maps of the switches.\nVirtualization Map Settings In the group Virtualization Map Settings, you can specify the VMware maps to be created by default in Docusnap. (For more information, see VMware Maps.)\nCommunication Map Settings For communication maps and reports, it can be defined whether ports above 1024 or above 49152 are interpreted as dynamic ports.\nDatasheets \u0026amp; Overviews When Just HTML Documentation is enabled, no other formats will be created. When creating the datasheets or the overviews, Pure HTML Documentation can be enabled or disabled at the Company Selection step.\nIn Docusnap, you can send the entire set of documentation directly to a printer. To use this feature, datasheets, overviews, and other information must be saved in a special file format (.mdc). If you tick the Print Preparation (MDC) checkbox, all documents will be generated in this format as well.\nIn the Overviews Settings it is possible to define which formats are preselected during creation. The files that are created are based on the reports and contain the company and the author\u0026rsquo;s name. The structured Excel document is also based on this report. The filterable Excel document is output as a flat Excel list where the filters of Excel can be applied.\nDatasheets contain a summary of the data for Windows, Server, Linux, Mac, SNMP systems and CIFS. For each device, a separate datasheet will be created. Datasheets can be created in Word, HTML, PDF, Excel or ODT format. In the Datasheet Settings group, you can determine which files will be created by default.\nIf you enable the Export Additional Tools Results option, the files will be saved in an additional folder below the folder containing the documents.\nAdditional Information can be created for all devices. In addition, you can add files as attachments to the additional information entries. The additional Information will be shown on the datasheets if the Export Comments, Export Taks etc. checkbox is enabled. If you also check the Export Attachments of Comments, Export Attachments of Tasks etc. option, the attachments will be stored in a subdirectory and linked with the corresponding datasheet.\nThe quality of the images contained in the documents, overviews, and maps can be defined in the Image Resolution field.\nIT Concepts The number of backups and versions for the IT concept are by default 10 entries per concept. The number can be adjusted in the IT Concept tab.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eSettings to create the documentation can specified in the \u003cem\u003eOptions - Documentation\u003c/em\u003e dialog. The dialog can be opened via the title bar by clicking the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/options/docusnap-title-bar-options.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Options\" title=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Options\"\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"general-settings\"\u003eGeneral Settings\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eDocumentation Path\u003c/em\u003e field, you can specify the location where documents (overviews, data sheets, maps) will be stored when the program creates the documentation. Click the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/options/docusnap-open-path.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-open-path\" title=\"Docusnap-open-path\"\u003e button to select the folder for storing the documents.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChanges to the font only affect the information area in the various Visio maps.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/options/","title":"Options"},{"content":"Settings for the execution of the inventory of permissions can specified in the Options - IT Security dialog. The dialog can be opened via the title bar by clicking the button.\nGeneral When the checkbox Show only Shares with Permissions is checked, only shares, for which permissions exist, are displayed in the Permission tree view.\nWhen performing the inventory scan of NTFS permissions, the system will read the permissions of all folders on the selected systems. The Limit Folder Levels option allows you to specify the number of folder levels to be scanned. This can be helpful if, starting with a certain level, the permissions are always inherited.\nThrough the check box Warning on Missing Permissions you can determine whether warnings should be displayed for the NTFS inventory.\nIf groups are added for the analysis, you must select whether the members of the group or the group should be added. If you select to dissolve the group, by default only users who are members of the specified group are listed. If the option Resolve Group Membership - Users and Groups are Displayed is selected, the groups of the specified group are also listed.\nThe settings in the tab Directory Report allow you to customize the default settings for creating the directory report.\nThe settings in the tab Principal Report allow you to customize the default settings for creating the principal report.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eSettings for the execution of the inventory of permissions can specified in the \u003cem\u003eOptions - IT Security\u003c/em\u003e dialog. The dialog can be opened via the title bar by clicking the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/it-security/options/docusnap-title-bar-options.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Options\" title=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Options\"\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"general\"\u003eGeneral\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen the checkbox \u003cem\u003eShow only Shares with Permissions\u003c/em\u003e is checked, only shares, for which permissions exist, are displayed in the Permission tree view.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen performing the inventory scan of NTFS permissions, the system will read the permissions of all folders on the selected systems. The \u003cem\u003eLimit Folder Levels\u003c/em\u003e option allows you to specify the number of folder levels to be scanned. This can be helpful if, starting with a certain level, the permissions are always inherited.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/options/","title":"Options"},{"content":"A rack is created in the infrastructure editor. Elements are then added to the rack. Inventoried or manually added systems (assets) can then be assigned to these elements.\nCreate and Manage Racks In the Infrastructure Editor, new racks can be created or existing ones managed in the Racks area.\nPredefined shapes are supplied as standard. New shapes can be created with the Shape Editor.\nIf a new rack shape is created, the slot counting direction can be defined in addition to the height.\nThe rack can then be selected for editing via the context menu.\nElements can be inserted into the rack via drag \u0026amp; drop.\nThe inserted elements can be marked and edited in the toolbox. The element can be inserted forwards or backwards.\nOnce a rack element has been selected, an inventoried or manual object can be assigned to it. An assignment is made within the toolbox using Assign Systems.\nThe name of the rack element is automatically set during a system assignment.\nClone and Export / Import Racks Existing racks can be duplicated or saved as templates.\nTo duplicate a rack or save it as a template, open the context menu of the desired rack. This option can also be found in the site map or in the rack map.\nIf the rack is saved as a template, the information is saved in an XML file. When a new rack is created, the Create Rack from Template option is available.\nIf the rack is duplicated, it will be created with all components included.\nIf a rack is duplicated or created from a template, the properties of the rack and the elements have to be adjusted.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eA rack is created in the infrastructure editor. Elements are then added to the rack. Inventoried or manually added systems (assets) can then be assigned to these elements.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/racks/docusnap-physical-infrastructure-use-racks.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Use-Racks\" title=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Use-Racks\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"create-and-manage-racks\"\u003eCreate and Manage Racks\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Infrastructure Editor, new racks can be created or existing ones managed in the \u003cem\u003eRacks\u003c/em\u003e area.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePredefined shapes are supplied as standard. New shapes can be created with the \u003cem\u003eShape Editor.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf a new rack shape is created, the slot counting direction can be defined in addition to the height.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/racks/","title":"Racks"},{"content":"The Report element allows you to insert any report existing in Docusnap into your concept. When you insert a report covering multiple inventory archive versions, Docusnap will always add the most recent inventory data to the concept.\nTo insert a report into the document, either click the Report button from the Insert ribbon or can drag it from the object tree and drop it directly onto the desired location in the document.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eReport\u003c/em\u003e element allows you to insert any report existing in Docusnap into your concept. When you insert a report covering multiple inventory archive versions, Docusnap will always add the most recent inventory data to the concept.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo insert a report into the document, either click the \u003cem\u003eReport\u003c/em\u003e button from the \u003cem\u003eInsert\u003c/em\u003e ribbon or can drag it from the object tree and drop it directly onto the desired location in the document.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/create-concept/report/","title":"Report"},{"content":"In addition to managing existing reports, reports can be imported. If you would like multiple users to access the same reports while working in Docusnap, use of the Team Settings folder is recommended. This feature is required if you need to import new reports, e.g. when the software manufacturer provides a new report that was created specifically for this client.\nUsing the Import Reports button opens the tab for importing reports. Click on the button to select the path from which one or more report files (*.mrt) are to be imported. The path can also be written directly into the text field.\nThe list shows all report files. The properties can be adjusted by clicking on the respective report. The file name is used as the name of the report. Both the name and the file name can be changed. The current user is entered as the author and can be changed as desired.\nIf no grouping is specified, the report is displayed below the Other group after import. For Origin, Customer is written by default during import. This value can be adjusted. To be able to display the report in the tree, a meta object must be selected.\nBy clicking on the Import Reports button, all reports for which the respective checkbox has been activated are imported into the Reporting folder of the team or local settings.\nIf a report with the same file name already exists, the report must be saved with a different file name.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn addition to managing existing reports, reports can be imported. If you would like multiple users to access the same reports while working in Docusnap, use of the \u003cem\u003eTeam Settings\u003c/em\u003e folder is recommended. This feature is required if you need to import new reports, e.g. when the software manufacturer provides a new report that was created specifically for this client.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing the \u003cem\u003eImport Reports\u003c/em\u003e button opens the tab for importing reports. Click on the \u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-import/docusnap-open-path.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-open-path\" title=\"Docusnap-open-path\"\u003e button to select the path from which one or more report files (*.mrt) are to be imported. The path can also be written directly into the text field.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-import/","title":"Report Import"},{"content":"In the tree views, Report nodes serve as placeholders for the report definitions. The link between reports and meta objects is made from the Reports tab (Docusnap Management/Customizing). Any number of reports can be linked with a Report meta object.\nFor meta objects of the Report type, only the Alignment, Priority and Text properties are relevant\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn the tree views, Report nodes serve as placeholders for the report definitions. The link between reports and meta objects is made from the \u003cem\u003eReports\u003c/em\u003e tab (Docusnap Management/Customizing). Any number of reports can be linked with a Report meta object.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/reports/docusnap-tools-manage-metaobjects-report.png\" alt=\"Docusnap tools manage metaobjects report\" title=\"Docusnap tools manage metaobjects report\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor meta objects of the Report type, only the Alignment, Priority and Text properties are relevant\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/reports/","title":"Reports"},{"content":"Docusnap relies on MIBs when performing the inventory scan for SNMP devices. For the output of the SNMP device data in a report, tables are used that are populated with the retrieved data. These tables are for example used for the Summary SNMP report that lists the data for each SNMP device or for the Active Network Components report that indicates the SNMP devices of a domain. Adding SNMP tables only works for reports whose primary key corresponds to the DocuID or the DomainID of the respective SNMP devices.\nTo add the additional tables for SNMP devices, you need to create variables whose names start with vSNMPMib. First write in the Value property of the variable the text SNMP: followed by the MIB (in parentheses), and, separated by a comma, the name, into these variables. To separate the MIBs, enter a semi-colon. If you add the ID:DomainID after the closing parenthesis, the tables will be output for all SNMP devices existing in the domain.\nThis results in the following syntax:\nSNMP:(1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.1,IPAddress;1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.3,SubnetMask;1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.2,InterfaceID) SNMP:(1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.1,IPAddress;1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.3,SubnetMask;1.3.6.1.2.1.4.20.1.2,InterfaceID)ID:DomainID To ensure the output of values that exist only once for each SNMP device, precede the statement with SNMP-Single.\nUse the following syntax:\nSNMP-Single: (1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.14.1.1,Manufacturer;1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.17.1,SerialNumber) SNMP-Single: (1.3.6.1.2.1.43.8.2.1.14.1.1,Manufacturer;1.3.6.1.2.1.43.5.1.1.17.1,SerialNumber)ID:DomainID Once you have created all required variables, close the report and then open it again. This ensures that the Report Designer will create the tables for SNMP when loading the report. In the Report Designer, the tables are listed under the SNMP data connection node that is found below the Data Sources node.\nWhen creating the report, you can select the SNMP tables as data sources for data bands.\nUsing relations, you can create a hierarchical structure. Every SNMP table has a DocuID field which can be used to define a Relation to other tables.\nSince the relation spans two different data sources, you must set the Cache All Data property in the report properties to True.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap relies on MIBs when performing the inventory scan for SNMP devices. For the output of the SNMP device data in a report, tables are used that are populated with the retrieved data. These tables are for example used for the Summary \u003cem\u003eSNMP report\u003c/em\u003e that lists the data for each SNMP device or for the \u003cem\u003eActive Network Components\u003c/em\u003e report that indicates the SNMP devices of a domain. Adding SNMP tables only works for reports whose primary key corresponds to the \u003cem\u003eDocuID\u003c/em\u003e or the \u003cem\u003eDomainID\u003c/em\u003e of the respective SNMP devices.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/special-reporting-techniques/snmp-reports/","title":"SNMP Reports"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying SNMP systems, click the Network Scan or SNMP button on the Inventory ribbon. The SNMP step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps).\nScanning SNMP Systems For SNMP systems v1, v2 and v3 you can be determine whether the data of the SNMP systems, the topology, or both should be inventoried. If not all the data is needed, the duration of the SNMP Inventory can be shortened by this selection.\nBy checking the checkbox Reduce Inventory to Minimal Amount of Data, the number of inventoried MIBs is reduced. Only the basic data is inventoried. Imported custom MIBs, are also ignored in this setting.\nIt depends on the devices and the number of custom MIBs, whether the inventory is taking less time with this settings.\nIf a firewall notification is triggered due to the large number of ping queries during the search of the IP ranges, the number of parallel pings can be limited during the search.\nFill in the IP from, IP to, Community and Timeout fields to define the IP range to be scanned. The Description field supports the assignment of networks. The Community input field supports several values, separated by commas, which are used during the inventory. After you have added the desired ranges to the IP Ranges list, you can specify for each range whether or not the inventory scan should be performed by enabling / disabling the checkbox next to it.\nIf several IP ranges are to be taken into account in the inventory, there is the option of importing them directly from a CSV file using the Load list button. In the CSV file, the values for IP from, IP to, Community and Timeout must be listed in exactly this order separated by \u0026ldquo;;\u0026rdquo;, the Description field is optional. If a line doesn\u0026rsquo;t match this format, this one will be omitted.\nExample of a CSV file with several community values\nIP from;IP to;Community;Timeout;Description 192.168.100.1;192.168.103.254;public;2500;Productive Network Outbuilding 172.31.1.1;172.31.1.254;private, public, test, special;5000;Testnet In SNMP inventory, Docusnap attempts to obtain data from the SNMP device through the v2 protocol. If this request does not work, a new request is started over the v1 protocol. For some SNMP devices, a request via the v2 protocol may cause the device to be unavailable for a few seconds via SNMP. In this case, you can choose to run the v1 protocol first. If a device can not be inventoried correctly, it is possible that the required data can be successfully collected by activating the Use v1 Preferably checkbox.\nScanning Systems using the SNMP v3 Protocol The next step is the inventory of systems that support SNMP v3. The main difference between SNMP v3 and SNMP v1/v2 is that credentials can be defined for these systems instead of a community.\nThe New button can be used to choose whether an inventory of Individual Systems or via an IP Range should be carried out. In the corresponding follow-up dialog, the login credentials matching the configured security level of the systems are entered. If the same credentials have already been saved for another system, they can be used for the current entry by selecting them in the Apply credentials combo box.\nBy checking the Apply Credentials to all Systems checkbox, the current credentials will be used for all specified systems and must not be redefined for each device. Clicking the Edit button opens the SNMP v3 Credentials dialog for the selected system and the credentials can be edited.\nIf several individual v3 systems with different credentials or network information are to be inventoried, there is the option of CSV import. Click on the Load list button to open the selection dialog. In the CSV file, the values must be entered in the following order, separated by \u0026ldquo;;\u0026rdquo;: System name or IP address; USM user; Auth algorithm; Auth password; Privacy algorithm; Privacy password; Context name; Timeout. If the other v3 systems have the same credentials, it is sufficient to specify only the system name or IP address. If new credentials are specified, these in turn apply to further entries.\nExample for CSV file\nASWIT0001;Docusnap;SHA;secret;DES;secret;context;2600 192.168.100.3 192.168.100.4 192.168.100.5 The inventory of IP ranges for SNMP v3 systems is similar to the inventory of individual systems. The New button can be used to open the dialog for the credentials via New IP Range. The range is then defined by IP from and IP to instead of a system name or IP address.\nIP ranges can also be imported via CSV import using the Load List button. The structure of the CSV file remains unchanged, just enter the desired IP range instead of the system name or an IP address.\nExample for CSV file IP ranges\n192.168.100.1-192.168.100.150;Docusnap;SHA;secret;DES;secret;kontext;2600 192.168.100.151-192.168.100.254 Credentials are saved for each table entry in the wizard so that they are available the next time it is opened. By clicking the Load Already Known Systems from Database button SNMPv3 systems including their credentials can be reloaded. This eliminates the need to reenter devices that have already been inventoried with another wizard or that have been deleted from the wizard.\nAfter the desired systems have been added, the checkbox can be used to specify whether an inventory of the respective system or IP range should be included.\nGenerally, Docusnap uses the SNMP v1 and v2 protocols to identify SNMP systems. Each IP address in the specified range will be checked to determine if an SNMP system is involved. If the requested IP address responds to a ping and proves itself to be a valid SNMP system, the inventory process will be performed using the SNMP protocol.\nSNMP systems that require the SNMP v3 protocol, but have been listed in the IP range list for the normal SNMP scan (i.e. using the v1 and v2 protocols), will not be considered when scanning the v1 and v2 systems.\nIf the areas overlap with simultaneous SNMP and SNMP v3 inventorying, SNMP v3 results are marked with v3 in the summary.\nBy default, Docusnap inventories SNMP systems based on their system names. If a network includes multiple SNMP systems with the same system name, the results for all corresponding systems will be grouped under this system name. If you want to obtain individual results for each of these systems, you can specify to identify SNMP systems by their DNS names (on the Inventory page of the Options - Inventory dialog).\nThe large number of network requests from the SNMP scans may lead to warnings when using safety and monitor solutions.\nAdditional Tools Telnet/SSH Basically, this function is similar to the Additional Tools already available in Docusnap, which optionally executes commands on the target system during the Windows inventory and then saves the execution results in Docusnap.\nAdditional Tools Telnet/SSH provides this feature for the SNMP inventory, but uses the Telnet or SSH protocols for data retrieval. Data retrieval via this function is currently only possible for SNMP devices of type Switch.\nTo use this feature in SNMP inventory, it must be enabled in the Options - Inventory dialog in the Show Features section of the wizard by selecting the Telnet/SSH (Preview) additional programs option.\nThis optional inventory step allows to select previously inventoried switches and to query additional information with an appropriate command sequence.\nYou can use the Add button in the subsequent dialog to specify the command sequences for all switches already entered.\nThe timeout value defines how long Docusnap waits for a response from the SNMP device before aborting the sequence. The user and password for the login must also be entered. The user entered here must have the appropriate rights. With HP switches, for example, it would be possible to log on to the switch as \u0026ldquo;Operator\u0026rdquo;. However, this user is not authorized to read out the switch configuration. The user \u0026ldquo;admin\u0026rdquo; is required for this.\nFinally, the dialog can be exited via the Save button or the credentials can be verified beforehand via Check connection and save.\nDocusnap provides two simple templates for command sequences. Here, a configuration query is created on a switch (without manufacturer reference). The example is available for calling via Telnet and via SSH.\nOther command sequences can be created by the user in the Docusnap Management.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying \u003cem\u003eSNMP systems\u003c/em\u003e, click the \u003cem\u003eNetwork Scan\u003c/em\u003e or \u003cem\u003eSNMP\u003c/em\u003e button on the Inventory ribbon. The \u003cem\u003eSNMP\u003c/em\u003e step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"scanning-snmp-systems\"\u003eScanning SNMP Systems\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor SNMP systems v1, v2 and v3 you can be determine whether the data of the SNMP systems, the topology, or both should be inventoried. If not all the data is needed, the duration of the SNMP Inventory can be shortened by this selection.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/snmp-systems/","title":"SNMP Systems"},{"content":"The Status dialog shows the documentation creation progress. While the system creates the documentation, the navigation pane is disabled. So, if you need to abort this process, you can only click the Cancel button.\nThe actual progress of each task will be displayed by means of progress bars which can take on various states:\nA green progress bar indicates that a task has been performed successfully. A red progress bar indicates that an error has occurred during the creation of the respective document. After creating the documentation, the wizard automatically takes you to the Report page where a final report is displayed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Status dialog shows the documentation creation progress. While the system creates the documentation, the navigation pane is disabled. So, if you need to abort this process, you can only click the \u003cem\u003eCancel\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe actual progress of each task will be displayed by means of progress bars which can take on various states:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA green progress bar indicates that a task has been performed successfully.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA red progress bar indicates that an error has occurred during the creation of the respective document.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfter creating the documentation, the wizard automatically takes you to the Report page where a final report is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/basic-steps/status/","title":"Status"},{"content":"The Tasks allow you to enter meetings, reviews and other events.\nThanks to the Notifications feature in Docusnap, you can have the program automatically send an e-mail if the reminder date is the same as the current date or lies ahead. Thus, the overdue tasks are listed in the email attachment.\nClick the New button to add a new task to the selected object. The Title, Priority and Reminder Type fields are mandatory and thus must be filled in. By clicking the Save button, you add the task to the list. To edit a saved task, you must select it from the list. Its content will be displayed on the tab. Edit it and click the button.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eTasks\u003c/em\u003e allow you to enter meetings, reviews and other events.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThanks to the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/advanced-topics/notifications/\" title=\"Notifications\"\u003eNotifications\u003c/a\u003e feature in Docusnap, you can have the program automatically send an e-mail if the reminder date is the same as the current date or lies ahead. Thus, the overdue tasks are listed in the email attachment.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button to add a new task to the selected object. The \u003cem\u003eTitle, Priority\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eReminder Type\u003c/em\u003e fields are mandatory and thus must be filled in. By clicking the \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e button, you add the task to the list. To edit a saved task, you must select it from the list. Its content will be displayed on the tab. Edit it and click the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/tasks/docusnap-save-icon.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Save-Icon\" title=\"Docusnap-Save-Icon\"\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/tasks/","title":"Tasks"},{"content":"Purpose and Properties In most situations, text boxes are the most important controls of data entry screens. Primarily, they are used to enter free text, but you can assign comprehensive formatting and validation options, if required. This allows you to use text boxes to prepare data entry screens for the input of the most diverse data. A special case is the so-called [number servers]( \u0026ldquo;number servers\u0026rdquo;) which automatically populates a text box, based on a predefined schema.\nThe table below list the specific properties of text boxes, including a brief explanation:\nSpecific Properties of Text Box Controls AcceptsTab Specifies whether the tab key can be used as an input character or not. CharacterCasing Defines whether the text entered by a user will be shown in uppercase, lowercase or normal characters. Fieldname Specifies the linked column in the respective table of the current Docusnap database. The meta object linked with the data entry screen determines which table will be used. Unlike most other controls, text boxes can be linked with nearly every data type that exists in the database. Make sure to specify an appropriate data validation, otherwise errors may arise when users enter data of the wrong type. Multiline Determines whether a text box should consist of one single line or multiple lines. It is neither possible to enter line breaks into single-line text boxes nor can the height of these text boxes be changed. Multi-line text boxes are recommended for the input of large amounts of information. Care should be taken to ensure that the corresponding database field is large enough to accommodate the data (use the varchar(1500), TEXT or MEMO type). Password If you set this property to \u0026lsquo;True\u0026rsquo;, each character entered by a user will be displayed as an asterisk (*). In addition, a button will appear in the text box. When a user clicks this button, the content of the text box is displayed as plain text. ReadOnly Using this property, you can specify whether the text box will be used for data input and output or merely for the display of database data. If you set this property to \u0026lsquo;True\u0026rsquo;, users will not be able to change the data in the linked database column. This property is always useful if the data shown in the text box are predefined and should not be changed. However, please note that there must always be another way to save the data in the database, for example, by means of a script or an inventory process. One use case for this property would be when using the number server, because the content of the text box is generated automatically and users should be prevented from changing it. Scrollbars Determines if scroll bars will be displayed in multi-line text boxes and if so, which type. In principle, navigation within a text box control is also possible without scroll bars by using the keyboard or the mouse. However, scroll bars significantly facilitate this process. ShowCopyButton Specifies if a button will be displayed in the right part of the text box for copying its current content to the clipboard. SystemInvisible If you set this property to \u0026lsquo;True\u0026rsquo;, the text box will not be displayed during the runtime of the data entry screen, but rather filled with a predefined value that you can determine by means of the DefaultValue property. This approach is useful when the database schema requires a static value that the user cannot enter, for example automatic input of the corresponding device type in data entry screens at the device level. TextAlign Determines how the characters will be aligned in the text box. As a rule of thumb, select left alignment for free text and right alignment for numbers (this improves their readability). TypeConstraint Defines specific validation options for the content of a text box. For details on these options, see the subsection below and the dedicated number servers section. TypeConstraint Property This property can be used to store specific validation options for the input of data in a certain text box. If the validation results in errors when a user tries to save a record of data entered into the respective data entry screen, the save will be aborted and a predefined error message will display. Several predefined validation types are available that are briefly explained in the table below.\nContent Type Description Text When you select the Text content type, users can enter free text into the text box that might be checked further before they are saved.\n- Normal Text: Users can enter any text. It will not be validated. - IP-Adresse: Verifies if the text entered by the user is a valid IP address.\n- Subnetz-Maske: Verifies if the text entered by the user is a valid subnet mask. - MAC-Adresse: Verifies if the text entered by the user is a valid MAC address. The character groups may be separated either by no character at all or by colons (:) or hyphens (-).\n- Directory: Verifies if the text entered by the user is a valid directory path. If you also enable the Directory has to exist checkbox, Docusnap will check whether the specified directory really exists on the hard disk or share.\n- Drive Letter: Verifies if the user entered a valid drive letter. Please note that Docusnap will not check whether the drive really exists and is connected. Ganzzahl Specifies that this text box is reserved for entering integers. For number values, you can also specify a factor in the Factor field so that the integer entered by the user will be multiplied or divided by this value. The database will store the product of this multiplication. In this case, it is recommended to add the factor to the corresponding column in the meta table to obtain a consistent representation of the numbers in the data entry screen and the associated lists. Byte Specifies that this text box is reserved for entering byte values. Memo Specifies that this text box is reserved for entering text in the MEMO format. Dezimalzahl Specifies that this text box is reserved for entering decimal numbers. As with integers, you can specify a factor. GUID Specifies that this text box is reserved for entering GUID values. Version Specifies that the text entered in this text box must have the format of a version. For example: 7.0.219.4 In addition to the predefined types, you can define and apply your own validation rules. When defining such rules in Docusnap, you can use regular expressions (RegEx), which allow the definition of almost any validation check. Introductory information about regular expressions can be found on many websites, such as Microsoft\u0026rsquo;s http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-en/library/az24scfc.aspx or Wikipedia http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regex. To test and optimize regular expressions, we recommend the Expresso software from Ultrapico available under http://www.ultrapico.com/Expresso.htm.\nNumber servers are a special case of text box. For more details, see the Number Server section.\nExamples of Regular Expressions Use regular expressions to validate the input in a text box. The text entered by a user is compared with a predefined pattern to make sure that the text is, for example, an e-mail address, a positive number, etc.\nWhat do regular expressions consist of?\nEnclose valid letters, digits and characters in square brackets []. The following characters can be used to define how often these letters, digits and characters should be repeated: ?,+ and *.\nCharacters Meaning [A-Za-z] This expression checks if a letter of the Latin alphabet has been entered at the indicated position. [0-9] This expression is used to find any digit at a certain position in the input. ? The preceding letters, digits or characters are optional. They may (but need not) occur once, i.e. the expression occurs once or not at all. + The preceding letters, digits or characters must appear at least once, but may occur repeatedly. * The preceding letters, digits or characters may be repeated any number of times (or may not occur at all). ^ Use the ^ character to identify the beginning of the pattern. $ The $ symbol is the counterpart of the ^. It indicates the end of the pattern that has to match the end of the string. In a regular expression, you can define multiple end characters, provided that the expressions are separated by a logical Or (|). . Enter a period to check that any character (with the exception of a line break) exists at a certain position. - Within character classes, a hyphen is interpreted as a character. There, it is used to specify character ranges. \\ If you want to use a character in the pattern that has a specific meaning, such the period as a punctuation mark and not in its meaning as an expression for a given character, precede it with a backslash (\\) to \u0026ldquo;escape\u0026rdquo; it. () To group expressions, use parentheses. Examples:\nCheck if a number is positive:\n^[0-9]+((.[0-9]+$)|(.[0-9]+$)|$)\nCheck if the user input represents an e-mail address:\n^[\\w-.]+@([\\w-]+.)+[\\w-]+$\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"purpose-and-properties\"\u003ePurpose and Properties\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn most situations, text boxes are the most important controls of data entry screens. Primarily, they are used to enter free text, but you can assign comprehensive formatting and validation options, if required. This allows you to use text boxes to prepare data entry screens for the input of the most diverse data. A special case is the so-called [number servers]( \u0026ldquo;number servers\u0026rdquo;) which automatically populates a text box, based on a predefined schema.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/textfield/","title":"Textfield"},{"content":"If the Upgrade/Downgrade option is selected in the Software Product step, the Upgrade/Downgrade step is displayed. Thereby it is possible to map the corresponding update hierarchies in the company. For example, you could specify for the current software product Office 2016 that it is an upgrade from Office 2013 and a downgrade from Office 2019. If multiple downgrade versions of a particular software product exist, you can easily select the ones relevant to your company. A product will only be used if you enable its checkbox in the respective line. A product that has already been selected as upgrade version cannot be selected as a downgrade version, and vice versa. Of course, only products already existing in the database are available for selection. If necessary, you will have to change these details again, for example, if an upgrade version has not been registered in Docusnap yet and will be added later.\nIf a software product selected as an upgrade or downgrade, the current product is not automatically added as a downgrade or upgrade, but must be added manually for the respective product.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIf the \u003cem\u003eUpgrade/Downgrade\u003c/em\u003e option is selected in the \u003cem\u003eSoftware Product\u003c/em\u003e step, the \u003cem\u003eUpgrade/Downgrade\u003c/em\u003e step is displayed. Thereby it is possible to map the corresponding update hierarchies in the company. For example, you could specify for the current software product Office 2016 that it is an upgrade from Office 2013 and a downgrade from Office 2019. If multiple downgrade versions of a particular software product exist, you can easily select the ones relevant to your company. A product will only be used if you enable its checkbox in the respective line. A product that has already been selected as upgrade version cannot be selected as a downgrade version, and vice versa. Of course, only products already existing in the database are available for selection. If necessary, you will have to change these details again, for example, if an upgrade version has not been registered in Docusnap yet and will be added later.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/upgrade-downgrade/","title":"Upgrade/Downgrade"},{"content":"The VMware Infrastructure map can be created either from the Create Docu wizard or the VMware wizard.\nThe preview allows you to check the look and feel of the maps. You can change the map layout, if desired. For most cases, we recommend to use the default settings.\nThe VMware map will be stored in the VMware subfolder of the documentation directory.\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Maps\\VMware\\VMware name)\nIn the generated preview, you can see which maps will be created. The graphics display the interconnections between the various entities existing in a VMware environment. These entities are virtual machines, networks, hosts and data stores. Each map reflects the respective assignments.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe VMware Infrastructure map can be created either from the \u003cem\u003eCreate Docu\u003c/em\u003e wizard or the \u003cem\u003eVMware\u003c/em\u003e wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe preview allows you to check the look and feel of the maps. You can change the map layout, if desired. For most cases, we recommend to use the default settings.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe VMware map will be stored in the \u003cem\u003eVMware\u003c/em\u003e subfolder of the documentation directory.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cem\u003e(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Maps\\VMware\\VMware name)\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/vmware-infrastructure/docusnap-documentation-vmware-infrastructure.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Documentation-VMWare-Infrastructure\" title=\"Docusnap-Documentation-VMWare-Infrastructure\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the generated preview, you can see which maps will be created. The graphics display the interconnections between the various entities existing in a VMware environment. These entities are virtual machines, networks, hosts and data stores. Each map reflects the respective assignments.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/vmware-infrastructure/","title":"VMware Infrastructure"},{"content":"Docusnap offers with additional tools to optionally execute commands on a target system and save the results in Docusnap.\nThe desired additional tool is created via the New button. The name of the program can be freely defined. A description does not have to be entered.\nTwo templates were created for a quick start. A configuration query is created on a switch (without manufacturer reference). The example is available for the call via Telnet and via SSH. The template can be copied and adapted as desired.\nClicking the Adjust button opens the sequence editor. The sequence of commands to be executed on the target system to obtain the required execution results is called a command sequence. Here, as in a batch processing, the required commands are created and processed. The built-in Test Sequence function can be used within the editor to test the created command sequence on the target system. If a command fails, the user receives feedback as to which command in this sequence caused a problem. However, a syntax check does not take place. In order for the sequence to be tested, the target system must already be inventoried as an SNMP device of type Switch in Docusnap.\nCreate Command Sequences Generally, the same commands are used for Telnet and SSH. The main difference between the two protocols is the authentication. In the Telnet version, the handling of user name and password must be entered in the command sequence, but this is not required for SSH.\nCurrently supported commands\nDelayWait: Creates a pause to give the target system some time to establish a connection or to execute asynchronous commands if necessary. The wait time in milliseconds can be passed as a parameter. ResponseStringWait: Waits until a string defined as parameter is displayed in the console. In the examples, # (followed by a space) waits for the console prompt. Using this check between commands increases the stability of the query. ResponseRegexWait: Same function as ResponseStringWait but a regex expression is passed instead of the string. An example of the console prompt in regex notation would be .*#\\s$ Command: This command is used to query technical details of the target system (e.g. show running-config). It is also required to control the console behavior. For example, Command is used without parameters when the console is waiting for \u0026ldquo;any key\u0026rdquo; input. It is also a good idea to use the command \u0026ldquo;no page\u0026rdquo; to disable the page switching of the console. In general it is recommended to run through the command sequence in the console beforehand to detect possible problems in advance. ResponseCapture: This command \u0026ldquo;starts the console output capture for Docusnap\u0026rdquo;. All previously executed commands are not present in the Docusnap output. It is important to create commands following the capture as a subsequence using the plus sign next to the command. The capture only returns data from commands that are within this command grouping. In the editor, these commands are additionally indented below the capture. It is recommended to check the console prompt as the final command of a capture sequence. Currently supported optional commands within a capture sequence\nThe captured output can optionally be edited before it is transferred to Docusnap, e.g. to remove unwanted formatting or security relevant information from the output. For this purpose, the following commands must be created within the capture command grouping.\nResultCleanString: The command has two parameters \u0026ldquo;Find\u0026rdquo; defines the string to be processed, \u0026ldquo;Replace\u0026rdquo; the string to be applied. For example, the string \u0026ldquo;Community Geheim#2021\u0026rdquo; becomes the string \u0026ldquo;Community *********\u0026rdquo;. ResultCleanRegex: Works like ResultCleanString and uses regular expressions instead of strings in the parameters. This can be very convenient if, for example, you want to always replace the characters after \u0026ldquo;password with *****. The regex expression here would be password\\s.*. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap offers with additional tools to optionally execute commands on a target system and save the results in Docusnap.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe desired additional tool is created via the New button. The name of the program can be freely defined. A description does not have to be entered.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTwo templates were created for a quick start. A configuration query is created on a switch (without manufacturer reference). The example is available for the call via Telnet and via SSH. The template can be copied and adapted as desired.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/snmp/additional-tools-telnet-ssh/","title":"Additional Tools Telnet/SSH"},{"content":"Within the All Jobs area all wizards provided by Docusnap can be launched: Documentation - Data Exchange - Other - Inventory - File Systems.\nThe following wizards can only be started from this area:\nDB Import: Data from another Docusnap database can be imported by clicking the DB Import button. DB Export: Using the DB Export button, you can export a database. CSV Import: Click the CSV Import button to launch the wizard for importing data from a CSV file. Notification: Notifications are used to send e-mail messages automatically if certain conditions or criteria are met. This feature can be used, for example, to notify the user about the expiration of a contract. The corresponding notification definitions are in Management - General. Snapshots: By clicking the Snapshots button, you open the dialog for managing snapshots. There, you can name the snapshots that have been created so far. In addition, they can be deleted or flagged as undeletable. Furthermore, the All Jobs area lists all scheduled jobs, regardless of their type.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWithin the \u003cem\u003eAll Jobs\u003c/em\u003e area all wizards provided by Docusnap can be launched: Documentation - Data Exchange - Other - Inventory - File Systems.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe following wizards can only be started from this area:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/database-import/\" title=\"DB Import\"\u003eDB Import\u003c/a\u003e: Data from another Docusnap database can be imported by clicking the \u003cem\u003eDB Import\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/database-export/\" title=\"DB Export\"\u003eDB Export\u003c/a\u003e: Using the \u003cem\u003eDB Export\u003c/em\u003e button, you can export a database.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/data-import/wizard/\" title=\"CSV Import\"\u003eCSV Import\u003c/a\u003e: Click the \u003cem\u003eCSV Import\u003c/em\u003e button to launch the wizard for importing data from a CSV file.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/advanced-topics/notifications/define-notifications/\" title=\"Notification\"\u003eNotification\u003c/a\u003e: Notifications are used to send e-mail messages automatically if certain conditions or criteria are met. This feature can be used, for example, to notify the user about the expiration of a contract. The corresponding notification definitions are in Management - General.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSnapshots: By clicking the \u003cem\u003eSnapshots\u003c/em\u003e button, you open the dialog for managing snapshots. There, you can name the snapshots that have been created so far. In addition, they can be deleted or flagged as undeletable.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFurthermore, the \u003cem\u003eAll Jobs\u003c/em\u003e area lists all scheduled jobs, regardless of their type.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/navigation/all-jobs/","title":"All Jobs"},{"content":"To each additional information, you can add attachments. Below the data entry screen all currently assigned attachments are listed.\nAdding Attachments There are two ways to add attachments.\nClick the New button to open the dialog Add Attachment. When you click the button, a dialog opens where you can select the desired file. After you have selected the desired file, the Title text box will automatically be populated with the file name. Optionally, you can enter a description of this attachment. To save the attachment data (file, title, description) in the database, click the Save button.\nYou can also use drag \u0026amp; drop to add files to the attachments. Simply drag the desired file into the list of attachments and drop it there. If you use drag \u0026amp; drop to add a directory or multiple files to the table, all files, or the files in the directory, will be added simultaneously. The attachments added by drag \u0026amp; drop will immediately be stored in the database. For each added file, its file name will be used as title. You can change it and then apply your change by clicking the Save button.\nOpening Attachments To open an attachment in an application, first select the file. Then click the Read File button to open the file with the program that is set as the default program for that file type on your system.\nEditing Attachments Attachments can be edited at any time. To edit the file, you must select it. Then, click the Check Out button. The file will be stored in the check out path. Checking out a file prevents the file from being edited by multiple users at the same time, which would introduce inconsistencies. To make the checked-out file available to other users again, release it by clicking the Check In button. Checking in the modified file saves it back to the database.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo each additional information, you can add attachments. Below the data entry screen all currently assigned attachments are listed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"adding-attachments\"\u003eAdding Attachments\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThere are two ways to add attachments.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button to open the dialog \u003cem\u003eAdd Attachment.\u003c/em\u003e When you click the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/attachments/docusnap-open-path.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-open-path\" title=\"Docusnap-open-path\"\u003e button, a dialog opens where you can select the desired file. After you have selected the desired file, the \u003cem\u003eTitle\u003c/em\u003e text box will automatically be populated with the file name. Optionally, you can enter a description of this attachment. To save the attachment data \u003cem\u003e(file, title, description)\u003c/em\u003e in the database, click the \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/additional-information/create-additional-information/attachments/","title":"Attachments"},{"content":"You can insert current data from Docusnap into the concept. This loads table content into the concept. Any changes to the dataset automatically update the content.\nClick the Data button to open the Select Data dialog. This dialog displays the existing trees and allows you to select the desired data. If you want to add the workstations table, for example, select the Workstations heading and click the Insert button to insert the data into the concept.\nAlternatively, you also can select the desired table content from the Objects window and insert it by drag \u0026amp; drop. When you drag data from the object tree and drop it onto the concept, the Data Selection dialog opens. In this dialog, you can select to add a data element or a variable value.\nAfter the table with its data has been inserted into the concept, you can adjust the way its content will be output. When you select the data element, an additional Data Element ribbon displays. By clicking the Settings button or by selecting the Settings option in the context menu of the data element, you can open the Manage Data Elements window. You can drag and drop columns to a different position. The Add Row button allows you to add another row. You can move the columns to this row. By clicking the Delete Row button, you can remove the bottom row and distribute the columns which are still part of that row to the remaining rows.\nWith the Column Options button, you can select the columns to be displayed.\nThe filter allows you to filter the data that will be displayed in the IT concept. The filter options shown here are similar to the filter in the main window.\nSome objects can be moved in the data explorer. For example, systems that are moved to another domain, systems that are changed from offline host to Windows systems, or IT assets that are placed in a different folder.\nIf the data of an object has been added to a concept and this object is subsequently moved in the data explorer, then this data is no longer in the concept after the update. In this case, the data of the object would have to be added again to the concept from the new position in the tree.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eYou can insert current data from Docusnap into the concept. This loads table content into the concept. Any changes to the dataset automatically update the content.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eData\u003c/em\u003e button to open the \u003cem\u003eSelect Data\u003c/em\u003e dialog. This dialog displays the existing trees and allows you to select the desired data. If you want to add the workstations table, for example, select the \u003cem\u003eWorkstations\u003c/em\u003e heading and click the \u003cem\u003eInsert\u003c/em\u003e button to insert the data into the concept.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/create-concept/data-element/","title":"Data Element"},{"content":"Interaction with the Database All editable meta objects have predefined data entry screens that allow fast and easy editing of all available data directly in the Docusnap tree view. Their function is that of an interface between the user and the database, performing a basic validation of the data entered by the user and generating error messages, if necessary. All system-defined data entry screens can be modified and extended by the user, so that maximum flexibility is achieved. In addition, you can create new data entry screens for user-defined meta objects from scratch. This way, and by extending the database and the object structure, it is possible to perfectly customize and extend Docusnap to meet all current corporate requirements.\nSystem and User Schemas The appearance of each data entry screen used in Docusnap is defined by a corresponding definition file stored in the program directory. In this context, please note that each predefined data entry screen has a so-called system schema with a .des file extension, which is located in the Dataedit subfolder of the Docusnap program directory. These files contain all system-defined values and enable you to reset modified data entry screens to their original configuration. In addition to these files, edits and extensions made by the user are stored in so-called \u0026ldquo;user schema\u0026rdquo; files with a .deu file extension. Depending upon the relevant setting, these files are stored in the DataEdit subfolder of either the local or the team settings folders for Docusnap.\nDocusnap always loads the system settings for each data entry screen first and, if user settings exist, uses them to customize or extend the data entry screen. It should however be noted that not all of the predefined settings can be replaced by user settings. For example, it is not possible to delete predefined controls or to change the links to the database. But you can change the size and position of each control as required. There are no such limitations with regard to user-defined extensions. All controls created by users can be deleted as desired. The illustration below shows how the user and system schemas are used in Docusnap.\nDue to the fact that data entry screens primarily represent the interfaces to the current Docusnap database, it should be noted that controls that can be used to enter or manipulate data will automatically be disabled if their configuration is invalid. This might be the case if no link or an invalid link to the database has been specified for a control. After changes have been made to any data entry screens, you might need to restart Docusnap or close the entire tree structure and re-open it in order to load the changes. ","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"interaction-with-the-database\"\u003eInteraction with the Database\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll editable meta objects have predefined data entry screens that allow fast and easy editing of all available data directly in the Docusnap tree view. Their function is that of an interface between the user and the \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/\" title=\"database\"\u003edatabase\u003c/a\u003e, performing a basic validation of the data entered by the user and generating error messages, if necessary. All system-defined data entry screens can be modified and extended by the user, so that maximum flexibility is achieved. In addition, you can create new data entry screens for user-defined \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/\" title=\"meta objects\"\u003emeta objects\u003c/a\u003e from scratch. This way, and by extending the database and the object structure, it is possible to perfectly customize and extend Docusnap to meet all current corporate requirements.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/","title":"Data Entry Screens"},{"content":"With Docusnap, you can import data from another database.\nThe dialog used to perform the data export can be opened from the All Jobs area by clicking the DB Export button.\nIn the first step, select the target database to which the data is to be exported. For this purpose, you can select an SQL or local database. These two database systems are fully compatible with each other. This means that data exported from an SQL database can be imported into a local database, and vice versa.\nIn the next step, specify the export settings. The left column lists the companies and domains that are found in the database to be exported. The companies existing in the target database are displayed on the right. You can export an entire company or an individual domain to the target database. As you go, you can either export the domain data to an existing company, or you can re-create the original company from the source database.\nFor the target database, you can decide to re-create the company from the source database in the target database or to integrate the data into an existing company. If you select the Integrate Company from Source Database option, a new company will be created. If a company with the same name already exists, a second company with this name will be created.\nIf you select the Integrate in existing Company option, the data will be integrated into the selected company.\nWhen assigning companies automatically, Docusnap does not compare by company name, but rather uses an internal GUID (Globally Unique IDentifier). In some cases, two companies with the same name might exist after the import.\nThe best way to avoid this situation is to explicitly select a company in the target database.\nDuring the export, Docusnap will check whether a specific snapshot was exported before. If this is the case, the corresponding snapshot will be excluded from the export. Furthermore, Docusnap will check for each system whether the number of allowed archives will be exceeded. The oldest snapshots will be deleted, if necessary.\nIf you want to exclude certain source database modules from the export, clear the checkmark for those which are not to be exported. If, for example, only the Windows checkbox is enabled, nothing but the workstation and server data will be exported. In addition, only snapshots containing data for the selected modules will be displayed in the next step.\nTo export existing [additional information]( \u0026ldquo;additional information\u0026rdquo;) associated with source database objects, enable the Export Additional Information checkbox in the Advanced group.\nIf you enable the Overwrite existing Data checkbox, the properties of static objects from the source database will overwrite those existing in the target database. Thus, for example, the street address of a company that has been selected in the source database would overwrite the street address in the target database. Please note that this feature will only affect static objects and not the snapshots.\nIf you wish to export the diagrams created in your database as well, enable the Export Diagrams checkbox.\nWhat is more, you can export any passwords that have been created. For this purpose, an encryption file is required. Click the icon and select the appropriate file. Its name will then be displayed in the Export Encryption File field.\nHere, a list of snapshots from the selected source database is displayed. To find snapshots more quickly, you can either name them when doing the inventory scan, or you can assign a name to them in the Manage Snapshots dialog. To the right of the snapshot list, a filter is available for easier selection of individual snapshots.\nIf the number of archives has been set to 4 in the Options dialog and the source database contains, for example, seven snapshots with WMI data, the oldest three will not be imported. Finally, a summary page provides an overview of the modules and snapshots to be imported. If you want to change any of the data import settings, click the Back button. To start the import, click the Start button.\nThrough Scheduling, you can specify that the Data Export routine will start automatically at a later point in time. In the Scheduling step, you can define whether the export will be a one-time or a recurring event. Please note, however, that this feature can only be used if the Docusnap Server is installed on a system in the network. If the data export is scheduled, the schedule is saved by clicking on the Finish button and the wizard closes. If the checkbox Schedule Database Export was not activated, click the Start button to start the export process.\nDuring the database export, its status will be displayed. To abort the export process, click the Cancel button. The data that has been exported up to that moment will be retained in the target database. Finally, the Report page will be displayed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWith Docusnap, you can import data from another database.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dialog used to perform the data export can be opened from the \u003cem\u003eAll Jobs\u003c/em\u003e area by clicking the \u003cem\u003eDB Export\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/database-export/docusnap-advanced-database.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Advanced-Database\" title=\"Docusnap-Advanced-Database\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the first step, select the target database to which the data is to be exported. For this purpose, you can select an SQL or local database. These two database systems are fully compatible with each other. This means that data exported from an SQL database can be imported into a local database, and vice versa.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/database-export/","title":"Database Export"},{"content":"The Documents tab displays the documents created for the object selected in the tree view. If you have created a document for an object by using the Documentation module, it will be displayed on the Documents tab.\nFor each device that has been inventoried, a datasheet will be displayed. If a Visio map has been created for an object, you can view it on the Documents tab of the main window.\nIn the Documents tree view, the document generated by Docusnap is displayed at its proper location. If no document has been created for a node in the tree view, a Dashboard appears that helps you with the creation of the desired document.\nGenerated documents can only be displayed if the documentation path selected to create the document matches the one specified in the Options - Documentation dialog. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Documents tab displays the documents created for the object selected in the tree view. If you have created a document for an object by using the Documentation module, it will be displayed on the Documents tab.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor each device that has been inventoried, a datasheet will be displayed. If a Visio map has been created for an object, you can view it on the \u003cem\u003eDocuments\u003c/em\u003e tab of the main window.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/documents/","title":"Documents"},{"content":"Via the Edit Description button, the description of an already existing Azure App can be edited. The name of the Azure App cannot be changed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eVia the \u003cem\u003eEdit Description\u003c/em\u003e button, the description of an already existing Azure App can be edited. The name of the Azure App cannot be changed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/azure-apps-description/docusnap-inventory-azure-app-description.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Azure App Edit Description\" title=\"Docusnap Azure App Edit Description\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/azure-apps-description/","title":"Edit Description"},{"content":"The element properties are used in the IT documentation framework. Properties can be assigned to levels and structural elements. This makes it possible to define different kinds of information for these objects. The value can then be specified for each element of the respective level or structural element.\nThe properties are not created for a specific company. Therefore, the property can be used in any IT documentation framework, regardless of which company it is in.\nThe properties can be defined in the Docusnap Management or in the Editor.\nWhen the property is created, a name and a name in German and in English are given. The Active checkbox allows you to deactivate a property so that it is no longer available when you create elements. You can use the Mandatory checkbox to specify whether the value must be specified.\nWhen you create the properties, you must also define the type of information. The following types are available:\nDate: If you select the Date type, a date selection for specifying the date will be provided in the editor area. Decimal: If you select the Decimal type, only decimal numbers can be inserted into the text box. In addition, you can set a factor for the conversion of numeric values. Example: A factor of 1024 would convert a value from bytes into kilobytes. Here, you can define the formatting of numeric values according to standard conventions. Valid placeholders are the # character for any numeric value and the digit 0 for numeric values which are padded with leading zeros if they are too small. The comma is used as the thousands separator, and the period as the decimal separator. Examples: #,##0.00 MB, 00 h List: If you select the List type values will be selectable in the editor area. Only one value can be selected. For the selection list, different view formats are available, which are defined in the List Type combobox . Combobox: As data sources you can use a database table or initial values. A reference to a table is specified [TableName] and a reference to an initial value is input with {InitialValue}. Selection Grid: If a list has a lot of entries or if for selection data from several columns are relevant, a Selection Grid can be used. In the Selection Grid you can specify as many columns as you want and it is possible to filter the list. The data source is specified in the list reference. If a view is used as a database table, the statement can also be used to specify a sort order of the data with \u0026ldquo;order by\u0026rdquo; and to filter it, for example, according to the company by using the variable {AccountID} as a filter. Selection TreeView: The Selection TreeView is used when the data should be displayed in hierarchical form. The specified parameters are the same as for the Selection Grid, only that in addition a recursion field can be specified for the TreeView. For example, domains may have a subdomain, or sites may be created beneath other sites. To display this structure, the selection tree view is used. The Selection TreeView shows the Display Field of the selected table or view. List Values: If List Values is selected the additional tab List Values is displayed. Here entries can be defined, which are then available in a combo box for selection in the editor area. Memo: If the Memo type is selected, a RTF field for entering the text is displayed in the editor area. The entered text has no length constraint. For this type the Line Height of the text field can be specified. Multi-Line Text: If you select the Multi-Line Text type, you can enter text without any length limitation. For this type, you can specify the height of the text box in the Line Height field. Network Information: If you select the Network Information type, you can specify the IP Address, the Subnet Mask, and the MAC Address for this element. Number: If you select the Number type, the text box will only accept integers. In addition, you can set a factor for the conversion of numeric values. Here, you can define the formatting of numeric values according to standard conventions and include a unit. Valid placeholders include the hash symbol \u0026ldquo;#\u0026rdquo; for any numeric value and \u0026ldquo;0\u0026rdquo; for numeric values that should be padded with leading zeroes if they are too small for the field. The thousands separator is a comma, and the period is used as the decimal separator. Examples: #,##0.00 MB or 00 h Text: If you select the Text type, Docusnap will display a text box in the editor area. User/Group Selection: With the type User/Group Selection users or groups from the ADS inventory can be assigned to an element. When adding the element the name of wanted user or group can be entered. Once the first letter is typed, the matching entries are suggested. Users and groups can be added via enter key or selection via the mouse from the suggestion list. Click the button to open the dialog for the advanced search. In this dialog the selection of users and groups can be filtered by several conditions. Afterwards a user or group can be selected. You find further information on the filter in the chapter Permission Analysis of the user manual. Yes/No: For a property of the Yes/No type, a checkbox will be displayed in the editor area. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe element properties are used in the IT documentation framework. Properties can be assigned to levels and structural elements. This makes it possible to define different kinds of information for these objects. The value can then be specified for each element of the respective level or structural element.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe properties are not created for a specific company. Therefore, the property can be used in any IT documentation framework, regardless of which company it is in.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/element-properties/","title":"Element Properties"},{"content":"As a simple example, this section explains how to create an additional table for entering SLAs (Service Level Agreements).\nCreating the Table The first step is to create the table. To do so, click the New button. Then, select Table as the table type and enter the table name, i.e. SLA. In this example, the namespace SlaCust has been assigned. It is not mandatory to enter a namespace. Save the table by clicking the Save button. The xSLAID column is created automatically and defined as the primary key.\nCreating Fields Clicking the Edit Fields button opens the dialog for customizing the fields. In this dialog, additional fields can be created via the New button. The newly created fields are saved via the Save button.\nFor this example, you need to create the following fields:\nField Name Datatype AccountID Int Hours Decimal Name String Field Length: 255 Priority Int Reference: {RePriority} Responsible String Field Length: 255 When you are done creating these fields, select the xAccountID field as the foreign key and the xName field as the display field. When you have selected the foreign key and the display field, click the Save button to save your changes.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eAs a simple example, this section explains how to create an additional table for entering SLAs (Service Level Agreements).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"creating-the-table\"\u003eCreating the Table\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe first step is to create the table. To do so, click the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button. Then, \u003cem\u003eselect Table\u003c/em\u003e as the table type and enter the table name, i.e. \u003cem\u003eSLA\u003c/em\u003e. In this example, the namespace \u003cem\u003eSlaCust\u003c/em\u003e has been assigned. It is not mandatory to enter a namespace. Save the table by clicking the \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e button. The xSLAID column is created automatically and defined as the primary key.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/example/","title":"Example"},{"content":"The Hyper-V Server map can be created either from the Create Docu wizard or the Hyper-V wizard.\nOnce you have selected the domains, all Hyper-V servers from each domain will be displayed. Each server whose checkbox is enabled will be included in the Hyper-V map.\nThe preview window reflects the layout of the Hyper-V map. You can change the layout, for most Hyper-V maps, however, we recommend to use the default settings.\nThe Hyper-V map will be stored in the Maps folder of the corresponding domain.\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Maps\\hyperv\\Hyper-V server name)\nYou can enable/disable the checkboxes in the preview to specify whether the Host to VM, Host to Network or VM to Network relationships will be shown in the map.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Hyper-V Server map can be created either from the \u003cem\u003eCreate Docu\u003c/em\u003e wizard or the \u003cem\u003eHyper-V\u003c/em\u003e wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnce you have selected the domains, all Hyper-V servers from each domain will be displayed. Each server whose checkbox is enabled will be included in the Hyper-V map.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe preview window reflects the layout of the Hyper-V map. You can change the layout, for most Hyper-V maps, however, we recommend to use the default settings.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/hyper-v/","title":"Hyper-V"},{"content":"You can import previously exported license definitions to another database. To do so, click Import button in the Licenses ribbon. A dialog for configuring this import process opens.\nAfter clicking the button next to the field at the top of the dialog, you can select a previously exported definition file.\nSelect a target company where the corresponding data will be inserted during the import process. To determine if a given software product to be imported already exists for the target company, the name, the vendor and the version of the respective software product will be compared. If the name, vendor and version of the software product match and the checkbox next to the product to be imported is checked, all values related to the current software product will be overwritten in the target company.\nThe checkboxes in the Import Range group allow you to select which data will be imported from the import file into the database. Since some of the options are linked, disabling some checkboxes may cause another checkbox to be disabled as well.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eYou can import previously \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/export-definitions/\" title=\"exported license definitions\"\u003eexported license definitions\u003c/a\u003e to another database. To do so, click \u003cem\u003eImport\u003c/em\u003e button in the Licenses ribbon. A dialog for configuring this import process opens.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfter clicking the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/import-definitions/docusnap-open-path.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-open-path\" title=\"Docusnap-open-path\"\u003e button next to the field at the top of the dialog, you can select a previously exported definition file.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSelect a target company where the corresponding data will be inserted during the import process. To determine if a given software product to be imported already exists for the target company, the name, the vendor and the version of the respective software product will be compared. If the name, vendor and version of the software product match and the checkbox next to the product to be imported is checked, all values related to the current software product will be overwritten in the target company.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/import-definitions/","title":"Import Definitions"},{"content":"With the IT Security feature, you can determine and analyze the effective permissions for users and groups. For this purpose, comprehensive reports are available that illustrate the current permissions situation from the user or group perspective or for a certain resource (e.g. a directory).\nUsing filters, you can display a quick and interactive analysis of the desired situations.\nDocusnap can, for example, answer the following questions:\nWhich items can be accessed by employee X? Who has access to the HR directory? What combination of permissions (NTFS, shares) has been granted to a certain user? You can perform a permission analysis for all Windows systems or for systems that support the SMB or CIFS protocol (e.g. Samba and NetApp Filer).\nIt is also possible to scan and analyze the permissions to SharePoint servers. SharePoint server permissions are determined while Docusnap performs a SharePoint inventory scan.\nDocusnap also enables you to scan and analyze the permissions to Exchange mailboxes, mailbox folders, and public folders.\nThe IT Security is a separate Docusnap module that you can access by clicking the IT Security button in the Navigation pane.\nIn the IT Security explorer, a hierarchically structured tree will be displayed that has been optimized for the needs of this module.\nStructure In this chapter the structural organization is explained.\nInventory Before permissions can be analyzed, it is mandatory to perform an inventory scan of the NTFS directory structures. This section explains the inventory wizard for NTFS directories. SharePoint permissions are inventoried during a SharePoint scan, Exchange permissions are read in together with the Exchange inventory scan.\nAnalysis For the analysis of permissions, three functions are available.\nThe IT Security tab shows the current situation based on the permissions to a directory, SharePoint or Exchange mailbox or public folders.\nAnalysis diagrams illustrate which criteria were used to assign an effective permission to the selected user or group.\nReports show the effective permissions a specific user has to a directory or user.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWith the IT Security feature, you can determine and analyze the effective permissions for users and groups. For this purpose, comprehensive reports are available that illustrate the current permissions situation from the user or group perspective or for a certain resource (e.g. a directory).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing filters, you can display a quick and interactive analysis of the desired situations.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap can, for example, answer the following questions:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWhich items can be accessed by employee X?\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWho has access to the HR directory?\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWhat combination of permissions (NTFS, shares) has been granted to a certain user?\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can perform a permission analysis for all Windows systems or for systems that support the SMB or CIFS protocol (e.g. Samba and NetApp Filer).\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-security/","title":"IT Security"},{"content":"Limitations of the Docusnap Enterprise search\nBoth the Docusnap Enterprise and Standard search cannot be used in Docusnap Web. The Docusnap Enterprise search is limited to the current inventory. Older inventories are not included. Attachments of additional information cannot be searched Which values are included in the index for additional information is predefined, and user defined columns cannot be added. It is not possible to index objects and fields from license management or documentation. Passwords are not available in the index. It is possible to search for system names, usernames, etc. There is no fallback to the standard search if the Docusnap Enterprise search does not find any results. When indexing Other Assets, it is not possible to add individual fields to the index due to the flexible structure. Prerequisites/restrictions for a successful search in customizing Foreign key must exist, otherwise no resolution from object to parent is possible. The value of the primary key of the table/view must be unique. If the full text search is installed on the SQL server and a part of an IP address or a MAC address is searched for, the wildcard * must be used for the missing characters. If the * is not used, the search will look for entries that are mostly the same. This can lead to results that do not correspond to the searched value but have similarities only. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eLimitations of the Docusnap Enterprise search\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBoth the Docusnap Enterprise and Standard search cannot be used in Docusnap Web.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Docusnap Enterprise search is limited to the current inventory. Older inventories are not included.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAttachments of additional information cannot be searched\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWhich values are included in the index for additional information is predefined, and user defined columns cannot be added.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIt is not possible to index objects and fields from license management or documentation.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePasswords are not available in the index. It is possible to search for system names, usernames, etc.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThere is no fallback to the standard search if the Docusnap Enterprise search does not find any results.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWhen indexing Other Assets, it is not possible to add individual fields to the index due to the flexible structure.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePrerequisites/restrictions for a successful search in customizing\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eForeign key must exist, otherwise no resolution from object to parent is possible.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe value of the primary key of the table/view must be unique.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIf the full text search is installed on the SQL server and a part of an IP address or a MAC address is searched for, the wildcard * must be used for the missing characters. If the * is not used, the search will look for entries that are mostly the same. This can lead to results that do not correspond to the searched value but have similarities only.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/enterprise-search/limitations/","title":"Limitations"},{"content":"Meta objects of the Linked Object type represent a logical link within the tree view. By creating a linked object, you can define cross-references in the structure and thereby reduce the number of objects to be defined.\nFor meta objects of the Linked Object type, you can select the target meta object from the Linked Object field.\nLinked objects are not taken into account for data comparisons and full-text searches because the actual data has already been compared or searched under its original path. The target of the link must always match the primary key of the very meta object that is the parent of the Linked Object type meta object. Otherwise, Docusnap will not be able to select the data properly. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eMeta objects of the \u003cem\u003eLinked Object\u003c/em\u003e type represent a logical link within the tree view. By creating a linked object, you can define cross-references in the structure and thereby reduce the number of objects to be defined.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor meta objects of the \u003cem\u003eLinked Object type,\u003c/em\u003e you can select the target meta object from the \u003cem\u003eLinked Object\u003c/em\u003e field.\u003c/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-primary\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    Linked objects are not taken into account for data comparisons and full-text searches because the actual data has already been compared or searched under its original path.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-success\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    The target of the link must always match the primary key of the very meta object that is the parent of the Linked Object type meta object. Otherwise, Docusnap will not be able to select the data properly.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/links/docusnap-tools-manage-metaobjects-linked-object.png\" alt=\"Docusnap tools manage metaobjects linked object\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/links/","title":"Links"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying Linux systems, click the Linux button on the Inventory ribbon. The Linux Systems step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps).\nIf the firewall is alerted due to too many pings during the search of the IP segments, the number of parallel pings can be limited during the search.\nIf a new search is started in a different IP range, the Discard already found systems after new search option can be used to define whether already existing systems should be deleted.\nWhen Linux inventory is scheduled and executed at a later time, the Update selected systems option can be used to determine whether only the selected systems are inventoried or the IP area is scanned again, and all found systems are taken into account for the inventory.\nIf the connection data is not required, it is possible to exclude it during the inventory by using the option Include connection data for communication map and thereby speeding up the inventory process.\nLinux inventories are declared successful when at least some of the expected data could be inventoried. Usually, only the root user is fully authorized to access the system. If other users are used, this can lead to an incomplete inventory result. If the option Show warnings occurred during inventory (Preview) has been activated, the respective devices will be reported as Scan incomplete at the end of the inventory. More detailed information is provided in the debug log for analysis. The debug mode must be activated in the options dialog so that the warnings are entered in the debug log during the inventory.\nIn the options dialog, the timeout is defined. For special cases in the Linux environment, the timeout can be increased up to 2500 seconds in the advanced options of the Linux wizard.\nA Sudo user can also be used for the inventory. For this you have to activate the Use Sudo checkbox.\nPrivate Key By importing private keys created on Linux systems or RSA keys created by Docusnap, the password can be omitted for the Linux inventory. Keys can be selected for entire IP ranges as well as for individual systems. The preselection from the IP ranges can be overwritten for individual systems. If no key is used, a password must be entered. However, both authentication options can be used simultaneously - key and password. Both variants are checked, the first one, which has success with the login, is used.\nClicking the Private Key Management button opens the dialog for creating and managing private keys. The private keys can also be managed in Docusnap Management.\nMore information about the use of Sudo and Private Keys can be found in the article Alternative authentication Linux in the Knowledge Base on the Docusnap website.\nThere are two ways to identify the available Linux systems:\nEntering an IP Segment Manually First, you need to enter the required information (IP from, IP to, User, Password, Port) in the Add IP Range group and save this information. Then, click the Start Search button to identify the Linux systems in the specified segment(s). During this process, the individual IP addresses in the specified segments will be pinged. Each Linux system that replies successfully will be added to the Found Systems list.\nIf multiple IP ranges should be included in the inventory, they can also be imported from a CSV file by clicking the Load List button, instead of creating them individually using the buttons New and Save. In the CSV file the values for IP from, IP to, User, Password, Port, Use Sudo and RSA Key must be listed in that order separated by \u0026ldquo;;\u0026rdquo;. If no port is specified the port 22 is used by default. For the column Use Sudo you can use true or false and 0 or 1. For the RSA key the descriptive name defined in Docusnap is used. If no RSA key is specified or a name for which no corresponding entry can be found, the field remains empty.\nIf a line doesn\u0026rsquo;t match this format, this one will be omitted.\nEntering Individual Computers Manually In addition to scanning entire IP ranges for systems, you can also specify a single system. In the Found Systems group, click the New button and then enter either a system name or an IP address as well as the User name and the Password for the system(s) to be scanned subsequently.\nThe actual inventory process is based on the systems listed in the Found Systems group. All systems selected there will be scanned.\nTo perform an automatic scan of Linux systems, the user must have \u0026ldquo;root\u0026rdquo; permissions, the SSH daemon must be running on the remote Linux system and port 22 must be open. The user needs a valid home directory for the inventory and the user must have the bash shell configured. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying Linux systems, click the \u003cem\u003eLinux\u003c/em\u003e button on the Inventory ribbon. The \u003cem\u003eLinux Systems\u003c/em\u003e step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/linux-systems/docusnap-inventory-linux-systems.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Linux Systems\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Linux Systems\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the firewall is alerted due to too many pings during the search of the IP segments, the number of parallel pings can be limited during the search.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/linux-systems/","title":"Linux Systems"},{"content":"Settings for the execution of the inventory can specified in the Options - Inventory dialog. The dialog is opened via the title bar by clicking the button.\nGeneral Multi-Processing The Timeout in Seconds field indicates how long Docusnap will wait for the completion of a process during an inventory scan before a timeout occurs. If, for example, a Windows server is scanned over a WAN, it may take longer until all information has been gathered. If the defined time period is exceeded, Docusnap will terminate the inventory process with a \u0026ldquo;Timeout\u0026rdquo; error. The maximum value that can be specified is 720 seconds. For special cases in the Linux environment, the timeout can be increased up to 2500 seconds in the advanced options of the Linux wizard.\nIn case of problems during an inventory scan performed over a WAN, reduce the number of concurrent processes and, at the same time, increase the timeout value. Docusnap uses roughly 250 kbits/s for each process. Ping Timeout in Seconds: This option enables you to increase the ping timeout value for the systems during an inventory process up to 20 seconds. Set Scan Mode Remote or slow networks may cause information retrieval problems as too many concurrent processes are transferring data across the network. If you select the WAN mode, Docusnap automatically reduces the number of parallel processes to two and doubles the Timeout value. If you select the LAN mode, the settings from the Multi-processing group will be applied. Show Features in Wizard In Docusnap, you can extend the wizards by including additional steps (Export Settings, Software Search, etc.).\nSoftware and File Search The Software and File Search makes it possible on the one hand to search for software that cannot be scanned automatically due to a missing registry entry. On the other hand, it is also possible to search for specific files that are located in the file system and should be found due for example to a security vulnerability (log4j). If you enable the Software and File Search feature on the Options dialog, the wizards will include the additional Software and File Search step that you can use to list and select a defined file (see: Software and File Search). Name Snapshots For each inventory scan, Docusnap creates a snapshot. Snapshots will be automatically named Inventory from, with the current timestamp appended to it. After enabling the Name Snapshot checkbox in this dialog, you can name the snapshots as desired. Exporting Settings / Importing Saved Settings You can use the Import step in the wizards to load a saved configuration. This option is particularly helpful if you need to perform inventory scans repeatedly and with the same settings. When you select the desired configuration file, the settings saved in this file will be reused. Only the authentication step must be repeated. You can save the current configuration of the wizard using the Export step and reload it by selecting the Import step, as needed. This option is particularly helpful if you need to perform inventory scans repeatedly and with the same settings. Additional Tools Additional tools are used to integrate external utilities into the inventory process for Windows systems. You can add these tools in the Docusnap Management. Additional Tools Telnet/SSH (Preview) Additional Tools Telnet/SSH are used to execute additional programs during the inventory of SNMP switches. The programs use the Telnet or SSH protocols for data retrieval. These additional tools can be added in the Additional Tools Telnet/SSH (Preview) section of the Docusnap Management. Wizards Save settings in the Wizards If this checkbox is activated, any settings made and the found systems etc. in the wizard are stored and reloaded for the next execution of the wizard. The user and password are only saved if the checkbox Save User Name and Password is activated while the wizard is running.\nSite Assignment Enable Automatic Site Assignment This option, introduced in Docusnap 12, and controls application wide whether existing assignment rules are applied for automatic site assignment. Initially, this setting is disabled. If the option is enabled, automatic site assignment is active for all companies. (see: Site Assignment)\nTime Zones When systems are inventoried with several Discovery Service, which are in different time zones, the scheduling and the display can be confusing. For this reason, it is possible to activate the time zone display. This allows you to define during the scheduling whether the specified time refers to the respective time zone of the discovery service or the time zone of the Docusnap server or if the time is assumed to be UTC time.\nBy activating the Display of Time Zones, the output of the scan date can be adjusted in the data explorer. In the title bar of Docusnap via you can select which time zone is used for the display.\nDDS Time Zone: For each Discovery Service is stored in what time zone it is located. If the DDS Time Zone setting is selected, the data explorer displays the time that the Discovery Service had at the time of the inventory. Local Time Zone: If the Local Time Zone setting is selected, then the time of inventory is displayed at local time. If the installation of Docusnap and the Discovery Service are in the same time zone, nothing changes in the display. Server Time Zone: If the Server Time Zone setting is selected, the data explorer displays the time that the Docusnap Server had at the time of the inventory. Regardless if the the inventory was executed with the Docusnap Client, the Docusnap Server or a Discovery Service. UTC: With the UTC setting, all times are displayed as UTC time. Inventory Windows\nFallback Method for Windows Inventory The fallback method can be activated when the standard way of inventorying systems doesn\u0026rsquo;t work for all Windows systems, for example, if the WMI port is not available. Is this method enabled the remote DocusnapScript.exe will be executed on the devices to obtain the data of the inventory in this way. Ignore Windows Systems with DNS Problems Selecting this option systems are ignored, for which problems with the DNS resolution occur. Software\nInventory Hidden Software Components If you enable the Inventory Hidden Software Components checkbox, Docusnap will also include invisible software categories in the inventory scan (some software providers define their software such that not all areas are visible). SNMP\nUsing the DNS or Device Name for SNMP Inventory For the SNMP inventory you can use, the device name or the DNS name, if it has been maintained. If the Use System Name of the SNMP Device option is selected, then the MAC address is added to the name, if the same device name was used more than once. If the Use DNS for SNMP System options is selected and the DNS resolution is not available, the IP address is used as the name. Don\u0026rsquo;t Inventory Topology Enable this checkbox if you do not want the topology of the SNMP devices to be scanned during an SNMP inventory process. Inventory VLAN Info for CISCO Trunking Scanning the VLAN information during SNMP inventory of CISCO switches can significantly slow down the creation of the VLAN plan. For this reason, the option is currently disabled by default. The discovery of SNMP devices with multiple IP addresses becomes more reliable, but requires unique system names\nThis option for inventorying SNMP devices offers improved handling for devices with multiple IPv4 addresses. During SNMP inventory of systems with multiple IP addresses, issues such as multiple requests and the possibility of duplicates in the inventory list can occur.\nBy activating this option, the name of the SNMP device is queried first in order to avoid devices that have already been captured being queried again if they are already present in the current inventory. This helps to ensure a precise and consistent inventory by avoiding redundant entries.\nAfter this option is activated, the setting of whether to use the device name or DNS name is ignored and only the device name is used for identification. This setting leads to a clearer and more uniform identification of devices during the inventory process. Other\nUse Dedicated Domain Controller By enabling Use Dedicated Domain Controller, you can specify the domain controller to be used for listing the systems found during the inventory scan. For example, if the domain controllers are distributed to multiple sites, this can dramatically reduce the response times when querying the Active Directory. If this option is enabled, you need to specify the name of the dedicated domain controller in the Authentication step of the Inventory wizard. No domain authentication for Hyper-V and IIS In order to scan Hyper-V and IIS devices that are not attached to any domain, you need to disable domain authentication. Synchronized Port Checking A Windows, Linux, Mac, or IP inventory process searches the network for the systems available for scanning. This search runs asynchronously. If systems which exist in the network are not listed, you can alternatively enable the Synchronized Port Checking feature in the Options dialog. A synchronous search takes more time. Disable CIFS Online Check To inventory CIFS which do not respond to a ping, you must disable the CIFS online check. This way, the CIFS inventory starts without waiting for a response from CIFS. Inventory DNS Root Zone (.) If you enable the Inventory DNS Root Zone (.) checkbox, Docusnap will also determine the (.) root zone entries in the forward lookup zones when inventorying the DNS servers. Exclude systems, which can\u0026rsquo;t be assigned to a Discovery, from the report If the network is heavily segmented by using discovery services with different IP ranges, some systems will be found while browsing the Active Directory, but will not be scanned due to the specified IP range. These will then be listed in the final report. Checking the this checkbox causes the systems excluded because of IP Ranges to not be listed as failing in the final report, only the systems within the specified IP ranges will be considered. This option is available for Windows inventory and for inventorying offline systems. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eSettings for the execution of the inventory can specified in the \u003cem\u003eOptions - Inventory\u003c/em\u003e dialog.  The dialog is opened via the title bar by clicking the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/options-inventory/docusnap-title-bar-options.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Title Bar Options\" title=\"Docusnap Title Bar Options\"\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"general\"\u003eGeneral\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"multi-processing\"\u003eMulti-Processing\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eTimeout in Seconds\u003c/em\u003e field indicates how long Docusnap will wait for the completion of a process during an inventory scan before a timeout occurs. If, for example, a Windows server is scanned over a WAN, it may take longer until all information has been gathered. If the defined time period is exceeded, Docusnap will terminate the inventory process with a \u0026ldquo;Timeout\u0026rdquo; error. The maximum value that can be specified is 720 seconds. For special cases in the Linux environment, the timeout can be increased up to 2500 seconds in the advanced options of the Linux wizard.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/options-inventory/","title":"Options - Inventory"},{"content":"The next step of the License Management wizard allows you to enter additional information about the current licensing. These entries will be displayed in reports. Thus, for example, the persons or groups responsible for the software as well as the operation area and the language setting for the software can be entered here.\nAll entries on this wizard page are optional. If this information is not required, you can leave the fields empty. The data on this page is used for display only and does not affect the way Docusnap determines the license balance.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe next step of the \u003cem\u003eLicense Management\u003c/em\u003e wizard allows you to enter additional information about the current licensing. These entries will be displayed in reports. Thus, for example, the persons or groups responsible for the software as well as the operation area and the language setting for the software can be entered here.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll entries on this wizard page are optional. If this information is not required, you can leave the fields empty. The data on this page is used for display only and does not affect the way Docusnap determines the license balance.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/organization/","title":"Organization"},{"content":"Rack elements are those components that are inserted into a rack.\nIn the Rack Elements area, elements can be added to a rack via the grid. Elements that are assigned to the rack via the grid are not automatically positioned in the rack. The elements have to be positioned in the rack map afterwards.\nIt should be noted that no validation takes place as to whether there is still sufficient space in the rack. Rack Element Map If the editing of a rack element is started via the context menu, the Rack Elements Map is opened.\nWith the help of the toolbox, the rack element can be edited, cable connections can be stored or a systems can be assigned.\nIn the case the wiring is defined, the direct connections are displayed.\nThe mouse over function for individual cabling displays more detailed information about this.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eRack elements are those components that are inserted into a rack.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Rack Elements area, elements can be added to a rack via the grid. Elements that are assigned to the rack via the grid are not automatically positioned in the rack. The elements have to be positioned in the rack map afterwards.\u003c/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-success\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    It should be noted that no validation takes place as to whether there is still sufficient space in the rack.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/rack-elements/docusnap-physical-infrastructure-rack-elements.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Rack-Elements\" title=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Rack-Elements\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/rack-elements/","title":"Rack Elements"},{"content":"Many tables contain only numbers. To express these numbers as words, the tSysInitials table is available in the Docusnap database. The DsLookup function can be used to express the values from these tables as literals. Enter this function into a text box located in a data band. The function must be surrounded by braces \u0026ldquo;{}\u0026rdquo;, otherwise the Designer will not recognize it as a function. To show the online status of the tHosts table in the report, add a text box and type the following function into this field: {DsLookup(tHosts.Online,\u0026quot;OnlineStatus\u0026quot;)}\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eMany tables contain only numbers. To express these numbers as words, the \u003cem\u003etSysInitials\u003c/em\u003e table is available in the Docusnap database. The \u003cem\u003eDsLookup\u003c/em\u003e function can be used to express the values from these tables as literals. Enter this function into a text box located in a data band. The function must be surrounded by braces \u0026ldquo;{}\u0026rdquo;, otherwise the Designer will not recognize it as a function. To show the online status of the \u003cem\u003etHosts\u003c/em\u003e table in the report, add a text box and type the following function into this field: \u003ccode\u003e{DsLookup(tHosts.Online,\u0026quot;OnlineStatus\u0026quot;)}\u003c/code\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-creation/reference-values/","title":"Reference Values"},{"content":"The Report Designer allows you to open predefined reports for editing or create new reports.\nThere are two ways to open the Report Designer:\nThe Report Designer can be opened from the Reports tab in Docusnap Management. To open the Designer module, the report to be edited must be selected. By clicking the Designer button, you can open the selected report in the Designer. When creating a new report, you first need to create it in the Reports tab. Then, you can open the empty report in the Designer. When you generate/execute a report from the tree view, the action bar displays the Report Designer button. This button opens the executed report in the Report Designer. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Report Designer allows you to open predefined reports for editing or create new reports.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThere are two ways to open the Report Designer:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Report Designer can be opened from the \u003cem\u003eReports\u003c/em\u003e tab in Docusnap Management. To open the Designer module, the report to be edited must be selected. By clicking the \u003cem\u003eDesigner\u003c/em\u003e button, you can open the selected report in the Designer. When creating a new report, you first need to create it in the \u003cem\u003eReports\u003c/em\u003e tab. Then, you can open the empty report in the Designer.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWhen you generate/execute a report from the tree view, the action bar displays the \u003cem\u003eReport Designer\u003c/em\u003e button. This button opens the executed report in the Report Designer.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-designer/","title":"Report Designer"},{"content":"The final report shows which documents have been successfully created and which caused errors. The structure of the view reflects the individual documentation steps that were successful, incomplete or failed. Error messages will been shown for the steps that caused errors. If you wish to open the document right after its creation, click the Open Map button.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe final report shows which documents have been successfully created and which caused errors. The structure of the view reflects the individual documentation steps that were successful, incomplete or failed. Error messages will been shown for the steps that caused errors. If you wish to open the document right after its creation, click the \u003cem\u003eOpen Map\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/basic-steps/report-page/docusnap-documentation-report.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Documentation-Report\" title=\"Docusnap-Documentation-Report\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/basic-steps/report-page/","title":"Report Page"},{"content":"After the inventory is completed, a status message is displayed.\nClick on the message or on the button to display the summary.\nIn the Information column the error messages and error cause details will be shown for the aborted and incomplete steps.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eAfter the inventory is completed, a status message is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/summary/docusnap-inventory-report-message.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Report Message\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Report Message\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick on the message or on the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/summary/docusnap-inventory-status-open.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Status open\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Status open\"\u003e button to display the summary.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eInformation\u003c/em\u003e column the error messages and error cause details will be shown for the aborted and incomplete steps.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/summary/docusnap-inventory-report.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Report\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Report\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/summary/","title":"Summary"},{"content":"You can save any previously created concept as a template and use it later to create a new concept based on this template.\nSave as Template After creating your concept, you can it save as a template for further concepts. After a click on the Save button, you can select As Template to open the Save Concept Template dialog. Enter a name for the template in this dialog. The template will then be saved to database.\nThe template is created in the language of the concept from which the template is created. After entering the name, you can save the template which will then be available when creating new concepts.\nManage Concept Templates Existing templates can be deleted from the Concept Template dialog that can be opened by clicking Templates from the Concepts ribbon. In addition, you can add a description to each template. Use the Language drop-down list to select the German or the English templates to be listed.\nCreating a Document from a Template When creating a new document, you can either start with an empty document or select an existing template from the Template list. Depending on the language selected for the concept, the available templates are offered for selection.\nWhen creating a document, you must specify a name for it. A click on the Create button creates a new document based on the selected template.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eYou can save any previously created concept as a template and use it later to create a new concept based on this template.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"save-as-template\"\u003eSave as Template\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfter creating your concept, you can it save as a template for further concepts. After a click on the \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e button, you can select \u003cem\u003eAs Template\u003c/em\u003e to open the \u003cem\u003eSave Concept Template\u003c/em\u003e dialog. Enter a name for the template in this dialog. The template will then be saved to database.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/templates/","title":"Templates"},{"content":"The user interface for Docusnap is subdivided into navigatin, ribbon, data explorer etc.\nRibbon Docusnap wizards, dialogs and features will generally be accessed from the ribbon. The ribbon is subdivided into several tabs according to functionality.\nData Explorer In the Data Explorer, information is hierarchically displayed as a tree view. There are four different tree views. The various tree views can be opened as needed from the navigation pane.\nAction Bar/Main Window In the main window, information is displayed in various views. In the action bar you can switch between the different tabs.\nThe main window displays data for the objects selected in the Data Explorer. In the Information tab, dashboards provide a quick overview of how up-to-date the inventoried data is. Additional information can be specified using data entry screens in the editor. Additional information in the form of comments, financial records, passwords, contracts and tasks can be added. The reports will be executed on their own tab. The permissions for the folder structure will be analyzed using the Permission Analysis process.\nNavigation In the navigation you can switch between the different explorers. By activating the Display of Time Zones, the output of the scan date can be adjusted in the data explorer. In the titel bar of Docusnap it can be selected which time zone is used for the display.\nTitel Bar The title bar is used to configure Docusnap - Client and Server - and to open the options. In addition, the title bar is used to open Quick Support, activate the debug mode and analyze the debug log.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe user interface for Docusnap is subdivided into navigatin, ribbon, data explorer etc.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/docusnap-data-explorer-information-labeled.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Data-Explorer-Information-Labeled\" title=\"Docusnap-Data-Explorer-Information-Labeled\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"ribbon\"\u003eRibbon\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap wizards, dialogs and features will generally be accessed from the ribbon. The \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/menu-ribbon/\" title=\"ribbon\"\u003eribbon\u003c/a\u003e is subdivided into several tabs according to functionality.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"data-explorer\"\u003eData Explorer\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Data Explorer, information is hierarchically displayed as a tree view. There are four different tree views. The various tree views can be opened as needed from the navigation pane.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"action-barmain-window\"\u003eAction Bar/Main Window\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the main window, information is displayed in various views. In the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/\" title=\"action bar\"\u003eaction bar\u003c/a\u003e you can switch between the different tabs.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/","title":"User Interface"},{"content":"With the type User/Groups Selection users or groups from the ADS inventory can be assigned. When creating a new entry the name of wanted user or group can be entered. Once the first letter is typed, the matching entries are suggested. Users and groups can be added via enter key or selection via the mouse from the suggestion list. Click the button to open the dialog for the advanced search. In this dialog the selection of users and groups can be filtered by several conditions. Afterwards the selected user or group can be assigned to the created object. If the data entry screen is linked to a Windows system or belongs to a node below a Windows system, the local users and groups are also made available. You find further information on the filter in the User Manual in the chapter Permission Analysis.\nSpecific Properties of Attachments Fieldname Specifies the linked column in the respective table of the current Docusnap database. The meta object linked with the data entry screen determines which table will be used. For an User/Groups Selection control, the corresponding target column in the database must always be of the String data type, so the SID of the user or group can be stored. When adding the field in the Manage Tables tab, the type SID can be selected. This creates the field as a string in the database and resolves the selected value to the respective user or group when displayed. The selection of users and groups in the User/Groups Selection control is filtered by the company under which the object is created. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWith the type \u003cem\u003eUser/Groups\u003c/em\u003e Selection users or groups from the ADS inventory can be assigned. When creating a new entry the name of wanted user or group can be entered. Once the first letter is typed, the matching entries are suggested. Users and groups can be added via enter key or selection via the mouse from the suggestion list. Click the \u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/user-groups-selection/docusnap-open-path.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-open-path\" title=\"Docusnap-open-path\"\u003e button to open the dialog for the advanced search. In this dialog the selection of users and groups can be filtered by several conditions. Afterwards the selected user or group can be assigned to the created object. If the data entry screen is linked to a Windows system or belongs to a node below a Windows system, the local users and groups are also made available. You find further information on the filter in the User Manual in the chapter Permission Analysis.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/user-groups-selection/","title":"User/Groups Selection"},{"content":"Specific permissions are required for the app to function properly when inventorying Azure, Microsoft 365, and similar services. These permissions, including the \u0026ldquo;Global Reader\u0026rdquo; role, are assigned during Azure App creation. Optionally, the read permissions on the subscriptions to be inventoried should also be granted to enable Azure inventory.\nAzure Active Directory Exchange Online OneDrive Security Sharepoint Online Teams ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eSpecific permissions are required for the app to function properly when inventorying Azure, Microsoft 365, and similar services. These permissions, including the \u0026ldquo;Global Reader\u0026rdquo; role, are assigned during Azure App creation. Optionally, the read permissions on the subscriptions to be inventoried should also be granted to enable Azure inventory.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"azure-active-directory\"\u003eAzure Active Directory\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/azure-apps-permissions/docusnap-inventory-azure-permissions-ad.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Azure Azure Permissions Azure Active Directory\" title=\"Docusnap Azure Azure Permissions Azure Active Directory\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"exchange-online\"\u003eExchange Online\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/azure-apps-permissions/docusnap-inventory-azure-permissions-exchangeonline.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Azure Azure Permissions Exchange Online\" title=\"Docusnap Azure App Azure Azure Permissions Exchange Online\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/azure-apps-permissions/","title":"Azure Apps Permissions"},{"content":"The Docusnap wizards help you in all program modules when you need to perform or configure a process such as scanning the IT environment or creating documentation. As shown in the following illustration, all wizards have more or less the same structure.\nIn order to be able to use various Docusnap features, the wizards can be extended to include additional steps. Navigation Bar The navigation bar on the top of the dialog identifies the current step in the wizard.\nMain Windows The main window of the wizard displays the actual steps, such as selecting the domain to be inventoried, or specifying the Active Directory systems to be scanned.\nStatus Bar The status bar of the wizard displays detailed information and messages. If, for example, the authentication for the domain fails, a corresponding error message will be shown which informs you about the cause of the error.\nThe following message types are used:\nSuccess Error Warning Information Navigation Buttons (Next, Back, Cancel, Start, Close) The Next button takes you to the next step in the wizard. If this button is disabled, essential information is missing. You can get information on wrong entries or missing information from the status bar of the wizard.\nThe Back button behaves in the same way as the Next button, except that clicking the button will take the wizard back one step.\nCancel immediately terminates the wizard. If the wizard is performing a critical action at the time you click the Cancel button, such as a database operation, this action will be safely completed before the wizard closes. This ensures that Docusnap and the Docusnap database remain in a consistent state at all times.\nThe Start button will only become visible when you can start the inventory process. Clicking this button causes the inventory scan to start based on the data you have provided.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Docusnap wizards help you in all program modules when you need to perform or configure a process such as scanning the IT environment or creating documentation. As shown in the following illustration, all wizards have more or less the same structure.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/basics-wizards/docusnap-inventory-company-selection-labeled.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Inventory-Company-Selection-Labeled\" title=\"Docusnap-Inventory-Company-Selection-Labeled\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-success\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    In order to be able to use various Docusnap features, the wizards can be extended to include additional steps.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"navigation-bar\"\u003eNavigation Bar\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe navigation bar on the top of the dialog identifies the current step in the wizard.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/basics-wizards/","title":"Basics Wizards"},{"content":"User-defined nodes can be included in the search index. It must be ensured that the nodes are placed correctly in the tree and a corresponding foreign key has been defined for the search to work.\nPositioning: The node must be placed within the tree structure Inventory below the company level.\nNodes with Tables For the table, a foreign key must be selected in the Manage Tables dialog.\nNodes with Views There are several options for defining and determining the foreign key for the configuration of views, which are used depending on the existing data structure and specific requirements.\nIf a primary table is defined, the foreign key from this table is used. (To use input masks with a view, a primary table must be specified.) If an alternative foreign key has been set for the node in the Manage Objects dialog, this key is used. An alternative foreign key always has priority and is used instead of the foreign key from the primary table. If no foreign key can be determined directly, the closest parent object in the Data category is determined and its primary key is retrieved. If the search object has a column with the same name as the primary key field of the parent object, this column is used as the foreign key. Case Study A view with the primary table tHosts was created, which returns all systems of type Windows System. The node with the systems is displayed below the company level in the tree. The search index should be created for this view. The foreign key is generated according to the rules above and returns the DomainID of the tHosts table as the foreign key, as tHosts was selected as the primary table. However, the correct foreign key would be the AccountID of the table tDomains.\nSince the foreign key does not match the primary key of the superior object, either no results or incorrect results may be displayed.\nSolution:\nTo resolve this, the alternative foreign key for this node can be set to the AccountID in the Manage Objects dialog. This ensures the resolution of the node, and the indexed object appears in the search results.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eUser-defined nodes can be included in the search index. It must be ensured that the nodes are placed correctly in the tree and a corresponding foreign key has been defined for the search to work.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePositioning\u003c/strong\u003e: The node must be placed within the tree structure \u003cem\u003eInventory\u003c/em\u003e below the company level.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"nodes-with-tables\"\u003eNodes with Tables\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the table, a foreign key must be selected in the \u003cem\u003eManage Tables\u003c/em\u003e dialog.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"nodes-with-views\"\u003eNodes with Views\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThere are several options for defining and determining the foreign key for the configuration of views, which are used depending on the existing data structure and specific requirements.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/enterprise-search/customizing/","title":"Benutzerdefinierte Knoten"},{"content":"Like textboxes, labels can be used for the output of text. However, the user cannot enter data into labels, as they are merely used for display purposes. Usually, labels describe or name other controls on the data entry screen. Thus, a label can indicate the purpose of a text box.\nWhen controls are added to the layout control, a label is displayed automatically and must not be added.\nIn addition to the global properties, labels have two additional properties, which are explained in the table below.\nSpecific Properties of Labels AutoEllipsis If this property is set to \u0026lsquo;True\u0026rsquo; and the text exceeds the size of the control, an ellipsis symbol (\u0026hellip;) appears at the right edge of the control to indicate that the text continues. If this property is set to \u0026lsquo;False\u0026rsquo;, the text will simply be truncated at the edge of the control. TextAlign Similar to the property of the same name for text boxes. This property determines the horizontal alignment of the string it contains. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eLike \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/textfield/\" title=\"textboxes\"\u003etextboxes\u003c/a\u003e, labels can be used for the output of text. However, the user cannot enter data into labels, as they are merely used for display purposes. Usually, labels describe or name other controls on the data entry screen. Thus, a label can indicate the purpose of a text box.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen controls are added to the layout control, a label is displayed automatically and must not be added.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/caption/docusnap-edit-textboxes.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Edit-textboxes\" title=\"Docusnap-Edit-textboxes\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition to the global properties, labels have two additional properties, which are explained in the table below.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/caption/","title":"Caption"},{"content":"For the IT documentation framework, color schemes can be defined so that elements and groups can be assigned the same color. If further colors are required, these can be created in the Color Scheme tab. In addition, existing entries can be changed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eFor the IT documentation framework, color schemes can be defined so that elements and groups can be assigned the same color. If further colors are required, these can be created in the \u003cem\u003eColor Scheme\u003c/em\u003e tab. In addition, existing entries can be changed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/management/color-scheme/docusnap-management-color-scheme.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Management Color Scheme\" title=\"Docusnap Management Color Scheme\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/color-scheme/","title":"Color Scheme"},{"content":"The Connect area is used to create and manage Connect Packages.\nThe Connect Packages can be exported and imported using the Export Package and Import Package buttons. Schedule Conncet Package: Click the Schedule Conncet Package button to open the Docusnap Connect wizard. This wizard can be used to schedule a timed export of data. Additional functions are available in the action bar.\nNew: Creation of new Connect Packages is done with the New button. Delete: Existing Connect Packages can be removed using the Delete button. Clone package: Use the Clone Package button to copy a package and then modify it. Even packages that are included in the standard package and cannot be edited can be cloned and then customized as desired. Edit: Clicking the Edit button opens a dialog where you can change the package name and description. More information about Connect can be found in chapter Docusnap Connect.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eConnect\u003c/em\u003e area is used to create and manage Connect Packages.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Connect Packages can be exported and imported using the \u003cem\u003eExport Package\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eImport Package\u003c/em\u003e buttons.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/docusnap-connect/schedule-package/\" title=\"Schedule Conncet Package\"\u003eSchedule Conncet Package\u003c/a\u003e: Click the \u003cem\u003eSchedule Conncet Package\u003c/em\u003e button to open the \u003cem\u003eDocusnap Connect\u003c/em\u003e wizard. This wizard can be used to schedule a timed export of data.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdditional functions are available in the \u003cem\u003eaction bar.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNew: Creation of new Connect Packages is done with the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDelete: Existing Connect Packages can be removed using the \u003cem\u003eDelete\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eClone package: Use the \u003cem\u003eClone Package\u003c/em\u003e button to copy a package and then modify it. Even packages that are included in the standard package and cannot be edited can be cloned and then customized as desired.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEdit: Clicking the \u003cem\u003eEdit\u003c/em\u003e button opens a dialog where you can change the package name and description.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore information about Connect can be found in chapter \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/docusnap-connect/\" title=\"Docusnap Connect\"\u003eDocusnap Connect\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/navigation/connect/","title":"Connect"},{"content":"The design selected in the Layout (CI) dialog will be used for the concept. It is possible to choose an individual design for each concept. Clicking the Theme button opens the Designs, Styles dialog. There, you can select a design for the currently open concept.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe design selected in the \u003cem\u003eLayout (CI)\u003c/em\u003e dialog will be used for the concept. It is possible to choose an individual design for each concept. Clicking the \u003cem\u003eTheme\u003c/em\u003e button opens the Designs, Styles dialog. There, you can select a design for the currently open concept.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/concept/designs/docusnap-it-concepts-designs.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-IT-Concepts-Designs\" title=\"Docusnap-IT-Concepts-Designs\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/designs/","title":"Designs"},{"content":"Underlying Principle In Docusnap, it is possible to export customizations made to the database structure, the meta objects and the data entry screens and to apply them to other databases and Docusnap installations without much effort by importing them in the other environment.\nYou can export and import customizations via the Docusnap Management.\nNamespace Namespaces in customizing mean that each extension of the metaschema (tables, views, data tree objects) can be provided with a namespace. This way, all objects belonging to a larger customizing can be linked to each other. This is especially useful if a specific customizing should be exported and other customizings exist in this database. In the course of the export, the specific namespace can now be selected and the associated tables, views and data tree objects exported.\nExporting the Database Structure and the Meta Objects In order to export a meta schema, Docusnap must be connected to the database that contains the corresponding schema. By clicking on the Export schema button in the Customizing area, the Export metaschema dialog is opened. In the Path field, a storage location can be selected. In the field Namespace it is selected whether All or only a certain namespace should be exported. If a namespace is selected during export, all objects, tables and columns of this namespace and those with empty namespaces are taken into account. By clicking the Export button the current schema will be exported. A new file with the extension .dsu is created at the selected location, which contains the customizations made to the current Docusnap database.\nImporting the Database Structure and the Meta Objects Previously exported customizations of the meta schema can be imported into another database using a wizard. To do so, Docusnap needs to be connected to the target database at the time of the import process. By clicking the Import Schema button on the Customizing area, you can open the associated wizard that helps you specify further settings.\nIf a namespace was used when exporting the customizing, the import dialog now also shows which object is assigned to which namespace.\nThe first step in the wizard is to select the previously exported file which contains the modified meta schema. When you click the button, a file selection dialog opens where you can open the desired .dsu file.\nIn the second step, the wizard will display all customized and newly added meta objects that exist in the selected file and that will be imported into the current database. When importing the file, Docusnap considers all objects from the schema file. This means that all meta objects contained in the file will be imported. Due to the potential dependencies between the objects, a selection is not possible at this time. After the import, you can use the Manage Metaobjects dialog to delete any objects that are not required.\nIf a checkbox is displayed next to an object to be imported, an object with the same type ID already exists in the target database. The red font indicates that the corresponding object name or type ID is already present among the meta objects of the target database. If you enable the checkbox, the corresponding object in the target database will be overwritten by the information from the selected file. If you leave the checkbox unchecked, a new object with the same name, but a different type ID, will be created in the target database. In this case, the original object in the target database remains unchanged. If the type ID already exists but the object name is different, and you select the option for overwriting existing data, Docusnap will also overwrite the existing object name with the one from the import file.\nThe third step of the wizard lists all tables that are present in the selected file and that will be imported into the target database. The following figure shows a table called xtSLA which does not exist in the Docusnap system schema. The tHosts table, in contrast, belongs to the system schema. A field was added to it where users can enter additional information.\nThe Metatables to be imported list displays all tables that are either user-defined or have been customized by adding user-defined fields or by editing existing fields. When you select a table in the upper list, all added or modified columns of the selected table will be displayed in the Fields of Selected Table list below.\nIf a table does not yet exist in the target database, the table will be created with all its fields. If the table already exists, this list shows only the columns that are still missing. Docusnap will never delete fields that, while existing in the database, are not associated with that table in the schema file. All tables and fields will be imported during the import process. It is not possible to exclude individual tables or fields from being imported.\nIf a field already exists in the target database, but has a different data type than that of the definition in the import file, the field will be highlighted in red in the corresponding list. When you click the table in the upper list, Docusnap will display the columns in the lower list, highlighting the fields that still have problems in red. To perform the import process, change the data type in either the target database or the source database. However, the data type can only be changed by deleting the affected column and re-creating it with the other data type. Please note, that all data in this field will be deleted from the database. If you change the field in the source database, you need to re-export the schema file to make sure that the updated data will be imported. If you change the field in the target database, however, it is sufficient to only delete the field, since it will be re-created by importing the source file, this time with the appropriate data type from the source database.\nThe last step of the wizard shows a summary of all objects and tables to be imported. By clicking the Back button, you can change the selection, if required. To import the objects and tables into the target database, click the Finish button.\nDistributing Data Entry Screens Customized or newly created data entry screens are not automatically distributed by means of a wizard, since they are independent from the database in use. Instead, they will be loaded from the respective local or team settings. In order to make these changes available to multiple users, these users need access to the corresponding .dsu files. If team settings are used, it is usually sufficient to copy the modified .dsu files to the DataEdit subdirectory of the team settings directory, unless this has been done automatically when saving the data. If local settings are used, the corresponding files will always have to be distributed manually.\nEven if team settings are used, changes made to the data entry screens might not immediately be loaded into all Docusnap installations. In particular, if Docusnap is used on laptop computers by field representatives who are not connected to the corresponding team settings directory, the local settings will be used alternatively. In this case, manual distribution of the changes is indispensable in order to enable all users to use the modified data entry screens. ","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"underlying-principle\"\u003eUnderlying Principle\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn Docusnap, it is possible to export customizations made to the \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/\" title=\"database structure\"\u003edatabase structure\u003c/a\u003e, the \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/\" title=\"meta objects\"\u003emeta objects\u003c/a\u003e and the \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/\" title=\"data entry screens\"\u003edata entry screens\u003c/a\u003e and to apply them to other databases and Docusnap installations without much effort by importing them in the other environment.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can export and import customizations via the Docusnap Management.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"namespace\"\u003eNamespace\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNamespaces in customizing mean that each extension of the metaschema (tables, views, data tree objects) can be provided with a namespace.\nThis way, all objects belonging to a larger customizing can be linked to each other. This is especially useful if a specific customizing should be exported and other customizings exist in this database.\nIn the course of the export, the specific namespace can now be selected and the associated tables, views and data tree objects exported.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/distribution-of-modifications/","title":"Distribution of Modifications"},{"content":"Use the File button to load external data into the concept.\nYou can insert files of types such as doc, xls, txt, jpg, png, etc. XML files are imported as readable plain text.\nInserting PDF files, however, only works to a limited extent. After a PDF file has been inserted, it will be displayed, but not necessarily with its correct formatting. PDF files do not usually contain any information about the order of text, text flow, etc. Docusnap extracts and converts all of the text it can find, adds missing spaces and paragraph breaks, and re-sorts the various text blocks and images, so that they appear in their logical order.\nVisio files (.vsd, .vdx, .vsdx) can only be imported if Visio has been installed on the system. The Visio file can only be imported as a static file. Once the file has been imported, Visio does not need to be installed to update and export the concept.\nHtml files cannot always be imported completely if they for example contain vector graphics in SVG format or interactive elements (Javascript/ActiveX controls). For that reason, Docusnap maps exported as html files cannot be imported. However, the file can be imported in png format, which is also generated during the map export. In addition, the maps can also be imported via the Map button, in which case the maps can be updated to the new state if the data situation changes.\nThere are two different ways to insert files: To select the desired way, first click the File button and then select the desired option.\nDynamic File When you insert a file as a dynamic file, its content is invariable. This method is advantageous in that the inserted file will be updated within the concept if the underlying original file is modified.\nStatic File When you insert a file as a static file, its content is added and can subsequently be modified. In this case, changes to the original file will not be reflected in the concept.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eUse the \u003cem\u003eFile\u003c/em\u003e button to load external data into the concept.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can insert files of types such as doc, xls, txt, jpg, png, etc. XML files are imported as readable plain text.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInserting PDF files, however, only works to a limited extent. After a PDF file has been inserted, it will be displayed, but not necessarily with its correct formatting. PDF files do not usually contain any information about the order of text, text flow, etc. Docusnap extracts and converts all of the text it can find, adds missing spaces and paragraph breaks, and re-sorts the various text blocks and images, so that they appear in their logical order.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/create-concept/file/","title":"File"},{"content":"The IT Security tab displays the permissions related to the object that is currently selected in the tree view. Here, you can find information on share permissions as well as explicit and inherited permissions. The columns indicate whether a permission was granted or denied. You can also see what kind of permissions it is and how it is inherited. For the analysis, any number of users or groups can be selected. For each selection, the currently valid permissions are shown.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eIT Security\u003c/em\u003e tab displays the permissions related to the object that is currently selected in the tree view. Here, you can find information on share permissions as well as explicit and inherited permissions. The columns indicate whether a permission was granted or denied. You can also see what kind of permissions it is and how it is inherited. For the analysis, any number of users or groups can be selected. For each selection, the currently valid permissions are shown.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/it-security/","title":"IT Security"},{"content":"The Docusnap License Management allows you to enter the license agreements for purchased software based on the respective licensing model. Docusnap then associates the installed software base with the license agreements and detects any over-licensing or under-licensing situation. Docusnap is able to map all common variants of licensing models, such as per-device, per-user, per-processor, and per-core licensing. Of course, this also allows for upgrading and downgrading as well as for terminal server licensing. Comprehensive features which are suitable to map nearly all use cases relevant to licensing are available, all evaluations being performed at the company level. Some selected examples for such evaluation options will be given in a separate section.\nThe dataset on which License Management is based consists of the software found during the most recent Network Scan of the systems inventoried in the network. All software installations found will be considered, regardless of the device type or the installed operating system, provided that they have been enabled in the License Management options. In addition, all installations found through the Software Search process, as well as manually entered software products will be included in the License Management evaluations.\nBasically there are two ways how the software products are assigned to licensing. Docusnap provides a list of installed software products for which a license can be created. In license management wizard, these products can then be assigned to licensing. As a result all installations of this software product are counted for this licensing. Alternatively you can also use search words. These keywords help you to determine the Software Products found on the inventoried systems. This means that, e.g., different versions of the same software product can be easily covered just by specifying appropriate keywords. An in-depth explanation of the use of keywords and the possibilities they offer will be given in the description of the License Management wizard.\nThe so-called Software Product form the core component of the License Management module. Each Software Product in the Docusnap License Management sense is a software product, installed in one of the inventoried systems, that needs to be organized. In the tree structure, the software products are displayed in two different ways. All software products and systems of this company are taken into account in the licenses below the respective group. With Docusnap you can create sites. These sites can be allocated to systems and software products. The licenses for this sites are then displayed under the Sites heading and only systems that have been assigned to this site are taken into account.\nTo each software product, you can assign multiple licenses. These licenses in Docusnap correspond to the real-life software licenses actually purchased and the software contracts signed. From the registered licenses, the License Management module knows how many installations of the software may be found during the inventory process before under-licensing occurs. Depending on the licensing type, the assigned devices or users a license has been issued for are located below each license.\nBelow the Installations heading the License Management tree view contains several nodes for performing various analyses which will be discussed in a separate section. The Undesired Products node represents a special issue regarding software that should not be found on the target systems. The License Management module provides many comprehensive evaluations in the form of reports.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Docusnap License Management allows you to enter the license agreements for purchased software based on the respective licensing model. Docusnap then associates the installed software base with the license agreements and detects any over-licensing or under-licensing situation. Docusnap is able to map all common variants of licensing models, such as per-device, per-user, per-processor, and per-core licensing. Of course, this also allows for upgrading and downgrading as well as for terminal server licensing. Comprehensive features which are suitable to map nearly all use cases relevant to licensing are available, all evaluations being performed at the company level. Some selected examples for such evaluation options will be given in a \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/evaluations/\" title=\"separate section\"\u003eseparate section\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/","title":"License Management"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying macOS systems, click the macOS button. The macOS Systems step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps).\nIf the firewall is alerted due to too many pings during the search of the IP segments, the number of parallel pings can be limited during the search.\nIf a new search is started in a different IP range, the Discard already found systems after new search option can be used to define whether already existing systems should be deleted.\nWhen macOS inventory is scheduled and executed at a later time, the Update selected systems option can be used to determine whether only the selected systems are inventoried or the IP area is scanned again, and all found systems are taken into account for the inventory.\nThere are two ways to identify the available macOS systems:\nEntering an IP Segment Manually First, you need to enter the required information (IP from, IP to, User, Password, Port) in the Add IP Range group and save this information. Then, click the Start Search button to identify the Mac systems in the specified segment(s). During this process, the individual IP addresses in the specified segments will be pinged. Each Mac system that replies successfully will be added to the Found Systems list.\nIf multiple IP ranges should be included in the inventory, they can also be imported from a CSV file by clicking the Load List button, instead of creating them individually using the buttons New and Save. In the CSV file the values for IP from, IP to, User, Password and Port must be listed in that order separated by \u0026ldquo;;\u0026rdquo;. If no port is specified the port 22 is used by default. If a line doesn\u0026rsquo;t match this format, this one will be omitted.\nEntering Individual Computers Manually In addition to scanning entire IP ranges for systems, you can also specify a single system. In the Found Systems group, click the New button and then enter either a system name or an IP address as well as the User name and Password for the system to be scanned subsequently.\nThe actual inventory process is based on the systems listed in the Found Systems group. All systems selected there will be scanned.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying macOS systems, click the \u003cem\u003emacOS\u003c/em\u003e button. The \u003cem\u003emacOS Systems\u003c/em\u003e step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/macos-systems/docusnap-inventory-macintosh-systems.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory MacIntosh Systems\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory MacIntosh Systems\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the firewall is alerted due to too many pings during the search of the IP segments, the number of parallel pings can be limited during the search.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf a new search is started in a different IP range, the \u003cem\u003eDiscard already found systems after new search\u003c/em\u003e option can be used to define whether already existing systems should be deleted.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/macos-systems/","title":"macOS Systems"},{"content":"In Docusnap, you can move an inventoried system from one domain to another domain in the same or in a different company. Thereby the inventory data associated with a system that was moved to another domain, can also be moved in Docusnap. When you move a system, all related data is moved with it. The data of the system you moved will also be displayed in the License Management and Permission Analysis for the domain the system has been moved to. You can move inventoried Windows, Linux, Mac and SNMP systems.\nTo move a system, right-click it in the Inventory tree view and select Move from the context menu.\nIn the Move dialog, select the company and domain where you want to move the selected system. The system will be moved by when you click the Move button.\nBy moving a system, it can no longer be linked with the diagram. Therefore, it will be marked as (deleted). In this case, the system would have to be deleted from the diagram and then added to the diagram again from the new position in the tree.\nIf the data of a moved system has been added to a concept, then this data is no longer in the concept after the update. In this case, the data of the system would have to be added back to the concept from the new position in the tree.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn Docusnap, you can move an inventoried system from one domain to another domain in the same or in a different company. Thereby the inventory data associated with a system that was moved to another domain, can also be moved in Docusnap. When you move a system, all related data is moved with it. The data of the system you moved will also be displayed in the License Management and Permission Analysis for the domain the system has been moved to. You can move inventoried Windows, Linux, Mac and SNMP systems.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/move-systems/","title":"Move Systems"},{"content":"As already described in the Basics - Wizards section, Docusnap wizards can be extended as needed. The Software and File Search step can be enabled from the General page of the Options - Inventory dialog.\nThe Software Search step is available in the following wizards:\nNetwork Scan Windows (AD) Windows (IP) Linux macOS The software and file search in Docusnap is used to search for specific files on the file system of Linux, Mac, and Windows systems. Here, file names are defined, which Docusnap then searches during the inventory on the file system.\nThe files found are made available for evaluation in Docusnap in different ways depending on the categorization (file search Linux, Mac and Windows or software search Windows).\nIf, for example, an application (.exe) has been saved to the file system from a distribution package without registering with the target system, Docusnap will not be able to find this product during the automated inventory scan. With the Software Search feature, Docusnap accesses the file system directly and attempts to find the defined software product in the course of the inventory scan. If the defined files are found, a corresponding entry is created in the list of installed software products on the system. Thereupon this software can be analyzed also in the range of the license management.\nThe file search designates here any files, which you would like to search, for example due to a safety gap (log4j). The files are then also listed with the path in which they were found. For each system the found files are displayed. A new object within the summary and a new predefined Docusnap Connect package provide the possibility for cross-system analysis.\nBefore you can use the Software and File Search feature, you need to define the files for the search. They are defined in the Software and File Search dialog (Docusnap Administration).\nAll registered definitions will be listed as a result of the Software Search step. By enabling or disabling the checkboxes, you can determine which files Docusnap will be looking for when performing the automated scan.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eAs already described in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/basics-wizards/\" title=\"Basis - Wizards\"\u003eBasics - Wizards\u003c/a\u003e section, Docusnap wizards can be extended as needed. The \u003cem\u003eSoftware and File Search\u003c/em\u003e step can be enabled from the General page of the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/options-inventory/\" title=\"Options - Inventory\"\u003eOptions - Inventory\u003c/a\u003e dialog.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Software Search step is available in the following wizards:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNetwork Scan\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWindows (AD)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWindows (IP)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLinux\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003emacOS\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/optional-steps/optional-software-and-file-search/docusnap-network-inventory-software-search-graph.png\" alt=\"Docusnao Network Inventory Software Search Graph\" title=\"Docusnao Network Inventory Software Search Graph\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe software and file search in Docusnap is used to search for specific files on the file system of Linux, Mac, and Windows systems. Here, file names are defined, which Docusnap then searches during the inventory on the file system.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/optional-steps/optional-software-and-file-search/","title":"Optional: Software and File Search"},{"content":"Settings for the license management can specified in the Options - License Management dialog. The dialog can be opened via the title bar by clicking the button.\nGeneral Use the Include Mac Software Products, Include Linux Software Products and Include Unknown Software Products checkboxes to specify which software products should be provided for selection in the Software Relevant for Licensing dialog.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eSettings for the license management can specified in the \u003cem\u003eOptions - License Management\u003c/em\u003e dialog. The dialog can be opened via the title bar by clicking the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/options/docusnap-title-bar-options.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Options\" title=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Options\"\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"general\"\u003eGeneral\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the \u003cem\u003eInclude Mac Software Products, Include Linux Software Products\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eInclude Unknown Software Products\u003c/em\u003e checkboxes to specify which software products should be provided for selection in the \u003cem\u003eSoftware Relevant for Licensing\u003c/em\u003e dialog.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/options/docusnap-configuration-license-management-general.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Configuration-License-Management-General\" title=\"Docusnap-Configuration-License-Management-General\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/options/","title":"Options"},{"content":"Meta objects of the Output type are used to show documents such as maps, datasheets or overviews in the tree structure. Unlike the Document Path used for meta objects of the Data and Caption types, Docusnap will only display the Document tab for Output-type objects. In addition, you can specify which wizard will be used to create the document. The selected wizard will be shown as a dashboard on the Document tab if the corresponding document has not been created yet.\nProperty Description Dokumentpfad The document path specifies the path to external documents, e.g. in Word or HTML format. When you select an object, Docusnap automatically checks whether documents exist in this path. If documents are found, they will be displayed on the Documents tab.\nThe path entered for this property is always relative to the documentation directory. In order to make paths flexible, you can use variables when specifying the path. The following variables are available:\n%Account%: Company name\n%Domain%: Domain name\n%Object%: Object name\n%ParentObject%: OObject name of the parent node\nDocusnap will automatically append \u0026ldquo;_EN.html\u0026rdquo; or \u0026ldquo;_DE.html\u0026rdquo; to the file names. If the desired document has not been created yet, a dashboard displays. From there, you can launch the wizard for creating this document. For each meta object of type Output the Document Info tab is displayed on the right side.\nProperty Description Info in German /Info in English In the Info in German and Info in English fields, you can enter the text to be displayed on the dashboard. Document Type In the Document Type field, you can specify whether the document is a map, a datasheet or a list. Help ID Using the help ID, you can specify which section of the help system will be accessed via the dashboard. Chart In the Chart group, you can select the wizard to be used for creating the desired document. If another wizard is required after the initial wizard, you can select it from the Next Wizard dropdown list. |\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eMeta objects of the \u003cem\u003eOutput\u003c/em\u003e type are used to show documents such as maps, datasheets or overviews in the tree structure. Unlike the Document Path used for meta objects of the Data and Caption types, Docusnap will only display the \u003cem\u003eDocument\u003c/em\u003e tab for Output-type objects. In addition, you can specify which wizard will be used to create the document. The selected wizard will be shown as a dashboard on the \u003cem\u003eDocument\u003c/em\u003e tab if the corresponding document has not been created yet.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/output/","title":"Output"},{"content":"The Docusnap license management offers several options to determine the number of needed licenses. The number of licenses can be calculated on one hand by defining search words to determine the software products, on the other hand by assigning software products via the software list directly to a license or by using the advanced filter mode.\nKeywords For the license evaluation keywords can be defined in order to determine respective installations on the inventoried systems. The almost unlimited combination of keywords lets you adjust the keywords individually to each and every situation.\nClick the Keywords button to open the Define Filter dialog.\nGenerally, you need to distinguish inclusive and exclusive keywords. Inclusive keywords identify all installations that contain the specified keyword, whereas exclusive keywords identify all installations without the specified keyword. Each keyword, regardless of whether inclusive or exclusive, represents a trifold combination consisting of product name, publisher and version. These three components are additively combined for each keyword type, which means that only if all three individual components match for an installation, the entire keyword will return a positive result. You can combine any desired keywords to identify the corresponding installations as precisely as possible, using both inclusive and exclusive keywords to further narrow down a first interim result. Please note that, when using multiple inclusive keywords, every installation that matches any one of these keywords will be returned and, when using multiple exclusive keywords, all installations will be excluded that match any one of those keywords. If you combine inclusive keywords with exclusive keywords, the specified inclusive keywords will only be applied to that set of installations which still remain after applying the exclusive keywords to the entire set of data available.\nClick the New button to specify a new keyword. If you uncheck the checkbox next to one of the three keyword components, that component accepts any character string. This is indicated by a \u0026ldquo;%\u0026rdquo; in the respective field.\nAs with other Docusnap items, you can edit existing keywords. To do so, select the desired keyword, edit it and then click the Save button once editing is finished. To remove a keyword, select it and click Delete. A list of all inventoried software installations is displayed at the bottom of the wizard page to help you with selection. By selecting an entry the name, the manufacturer, and version are entered into the text boxes, and must not be entered manually.\nBy clicking the Preview button, all systems, on which a software has been installed, that corresponds to these search words, are listed.\nAfter the keywords have been defined, the dialog is closed by clicking on the Finish button and the filter is stored.\nSoftware List When the License Management wizard is opened via the Software Relevant for Licensing dialog, the respective software product is already assigned.\nClicking the Software List button opens the Define Filter dialog.\nIn the left list, the software products are listed which can be assigned to the licensing. In the Search field the name of the software product is specified by default, and all versions of this software product can be assigned. The search can be adapted and software name, software manufacturers and software version can be searched. To list all software products clear the Search field and click the button.\nBy clicking on the Add button all selected software products are assigned to the current licensing. To delete assignments select the software products in the right list and click the Remove button.\nIn the license evaluation the number of needed licenses will be determined by counting on how many systems the associated software product has been installed.\nBy clicking the Preview button, all systems, on which the assigned software has been installed, are listed.\nAfter the assignment has been defined, the dialog is closed by clicking on the Finish button and the filter is stored.\nExpert Filter Mode When switching to the expert mode it is possible to define the keywords in even greater detail. Especially because in the expert mode conditions can be grouped and linked with And or Or.\nClicking the Expert Filter Mode button opens the Define Filter dialog.\nSelect in the column Field if the specified value has to match the product name, the name of the publisher or the version of the software product. Click the button to add another row. Click the button to delete the current row.\nOperator In the column Operator you can choose between Contains, Contains not, = and \u0026lt;\u0026gt;. It is possible to use wildcards to specify the keywords more precisely.\nContains: The specified value must be contained in the Software Name, Publisher or Version. Not Contains: The specified value must not be contained in the Software Name, Publisher or Version. =: The value has to match the Software Name, Publisher or Version exactly. \u0026lt;\u0026gt;: The value must not match to the Software Name, Publisher or Version. And/Or Once several keywords are specified, select in the And/Or column whether the conditions should be linked with And or Or. If the terms are linked with And, then all conditions have to apply to the Software Name, Publisher or Version. If the conditions are linked with Or, only one of the terms has to match the Software Name, Publisher or Version.\nGrouping Use grouping to nest the conditions as needed. For example two terms can be linked with Or and then be extended with And to include another condition. Click the checkbox to select the conditions, afterward click the button to group the selected entries to one condition. Only conditions listed one below the other can be grouped. The button marks the start of the group. Click the button to revoke the grouping. It is possible to organize the grouping in several levels. Select more than one group and click on the button to group them into one condition.\nProduct name and publisher and/or versions, which are listed directly under each other and are linked with And will be regarded as one combination. These components are additively combined, which means that only if all the individual components match for an installation, the entire keyword will return a positive result. The next specified product name is considered as a new combination.\nExample In the expert mode you can define that additionally to the Office Product either Windows 7 or Windows 8 has to be installed, to be taken into account in this software product. Also no VMware tools are allowed to be installed, since they indicate that a system is part of a virtual environment. This scenario can be defined as follows.\nPreview Click Preview button to apply the search words and display the installed software the conditions match.\nAfter the filter has been defined, the dialog is closed by clicking on the Finish button and the filter is stored.\nUse of Wildcards In addition to entering exact keyword strings, you can use wildcards as placeholders for other characters to make your keyword entries even more flexible. The table below briefly shows the available wildcards, which characters they can replace and how the wildcards are applied.\nWildcard Meaning and application Example % or * Any sequence of zero or more characters. Application: % %Docusnap% \u0026ndash;\u0026gt; returns all entries that contain the word \u0026ldquo;Docusnap\u0026rdquo; in any position. _ (underscore) Replaces any single character. Application: _ _ocusnap \u0026ndash;\u0026gt; returns all entries that end with \u0026ldquo;ocusnap\u0026rdquo; and are preceded by any single character. [] Any one character contained in a given range of characters. Application: [a] or [abcdef] or [a-f] Do[ck]usnap \u0026ndash;\u0026gt; returns all entries containing the word \u0026ldquo;Docusnap\u0026rdquo; or \u0026ldquo;Dokusnap\u0026rdquo;. [^] Any one character not contained in a given range. Application: [^a] or [^abcdef] or [^a-f] Dousna[^b] \u0026ndash;\u0026gt; returns all entries that begin with \u0026ldquo;Docusna\u0026rdquo; and end with any character except \u0026ldquo;b\u0026rdquo;. The wildcards presented in the table above may be embedded into keywords as desired. Thus, for example, four sequential underscores, \u0026ldquo;_\u0026rdquo;, followed by the string \u0026ldquo;snap\u0026rdquo;, (\u0026quot;____snap\u0026quot;) would return any character string that contains any four characters preceding \u0026ldquo;snap\u0026rdquo;. The combination \u0026ldquo;[d]_[^ab]%\u0026rdquo; means that the first character of the name of the installation must be a \u0026ldquo;d\u0026rdquo;, followed by any character that is not an \u0026ldquo;a\u0026rdquo; or \u0026ldquo;b\u0026rdquo;, followed by any combination of characters. Consequently, \u0026ldquo;Docusnap\u0026rdquo;, would be found by this keyword. Keywords are not case-sensitive. Keywords are especially helpful when looking for all releases of a particular software: the keyword \u0026ldquo;5.%\u0026rdquo;, for example, would find all minor versions of a major version 5. To achieve an optimum result, the keywords should be as exact as possible and as generic as necessary. Thus, excessive usage of \u0026ldquo;%\u0026rdquo; may identify many \u0026lsquo;wrong\u0026rsquo; installations that subsequently have to be excluded by exclusive keywords. In contrast, using keywords without any wildcards probably requires you to define a very long list of keywords in order to cover all potential installations. Please note that both the number of keywords and their complexity may affect the duration of the evaluation, the number of keywords usually having a greater influence, especially if you are scanning a very large network environment.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Docusnap license management offers several options to determine the number of needed licenses. The number of licenses can be calculated on one hand by defining search words to determine the software products, on the other hand by assigning software products via the software list directly to a license or by using the advanced filter mode.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/product-recognition/docusnap-license-management-product-recognition-assignment.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-License-Management-Product-Recognition-Assignment\" title=\"Docusnap-License-Management-Product-Recognition-Assignment\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"keywords\"\u003eKeywords\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the license evaluation keywords can be defined in order to determine respective installations on the inventoried systems. The almost unlimited combination of keywords lets you adjust the keywords individually to each and every situation.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/product-recognition/","title":"Product Recognition"},{"content":"This section uses a sample report to explain how you can create reports.\nYou will learn how to create a report yourself. In addition, this section explains the use of relations to specify which data will be shown in the report.\nIn an example, you can see how styles are applied to a report.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThis section uses a sample report to explain how you can create reports.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou will learn how to create a report yourself. In addition, this section explains the use of relations to specify which data will be shown in the report.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn an example, you can see how styles are applied to a report.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/report-creation/","title":"Report Creation"},{"content":"Shapes in Docusnap are graphical images of elements. These are needed, for example, to visually represent the structure of a rack. Examples for shapes are servers, workstations, power strips, UPS, patch panels, etc.\nShape Editor Docusnap supplies ready-made shapes. The existing shape collection can be extended using the Shape Editor.\nFor newly created other assets, a corresponding shape is automatically created.\nUse Shape Editor The Shape Editor is started within the Infrastructure Editor via the button and the selection Edit Element Types.\nNew - Element (Shape Editor) can now be selected in the newly opened Manage Shapes window.\nWorking with the Shape Editor Adding new shapes\nIn order to be able to create new shapes, corresponding image files are required first. Please note that front and back side are required.\nIn the first step information regarding name, type, height, width and depth are entered. The values refer to the actual size of the object.\nThe image files are then made available. Image files can be made available to the Shape Editor already cut. However, the Shape Editor also has an integrated Crop mode.\nDefine Plugs Docusnap automatically recognizes the possible plug connections of the shape. The following figure shows the detected plugs (marked red).\nBy adjusting the plug width and height, the algorithm is able to detect plug connections that were not detected during the first run. A connector is defined by selecting the plug type on the shape. By clicking on the red area representing the connector, it is added to the list as a plug. Before a selection is made, the appropriate plug type should be selected so that it does not have to be adjusted manually afterwards.\nAdd Undetected Plugs If individual plugs are not detected automatically, they can be added manually. The Define Plug Manually mode is used for this purpose.\nThe position of the plug can be defined with the aid of four marking points.\nAdd Properties Further properties (e.g. weight, current consumption etc.) can be added to an element via and the Edit Element Types option.\nTo assign properties to an element, it must be selected. The Properties button opens an overview of the available properties.\nThe Define Properties button can be used to create additional properties and assign them to the element.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eShapes in Docusnap are graphical images of elements. These are needed, for example, to visually represent the structure of a rack. Examples for shapes are servers, workstations, power strips, UPS, patch panels, etc.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"shape-editor\"\u003eShape Editor\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap supplies ready-made shapes. The existing shape collection can be extended using the \u003cem\u003eShape Editor.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor newly created other assets, a corresponding shape is automatically created.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"use-shape-editor\"\u003eUse Shape Editor\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Shape Editor is started within the Infrastructure Editor via the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/shapes/docusnap-physical-infrastructure-edit-types.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Edit-Types\" title=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Edit-Types\"\u003e button and the selection Edit Element Types.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/shapes/","title":"Shapes"},{"content":"The SQL Server map contains all databases that are located on an SQL server. If you enable the Display System Databases checkbox, the system tables from the database will also be shown in the map. Databases to be excluded from the map can be disabled in the list.\nThe Visio file and the HTML file will be stored in the Maps folder.\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Maps\\sql)\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe SQL Server map contains all databases that are located on an SQL server. If you enable the \u003cem\u003eDisplay System Databases\u003c/em\u003e checkbox, the system tables from the database will also be shown in the map. Databases to be excluded from the map can be disabled in the list.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Visio file and the HTML file will be stored in the Maps folder.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cem\u003e(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Maps\\sql)\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/sql-server/docusnap-documentation-sql-server.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Documentation-SQL-Server\" title=\"Docusnap-Documentation-SQL-Server\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/sql-server/","title":"SQL Server"},{"content":"If the Enterprise Search is not activated, the Standard Search is executed when the search is started. Especially in large databases, the Standard Search takes more time to find results than the Enterprise Search.\nIf no restrictions are made, all tree structures are searched.\nTo restrict the search to specific nodes to be searched, you can define a filter. The Search Filter dialog, that opens when you click the Filter button on the search bar, lists all meta objects. Select the meta objects to be included in the search.\nFor a full-text search, the following controls are available:\nControl Description Combo box Used to enter the search word. The combo box contains a history of the previously entered search words. However, these search words are only stored until Docusnap is closed. When Docusnap is started again, the combo box is empty again. The search word does not have to be a complete word, as the full text search also finds individual fragments in the tree. Archive If you enable this checkbox, all existing snapshots will be searched. If the checkbox is disabled, only the current snapshots will be searched. / Starts or terminates the current search. Filter A filter can be used to restrict the search to specific meta objects. Progress bar The green progress bar remains visible until the search has completed. After starting the search, the label Searched Data Sets appears. The following value indicates how many objects were searched. Example If you enter the search string Microsoft Office, the tree view will be searched for items that contain the words Microsoft Office. This means that the search will find every object that contains the string Microsoft Office (software, updates, printers, services, etc.).\nThe search results will be displayed in the upper pane of the main window. There, you can see the name, object type and path of the objects found by the search. When you double-click on the icon of the search result entry in this pane, the associated object will be highlighted in the tree view and its data displayed in the lower pane.\nColumn Description Name The name of the object in the tree view. Object The object type associated with the current tree view level where the search result is located. Path Indicates the path to the object in the tree view. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIf the Enterprise Search is not activated, the Standard Search is executed when the search is started. Especially in large databases, the Standard Search takes more time to find results than the Enterprise Search.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf no restrictions are made, all tree structures are searched.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo restrict the search to specific nodes to be searched, you can define a filter. The \u003cem\u003eSearch Filter\u003c/em\u003e dialog, that opens when you click the Filter button on the search bar, lists all meta objects. Select the meta objects to be included in the search.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/enterprise-search/standard-search/","title":"Standard Search"},{"content":"The additional Information Comments, Tasks, Passwords, Contracts and Financial Records offer types which can be used to define the content of the additional Information more precisely. In Docusnap, predefined types are available that can be extended as required.\nIn each respective tab for additional Information more types can be added using the New button. You can choose any name you like. The names of the types will be displayed in English in the data entry screen. If the user interface language is German, the types will be displayed in German. To edit a type highlight it. Then, you can edit the English or German designation in the text fields.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe additional Information Comments, Tasks, Passwords, Contracts and Financial Records offer types which can be used to define the content of the additional Information more precisely. In Docusnap, predefined types are available that can be extended as required.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn each respective tab for additional Information more types can be added using the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button. You can choose any name you like. The names of the types will be displayed in English in the data entry screen. If the user interface language is German, the types will be displayed in German. To edit a type highlight it. Then, you can edit the English or German designation in the text fields.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/additional-information/","title":"Additional Information"},{"content":"\nUsing additional information, you can add extra information to the objects listed in the Explorer. The additional information can be comments, financial records, passwords, contracts or tasks. The tab for entering and editing additional information will be displayed when you click an object in the Data Explorer or License Management explorer.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/additional-information/docusnap-organization-overview-graph.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Organization-Overview-Graph\" title=\"Docusnap-Organization-Overview-Graph\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing additional information, you can add extra information to the objects listed in the Explorer. The additional information can be comments, financial records, passwords, contracts or tasks. The tab for entering and editing additional information will be displayed when you click an object in the Data Explorer or License Management explorer.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/additional-information/","title":"Additional Information"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying your CIFS systems, click the CIFS button. The CIFS step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps).\nThe Wizard for CIFS systems inventories SMB-based shares and their permissions to provide the basis for the permission analysis with Docusnap. (see the IT Security section)\nFor the inventory of systems with SMB shares, the protocols SNMPv2 and SNMPv3 are available to establish a connection. After selecting the protocol, the IP address or hostname of the device is entered. SNMPv2 requires the specification of a community string, while SNMPv3 necessitates additional credentials for authentication.\nAdd System Select SNMP Version: After clicking the Add button, choose whether to use the SNMPv2 or SNMPv3 protocol.\nSNMPv2 or SNMPv3 Dialog: After selecting the protocol, a separate dialog opens in each case to specify the login credentials.\nSave and Verify: After entering the required information, click Save to add the system to the inventory list.\nEdit Devices: By clicking the Edit button, the respective dialog for the selected system opens, allowing the system to be edited.\nSystem Definition for SNMPv2 The fields Hostname, User, Password, and Community define a CIFS system to be inventoried.\nSystem Definition for SNMPv3 In this dialog, enter the login credentials that correspond to the configured security level of the systems.\nAfter the desired systems have been added, you can use the checkbox next to each system to specify whether it is to be included in the inventory scan or not.\nWhen using a different user account to inventory a CIFS system, all existing network connections to the target system must first be disconnected. This prevents conflicts that may arise from parallel connections under different usernames. An overview of active connections can be obtained using the \u0026rsquo;net use\u0026rsquo; command. For the inventory of legacy CIFS systems that rely on the SMB1 protocol, it is necessary to temporarily enable it on the Docusnap system. The current status of SMB1 can be determined by executing \u0026lsquo;Get-SmbServerConfiguration\u0026rsquo; in PowerShell.(temporarily during the inventory). ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying your CIFS systems, click the CIFS button. The CIFS step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/cifs/docusnap-inventory-cifs.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory CIFS\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory CIFS\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Wizard for CIFS systems inventories SMB-based shares and their permissions to provide the basis for the permission analysis with Docusnap. (\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/it-security/\" title=\"IT Security\"\u003esee the IT Security section\u003c/a\u003e)\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the inventory of systems with SMB shares, the protocols SNMPv2 and SNMPv3 are available to establish a connection. After selecting the protocol, the IP address or hostname of the device is entered. SNMPv2 requires the specification of a community string, while SNMPv3 necessitates additional credentials for authentication.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/cifs/","title":"CIFS"},{"content":"By adding a date/time picker to your data entry screen, you can provide a control that helps the user select a time or date to be saved in the database. This control is useful if users have to enter periods of validity, expiration dates and similar values.\nSpecific Properties of Date/Time Pickers DisplayFormat This property defines how the date will be represented in the control. Five different options are available. How the date or time will be displayed at runtime depends upon the locale settings in the control panel of the computer. The following options are available: - ShortDate: date in short format - LongDate: date in long format - Time: time in long format - DateTime: date in short format, time in long format - DateTimeShort: date and time in short format Fieldname Specifies the linked column in the respective table of the current Docusnap database. The meta object linked with the data entry screen determines which table will be used. For a date/time picker control, the corresponding target column in the database must always be of the Date data type. MaxDate Specifies the latest date the user will be able to enter or select for this control. MinDate Specifies the earliest date the user will be able to enter or select for this control. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eBy adding a \u003cem\u003edate/time\u003c/em\u003e picker to your data entry screen, you can provide a control that helps the user select a time or date to be saved in the \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/\" title=\"database\"\u003edatabase\u003c/a\u003e. This control is useful if users have to enter periods of validity, expiration dates and similar values.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/date-time-picker/docusnap-edit-datetime-picker.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Edit-DateTime-Picker\" title=\"Docusnap-Edit-DateTime-Picker\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003e\u003c/th\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003eSpecific Properties of Date/Time Pickers\u003c/th\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDisplayFormat\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eThis property defines how the date will be represented in the control. Five different options are available. How the date or time will be displayed at runtime depends upon the locale settings in the control panel of the computer. The following options are available: \u003cbr\u003e - ShortDate: date in short format \u003cbr\u003e - LongDate: date in long format \u003cbr\u003e- Time: time in long format \u003cbr\u003e - DateTime: date in short format, time in long format \u003cbr\u003e - DateTimeShort: date and time in short format\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFieldname\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eSpecifies the \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/\" title=\"linked column\"\u003elinked column\u003c/a\u003e in the respective table of the current Docusnap database. The \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/\" title=\"meta object\"\u003emeta object\u003c/a\u003e linked with the data entry screen determines which table will be used. For a \u003cem\u003edate/time picker\u003c/em\u003e control, the corresponding target column in the database must always be of the Date data type.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMaxDate\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eSpecifies the latest date the user will be able to enter or select for this control.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMinDate\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eSpecifies the earliest date the user will be able to enter or select for this control.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/tbody\u003e\n\u003c/table\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/date-time-picker/","title":"Date/Time Picker"},{"content":"The DHCP Server map can be created either from the Create Docu wizard or the DHCP Server wizard.\nAfter selecting the domains, the maps for the selected domains are displayed. When the checkbox is selected, this DHCP map is created.\nThe preview window reflects the layout of the DHCP Server map. You can change the layout, if required. For most DHCP Server maps, however, we recommend to use the default settings.\nThe DHCP map will be stored in the Maps folder for the corresponding domain.\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Maps\\dhcp)\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe DHCP Server map can be created either from the \u003cem\u003eCreate Docu\u003c/em\u003e wizard or the \u003cem\u003eDHCP Server\u003c/em\u003e wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfter selecting the domains, the maps for the selected domains are displayed. When the checkbox is selected, this DHCP map is created.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe preview window reflects the layout of the DHCP Server map. You can change the layout, if required. For most DHCP Server maps, however, we recommend to use the default settings.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/dhcp-server/","title":"DHCP Server"},{"content":"Meta objects of the Diagram type are used to show the structures and Active Directory group policies as separate nodes in the tree view\nThe Diagram category cannot be used for user-defined objects. Therefore, when creating new objects, this category is not available for selection. The diagram objects are filled with the correct data by Docusnap based on their ObjectTypeID, e.g. the AdHoc Network Map or the AD structure of a user. Structure For Active Directory users and Active Directory groups, an additional tab is used to show the structures. This tab shows group nesting as well as user nesting information.\nUsing this information, you can find out the following:\nWhich group or groups is the user x a member of? Which members make up the group y? The Diagram-type meta object is used to show the structure as a separate node below the Active Directory user and Active Directory groups.\nGroup Policies In Docusnap, you can retrieve group policies and assign them to the corresponding organizational units, sites and domains. When you create a meta object of the Diagram type and the GPO diagram type, Docusnap creates a group policy node that is displayed below the group policy information. As the table for the parent node, select one that uses the GPOSettingsID field of the tADSGPOSettings table as the primary key.\nVisualization The diagram type Visualization is an object that can only be used by the vendor to create maps dynamically and display them in the main window.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eMeta objects of the \u003cem\u003eDiagram\u003c/em\u003e type are used to show the structures and Active Directory group policies as separate nodes in the tree view\u003c/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-success\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    The Diagram category cannot be used for user-defined objects. Therefore, when creating new objects, this category is not available for selection.\nThe diagram objects are filled with the correct data by Docusnap based on their ObjectTypeID, e.g. the AdHoc Network Map or the AD structure of a user.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 id=\"structure\"\u003eStructure\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor Active Directory users and Active Directory groups, an additional tab is used to show the structures. This tab shows group nesting as well as user nesting information.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/diagram/","title":"Diagram"},{"content":"To evaluate the results in terms of licensing, many different options, that can be adjusted and extended using the Customizing module, are available in Docusnap. Basically, you have the choice between evaluations available directly from the tree view in the License Management module and evaluations presented as reports. Please note that the report-type evaluations usually provide more functionality, especially when it comes to determining the licenses currently in use in the company. Most automated evaluations will result from applying the assigned software products or the defined keywords to the inventoried software dataset and thus are based on the identified systems where the corresponding installations have been found. Undesired Products refer to a special form of evaluation that will be explained in a separate section.\nTree view evaluations All tree view evaluations described in this section feature a consistent use of icons which enable you to easily differentiate between the various operating systems and system types where the corresponding installation was found. Under the Found Software node, you will find the most basic evaluation in the License Management tree view. All software products found on the inventoried systems that where assigned to the licensing or match the corresponding combination of keywords are displayed here. For a product without keywords, without product assignment or for a category with manual entry, no installations are listed under this caption. Found installations are grouped by name, publisher, version and operating system. Each node lists all systems where the corresponding installation was found. The icons displayed in the tree help you to identify whether the corresponding installation is wanted or unwanted, the icon representing a wanted installation and the icon an unwanted installation. Whether a certain installation is wanted or unwanted, depends on the assignment of systems to individual product licenses. All installations on systems that have been assigned to a valid license for the corresponding product are considered as wanted installations, all others are considered as unwanted installations.\nFor a quick overview of the current licensing situation, five additional nodes are available below the Installations node in the License Management tree. Under the Expected Installations node, you can find the systems assigned to all licenses available for the respective software product in a flat list. The Actual Installations node features a list of all systems where at least one installation was found which was assigned to the licensing or matches the specified combination of keywords. All systems that have been assigned to a valid license of the current software product and on which at least one installation was actually found by applying the filters are listed under the Wanted Installations node. This exactly represents the intersection between the Actual Installations and Expected Installations categories. Contrary to this, the Unwanted Installations node lists all systems to which no valid license for the respective software product has been assigned. The Missing Installations node lists those systems where an installation should have been found, but where this was not the case when Docusnap applied the definitions from the product recognition. Ideally, the two categories Expected Installations and Actual Installations should be identical and exactly the same systems should be found under the Wanted Installations node. In a perfect environment, the two categories Unwanted Installations and Missing Installations would be empty. If any systems are listed under these two nodes, corrective actions are necessary on the network level or with the respective installations.\nThe figure below graphically illustrates this fact, the circle on the left representing the expected installations and that on the right the actual installations found by the inventory process. The green intersection of the two circles in the figure represents the wanted installations; this results in the missing installations being the remaining set of the expected installations, depicted in blue, and the unwanted installations being the remaining set of the actual installations, depicted in red. In an ideal environment in terms of licensing, the two circles would be congruent.\nThe view of the software products is either at the company level, below the Groups heading, sorted by the respective groups, or on the site level below the Sites heading if the software products were assigned to a site.\nThe structure below the Groups heading lists all the systems on which the found software was installed. Regardless of whether the system belongs to one of the assigned sites.\nIf a software product has been assigned to a site, this software product is displayed below the respective site. In the sites structure, the systems are filtered so that only systems of this site are displayed when the found software has been installed.\nEvaluations in Reports Reports present evaluations at the product, group, company and site levels.\nFor these reports, Docusnap calculates the license balance.\nProduct Details and Product Overview You can create a Product Details report and a Product Overview report at every level. These reports contain different types of information about the respective product. At the group or company level, all products associated with the group or the company are shown. Additionally, the licenses that have been created for these products are listed.\nThis evaluation includes a comparison between the actual and the expected values.\nThe license balance will be displayed in tabular and graphical forms, based on the licenses, keywords, correction values and upgrades.\nLicense Evaluation All software products associated with the group or company will be displayed in a license evaluation table. A chart with an overview of missing or unnecessary licenses is displayed below the table.\nSites Evaluation In the License Report, which is located below the respective sites, the data on the software products as well as all the found systems and software of this sit are listed.\nThe Sites License Report at the company level shows the license evaluation for all software products that have been assigned to at least one site.\nIn order to get a comprehensive account of the software product on the basis of the sites, the report shows for which site licenses are required. Sites assigned to the software product are listed individually and the number of licenses required is displayed. The number of systems on which the software was found that does not belong to one of the assigned sites is also taken into account in the license calculation.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo evaluate the results in terms of licensing, many different options, that can be adjusted and extended using the Customizing module, are available in Docusnap. Basically, you have the choice between evaluations available directly from the tree view in the License Management module and evaluations presented as \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/reports/\" title=\"reports\"\u003ereports\u003c/a\u003e. Please note that the report-type evaluations usually provide more functionality, especially when it comes to determining the licenses currently in use in the company. Most automated evaluations will result from applying the assigned software products or the defined \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/product-recognition/\" title=\"keywords\"\u003ekeywords\u003c/a\u003e to the inventoried software dataset and thus are based on the identified systems where the corresponding installations have been found. \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/undesired-products/\" title=\"Undesired Products\"\u003eUndesired Products\u003c/a\u003e refer to a special form of evaluation that will be explained in a separate section.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/evaluations/","title":"Evaluations"},{"content":"Filtering in Main Window The filter can be enabled in the context menu of the data tab.\nThis filter can also be used for other lists, for example in some of the steps of a wizard.\nWhen the filter is enabled, text fields are displayed above the columns in the main window in which the desired filters or search terms can be specified. Based on these keywords, the displayed table in the main window is filtered.\nIf you want to filter the data simultaneously by multiple filter criteria, these can be separated by OR. For example *Windows 10* or *Windows 11*\nIf several filter criteria are to be fulfilled at the same time, they can be connected with an AND. For example \u0026gt;= 01.01.2019 and \u0026lt;= 31.12.2021\nIf the search value consists of several words containing either and or or, the word cannot be searched for. In this case, the word must be marked with the escape character . The word will not be used as a combination of search criteria but as a search word if \\ is written before the and or or. Important it must be without space before the and or or. For example drag \\and drop.\nThe asterisk \u0026ldquo;*\u0026rdquo; and the question mark \u0026ldquo;?\u0026rdquo; can be used as wildcards. Example: If you enter the keyword \u0026ldquo;Docu*\u0026rdquo;, Docusnap will return all records that begin with \u0026ldquo;Docu\u0026rdquo; in the corresponding columns. The other way round: The keyword \u0026ldquo;*docu\u0026rdquo; will return all records that end with \u0026ldquo;docu\u0026rdquo;. The character \u0026ldquo;*\u0026rdquo; replaces one or more characters, the character \u0026ldquo;?\u0026rdquo; replaces exactly one character.\nWildcards cannot be used to search for a date. To find a date, the exact date must be specified or a time window must be defined with \u0026gt; (greater than) or \u0026gt;= (greater than or equal to) and \u0026lt; (less than) or \u0026lt;= (less than or equal to) and and. For example \u0026gt;= 01.01.2022 and \u0026lt;= 31.12.2022. It is not possible to search for the time.\nIt is possible to filter for empty date, text and version entries. The filter value \\null is used to display the empty entries. This filter value can also be used in conjunction with the filter options \u0026lt;\u0026gt;, \u0026gt;.\nThe following additional filter options may also be used.\nFiltering for Numbers and Dates Example \u0026gt;(greater than) or \u0026gt;=(greater than or equal to) Filters values greater than or equal to the specified value. \u0026gt;(less than) or \u0026gt;=(less than or equal to) Filters values that are less than or equal to the specified value. \u0026lt;\u0026gt;(not equal) Explicitly excludes the specified value during filtering. d Dynamic Date Filter The expression d is intended for the current date. Date values that do not correspond to the current date are filtered out. For example, d - 7 filters to the date from 7 days ago. Range filters date or numbers contained in the specified range. 1\u0026gt;= 1 and \u0026lt;= 10; \u0026gt;= 01.01.2020 and \u0026lt;= 01.01.2021 When you have entered all required keywords, apply the filter by pressing the Enter key.\nTo display all data again without filtering it, either delete the keywords from the text fields and re-apply the filter, or remove the filter by clicking the Remove Filter button.\nTo export the current view, as displayed in the main window, to an Excel file, click the Excel Export button in the context menu. After you have saved the file, it will be opened directly in Excel.\nFiltering the Explorer In addition to the filter specified in the main window, it is also possible to filter the nodes of the tree view. Using the context menu in the data explorer you can filter which data should be displayed below a node. The filters will be stored on the computer where you are currently working. For this reason, the filters set in the tree view will also be retained when you restart Docusnap. The icon indicates that a filter is currently applied to the node.\nTo specify a filter criterion, enter it in the text field below the \u0026ldquo;Filter\u0026rdquo; caption. As with the main window filter, both the \u0026ldquo;*\u0026rdquo; and \u0026ldquo;?\u0026rdquo; wildcards can be used as filter criteria. To enable the filter, either press the Enter key or click the Apply Filter option.\nIf a filter is applied to the tree view, the entries in the main window table will be filtered according to the same criteria. As soon as you remove the filter from the main window, Docusnap redisplays all data. This will, however, not remove the filter from the tree view. However, removing the filter from the tree view will also remove the filter from the main window.\nTo remove the filter for the current node, click the Delete Filter option from the context menu. To remove the filters for all companies in all tree views, click the Remove all Filters option.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"filtering-in-main-window\"\u003eFiltering in Main Window\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe filter can be enabled in the context menu of the data tab.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis filter can also be used for other lists, for example in some of the steps of a wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen the filter is enabled, text fields are displayed above the columns in the main window in which the desired filters or search terms can be specified. Based on these keywords, the displayed table in the main window is filtered.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/filtering/","title":"Filtering"},{"content":"You can assign multiple licenses to each software product registered in Docusnap. These licenses represent the real-life software licenses actually purchased or the corresponding license agreements. When performing an evaluation, Docusnap uses the total number of registered licenses to determine the inventory of licenses purchased for a particular product and to compare it with the number of installations actually found. This results in the balance of the licenses which shows an over- or under-licensing status which might exist. In this step, you can completely disable the use of licenses for the current software product by unchecking the checkbox at the top of the window. This means, of course, that Docusnap will stop counting the expected licenses for this product.\nSpecify a unique name for each license registered for this software product in order to be able to identify the entry later. Additionally, select the license type for the current software product, enter the number of licenses purchased and their expiration date. By selecting the corresponding options, you can specify that the current software product is unlimited with respect to the number of licenses and/or their validity period. At the bottom of the wizard window, you can specify whether the license includes a maintenance contract and, if any, and enter its expiration date. Licenses that have expired will no longer be taken into account in the License Management evaluations, however, this is not true for systems assigned to these licenses.\nUsing the Docusnap Management to edit or delete existing license types and software maintenance types or add new ones. The license types and software maintenance types are for information only and do not affect the behavior of Docusnap when determining the corresponding license balance.\nThe area at the left side can be used to edit or delete existing licenses or to add new licenses for the current software product. Licenses that have already been entered for the current software product will be displayed in the table on the right side of the wizard.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eYou can assign multiple licenses to each software product registered in Docusnap. These licenses represent the real-life software licenses actually purchased or the corresponding license agreements. When performing an \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/evaluations/\" title=\"evaluation\"\u003eevaluation\u003c/a\u003e, Docusnap uses the total number of registered licenses to determine the inventory of licenses purchased for a particular product and to compare it with the number of installations actually found. This results in the balance of the licenses which shows an over- or under-licensing status which might exist. In this step, you can completely disable the use of licenses for the current software product by unchecking the checkbox at the top of the window. This means, of course, that Docusnap will stop counting the expected licenses for this product.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/licenses/","title":"Licenses"},{"content":"Maps can also be integrated into a concept.\nClick the Map button in the Insert ribbon to open the Select Map dialog. Here, you can select a map by expanding the Inventory or Documentation explorer and selecting the desired map. Then, click the Insert button to open the associated Documentation wizard. Now, you can create the map as described in the Documentation section. The settings you specify in the wizard are only used to create this map within the concept. They do not affect the maps generated previously in the Documentation module. If you want to modify a map you generated previously, select it and click the Settings button to reopen the map generation wizard. This allows you to modify existing map properties. It is also possible to drag and drop the map onto the output element. This action also opens the map generation wizard.\nThe ad-hoc maps, which can be created in the tree below the heading Standard Maps, can also be used in the concept. For these maps no wizard is opened but rather the map is created without further settings.\nIf the topology map is created in the tree, a separate map is created for each switch in addition to the overview map. If the topology map from the inventory tree is added in a concept, only the overview map is inserted. To add the desired switch maps, they must be selected below the respective switch. When the topology map from the documentation tree is added, it contains the overview map and all switch maps. This allows you to choose which data is needed in the concept.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eMaps can also be integrated into a concept.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eMap\u003c/em\u003e button in the Insert ribbon to open the \u003cem\u003eSelect Map\u003c/em\u003e dialog. Here, you can select a map by expanding the \u003cem\u003eInventory\u003c/em\u003e or \u003cem\u003eDocumentation\u003c/em\u003e explorer and selecting the desired map. Then, click the \u003cem\u003eInsert\u003c/em\u003e button to open the associated \u003cem\u003eDocumentation\u003c/em\u003e wizard. Now, you can create the map as described in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/\" title=\"Documentation\"\u003eDocumentation\u003c/a\u003e section. The settings you specify in the wizard are only used to create this map within the concept. They do not affect the maps generated previously in the \u003cem\u003eDocumentation\u003c/em\u003e module. If you want to modify a map you generated previously, select it and click the \u003cem\u003eSettings\u003c/em\u003e button to reopen the map generation wizard. This allows you to modify existing map properties. It is also possible to drag and drop the map onto the output element. This action also opens the map generation wizard.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/create-concept/map/","title":"Map"},{"content":"In Docusnap, you can merge the inventory scans of different systems into one system. If the number of scans for the two systems to be merged exceeds the number of allowed archive versions, the oldest inventory scans will be deleted. A system can only be merged with another system in the same domain.\nRight-click one of the systems to be merged and select Merge with from the context menu.\nIn the Merge with dialog, select the target system, i.e. the system into which the selected system should be merged. Click the Merge button to merge the two systems.\nBy merging systems, it can no longer be linked in the diagram. Therefore, it will be marked as (deleted).\nIf the data of a merged system has been added to a concept, this data is no longer in the concept after the updating the concept.\nThe entries from the Editor tab are not transferred for the merged system, only the entries from the selected system are kept.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn Docusnap, you can merge the inventory scans of different systems into one system. If the number of scans for the two systems to be merged exceeds the number of allowed archive versions, the oldest inventory scans will be deleted. A system can only be merged with another system in the same domain.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRight-click one of the systems to be merged and select \u003cem\u003eMerge\u003c/em\u003e with from the context menu.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/merge-system/docusnap-data-explorer-merge-with.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Data-Explorer-Merge-with\" title=\"Docusnap-Data-Explorer-Merge-with\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/merge-system/","title":"Merge Systems"},{"content":"As already described in the Basics - Wizards section, Docusnap wizards can be extended as needed. To enable the Name Snapshot step, open the General page of the Options - Inventory dialog.\nIn the Name Snapshot step, you can assign a name to an inventory scan. Snapshots are primarily used to summarize inventory scans so that you are able to identify them later. So you can, for example, select a specific snapshot when importing data to the database, or you can delete the entire snapshot with all of its data.\nAfter enabling the Name Snapshot checkbox, you can define a specific name for the current inventory scan. If you enable the Exclude snapshot from automatic deletion checkbox, the data associated with the current snapshot will not be deleted when the maximum number of archive versions (specified in the Options dialog) is reached.\nIf you did not enable the Name Snapshot checkbox, the name of the snapshot will be Inventory from, along with the date and time of the inventory scan.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eAs already described in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/basics-wizards/\" title=\"Basis - Wizards\"\u003eBasics - Wizards\u003c/a\u003e section, Docusnap wizards can be extended as needed. To enable the \u003cem\u003eName Snapshot\u003c/em\u003e step, open the \u003cem\u003eGeneral\u003c/em\u003e page of the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/options-inventory/\" title=\"Options - Inventory\"\u003eOptions - Inventory\u003c/a\u003e dialog.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/optional-steps/optional-naming-snapshots/docusnap-network-inventory-snapshots-graph.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Network Inventory Snapshots Graph\" title=\"Docusnap Network Inventory Snapshots Graph\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eName Snapshot\u003c/em\u003e step, you can assign a name to an inventory scan. \u003cem\u003eSnapshots\u003c/em\u003e are primarily used to summarize inventory scans so that you are able to identify them later. So you can, for example, select a specific \u003cem\u003esnapshot\u003c/em\u003e when importing data to the database, or you can delete the entire \u003cem\u003esnapshot\u003c/em\u003e with all of its data.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/optional-steps/optional-naming-snapshots/","title":"Optional: Naming Snapshots"},{"content":"On the Permission Structure tab, you can see how a user or group obtained a certain permission. By selecting an individual permission in the area above, you can filter the structure on that specific permission.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eOn the \u003cem\u003ePermission Structure\u003c/em\u003e tab, you can see how a user or group obtained a certain permission. By selecting an individual permission in the area above, you can filter the structure on that specific permission.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/permission-origin/docusnap-permission-analysis-permission-structure.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Permission-Analysis-Permission-Structure\" title=\"Docusnap-Permission-Analysis-Permission-Structure\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/permission-origin/","title":"Permission Origin"},{"content":"The item Physical Infrastructure from the navigation opens the editor of the physical infrastructure. Here you can document sites, racks and cabling.\nMore information about the physical infrastructure can be found in the chapter Physical Infrastructure.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe item \u003cem\u003ePhysical Infrastructure\u003c/em\u003e from the navigation opens the editor of the physical infrastructure. Here you can document sites, racks and cabling.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMore information about the physical infrastructure can be found in the chapter \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/\" title=\"Physical Infrastructure\"\u003ePhysical Infrastructure\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/navigation/physical-infrastructure/docusnap-navigation-physical-infrastructure.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Navigation-Physical-Infrastructure\" title=\"Docusnap-Navigation-Physical-Infrastructure\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/navigation/physical-infrastructure/","title":"Physical Infrastructure"},{"content":"User created shapes can be exported or imported. This makes it possible to transfer shapes to other databases. To open the export/import wizard, select a site or any physics element in the Docusnap tree structure. Then the desired dialog can be selected via the button. When importing, Docusnap checks if a shape with the same name already exists. Only shapes that do not already exist will be imported.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eUser created shapes can be exported or imported. This makes it possible to transfer shapes to other databases. To open the export/import wizard, select a site or any physics element in the Docusnap tree structure. Then the desired dialog can be selected via the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/shape-export-import/docusnap-extended-functions-icon.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Extended-Functions-Icon\" title=\"Docusnap-Extended-Functions-Icon\"\u003e button. When importing, Docusnap checks if a shape with the same name already exists. Only shapes that do not already exist will be imported.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/shape-export-import/docusnap-physical-infrastructure-shape-export-import.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Shape-Export-Import\" title=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Shape-Export-Import\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/shape-export-import/","title":"Shape Export Import"},{"content":"This section will explain the use of parameters. The advantage of parameters over relations is that the reports can be executed more quickly. The parameter is added to the SQL statement. This results in only the filtered data being retrieved from the database.\nIn addition, grouped reports and hierarchical reports will be covered in the following sections. In the Sub-Reports section, you will learn how to use a sub-report to generate a single row that shows data from multiple tables.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThis section will explain the use of parameters. The advantage of parameters over relations is that the reports can be executed more quickly. The parameter is added to the SQL statement. This results in only the filtered data being retrieved from the database.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition, grouped reports and hierarchical reports will be covered in the following sections. In the \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/special-reporting-techniques/sub-reports/\" title=\"Sub-Reports\"\u003eSub-Reports\u003c/a\u003e section, you will learn how to use a sub-report to generate a single row that shows data from multiple tables.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/special-reporting-techniques/","title":"Special Reporting Techniques"},{"content":"Styles are used to achieve centralized formatting of text.\nThe Headline 1 through Headline 4 styles are used for headings. In addition, they are taken into account when creating the [Table of contents]( \u0026ldquo;Table of contents\u0026rdquo;) and for the entries in the [Document Outline]( \u0026ldquo;Document Outline\u0026rdquo;) window.\nThe context menu for each style in the Styles group allows you to modify the formatting. Click the Modify option to open the Change Style dialog. In this dialog, you can adjust the formatting for the selected style.\nChanges to a style are applied to all texts to which this style has been assigned.\nHowever, if, for example, the font of a paragraph is changed and then the font is changed in the respective style, the font is only adjusted if the Apply Formatting to all Paragraphs check box is selected. If the check box is unchecked, only those formatting changes that have not already been adjusted manually are applied.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eStyles are used to achieve centralized formatting of text.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eHeadline 1\u003c/em\u003e through \u003cem\u003eHeadline 4\u003c/em\u003e styles are used for headings. In addition, they are taken into account when creating the [Table of contents]( \u0026ldquo;Table of contents\u0026rdquo;) and for the entries in the \u003cem\u003e[Document Outline]( \u0026ldquo;Document Outline\u0026rdquo;)\u003c/em\u003e window.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe context menu for each style in the Styles group allows you to modify the formatting. Click the \u003cem\u003eModify\u003c/em\u003e option to open the \u003cem\u003eChange Style\u003c/em\u003e dialog. In this dialog, you can adjust the formatting for the selected style.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/styles/","title":"Styles"},{"content":"Citrix Hypervisor maps can be created either from the Create Docu wizard or the dedicated Citrix Hypervisor wizard.\nThe preview allows you to check the look of the maps. You can change the map layout, if desired. For most cases, we recommend to use the default settings.\nThe Citrix Hypervisor map will be stored in the Xen subfolder of the documentation directory.\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Maps\\Xen\\Name of the Citrix Hypervisor)\nFrom the generated preview, you can specify which maps to create. The graphics display the interconnections between the various entities existing in a Citrix Hypervisor environment. These entities are virtual machines, networks, hosts, and data stores. Each map reflects the respective assignments.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eCitrix Hypervisor maps can be created either from the \u003cem\u003eCreate Docu\u003c/em\u003e wizard or the dedicated \u003cem\u003eCitrix Hypervisor\u003c/em\u003e wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe preview allows you to check the look of the maps. You can change the map layout, if desired. For most cases, we recommend to use the default settings.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Citrix Hypervisor map will be stored in the \u003cem\u003eXen\u003c/em\u003e subfolder of the documentation directory.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cem\u003e(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\Maps\\Xen\\Name of the Citrix Hypervisor)\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/citrix-hypervision/docusnap-documentation-xencenter.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Documentation-XenCenter\" title=\"Docusnap-Documentation-XenCenter\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFrom the generated preview, you can specify which maps to create. The graphics display the interconnections between the various entities existing in a Citrix Hypervisor environment. These entities are virtual machines, networks, hosts, and data stores. Each map reflects the respective assignments.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/citrix-hypervision/","title":"Citrix Hypervisor"},{"content":"So-called \u0026ldquo;combo boxes\u0026rdquo; display a list of valid values the user can select from. These controls are also known as drop-down lists. For this purpose, all valid values for the linked database column are presented to the user in a list from which the desired value can then be selected. This control is therefore suitable in all cases where a limited number of valid values are available that may change dynamically. As the data source, other database tables or Docusnap reference values may be used. If you select the database as the data source, you can specify any existing database table, provided that a primary key and a display field have been defined for it. When a user selects a value from this control, Docusnap will not save the selected string, but rather its associated number, which corresponds to the primary key (if the data source is a table) or the respective value (if the data source is a reference value).\nIn many cases, it is desired that only certain values are available from the combo box, such as only contacts stored for the current company. To make this possible, you can use a view that is filtered using the {FilterID} variable. The {FilterID} will always be replaced with the primary key of the parent object.\nThe table below lists all specific properties for combo boxes.\nSpecific Properties of Combo Box Controls DropDownHeight Determines the size of the dropdown list that should be displayed for the selection of the predefined values. Fieldname Specifies the linked column in the respective table of the current Docusnap database. The meta object linked with the data entry screen determines which table will be used. For a combo box, the corresponding target column in the database must always be a number that will be replaced with the associated text at runtime. Sorted If you set this property to \u0026lsquo;True\u0026rsquo;, the content of the combo box will be displayed in alphabetical order. Please note that reference values cannot be sorted explicitly. Using this option when SourceType is set to \u0026lsquo;DCInitials\u0026rsquo; can lead to an erroneous behavior when the user selects a value. SourceType This property specifies the type of data source to be used for the combo box. As explained above, you can either use other database tables or the Docusnap reference values. SourceValue Depending on the selected SourceType, enter either the name of the corresponding database table or the identifier of the desired reference value for this property. NoSelection Is this property is set to \u0026lsquo;True\u0026rsquo;, the combo box will also display a \u0026lt;No Selection\u0026gt; item. If the user selects \u0026lt;No Selection\u0026gt;, no value will be saved in the database. If the data column must be filled, this property cannot be used. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eSo-called \u0026ldquo;combo boxes\u0026rdquo; display a list of valid values the user can select from. These controls are also known as drop-down lists. For this purpose, all valid values for the linked database column are presented to the user in a list from which the desired value can then be selected. This control is therefore suitable in all cases where a limited number of valid values are available that may change dynamically. As the data source, other \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/\" title=\"database tables\"\u003edatabase tables\u003c/a\u003e or Docusnap reference values may be used. If you select the database as the data source, you can specify any existing database table, provided that a primary key and a display field have been defined for it. When a user selects a value from this control, Docusnap will not save the selected string, but rather its associated number, which corresponds to the primary key (if the data source is a table) or the respective value (if the data source is a reference value).\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/combobox/","title":"Combobox"},{"content":"Diagrams created in the Diagram module can also be integrated into a concept.\nClick the Diagram button on the Insert ribbon to open the Select Diagram dialog. There, you can select a diagram from the Documentation explorer. To add the diagram to your concept, select it and click the Insert button.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDiagrams created in the \u003cem\u003eDiagram\u003c/em\u003e module can also be integrated into a concept.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eDiagram\u003c/em\u003e button on the Insert ribbon to open the \u003cem\u003eSelect Diagram\u003c/em\u003e dialog. There, you can select a diagram from the \u003cem\u003eDocumentation\u003c/em\u003e explorer. To add the diagram to your concept, select it and click the \u003cem\u003eInsert\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/concept/create-concept/diagram/docusnap-it-concepts-select-relation.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-IT-Concepts-Select-Relation\" title=\"Docusnap-IT-Concepts-Select-Relation\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/create-concept/diagram/","title":"Diagramm"},{"content":"It is possible to filter the data output in the report by adding a preliminary dialog.\nYou can define a dialog where the user can e.g. select the system for which the report should be created or specify the period that should be considered for the report.\nTo use a dialog in your report, you first need to create a new form in the Report Designer by right-clicking the horizontal area to the right of the Preview tab and selecting New Form from the context menu.\nNow, the toolbox displays the components that can be added to the form. The Properties window displays the settings for the selected component.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIt is possible to filter the data output in the report by adding a preliminary dialog.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can define a dialog where the user can e.g. select the system for which the report should be created or specify the period that should be considered for the report.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo use a dialog in your report, you first need to create a new form in the Report Designer by right-clicking the horizontal area to the right of the Preview tab and selecting \u003cem\u003eNew Form\u003c/em\u003e from the context menu.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/reporting-systems/dialog/","title":"Dialog"},{"content":"In the title bar the dialogs for editing the types can be opened.\nEdit Cable Types The dialog to edit the cable types is opened within the Infrastructure Editor - via and the selection Edit Cable Types.\nAll connections created in Docusnap have a basic type. Cable types can only be wired with a plug that shares the same base types.\nThe number of possible ports per side can be defined by means of the number of A/B plugs.\nEdit Plug Types The dialog to edit the plugs types is opened within the Infrastructure Editor - via and the selection Edit Plug Types.\nAll plugs created in Docusnap have a base type. Only plugs that share the same base types can be wired to each other. The different plugs can be assigned to several basic types. E.g. SFP + corresponds to the type \u0026ldquo;Network\u0026rdquo; as well as \u0026ldquo;Fibre-optic\u0026rdquo;.\nThe PlugCount specifies the number of possible connections per plug. This is required if several connections are possible with one port, e.g. with a TERA cabling.\nEdit Category When creating new shapes, a category must be selected. If an additional category is needed, it can be added in the Edit Categories dialog. Categories included in Docusnap by default cannot be edited or deleted.\nEdit Base Types Base types are required when creating connector and cable types to ensure that only cables and connectors that fit together are connected. If additional base types are required, they can be added in the Edit Base Types dialog. Base types that are provided by Docusnap by default cannot be edited or deleted.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn the title bar the dialogs for editing the types can be opened.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/edit-types/docusnap-physical-infrastructure-open-shape-editor.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Open-Shape-Editor\" title=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Open-Shape-Editor\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"edit-cable-types\"\u003eEdit Cable Types\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe dialog to edit the cable types is opened within the Infrastructure Editor - via \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/edit-types/docusnap-physical-infrastructure-edit-types.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Edit-Types\" title=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Edit-Types\"\u003e and the selection \u003cem\u003eEdit Cable Types.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAll connections created in Docusnap have a basic type. Cable types can only be wired with a plug that shares the same base types.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe number of possible ports per side can be defined by means of the number of A/B plugs.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/edit-types/","title":"Edit Types"},{"content":"As a simple example for extending meta objects, we will demonstrate how to create the additional SLA object. To execute this example, first create the SLA table. For creating additional tables, refer to the Example subsection of the Database Structures section.\nIn the first step, create the SLA caption. Create a new object below the Account object in the Inventory explorer by clicking the New button. Assign the Caption category to this object. Enter SLA as the Object Name. The English text and the German text can be chosen freely. In this example, the namespace specified is SlaCust.\nSave the caption and then create an additional object below it. This object will be linked with the xtSLA table. Select the Data category for this object and enter SLA_Data in the Object Name field. In the Table dropdown list, select the xtSLA table. The namespace SlaCust is also specified for this node.\nEnable the Editable checkbox so that it will be possible to enter data through the user interface. For information on how to create the data entry screen, refer to the Example subsection of the Data Entry Screens section. Save the object by clicking the Save button.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eAs a simple example for extending meta objects, we will demonstrate how to create the additional SLA object. To execute this example, first create the \u003cem\u003eSLA\u003c/em\u003e table. For creating additional tables, refer to the \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/example/\" title=\"Example\"\u003eExample\u003c/a\u003e subsection of the Database Structures section.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the first step, create the \u003cem\u003eSLA\u003c/em\u003e caption. Create a new object below the \u003cem\u003eAccount\u003c/em\u003e object in the \u003cem\u003eInventory\u003c/em\u003e explorer by clicking the \u003cem\u003eNew button.\u003c/em\u003e Assign the \u003cem\u003eCaption\u003c/em\u003e category to this object. Enter \u003cem\u003eSLA\u003c/em\u003e as the Object Name. The English text and the German text can be chosen freely. In this example, the namespace specified is \u003cem\u003eSlaCust\u003c/em\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/example/","title":"Example"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying your Exchange servers, click the Network Scan or Exchange Server button. After you have selected a company and a domain and entered your credentials (see: Basic Steps) the Exchange Server step will display.\nFor inventorying Exchange servers, you can select what information should be retrieved as well by using the Advanced button. In the Maximum Number of Threads field you can specify how many parallel threads are started simultaneously on the Exchange servers. In most cases, the default setting of four threads is recommended. If the inventory process slows down the Exchange server, the number of threads can be decreased.\nClick the Start Search button to let Docusnap search the Active Directory for registered Exchange servers. These will be displayed in the list. Then, you can select the Exchange servers whose mailboxes, public folders, and permissions you want to inventory. If you do not carry out this search, but immediately click Next, all existing Exchange Servers will be included in the inventory.\nScanning Exchange servers can cause problems when subdomains are to be inventoried. Exchange services are always registered in the root domain, even if the Exchange Server installation is physically located in a subdomain. In order to be able to collect the desired information in such a situation, you will need the appropriate permissions for the root domain. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying your Exchange servers, click the \u003cem\u003eNetwork Scan\u003c/em\u003e or \u003cem\u003eExchange Server\u003c/em\u003e button. After you have selected a company and a domain and entered your credentials (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e) the \u003cem\u003eExchange Server\u003c/em\u003e step will display.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor inventorying Exchange servers, you can select what information should be retrieved as well by using the \u003cem\u003eAdvanced\u003c/em\u003e button. In the \u003cem\u003eMaximum Number of Threads\u003c/em\u003e field you can specify how many parallel threads are started simultaneously on the Exchange servers. In most cases, the default setting of four threads is recommended. If the inventory process slows down the Exchange server, the number of threads can be decreased.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/exchange-server/","title":"Exchange Server"},{"content":"Using the button, you can export the selected IT concept to various formats. In the Export Concept dialog, you can enter the name of the file and select the path and file type to export the concept to. If the Refresh Concept before Export checkbox is checked, all inserted elements such as reports, plans, etc. are refreshed with the current data. If the Save Version of Old Concept checkbox is activated, the concept will be saved as a version before the refresh.\nWhen creating a concept, you can also use the Scheduling feature. Click the Schedule as Job button on the Concepts ribbon to launch the Documentation wizard.\nFor a description of the basic steps in this wizard, refer to the Basic Steps section of the Documentation chapter. In the Concepts step, proceed as follows:\nUnder Export Formats, select the file type to which you want to export the concept. From the Available Concepts table, you select the concepts to be exported. The table lists all existing concepts. If the Refresh Concept before Export checkbox is checked, all inserted elements such as reports, plans, etc. are refreshed with the current data. If the Save Version of Old Concept checkbox is activated, the concept will be saved as a version before the refresh.\nConcepts can be organized in folders. If the Create Directory Structure checkbox is activated, the folders which contain the concepts will be created during the export.\nFor proper scheduling, specify a name, the schedule type, the interval, the number of recurring executions, the starting date and time. Furthermore, the Docusnap Server must have been configured successfully. For more information on Automatic Scheduling, refer to the Scheduling chapter.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eUsing the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/concept/export-and-scheduling/docusnap-export-icon.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Export-Icon\" title=\"Docusnap-Export-Icon\"\u003e button, you can export the selected IT concept to various formats. In the \u003cem\u003eExport Concept\u003c/em\u003e dialog, you can enter the name of the file and select the path and file type to export the concept to. If the \u003cem\u003eRefresh Concept before Export\u003c/em\u003e checkbox is checked, all inserted elements such as reports, plans, etc. are refreshed with the current data. If the \u003cem\u003eSave Version of Old Concept\u003c/em\u003e checkbox is activated, the concept will be saved as a version before the refresh.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/export-and-scheduling/","title":"Export and Scheduling"},{"content":"In Docusnap you can scan group policies and display them with the corresponding organizational units or the associated domain. The group policies will then be displayed on the Group Policy tab.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn Docusnap you can scan group policies and display them with the corresponding organizational units or the associated domain. The group policies will then be displayed on the \u003cem\u003eGroup Policy\u003c/em\u003e tab.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/group-policies/docusnap-data-explorer-group-policy.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Data-Explorer-Group-Policy\" title=\"Docusnap-Data-Explorer-Group-Policy\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/group-policies/","title":"Group Policies"},{"content":"The grouping functionality is provided in (almost) all areas of Docusnap. Beforehand, the function must be activated in the context menu of the data view.\nAfterwards, the desired columns of the table can be grouped, in the example first by site, secondarily the server type. For this purpose, the column to be grouped by must be put into the group area by Drag\u0026amp;Drop.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe grouping functionality is provided in (almost) all areas of Docusnap. Beforehand, the function must be activated in the context menu of the data view.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/cluster/docusnap-enable-grouping.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Enable-Grouping\" title=\"Docusnap-Enable-Grouping\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfterwards, the desired columns of the table can be grouped, in the example first by site, secondarily the server type. For this purpose, the column to be grouped by must be put into the group area by Drag\u0026amp;Drop.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/cluster/docusnap-use-grouping.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Use-Grouping\" title=\"Docusnap-Use-Grouping\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/cluster/","title":"Grouping"},{"content":"You can delete systems, NTFS inventories or IT assets individually within the tree view. To perform a mass deletion of systems, NTFS data or IT assets, the Maintain data inventory dialog can be opened via the Maintain data inventory button (located in All wizards).\nFilter and grouping options facilitate the selection for mass processing.\nFor systems selected in the Inventory tab, all inventory data is deleted, including the NTFS data.\nThe selection Delete Network Connection Data removes the network data for all systems, whether systems have been selected or not.. If this option is deactivated, the removal is limited to the network connection data of the selected systems. In the NTFS Data tab, systems can be selected for which only the NTFS inventory data should be deleted.\nThe IT Assets tab allows you to remove manually created entries.\nThe License Information dialog (via button ) shows a detailed list of the systems subject to licensing. The Delete Systems option opens the dialog to maintain the database by deleting systems that are no longer required. This process supports efficient license usage and allows new systems to be added.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eYou can delete systems, NTFS inventories or IT assets individually within the tree view. To perform a mass deletion of systems, NTFS data or IT assets, the \u003cem\u003eMaintain data inventory\u003c/em\u003e dialog can be opened via the \u003cem\u003eMaintain data inventory\u003c/em\u003e button (located in \u003cem\u003eAll wizards\u003c/em\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFilter and grouping options facilitate the selection for mass processing.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor systems selected in the \u003cem\u003eInventory\u003c/em\u003e tab, all inventory data is deleted, including the NTFS data.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/data-inventory/","title":"Maintain Data Inventory"},{"content":"Docusnap Management is used to extend, customize and manage Docusnap. Click on the Management button to open the Docusnap Management.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap Management is used to extend, customize and manage Docusnap. Click on the \u003cem\u003eManagement\u003c/em\u003e button to open the \u003cem\u003eDocusnap Management.\u003c/em\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/navigation/management/docusnap-navigation-management.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Navigation-Management\" title=\"Docusnap-Navigation-Management\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/navigation/management/","title":"Management"},{"content":"The feature Physical Infrastructure covers the physical documentation of your IT infrastructure.\nThis begins with the modelling of sites, buildings and rooms. Subsequently, devices, racks, switches and all other IT-relevant systems can be assigned. The cabling of the systems can also be included.\nVarious maps and reports are available for evaluation.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe feature Physical Infrastructure covers the physical documentation of your IT infrastructure.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis begins with the modelling of sites, buildings and rooms. Subsequently, devices, racks, switches and all other IT-relevant systems can be assigned. The cabling of the systems can also be included.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVarious maps and reports are available for evaluation.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/","title":"Physical Infrastructure"},{"content":"For the SNMP inventory additional MIBs and SNMP Types can be added.\nFor inventoried switches, MAC addresses can be added that were not recognized as learned MAC addresses during SNMP inventory. Furthermore, learned MAC addresses can be defined as telephone, devices or virtual, or MAC addresses can be excluded from the topology map.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eFor the SNMP inventory additional MIBs and SNMP Types can be added.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor inventoried switches, MAC addresses can be added that were not recognized as learned MAC addresses during SNMP inventory. Furthermore, learned MAC addresses can be defined as telephone, devices or virtual, or MAC addresses can be excluded from the topology map.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/snmp/","title":"SNMP"},{"content":"If, in the second step of the License Management wizard, you selected a metric which allows you to assign licenses to systems, this wizard page will display all identified systems, grouped by domains and subdomains. If in addition, also sites were selected, only systems from these sites are listed. Please note that the list will only show systems where an operating system is installed that has been selected in the Options - License Management dialog. If in the second step, a metric without detection of use was chosen, which allows the allocation of equipment, the existing IT assets are also made available and can be assigned.\nAll previously entered licenses for the current software product as well as any systems or IT assets that might have been assigned already will be displayed in the list on the right side of the wizard page. Within the context of a software product, systems are always assigned on the license level. Thus, a specific system can only be assigned to a specific license.\nTo assign a system to a particular license, select the corresponding system in the list on the left and the corresponding license in the list on the right. Click the Add \u0026raquo; button to assign the system to the license. To undo an existing assignment, simply select the desired system in the list on the right and then click the \u0026laquo; Remove button. You do not have to select the domain the system belongs, since it will automatically be placed in its correct position. In both cases (adding and removing), you can select multiple systems at a time. To do so, simply hold down the Ctrl key while clicking individual systems with the mouse, or hold down the Shift key to select a contiguous group of systems. Please note that it is not possible to select systems across domain or license boundaries.\nThe assignment of the IT assets is performed in the same manner. Given that IT assets are not inventoried, but are entered manually, no automatic assignment via the inventoried software can be carried out. Therefore, IT assets can only be assigned to manual licenses. In this case the number of assigned devices and IT assets is used to calculate the number of needed licenses.\nTheoretically, you can also assign licenses to systems which could not be scanned by the inventory process. However, these systems cannot be considered in an evaluation before you have not performed a new, successful inventory scan. If the systems could not be found during the inventory process due to given circumstances, but might be successfully scanned in the future, it might make sense to assign them anyway. All evaluations in the License Management module update automatically to reflect the new data.\nDepending on the use case and the metric you selected, assigning systems to licenses might mean a different thing. In the classic application case, systems where the respective license agreements was accepted are assigned to the individual licenses. This implies that the relevant software product has been installed on these systems and can be found there. The evaluation will consider the number of systems if a category with system assignment, the number of processors if a category with processor assignment, and the number of processor cores if a category with processor assignment was chosen. For metrics which do not involve automatic determination of the inventory, system assignment may have a different consequence from that described above: In this case, the assigned systems are considered as the identified actual inventory. This procedure replaces the automated determination of installations in cases where it is not possible, such as in a Terminal Server environment.\nTheoretically, you can disable systems assignments by clearing the checkbox at the top of the wizard page. However, this approach is not recommended if you add a software product to a category which involves automated inventory determination, since this would considerably limit the available evaluation options.\nImport Computer List In Docusnap, you can use the DocusnapTSInfo application to create a log of all systems which log on to a Terminal Server. Based on the information retrieved, these systems can be assigned to the licenses. This requires, however, that the systems have previously been inventoried by Docusnap.\nTo import the computer list, first select the path where the XML files are located. Then, select the license. This finally enables the Import Computer List button. Click the Import Computer List button to search the specified folder for the XML files. All systems listed will be assigned to the selected license.\nIf necessary, you can assign more systems later or undo the assignment of previously assigned systems.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIf, in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/licensing/\" title=\"second step\"\u003esecond step\u003c/a\u003e of the License Management wizard, you selected a metric which allows you to assign licenses to systems, this wizard page will display all identified systems, grouped by domains and subdomains. If in addition, also sites were selected, only systems from these sites are listed. Please note that the list will only show systems where an operating system is installed that has been selected in the \u003cem\u003eOptions - License Management\u003c/em\u003e dialog. If in the second step, a metric without detection of use was chosen, which allows the allocation of equipment, the existing IT assets are also made available and can be assigned.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/system-assignment/","title":"System Assignment"},{"content":"Products that should not be installed on any system in the company are referred to as undesired products in Docusnap. You can define this classification at the respective product level in the License Management wizard by selecting the Blocked software products metric. In the tree view, undesired products are identified by a \u0026ldquo;forbidden\u0026rdquo; icon ().\nThe separate Undesired Licensing node at the company level allows you to perform a quick and comprehensive evaluation. Below it, you can find a simple tree structure which displays each affected product and each system where such a product has been found. Aside from this, you can display an aggregate view of all systems found in this category at each level below this node.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eProducts that should not be installed on any system in the company are referred to as undesired products in Docusnap. You can define this classification at the respective product level in the License Management wizard by selecting the \u003cem\u003eBlocked software products\u003c/em\u003e metric. In the tree view, undesired products are identified by a \u0026ldquo;forbidden\u0026rdquo; icon (\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/undesired-products/docusnap-license-management-undesired-products.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-License-Management-Undesired-Products\" title=\"Docusnap-License-Management-Undesired-Products\"\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe separate \u003cem\u003eUndesired Licensing\u003c/em\u003e node at the company level allows you to perform a quick and comprehensive evaluation. Below it, you can find a simple tree structure which displays each affected product and each system where such a product has been found. Aside from this, you can display an aggregate view of all systems found in this category at each level below this node.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/undesired-products/","title":"Undesired Products"},{"content":"Improvements in Docusnap 13 Version number: 13.0.1902.25071 Inventory Application Documentation Improvements \u0026amp; Updates Npcap: Now installed in version 1.81 (20.02.2025). Autonomous Discovery Modules: Additional signature validation implemented. Inventory Windows: An extended signature check for Discover-Windows.exe enhances security. Application Inventory – DDS: The IP range check now ignores network adapters with APIPA addresses. Docusnap Web – Active Directory: The \u0026ldquo;Direct Group Memberships\u0026rdquo; section is now fully displayed. Docusnap Web: Company selection using a provided ONC path now works as expected. Documentation Concepts: Fixed known issues (deleting hyperlinks, excluding workstations, preventing further editing of dynamic objects). ","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"improvements-in-docusnap-13\"\u003eImprovements in Docusnap 13\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVersion number:\u003c/strong\u003e 13.0.1902.25071\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2025-03-13/#inventory\"\u003eInventory\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2025-03-13/#application\"\u003eApplication\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2025-03-13/#documentation\"\u003eDocumentation\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"improvements--updates\"\u003eImprovements \u0026amp; Updates\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNpcap:\u003c/strong\u003e Now installed in version 1.81 (20.02.2025).\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAutonomous Discovery Modules:\u003c/strong\u003e Additional signature validation implemented.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"inventory\"\u003eInventory\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWindows:\u003c/strong\u003e An extended signature check for Discover-Windows.exe enhances security.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"application\"\u003eApplication\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInventory – DDS:\u003c/strong\u003e The IP range check now ignores network adapters with APIPA addresses.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDocusnap Web – Active Directory:\u003c/strong\u003e The \u0026ldquo;Direct Group Memberships\u0026rdquo; section is now fully displayed.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDocusnap Web:\u003c/strong\u003e Company selection using a provided ONC path now works as expected.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"documentation\"\u003eDocumentation\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConcepts:\u003c/strong\u003e Fixed known issues (deleting hyperlinks, excluding workstations, preventing further editing of dynamic objects).\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/release-notes/2025-03-13/","title":"Release Notes - 2025-03-13"},{"content":"Release Docusnap 14 Docusnap 14 has been released and is now available in the Docusnap download area.\nNew Features, Changes, and Improvements in Docusnap 13 Version: 13.0.1777.25008 Inventory Improvements Fixed Issues Inventory SNMP SNMP inventory has been updated to support the latest security protocols of SNMPv3. This enhancement ensures a more secure and reliable collection of devices in networks. Processing of large SNMP inventory results has been optimized, reducing the time required for handling large data volumes and ensuring more efficient processing of inventory data. Improvements Reporting Golden System Report - Hotfix comparison is now based on inventoried KB numbers, significantly improving report accuracy. Enhanced display of permissions and system information across various report types. Plans Topology Plan - Improved visualization of Layer-3 elements and VLAN connections, particularly in systems with multiple network interfaces. Topology Plan - Standardized device type symbols - The representation of device type symbols in the topology plan has been revamped and standardized for consistent visualization. Wildcards in Plans - Enhanced support for wildcards in plans simplifies the use of placeholders in documentation. Documentation Concept Templates - Supplied concept templates, especially those with table of contents objects, have been revised and optimized for better usability in documentation. Application Windows SMB Protocols - Display of SMB v2 and v3 has been standardized to SMB v2/v3 for improved technical accuracy. Physical Infrastructure - Updated links to the Knowledge Base for better user guidance. Improved performance when editing concepts and IT manuals. Trashbin Cleanup - Automatic database cleanup within the application has been performance-optimized, improving data management efficiency. Fixed Issues Inventory Resolved stability issues with scheduled jobs and specific scan targets. Improved VLAN and connection detection in physical networks. Fixed incorrect system assignments and timeout messages during SNMP inventory. Enhanced SMB protocol detection. Expanded support for specific devices like NetApp storage and Cisco switches. Reports Fixed inaccuracies in Golden System reports that led to incorrect update statuses. Corrected discrepancies in license management. Improved filtering functionality in IT security reports. Web Client Fixed display issues with DNS, DHCP, and Microsoft 365 data. Resolved internal server errors when loading specific SNMP OIDs. Routing and Topology Plans Fixed errors in the visualization of Layer-3 elements and VLAN mappings. Correct display of switch connections and IPsec tunnels between devices. IT Security Improved display and filtering of permissions for specific users and groups. Fixed incorrect display of domain administrators despite activated filter options. Active Directory Disabled users are now correctly represented in structure plans. Exchange Inventory Fixed file import errors for DSI files and mailbox permission mappings. Concepts Resolved validation and editing errors in the concept editor. Added missing chapters in the table of contents. Editor Fixed display issues when editing system details, especially for manually maintained entries. Miscellaneous Resolved issues in Exchange On-Premises plans and Sophos firewall routing information. Implemented optimizations for processing large data volumes to reduce memory issues. ","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"release-docusnap-14\"\u003eRelease Docusnap 14\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap 14 has been released and is now available in the \u003ca href=\"https://www.docusnap.com/en/support/softwaredownload\"\u003eDocusnap download area\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"new-features-changes-and-improvements-in-docusnap-13\"\u003eNew Features, Changes, and Improvements in Docusnap 13\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVersion: 13.0.1777.25008\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2025-01-09/#inventory\"\u003eInventory\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2025-01-09/#improvements\"\u003eImprovements\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2025-01-09/#fixed-issues\"\u003eFixed Issues\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"inventory\"\u003eInventory\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"snmp\"\u003eSNMP\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSNMP inventory has been updated to support the latest security protocols of SNMPv3. This enhancement ensures a more secure and reliable collection of devices in networks.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProcessing of large SNMP inventory results has been optimized, reducing the time required for handling large data volumes and ensuring more efficient processing of inventory data.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"improvements\"\u003eImprovements\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"reporting\"\u003eReporting\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGolden System Report - Hotfix comparison is now based on inventoried KB numbers, significantly improving report accuracy.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEnhanced display of permissions and system information across various report types.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"plans\"\u003ePlans\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTopology Plan - Improved visualization of Layer-3 elements and VLAN connections, particularly in systems with multiple network interfaces.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTopology Plan - Standardized device type symbols - The representation of device type symbols in the topology plan has been revamped and standardized for consistent visualization.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWildcards in Plans - Enhanced support for wildcards in plans simplifies the use of placeholders in documentation.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"documentation\"\u003eDocumentation\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eConcept Templates - Supplied concept templates, especially those with table of contents objects, have been revised and optimized for better usability in documentation.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"application\"\u003eApplication\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWindows SMB Protocols - Display of SMB v2 and v3 has been standardized to SMB v2/v3 for improved technical accuracy.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePhysical Infrastructure - Updated links to the Knowledge Base for better user guidance.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eImproved performance when editing concepts and IT manuals.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTrashbin Cleanup - Automatic database cleanup within the application has been performance-optimized, improving data management efficiency.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"fixed-issues\"\u003eFixed Issues\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"inventory-1\"\u003eInventory\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eResolved stability issues with scheduled jobs and specific scan targets.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eImproved VLAN and connection detection in physical networks.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFixed incorrect system assignments and timeout messages during SNMP inventory.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEnhanced SMB protocol detection.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExpanded support for specific devices like NetApp storage and Cisco switches.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"reports\"\u003eReports\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFixed inaccuracies in Golden System reports that led to incorrect update statuses.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCorrected discrepancies in license management.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eImproved filtering functionality in IT security reports.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"web-client\"\u003eWeb Client\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFixed display issues with DNS, DHCP, and Microsoft 365 data.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eResolved internal server errors when loading specific SNMP OIDs.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"routing-and-topology-plans\"\u003eRouting and Topology Plans\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFixed errors in the visualization of Layer-3 elements and VLAN mappings.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCorrect display of switch connections and IPsec tunnels between devices.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"it-security\"\u003eIT Security\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eImproved display and filtering of permissions for specific users and groups.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFixed incorrect display of domain administrators despite activated filter options.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"active-directory\"\u003eActive Directory\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDisabled users are now correctly represented in structure plans.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"exchange-inventory\"\u003eExchange Inventory\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFixed file import errors for DSI files and mailbox permission mappings.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"concepts\"\u003eConcepts\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eResolved validation and editing errors in the concept editor.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAdded missing chapters in the table of contents.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"editor\"\u003eEditor\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFixed display issues when editing system details, especially for manually maintained entries.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"miscellaneous\"\u003eMiscellaneous\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eResolved issues in Exchange On-Premises plans and Sophos firewall routing information.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eImplemented optimizations for processing large data volumes to reduce memory issues.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/release-notes/2025-01-09/","title":"Release Notes - 2025-01-09"},{"content":"New Features and Improvements in Docusnap 13 Version Number: 13.0.1440.24261 Windows 11 EOL Check Authentifizierung Anwendungsdatenbank Exchange 2010 Autonome Inventarisierungmodule CIFS-Inventarisierung Windows 11 EOL Check On October 8th, official support for earlier versions of Windows 11 will end, and from then on, no updates or security patches will be provided. A comprehensive report listing the affected systems is available in the Docusnap Community area and can be downloaded via the following link: Report - Microsoft Ending Support 2024\nAuthentication Foreign Security Principals from other domains are now correctly resolved and can be used in user management, as server users, and for integrated authentication.\nApplication Database SQL localDB is updated to version 2022 (16.0.4131.2). Older versions remain usable in parallel and can be accessed via localDB\\MSSQLLocalDB. If an earlier localDB 2022 version is already present, an update to 16.0.4131.2 is suggested during installation. Newer versions \u0026gt; 16.0.4131.2 remain unchanged. Docusnap localDB 2014 instances are not updated automatically.\nExchange 2010 Exchange Server 2010 installations can now be inventoried using the autonomous inventory module Discovery-Exchange_Legacy.exe. The corresponding package is available as a ZIP file in the Tools folder and can be unpacked and executed on the target system. The inventory data is created in DSI format.\nAutonomous Inventory Modules The storage of previously collected inventory data by autonomous inventory modules has been standardized in the file system.\nCIFS Inventory To enable inventory on systems that do not support the SMB standard share IPC$, the standard share C$ is now additionally queried. This ensures that necessary data for the inventory is collected, even without IPC$ share support.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"new-features-and-improvements-in-docusnap-13\"\u003eNew Features and Improvements in Docusnap 13\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVersion Number: 13.0.1440.24261\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-09-18/#windows-11-eol-check\"\u003eWindows 11 EOL Check\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-09-18/#authentifizierung\"\u003eAuthentifizierung\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-09-18/#anwendungsdatenbank\"\u003eAnwendungsdatenbank\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-09-18/#exchange-2010\"\u003eExchange 2010\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-09-18/#autonome-inventarisierungmodule\"\u003eAutonome Inventarisierungmodule\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-09-18/#cifs-inventarisierung\"\u003eCIFS-Inventarisierung\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"windows-11-eol-check\"\u003eWindows 11 EOL Check\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOn October 8th, official support for earlier versions of Windows 11 will end, and from then on, no updates or security patches will be provided. A comprehensive report listing the affected systems is available in the Docusnap Community area and can be downloaded via the following link: \u003ca href=\"https://community-en.docusnap.com/s/question/0D5Sc000003Yfv6KAC/report-microsoft-ending-support-in-2024\"\u003eReport - Microsoft Ending Support 2024\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/release-notes/2024-09-18/","title":"Release Notes - 2024-09-18"},{"content":"New Features and Improvements in Docusnap 13 Version Number: 13.0.1167.24196 IP Scan Operating System Detection IT Concept Backup and Version Data Windows VM Detection Windows Software and File Search Docusnap Web Add-ons IP Scan Operating System Detection The enhanced IP scan allows for the capture, documentation, and analysis of unknown networks without system credentials. In the current release, NPcap has been updated, significantly improving the operating system detection in the enhanced IP scan. The Docusnap Discovery System must be positioned within the network to be inventoried; otherwise, critical data packets required for accurate system detection may be discarded.\nIT Concept Backup and Version Data Fields have been added to capture the version creator and backup creator, in addition to the author. This extension allows for more precise tracking of changes and backups in the concepts.\nWindows VM Detection The inventory process has been improved to more accurately detect physical and virtual Windows systems. This enhancement ensures a more precise capture of system types.\nWindows Software and File Search The search function for software and files has been improved, allowing for significantly more search definitions. This enhancement improves the quality of inventory results by capturing additional installed software and security-critical files.\nDocusnap Web Add-ons Data captured by add-ons is now integrated into Docusnap Web and accessible via a browser.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"new-features-and-improvements-in-docusnap-13\"\u003eNew Features and Improvements in Docusnap 13\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVersion Number: 13.0.1167.24196\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-07-15/#ip-scan-operating-system-detection\"\u003eIP Scan Operating System Detection\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-07-15/#it-concept-backup-and-version-data\"\u003eIT Concept Backup and Version Data\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-07-15/#windows-vm-detection\"\u003eWindows VM Detection\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-07-15/#windows-software-and-file-search\"\u003eWindows Software and File Search\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-07-15/#docusnap-web-add-ons\"\u003eDocusnap Web Add-ons\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"ip-scan-operating-system-detection\"\u003eIP Scan Operating System Detection\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe enhanced IP scan allows for the capture, documentation, and analysis of unknown networks without system credentials. In the current release, NPcap has been updated, significantly improving the operating system detection in the enhanced IP scan. The Docusnap Discovery System must be positioned within the network to be inventoried; otherwise, critical data packets required for accurate system detection may be discarded.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/release-notes/2024-07-15/","title":"Release Notes - 2024-07-15"},{"content":"New Features and Improvements in Docusnap 13 Version number: 13.0.737.24080 Unified Autonomous Discovery Modules Microsoft 365 - Entra ID Backup Analysis Windows Security IT Security Docusnap Server Unified Autonomous Discovery Modules Our Discovery Modules now serve as a fully capable alternative to assistant-led data capture, increasingly important due to evolving security requirements. Previously, inconsistencies in behavior and operation made them challenging to use We\u0026rsquo;ve standardized runtime behavior, parameter settings, and support functions.\nMicrosoft 365 - Entra ID Assuming the presence of an Entra ID P1 license, we now track the last login event of Entra users, going back as far as April 2020.\nBackup Analysis New reports capture the backup status of Windows, Linux, and Mac systems, focusing on the backup solutions we support.\nWindows Security The new \u0026ldquo;Services with Local Users and AD Accounts\u0026rdquo; report provides a comprehensive overview of deviations from standard practices in using service accounts, aiding in the identification of potential issues like password changes or account deactivations.\nIT Security The \u0026ldquo;Report Jobs (csv)\u0026rdquo; feature has been enhanced to now include the selection of DFS folder targets for the automatic generation and optional emailing of directory reports.\nDocusnap Server The Docusnap Server status dialog has been redesigned, offering detailed insights into server and database configurations as well as the current operating status.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"new-features-and-improvements-in-docusnap-13\"\u003eNew Features and Improvements in Docusnap 13\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVersion number: 13.0.737.24080\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-03-20/#unified-autonomous-discovery-modules\"\u003eUnified Autonomous Discovery Modules\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-03-20/#microsoft-365---entra-id\"\u003eMicrosoft 365 - Entra ID\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-03-20/#backup-analysis\"\u003eBackup Analysis\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-03-20/#windows-security\"\u003eWindows Security\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-03-20/#it-security\"\u003eIT Security\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2024-03-20/#docusnap-server\"\u003eDocusnap Server\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"unified-autonomous-discovery-modules\"\u003eUnified Autonomous Discovery Modules\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur Discovery Modules now serve as a fully capable alternative to assistant-led data capture, increasingly important due to evolving security requirements. Previously, inconsistencies in behavior and operation made them challenging to use We\u0026rsquo;ve standardized runtime behavior, parameter settings, and support functions.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/release-notes/2024-03-20/","title":"Release Notes - 2024-03-20"},{"content":"New Features and Improvements in Docusnap 13 Version number: 13.0.383.23348 Microsoft 365: Teams SNMP: Additional Programs Telnet/SSH IT Concept: Improved Data Element Handling Physics Improvements Microsoft 365: Teams The inventory module for Microsoft 365 Teams has been updated so that channel information now includes members and their respective role assignments.\nSNMP: Additional Programs Telnet/SSH The \u0026ldquo;Additional Programs: Telnet/SSH\u0026rdquo; feature is now available for all SNMP device types, allowing for expanded inventory through additional, demand-driven data queries.\nIT Concept: Improved Data Element Handling The IT concept has been enhanced with a new wizard for handling very large data elements, increasing stability and performance for large concepts.\nPhysics Improvements The revised version of the \u0026ldquo;Physics\u0026rdquo; module now offers increased performance and stability, improved representation of racks in site plans, and the resolution of issues in cabling plans.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"new-features-and-improvements-in-docusnap-13\"\u003eNew Features and Improvements in Docusnap 13\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVersion number: 13.0.383.23348\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2023-12-14/#microsoft-365-teams\"\u003eMicrosoft 365: Teams\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2023-12-14/#snmp-additional-programs-telnetssh\"\u003eSNMP: Additional Programs Telnet/SSH\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2023-12-14/#it-concept-improved-data-element-handling\"\u003eIT Concept: Improved Data Element Handling\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2023-12-14/#physics-improvements\"\u003ePhysics Improvements\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"microsoft-365-teams\"\u003eMicrosoft 365: Teams\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe inventory module for Microsoft 365 Teams has been updated so that channel information now includes members and their respective role assignments.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"snmp-additional-programs-telnetssh\"\u003eSNMP: Additional Programs Telnet/SSH\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u0026ldquo;Additional Programs: Telnet/SSH\u0026rdquo; feature is now available for all SNMP device types, allowing for expanded inventory through additional, demand-driven data queries.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/release-notes/2023-12-14/","title":"Release Notes - 2023-12-14"},{"content":"New Features in Docusnap 13 Version number: 13.0.307.23331 Autonomous Discovery Modules Distributed File System (DFS) Discovery Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication Linux Discovery Active Directory Domain Service Distributed File System (DFS) Permissions Analysis Docusnap Connect Improvements Miscellaneous Upgrade Guide to Docusnap 13 Discovery Autonomous Discovery Modules - Improvements and New Developments Our latest developments in autonomous discovery modules represent a significant advancement, enabling a more comprehensive and secure recording of operating systems and essential services in IT environments. The innovations include specialized modules for Microsoft DFS and Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication, as well as significantly improved functionality for capturing Microsoft Exchange. The handling of these modules has become more user-friendly and less maintenance-intensive due to standardized names and parameters for archiving, execution, and logging. The newly introduced .DSI format serves as a universal container that securely encompasses encrypted discovery data and logs.\nA uniform naming convention for all script-based captures has been defined. The new nomenclature is Discovery-(Module).exe. Existing script-based variants are still supported, but it is recommended to replace them with the updated versions.\nDistributed File System (DFS) Discovery The newly developed DFS discovery module allows for a complete capture of all DFS namespaces variants on servers and converts these into a structured domain view, simplifying the analysis and security assessment of DFS data deployments. Additionally, it ensures a detailed recording of DFS replication groups, including their configuration, topology, and connections.\nVeeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication The \u0026ldquo;Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication\u0026rdquo; module captures modern Veeam installations in detail, regardless of the type of database used. It thoroughly documents the application configuration, license usage, and access rights. The documentation covers the backup and tape library infrastructure as well as the connected virtualization platforms and their virtual machines (VMs). Configured backup jobs and their execution status are summarized in a series of informative reports.\nLinux Discovery The latest version of the Linux discovery now captures existing certificates and their specific properties.\nActive Directory Domain Service The discovery of the Active Directory Domain Service (AD DS) has been expanded and now offers on the Docusnap interface a flat, filterable, and easily exportable list under \u0026ldquo;All Memberships.\u0026rdquo; This list includes both direct and indirect memberships of user, group, and computer accounts. This improved view simplifies the analysis and verification of correct group memberships for AD objects.\nIT Security Distributed File System (DFS) Permissions Analysis The NTFS Analysis Assistant has been optimized to make the analysis of files provided over DFS more effective. The assistant now enables differentiated capture of NTFS permissions for system and DFS shares. With the latest DFS discovery, targeted selection and analysis of specific DFS server shares is possible. The reports have also been adapted to allow for a clear allocation of DFS permissions to the corresponding servers.\nDocumentation Docusnap Connect Improvements The latest version of \u0026lsquo;Connect\u0026rsquo; allows users to create individual data views and export them in XML, CSV, and Excel formats. These can now be scheduled to be sent by email at timed intervals. The management of archive versions has also been optimized, allowing users to more easily review these settings in the job details.\nMiscellaneous Docusnap Usability The display of data in a hierarchical tree structure, where each technology has its own node, has been improved. Users now have the option \u0026ldquo;Hide MetaObjects\u0026rdquo; to choose which areas are displayed to them. This simplifies the operation of the application and reduces its complexity.\nDocusnap Application In the \u0026ldquo;Options - Database\u0026rdquo; area, additional information about the Microsoft SQL database we use is now provided. This information can be found in the categories \u0026ldquo;Database Information,\u0026rdquo; \u0026ldquo;Database Maintenance,\u0026rdquo; and \u0026ldquo;Encryption Module\u0026rdquo;.\nUpgrade Guide to Docusnap 13 The HowTo \u0026ldquo;New features, changes, and upgrade of Docusnap 13\u0026rdquo; describes the process for a successful upgrade to Docusnap 13. It is recommended to follow the guide carefully to ensure the upgrade is performed correctly.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"new-features-in-docusnap-13\"\u003eNew Features in Docusnap 13\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVersion number: 13.0.307.23331\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2023-11-22/#autonomous-discovery-modules---improvements-and-new-developments\"\u003eAutonomous Discovery Modules\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2023-11-22/#distributed-file-system-dfs-discovery\"\u003eDistributed File System (DFS) Discovery\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2023-11-22/#veeam-backup--replication\"\u003eVeeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2023-11-22/#linux-discovery\"\u003eLinux Discovery\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2023-11-22/#active-directory-domain-service\"\u003eActive Directory Domain Service\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2023-11-22/#distributed-file-system-dfs-permissions-analysis\"\u003eDistributed File System (DFS) Permissions Analysis\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2023-11-22/#docusnap-connect-improvements\"\u003eDocusnap Connect Improvements\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2023-11-22/#miscellaneous\"\u003eMiscellaneous\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"/en/release-notes/2023-11-22/#upgrade-guide-to-docusnap-13\"\u003eUpgrade Guide to Docusnap 13\u003c/a\u003e\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"discovery\"\u003eDiscovery\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3 id=\"autonomous-discovery-modules---improvements-and-new-developments\"\u003eAutonomous Discovery Modules - Improvements and New Developments\u003c/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOur latest developments in autonomous discovery modules represent a significant advancement, enabling a more comprehensive and secure recording of operating systems and essential services in IT environments. The innovations include specialized modules for Microsoft DFS and Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication, as well as significantly improved functionality for capturing Microsoft Exchange. The handling of these modules has become more user-friendly and less maintenance-intensive due to standardized names and parameters for archiving, execution, and logging. The newly introduced .DSI format serves as a universal container that securely encompasses encrypted discovery data and logs.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/release-notes/2023-11-22/","title":"Release Notes - 2023-11-22"},{"content":"The Assign button in the action bar allows you to insert existing concepts and directories at any desired position in the Explorer. To assign a concept, select it and click the Assign button to open the following dialog.\nUse the drop-down list to select the desired Explorer and tick the checkbox for the hierarchical level where you want to insert the concept or the directory. The inserted concept or directory is always located directly below the desired node in the selected Explorer.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eAssign\u003c/em\u003e button in the action bar allows you to insert existing concepts and directories at any desired position in the Explorer. To assign a concept, select it and click the \u003cem\u003eAssign\u003c/em\u003e button to open the following dialog.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/concept/assignment/docusnap-it-concepts-assign-it-concept.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-IT-Concepts-Assign-IT-Concept\" title=\"Docusnap-IT-Concepts-Assign-IT-Concept\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the drop-down list to select the desired Explorer and tick the checkbox for the hierarchical level where you want to insert the concept or the directory. The inserted concept or directory is always located directly below the desired node in the selected Explorer.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/assignment/","title":"Assignment"},{"content":"If the user needs to enter a Boolean value into the database from a data entry screen, a checkbox is helpful. Here, the checked control represents the \u0026ldquo;true\u0026rdquo; or \u0026ldquo;yes\u0026rdquo; value, and the unchecked control the \u0026ldquo;false\u0026rdquo; or \u0026ldquo;no\u0026rdquo; value. Checkboxes may either be used as independent controls or as label fields that have an additional feature used to enable or disable the control.\nIn addition to the global properties, checkboxes have the properties shown in the table below.\nSpecific Properties of Checkbox Controls CheckBoxPosition This property defines where the actual checkbox should appear within the control. Docusnap uses its caption as the reference position. Fieldname Specifies the linked column in the respective table of the current Docusnap database. The meta object linked with the data entry screen determines which table will be used. For checkboxes, the corresponding target column in the database must always have the Boolean data type (BOOLEAN, YES/NO). ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIf the user needs to enter a Boolean value into the database from a data entry screen, a checkbox is helpful. Here, the checked control represents the \u0026ldquo;true\u0026rdquo; or \u0026ldquo;yes\u0026rdquo; value, and the unchecked control the \u0026ldquo;false\u0026rdquo; or \u0026ldquo;no\u0026rdquo; value. Checkboxes may either be used as independent controls or as label fields that have an additional feature used to enable or disable the control.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/checkbox/docusnap-edit-checkbox.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Edit-checkbox\" title=\"Docusnap-Edit-checkbox\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition to the global properties, checkboxes have the properties shown in the table below.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/checkbox/","title":"Checkbox"},{"content":"The user has the option of reducing the tree structure to the parts that are essential for him by permanently hiding nodes that are not required. These settings are valid for the entire application. It is not possible to hide nodes only for certain domains or companies.\nThese settings are user-specific and can be set individually for each user who starts Docusnap. Docusnap has several tree structures to optimally display the data for the respective use case (inventory, documentation, IT security, license management). If, for example, the inventory tree is displayed for the selection of data in the documentation creation (IT concept, diagrams, etc.), objects that were previously hidden in this tree are also no longer offered in this view.\nIf, for example, the Amazon Web Services module is not used, it can be deactivated easily via the Hide meta objects context menu.\nAll hidden objects can be shown again via the button Show all meta objects again. Please note that the settings are only reset for the logged-in user.\nTo hide an object, the parent object must be selected, in the example the domain.\nIn the subsequent dialog, the objects that should no longer be displayed can be selected at domain level. The objects can be shown again if they are deselected in this dialog.\nAs a result, the nodes Linux, Mac, Azure and Amazon Web Services are no longer displayed in the tree.\nHide lower-level detail data It is also possible to hide unnecessary sub-nodes without hiding the main node itself.\nIn this case, the parent node Snapshots is selected\u0026hellip;\n\u0026hellip; and then the details are defined which are no longer relevant in the infrastructure.\nAfter this customization, only the data relevant to this user for objects of the workstation type will be displayed in the tree.\nListing the Settings The Hidden Object Types - All Users report lists the settings set for each user with the corresponding objects from the meta-schema.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe user has the option of reducing the tree structure to the parts that are essential for him by permanently hiding nodes that are not required. These settings are valid for the entire application. It is not possible to hide nodes only for certain domains or companies.\u003c/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv class=\"alert alert-primary\" role=\"alert\"\u003e\n\n\n    These settings are user-specific and can be set individually for each user who starts Docusnap.\n\n\u003c/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap has several tree structures to optimally display the data for the respective use case (inventory, documentation, IT security, license management).\nIf, for example, the inventory tree is displayed for the selection of data in the documentation creation (IT concept, diagrams, etc.), objects that were previously hidden in this tree are also no longer offered in this view.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/customize-tree/","title":"Customizing the Tree Structure for User"},{"content":"Overviews and datasheets can also be embedded into a concept.\nClick the Datasheet button to open the Select Datasheet dialog. Here, you can select the desired overview or datasheet. This opens the associated documentation wizard. The datasheets or overviews can be created as described in the Documentation chapter. The settings in the wizard are used for creating the respective overview or datasheet in the output element and do not affect the existing overviews and datasheets in the Documents module.\nIf you want to modify this new datasheet or overview, click the Settings button to reopen the Documentation wizard where you can generate datasheets or overviews. This allows you to modify existing properties. You can also drag a map or a datasheet and drop it onto the document. This will also open the Documentation wizard.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eOverviews and datasheets can also be embedded into a concept.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eDatasheet\u003c/em\u003e button to open the \u003cem\u003eSelect Datasheet\u003c/em\u003e dialog. Here, you can select the desired overview or datasheet. This opens the associated documentation wizard. The datasheets or overviews can be created as described in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/\" title=\"Documentation\"\u003eDocumentation\u003c/a\u003e chapter. The settings in the wizard are used for creating the respective overview or datasheet in the output element and do not affect the existing overviews and datasheets in the \u003cem\u003eDocuments\u003c/em\u003e module.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/create-concept/datasheet/","title":"Datasheet"},{"content":"The Diagrams module in Docusnap allows you to map the relations between the components of your IT environment. This enhances the transparency of your network organization.\nDiagrams may be modeled both at an organizational and at a technical level.\nAt the organizational level, you can display the interrelations of servers, workstations, etc. This allows you, for example, to identify the systems that would be affected by the failure of a particular component or to set up suitable maintenance schedules for individual components.\nOn the communications level, diagrams help you to determine the various connection types and the protocol used for each connection.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Diagrams module in Docusnap allows you to map the relations between the components of your IT environment. This enhances the transparency of your network organization.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDiagrams may be modeled both at an organizational and at a technical level.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt the organizational level, you can display the interrelations of servers, workstations, etc. This allows you, for example, to identify the systems that would be affected by the failure of a particular component or to set up suitable maintenance schedules for individual components.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/diagrams/","title":"Diagrams"},{"content":"By modelling the physical infrastructure it is possible to document the wiring.\nBefore cabling routes can be mapped, the corresponding elements must be stored in Docusnap. These elements could be, for example\nSeveral sites of the type room One or more racks in which switches and patch panels are added One or more network sockets available in the rooms Elements of the type workstations in rooms Defined plugs Defined cable types Cable Types Different cable types are required to model the complete wiring. Docusnap contains standard cable types. Further cable types can be added in the menu under Edit Cable Types.\nThe required cable types can then be defined in the next dialog.\nAdding Wiring In order to define a wiring, it is necessary to switch to the editing of the element. The connections to other elements can be specified in the toolbox under Plug \u0026amp; Cable Connections.\nIt should be noted that some elements require a connection for the front and rear sides. E.g. patch panels or network sockets. If an element is linked to a switch, the topology plan of the linked switch can be displayed. This is opened with the help of the button Switch Assignment within the toolbox Plugs \u0026amp; Cable Connections.\nBy means of the three points a description can be deposited for a single port. The name of the plug can be edited directly in the Plug column.\nA new cable connection can be defined for this object using the cable connections dialog. This can be opened via the button Adjust Cable Connection or via a double click in the WIRED WITH column.\nThe cable name, the cable type, the cable color, the element name of start and destination as well as the port can be defined.\nAll existing cable connections are displayed in the editing dialog. The default setting, however, is a filter that filters the data grid to the previously selected port.\nIf a new entry is created, the desired cable type must be selected. Then one or more ports can be connected depending on the cable type. The checkbox at the cable side indicates the starting point and the end point of the connection. An empty checkbox corresponds to Start and a set checkbox corresponds to Endpoint.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eBy modelling the physical infrastructure it is possible to document the wiring.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBefore cabling routes can be mapped, the corresponding elements must be stored in Docusnap. These elements could be, for example\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSeveral sites of the type room\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne or more racks in which switches and patch panels are added\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne or more network sockets available in the rooms\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eElements of the type workstations in rooms\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDefined plugs\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDefined cable types\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/document-wiring/docusnap-physical-infrastructure-wiring.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Wiring\" title=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Wiring\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/document-wiring/","title":"Document Wiring"},{"content":"Docusnap provides the DocusnapTsInfo.exe utility to help you identify all systems and users that log on to a terminal server. This makes it easier, in the context of License Management, to assign licenses to systems and users that use the terminal server.\nTo start the logging process, add the DocusnapTsInfo.exe executable file e.g. to the login script for the domain. You can set a particular parameter to define the directory where the XML files will be stored. As a parameter, you need to specify the path to that location:\nDocusnapTsInfo.exe \u0026ldquo;\\\\STBL01\\Builds\\TsInfo\u0026rdquo;\nThis folder contains the XML files that hold information on the logged-in users and devices.\nThe script is located in the Bin folder of the installation path.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap provides the DocusnapTsInfo.exe utility to help you identify all systems and users that log on to a terminal server. This makes it easier, in the context of License Management, to assign licenses to systems and users that use the terminal server.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo start the logging process, add the \u003cem\u003eDocusnapTsInfo.exe\u003c/em\u003e executable file e.g. to the login script for the domain. You can set a particular parameter to define the directory where the XML files will be stored. As a parameter, you need to specify the path to that location:\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/docusnap-ts-info/","title":"Docusnap TS Info"},{"content":"To create overview maps, either use the Create Overview wizard.\nAn overview map displays all maps that can be generated. If this map already exists in the directory, a link will be established so that you can open either the HTML map or the Visio map.\nWhen creating the map select the company and the domains the map should include. Check the Only Include Generated Documents to only include links to documents which were already created. Otherwise all documents are listed and will be linked in the Overview Map once they are generated.\nBy specifying an Alternative Documentation Path a different path for the overview can be used.\nThe preview window reflects the layout of the overview map. You can change the layout, if required. For most overview maps, however, we recommend to use the default settings.\nOverview maps will be stored in the Maps directory below the documentation directory for the corresponding company.\n(\\Documentation Path\\index.htm)\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo create overview maps, either use the \u003cem\u003eCreate Overview\u003c/em\u003e wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAn overview map displays all maps that can be generated. If this map already exists in the directory, a link will be established so that you can open either the HTML map or the Visio map.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/overview-map/docusnap-documentation-overview-web.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Documentation-Overview-Web\" title=\"Docusnap-Documentation-Overview-Web\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen creating the map select the company and the domains the map should include. Check the \u003cem\u003eOnly Include Generated Documents\u003c/em\u003e to only include links to documents which were already created. Otherwise all documents are listed and will be linked in the \u003cem\u003eOverview Map\u003c/em\u003e once they are generated.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/overview-map/","title":"Overview Map"},{"content":"The Software and File Search in Docusnap is used to search for specific files on the file system of Linux, Mac, and Windows systems. Here, file names are defined, which Docusnap then searches during the inventory on the file system.\nThe files found are made available for evaluation in Docusnap in different ways depending on the categorization (file search Linux, Mac and Windows or software search Windows).\nIn the Software and File Search tab, the definitions for the search are created.\nThe first step is to assign a name and select the category:\nFile Search Linux File Search Mac File search Windows Software search Windows In the next step you define the search term or file name. Here you can enter the actual file name. Placeholders can also be used to make the search more flexible (e.g., Docusnap*.exe). A ? replaces one character, the * replaces several characters.\nThe remaining fields are optional:\nFile size Date Modified Manufacturer Version The File Size and Date modified fields can be used to limit the search results. If you know that multiple files with the same file name exist in a system, it would be a good idea to use these fields because Docusnap terminates the search for a certain system as soon as one file matching the search criteria has been found. Specify the file size in bytes.\nDefinitions can be removed again via the Delete button. A definition can also be deleted if it has already been used and the files found are still in the database. If a job has been created for an inventory in which the file search is used, the job can still be executed even if the associated definition of the Software and File Search has been deleted. However, when the job is edited, the deleted definition is no longer available and once the editing is completed, this search is no longer included in the inventory.\nThe search path specification differs depending on which category is selected. The search path is optional, but if specified, it may significantly reduce the search time in some cases.\nWindows software search A search path for the Windows software search is optional. If no search path is specified, all local drives are searched. Specifying a search path can contribute significantly to the execution time. The Windows software search can significantly increase scan times and requires a noticeably higher workload on the systems involved. Regarding the scan times as well as the workload, among other things, it is relevant how many software searches are activated per scan.\nThe software search is terminated as soon as a file with the corresponding file name has been found.\nFile Search Windows If no filter is specified in the search, all local drives of the system are searched. It is also true for the Windows file search that the search can significantly increase the duration of the inventory and generate a higher workload on the systems involved. Include or Exclude Paths: The file search can be optionally limited to partial areas of the data structure via search paths. Either including or excluding search paths can be defined. As soon as you switch between Including Search Paths and Excluding Search Paths in the dialog, the paths already created are removed. End search after first hit: By default, the file search stops after the first hit. Otherwise, all local drives are searched for the selected definitions and displayed in full in Docusnap. Search system drive only: The file search can be limited to the operating system partition. Defined search paths that do not refer to the system partition are ignored in this case. File search for Linux and Mac For the file search for Linux and Mac, both including and excluding search paths can be defined. For each excluding path, a corresponding including path must be defined. For an including path, no excluding path must be defined. If no paths are specified, all local drives are searched here as well.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eSoftware and File Search\u003c/em\u003e in Docusnap is used to search for specific files on the file system of Linux, Mac, and Windows systems. Here, file names are defined, which Docusnap then searches during the inventory on the file system.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe files found are made available for evaluation in Docusnap in different ways depending on the categorization (file search Linux, Mac and Windows or software search Windows).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Software and File Search tab, the definitions for the search are created.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/software-and-file-search/","title":"Software and File Search"},{"content":"The Analysis tab will be displayed in the main window when you select an Active Directory user or an Active Directory group. This tab shows group nesting as well as user nesting information.\nUsing this information, you can find out the following:\nWhich group or groups is the user xxx a member of? Which members make up the group yyy? Before you can display this structure, you need to select the desired ADS user or ADS group. When you click the Analysis tab, the hierarchy of groups or users is built and shown in a diagram. The icon indicates a group. Individual users are identified by the icon.\nBy clicking the button you can choose whether the displayed structure should be exported as Microsoft Visio, png, svg or html file.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eAnalysis\u003c/em\u003e tab will be displayed in the main window when you select an \u003cem\u003eActive Directory user\u003c/em\u003e or an \u003cem\u003eActive Directory group.\u003c/em\u003e This tab shows group nesting as well as user nesting information.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing this information, you can find out the following:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWhich group or groups is the user xxx a member of?\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWhich members make up the group yyy?\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBefore you can display this structure, you need to select the desired ADS user or ADS group. When you click the \u003cem\u003eAnalysis\u003c/em\u003e tab, the hierarchy of groups or users is built and shown in a diagram. The \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/structure/docusnap-structure-group.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Structure-Group\" title=\"Docusnap-Structure-Group\"\u003e icon indicates a group. Individual users are identified by the \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/structure/docusnap-structure-user.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Structure-User\" title=\"Docusnap-Structure-User\"\u003e icon.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/structure/","title":"Structure"},{"content":"If, in the second step of the License Management wizard, you selected a metric which allows you to manually assign licenses to users, this wizard page will display all Active Directory users and Active Directory groups. You can assign either users or groups. When assigning groups, you have the option to either assign the group itself or all users who have been assigned as members of this group during the most recent inventory scan. Once you have assigned the group, the number of licenses required for this group will be calculated based on the current inventory. For groups, you can choose whether only the users who are direct members of the group are considered, or whether users of recursive subgroups of the selected group are to be included. For this reason, the number of required licenses may change with each new inventory scan if other users have been assigned to the group in the meantime.\nAssigning users to licenses is similar to assigning systems to licenses.\nSystem and user assignments are mutually exclusive, i.e. a license may only be assigned either to a system or to a user, but never to both at the same time. However, if a specific use case requires this combination, you can work around this issue by creating two separate software products in Docusnap.\nImport User List In Docusnap, you can use the DocusnapTSInfo application to create a log of all users who log on to a Terminal Server. Based on the information retrieved, these users can be assigned to the licenses. This requires, however, that the users have been inventoried by Docusnap previously.\nTo import the user list, first select the path where the XML files are located. Then, select the license. This finally enables the Import User List button. Click the Import User List button to search the specified folder for the XML files. All users listed will be assigned to the selected license.\nIf necessary, you can assign more users later or undo the assignment of previously assigned users.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIf, in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/licensing/\" title=\"second step\"\u003esecond step\u003c/a\u003e of the License Management wizard, you selected a metric which allows you to manually assign licenses to users, this wizard page will display all Active Directory users and Active Directory groups. You can assign either users or groups. When assigning groups, you have the option to either assign the group itself or all users who have been assigned as members of this group during the most recent inventory scan. Once you have assigned the group, the number of licenses required for this group will be calculated based on the current inventory. For groups, you can choose whether only the users who are direct members of the group are considered, or whether users of recursive subgroups of the selected group are to be included. For this reason, the number of required licenses may change with each new inventory scan if other users have been assigned to the group in the meantime.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/user-assignment/","title":"User Assignment"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying the VMware infrastructure, click the VMware Infrastructure button on the Inventory ribbon. The VMware Infrastructure step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps).\nClick the New button to specify the desired VMware VCenter server, VMware server, VMware ESXi or VMware vSphere. In the vCenter/ESXi Server field, you can specify the name or the IP address.\nDepending upon the configuration of the VMware product, you may have to specify a port in the vCenter/ESXi Server field in order to establish a connection. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying the VMware infrastructure, click the \u003cem\u003eVMware Infrastructure\u003c/em\u003e button on the Inventory ribbon. The \u003cem\u003eVMware Infrastructure\u003c/em\u003e step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/vmware-infrastructure/docusnap-inventory-vmware-infrastructure.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory VMware Infrastructure\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory VMware Infrastructure\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button to specify the desired VMware VCenter server, VMware server, VMware ESXi or VMware vSphere. In the \u003cem\u003evCenter/ESXi Server\u003c/em\u003e field, you can specify the name or the IP address.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/vmware-infrastructure/","title":"VMware Infrastructure"},{"content":"Use and Properties Buttons can be used to implement additional user-defined features directly on Docusnap data entry screens. For this purpose, either external applications with corresponding parameters may be started or VB scripts may be executed. In both cases, the data from the current record will be available and may be integrated into the corresponding program call or the script. To load the desired data, enter the corresponding database column names in braces in the following format: {FIELDNAME}\nIn addition to the global properties, the following property settings are available for buttons.\nSpecific Properties of Button Controls ActionMode This property determines the type of action to be executed. The available options are Application or Script. When you select Application, clicking the button will start the application specified in the Application property. Additional parameters can be indicated by means of the AppArguments property. When you select Script, clicking the button will execute a VB script that you define through the Script property. The unselected option will automatically be ignored by Docusnap. Settings you have made for the currently disabled option will not be considered. Application Here, you can specify the application to be executed when the button is clicked. This requires that the Application option has been selected for the ActionMode property. Enter either the name of the application, such as explorer.exe, or the full path to an executable file on the hard disk or on a share. AppArguments Using this property, you can define additional arguments that will be passed as parameters to the application to be executed when the user clicks the button control. As with the Windows command line, multiple parameters can be entered. It is also possible to use data from the current record by entering the respective field name in braces. Script In this property, you can specify a VB script to be executed when the user clicks the button. Here again, data from the current record is available without restriction. You can integrate it into the script by entering the respective field name in braces. Examples of Use Opening an Admin Share Specify the following to enable a user to open the C$ admin share of a Windows computer by clicking a button on a Windows systems level data entry screen:\nProperty Value ActionMode Application Application explorer.exe AppArguments \\\\{Hostname}\\C$ Starting a Remote Desktop Connection The configuration below enables the user to start a remote desktop connection for the current computer from a data entry screen at the device level.\nProperty Value ActionMode Application Application mstsc.exe AppArguments /v {Hostname} Simple VB Script Example The simple example of a device level script shown below checks whether the currently selected computer is online or unreachable using a ping command.\nProperty Value ActionMode Script Script Dim Win Win=\u0026ldquo;select*from Win32_PingStatus where address=\u0026rsquo;{Hostname}\u0026rsquo;\u0026rdquo; Dim Level Level = \u0026ldquo;winmgmts:{impersonationLevel=impersonate}\u0026rdquo; Set objPing = GetObject(Level).ExecQuery(Win) For Each objStatus in objPing If IsNull(objStatus.StatusCode) Or objStatus.StatusCode\u0026lt;\u0026gt;0 Then WScript.Echo \u0026ldquo;Computer {Hostname} is unreachable.\u0026rdquo; - Else - WScript.Echo \u0026ldquo;Computer {Hostname} is online.\u0026rdquo; - End If - Next The examples shown in this section are meant to provide a basic look at the options to extend Docusnap by integrating external applications or VB scripts. Almost any imaginable customization can be made by means of these two options. If a planned customization goes beyond the capabilities of a VB script, you can call a self-programmed application with corresponding parameters in order to achieve the desired goal. More information about the capabilities provided by VB scripts can be found in a number of books and, of course, on the Internet. ","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"use-and-properties\"\u003eUse and Properties\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eButtons can be used to implement additional user-defined features directly on Docusnap data entry screens. For this purpose, either external applications with corresponding parameters may be started or VB scripts may be executed. In both cases, the data from the current record will be available and may be integrated into the corresponding program call or the script. To load the desired data, enter the corresponding database column names in braces in the following format: {FIELDNAME}\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/buttons/","title":"Buttons"},{"content":"The Concepts module in Docusnap allows you to create concepts by using the whole set of retrieved data, associated documentation, and relations so that there is no need for an additional word processor.\nWhat is more, the inventoried data and documentation are always updated to keep the concept current at any time. It is also possible to insert variables, such as the name of a workstation or the last inventory data, into the various text areas.\nOnce the concept is complete, it can be exported to the desired format (.docx, .pdf, .html, or .rtf) and thus becomes available for further use.\nThe creation and export of the document can be automated using the Scheduling feature, allowing timed updates of the document.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Concepts module in Docusnap allows you to create concepts by using the whole set of retrieved data, associated documentation, and relations so that there is no need for an additional word processor.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhat is more, the inventoried data and documentation are always updated to keep the concept current at any time. It is also possible to insert variables, such as the name of a workstation or the last inventory data, into the various text areas.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/","title":"Concept"},{"content":"On the Diagrams tab, you can create diagrams that show the connections between different elements. The current Inventory tree view will be displayed in a separate pane at the right. From this tree, you can drag the components required for the diagram to the main window while holding the left mouse button. When you click a connection line, a data entry screen for the connection properties opens at the bottom of the window. There, you can describe the connection between individual objects in more detail.\nIn addition you can also add IT Correlations for the different objects.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eOn the Diagrams tab, you can create diagrams that show the connections between different elements. The current \u003cem\u003eInventory\u003c/em\u003e tree view will be displayed in a separate pane at the right. From this tree, you can drag the components required for the diagram to the main window while holding the left mouse button. When you click a connection line, a data entry screen for the connection properties opens at the bottom of the window. There, you can describe the connection between individual objects in more detail.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/diagrams/","title":"Diagrams"},{"content":"Reports Docusnap provides various reports on the physical infrastructure. These can be found in the tree structure below the sites.\nThe following reports are available.\nRack Summary\nOutputs information about the rack. It also includes existing properties. Information on installed elements is also displayed. Rack Summary - Site\nAll racks of the site and the subordinate sites are considered. Patch Panel Summary\nOutputs information about the patch panel. Existing properties are taken into account. Information about wired elements is also displayed. Patch Panel Summary - Site\nAll patch panels of the site and the subordinate sites are considered. Dashboard Summary\nOverview of the elements added to the dashboard. Favorites Summary\nOverview of the elements added to the favorites. Patch Panel Cabling Overview\nOverview of the patch panel assignment and the further cabling. Maps A visual evaluation of the physical infrastructure can be carried out with the help of maps. These can be found in the tree structure within the navigation area Inventory and Documentation.\nThese maps are ad hoc maps. They are thus regenerated when opened and always refer to the most current data.\nMaps are not only displayed in Docusnap, but can be exported in different formats (PNG, Visio, HTML, SVG).\nElement Map The element map can be opened below an element in the tree structure. This map shows the connection between the element and other elements. Only the direct connections of the element are displayed. Using the ribbon you can control whether the front or rear side of the elements should be shown. The mouse over function for individual cabling displays more detailed information about this.\nWiring Map The wiring map can be opened below a single element in the tree structure. This plan shows the continuous wiring path of the corresponding element to the end point. For example, the network cabling of a workstation to the backbone switch. Using the ribbon you can control whether the front or rear side of the elements should be shown. The mouse over function for individual cabling displays more detailed information about this.\nSite Map The site map can be found below a site. The site map shows the structure of the site. This concerns the site image as well as the positioning of the site elements.\nRack Map The rack map reflects the physical structure of a rack. The positioning of the rack elements in the rack is shown. The map can be found below a rack. Using the ribbon you can control whether the front or rear side of the elements should be shown. If the check box Show Connections is checked, the connections of the elements within the rack are displayed. The mouse over function for individual cabling displays more detailed information about this.\nData Output and Further Processing In addition to reports and maps the documented physical infrastructure can be output and further processed with the following functions.\nDocusnap Connect Using Docusnap Connect, user-defined packages can be exported. These contain the desired information from the physical infrastructure.\nDocusnap Concepts Maps, reports and overviews from the physical infrastructure can be integrated into concepts.\nGrid Export Possibility of direct Excel export. Overviews in data grids can be exported directly into an Excel table.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"reports\"\u003eReports\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap provides various reports on the physical infrastructure. These can be found in the tree structure below the sites.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe following reports are available.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRack Summary\u003cbr\u003e\nOutputs information about the rack. It also includes existing properties. Information on installed elements is also displayed.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRack Summary - Site\u003cbr\u003e\nAll racks of the site and the subordinate sites are considered.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePatch Panel Summary\u003cbr\u003e\nOutputs information about the patch panel. Existing properties are taken into account. Information about wired elements is also displayed.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePatch Panel Summary - Site\u003cbr\u003e\nAll patch panels of the site and the subordinate sites are considered.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDashboard Summary\u003cbr\u003e\nOverview of the elements added to the dashboard.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFavorites Summary\u003cbr\u003e\nOverview of the elements added to the favorites.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePatch Panel Cabling Overview\u003cbr\u003e\nOverview of the patch panel assignment and the further cabling.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"maps\"\u003eMaps\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA visual evaluation of the physical infrastructure can be carried out with the help of maps. These can be found in the tree structure within the navigation area Inventory and Documentation.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/documentation-and-analysis/","title":"Documentation and Analysis"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying Hyper-V servers, click the Hyper-V button. After you have selected a company and a domain or entered your credentials (see: Basic Steps) the Hyper-V step is displayed.\nTo inventory the desired Hyper-V servers, click the New button and specify the name of the respective system. You can also enter alternative credentials to those in the Authentication step. After you have saved your entry, Docusnap will check whether this system belongs to the domain you specified. If yes, the server will be added to the list at the top of the window, and the Next button becomes active. If the specified server name is not correct, the button remains grayed out. After adding the desired systems to the Hyper-V Server table, you can use the checkbox next to each system to specify whether it is to be included in the inventory scan or not.\nIf the specified server name is a cluster Hyper-V, the Docusnap inventories the information of the cluster, including all hosts in the cluster. If only the name of a Hyper-V server is entered, then just the data of this server is inventoried.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying Hyper-V servers, click the \u003cem\u003eHyper-V\u003c/em\u003e button. After you have selected a company and a domain or entered your credentials (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e) the \u003cem\u003eHyper-V\u003c/em\u003e step is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/hyper-v/docusnap-inventory-hyper-v.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Hyper-V\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Hyper-V\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo inventory the desired Hyper-V servers, click the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button and specify the name of the respective system. You can also enter alternative credentials to those in the \u003cem\u003eAuthentication\u003c/em\u003e step. After you have saved your entry, Docusnap will check whether this system belongs to the domain you specified. If yes, the server will be added to the list at the top of the window, and the \u003cem\u003eNext\u003c/em\u003e button becomes active. If the specified server name is not correct, the button remains grayed out. After adding the desired systems to the \u003cem\u003eHyper-V Server\u003c/em\u003e table, you can use the checkbox next to each system to specify whether it is to be included in the inventory scan or not.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/hyper-v/","title":"Hyper-V"},{"content":"In this step, you can take corrective action with respect to the automatic determination of the existing installations and the associated evaluations in the context of License Management. At the top of the wizard page, a list will be displayed which contains the current inventory. It shows all systems where a software installation was found which matches the previously entered definitions. If the Use exclusive assignment checkbox is enabled, the list only includes those systems which were actually assigned to the current software product in the System Assignment step. This is an alternative way to assign licenses to systems. This procedure is not available for user assignment. This exclusive assignment will not be reflected in the way how the software products are displayed in the license tree view. It will, however, be taken into account in the evaluations and reports.\nThe number of licenses in use in the company, as determined by the automatic software inventory mentioned above, will be displayed in the In use (assigned automatically) field. The difference between this number and the number of available, registered, purchased licenses will be shown in the License Balance. By entering a corresponding correction value in the Correction Value field, you can adjust the license balance manually. This procedure is always necessary if the automatic assignment was not possible for whatever reasons. The correction value may be either a positive or negative number. A positive correction value means that additional installations will have to be added to the installations found, i.e. additional licenses are required. In contrast, a negative correction value means that more licenses were found to be in use than are in reality. In this case, you can adjust the automatic inventory to the lower value. A correction value of zero means that the evaluation will only be based on the result from the automatic inventory. Manual correction values are kept beyond the expiration date of the registered licenses.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn this step, you can take corrective action with respect to the automatic determination of the existing installations and the associated evaluations in the context of License Management. At the top of the wizard page, a list will be displayed which contains the current inventory. It shows all systems where a software installation was found which matches the previously entered definitions. If the \u003cem\u003eUse exclusive assignment\u003c/em\u003e checkbox is enabled, the list only includes those systems which were actually assigned to the current software product in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/system-assignment/\" title=\"System Assignment\"\u003eSystem Assignment\u003c/a\u003e step. This is an alternative way to assign licenses to systems. This procedure is not available for \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/user-assignment/\" title=\"user assignment\"\u003euser assignment\u003c/a\u003e. This exclusive assignment will not be reflected in the way how the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/licensing/\" title=\"software products\"\u003esoftware products\u003c/a\u003e are displayed in the license tree view. It will, however, be taken into account in the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/evaluations/\" title=\"evaluations\"\u003eevaluations\u003c/a\u003e and reports.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/license-usage/","title":"License Usage"},{"content":"Using placeholders, you can identify the locations where particular information should be inserted. This allows you to define a structure a user should follow when creating a concept.\nCreating Placeholders Click the Placeholder button in the Insert ribbon to open the Insert Placeholder dialog. A placeholder can be defined for data, reports, maps, text, etc. Select the desired type from the Element Type dropdown list. The action text you specify is be displayed in the document before the placeholder will be replaced with the corresponding data. The Object Filter field allows you to define that, e.g., only network maps or the data of workstations may be inserted. Click the Select button to open a window which displays the data available for the selected type. For example, if you want to insert only workstation data at a certain location, select the Workstations sub-node and click the OK button. The specified description will be displayed in the Tasks window at the bottom of the editor. Finally, click OK to add the placeholder to your document.\nApplying Placeholders If a document contains placeholders, they will be highlighted in gray. In the Tasks window, the description of each placeholder will be displayed. Click the button with the action text in the Tasks window to open the selection window for the data which is available for this placeholder. Once you have selected the data, it replaces the placeholder.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eUsing placeholders, you can identify the locations where particular information should be inserted. This allows you to define a structure a user should follow when creating a concept.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"creating-placeholders\"\u003eCreating Placeholders\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003ePlaceholder\u003c/em\u003e button in the \u003cem\u003eInsert\u003c/em\u003e ribbon to open the \u003cem\u003eInsert Placeholder\u003c/em\u003e dialog. A placeholder can be defined for data, reports, maps, text, etc. Select the desired type from the \u003cem\u003eElement Type\u003c/em\u003e dropdown list. The action text you specify is be displayed in the document before the placeholder will be replaced with the corresponding data. The \u003cem\u003eObject Filter\u003c/em\u003e field allows you to define that, e.g., only network maps or the data of workstations may be inserted. Click the \u003cem\u003eSelect\u003c/em\u003e button to open a window which displays the data available for the selected type. For example, if you want to insert only workstation data at a certain location, select the Workstations sub-node and click the \u003cem\u003eOK\u003c/em\u003e button. The specified description will be displayed in the \u003cem\u003eTasks\u003c/em\u003e window at the bottom of the editor. Finally, click \u003cem\u003eOK\u003c/em\u003e to add the placeholder to your document.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/create-concept/placeholder/","title":"Placeholder"},{"content":"Servers may have various roles. These roles can be defined in the Server Roles tab. When you perform an inventory scan of the servers, all services are retrieved that are present on the server at the time of the scan. By having a look at the services that have been started, you can see which tasks they fulfill.\nIn the Server Roles tab, you can enter the role name and the service that defines it. Enter any meaningful name for the role and English and German designations.\nWhen displaying the server roles in the tree view the defined service name is matched to the inventoried service name. If the display name of the inventoried services contains one of the defined service names, this role will be displayed for this system.\nIf the user interface language is English, the role name will be displayed in English. When you switch to German, the German name will be shown.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eServers may have various roles. These roles can be defined in the \u003cem\u003eServer Roles\u003c/em\u003e tab. When you perform an inventory scan of the servers, all services are retrieved that are present on the server at the time of the scan. By having a look at the services that have been started, you can see which tasks they fulfill.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eServer Roles\u003c/em\u003e tab, you can enter the role name and the service that defines it. Enter any meaningful name for the role and English and German designations.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/server-roles/","title":"Server Roles"},{"content":"The files of the concept are stored in the database. If the concepts and templates are to be reused in another database, they can be saved to a file and subsequently loaded again using the Store Concepts and Load Concepts buttons.\nThe desired files can be selected in the Store IT Concepts/Templates dialog. Click on the Store button to select the location and save the file.\nIn the dialog Load IT Concepts/Templates, a file is selected which content should be loaded. After the file has been selected, you can choose which concepts and templates to load. In the Import Mode combo box you can choose whether the concepts should be overwritten. The comparison of the concepts is done via the unique number of the IT concept not by name. If an IT concept is imported, which is not the same concept but one with the same name, there will be two concepts with the same name.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe files of the concept are stored in the database. If the concepts and templates are to be reused in another database, they can be saved to a file and subsequently loaded again using the \u003cem\u003eStore Concepts\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eLoad Concepts\u003c/em\u003e buttons.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/concept/store-load-concept/docusnap-menu-it-concept-other.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Menu-IT-Concept-Other\" title=\"Docusnap-Menu-IT-Concept-Other\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe desired files can be selected in the \u003cem\u003eStore IT Concepts/Templates\u003c/em\u003e dialog. Click on the \u003cem\u003eStore\u003c/em\u003e button to select the location and save the file.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/concept/store-load-concept/docusnap-it-concepts-store.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-IT-Concepts-Store\" title=\"Docusnap-IT-Concepts-Store\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the dialog \u003cem\u003eLoad IT Concepts/Templates,\u003c/em\u003e a file is selected which content should be loaded. After the file has been selected, you can choose which concepts and templates to load. In the \u003cem\u003eImport Mode\u003c/em\u003e combo box you can choose whether the concepts should be overwritten. The comparison of the concepts is done via the unique number of the IT concept not by name. If an IT concept is imported, which is not the same concept but one with the same name, there will be two concepts with the same name.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/concept/store-load-concept/","title":"Store/Load Concept"},{"content":"In Docusnap, it is possible to define system groups. This means that systems belonging for example to the same department can be combined into one group.\nFor these system groups, you can create network maps, routing maps, topology maps, VLAN maps and datasheets. To create the documents for the system groups, use the System Groups button. The Create Docu wizard is not available for this kind of documentation.\nIn the first step, you select the domain. When creating maps and datasheets for system groups, you must additionally select the desired system group. Only one group may be selected at a time.\nThen, you can select the systems to be included in the network map and/or routing map. Docusnap will only display systems that have been assigned to the selected system group. When you create network maps for system groups, you can also group workstations and SNMP systems. To include a system in the network map, tick the corresponding checkbox. With the filter in the selection list the devices can be kept more manageable. For more information about filtering, see the Filters section. If you want to include only servers, workstations, Linux systems, etc. into your network map, click the corresponding icon(s). Clicking each icon a second time will exclude the respective system type again.\nIn the next step, you can create datasheets for each system. These datasheets can be linked to the objects in the network map. The options under Advanced, which are also available as preferences in the Options dialog, allow you to specify the formats for datasheet linking, if desired. The links will be created even if that particular datasheet does not exist yet. This way, also datasheets created at a later time, will be linked to the systems in the network map.\nThe preview window reflects the layout of the network map or routing map. You can change the layout, if required. For most network and routing maps, you get the best results when using the default settings. What is more, the preview enables you to make the same changes as described under Network Map.\nIf you want to create only the datasheets for the system group, but not the network and routing maps, this step can be skipped. To do so, disabled the Create Network Map and/or Create Routing Map checkbox.\nIn the next step, the network topology maps can be created for the selected system group. Docusnap will generate additional maps for switches and virtual switches that have been selected in the Switch Maps table. These maps will show the systems of the system group connected to the selected switch. Click on the Preview button to open a preview of the maps, in which further settings can be defined.\nBy unchecking the Create Network Topology Map checkbox, no network topology maps are created.\nIn the next step, you can select the systems for which to create datasheets. The datasheets will contain all information about the selected systems, such as software, hardware, networks, services, local users, etc.\nTo create the network maps without any datasheets, disable the Create Datasheets checkbox.\nThe datasheets may also include comments that have been stored with the systems. Comments saved at the system level will be shown, but no comments created for lower levels. In addition, the attachments can be included. If you enable the Export Attachments checkbox, the attachments to the comments will be listed in the report and the attachments themselves will be stored in the Comments folder.\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\System Groups Name\\DataSheets\\Name of the System\\Attachments\\Comments)\nIt is possible to integrate additional tools into the scanning process. You can add these tools from the Additional Tools in the Docusnap Management. In case an additional tool is used for inventorying, the results can be output along with the datasheet. If the Show Results of the Additional Tools checkbox is enabled, the results found by the additional tool for each system will be exported to a folder under the Datasheet folder.\n(\\Documentation Path\\Company\\Domain\\System Groups Name\\DataSheets\\Name of the System\\ToolResults)\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn Docusnap, it is possible to define \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/system-groups/\" title=\"system groups\"\u003esystem groups\u003c/a\u003e. This means that systems belonging for example to the same department can be combined into one group.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor these system groups, you can create network maps, routing maps, topology maps, VLAN maps and datasheets. To create the documents for the system groups, use the \u003cem\u003eSystem Groups\u003c/em\u003e button. The \u003cem\u003eCreate Docu\u003c/em\u003e wizard is not available for this kind of documentation.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the first step, you select the domain. When creating maps and datasheets for system groups, you must additionally select the desired system group. Only one group may be selected at a time.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/documentation/creation-of-documentation/map-files/system-groups/","title":"System Groups"},{"content":"Docusnap allows you to execute certain additional tools when performing a Windows system inventory scan.\nAn example of such an additional tool is the Systeminfo.exe application. Docusnap will start Systeminfo.exe after using the defined arguments after completion of the inventory scan. The result data returned by the tool will be saved in the database.\nTo add a desired tool, click the New button. You can choose the name freely. The name you specify will also be used as the results file name. Enter the name and path of the executable in the Program Path field or select it by clicking the button. The parameters you specified will be provided to the tool upon execution. Indicate optional parameters by square brackets (\u0026quot;[ ]\u0026quot;). If no parameters are required, at least one blank space must be entered in order for the additional tool to be saved.\nFor the Type field, two options are available:\nFile\nWhen you select File, the tool will create a temporary file on the hard disk where the returned results will be saved. When the inventory scan has completed, this file will be imported and saved in the database. You can use the %targetfile% parameter to redirect the data into a results file. For example: \u0026ldquo;Systeminfo.exe \u0026gt; %targetfile%\u0026rdquo; causes the resulting data to be saved in the results file defined in the text field. Stream\nIf you select the Stream option, the results from the standard output will be written to the database immediately. In this case, however, the cmd.exe program will be visible for a short time. In the Timeout field, you can indicate how much time the tool may take to complete. If this period is exceeded, the tool will be terminated by Docusnap.\nIn the Open with field, you can define the program to be used for opening the results file.\nThe Run Additional Tool Remotely checkbox defines whether the program runs on the system where the inventory process is taking place or remotely on the currently inventoried system.\nIf the additional tool is executed on the system running Docusnap, the program must be available only on that system.\nIf the additional tool is to be run remotely, then the program must be present on the systems being inventoried for it to run.\nBefore you can select additional tools for the inventory process, the Additional Tools checkbox in the Configuration - Inventory dialog must be enabled.\nDocusnap provides the following environment variables:\n%Hostname%, %Computername% %Ipadress%, %Ipadresse% %Domainname%, %Domain%, %Domäne %ShortHostname% %FQDN% %Username%, %Benutzer% %Password%, %Passwort% %Targetfile%, %Zieldatei% %Description%, %Beschreibung% %Tool%, %Toolname% %accountname% Exception: single sign-on If a user name and password are not entered for logging onto the domain in the Authentication step (single sign-on), you should declare the %username% and %password% parameters as optional parameters in square brackets. This ensures that no empty user name or empty password will be used. Examples local execution:\nA:\nName: System info Program Path: systeminfo.exe Parameters: /S %hostname% [/U %username% /P %password%] \u0026gt; %targetfile% Results File: systeminfo.txt Open with: notepad.exe Type: File B:\nName: System info Program Path: systeminfo.exe Parameters: /S %hostname% [/U %username% /P %password%] Results File: systeminfo.txt Open with: notepad.exe Type: Stream Example remote execution: Power Shell\nName: Demo - Remote Powershell Program Path: %systemroot%\\System32\\WindowsPowerShell\\v1.0\\powershell.exe Parameters: (get-wmiobject win32_Operatingsystem) Results File: PowerShellDemo.txt Open with: notepad.exe Type: Stream If PowerShell is defined as an additional tool, the special characters | and \u0026quot; must be escaped so that they can be used in the parameters. Quotation marks \u0026quot; must be escaped with \\\u0026quot; and pipes | must be escaped with ^|. If the syntax -Command \u0026ldquo;\u0026amp;{}\u0026rdquo; is used, the special character | (pipe) does not have to be escaped.\n- ipconfig ^| Select-String -Pattern \\\u0026#34;IPv4 address\\\u0026#34; (escape required) - -Command \u0026#34;\u0026amp;{ipconfig | Select-String -Pattern \\\u0026#34;IPv4 address\\\u0026#34;}\u0026#34; (No escape of the pipe required) ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap allows you to execute certain additional tools when performing a Windows system inventory scan.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAn example of such an additional tool is the \u003cem\u003eSysteminfo.exe\u003c/em\u003e application. Docusnap will start \u003cem\u003eSysteminfo.exe\u003c/em\u003e after using the defined arguments after completion of the inventory scan. The result data returned by the tool will be saved in the database.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo add a desired tool, click the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button. You can choose the name freely. The name you specify will also be used as the results file name. Enter the name and path of the executable in the \u003cem\u003eProgram Path\u003c/em\u003e field or select it by clicking the \u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/management/additional-tools/docusnap-open-path.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Open Path\" title=\"Docusnap Open Path\"\u003e button. The parameters you specified will be provided to the tool upon execution. Indicate optional parameters by square brackets (\u0026quot;[ ]\u0026quot;). If no parameters are required, at least one blank space must be entered in order for the additional tool to be saved.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/additional-tools/","title":"Additional Tools"},{"content":"The Analysis tab is displayed, if the selected object in the tree view is used in a Diagram or is defined as a starting object for an IT Correlation .\nOn this tab, the IT Correlations and Diagrams are displayed. In the window on the right side in addition to the IT Correlations all diagrams of this object are listed. Click on the desired entry to switch between the graphics.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eAnalysis\u003c/em\u003e tab is displayed, if the selected object in the tree view is used in a \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/diagrams/\" title=\"Diagram\"\u003eDiagram \u003c/a\u003e or is defined as a starting object for an \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/it-correlation/\" title=\"IT Correlation\"\u003eIT Correlation \u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/analysis/docusnap-data-explorer-analysis.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Data-Explorer-Analysis \" title=\"Docusnap-Data-Explorer-Analysis\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOn this tab, the \u003cem\u003eIT Correlations\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eDiagrams\u003c/em\u003e are displayed. In the window on the right side in addition to the \u003cem\u003eIT Correlations\u003c/em\u003e all diagrams of this object are listed. Click on the desired entry to switch between the graphics.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/analysis/","title":"Analysis"},{"content":"Information technology is used throughout every company to support business processes. There are virtually no business activities which are not supported by IT. To detect business threats and risks as quickly and early as possible, every company needs IT documentation which is capable of presenting the connections between business processes and IT in a clear and transparent way. This makes it possible to answer questions such as which business processes depend on which software, hardware or network connection, or which processes are trivial or vital for the company. Docusnap enables users to completely map out the interrelations between organizational units and the associated processes, right up to the physical location. This helps them to understand at any stage which concrete effects IT changes or failures have on business processes. Docusnap’s business integration allows for the connections and dependencies between business processes, IT services and the required IT systems to be presented in a clear and transparent way. Users can therefore quickly and easily analyze business-critical risks and weaknesses which go unnoticed in efforts to support business processes, and specifically counteract them.\nDocusnap offers complete freedom when it comes to graphical representations. For example, on a technical level, processes, organizational units and business services can be captured, whereas from an IT point of view there is the option of representing IT services, the infrastructure as well as facility components. It is possible to expand and add to any definitions.\nDocusnap provides the framework for capturing and visualizing various elements, which gives the option of introducing new levels and defining groups (e.g. for clusters). Additional attributes such as SLAs, recovery times, priority etc. can be added to any element.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eInformation technology is used throughout every company to support business processes. There are virtually no business activities which are not supported by IT. To detect business threats and risks as quickly and early as possible, every company needs IT documentation which is capable of presenting the connections between business processes and IT in a clear and transparent way. This makes it possible to answer questions such as which business processes depend on which software, hardware or network connection, or which processes are trivial or vital for the company. Docusnap enables users to completely map out the interrelations between organizational units and the associated processes, right up to the physical location. This helps them to understand at any stage which concrete effects IT changes or failures have on business processes. Docusnap’s business integration allows for the connections and dependencies between business processes, IT services and the required IT systems to be presented in a clear and transparent way. Users can therefore quickly and easily analyze business-critical risks and weaknesses which go unnoticed in efforts to support business processes, and specifically counteract them.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/business-structures/","title":"Business Structures"},{"content":"The color picker control is used to select a color. For example, the color of the cable to the patch panels is defined by this control.\nSpecific Properties of Color Picker Fieldname Specifies the linked column in the respective table of the current Docusnap database. The meta object linked with the data entry screen determines which table will be used. For the color picker, the corresponding target column in the database must always have the Long data type, so the color code can be saved. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003ecolor picker\u003c/em\u003e control is used to select a color. For example, the color of the cable to the patch panels is defined by this control.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003e\u003c/th\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003eSpecific Properties of Color Picker\u003c/th\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eFieldname\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eSpecifies the linked column in the respective table of the current Docusnap \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/\" title=\"database\"\u003edatabase\u003c/a\u003e. The \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/\" title=\"meta object\"\u003emeta object\u003c/a\u003e linked with the data entry screen determines which table will be used. For the color picker, the corresponding target column in the database must always have the Long data type, so the color code can be saved.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/tbody\u003e\n\u003c/table\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/color-picker/","title":"Color Picker"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying Internet Information Service (IIS) systems, click the IIS button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps) the IIS step is displayed.\nTo inventory the desired IIS servers, click the New button and specify the name of the respective server. You can also enter alternative credentials to those in the Authentication step. After you have saved your entry, Docusnap will check whether this server belongs to the domain you specified. If yes, the server will be added to the list at the top of the window, and the Next button becomes active. If the specified server name is not correct, the button remains grayed out. After the desired systems have been added to the table of IIS servers, you can use the checkbox next to each system to specify whether it is to be included in the inventory scan or not.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying Internet Information Service (IIS) systems, click the \u003cem\u003eIIS\u003c/em\u003e button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e) the \u003cem\u003eIIS\u003c/em\u003e step is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/internet-information-service/docusnap-inventory-iis.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory IIS\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory IIS\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo inventory the desired IIS servers, click the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button and specify the name of the respective server. You can also enter alternative credentials to those in the \u003cem\u003eAuthentication\u003c/em\u003e step. After you have saved your entry, Docusnap will check whether this server belongs to the domain you specified. If yes, the server will be added to the list at the top of the window, and the \u003cem\u003eNext\u003c/em\u003e button becomes active. If the specified server name is not correct, the button remains grayed out. After the desired systems have been added to the table of IIS servers, you can use the checkbox next to each system to specify whether it is to be included in the inventory scan or not.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/internet-information-service/","title":"Internet Information Service"},{"content":"Physical infrastructure information can be imported via CSV import. The general requirements for the CSV file are listed below.\nThe character ; (semicolon) is used as a separator. A heading is always expected in the first line. This row will not be considered during the import. The names of the columns are not relevant. Docusnap assigns the names of the entries to the dependent objects to import the CSV data. ID\u0026rsquo;s cannot be used. If data records to be imported are not complete or cannot be assigned, they are imported in the Import dialog and can be manually adjusted there. If data records already exist, duplicates are created. The order of the columns must be observed. This is specified in the individual points. Sites Site name Site Type Parent Site (empty if at the top of the hierarchy) Site Elements Site Element Name Site Site Element Type Racks Rack Name Rack Type Site Rack Elements Rack Element Name Rack Name Rack Element Type Orientation (front or back) (front = 1 or True, back = 0 or False) Cable Connections To be able to import several ports per cable connection, one line must be used per plug. Thus two lines are required for the cabling of a network socket port with a patch panel port.\nBased on the name of the connection, an assignment of start port and destination port is implemented. The number is required if a port has several connection options, e.g. TERA wiring.\nEntries that could not be inserted correctly are marked with a red X and have to be adjusted manually. With click on the OK button all connections are inserted.\nConnection Name (related ports are specified by the connection name) Cable Type Cable Color (specified by RGB value 255-255-255) (If the field is blank, the default color of the cable is used) Element (element to be wired) Port (port to be wired) Front (Front or Back) (Front = 1 or True, Rear = 0 or False) Number (Relevant for cabling with multiple connections. Specifies the position of the connection at the plug. If the plug has only one port, a \u0026ldquo;1\u0026rdquo; is always entered) Destination (specify at which end of the wiring this port is) (Start = 0 and End = 1) Relevant if there are several plugs on one side of the connection, e.g. TERA cabling Corrupt entries in the CSV file are marked with a red X. To get a complete import here, these entries have to be edited.\nCable Connections Export With the help of the Export Plugs function it is possible to export a finished CSV file with the cabling of the system. The Export function is available for all elements where connections can be documented.\nThe existing connections can be deleted during export. This way the connections can be edited in the exported CSV file and then imported again.\nIf the checkbox is activated, these connections are deleted from the database. If the CSV file is subsequently lost, the connections must be created again. The exported CSV file can then be imported as usual using the Import Cable Connections button.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003ePhysical infrastructure information can be imported via CSV import. The general requirements for the CSV file are listed below.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe character ; (semicolon) is used as a separator.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA heading is always expected in the first line. This row will not be considered during the import.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe names of the columns are not relevant.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDocusnap assigns the names of the entries to the dependent objects to import the CSV data. ID\u0026rsquo;s cannot be used.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIf data records to be imported are not complete or cannot be assigned, they are imported in the Import dialog and can be manually adjusted there.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIf data records already exist, duplicates are created.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe order of the columns must be observed. This is specified in the individual points.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"sites\"\u003eSites\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSite name\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSite Type\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eParent Site (empty if at the top of the hierarchy)\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/physical-infrastructure-csv-import/docusnap-physical-infrastructure-site-csv.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Site-CSV\" title=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Site-CSV\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/physical-infrastructure-csv-import/","title":"Physical Infrastructure - CSV Import"},{"content":"The last step of the License Management wizard presents a summary of all settings specified previously. The changes are only applied to the database when you click the Save button. If you click the Cancel button here, all changes made, including any software groups you might have created, will be discarded.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe last step of the License Management wizard presents a summary of all settings specified previously. The changes are only applied to the database when you click the \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e button. If you click the \u003cem\u003eCancel\u003c/em\u003e button here, all changes made, including any \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/group/\" title=\"software groups\"\u003esoftware groups\u003c/a\u003e you might have created, will be discarded.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/summary/docusnap-license-management-summary.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-License-Management-Summary\" title=\"Docusnap-License-Management-Summary\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/summary/","title":"Summary"},{"content":"In the Active Directory tab, it is possible to customize the scope of the ADS inventory process and the Active Directory data output. The classes, properties and assignments are available when inventorying the Active Directory.\nADS Classes Docusnap provides a number of predefined ADS classes. If required, you can add more classes. To add new items, click the New button. Then, enter the required information and confirm by clicking the Save button. To delete an item, select it and click the Delete button.\nYou can only delete classes that have not been used yet in an inventory scan. You can only change or delete user-defined classes. You need to fill in all text fields when creating a new item. Specify any class name you like. When setting the filter, make sure that it exactly matches the designation used in the Active Directory. If the name and the designation are not identical, it will not be possible to scan the desired information.\nClasses for which the Active checkbox has been ticked will be taken into account when scanning the Active Directory.\nADS Properties On the ADS Properties page of the dialog, you can define attributes. Here again, you can only change or delete user-defined entries.\nThe name of the property must exactly match the designation of that property or attribute in the Active Directory. The selected type must be the same as the property type.\nThe Single Value checkbox indicates whether this property may exist more than once in each class (e.g. e-mail addresses) or whether it exists only once (e.g. a name).\nADS Assignments In the Active Directory, properties or attributes are assigned to the respective classes. An attribute may be assigned to several classes.\nThe assignment is made for the class selected in the list box. All available properties are displayed in the list on the left. The pane on the right contains the properties that have already been assigned.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eActive Directory\u003c/em\u003e tab, it is possible to customize the scope of the ADS inventory process and the Active Directory data output. The classes, properties and assignments are available when inventorying the Active Directory.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"ads-classes\"\u003eADS Classes\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap provides a number of predefined ADS classes. If required, you can add more classes. To add new items, click the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button. Then, enter the required information and confirm by clicking the \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e button. To delete an item, select it and click the \u003cem\u003eDelete\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/active-directory/","title":"Active Directory"},{"content":"The IT Concepts tab displays the document currently selected in the Explorer.\nAt the bottom, information such as the page number of the concept is displayed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eIT Concepts\u003c/em\u003e tab displays the document currently selected in the Explorer.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAt the bottom, information such as the page number of the concept is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/concepts/docusnap-it-concepts-document.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-IT-Concepts-document\" title=\"Docusnap-IT-Concepts-document\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/concepts/","title":"Concepts"},{"content":"For a created licensing the additional information contracts and comments can be added through the wizard.\nContracts are assigned to the created licenses. If comments are created, they are assigned to the software product.\nClick the New button to open the dialog for creating the additional Information. After the contract or the comment has been saved, you can switch to the Attachments tab to attach documents. Subsequently, the dialog is closed by clicking the Close button.\nTo edit an existing contract or comment, select the contract or comment and click on the Edit Contract or Edit Comment button to open the dialog for editing.\nThe created contracts and comments are displayed in the Additional Information tab of the respective licensing in the tree view and can be edited. In addition, the contracts and comments are displayed in the tree under the respective heading.\nBy clicking on the Finish button the License Management wizard closes.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eFor a created licensing the additional information contracts and comments can be added through the wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eContracts are assigned to the created licenses. If comments are created, they are assigned to the software product.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button to open the dialog for creating the additional Information. After the contract or the comment has been saved, you can switch to the \u003cem\u003eAttachments\u003c/em\u003e tab to attach documents. Subsequently, the dialog is closed by clicking the \u003cem\u003eClose\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/license-management/license-management-wizard/contracts-and-comments/","title":"Contracts and Comments"},{"content":"Using the IT Assets functionality, it is possible to inventory systems which cannot be scanned automatically by Docusnap. This can be done manually or by data import.\nDocusnap comes with different predefined IT asset types. They can be extended and added to, as required, by creating additional types or classes with minimum effort. Docusnap generates the required data entry screens automatically.\nThe different IT assets can be embedded into concepts, diagrams, reports, and maps.\nIf you create your own IT asset classes, it is recommended that you only use properties of type Text as the display field. Other types can be displayed in the tree, but if an IT asset is to be included for example in maps, no other type than text is supported and otherwise an empty entry is displayed. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eUsing the IT Assets functionality, it is possible to inventory systems which cannot be scanned automatically by Docusnap. This can be done manually or by \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/data-import/\" title=\"data import\"\u003edata import\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap comes with different predefined IT asset types. They can be extended and added to, as required, by creating additional types or classes with minimum effort. Docusnap generates the required data entry screens automatically.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe different IT assets can be embedded into concepts, diagrams, reports, and maps.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-assets/","title":"IT Assets"},{"content":"In order to migrate inventory data of the physical infrastructure from older Docusnap versions a migration assistant is available. The wizard is started as soon as the editor is opened.\nThe request for migration is made only once and for all companies in the database. If the conversion is rejected, the dialog does not appear again.\nThe migration of the existing physical infrastructure is only partially automated, since information was not defined in this level of detail in the previous physical infrastructure. For example, patch panels were connected to a switch without detailed port information. The assignments within a rack cannot be transferred either. The corresponding elements are placed in the rack, but must be moved to the desired position by the user.\nThe previous tables and columns and their contents are retained after the migration.\ntRacks tNetworkSocket tNetworkSocketPort tHosts.RackID tHosts.RackStartHeightUnits tHosts.RackNumberOfHeightUnits Transfer Data The following steps are performed in the migration wizard:\nRacks are converted. Name and site will be filled in automatically. A rack type must be manually assigned to the existing rack. Systems and assets are converted System name, rack and site are assigned automatically You may have to make manual adjustments to the system type. Systems assigned to a rack must be manually positioned in the rack.\nAn automatic placement on the corresponding height units does not take place! Multiple selection of the system type is possible via the Assign System Type button Network sockets are converted The name is transferred. The network socket type is determined automatically if possible. A manual correction may be necessary here. The site must be assigned if necessary. Patch panels are converted Name and site are automatically transferred if possible. A patch panel type must be entered manually. Patch panels assigned to racks are only assigned to the corresponding rack.\nAn automatic placement on the corresponding height units does not take place. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn order to migrate inventory data of the physical infrastructure from older Docusnap versions a migration assistant is available. The wizard is started as soon as the editor is opened.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/migration-wizard/docusnap-physical-infrastructure-migration.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Migration\" title=\"Docusnap-Physical-Infrastructure-Migration\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe request for migration is made only once and for all companies in the database. If the conversion is rejected, the dialog does not appear again.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe migration of the existing physical infrastructure is only partially automated, since information was not defined in this level of detail in the previous physical infrastructure. For example, patch panels were connected to a switch without detailed port information. The assignments within a rack cannot be transferred either. The corresponding elements are placed in the rack, but must be moved to the desired position by the user.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/physical-infrastructure/migration-wizard/","title":"Migration Wizard"},{"content":"Rich text boxes enable the user to enter and edit formatted text at runtime. Thus, the user can benefit from all format options that have been provided by Microsoft for the corresponding text entry fields. Similar to a mini-word processor, users can apply simple formatting to the text as well as paste graphics, tables, photos and other objects simply by using copy \u0026amp; paste. Images can also be inserted via the button , this button is activated at the Richtextbox. Elements copied from another applications (or other parts of Docusnap) can be pasted at the current cursor position by pressing the \u0026lt;Ctrl\u0026gt;+\u0026lt;V\u0026gt; hotkey or by clicking the corresponding button on the toolbar, provided that this functionality is supported by the rich text box. Thus, rich text boxes are particularly suitable to enter comprehensive passages of text such as notes, comments, or they can simply be used as a means to enter formatted text.\nWhen using rich text boxes, please note that the formatting applied to the text will be saved in the database as strings. When creating database fields that save formatted text, make sure that they are large enough for this purpose. Example: A length of nvarchar(255) will be sufficient in only a few cases, because this character count will be easily exceeded by the formatting instructions that add to the text itself. For this reason, it is a good idea to use rich text box controls primarily in connection with database fields of the MEMO or TEXT type. In addition to the global properties, rich text box controls have the properties shown in the table below.\nSpecific Properties of Rich Text Box Controls Scrollbars Determines if scroll bars will be displayed and if so, which type. In principle, navigation within a rich text box control is also possible without scroll bars by using the keyboard or the mouse. However, scroll bars significantly facilitate this process. ShowAlignment Determines whether the controls for text alignment will be shown or not. ShowCopyPasteCut Determines whether the controls for copying, pasting and cutting text will be shown or not. ShowFontSelection Determines whether the controls for basic font formatting will be shown or not. ShowPasteImage Determines whether the control for inserting images will be shown or not. ShowTextFormats Determines whether the controls for text formatting will be shown or not. ShowUndoRedo Determines whether the Undo and Redo controls will be shown or not. If a rich text box control is used to enter formatted text, it is also necessary to define a Docusnap rich text box in the corresponding position of the associated reports. If you do not modify the affected reports accordingly and apply a normal Docusnap text box in the reports instead, the full content of the rich text box control, including the formatting instructions in plain text, will be shown in this field. However, the reverse does not present any problems. A rich text box control can easily show the content of normal text boxes. Please note that, in this case, when editing plain text using a rich text box control, the content will automatically be assigned formatting instructions. This might lead to an erroneous presentation of the modified text when displayed in normal text boxes. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eRich text boxes enable the user to enter and edit formatted text at runtime. Thus, the user can benefit from all format options that have been provided by Microsoft for the corresponding text entry fields. Similar to a mini-word processor, users can apply simple formatting to the text as well as paste graphics, tables, photos and other objects simply by using copy \u0026amp; paste. Images can also be inserted via the button \u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/richtextbox/docusnap-editor-rich-text-image.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Editor-Rich-Text-Image\" title=\"Docusnap-Editor-Rich-Text-Image\"\u003e, this button is activated at the Richtextbox. Elements copied from another applications (or other parts of Docusnap) can be pasted at the current cursor position by pressing the \u003cem\u003e\u0026lt;Ctrl\u0026gt;+\u0026lt;V\u0026gt;\u003c/em\u003e hotkey or by clicking the corresponding button on the toolbar, provided that this functionality is supported by the rich text box. Thus, rich text boxes are particularly suitable to enter comprehensive passages of text such as notes, comments, or they can simply be used as a means to enter formatted text.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/richtextbox/","title":"Richtextbox"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying SharePoint servers, click the Share Point button. After you have selected a company and a domain and entered your credentials (see: Basic Steps) the SharePoint step is displayed.\nAlong with a scan of the SharePoint servers, it is possible to retrieve the job history. If you tick the Inventory Job History checkbox, only the most recent entries will be retrieved. You can specify the number of entries to be saved in the Entries field.\nThere are two ways to scan SharePoint servers: Either you use global credentials for login. In this case, only the name of the SharePoint server is required for the scanning process. Or you log in using specific credentials. For this purpose, you need to enable the Server Authentication checkbox. This allows you to enter the user and password information.\nAfter adding the desired systems to the SharePoint Server table, you can use the checkbox next to each system to specify whether it is to be included in the inventory scan or not. The Next button will only be enabled once you have specified a SharePoint server. Then, you can continue with the inventory process.\nAn inventory of the SharePoint servers forms the basis for a subsequent analysis of the SharePoint permissions (see: IT Security).\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying SharePoint servers, click the \u003cem\u003eShare Point\u003c/em\u003e button. After you have selected a company and a domain and entered your credentials (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e) the \u003cem\u003eSharePoint\u003c/em\u003e step is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/sharepoint/docusnap-inventory-sharepoint.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Sharepoint\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Sharepoint\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlong with a scan of the SharePoint servers, it is possible to retrieve the job history. If you tick the \u003cem\u003eInventory Job History\u003c/em\u003e checkbox, only the most recent entries will be retrieved. You can specify the number of entries to be saved in the \u003cem\u003eEntries\u003c/em\u003e field.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/sharepoint/","title":"SharePoint"},{"content":"The Assignment Criteria can automatically be used to assign systems to sites during the inventory process.\nVarious options are provided, which can be used for the assignment. The systems can be assigned by the system name, the domain, the system type, the ADS container, or the length of the system names. To assign systems by IP range, select the Network field and specify the IP range in CIDR notation. For example, if you want to create an assignment criteria for systems from the IP range 172.31.251.1 to 172.31.251.254, it is specified with the notation 172.31.251.0/24. The suffix /24 indicates the number of 1-bits in the subnet mask.\nThe conditions can be grouped and linked with either And or Or.\nClick the button to add another row. Click the button to delete the current row.\nOperator In the column Operator you can choose how the specified value will be evaluated, e.g. Contains, Begins with.\nContains: The specified condition must contain the system name, the domain etc. Not Contains: The specified condition may not contain the system name, the domain etc. Begins with: The system name, domain, etc. must begin with the specified value. Ends with: The system name, domain, etc. must end with the specified value. =: The system name, domain, etc. must match the specified value. \u0026lt;\u0026gt;: The system name, domain, etc. may not match the specified value. And/Or Once several conditions are specified, select in the And/Or column whether the conditions should be linked with And or Or. If the terms are linked with And, then all conditions have to match the system. If the conditions are linked with Or, only one of the terms has to match the system.\nGrouping Use grouping to nest the conditions as needed. For example two terms can be linked with Or and then be extended with And to include another condition. Click the checkbox to select the conditions, then click the button to group the selected entries to one condition. Only conditions listed one below the other can be grouped. The button marks the start of the group. Click the button to revoke the grouping. It is possible to organize the grouping in several levels. Select more than one group and click on the button to group them into one condition.\nClick Save to apply the settings.\nApply Assignment Criteria In order to choose the assignment criteria for the respective sites, the management must be closed and the selection of all wizards must be opened in the main area of Docusnap in the inventory via the button All wizards. Clicking on the System Assignment button opens the dialog where the assignment criteria for the respective sites are assigned. Subsequently, these criteria are then taken into account during inventory and the systems are automatically assigned to the appropriate sites. If no Assignment Criteria are met, no assignment is carried out.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eAssignment Criteria\u003c/em\u003e can automatically be used to assign systems to sites during the inventory process.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVarious options are provided, which can be used for the assignment. The systems can be assigned by the system name, the domain, the system type, the ADS container, or the length of the system names. To assign systems by IP range, select the \u003cem\u003eNetwork\u003c/em\u003e field and specify the IP range in CIDR notation. For example, if you want to create an assignment criteria for systems from the IP range 172.31.251.1 to 172.31.251.254, it is specified with the notation 172.31.251.0/24. The suffix \u003cem\u003e/24\u003c/em\u003e indicates the number of 1-bits in the subnet mask.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/assignment-criteria/","title":"Assignment Criteria"},{"content":"IT Correlations are used to visualize and evaluate IT relationships between IT objects and can be accessed by using the drill-down function.\nThe correlations between the IT objects are defined in Docusnap Management. To identify the connection between two objects, the IT Correlation is defined between selected values ​​of these objects. Then the possible IT Correlations are displayed, if matching objects are found for the definition.\nThe IT Correlations are displayed in Docusnap in the Analysis tab if, for the selected object, a correlation is found. From this object, the user can start the evaluation of any or all IT Correlations.\nFor example, a correlation between the inventory workstations and virtual machines in the VMware, or between the Active Directory users and mailboxes on the Exchange server, are defined. Several definitions of IT Correlations are already included in Docusnap.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eIT Correlations\u003c/em\u003e are used to visualize and evaluate IT relationships between IT objects and can be accessed by using the drill-down function.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe correlations between the IT objects are defined in Docusnap Management. To identify the connection between two objects, the \u003cem\u003eIT Correlation\u003c/em\u003e is defined between selected values ​​of these objects. Then the possible \u003cem\u003eIT Correlations\u003c/em\u003e are displayed, if matching objects are found for the definition.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eIT Correlations\u003c/em\u003e are displayed in Docusnap in the \u003cem\u003eAnalysis\u003c/em\u003e tab if, for the selected object, a correlation is found. From this object, the user can start the evaluation of any or all \u003cem\u003eIT Correlations\u003c/em\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/it-correlation/","title":"IT Correlation"},{"content":"If the result of an additional tool is selected in the Data Explorer, this result is displayed in the Output tab.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIf the result of an additional tool is selected in the Data Explorer, this result is displayed in the \u003cem\u003eOutput\u003c/em\u003e tab.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/output/docusnap-data-explorer-output-additional-tools.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Data-Explorer-Output-Additional-Tools\" title=\"Docusnap-Data-Explorer-Output-Additional-Tools\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/introduction/user-interface/main-window/output/","title":"Output"},{"content":"You can use a combo boxes, to select one value from a list of allowed values. If a list has many items or for selecting a value the data from multiple columns are relevant, a selection grid can be used. In the selection grid several columns can be displayed and it is possible to filter the list.\nThe table below lists all the specific properties of the selection grid.\nSpecific Properties of Selection Grid Controls Fieldname Specifies the linked column in the respective table of the current Docusnap database. The meta object linked with the data entry screen determines which table will be used. The corresponding target column in the database must match for a selection grid with the primary key of the list. SourceType This property specifies the type of data source to be used for the selection grid. You can either use database tables or the Docusnap reference values. SourceValue Depending on the selected SourceType, enter either the name of the corresponding database table or the identifier of the desired reference value for this property. Icons For the selection grid, an icon can be selected to be displayed in the data entry screen. If desired custom icons can be defined for different types. For example, for each system type (workstation, server, etc.) the appropriate icon. Sorted This option sorts the entries alphabetically according to the first column. If this option is not active, views will use the sorting specified in the statement, and tables will display the data in the order in which it was inserted into the table. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eYou can use a \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/combobox/\" title=\"combo boxes\"\u003ecombo boxes\u003c/a\u003e, to select one value from a list of allowed values. If a list has many items or for selecting a value the data from multiple columns are relevant, a selection grid can be used. In the selection grid several columns can be displayed and it is possible to filter the list.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe table below lists all the specific properties of the selection grid.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003e\u003c/th\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003eSpecific Properties of Selection Grid Controls\u003c/th\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eFieldname\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eSpecifies the linked column in the respective table of the current Docusnap \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/\" title=\"database\"\u003edatabase\u003c/a\u003e. The \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/meta-objects/\" title=\"meta object\"\u003emeta object\u003c/a\u003e linked with the data entry screen determines which table will be used. The corresponding target column in the database must match for a selection grid with the primary key of the list.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eSourceType\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eThis property specifies the type of data source to be used for the selection grid. You can either use \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/\" title=\"database tables\"\u003edatabase tables\u003c/a\u003e or the Docusnap reference values.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eSourceValue\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eDepending on the selected SourceType, enter either the name of the corresponding \u003ca href=\"/en/configuration-manual/database-structures/\" title=\"database table\"\u003edatabase table\u003c/a\u003e or the identifier of the desired reference value for this property.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eIcons\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eFor the selection grid, an icon can be selected to be displayed in the data entry screen. If desired custom icons can be defined for different types. For example, for each system type (workstation, server, etc.) the appropriate icon.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eSorted\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eThis option sorts the entries alphabetically according to the first column. If this option is not active, views will use the sorting specified in the statement, and tables will display the data in the order in which it was inserted into the table.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/tbody\u003e\n\u003c/table\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/selection-grid/","title":"Selection Grid"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying your SQL servers, click the *SQL Server button on the Inventory ribbon. The SQL Server step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain and entered your credentials (see: Basic Steps).\nThere are two ways to identify SQL servers:\nSearching for SQL Servers Automatically When you click the Start Search button, Docusnap will attempt to identify the SQL servers in your network. If SQL servers have been found, they will be listed in the table.\nEntering an SQL Server Manually In addition to an automatic search for SQL servers, you can specify a single SQL server in Docusnap manually. Click the New button and specify the system to be scanned subsequently.\nIn addition to the SQL server name, and the name of the instance if required, a dedicated port can also be specified for the inventory process. The port is separated by a comma \u0026ldquo;,\u0026rdquo;.\nThe following icons indicate the access rights to an SQL server:\nThe SQL server can be scanned.\nThe server can only be scanned to a limited extent. In order to completely scan the server, you need to enter valid SQL authentication data manually.\nThe server cannot be scanned because you do not have the required permissions. In order to scan this server, you need to enter valid SQL authentication data manually.\nWhen the connection to a SQL server is successful, it can be defined individually which databases are to be inventoried. Click the Exclude Databases button to list all databases of the SQL server. To exclude databases from the inventory, check the checkbox to this database.\nUsing the Advanced button the following options for the inventory can be established.\nUsing the Scan Tables and Scan Columns, you can specify the scope of the inventory scan. To determine the procedures to be scanned, you can select Scan Custom Procedures* and Scan System Procedures. Using the Scan Procedure Source Code option, you can specify whether the procedure source code will be scanned as well. The Exclude system databases option allows to exclude the system databases from the inventory. During the scan of the SQL servers, the backup history is retrieved. If you tick the Limit Backup History checkbox, only the most recent entries will be retrieved. You can specify the number of entries to be saved in the Entries field.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying your SQL servers, click the *SQL Server button on the Inventory ribbon. The SQL Server step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain and entered your credentials (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/sql-server/docusnap-inventory-sql-server.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory SQL Server\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThere are two ways to identify SQL servers:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"searching-for-sql-servers-automatically\"\u003eSearching for SQL Servers Automatically\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you click the \u003cem\u003eStart Search\u003c/em\u003e button, Docusnap will attempt to identify the SQL servers in your network. If SQL servers have been found, they will be listed in the table.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/sql-server/","title":"SQL Server"},{"content":"For the AWS inventory, the region to be inventoried must be selected. If the required region is missing, it can be extended using the AWS Regions tab.\nThe name must correspond to the entry in the AWS, the English Text and German Text are freely selectable.\nThe English Text is then displayed in the wizard. If the language is set to German, the German Text is displayed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eFor the AWS inventory, the region to be inventoried must be selected. If the required region is missing, it can be extended using the AWS Regions tab.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe name must correspond to the entry in the AWS, the \u003cem\u003eEnglish Text\u003c/em\u003e and \u003cem\u003eGerman Text\u003c/em\u003e are freely selectable.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eEnglish Text\u003c/em\u003e is then displayed in the wizard. If the language is set to German, the \u003cem\u003eGerman Text\u003c/em\u003e is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/management/aws-regions/docusnap-management-aws-region.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Management AWS Region\" title=\"Docusnap Management AWS Region\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/aws-regions/","title":"AWS Regions"},{"content":"The server component of Docusnap allows you to fully automate processes, such as creating an inventory or the associated documentation. This section explains the underlying concept and the configuration of Docusnap Server.\nDocusnap To create, process or monitor jobs, you will use the Docusnap application. The Scheduling step is available in the wizards (see Scheduling). In the Scheduling step, you can schedule the automated execution of the current inventory or documentation job for later or repeated execution. The jobs will be saved in the Docusnap database and are immediately available for execution by the Docusnap Server.\nThe areas Discovery and All Jobs allow you to edit, monitor, delete and, if necessary, start the scheduled jobs (see Job Management).\nDocusnap Server The Docusnap Server is installed as a Windows service and is therefore the central element for the timed execution of scheduled jobs. The Docusnap Server can be configured using the Configuration wizard in Docusnap. The Docusnap server can also be configured during the first start Docusnap. The configuration wizard can also be launched from the button in the titel bar during operation.\nAs already described previously, the jobs are configured, scheduled and saved in the Docusnap database. The jobs will be loaded by the Docusnap Server upon startup or during normal operation and executed as scheduled.\nBy default, the Docusnap Server service will be installed using the local system account. At this point, make sure that the specified account has sufficient access rights to the SQL Server, since otherwise, the Docusnap Server service cannot be started. The Docusnap Server can only be used, if a SQL Server database is selected. The use of the local database (Microsoft Server Express LocalDB) is not supported. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe server component of Docusnap allows you to fully automate processes, such as creating an inventory or the associated documentation. This section explains the underlying concept and the configuration of Docusnap Server.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/docusnap-server/docusnap-server-overview-graph.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Server-Overview-Graph\" title=\"Docusnap-Server-Overview-Graph\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"docusnap\"\u003eDocusnap\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo create, process or monitor jobs, you will use the Docusnap application. The Scheduling step is available in the wizards (see \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/introduction/basics-wizards/scheduling/\" title=\"Scheduling\"\u003eScheduling\u003c/a\u003e). In the Scheduling step, you can schedule the automated execution of the current inventory or documentation job for later or repeated execution. The jobs will be saved in the Docusnap database and are immediately available for execution by the Docusnap Server.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/docusnap-server/","title":"Docusnap Server"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying your Oracle databases, click the Oracle button. The Oracle step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps).\nEnter the name of the Oracle server in the Server field to inventory the Oracle databases. The service name of the connection must be entered into the Service Name field. The port 1521 is given by default and can be changed in the Port field when needed.\nIf global credentials should not be used for the inventory, then alternative credentials can be entered. For this purpose, you need to enable the Server Authentication checkbox. This allows you to enter the user and password information.\nUse the Include System Schema checkbox to define, if the data of the system schema should inventoried too.\nAfter adding the desired systems to the List of Servers overview, you can use the checkbox next to each system to specify whether it is to be included in the inventory scan or not. The Next button will only be enabled once you have specified an Oracle server. Then, you can continue with the inventory process.\nScript for creating a user for inventory To inventory an Oracle databases an Oracle user with \u0026ldquo;create session\u0026rdquo; and \u0026ldquo;select any dictionary\u0026rdquo; rights is required. With the following script a user can be created who can read the data dictionary, but has no access to the user data of the database. This script must be run against the Oracle database you want to inventory, use e.g. SQL*Plus or SQL Developer. This user can then be used in Docusnap Wizard for Oracle Inventory.\naccept l_username char format a30 prompt \u0026#39;username: \u0026#39; accept l_password char format a30 prompt \u0026#39;password: \u0026#39; create user \u0026amp;l_username identified by \u0026amp;l_password; grant create session,select any dictionary to \u0026amp;l_username; SQL*Plus\nSQL Developer\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying your Oracle databases, click the \u003cem\u003eOracle\u003c/em\u003e button. The Oracle step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/oracle/docusnap-inventory-oracle.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Oracle\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Oracle\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEnter the name of the \u003cem\u003eOracle\u003c/em\u003e server in the \u003cem\u003eServer\u003c/em\u003e field to inventory the Oracle databases. The service name of the connection must be entered into the \u003cem\u003eService Name\u003c/em\u003e field. The port 1521 is given by default and can be changed in the \u003cem\u003ePort\u003c/em\u003e field when needed.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/oracle/","title":"Oracle"},{"content":"If only one value is allowed to be selected and the data to be selected is in a recursive table, then the Selection TreeView should be used. An example of recursive data is the sites in the tSites table. In this table, the ParentID column defines which site is the parent site. For a site with no parent, the ParentID column is -1. The Selection TreeView then lists the data as a tree structure to provide a more organized view of the data.\nThe table below lists all the specific properties of the Selection TreeView.\nSpecific Properties of Selection TreeView Controls Fieldname Specifies the linked column in the respective table of the current Docusnap database. The meta object linked with the data entry screen determines which table will be used. The corresponding target column in the database must match for a Selection TreeView with the primary key of the list. SourceType This property specifies the type of data source to be used for the selection grid. You can either use database tables or the Docusnap reference values. For initial values there are no recursions, so in most cases a database table is used. For initial values the selection grid is more suitable. SourceValue Depending on the selected SourceType, enter either the name of the corresponding database table or the identifier of the desired reference value for this property. Icons For the Selection TreeView, an icon can be selected to be displayed in the data entry screen. If desired custom icons can be defined for different types. For example, for each system type (workstation, server, etc.) the appropriate icon. ReferenceRecursionField Here you can specify the existing recursion field to display the data of the recursive table as a tree structure. It is not necessary to use a recursion field. In this case the data is displayed in a flat list. However, the selection grid would be better suited to display data that does not have a recursion, because the selection grid also offers a filter and additional columns can be displayed. Sorted This option sorts the entries alphabetically according to the first column. If this option is not active, views will use the sorting specified in the statement, and tables will display the data in the order in which it was inserted into the table. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIf only one value is allowed to be selected and the data to be selected is in a recursive table, then the \u003cem\u003eSelection TreeView\u003c/em\u003e should be used. An example of recursive data is the sites in the \u003cem\u003etSites\u003c/em\u003e table. In this table, the \u003cem\u003eParentID\u003c/em\u003e column defines which site is the parent site. For a site with no parent, the \u003cem\u003eParentID\u003c/em\u003e column is -1. The \u003cem\u003eSelection TreeView\u003c/em\u003e then lists the data as a tree structure to provide a more organized view of the data.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/selection-treeview/","title":"Selection TreeView"},{"content":"Attachments can be added to each meta object which has a data entry screen.\nIt is recommended to add a separate tab where the Attachment control can be inserted.\nFor the Attachment control, you must create a user-defined table in which the attachments will be saved.\nSpecific Properties of Attachments BinaryField Indicates the field in the database table where the file attachment will be saved. CheckoutPathField Indicates the field in the database table where the path for checking out the file attachment will be saved. CheckoutStateField Indicates the field in the database table where the checkout status of the file attachment will be saved. CheckoutUserField Indicates the field in the database table where the user who checked out a file attachment will be saved. DescriptionField Indicates the field in the database table where the description of the file attachment will be saved. DisplayName Indicates the name used in the navigation. Can also be left blank. FilenameField Indicates the field in the database table where the file name of the file attachment will be saved. ForeignField Indicates the field in the database table where the foreign key of the file attachment will be saved. ForeignTableField Indicates the field in the database table where the name of the table to which the file attachment belongs will be saved. NameField Indicates the field in the database table where the name of the file attachment will be saved. PrimaryField Indicates the field in the database table where the primary key of the file attachment will be saved. SizeField Indicates the field in the database table where the file size of the file attachment will be saved. Tablename Indicates the database table where the file attachments will be saved. The user-defined table must contain fields that match the fields of this database table.\nThese fields can then be assigned to the properties of the Attachment control.\nAdding Attachments There are two ways to add attachments.\nClick the New button on the Attachments tab to enable the data entry screen where you can define the attachment. When you click the Choose File button, a dialog opens where you can select the desired file. After you have selected the desired file, the Title text box will automatically be populated with the file name. Optionally, you can enter a description of this attachment. To save the attachment data (file, title, description) in the database, click the Save button. You can also add files to the attachments by drag \u0026amp; drop. Simply drag the desired file into the table on the Attachments tab and drop it there. If you use drag \u0026amp; drop to add a directory or multiple files to the table, the corresponding files, or all the files in the directory, will be added simultaneously. The attachments added by drag \u0026amp; drop will immediately be stored in the database. For each added file, its file name will be used as title. You can change it and then apply your change by clicking the Save button. Opening Attachments To open an attachment in an application, first select the file. Then click the Execute button to open the file in the default application set for this file type in the system.\nEditing Attachments You can edit attachments whenever you want to do so. To edit the file, you must select it. Then, click the Check Out button. The file will be stored in the check out path. Checking out a file prevents the file from being edited by multiple users at the same time, which would introduce inconsistencies. To make the checked-out file available to other users again when you are done with editing, release it by clicking the Check In button. Checking in the modified file saves it back to the database.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eAttachments can be added to each meta object which has a data entry screen.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is recommended to add a separate tab where the \u003cem\u003eAttachment\u003c/em\u003e control can be inserted.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor the \u003cem\u003eAttachment\u003c/em\u003e control, you must create a user-defined table in which the attachments will be saved.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003e\u003c/th\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003eSpecific Properties of Attachments\u003c/th\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eBinaryField\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eIndicates the field in the database table where the file attachment will be saved.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eCheckoutPathField\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eIndicates the field in the database table where the path for checking out the file attachment will be saved.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eCheckoutStateField\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eIndicates the field in the database table where the checkout status of the file attachment will be saved.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eCheckoutUserField\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eIndicates the field in the database table where the user who checked out a file attachment will be saved.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eDescriptionField\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eIndicates the field in the database table where the description of the file attachment will be saved.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eDisplayName\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eIndicates the name used in the navigation. Can also be left blank.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eFilenameField\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eIndicates the field in the database table where the file name of the file attachment will be saved.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eForeignField\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eIndicates the field in the database table where the foreign key of the file attachment will be saved.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eForeignTableField\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eIndicates the field in the database table where the name of the table to which the file attachment belongs will be saved.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eNameField\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eIndicates the field in the database table where the name of the file attachment will be saved.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003ePrimaryField\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eIndicates the field in the database table where the primary key of the file attachment will be saved.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eSizeField\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eIndicates the field in the database table where the file size of the file attachment will be saved.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eTablename\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eIndicates the database table where the file attachments will be saved.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/tbody\u003e\n\u003c/table\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe user-defined table must contain fields that match the fields of this database table.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/attachments/","title":"Attachments"},{"content":"For the inventory of Microsoft Cloud technologies, an app must exist in Microsoft Azure that grants the Docusnap application the necessary permissions. This forms the interface between Docusnap and Azure. The required Azure Apps can also be created in the course of the wizard.\nIn the Azure Apps tab, new apps can be created and existing apps can be edited or deleted, and the properties and permissions granted can be checked.\nFor more information about Azure Apps, see the Azure Apps chapter and its chapters.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eFor the inventory of Microsoft Cloud technologies, an app must exist in Microsoft Azure that grants the Docusnap application the necessary permissions. This forms the interface between Docusnap and Azure. The required Azure Apps can also be created in the course of the wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eAzure Apps\u003c/em\u003e tab, new apps can be created and existing apps can be edited or deleted, and the properties and permissions granted can be checked.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/azure-apps/","title":"Azure Apps"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying Citrix Hypervisor servers, click the Citrix Hypervisor button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps) the Citrix Hypervisor Server step is displayed.\nClick the New button to specify the Citrix Hypervisor server. The Citrix Hypervisor Server text box accepts the name or the IP address of the server.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying Citrix Hypervisor servers, click the \u003cem\u003eCitrix Hypervisor\u003c/em\u003e button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e) the \u003cem\u003eCitrix Hypervisor Server\u003c/em\u003e step is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/citrix-hypervisor/docusnap-inventory-xencenter.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Xencenter\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Xencenter\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button to specify the Citrix Hypervisor server. The \u003cem\u003eCitrix Hypervisor Server\u003c/em\u003e text box accepts the name or the IP address of the server.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/citrix-hypervisor/","title":"Citrix Hypervisor"},{"content":"With Docusnap Connect, Docusnap users can prepare specific data in the Docusnap interface (hierarchical structure), reuse it (concepts) or export it for further use. You can either export the data to an SQL or MySQL database or save it as an XML, CSV or Excel file. Thus, Docusnap Connect partially replaces the creation of a user-defined view in the hierarchical structure. The views displayed in the hierarchical structure can also be used later within the Docusnap concepts.\nPackage Editor The creation and editing of Connect Packages is performed in the Connect area.\nHierarchical Structure The content of the Connect Packages are also displayed in the hierarchical structure below the Connect caption. The data is filtered according to the company.\nSchedule Package Once you configured your packages, you can schedule their export. The data can either be exported immediately or at a later time using the Docusnap Server.\nImport and Export The packages you configured can be exported and then be imported to another Docusnap database.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWith Docusnap Connect, Docusnap users can prepare specific data in the Docusnap interface (hierarchical structure), reuse it (concepts) or export it for further use. You can either export the data to an SQL or MySQL database or save it as an XML, CSV or Excel file. Thus, Docusnap Connect partially replaces the creation of a user-defined view in the hierarchical structure. The views displayed in the hierarchical structure can also be used later within the Docusnap concepts.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/docusnap-connect/","title":"Docusnap Connect"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying the Active Directory service, either click the Network Scan button or the Active Directory button. The Active Directory step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain and entered your credentials (see: Basic Steps).\nUsing the Start Search at filter criterion, you can restrict the AD scan to a specific organizational unit. Click the Select OU button to open a dialog where you can select the desired organizational unit. To display the inventoried objects in the Active Directory structure, the parent structure of the selected organizational units is also inventoried. If you do not enter a filter criterion, Docusnap will inventory the entire Active Directory system.\nIn the Advanced option you can, by enabling the checkbox Scan Structure Permissions, determine whether the permissions for an Active Directory object should be inventoried. It can also be determined whether the sites and the domain structure should also be inventoried.\nThe Analysis in IT Security requires a complete Active Directory inventory of users, groups and computers to be completely correct. Thus you can determine for the Active Directory inventory, that users, groups and computers of all organizational units will be scanned, even if a filter for a specific organizational unit has been defined. Once an organizational unit has been set, the Inventory all Users, Groups and Computers checkbox will be displayed in the Advanced option for this purpose. In addition, you can retrieve group policies. They will then be displayed with the corresponding organizational units or domain. To scan the information for group policy objects, you need to specify the computer where the Group Policy Manager Console (GPMC) is installed. It does not matter whether the GPMC is available on the local system or on a remote system.\nIn the Active Directory Classes group, you can select the Active Directory classes to be included in the scan.\nBitLocker recovery keys stored in Active Directory are included in the Active Directory inventory and are displayed as nodes in the inventory result for the respective computer account. If the BitLocker recovery key should not be a part of the inventory, the BitLockerRecovery class can be excluded. With every Active Directory inventory, the name of domain controller from which the inventory data was scanned is also stored. This domain controller is displayed in the Explorer with the scan date.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying the Active Directory service, either click the \u003cem\u003eNetwork Scan\u003c/em\u003e button or the \u003cem\u003eActive Directory\u003c/em\u003e button. The \u003cem\u003eActive Directory\u003c/em\u003e step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain and entered your credentials (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/active-directory/docusnap-inventory-active-directory.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Active Directory\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Active Directory\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing the \u003cem\u003eStart Search at\u003c/em\u003e filter criterion, you can restrict the AD scan to a specific organizational unit. Click the \u003cem\u003eSelect OU\u003c/em\u003e button to open a dialog where you can select the desired organizational unit. To display the inventoried objects in the Active Directory structure, the parent structure of the selected organizational units is also inventoried. If you do not enter a filter criterion, Docusnap will inventory the entire Active Directory system.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/active-directory/","title":"Active Directory"},{"content":"With the Data Grid multiple entries can be assigned to one element. For example, to one process multiple system can be assigned. The mapping is stored in an additional table, which contains the two primary keys.\nTo create a Data Grid following fields are required:\nSpecific Properties of a Data Grid Control MappingForeignKeyField Here, you can specify the foreign key field of the table to be used to define the relation to the table to be linked. MappingReferenceField Here, you can specify the field in the related table where the selected data from the reference table will be saved. MappingTable Here, you can specify the name of the table that relates both fields to be linked. ReferenceTable Here, you can specify the Name of the table to be displayed in the data grid. This table contains the list of the available items. Icons For the data grid, an icon can be selected to be displayed in the data entry screen. If desired custom icons can be defined for different types. For example, for each system type (workstation, server, etc.) the appropriate icon. UseParentObjectAsFilterID This setting defines whether the variable {FilterID} is replaced with the primary key of the parent object instead of the current object. Sorted This option sorts the entries alphabetically according to the first column. If this option is not active, views will use the sorting specified in the statement, and tables will display the data in the order in which it was inserted into the table. ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWith the Data Grid multiple entries can be assigned to one element. For example, to one process multiple system can be assigned. The mapping is stored in an additional table, which contains the two primary keys.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo create a Data Grid following fields are required:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n  \u003cthead\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003e\u003c/th\u003e\n          \u003cth\u003eSpecific Properties of a Data Grid Control\u003c/th\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/thead\u003e\n  \u003ctbody\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMappingForeignKeyField\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eHere, you can specify the foreign key field of the table to be used to define the relation to the table to be linked.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMappingReferenceField\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eHere, you can specify the field in the related table where the selected data from the reference table will be saved.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMappingTable\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eHere, you can specify the name of the table that relates both fields to be linked.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReferenceTable\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eHere, you can specify the Name of the table to be displayed in the data grid. This table contains the list of the available items.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIcons\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eFor the data grid, an icon can be selected to be displayed in the data entry screen. If desired custom icons can be defined for different types. For example, for each system type (workstation, server, etc.) the appropriate icon.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUseParentObjectAsFilterID\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eThis setting defines whether the variable {FilterID} is replaced with the primary key of the parent object instead of the current object.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n      \u003ctr\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSorted\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/td\u003e\n          \u003ctd\u003eThis option sorts the entries alphabetically according to the first column. If this option is not active, views will use the sorting specified in the statement, and tables will display the data in the order in which it was inserted into the table.\u003c/td\u003e\n      \u003c/tr\u003e\n  \u003c/tbody\u003e\n\u003c/table\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/data-grid/","title":"Data Grid"},{"content":"The new Enterprise Search helps you to search within Docusnap. It does not matter whether only the IP address or MAC address is known or the host name or serial number is searched for. The search term is stored and then the matching results are listed.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe new Enterprise Search helps you to search within Docusnap. It does not matter whether only the IP address or MAC address is known or the host name or serial number is searched for. The search term is stored and then the matching results are listed.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/enterprise-search/","title":"Enterprise Search"},{"content":"Docusnap offers the possibility to import private keys or to create RSA keys for the Linux inventory.\nAs the most secure variant, we recommend creating a private key of type SSH-Ed25519 / AES256-CBC on the Linux system.\nTo create a new key, one of the following commands must be executed on the system. If the package ssh-keygen is not installed, this must be installed via the appropriate package manager. In the case of Ubuntu this would be sudo apt-get install ssh-keygen - before this the command sudo apt update should be executed:\nssh-ed25519 /w aes256-cbc:\nssh-keygen -t ed25519 -Z aes256-cbc ecdsa-sha2-nistp256:\nssh-keygen -t ecdsa -b 256 -m pem ecdsa-sha2-nistp384:\nssh-keygen -t ecdsa -b 384 -m pem ecdsa-sha2-nistp521:\nssh-keygen -t ecdsa -b 521 -m pem ssh-rsa:\nssh-keygen -m PEM -t rsa -b 4096 The passphrase that can be entered is optional, but is subsequently required in Docusnap when assigned! The storage space for the files is freely selectable.\nTwo files are then created in the specified directory - in the example ed25519 and ed25519.pub.\nAfterwards the public key must be transferred from the corresponding .pub file into the file - in the example user root - /root/.ssh/authorized_keys.\nThe file with the private key - ed25519 in the example - must now be transferred to the Docusnap system.\nA new key is added by clicking on the New button. By clicking on the Import Private Key button, this file is selected and imported into Docusnap.\nIf a passphrase is used for the key, it must be entered during the import.\nA name must be specified, this can be chosen as desired. By clicking on the Save button, the key is saved to the database.\nA private key of the type SSH-Ed25519 / AES256-CBC is recommended as the most secure variant.\nThe following key variants are still supported for compatibility reasons:\necdsa-sha2-nistp256 ecdsa-sha2-nistp384 ecdsa-sha2-nistp521 ssh-rsa Alternatively, an RSA key can be created by Docusnap using the Create RSA Key button. The key pair is encrypted using the RSA method. The key used is then encrypted again and stored in the database. A passphrase is not created. When the creation is complete, preview of the key is displayed - this is useful for better identification when using different RSA keys. By clicking the Save button, the RSA key is stored in the database. With the button Export Public Key the public keys can be exported and stored on the Linux systems.\nThe above steps can be repeated at will, for example to import or create keys for the different clients in the Docusnap environment and use them afterwards.\nThe Delete button can be used to remove the selected key from the database.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap offers the possibility to import private keys or to create RSA keys for the Linux inventory.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAs the most secure variant, we recommend creating a private key of type SSH-Ed25519 / AES256-CBC on the Linux system.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo create a new key, one of the following commands must be executed on the system. If the package \u003cem\u003essh-keygen\u003c/em\u003e is not installed, this must be installed via the appropriate package manager. In the case of Ubuntu this would be \u003cem\u003esudo apt-get install ssh-keygen\u003c/em\u003e - before this the command \u003cem\u003esudo apt update\u003c/em\u003e should be executed:\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/private-key-management/","title":"Private Key Management"},{"content":"Introduction The existing inventory technologies do not cover all objects or all desired information of objects that are required for a complete IT documentation. If the required data is available in CSV format as structured text, additional objects can be added via CSV import and existing objects can be extended with additional information.\nThe import can be done interactively once as well as automatically via the integrated scheduling.\nExamples IT assets, document fire extinguishers\nThe fire extinguishers in the server rooms are to be listed in the emergency plan with type, location of maintenance history and the date of the next inspection. This data is already available in Excel format. From Excel, an export is made to CSV format, and via CSV import, new IT assets of the class \u0026ldquo;fire extinguishers\u0026rdquo; are created in Docusnap. Now this data is available for the IT documentation.\nTables, Windows systems extend with an inventory number\nA list with host name and inventory number of all Windows systems already exists in the company. After exporting to CSV format, the corresponding table of the Docusnap database is extended via CSV import. Now every already inventoried window system in Docusnap has an inventory number.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"introduction\"\u003eIntroduction\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe existing inventory technologies do not cover all objects or all desired information of objects that are required for a complete IT documentation. If the required data is available in CSV format as structured text, additional objects can be added via CSV import and existing objects can be extended with additional information.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe import can be done interactively once as well as automatically via the integrated scheduling.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"examples\"\u003eExamples\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIT assets, document fire extinguishers\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/data-import/","title":"Data Import"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying your DHCP servers, click the DHCP button. The DHCP Server step will be displayed after you have selected a company and entered your credentials.\nThere are two ways to identify DHCP servers:\nSearching for DHCP Servers Automatically When you click the Start Search button, Docusnap will attempt to identify the DHCP servers in your network. If DHCP servers could be determined, they will be listed in the list.\nEntering a DHCP Server Manually In addition to performing an automatic search for DHCP servers, you can specify a single DHCP server in Docusnap manually. Click the New button to specify the system to be scanned subsequently.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying your DHCP servers, click the \u003cem\u003eDHCP\u003c/em\u003e button. The \u003cem\u003eDHCP Server\u003c/em\u003e step will be displayed after you have selected a company and entered your credentials.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/dhcp-server/docusnap-inventory-dhcp-server.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory DHCP Server\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory DHCP Server\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThere are two ways to identify DHCP servers:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"searching-for-dhcp-servers-automatically\"\u003eSearching for DHCP Servers Automatically\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you click the \u003cem\u003eStart Search\u003c/em\u003e button, Docusnap will attempt to identify the DHCP servers in your network. If DHCP servers could be determined, they will be listed in the list.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/dhcp-server/","title":"DHCP Server"},{"content":"Using the TreeView element, you can assign elements from another table to the current element using a tree structure. It is easy to assign an element from the table to be connected to the current element by enabling its checkbox. The advantage of the TreeView element is that you can assign multiple elements. This is helpful if the assignment via a combo box, which only allows a single connection, is not sufficient. To create a TreeView control, specify the following properties:\nSpecific Properties of a TreeView Control MappingForeignKeyField Here, you can specify the foreign key field of the table to be used to define the relation to the table to be linked. MappingReferenceField Here, you can specify the field in the related table where the selected data from the reference table will be saved. MappingTable Here, you can specify the name of the table that relates both fields to be linked. ReferencePrimaryField Here, you can specify the primary key of the reference table. ReferenceRecursionField Here, you can specify an existing recursive field if the reference table is recursive. ReferenceSQL Here, you can specify the SQL statement used to query the required data from the reference table. ReferenceTextField Here, you can specify the text field to be used as a node name in the tree. Sorted This option sorts the entries alphabetically according to the first column. If this option is not active, views will use the sorting specified in the statement, and tables will display the data in the order in which it was inserted into the table. Example of use: Assume you want to use the TreeView control to assign each contact the domain to which it belongs.\nFirst, create a table that relates the contacts and the domains tables to each other. For this purpose, follow the instructions given in the Extending the Database Structure section.\nAfter creating the table xtContactDomain, which has the columns xDomainID, xContactID and xContactDomainID, the following table structure exists\nNow, all data can be specified on the Properties tab of the TreeView control.\nFor the ReferenceSQL property, enter a simple SELECT statement on the tDomains table. To obtain all domains of the current company, use the {AccountID} variable. The variable will be filled with the company AccountID for which you create this data entry screen.\nAfter you have entered all required data, you can save the element for later use.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eUsing the \u003cem\u003eTreeView\u003c/em\u003e element, you can assign elements from another table to the current element using a tree structure. It is easy to assign an element from the table to be connected to the current element by enabling its checkbox. The advantage of the \u003cem\u003eTreeView\u003c/em\u003e element is that you can assign multiple elements. This is helpful if the assignment via a \u003cem\u003ecombo box\u003c/em\u003e, which only allows a single connection, is not sufficient. To create a \u003cem\u003eTreeView\u003c/em\u003e control, specify the following properties:\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/data-entry-screens/controls/treeview/","title":"TreeView"},{"content":"In Docusnap every system type has its own wizard (Windows Systems, Exchange Server, SQL Server etc.). Windows Systems, Active Directory, SNMP Systems and Exchange Servers can also be inventoried together with the Network Scan wizard.\nIn the Wizard Configuration tab you can combine several modules for the inventory process in one wizard. Thus only one wizard is needed to inventory multiple modules. If you inventory your network by means of the Docusnap Server only one job has to be configured instead of creating a job for every desired module.\nOpen the Wizard Configuration tab via the Wizard Configuration button. Click the New button to create a new wizard. Enter a name and a designation in English and German. The Wizard Step list contains all modules of the inventory. Specify the module which should be included in the wizard. Click the Save button to save this wizard.\nOnce a wizard has been defined, it can be selected in the Inventory area of the main window of Docusnap. Click the All Wizards button to open the list of all wizards. Under the caption Custom Wizards, all configured wizards are displayed and can be added to favorites. This will display them in the ribbon.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn Docusnap every system type has its own wizard (Windows Systems, Exchange Server, SQL Server etc.). Windows Systems, Active Directory, SNMP Systems and Exchange Servers can also be inventoried together with the \u003cem\u003eNetwork Scan\u003c/em\u003e wizard.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eWizard Configuration\u003c/em\u003e tab you can combine several modules for the inventory process in one wizard. Thus only one wizard is needed to inventory multiple modules. If you inventory your network by means of the Docusnap Server only one job has to be configured instead of creating a job for every desired module.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/wizard-configuration/","title":"Wizard Configuration"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying your DNS servers, click the DNS button. The DNS Server step will be displayed after you have selected a company and entered your credentials.\nThere are two ways to identify DNS servers:\nSearching for DNS Servers Automatically When you click the Start Search button, Docusnap will attempt to identify the DNS servers in your network. If DNS servers have been determined, they will be listed in the list.\nThe automatic search will find all DNS servers of the selected domain, including DNS servers that are located in a subdomain. The Consider only DNS Servers of the Current Domain checkbox lists and inventories only DNS servers that are located in the domain selected in the Authentication step and not DNS servers from any subdomains.\nEntering DNS Servers Manually In addition to performing an automatic search for DNS servers, you can specify a single DNS server in Docusnap manually. Click the New button to specify the system to be scanned subsequently.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying your DNS servers, click the \u003cem\u003eDNS\u003c/em\u003e button. The \u003cem\u003eDNS Server\u003c/em\u003e step will be displayed after you have selected a company and entered your credentials.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/dns-server/docusnap-inventory-dns-server.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory DNS Server\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory DNS Server\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThere are two ways to identify DNS servers:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"searching-for-dns-servers-automatically\"\u003eSearching for DNS Servers Automatically\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen you click the \u003cem\u003eStart Search\u003c/em\u003e button, Docusnap will attempt to identify the DNS servers in your network. If DNS servers have been determined, they will be listed in the list.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/dns-server/","title":"DNS Server"},{"content":"Docusnap offers the possibility to switch from external programs to Docusnap and expand the Data Explorer to show a specific node.\nTo enable this, there is the DocusnapLink.exe. This program can either be called directly or started via the Docusnap protocol.\nWhen opening Docusnap, several parameters can be specified. The first parameter is the ONC with the specific ONC path. The ONC path determines the object to be expanded. If you enter an invalid or no ONC path at all, Docusnap will only be launched, but no node will be selected in the Explorer.\nIf Docusnap is not running while you start the DocusnapLink feature, the system looks for a valid installation and starts it, if one is found. If Docusnap is active, the Docusnap window will get the focus.\nONC (Object Numbering Convention) refers to a coded path which takes you to an actual node in the Docusnap tree views. It uniquely identifies each node in Docusnap. When data is exported using Docusnap Connect, the ONC for every single entry is exported as well. This ensures that the ONC value is available when a database exported through Docusnap Connect is used. Settings you define in the Options dialog will be stored in a configuration file located on the computer where Docusnap is running. If multiple employees want to use the same settings when working in Docusnap, it is possible to start the program using a shared configuration file.\nThis central configuration file should also be used if Docusnap is started by an external program in order to start Docusnap with the desired settings. In this case the parameter -UseConfig is specified with the path of the location of the central configuration file as an additional parameter. When the -SelectConfig parameter is used, a dialog appears before the Docusnap startup which allows you to select the path to the configuration file. Then, Docusnap will be started using the settings from the selected configuration file.\nIf the link to Docusnap does not work, the parameter -log can be specified to output error messages in the command line.\nDocusnap Protocol The Docusnap protocol can be called in Explorer or in Internet Explorer with docusnap: or docusnap: //. In the background, DocusnapLink is called, which then opens Docusnap. To open the Data Explorer from Docusnap to a specific node, the ONC is specified. This value is specified in the following format.\nDocusnap: [1,1] \\ [1,2] For the protocol the additional parameters can be specified. The parameters are separated by a \u0026amp;, the ? is separating the ONC and the optional parameters. If no ONC is specified, the ? must not be specified before the parameter.\ndocusnap:[ONC]?Parameter1 docusnap:[ONC]?Parameter1\u0026amp;Parameter2 docusnap:?Parameter1\u0026amp;Parameter2 docusnap:Parameter1\u0026amp;Parameter2 docusnap:[1,1]\\[1,2]?-SelectConfig docusnap:[1,1]\\[1,2]?-UseConfig\u0026amp;C:\\Docusnap\\Config.xml DocusnapLink The DocusnapLink.exe is used to start Docusnap with an external program. The Docusnap installer places this executable in the Bin folder. Parameters can be passed when starting this program: The first parameter is -ONC with the actual ONC path enclosed in quotation marks. Quotation marks are necessary if there is a space in the ONC so that the correct node can be opened.\nThe -UseConfig and -SelectConfig parameters are used to start Docusnap with the desired settings if a central configuration file is used. In this case -UseConfig is specified with the path of the location of the central configuration file in quotation marks as an additional parameter. For example -UseConfig \u0026ldquo;\\sfile01\\ita\\Docusnap\\Configuration.xml\u0026rdquo;. The -SelectConfig parameter is specified to select a configuration at startup.\nIf the link to Docusnap does not work, the parameter -log can be specified to output error messages in the command line.\nThe parameters for the path, the configuration and the logging can be specified in any order.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap offers the possibility to switch from external programs to Docusnap and expand the Data Explorer to show a specific node.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo enable this, there is the DocusnapLink.exe. This program can either be called directly or started via the Docusnap protocol.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen opening Docusnap, several parameters can be specified. The first parameter is the ONC with the specific ONC path. The ONC path determines the object to be expanded. If you enter an invalid or no ONC path at all, Docusnap will only be launched, but no node will be selected in the Explorer.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/docusnap-and-external-programs/","title":"Docusnap and external Programs"},{"content":"For some modules such as Reporting, Documentation or IT Concepts, you need to select the design to be used. In the Layout (CI) tab, you can select a common design to be applied to all modules. In addition, you can change the settings for reports and IT concepts. All changes made to settings are only valid on the current computer.\nAdditionally it is possible to define the design specifically for one company. These settings will be saved in the database and will always be available when Docusnap is connected to this database.\nClick the Layout (CI) button in the Customizing area to open the dialog.\nDesign On the Designs page, you can select one of several predefined designs. The design you select here will be applied to reports and datasheets.\nAdditionally, you can select a customized image (company logo) in this dialog. This image will be shown in the header of the various documents and reports.\nOn the one hand you can select the design in general and on the other hand you can choose a design specifically for one company. In the combobox you can choose General or the name of the company for which the design should be saved.\nAdditionally, user-defined designs can be created.\nConfirm the settings by clicking the Save button. If you switch to another company after modifying a setting without saving, the settings for the previously selected company will be reset. By clicking the Close button you close the dialog.\nDocuments The report title is shown in the header. In addition, the header may include a logo. Page numbers will be inserted in the footer. The cover page will include the report title, a description (if specified), the report creation date, the author and the page count. By clicking the button, you can open the report in the Designer to customize it. If the template is edited, the MasterReport.mrt file is copied to the report repository, if no change is made, the report from the program directory is used. The files for header, footer and cover are available in German (DE_MasterReport.mrt) and in English (EN_MasterReport.mrt).\nUsing the Show Cover, Show Header and Show Footer checkboxes, you can specify whether those report elements will be included in the report.\nCompany Design If a company is selected in the combobox, you can select one of the following Status settings: Master Settings, Do not Use or Individual Settings.\nMaster Settings If you select the Master Settings option, the system uses the default specified for the general use. If you only want to change the color of the header, footer or cover page for the selected company, it is sufficient to customize the design from the Design page.\nDo not Use If you select the Do not Use setting, the header, footer and cover page will not be used in the reports.\nIndividual Settings If you select the Individual Settings option, you can create a company-specific report with a customized header, footer and cover page. Click the button to open the current report template and adjust it for the selected company. The adjustments on the company level are stored in the database.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eFor some modules such as Reporting, Documentation or IT Concepts, you need to select the design to be used. In the \u003cem\u003eLayout (CI)\u003c/em\u003e tab, you can select a common design to be applied to all modules. In addition, you can change the settings for reports and IT concepts. All changes made to settings are only valid on the current computer.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdditionally it is possible to define the design specifically for one company. These settings will be saved in the database and will always be available when Docusnap is connected to this database.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/layout-ci/","title":"Layout CI"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying your Backup Exec Server, click the Backup Exec button. The Backup Infrastructure step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps).\nTo inventory the Backup Exec infrastructure the name of the SQL server where the data of the Backup Exec server is located, has to be entered in the SQL Server field. By default the name of the database is BEDB. If the database is named differently, then the name has to be entered into the Database field.\nIf global credentials should not be used for the inventory, then alternative credentials can be entered. For this purpose, you need to enable the SQL Server Authentication checkbox. This allows you to enter the user and password information.\nAfter adding the desired systems, you can use the checkbox next to each database to specify whether it is to be included in the inventory scan or not. The Next button will only be enabled once you have specified a Backup Exec database. Then, you can continue with the inventory process.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying your \u003cem\u003eBackup Exec Server\u003c/em\u003e, click the \u003cem\u003eBackup Exec\u003c/em\u003e button. The \u003cem\u003eBackup Infrastructure\u003c/em\u003e step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/backup-exec/docusnap-inventory-backup-exec.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Backup Exec\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Backup Exec\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo inventory the \u003cem\u003eBackup Exec\u003c/em\u003e infrastructure the name of the SQL server where the data of the \u003cem\u003eBackup Exec\u003c/em\u003e server is located, has to be entered in the \u003cem\u003eSQL Server\u003c/em\u003e field. By default the name of the database is BEDB. If the database is named differently, then the name has to be entered into the \u003cem\u003eDatabase\u003c/em\u003e field.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/backup-exec/","title":"Backup Exec"},{"content":"Docusnap comes with different predefined IT asset types. They can be extended and added to, as required, by creating additional types or classes with minimum effort. Docusnap generates the required data entry screens automatically.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap comes with different predefined IT asset types. They can be extended and added to, as required, by creating additional types or classes with minimum effort. Docusnap generates the required data entry screens automatically.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/it-assets/","title":"IT Assets"},{"content":"In the next sections, you will learn about the settings available in Docusnap.\nOptions In the Docusnap Options dialog, you can specify settings that relate to the entire Docusnap application.\nPermissions Docusnap features an integrated user management. The User Management feature enables you to grant users access to the Docusnap controls and features and allows them to use extensions.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn the next sections, you will learn about the settings available in Docusnap.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"options\"\u003eOptions\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn the Docusnap \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/settings/options/\" title=\"Options\"\u003eOptions\u003c/a\u003e dialog, you can specify settings that relate to the entire Docusnap application.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"permissions\"\u003ePermissions\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDocusnap features an integrated \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/settings/permissions/\" title=\"user management\"\u003euser management\u003c/a\u003e. The User Management feature enables you to grant users access to the Docusnap controls and features and allows them to use extensions.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/settings/","title":"Settings"},{"content":"The Data Organization and Analysis section covers Docusnap features that enable you to analyze and organize the collected data.\nComparing Data Using the Compare Data function, you can compare the data resulting from two scans (snapshots) to find the differences.\nManaging Snapshots Using the Manage Snapshots feature, you can delete individual snapshots or flag them as undeletable.\nSystem Groups Using the Docusnap System Groups feature, you can group systems logically and create network maps for partial networks based on particular system groups.\nADDS Synchronization Using the Active Directory Synchronization feature, you can make sure that the Docusnap database does not contain any Windows systems that no longer exist in the Active Directory.\nDatabase Import Using the Database Import feature, you can import Docusnap databases into other Docusnap databases.\nDatabase Export Using the Database Export feature, you can export the content of the current Docusnap database into another Docusnap database.\nMoving Systems Using the Docusnap Move feature, you can move systems from one domain to another.\nMerging Systems In Docusnap, you can merge the data resulting from the inventory of different systems into one single system.\nMaintain data inventory The Maintain Data Inventory dialog, systems, NTFS inventories and IT assets can be deleted from the database at the same time.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe Data Organization and Analysis section covers Docusnap features that enable you to analyze and organize the collected data.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"comparing-data\"\u003eComparing Data\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing the Compare Data function, you can compare the data resulting from two scans (snapshots) to find the differences.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"managing-snapshots\"\u003eManaging Snapshots\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing the Manage Snapshots feature, you can delete individual snapshots or flag them as undeletable.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"system-groups\"\u003eSystem Groups\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing the Docusnap System Groups feature, you can group systems logically and create network maps for partial networks based on particular system groups.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/data-organization-and-analysis/","title":"Data Organization and Analysis"},{"content":"DFS Inventory Requirements Namespaces and DFS replication are independent services at Microsoft that can be installed independently of each other. Therefore, the inventory user must have the following permissions for a complete DFS inventory:\nBe a member of the local administrators group. Be a member of the domain that contains the namespaces to be inventoried. Observe the user account control (UAC) during execution (if the DSI result file cannot be imported and is only 1 KB in size, the authorizations were not sufficient). DFS Migration DFS inventories carried out with older Docusnap versions are automatically moved to the DFS Legacy node. New DFS inventories can be found in the DFS node. Existing scheduled DFS jobs that are executed with Docusnap 13 will store their results in the new DFS node.\nDFS Inventory via Wizard To start the wizard for inventorying Distributed File Systems, click the DFS button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps) the DFS step is displayed.\nSearching for DFS Servers Automatically When you click the Start Search button, Docusnap will attempt to identify the DFS servers in your network. If DFS servers have been determined, they will be listed in the list.\nEntering DFS Servers Manually In addition to performing an automatic search for DFS servers, you can specify a single DFS server in Docusnap manually. Click the New button to specify the system to be scanned subsequently.\nIn contrast to previous DFS modules, at least one DFS server must now be entered in the DFS Server input field in order to record all domain-integrated namespaces of this domain. Entering the name of the domain itself is not (currently) supported. To enter a stand-alone DFS namespace, the corresponding DFS server must be entered, as the DFS configuration is located exclusively on this system. To obtain complete DFS server replication information, these servers must also be entered in the wizard.\nAfter adding the desired systems to the table, you can use the checkbox next to each system to specify whether it is to be included in the inventory scan or not.\nKnown Limitations via Wizard To avoid authentication problems (double-hop), LDAP is used for remote inventory. This achieves a good result, but some details are missing. If this data is required, inventorying on the DFS system via \u0026ldquo;Discovery-DFS.exe\u0026rdquo; is recommended.\nNamespace: Administrative Permissions field - displays all administrators who are allowed to administer the namespace Replication: State of replication group, memberships, connections, replicated folders Replication: Cross-File RDC Status for connections Replication: Publication status for replicated folders Structure and Organization of the DFS Inventory The top level contains the registered domain and DFS servers that host a stand-alone namespace. Below this are inventoried DFS servers, namespaces and replication groups or DFS servers and namespaces for stand-alone namespaces.\nThe DFS configuration of each inventoried DFS server is located below the DFS server node. All domain-integrated namespaces with all DFS folder targets and the respective server-specific release authorizations are listed below Namespace.\nThe Replication node presents the inventoried replication groups with the respective memberships, the configured replication topology and a list of the folders to be replicated. ADDS itself uses this service for the replication of domain controllers - this replication is hidden.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"dfs-inventory-requirements\"\u003eDFS Inventory Requirements\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNamespaces and DFS replication are independent services at Microsoft that can be installed independently of each other. Therefore, the inventory user must have the following permissions for a complete DFS inventory:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBe a member of the local administrators group.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBe a member of the domain that contains the namespaces to be inventoried.\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eObserve the user account control (UAC) during execution (if the DSI result file cannot be imported and is only 1 KB in size, the authorizations were not sufficient).\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"dfs-migration\"\u003eDFS Migration\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDFS inventories carried out with older Docusnap versions are automatically moved to the \u003cem\u003eDFS Legacy\u003c/em\u003e node. New DFS inventories can be found in the \u003cem\u003eDFS\u003c/em\u003e node. Existing scheduled DFS jobs that are executed with Docusnap 13 will store their results in the new \u003cem\u003eDFS\u003c/em\u003e node.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/dfs/","title":"DFS"},{"content":"In the Diagrams ribbon tabs for the protocols and connection types can be opened.\nProtocols For each connector, you can select the protocol to be used for the corresponding connection from the Properties entry screen. Docusnap provides a number of predefined protocols. In the Protocol tab you can create additional protocols.\nConnector Types Every connection between two components is assigned to a connector type. If required, you can add more connector types in the Connector Types dialog. For every new type the type of arrow, the dash style, line weight and color can be chosen.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn the \u003cem\u003eDiagrams\u003c/em\u003e ribbon tabs for the protocols and connection types can be opened.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"protocols\"\u003eProtocols\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor each connector, you can select the protocol to be used for the corresponding connection from the Properties entry screen. Docusnap provides a number of predefined protocols. In the Protocol tab you can create additional protocols.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/configuration-manual/management/diagrams/docusnap-management-relations-protocols.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Management Relations Protocols\" title=\"Docusnap Management Relations Protocols\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"connector-types\"\u003eConnector Types\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEvery connection between two components is assigned to a connector type. If required, you can add more connector types in the \u003cem\u003eConnector Types\u003c/em\u003e dialog. For every new type the type of arrow, the dash style, line weight and color can be chosen.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/diagrams/","title":"Diagrams"},{"content":"With the release of Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication Version 12, an important change has taken place: Instead of a Microsoft SQL Express database, PostgreSQL is now used as the database backend by default. The previous method of our Veeam Inventory, which was based on direct SQL queries against a Microsoft SQL database, is no longer applicable with the introduction of PostgreSQL.\nDue to this change and in accordance with the manufacturer\u0026rsquo;s recommendation, the Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication PowerShell module was used exclusively for the new development. This approach considerably simplifies the expansion and customization of the functional scope. In addition, it allows you to optionally inventory a Veeam server directly with Discovery-VeeamBR.exe, which provides greater flexibility. One disadvantage, however, is the longer duration of the inventory compared to the direct SQL query.\nVeeam B\u0026amp;R Inventory Requirements Local administration rights on Veeam system required Member of \u0026ldquo;Veeam Backup Administrators\u0026rdquo; role required Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication from Version 11 To start the wizard for inventorying Veeam servers, click the Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps) the B\u0026amp;R servers to be included are defined. In addition to integrated authentication, server authentication is also supported.\nThe option Limit Backup History restricts the recording of the backup history to the last 42 days by default.\nYou can use the checkbox to specify whether it is to be included in the inventory scan or not. The Next button will only be enabled once you have specified a Veeam Server. Then, you can continue with the inventory process.\nOrganization and Structure of Veeam B\u0026amp;R As far as possible, the layout and structure are based on the application itself to make navigation easier for the user.\nVeeam B\u0026amp;R - Reports Here you will find reports that summarize the Veeam data collected for this server.\nVeeam B\u0026amp;R - B\u0026amp;R Server Configuration This area contains information on application configuration, licenses and administration\nVeeam B\u0026amp;R - Backup Topology Everything that has to do with Veeam infrastructure can be found in this section. Like in the application, there is a further subdivision into Backup Infrastructure and Tape Infrastructure.\nVeeam B\u0026amp;R - Inventory The data displayed here refers to the collection and organization of information about various resources in an IT environment.\nVeeam B\u0026amp;R - Backup \u0026amp; Replication All currently recorded information on data backups, replications and restores is summarized here.\nVeeam B\u0026amp;R - Veeam Overview With this node, Docusnap provides a central entry point for data interpretations of Veeam data in flat and filterable lists.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eWith the release of Veeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication Version 12, an important change has taken place: Instead of a Microsoft SQL Express database, PostgreSQL is now used as the database backend by default. The previous method of our Veeam Inventory, which was based on direct SQL queries against a Microsoft SQL database, is no longer applicable with the introduction of PostgreSQL.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDue to this change and in accordance with the manufacturer\u0026rsquo;s recommendation, the \u003cem\u003eVeeam Backup \u0026amp; Replication\u003c/em\u003e PowerShell module was used exclusively for the new development. This approach considerably simplifies the expansion and customization of the functional scope. In addition, it allows you to optionally inventory a Veeam server directly with \u003cem\u003eDiscovery-VeeamBR.exe\u003c/em\u003e, which provides greater flexibility. One disadvantage, however, is the longer duration of the inventory compared to the direct SQL query.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/veeambr/","title":"Veeam Backup \u0026 Replication"},{"content":"Management Tools Using the Management Tools feature, you can embed external programs into Docusnap or start them from there.\nNotifications Using the Notifications feature, Docusnap enables you to automatically send e-mail messages to users. These notifications are based on database queries. This way, it is possible to send warnings, for example, in case a contract is expiring.\nReport Scheduling Using the automated reporting feature in Docusnap, you can schedule the automatic creation of reports.\nOptions Configuration File A central configuration file can be selected for shared use of Docusnap.\n","excerpt":"\u003ch2 id=\"management-tools\"\u003eManagement Tools\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing the Management Tools feature, you can embed external programs into Docusnap or start them from there.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"notifications\"\u003eNotifications\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing the Notifications feature, Docusnap enables you to automatically send e-mail messages to users. These notifications are based on database queries. This way, it is possible to send warnings, for example, in case a contract is expiring.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"report-scheduling\"\u003eReport Scheduling\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUsing the automated reporting feature in Docusnap, you can schedule the automatic creation of reports.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/advanced-topics/","title":"Advanced Topics"},{"content":"The IT Correlations are configured in Docusnap Management in the IT Correlations ribbon. Click the Correlations button to open the tabs to define IT Correlations.\nYou can create new IT Correlations or alter existing ones.\nClick the New button to create a new IT Correlation. Every IT Correlation has a name and a description in German and English. Every IT Correlation can be defined by what kind of relationship it is. For different types of relationships, different line formats and colors are used.\nEvery IT Correlation has a start object (Start Type) and a result object (Result Type). These two objects are compared according to the defined filter.\nFilter In the filter, the IT Correlation is defined. In the Field column, all the tables and columns of the selected starting object and the hierarchical parent and child objects are displayed. In the Value column, all the tables and columns of the selected result object, as well as the hierarchical parent and child objects, are available for selection.\nThe selected columns in the Field column are used for the comparison, e.g. column ObjectPath of the table tADSObject. In the Value column, the column is chosen which identifies the result object to be compared with, for example, the column ObjectIdentity of the table vExchangeMailboxRec. In this example for each Active Directory user account the corresponding Exchange mailboxes are displayed.\nUse the Operator column to define the desired relation between startup type and result type.\nThe comparison of the data does not take domains and companies into consideration. If the filter compares only the name and not the corresponding ID, then objects from other companies or domains could be accidently displayed as IT Correlations. In this case you should include a filter, which compares the DomainID or the AccountID of the relevant tables.\nThe filter conditions can be grouped and linked with either And or Or.\nIf you want to display workstations and servers as IT correlations for an object two IT Correlations have to be defined. One relation for workstations and one for servers.\nThe IT dependencies are defined in one direction, from the start to the result object. To display the start object at the result object, an additional IT Correlation must be defined that shows this relation.\nConditional Message Use conditional messages to define how many result objects should be found. When the condition is true, then the icon and the defined message will be displayed in the diagram of the IT Correlation.\nCheck the checkbox Activate Message to create a message for the IT Correlation. You can define if the number of result objects should be greater than, less than or equal to the specified value to display the message. Select in the field Message Type which icon (Info, Warning, Error) should be displayed with the message. For every message you can enter an English or German text.\nGroup Groups are used to group multiple IT Correlations. Thereby the diagram in the Analysis tab will be less crowded. IT Correlations which have the same start object can be grouped together.\nExport / Import Definitions Click the Export Definition button to export the IT Correlations to a file. Firstly, this is to secure the user-defined IT Correlations. Secondly, they can be imported into another Docusnap installation later. This is especially interesting when different IT networks and thus different Docusnap installations are in use. Click the Import Definition button to import the IT Correlations from a file. In this way, once defined IT Correlations can easily be reused elsewhere.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe IT Correlations are configured in Docusnap Management in the \u003cem\u003eIT Correlations\u003c/em\u003e ribbon. Click the \u003cem\u003eCorrelations\u003c/em\u003e button to open the tabs to define IT Correlations.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can create new IT Correlations or alter existing ones.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button to create a new IT Correlation. Every IT Correlation has a name and a description in German and English. Every IT Correlation can be defined by what kind of relationship it is. For different types of relationships, different line formats and colors are used.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/it-correlations/","title":"IT Correlations"},{"content":"This module corresponds to the Veeam inventory in Docusnap 12 and thus executes SQL queries on Microsoft Veeam databases. The complete module is located in Veeam Legacy below Application Server. The Veeam Legacy reports at domain level can be found in the Backup Veeam Legacy node. This module will no longer be developed further with Docusnap 13.\nTo start the wizard for inventorying Veeam servers, click the Veeam Legacy button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps) the Veeam step is displayed.\nTo inventory the Veeam infrastructure the name of the SQL server where the data of the Veeam server is located, has to be entered in the SQL Server field. By default the name of the database is VeeamBackup. If the database is named differently, then the name has to be entered into the Database field.\nIf global credentials should not be used for the inventory, then alternative credentials can be entered. For this purpose, you need to enable the SQL Server Authentication checkbox. This allows you to enter the user and password information.\nUse the field Days Back to specify for how many days the job history should be inventoried.\nAfter adding the desired systems to the Systems overview, you can use the checkbox next to each database to specify whether it is to be included in the inventory scan or not. The Next button will only be enabled once you have specified a Veeam database. Then, you can continue with the inventory process.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThis module corresponds to the Veeam inventory in Docusnap 12 and thus executes SQL queries on Microsoft Veeam databases. The complete module is located in \u003cem\u003eVeeam Legacy\u003c/em\u003e below \u003cem\u003eApplication Server\u003c/em\u003e. The Veeam Legacy reports at domain level can be found in the \u003cem\u003eBackup Veeam Legacy\u003c/em\u003e node. This module will no longer be developed further with Docusnap 13.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying \u003cem\u003eVeeam servers\u003c/em\u003e, click the \u003cem\u003eVeeam Legacy\u003c/em\u003e button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e) the \u003cem\u003eVeeam\u003c/em\u003e step is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/veeam/","title":"Veeam Legacy"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying Dell EMC Isilon systems, click the Dell EMC Isilon button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps) the Dell EMC Isilon step is displayed.\nTo inventory the desired Dell EMC Isilon system, click the New button and specify the respective system. The Host Name / IP Address text box accepts the name or the IP address of the Dell EMC Isilon system. By default, port 8080 is used, this can be changed. Additionally, the user name and password of a user must be specify, who has access to the system. It can also be defined that untrusted SSL certificates are accepted.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying \u003cem\u003eDell EMC Isilon\u003c/em\u003e systems, click the \u003cem\u003eDell EMC Isilon\u003c/em\u003e button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e) the \u003cem\u003eDell EMC Isilon\u003c/em\u003e step is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/dell-emc-isilon/docusnap-inventory-emc.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory EMC\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory EMC\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo inventory the desired \u003cem\u003eDell EMC Isilon\u003c/em\u003e system, click the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button and specify the respective system. The \u003cem\u003eHost Name / IP Address\u003c/em\u003e text box accepts the name or the IP address of the Dell EMC Isilon system. By default, port 8080 is used, this can be changed. Additionally, the user name and password of a user must be specify, who has access to the system. It can also be defined that untrusted SSL certificates are accepted.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/dell-emc-isilon/","title":"Dell EMC Isilon"},{"content":"For the License Management module types can be changed or added.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eFor the License Management module types can be changed or added.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/license-management/","title":"License Management"},{"content":"In the title bar via the buttons and includes all features provided by the Docusnap Support Team to assist you with problems or questions.\nDocusnap Support This area provides features for generating log files and displaying general information about Docusnap. A Live Support feature is also available.\nUpdate To download an updated Docusnap version via an Internet connection, simply click the Update button .\nDocusnap Help This area provides access the manuals and help systems both for the use of Docusnap and the administration. In addition, more how-to documents on the Docusnap website can be used for help. https://www.docusnap.com/en/support/knowledge-base/\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eIn the title bar via the buttons \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/support-and-help/docusnap-title-bar-support.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Support\" title=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Support\"\u003e and \u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/support-and-help/docusnap-title-bar-help.png\" alt=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Help\" title=\"Docusnap-Title-Bar-Help\"\u003e  includes all features provided by the Docusnap Support Team to assist you with problems or questions.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/support-and-help/docusnap-menu-help-support.png\" alt=\"Docusnap menu help support\" title=\"Docusnap menu help support\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"docusnap-support\"\u003eDocusnap Support\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis area provides features for generating log files and displaying general information about Docusnap. A Live Support feature is also available.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"update\"\u003eUpdate\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTo download an updated Docusnap version via an Internet connection, simply click the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/support-and-help/updates/\" title=\"*Update* button \"\u003e\u003cem\u003eUpdate\u003c/em\u003e button \u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/support-and-help/","title":"Support \u0026 Help"},{"content":"Data from Docusnap can be exported and made available for processing in other applications.\nYou can either export the data to an SQL or MySQL database or save it as an XML, CSV or Excel file.\nIn order to improve the creation of packages, Connect V2 was developed. To use Connect V2, at least SQL Server 2012 or higher is required. Connect packages of Connect V2 are created in Docusnap via the Connect area. For compatibility reasons, Docusnap still contains the Connect V1 packages, which can only be created, edited and planned in Docusnap Management.\nIf packages are created in the Connect (Legacy) area, they are always created in Connect V1.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eData from Docusnap can be exported and made available for processing in other applications.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYou can either export the data to an SQL or MySQL database or save it as an XML, CSV or Excel file.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn order to improve the creation of packages, Connect V2 was developed. To use Connect V2, at least SQL Server 2012 or higher is required. Connect packages of Connect V2 are created in Docusnap via the \u003cem\u003eConnect\u003c/em\u003e area. For compatibility reasons, Docusnap still contains the Connect V1 packages, which can only be created, edited and planned in Docusnap Management.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/configuration-manual/management/docusnap-connect/","title":"Docusnap Connect"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying Igel systems, click the Igel button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps) the Igel step is displayed.\nIn order for the inventoried thin clients to be considered in the network and routing map, a subnet mask must be specified. The subnet mask can not be determined by inventory, so it must be entered manually in the Define Subnet Mask field.\nTo inventory the Igel systems the name of the SQL server where the data of the thin clients is located, has to be entered in the SQL Server field. Only thin clients can be inventoried, if the database is a MS SQL database. The name of the database has to be entered into the Database field.\nIf global credentials should not be used for the inventory, then alternative credentials can be entered. For this purpose, you need to enable the SQL Server Authentication checkbox. This allows you to enter the user and password information.\nAfter adding the desired systems, you can use the checkbox next to each database to specify whether it is to be included in the inventory scan or not. The Next button will only be enabled once you have specified a Igel database. Then, you can continue with the inventory process.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying \u003cem\u003eIgel\u003c/em\u003e systems, click the \u003cem\u003eIgel\u003c/em\u003e button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e) the \u003cem\u003eIgel\u003c/em\u003e step is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/igel/docusnap-inventory-igel.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory Igel\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory Igel\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn order for the inventoried thin clients to be considered in the network and routing map, a subnet mask must be specified. The subnet mask can not be determined by inventory, so it must be entered manually in the \u003cem\u003eDefine Subnet Mask\u003c/em\u003e field.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/igel/","title":"Igel"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying HP-UX servers, click the HP-UX button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps) the HP-UX step is displayed.\nClick the New button to enter the name or IP address of the HP-UX server. For inventory, a user with a password must be specified that has access to the HP-UX server. The Save button saves the server and checks the connection. Once an HP-UX server has been saved, the Next button is activated and the inventory process can be started.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying \u003cem\u003eHP-UX\u003c/em\u003e servers, click the \u003cem\u003eHP-UX\u003c/em\u003e button. After you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e) the \u003cem\u003eHP-UX\u003c/em\u003e step is displayed.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cimg src=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/hp-ux/docusnap-inventory-hp-ux.png\" alt=\"Docusnap Inventory HP UX\" title=\"Docusnap Inventory HP UX\"\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eClick the \u003cem\u003eNew\u003c/em\u003e button to enter the name or IP address of the HP-UX server. For inventory, a user with a password must be specified that has access to the HP-UX server. The \u003cem\u003eSave\u003c/em\u003e button saves the server and checks the connection. Once an \u003cem\u003eHP-UX\u003c/em\u003e server has been saved, the \u003cem\u003eNext\u003c/em\u003e button is activated and the inventory process can be started.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/network-inventory/hp-ux/","title":"HP-UX"},{"content":"The Office 365 - Legacy inventory collects data (users, groups and licenses) regarding Office 365.\nThis information is also included in the [Microsoft 365](/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/microsoft-365/\u0026ldquo;Microsoft 365\u0026rdquo;) inventory.\nFor downward compatibility with older Docusnap versions, the Office 365 - Legacy inventory can still be used to inventory Office 365 and the data is located in the Infrastructure section.\nAfter selecting a company and choosing a domain (see: basic steps) an Azure App has to be selected in the Office 365 step.\nIf no Azure App has been created yet, or another one is needed, the Manage Azure App dialog can be opened via the Register New App button.\nBy clicking on the Test Connection button, it is checked whether the selected Azure App exists and has the required permissions. Then the Next button is activated and the inventory can be started.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cem\u003eOffice 365 - Legacy\u003c/em\u003e inventory collects data (users, groups and licenses) regarding Office 365.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis information is also included in the [Microsoft 365](/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/microsoft-365/\u0026ldquo;Microsoft 365\u0026rdquo;) inventory.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor downward compatibility with older Docusnap versions, the \u003cem\u003eOffice 365 - Legacy\u003c/em\u003e inventory can still be used to inventory Office 365 and the data is located in the \u003cem\u003eInfrastructure\u003c/em\u003e section.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAfter selecting a company and choosing a domain (\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"basic-steps\"\u003esee: basic steps\u003c/a\u003e) an Azure App has to be selected in the \u003cem\u003eOffice 365\u003c/em\u003e step.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/office-365/","title":"Office 365 Legacy"},{"content":"To start the wizard for inventorying the Exchange Online Information, click the Exchange Online button. The Exchange Online step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: Basic Steps).\nThe Exchange Online Inventory gives an overview of the following information:\nMailboxes including permissions and size Public folders including permissions and size Distribution groups and e-mail contacts With the exception of permissions, this information is also included in the [Microsoft 365](/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/microsoft-365/\u0026ldquo;Microsoft 365\u0026rdquo;) inventory.\nFor downward compatibility with older Docusnap versions, the Exchange Online inventory data is located in the Infrastructure section.\nAn Azure App must be selected for the inventory. If no Azure App has been created yet, or another one is needed, the Register New App, button can be used to open the Manage Azure App dialog to create the App.\nDuring the inventory, the option Inventory permissions on mailbox, mailbox folders \u0026amp; public folders can be used to select whether the permissions should be included in the inventory.\nBy clicking on the Test Connection button, it is checked whether the selected Azure App exists and has the required permissions. Then the Next button is activated and the inventory can be started.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eTo start the wizard for inventorying the \u003cem\u003eExchange Online\u003c/em\u003e Information, click the \u003cem\u003eExchange Online\u003c/em\u003e button. The \u003cem\u003eExchange Online\u003c/em\u003e step will be displayed after you have selected a company and a domain (see: \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"Basic Steps\"\u003eBasic Steps\u003c/a\u003e).\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Exchange Online Inventory gives an overview of the following information:\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMailboxes including permissions and size\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePublic folders including permissions and size\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDistribution groups and e-mail contacts\u003c/li\u003e\n\u003c/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith the exception of permissions, this information is also included in the [Microsoft 365](/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/microsoft-365/\u0026ldquo;Microsoft 365\u0026rdquo;) inventory.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/exchange-online/","title":"Exchange Online"},{"content":"After selecting a company and a tenant domain (see: basic steps) the step Microsoft 365 is displayed. In this step, after selecting an Azure App, the Microsoft 365 step is used to specify which Microsoft 365 services should be included in the inventory. The identity provider for Microsoft 365 Azure Active Directory is always required and therefore cannot be unchecked.\nIf no Azure App has been created yet, or another one is needed, the Manage Azure App dialog can be opened via the Register New App button.\nClicking the Test Connection button checks whether the selected Azure App is available and has the required permissions. The Next button is then activated and the inventory can be started.\nUnlike all other inventoried data, Microsoft 365 data retrieved via Microsoft’s in-house report interface is not up to date on a daily basis. To make it easier for users to identify this asynchronous data, all information retrieved through this channel is now marked with a uniform icon under the Statistics menu item to clearly highlight this specific data source.\nFor the MFA status of Entra ID users, a higher Azure license is required. MFA (multi-factor authentication) status information is only available with an Azure P1 (Premium) license or higher. The Azure Free or Office365 variants do not offer this functionality.\n","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eAfter selecting a company and a tenant domain (\u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/inventory-wizard/basic-steps/\" title=\"basic steps\"\u003esee: basic steps\u003c/a\u003e) the step \u003cem\u003eMicrosoft 365\u003c/em\u003e is displayed. In this step, after selecting an Azure App, the \u003cem\u003eMicrosoft 365\u003c/em\u003e step is used to specify which Microsoft 365 services should be included in the inventory. The identity provider for Microsoft 365 Azure Active Directory is always required and therefore cannot be unchecked.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf no Azure App has been created yet, or another one is needed, the \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/azure-apps/azure-apps-manage/\" title=\"Manage Azure App\"\u003eManage Azure App\u003c/a\u003e dialog can be opened via the \u003cem\u003eRegister New App\u003c/em\u003e button.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/microsoft-365/","title":"Microsoft 365"},{"content":"Docusnap provides the ability to inventory core areas of the AWS infrastructure.\nIn order to inventory information of the AWS infrastructure with Docusnap, some steps are required.\nAWS Environment This chapter describes what needs to be prepared in the AWS Identity and Access Management to be able to perform an inventory with Docusnap.\nAWS Inventory This chapter describes the execution of the inventory.\nThe core areas that can be scanned are:\nElastic Compute Cloud (EC2) Identity and Access Management (IAM) Simple Storage Service (S3) Relational Database Services (RDS) Batch orders (batch) Lambda SQS ","excerpt":"\u003cp\u003eDocusnap provides the ability to inventory core areas of the AWS infrastructure.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIn order to inventory information of the AWS infrastructure with Docusnap, some steps are required.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"aws-environment\"\u003eAWS Environment\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis chapter describes what needs to be prepared in the \u003cem\u003eAWS Identity and Access Management\u003c/em\u003e to be able to perform an inventory with Docusnap.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003ch2 id=\"aws-inventory\"\u003eAWS Inventory\u003c/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis chapter describes the execution of the inventory.\u003c/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe core areas that can be scanned are:\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/user-manual/inventory/cloud-inventory/amazon-web-services/","title":"Amazon Web Services"},{"content":"","excerpt":"","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/categories/","title":"Categories"},{"content":" Docusnap Documentation Technical Documentation for Docusnap 13\nThe documentation for Docusnap 13 has been archived and is no longer maintained. Content and links may be outdated. For up-to-date information, please refer to the documentation for the latest version of Docusnap.\nUser Manual Information about all Docusnap features, especially about inventory, installation and documentation.\nUser Manual Configuration Manual Further information on customizing and on the integrated report designer for customizing Docusnap.\nNews Release Notes New features, functionality improvements and bug fixes of the latest Docusnap versions.\nRelease Notes Community Exchange ideas with our experts and other Docusnap users.\nDocusnap365 Community Ideas Here you can submit your suggestions, feature requests and ideas about Docusnap.\nIdeas Portal ","excerpt":"\u003csection id=\"td-cover-block-0\" class=\"row td-cover-block js-td-cover td-overlay td-overlay indexwrp\"\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"container td-overlay__inner\"\u003e\n    \u003cdiv class=\"row\"\u003e\n      \u003cdiv class=\"col-12\"\u003e\n        \u003cdiv class=\"text-center\"\u003e\n          \u003ch1 class=\"mt-0 mt-md-5\" style=\"font-size: 3.5rem;\"\u003eDocusnap Documentation\u003c/h1\u003e\n          \u003cp class=\"lead\"\u003eTechnical Documentation for Docusnap 13\u003c/p\u003e\n          \u003cdiv class=\"versionBoxIndex\"\u003e\n            \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe documentation for Docusnap 13 has been archived and is no longer maintained. Content and links may be outdated. For up-to-date information, please refer to the documentation for the \u003ca href=\"https://docs.docusnap.com/en/\" target=\"_blank\"\u003elatest version of Docusnap\u003c/a\u003e.\u003c/strong\u003e\u003c/p\u003e\n          \u003c/div\u003e\n        \u003c/div\u003e\n      \u003c/div\u003e\n    \u003c/div\u003e\n  \u003c/div\u003e\n\u003c/section\u003e\n\n\u003csection class=\"feature-index\"\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"feature-el\" onClick=\"window.location.href='/en/user-manual/';\"\u003e\n    \u003ci class=\"fas fa-book\"\u003e\u003c/i\u003e\n    \u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eUser Manual\u003c/h2\u003e\n    \u003cp\u003eInformation about all Docusnap features, especially about inventory, installation and documentation.\u003c/p\u003e\n    \u003ca href=\"/en/user-manual/\"\u003eUser Manual\u003c/a\u003e\n  \u003c/div\u003e\n  \u003cdiv class=\"feature-el\" onClick=\"window.location.href='/en/configuration-manual/';\"\u003e\n    \u003ci class=\"fas fa-cogs\"\u003e\u003c/i\u003e\n    \u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eConfiguration Manual\u003c/h2\u003e\n    \u003cp\u003eFurther information on customizing and on the integrated report designer for customizing Docusnap.\u003c/p\u003e","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/","title":"Docusnap Docs"},{"content":"","excerpt":"","href":"https://v13-docs.docusnap.com/en/tags/","title":"Tags"}]